SAM G53G / SAM G53N
Atmel | SMART ARM-based Flash MCU
DATASHEET
Description
The Atmel® | SMART SAM G53 is a series of Flash microcontrollers based on the
high-performance 32-bit ARM ® Cortex ® -M4 RISC processor. It operates at a
maximum speed of 48 MHz and features up to 512 Kbytes of Flash and 96 Kbytes
of SRAM. The peripheral set includes one USART, two UARTs, three I2C-bus
interfaces (TWI), up to two SPIs, two three-channel general-purpose 16-bit timers,
two I2S controllers with two-way, one-channel pulse density modulation, one realtime timer (RTT) and one 8-channel 12-bit ADC.
The Atmel | SMART SAM G53 devices have two software-selectable low-power
modes: Sleep and Wait. In Sleep mode, the processor is stopped while all other
functions can be kept running. In Wait mode, all clocks and functions are stopped
but some peripherals can be configured to wake up the system based on events,
including partial asynchronous wake-up (SleepWalking™).
The Event System allows peripherals to receive, react to and send events in
Active and Sleep modes without processor intervention.
A general-purpose microcontroller with the best ratio in terms of reduced power
consumption, processing power and peripheral set, the SAM G53 series sustains
a wide range of applications including consumer, industrial control, and PC
peripherals.
The device operates from 1.62V to 3.6V and is available in a 49-ball WLCSP
package and a 100-pin LQFP package.
Features
Core
̶
ARM Cortex-M4 up to 48 MHz
̶
Memory Protection Unit (MPU)
̶
DSP Instructions
̶
Floating Point Unit (FPU)
̶
Thumb®-2 instruction set
Memories
̶
512 Kbytes embedded Flash
̶
96 Kbytes embedded SRAM
System
̶
Embedded voltage regulator for single-supply operation
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
̶
Power-on reset (POR) and Watchdog for safe operation
̶
Quartz or ceramic resonator oscillators: 3 to 20 MHz with clock failure detection and 32.768 kHz for
RTT or device clock
̶
High-precision 8/16/24 MHz factory-trimmed internal RC oscillator. In-application trimming access for
frequency adjustment
̶
Slow clock internal RC oscillator as permanent Low-power mode device clock
̶
PLL range from 24 MHz to 48 MHz for device clock
̶
28 peripheral DMA (PDC) channels
̶
256-bit General-Purpose Registers (GPBR)
̶
16 external interrupt lines
Power consumption in Active mode
̶
102 µA/MHz running Fibonacci in SRAM
Low power modes (typical value)
̶
Wait mode down to 8 µA
̶
Wake-up time less than 5 µs
̶
Asynchronous partial wake-up (SleepWalking™) on UART and TWI
Peripherals
̶
One USART with SPI mode
̶
Two Inter-IC Sound Controllers (I2S)
Two UARTs
̶
Three Two-Wire Interface (TWI) modules featuring two TWI masters and one high-speed TWI slave
̶
One fast SPI at up to 24Mbit/s
̶
Two three-channel 16-bit Timer/Counters (TC) with Capture, Waveform, Compare and PWM modes
̶
One 32-bit Real-Time Timer (RTT)
Analog
One 8-channel ADC, resolution up to 12 bits, sampling rate up to 800 kSps
Package
̶
49-ball WLCSP
̶
100-pin LQFP, 14 x 14 mm, pitch 0.5 mm
Temperature operating range
̶
2
̶
Up to 38 controllable I/O lines with external interrupt capability (edge or level sensitivity), debouncing,
glitch filtering and on-die series resistor termination. Individually programmable open-drain, pull-up
and pull-down resistor and synchronous output
̶
Two-way one-channel Pulse Density Modulation (PDM) (interfaces up to two microphones in PDM
mode)
I/O
̶
̶
Industrial (-40 °C to +85 °C)
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
1.
Configuration Summary
Table 1-1 summarizes the SAM G53 device configurations.
Table 1-1.
Configuration Summary
Feature
SAM G53G19
SAM G53N19
Flash
512 Kbytes
512 Kbytes
SRAM
96 Kbytes
96 Kbytes
Package
WLCSP49
LQFP100
Number of PIOs
38
38
Event System
Yes
Yes
8 channels
8 channels
Performance:
Performance
800 KSps at 10-bit resolution
800 KSps at 10-bit resolution
200 KSps at 11-bit resolution
200 KSps at 11-bit resolution
50 KSps at 12-bit resolution
50 KSps at 12-bit resolution
6 channels
6 channels
16-bit Timer
(3 external channels)
(3 external channels)
I2SC/PDM
2 / 1-channel 2-way
2 / 1-channel 2-way
12-bit ADC
PDC Channels
28
28
USART/UART
1/2
1/2
SPI
1
1
2 masters at 400Kbits/s and
2 masters 400Kbits/s and
1 slave at 3.4Mbit/s
1 slave 3.4Mbit/s
TWI
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
3
Block Diagram
SAM G53 Block Diagram
V
TST
U
O
D
D
D
D
IO
T
TD
I
TD
O
TM
S
TC /SW
K D
/S IO
W
JT
C
LK
A
G
S
E
L
Figure 2-1.
V
2.
Voltage
Regulator
PCK[2:0]
PLL
RC OSC
8/16/24 MHz
Power
Management
Controller
JTAG and Serial Wire
In-Circuit Emulator
WKUP[15:0]
XIN
XOUT
Cortex-M4 Processor
fMAX 48 MHz
3-20 MHz
Crystal Osc. or
External Osc.
(bypass)
Supply
Controller
DSP
Tamper Detection
32K
Crystal Osc. or
External Osc.
(bypass)
XIN32
XOUT32
ERASE
24-bit SysTick
Counter
NVIC
MPU
FPU
I/D
Flash
Unique
Identifier
S
User
Signature
32K RC
Power-on
Reset
Real-time
Clock
256-bit
GPBR
Real-time
Timer
VDDCORE
3-layer Bus Matrix
fMAX 48 MHz
Reset
Controller
NRST
Watchdog
Timer
M
M
VDDIO
S
M
Bridge
PDC
Supply
Monitor
Flash
S
512 Kbytes
S
96 Kbytes
SRAM
ROM(1)
S
8 Kbytes
PIOA/PIOB
System Controller
PDMDAT0
PDMCLK0
PDMIC0
PDMIC1
I2SCK[1:0]
I2SWS[1:0]
I2SDI[1:0]
I2SDO[1:0]
I2SMCK[1:0]
PDC
PDC
SPI
PDC
PDC
2 x I2SC
PDC
3 x TWI
SCK
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
PDC
PDC Timer Counter A
TC[0..2]
2 x UART
Timer Counter B
TC[3..5]
AD[7:0]
ADTRG
PDC
12-bit ADC
VDDIO
Note:
4
TWCK[2:0]
TWD[2:0]
USART
PDC
URXD[1:0]
UTXD[1:0]
NPCS0
NPCS1
MISO
MOSI
SPCK
1. The ROM is reserved for future use.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Event
System
TCLK[2:0]
TIOA[2:0]
TIOB[2:0]
3.
Signal Description
Table 3-1 provides details on the signal names classified by peripheral.
Table 3-1.
Signal Description List
Signal Name
Function
Type
Active
Level
Voltage
Reference
Comments
Power Supplies
VDDIO
Peripheral I/O Lines, Voltage Regulator,
ADC Power Supply
Power
–
–
VDDOUT
Voltage Regulator Output
Power
–
–
–
VDDCORE
Core Chip Power Supply
Power
–
–
Connected externally
to VDDOUT
GND
Ground
Ground
–
–
–
Input
–
VDDIO
Reset state:
Output
–
–
- PIO input
Input
–
VDDIO
- Internal pull-up
disabled
Output
–
–
- Schmitt Trigger
enabled
1.62V to 3.6V
Clocks, Oscillators and PLLs
XIN
Main Oscillator Input (Bypass mode)
XOUT
Main Oscillator Output
XIN32
Slow Clock Oscillator Input (Bypass mode)
XOUT32
Slow Clock Oscillator Output
Reset state:
- PIO input
PCK0 - PCK2
Programmable Clock Output
Output
–
–
- Internal pull-up
enabled
- Schmitt Trigger
enabled
ICE and JTAG
TCK
Test Clock
Input
–
VDDIO
No pull-up resistor
TDI
Test Data In
Input
–
VDDIO
No pull-up resistor
TDO
Test Data Out
Output
–
VDDIO
–
TRACESWO
Trace Asynchronous Data Out
Output
–
VDDIO
–
SWDIO
Serial Wire Input/Output
I/O
–
VDDIO
–
SWCLK
Serial Wire Clock
Input
–
VDDIO
–
TMS
Test Mode Select
Input
–
VDDIO
No pull-up resistor
JTAGSEL
JTAG Selection
Input
High
VDDIO
Pull-down resistor
High
VDDIO
Pull-down (15 kΩ)
resistor
Flash Memory
ERASE
Flash and NVM Configuration Bits Erase
Command
Input
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
5
Table 3-1.
Signal Description List (Continued)
Signal Name
Function
Type
Active
Level
Voltage
Reference
I/O
Low
VDDIO
Pull-up resistor
Input
–
VDDIO
Pull-down resistor
Comments
Reset/Test
NRST
Microcontroller Reset
TST
Test Mode Select
Universal Ansynchronous Receiver Transceiver - UARTx
URXDx
UART Receive Data
Input
–
–
–
UTXDx
UART Transmit Data
Output
–
–
–
PIO Controller - PIOA - PIOB
PA0 - PA24
Parallel I/O Controller A
I/O
–
VDDIO
Pulled-up input at
reset. No pull-down
for PA3/PA4/PA14.
PB0 - PB12
Parallel I/O Controller B
I/O
–
VDDIO
Pulled-up input at
reset
I/O
–
VDDIO
Wake-up pins are
used also as External
Interrupt
Wake-up Pins
WKUP 0-15
Wake-up Pin / External Interrupt
Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter USART
SCK
USART Serial Clock
I/O
–
–
–
TXD
USART Transmit Data
I/O
–
–
–
RXD
USART Receive Data
Input
–
–
–
RTS
USART Request To Send
Output
–
–
–
CTS
USART Clear To Send
Input
–
–
–
Input
–
–
–
Timer/Counter - TCx
TCLKx
TC Channel x External Clock Input
TIOAx
TC Channel x I/O Line A
I/O
–
–
–
TIOBx
TC Channel x I/O Line B
I/O
–
–
–
Serial Peripheral Interface - SPI
MISO
Master In Slave Out
I/O
–
–
–
MOSI
Master Out Slave In
I/O
–
–
–
SPCK
SPI Serial Clock
I/O
–
–
NPCS0
SPI Peripheral Chip Select 0
I/O
Low
–
–
NPCS1
SPI Peripheral Chip Select 1
Output
Low
–
–
6
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
High-speed pad
Table 3-1.
Signal Description List (Continued)
Signal Name
Function
Type
Active
Level
Voltage
Reference
Comments
Two-Wire Interface- TWIx
TWDx
TWIx Two-wire Serial Data
I/O
–
–
High-speed pad for
TWD0
TWCKx
TWIx Two-wire Serial Clock
I/O
–
–
High-speed pad for
TWDCK0
10-bit Analog-to-Digital Converter - ADCC
AD0 - AD7
Analog Inputs
Analog
–
–
–
ADTRG
ADC Trigger
Input
–
–
–
Inter-IC Sound Controller - I2SCx
I2SMCKx
Master Clock
Output
–
–
–
I2SCKx
Serial Clock
I/O
–
–
–
I2SWSx
I2S Word Select
I/O
–
–
–
I2SDIx
Serial Data Input
Input
–
–
–
I2SDOx
Serial Data Output
Output
–
–
–
PDMCLK0
Pulse Density Modulation Clock
Output
–
–
–
PDMDAT0
Pulse Density Modulation Data
Input
–
–
–
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
7
4.
Package and Pinout
Table 4-1.
4.1
Device
Package
SAM G53G19
WLCSP49
SAM G53N19
LQFP100
49-ball WLCSP Pinout
Table 4-2.
8
SAM G53 Packages
SAM G53G19 49-ball WLCSP Pinout
A1
PA9
C1
VDDCORE
E1
PB2/AD6
G1
VDDIO
A2
GND
C2
PA11
E2
PB0/AD4
G2
VDDOUT
A3
PA24
C3
PA12
E3
PA18/AD1
G3
GND
A4
PB8/XOUT
C4
PB6
E4
PA14
G4
VDDIO
A5
PB9/XIN
C5
PA4
E5
PA10
G5
PA22
A6
PB4
C6
PA3
E6
TST
G6
PA15
A7
VDDIO
C7
PA0
E7
PA7/XIN32
G7
PA6
B1
PB11
D1
PA13
F1
PA20/AD3
B2
PB5
D2
PB3/AD7
F2
PA19/AD2
B3
PB7
D3
PB1/AD5
F3
PA17/AD0
B4
PA2
D4
PB10
F4
PA21
B5
JTAGSEL
D5
PA1
F5
PA23
B6
NRST
D6
PA5
F6
PA16
B7
PB12
D7
VDDCORE
F7
PA8/XOUT32
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
4.2
100-lead LQFP Pinout
Table 4-3.
SAM G53N19 100-pin LQFP Pinout
1
NC
26
NC
51
NC
76
NC
2
NC
27
NC
52
NC
77
NC
3
NC
28
PA6
53
PA17
78
NC
4
NC
29
VDDIO
54
PA18
79
PA9
5
VDDIO
30
PA16
55
PA19
80
PB5
6
VDDIO
31
PA15
56
PA20
81
GND
7
NRST
32
PA23
57
PB0
82
GND
8
PB12
33
NC
58
PB1
83
GND
9
PA4
34
NC
59
PB2
84
PB6
10
PA3
35
PA22
60
PB3
85
PB7
11
PA0
36
PA21
61
VDDIO
86
PA24
12
PA1
37
VDDIO
62
PA14
87
PB8
13
PA5
38
VDDIO
63
PA13
88
PB9
14
VDDIO
39
GND
64
PA12
89
VDDIO
15
VDDCORE
40
GND
65
PA11
90
PA2
16
VDDCORE
41
GND
66
VDDCORE
91
PB4
17
TEST
42
GND
67
VDDCORE
92
NC
18
PA7
43
GND
68
PB10
93
JTAGSEL
19
PA8
44
VDDOUT
69
PB11
94
VDDIO
20
GND
45
VDDOUT
70
GND
95
VDDIO
21
NC
46
VDDIO
71
GND
96
NC
22
NC
47
VDDIO
72
PA10
97
NC
23
NC
48
VDDIO
73
NC
98
NC
24
NC
49
NC
74
NC
99
NC
25
NC
50
NC
75
NC
100
NC
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
9
5.
Power Considerations
5.1
Power Supplies
The SAM G53 has several types of power supply pins:
VDDCORE pins: Power the core, including the processor, the embedded memories and the peripherals.
VDDCORE must be connected to VDDOUT.
VDDIO pins: Power the peripheral I/O lines, voltage regulator and ADC; voltage ranges from 1.62V to 3.6V.
The ground pins GND are common to VDDCORE and VDDIO.
5.2
Voltage Regulator
The SAM G53 embeds a core voltage regulator that is managed by the Supply Controller and that supplies the
Cortex-M4 core, internal memories (SRAM and Flash logic) and the peripherals. An internal adaptative biasing
adjusts the regulator quiescent current depending on the required load current.
For adequate input and output power supply decoupling/bypassing, refer to Table 37-4 “VDDCORE Voltage
Regulator Characteristics” in the Electrical Characteristics section of the datasheet.
5.3
Typical Powering Schematics
The SAM G53 supports a 1.62V to 3.6V single supply mode. The internal regulator input is connected to the
source and its output feeds VDDCORE. Power schematics are illustrated in Figure 5-1.
To achieve the system performance levels, the internal regulator must be used.
Figure 5-1.
Single Supply
VDDIO
Main Supply (1.62V to 3.6V)
VDDIO
Voltage
Regulator
VDDOUT
VDDCORE
5.4
Functional Modes
5.4.1
Active Mode
Active mode is the normal running mode with the core clock running from the fast RC oscillator, the main crystal
oscillator or the PLL. The Power Management Controller can be used to adapt the frequency and to disable the
peripheral clocks.
10
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
5.4.2
Wait Mode
Wait mode allows the device to achieve very low power consumption levels while remaining in a powered state
with a wake-up time of less than 5 µs. Current consumption in Wait mode is typically less than 8 µA (total current
consumption). In Wait mode, the clocks of the core, the peripherals and memories are stopped. However, power
supplies are maintained to ensure memory and CPU context retention.
The wake-up time of 5 µs is achieved when entry into and exit from Wait mode are performed in internal SRAM.
The wake-up time increases to 70 µs if entry into Wake-up mode is performed in internal Flash.
Wait mode is entered using either the WAITMODE bit in the PMC Clock Generator Main Oscillator register
(CKGR_MOR) or the Wait for Event (WFE) instruction. Detailed sequences are provided below.
Note that the WFE instruction can add complexity in application state machines due to the fact that the WFE
instruction goes along with an event flag of the Cortex core (cannot be managed by the software application). The
event flag can be set by interrupts, a debug event or an event signal from another processor. Since an interrupt
can take place just before the execution of WFE, WFE takes into account events that happened in the past. As a
result, WFE prevents the device from entering Wait mode if an interrupt event has occurred. To work around this
complexity, follow the sequence using the WAITMODE bit described below.
The Cortex-M4 processor is able to handle external or internal events in order to wake up the core. This is done by
configuring the external lines WKUP0–15 as fast start-up wake-up pins (refer to Section 5.5 “Fast Start-up”) or the
RTT and RTC alarms for internal events.
To enter Wait mode using the WAITMODE bit:
1. Select the 8/16/24 MHz fast RC oscillator as the Main Clock. If frequency of 24 MHz is selected and the code is
running from the SRAM, wake-up time is less than 5 µs.
2. Program the FLPM field in the PMC Fast Startup Mode Register (PMC_FSMR)(1).
3.
Set the number of Flash wait states to 0 by writing a zero to the FWS field in the EEFC Flash Mode Register
(EEFC_MR).
4.
Write a one to the WAITMODE bit in the PMC Clock Generator Main Oscillator Register (CKGR_MOR).
5.
Wait for MCKRDY = 1 in the PMC Status Register (PMC_SR).
To enter Wait mode using the WFE instruction:
1. Select the 8/16/24 MHz fast RC oscillator as the Main Clock. If 24 MHz is selected and the code is running on the
SRAM, wake-up time is less than 5 µs.
2. Program the FLPM field in the PMC Fast Startup Mode Register (PMC_FSMR)(1).
3.
Set the number of Flash wait states to 0 by writing a zero to the FWS field in the EEFC Flash Mode Register
(EEFC_MR).
4.
Write a one to the LPM bit in the PMC Fast Startup Mode Register (PMC_FSMR).
5.
Ensure that the SLEEPDEEP bit in the System Control Register (SCB_SCR) is cleared.
6.
Execute the Wait For Event (WFE) instruction of the processor.
Note:
5.4.3
1. Depending on the value of the field FLPM, the Flash enters three different modes:
FLPM = 0: Flash in Stand-by mode (low power consumption levels)
FLPM = 1: Flash in Deep power-down mode (extra low power consumption levels)
FLPM = 2: Flash in Idle mode. Memory ready for Read access.
Sleep Mode
In Sleep mode, power consumption of the device versus response time is optimized. Only the core clock is
stopped. The peripheral clocks can be enabled. The current consumption in Sleep mode is application-dependent.
Sleep mode is entered via Wait for Interrupt (WFI) instructions.
The processor can be awakened from an interrupt if the WFI instruction of the Cortex-M4 is used.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
11
5.4.4
Low-Power Mode Configuration Summary
Table 5-1 summarizes the power consumption, wake-up time and system state in low-power modes.
Table 5-1.
Mode
Low-Power Mode Configuration Summary
SUPC
32 kHz
Oscillator
RTT
POR
Regulator
POR
Supply
Monitor on
VDDIO
RAM
Power
Switch
Core Memory
Peripherals
All RAM
powered
Wait Mode with
Flash in Deeppower-down
mode
ON
OFF
64 Kbytes
RAM
powered
Powered
(Not clocked)
32 Kbytes
RAM
powered
Sleep Mode
Notes:
ON
ON
Powered
Mode Entry
FLPM = 1
+ WAITMODE = 1
or
SLEEPDEEP = 0
+FLPM = 1
+ LPM = 1
+ WFE
Potential Wake-up
Sources
Core at
Wake-up
PIO State
while in LowPower Mode
PIO State at
Wake-up
Consumptio
n
(2) (3)
<12 µA
Any event from:
Fast startup through
WKUP0–15 pins
RTT alarm
RTC alarm
Clocked back
Previous state
saved
Unchanged
<10 µA
<8 µA
Powered
(Not clocked)
WFI
+ SLEEPDEEP = 0
+ LPM = 0
Entry mode =WFI
interrupt only;
any enabled interrupt
Clocked back
Previous state
saved
Unchanged
(6)
Wake-up
Time (1)
(5)
< 5 µs
(5)
< 5 µs
(5)
(4)
(4)
(4)
< 5 µs
–
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
1. When considering wake-up time, the time required to start the PLL is not taken into account. Once started, the device works with the 8/16/24 MHz Fast RC
oscillator. The user has to add the PLL start-up time if it is needed in the system. The wake-up time is defined as the time taken for wake up until the first
instruction is fetched.
2. The external loads on PIOs are not taken into account in the calculation.
3. BOD current consumption is not included.
4. Wake-up from RAM if 24 MHz fast RC oscillator is selected.
5. Values give are typical values.
6. Refer to the section “Power Consumption” in the “Electrical Characteristics”.
12
5.5
Fast Start-up
The SAM G53 allows the processor to restart in a few microseconds while the processor is in Wait mode. A fast
start-up can occur upon detection of a low level on one of the 18 sources of wake-up (2 internal and 16 external).
The fast restart circuitry is fully asynchronous and provides a fast start-up signal to the Power Management
Controller. As soon as the fast start-up signal is asserted, the PMC restarts from the last fast RC selected (the
embedded 24 MHz fast RC oscillator), switches the master clock on the last clock of RC oscillator and reenables
the processor clock. At the wake-up of the Wait mode, the code is executed in the SRAM.
Figure 5-2.
Start-up Sequence
Standby Mode
cpu_clock
Startup Time
cpu clock
t<5us
PLL
stdby
PLL startup<200us
8/16/24 MHz
PLL
t<70us
Flash Ready
Reset signals resynchronized on specific clocks
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
13
6.
Architecture
6.1
Peripheral DMA Controller
The Peripheral DMA Controller handles transfer requests from the channel. Priorities are defined in Table 6-1, with
Channel Number 0 as highest priority.
Table 6-1.
14
Peripheral DMA Controller
Instance Name
Channel T/R
Channel Number
MEM2MEM
Transmit
27
SPI
Transmit
26
TWI1
Transmit
25
TWI2
Transmit
24
UART0
Transmit
23
UART1
Transmit
22
USART
Transmit
21
I2SC1
Transmit
19, 20
I2SC0
Transmit
17, 18
TWI0
Transmit
16
MEM2MEM
Receive
15
TC0::TC0
Receive
14
SPI
Receive
13
TWI1
Receive
12
TWI2
Receive
11
UART0
Receive
10
UART1
Receive
9
USART
Receive
8
PDMIC1
Receive
7
PDMIC0
Receive
6
I2SC1
Receive
4, 5
I2SC0
Receive
2, 3
ADC
Receive
1
TWI0
Receive
0
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
7.
Product Mapping
Figure 7-1.
SAM G53 Product Mapping
0x00000000
Address memory space
Code
0x00000000
0x400E0000
System Controller
Boot Memory
Code
Reserved
0x00400000
0x400E0200
Internal Flash
0x20000000
MATRIX
0x400E0400
0x00800000
Internal ROM
Internal SRAM
PMC
5
0x400E0600
0x00C00000
Reserved
0x40000000
UART0
0x1FFFFFFF
Peripherals
8
0x400E0740
CHIPID
Internal SRAM
0x20000000
0x400E0800
SRAM
0x60000000
UART1
9
0x400E0A00
0x20080000
Undefined (Abort)
Reserved
0x40000000
6
Reserved
Peripherals
0x40000000
0xE0000000
EFC
0x400E0C00
0x400E0E00
I2SC0
System
11
0x400E1000
I2SC1
17
0x40008000
SPI
0xFFFFFFFF
PIOA
16
0x40004000
21
0x4000C000
PIOB
12
0x400E1200
Reserved
Reserved
0x40010000
TC0
0x400E1400
SYSC
TC0
23
+0x40
TC0
offset
block
peripheral
ID
(+ : wired-or)
TC2
25
0x40014000
TC1
1
SYSC
24
+0x80
TC0
RSTC
+0x10
TC1
SUPC
+0x30
SYSC
TC3
RTT
26
+0x40
TC1
3
+0x50
SYSC
TC4
27
+0x80
TC1
WDT
4
+0x60
TC5
28
0x40018000
Reserved
TWI0
19
0x4001C000
+0x90
SYSC
TWI1
20
0x40020000
GPBR
0x400E1600
Reserved
Reserved
0x40024000
0x4007FFFF
USART
14
0x40028000
MEM2MEM
15
0x4002C000
PDMIC0
13
0x40030000
PDMIC1
18
0x40034000
Reserved
0x40038000
ADC
29
0x4003C000
Reserved
0x40040000
TWI2
22
0x40044000
Reserved
0x40048000
Reserved
0x4004C000
Reserved
0x400E0000
System Controller
0x400E2600
Reserved
0x60000000
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
15
8.
Boot Loader
The SAM G53 devices ship with a factory-programmed boot loader in Flash. The Flash loader downloads code
either through the SPI or through the TWI0.
The Boot loader mode is entered automatically on power-up if no valid firmware is detected in the Flash. A valid
firmware is detected by performing a CRC on the content of the Flash. If the CRC is correct, the application is
started. Otherwise, the Boot loader mode is entered.
Alternatively, the Boot loader mode can be forced by applying low pulses on the NRST line. The NRST should be
asserted 10 times for a minimum of 1 µs at an interval less than 50 ms. When the boot loader detects this
sequence, it asserts the pin PA01 (NCHG) low as an acknowledge.
The Boot loader mode initializes the TWI0 in Slave Mode with the I2C address 0x26 and the SPI in Slave Mode, 8bit data length, SPI Mode 1.
Table 8-1 provides information on the pins used by the boot loader.
Table 8-1.
Boot Loader Pin Description
Pin Name
Function
Boot Loader Use
Description
PA01
NCHG
Driven at 0 or pulled up
Boot loader handshake
PA03
TWD
Open drain input/output
TWI/I2C data line
PA04
TWCK
Open drain input/output
TWI/I2C clock
PA11
NPCS0/NSS
Input
NSS, SPI slave select
PA12
MISO
Push-pull output
SPI master in slave out
PA13
MOSI
Input
SPI master out slave in
PA14
SPCK
Input
SPI clock
For further details on boot loader operations, refer to the application note AT09002 – Atmel SAM I²C - SPI
Bootloader" on www.atmel.com.
16
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
9.
Memories
9.1
Internal SRAM
The SAM G53 embeds a total of 96 Kbytes of high-speed SRAM.
The SRAM is accessible over the Cortex-M4 system bus at address 0x2000 0000.
The SRAM is in the bit band region. The bit band alias region is from 0x2200 0000 and 0x23FF FFFF.
The SRAM is composed of three blocks of 32 Kbytes. The second and third blocks have a power switch. Each
power switch controls the supply of the SRAM block to save power. The control of the power switch (PSWITCHx)
is in the SUPC_MR register.
9.2
Embedded Flash
9.2.1
Flash Overview
The memory is organized in sectors. Each sector comprises 64 Kbytes. The first sector of 64 Kbytes is divided into
three smaller sectors.
The three smaller sectors are comprised of two sectors of 8 Kbytes and one sector of 48 Kbytes. Refer to Figure 91.
Figure 9-1.
Global Flash Organization
Flash Organization
Sector size
Sector name
8 Kbytes
Small Sector 0
8 Kbytes
Small Sector 1
48 Kbytes
Larger Sector
64 Kbytes
Sector 1
64 Kbytes
Sector n
Sector 0
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
17
Each sector is organized in pages of 512 bytes.
For sector 0:
The smaller sector 0 has 16 pages of 512 bytes.
The smaller sector 1 has 16 pages of 512 bytes.
The larger sector has 96 pages of 512 bytes.
From sector 1 to n:
The rest of the array is composed of 64 Kbytes sectors of 128 pages of 512 bytes each. Refer to Figure 9-2.
Figure 9-2.
Flash Sector Organization
Flash Sector Organization
A sector size is 64 Kbytes
Sector 0
Sector n
16 pages of 512 bytes
Smaller sector 0
16 pages of 512 bytes
Smaller sector 1
96 pages of 512 bytes
Larger sector
128 pages of 512 bytes
The SAM G53 Flash size is 512 Kbytes. Refer to Figure 9-3 for the organization of the Flash.
Figure 9-3.
Flash Size
Flash 512 Kbytes
2 * 8 Kbytes
1 * 48 Kbytes
7 * 64 Kbytes
The following erase commands can be used depending on the sector size:
18
8 Kbyte small sector
̶
Erase and write page(EWP)
̶
Erase and write page and lock (EWPL)
̶
Erase sector (ES) with FARG set to a page number in the sector to erase
̶
Erase pages (EPA) with FARG [1:0] = 0 to erase four pages or FARG [1:0] = 1 to erase eight pages.
FARG [1:0] = 2 and FARG [1:0] = 3 must not be used.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
48 Kbyte and 64 Kbyte sectors
̶
One block of 8 pages inside any sector, with the command Erase pages (EPA) with FARG[1:0] = 1
̶
One block of 16 pages inside any sector, with the command Erase pages (EPA) and FARG[1:0] = 2
̶
One block of 32 pages inside any sector, with the command Erase pages (EPA) and FARG[1:0] = 3
̶
One sector with the command Erase sector (ES) and FARG set to a page number in the sector to
erase
Entire memory plane
̶
The entire Flash, with the command Erase all (EA)
The memory has one additional reprogrammable page that can be used as page signature by the user. It is
accessible through specific modes, for erase, write and read operations. Erase pin assertion will not erase the user
signature page.
9.2.2
Enhanced Embedded Flash Controller
The Enhanced Embedded Flash Controller manages accesses performed by the masters of the system. It enables
reading the Flash and writing the write buffer. It also contains a User Interface, mapped on the APB.
The Enhanced Embedded Flash Controller ensures the interface of the Flash block.
It manages the programming, erasing, locking and unlocking sequences of the Flash using a full set of commands.
One of the commands returns the embedded Flash descriptor definition that informs the system about the Flash
organization, thus making the software generic.
9.2.3
Flash Speed
The user must set the number of wait states depending on the frequency used:
For more details, refer to the section “AC Characteristics” in the “Electrical Characteristics”.
9.2.4
Lock Regions
Several lock bits are used to protect write and erase operations on lock regions. A lock region is composed of
several consecutive pages, and each lock region has its associated lock bit.
Table 9-1.
Lock Bit Number
Product
Number of Lock Bits
Lock Region Size
SAM G53
64
8 Kbytes
If the erase or program command of a locked region occurs, the command is aborted and the EEFC triggers an
interrupt.
The lock bits are software programmable through the EEFC User Interface. The command “Set Lock Bit” enables
the protection. The command “Clear Lock Bit” unlocks the lock region.
Asserting the ERASE pin clears the lock bits, thus unlocking the entire Flash.
9.2.5
User Signature
Each device contains a user signature of 512 bytes. It can be used by the user to store user information such as
trimming, keys, etc., that the customer does not want to be erased by asserting the ERASE pin or by software
ERASE command.
Read, write and erase of this area is allowed.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
19
9.2.6
Unique Identifier
The SAMG53 Flash contains 2 pages of 512bytes called unique identifier. These 2 pages are read-only and
cannot be erased even by the Erase pin. Each device integrates its own 128-bit unique identifier. These bits are
factory-configured and cannot be changed by the user.
Some bytes of the user signature page are reserved for the trimming information of the 32 kHz RC Oscillator and
the internal regulator.
The mapping is as follows:
9.2.7
Bytes [15..0]: 128 bits for unique identifier
Bytes [47..16]: Atmel reserved
Bytes [49..48]: Measured frequency (on tester) of the internal 32 kHz RC with VVDDIO range [1.62V to 2.5V]
(measurement performed at 25°C)
Bytes[511..50]: Atmel reserved.
General-Purpose Non-Volatile Memory Bits
The SAM G53 features three GPNVM bits that can be cleared or set respectively through the commands “Clear
GPNVM Bit” and “Set GPNVM Bit” of the EEFC User Interface.
Table 9-2.
9.2.8
General-purpose Non-volatile Memory Bits
GPNVM Bit[#]
Function
0
Security bit
1
Flash BOOT mode selection
2
Reserved (do not use, must be
always @0x0)
Boot Strategies
The general-purpose NVM, GPNVM bit 1, is used to boot from the Flash.
The GPNVM bits can be cleared or set respectively through the commands “Clear GPNVM Bit” and “Set GPNVM
Bit” of the EEFC User Interface.
Setting GPNVM bit 1 selects the boot from the Flash. Asserting ERASE clears the GPNVM bit 1. Thus GPNVM1
must be set to BOOT on Flash and the boot loader is removed from Flash.
9.2.9
Calibration Bits
The GPNVM bits are used to calibrate the POR, the voltage regulator and the 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator. These
bits are factory-configured and cannot be changed by the user. The ERASE pin has no effect on the calibration
bits.
9.2.10 Security Bit
The SAM G53 features a security bit, based on a specific general-purpose NVM bit (GPNVM bit 0). When the
security is enabled, any access to the Flash, SRAM, core registers and internal peripherals through the ICE
interface is forbidden. This ensures the confidentiality of the code programmed in the Flash.
The security bit can only be enabled, through the command “Set GPNVM Bit 0” of the EEFC User Interface.
Disabling the security bit can only be achieved by asserting the ERASE pin to 1, and after a full Flash erase is
20
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
performed. When the security bit is deactivated, all accesses to the Flash, SRAM, core registers, internal
peripherals are permitted.
The ERASE pin integrates a permanent pull-down. Consequently, it can be left unconnected during normal
operation. However, it is recommended, in harsh environments, to connect it directly to GND if the erase operation
is not used in the application.
To avoid unexpected erase at power-up, a minimum ERASE pin assertion time is required. This time is defined in
Table 37-41 “AC Flash Characteristics”.
The erase operation is not performed when the system is in Wait mode with the Flash in Deep-power-down mode.
To make sure that the erase operation is performed after power-up, the system must not reconfigure the ERASE
pin as GPIO or enter Wait mode with Flash in Deep-power-down mode before the ERASE pin assertion time has
elapsed.
With the following sequence, in any case, the erase operation is performed:
1. Assert the ERASE pin (High)
2. Assert the NRST pin (Low)
3.
Power cycle the device
Maintain the ERASE pin high for at least the minimum assertion time.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
21
10.
System Controller
The System Controller is a set of peripherals, which allow handling of key elements of the system, such as power,
resets, clocks, time, interrupts, watchdog, etc. Refer to the section on the Supply Controller (SUPC).
10.1
System Controller and Peripherals Mapping
Refer to Section 7-1 “SAM G53 Product Mapping”.
All the peripherals are in the bit band region and are mapped in the bit band alias region.
10.2
Power-on Reset, Supply Monitor
The SAM G53 embeds three features to monitor, warn and/or reset the chip:
10.3
Power-on reset on VDDIO
Power-on reset on VDDCORE
Supply monitor on VDDIO
Reset Controller
The Reset Controller is based on a power-on reset cell. The Reset Controller returns the source of the last reset to
software: general reset, wake-up reset, software reset, user reset or watchdog reset.
The Reset Controller controls the internal resets of the system and the input/output of the NRST pin. It shapes a
reset signal for the external devices, simplifying the connection of a push-button on the NRST pin to implemement
a manual reset. By default, the NRST pin is configured as an input.
The configuration of the Reset Controller is saved as supplied on VDDIO.
10.4
Supply Controller (SUPC)
The Supply Controller controls the power supplies of each section of the processor and the peripherals (via voltage
regulator control).
The Supply Controller has its own reset circuitry and is clocked by the 32 kHz slow clock generator.
The reset circuitry is based on a zero-power power-on reset cell and a POR (power-on reset) cell. The zero-power
power-on reset allows the Supply Controller to start properly, while the software-programmable POR allows
detection of either a battery discharge or main voltage loss.
The slow clock generator is based on a 32 kHz crystal oscillator and an embedded 32 kHz RC oscillator. The user
can also set the crystal oscillator in Bypass mode instead of connecting a crystal. In this case, the user has to
provide the external clock signal on XIN32. The slow clock defaults to the RC oscillator, but the software can
enable the crystal oscillator and select it as the slow clock source.
The Supply Controller starts up the device by sequentially enabling the internal power switches and the voltage
regulator, then it generates the proper reset signals to the core power supply.
It is also used to set the system in different low power modes and to wake it up from a wide range of events.
22
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
10.5
Clock Generator
The Clock Generator is made up of:
One low-power 32768 Hz slow clock oscillator with Bypass mode
One low-power RC oscillator
One factory-programmed fast RC oscillator with three selectable output frequencies: 8, 16 or 24 MHz. At
startup, 8 MHz is selected.
One 24 to 48 MHz programmable PLL that provides the clock MCK to the processor and to the peripherals.
The PLL has an input divider to offer a wider range of output frequencies from the main clock input
Figure 10-1.
Clock Generator Block Diagram
Clock Generator
XTALSEL
On Chip
32k RC OSC
XIN32
XOUT32
XIN
XOUT
Slow Clock
SLCK
Slow Clock
Oscillator
3-20 MHz
Main
Oscillator
Main Clock
MAINCK
On Chip
12/8/4 MHz
RC OSC
MAINSEL
PLLA Clock
PLLACK
PLL and
Divider A
Status
Control
Power
Management
Controller
The 32 kHz RC oscillator frequency is measured at ambient temperature during device test. Its value is stored in
the Flash signature page. The frequency accuracy is given in Table 37-16 “32 kHz RC Oscillator Characteristics”.
When the application uses the 32 kHz RC oscillator, the value of the frequency accuracy of the 32 kHz RC
oscillator must be read and included in the API to use the 32 kHz RC oscillator at 32 kHz.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
23
10.6
Power Management Controller
The Power Management Controller provides clock signals to the system:
Processor clock HCLK
Free-running processor clock FCLK
Cortex SysTick external clock
Master clock MCK, specifically to the matrix and the memory interfaces
Independent peripheral clocks, typically at the frequency of MCK
Three programmable clock outputs: PCK0, PCK1 and PCK2
The Supply Controller selects either the 32 kHz RC oscillator or the crystal oscillator. The unused oscillator is
disabled automatically so that power consumption is optimized.
By default, at start-up the chip runs out of the master clock using the fast RC oscillator running at 8 MHz.
The user can trim the 8, 16 and 24 MHz RC oscillator frequency by software.
Figure 10-2.
SAM G53 Power Management Controller Block Diagram
Processor
Clock
Controller
HCK
int
Sleep Mode
Divider
/8
SystTick
FCLK
Master Clock Controller
SLCK
MAINCK
PLLCK
Prescaler
/1,/2,/4,...,/64
MCK
Peripherals
Clock Controller
periph_clk[..]
ON/OFF
Programmable Clock Controller
SLCK
MAINCK
PLLCK
ON/OFF
Prescaler
/1,/2,/3/4,...,/64
pck[..]
The SysTick calibration value is fixed to 6000 which allows the generation of a time base of 1 ms with SystTick
clock to MHz (max HCLK 48 MHz/8 = 6000, so STCALIB = 0x1770).
10.7
24
Watchdog Timer
16-bit key-protected only-once-programmable counter
Windowed, prevents the processor to be in a dead-lock on the watchdog access
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
10.8
10.9
SysTick Timer
24-bit down counter
Self-reload capability
Flexible system timer
Real-Time Timer
Real-Time Timer, allowing backup of time with different accuracies
32-bit free-running backup counter
̶
Integrates a 16-bit programmable prescaler running on slow clock
̶
Alarm register generates a wake-up of the system through the Shutdown Controller
̶
̶
Wake-up from Wait mode through the Power Management Controller
10.10 Real Time Clock
Low power consumption
Full asynchronous design
Two hundred year calendar
Programmable periodic interrupt
Alarm and update parallel load
Control of alarm and update Time/Calendar Data In
10.11 General-Purpose Registers
Eight 32-bit general-purpose registers
10.12 Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller
Forty-seven maskable interrupts, external to NVIC
Sixteen priority levels
Dynamic reprioritization of interrupts
Priority grouping
Support for tail-chaining and late arrival of interrupts
̶
̶
Selection of preempting interrupt levels and non-preempting interrupt levels
Back-to-back interrupt processing without the overhead of state saving and restoration between
interrupts
Processor state automatically saved on interrupt entry, and restored on interrupt exit, with no instruction
overhead
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
25
10.13 Chip Identification
Chip Identifier (CHIPID) registers permit recognition of the device and its revision.
Table 10-1.
SAM G53 Chip ID Registers
Chip Name
CHIPID_CIDR
CHIPID_EXID
SAM G53G19 Rev A
0X247E_0AE0
0x0
SAM G53N19 Rev A
0X247E_0AE8
0x0
SAM G53G19 Rev B
0X247E_0AE1
0x0
SAM G53N19 Rev B
0X247E_0AE9
0x0
JTAG ID: 0x05B3_C03F
10.14 PIO Controllers
Two PIO Controllers, PIOA and PIOB, that control a maximum of 25 I/O lines
Fully programmable through Set/Clear Registers
Table 10-2.
26
PIO Lines Available Depending on Pin Count
Version
49 Pins
100 Pins
PIOA
25
25
PIOB
13
13
Multiplexing of four peripheral functions per I/O line
For each I/O line (whether assigned to a peripheral or used as general purpose I/O):
̶
Input change, rising edge, falling edge, low level and level interrupt
̶
Debouncing and glitch filter
̶
Multi-drive option enables driving in open drain
̶
Programmable pull-up on each I/O line
̶
Pin data status register, supplies visibility of the level on the pin at any time
̶
Additional interrupt modes on a programmable event: rising edge, falling edge, low level or high level
̶
Lock of the configuration by the connected peripheral
Selection of the drive level
Synchronous output, provides Set and Clear of several I/O lines in a single write
Write Protect Registers
Programmable Schmitt trigger inputs
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
10.15 Peripheral Identifiers
Table 10-3 defines the peripheral identifiers of the SAM G53. A peripheral identifier is required:
for the control of the peripheral interrupts by the Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller
to enable/disable the peripheral clocks by means of the Peripheral Clock Enable and Disable registers
(PMC_PCERx, PMC_PCDRx) in the Power Management Controller.
The external interrupts are connected to WKUP pins.
Table 10-3.
Peripheral Identifiers
Instance ID
Instance Name
NVIC Interrupt
PMC
Clock Control
Instance Description
0
SUPC
X
–
Supply Controller
1
RSTC
X
–
Reset Controller
2
–
X
–
Reserved
3
RTT
X
–
Real Time Timer
4
WDT
X
–
Watchdog Timer
5
PMC
X
–
Power Management Controller
6
EFC
X
–
Enhanced Flash Controller
7
–
–
–
Reserved
8
UART0
X
X
UART 0
9
UART1
X
X
UART 1
10
–
–
–
Reserved
11
PIOA
X
X
Parallel I/O Controller A
12
PIOB
X
X
Parallel I/O Controller B
13
PDMIC0
X
X
PDM 0
14
USART
X
X
USART
15
MEM2MEM
X
X
MEM2MEM
16
I2SC0
X
X
I2SC0
17
I2SC1
X
X
I2SC1
18
PDMIC1
X
X
PDM 1
19
TWI0
X
X
Two-Wire Interface 0 HS
20
TWI1
X
X
Two-Wire Interface 1
21
SPI
X
X
Serial Peripheral Interface
22
TWI2
X
X
Two-Wire Interface 2
23
TC0
X
X
Timer/Counter 0
24
TC1
X
X
Timer/Counter 1
25
TC2
X
X
Timer/Counter 2
26
TC3
X
X
Timer/Counter 3
27
TC4
X
X
Timer/Counter 4
28
TC5
X
X
Timer/Counter 5
29
ADC
X
X
Analog-to-Digital Converter
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27
Table 10-3.
28
Peripheral Identifiers (Continued)
Instance ID
Instance Name
NVIC Interrupt
PMC
Clock Control
Instance Description
30
ARM
X
–
FPU
31
WKUP0
X
–
External interrupt 0
32
WKUP1
X
–
External interrupt 1
33
WKUP2
X
–
External interrupt 2
34
WKUP3
X
–
External interrupt 3
35
WKUP4
X
–
External interrupt 4
36
WKUP5
X
–
External interrupt 5
37
WKUP6
X
–
External interrupt 6
38
WKUP7
X
–
External interrupt 7
39
WKUP8
X
–
External interrupt 8
40
WKUP9
X
–
External interrupt 9
41
WKUP10
X
–
External interrupt 10
42
WKUP11
X
–
External interrupt 11
43
WKUP12
X
–
External interrupt 12
44
WKUP13
X
–
External interrupt 13
45
WKUP14
X
–
External interrupt 14
46
WKUP15
X
–
External interrupt 15
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
10.16 Peripherals Signals Multiplexing on I/O Lines
The SAM G53 features two PIO controllers, PIOA and PIOB, which multiplex the I/O lines of the peripheral set.
Each line can be assigned to one of two peripheral functions: A or B. The multiplexing tables in the following
paragraphs define how the I/O lines of the peripherals A and B are multiplexed on the PIO controllers.
Note that some peripheral functions which are output only, might be duplicated within both tables.
10.16.1 PIO Controller A Multiplexing
Table 10-4.
Note:
Multiplexing on PIO Controller A (PIOA)
I/O Line
Peripheral A
Peripheral B
Extra Function
System Function
PA0
I2SCK0
TIOA0
WKUP0
–
PA1
I2SWS0
TIOB0
WKUP1
–
PA2
TCLK0
I2SDI0
WKUP2
–
PA3
TWD0
I2SDO0
–
–
PA4
TWCK0
I2SMCK0
–
–
PA5
RXD
NPCS1
WKUP4
–
PA6
TXD
PCK0
–
–
PA7
–
–
–
XIN32
PA8
–
ADTRG
WKUP5
XOUT32
PA9
URXD0
PDMDAT0
WKUP6
–
PA10
UTXD0
PDMCLK0
–
–
PA11
NPCS0
–
–
–
PA12
MISO
–
–
–
PA13
MOSI
–
–
–
PA14
SPCK
–
WKUP8
–
PA15
RTS(1)
SCK
–
–
PA16
CTS
TIOB1
WKUP7
–
PA17
I2SDO0
PCK1
AD0
–
PA18
I2SMCK0
PCK2
AD1
–
PA19
TCLK1
I2SCK1
AD2
–
PA20
TCLK2
I2SWS1
AD3
–
PA21
TIOA2
PCK1
WKUP9
–
PA22
TIOB2
I2SDI1
WKUP10
–
PA23
I2SDO1
TIOA1
WKUP3
–
PA24
I2SMCK1
–
WKUP11
–
1. In USART SPI Master mode, RTS cannot be used. Management of the Slave Select (NSS) must be done with a GPIO.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
29
10.16.2 PIO Controller B Multiplexing
Table 10-5.
Multiplexing on PIO Controller B (PIOB)
I/O Line
Peripheral A
Peripheral B
Extra Function
System Function
PB0
–
TWD2
AD4
–
PB1
–
TWCK2
AD5
–
PB2
URXD1
NPCS1
AD6/WKUP12
–
PB3
UTXD1
PCK2
AD7/WKUP13
–
PB4
–
–
–
TDI
PB5
–
–
–
TDO/ TRACESWO
PB6
–
–
–
TMS/SWDIO
PB7
–
–
–
TCK/SWCLK
PB8
TWD1
–
WKUP14
XOUT
PB9
TWCK1
–
WKUP15
XIN
PB10
TWD1(Note:)
TWD2(Note:)
–
–
–
–
–
ERASE
PB11
TWCK1
PB12
(Note:)
–
(Note:)
TWCK2
–
Note: Each TWI (TWI1,TWI2) can be routed on two different pairs of IOs. TWI1 and TWI2 share one pair of IOs (PB10 and PB11). The
configuration of the shared IOs determine which TWI is selected.
10.16.2.1
TWI Muxing on PB10 and PB11
The selection of the TWI used in PB10 and PB11 is determined by the configuration of PB10 and PB11. Three
modes are possible: Normal mode, Alternative mode TWI1 and Alternative mode TWI2.
Normal Mode
Only TWI1 used: PB09 and PB08 must be configured as PIO Peripheral A
Only TWI2 used: PB00 and PB01 must be configured as PIO Peripheral B
Both TWI1 and TWI2 used: PB09 and PB08 must be configured as PIO Peripheral A and PB00 and PB01
must be configured as PIO Peripheral B
Alternative Mode TWI1
TWI1 is muxing on PB10 and PB11: PB10 and PB11 must be configured as PIO Peripheral A. PB8 and PB9
can be configured as GPIO, WKUP pin or XIN, XOUT. PB8 and PB9 cannot be used as peripherals
Alternative Mode TWI2
TWI2 is muxing on PB10 and PB11: PB10 and PB11 must be configured as PIO Peripheral B. PB0 and PB1
can be configured as GPIO, Analog Input. PB0 and PB1 cannot be used as peripherals
Example: Alternative Mode TWI1
30
PB10 is driven by TWD1 signal if the PB10 is configured as peripheral (PIO_PSR[10]=1 and
PIO_ABCDSR1[10]=PIO_ABCDSR2[10]=0).
PB11 is driven by TWCK1 signal if the PB11 is configured as peripheral (PIO_PSR[11]=1 and
PIO_ABCDSR1[11]=PIO_ABCDSR2[11]=0).
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Table 10-6.
TWI Multiplexing
Requirement
Configuration
Normal mode
TWI1 and/or TWI2
Used
Alternative mode
TWI1
Alternative mode
TWI2
Note:
PIO Config
PB0
PB1
PB8
PB9
PB10
PB11
TWD2
TWCK2
TWD1
TWCK1
GPIO
GPIO
GPIO or
WKUP pin
or
XIN(1)
TWD1
TWCK1
TWCK1
TWD2
TWCK2
Configuration
of PB10
Configuration
of PB11
Enable
Enable
PIO_PER[10]
PIO_PER[11]
Config PB10
as Peripheral
A
Config PB11
as Peripheral
A
TWD2
TWCK2
GPIO or
WKUP pin
or
XOUT(1)
Config PB10
as Peripheral
B
Config PB10
as Peripheral
B
GPIO or
AD
Input(1)
GPIO or
AD
Input(1)
TWD1
1. Configuration of PBx can be done after the configuration of PB10 and PB11.
Figure 10-3.
TWI Master PIO Muxing Selection
Mux Selection
(PIO_ABCDSR1/2)
PB8
TWI1
PB9
A
B
PB10
A
B
TWI2
PB11
PB0
PB1
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
31
11.
Event System
The events generated by peripherals are designed to be directly routed to peripherals managing/using these
events without processor intervention. Peripherals receiving events contain logic by which to select the one
required.
11.1
32
Embedded Characteristics
Timers, IO, peripherals generate event triggers which are directly routed to event managers such as ADC, to
start measurement/conversion without processor intervention.
UART, USART, SPI, TWI, ADC also generate event triggers directly connected to Peripheral DMA Controller
(PDC) for data transfer without processor intervention.
PMC security event (clock failure detection) can be programmed to switch the MCK on a reliable main RC
internal clock without processor intervention.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
11.2
Real-Time Event Mapping
Table 11-1.
Real-time Event Mapping List
Event Generator
Event Manager
Function
IO (WKUP0/1)
General Purpose Register (GPBR)
Security / Immediate GPBR clear (asynchronous) on tamper
detection through WKUP0/1 IO pins
Power Management
Controller (PMC)
PMC
Safety / Automatic switch to reliable main RC oscillator in case
of main crystal clock failure
IO (ADTRG)
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
TC Output 0
ADC
TC Output 1
ADC
TC Output 2
ADC
RTCOUT0
ADC
RTTINC
ADC
UART
PDC
Triggers 1 word transfer
USART
PDC
Triggers 1 word transfer
TWI0/1/2
PDC
Triggers 1 word transfer
ADC
PDC
Triggers 1 word transfer
Timer Counter
PDC
Triggers 1 word transfer
SPI
PDC
Triggers 1 word transfer
I2SC0
PDC
Triggers 1 word transfer
I2SC1
PDC
Triggers 1 word transfer
PDMIC0
PDC
Triggers 1 word transfer
PDMIC1
PDC
Triggers 1 word transfer
Trigger for measurement.
Selection in ADC module.
Trigger for measurement.
Selection in ADC module.
Trigger for measurement.
Selection in ADC module.
Trigger for measurement.
Selection in ADC module.
Trigger for measurement.
Selection in ADC module.
Trigger for measurement.
Selection in ADC module.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
33
12.
ARM Cortex-M4 Processor
12.1
Description
The Cortex-M4 processor is a high performance 32-bit processor designed for the microcontroller market. It offers
significant benefits to developers, including outstanding processing performance combined with fast interrupt
handling, enhanced system debug with extensive breakpoint and trace capabilities, efficient processor core,
system and memories, ultra-low power consumption with integrated sleep modes, and platform security
robustness, with integrated memory protection unit (MPU).
The Cortex-M4 processor is built on a high-performance processor core, with a 3-stage pipeline Harvard
architecture, making it ideal for demanding embedded applications. The processor delivers exceptional power
efficiency through an efficient instruction set and extensively optimized design, providing high-end processing
hardware including IEEE754-compliant single-precision floating-point computation, a range of single-cycle and
SIMD multiplication and multiply-with-accumulate capabilities, saturating arithmetic and dedicated hardware
division.
To facilitate the design of cost-sensitive devices, the Cortex-M4 processor implements tightly-coupled system
components that reduce processor area while significantly improving interrupt handling and system debug
capabilities. The Cortex-M4 processor implements a version of the Thumb® instruction set based on Thumb-2
technology, ensuring high code density and reduced program memory requirements. The Cortex-M4 instruction
set provides the exceptional performance expected of a modern 32-bit architecture, with the high code density of
8-bit and 16-bit microcontrollers.
The Cortex-M4 processor closely integrates a configurable NVIC, to deliver industry-leading interrupt
performance. The NVIC includes a non-maskable interrupt (NMI), and provides up to 256 interrupt priority levels.
The tight integration of the processor core and NVIC provides fast execution of interrupt service routines (ISRs),
dramatically reducing the interrupt latency. This is achieved through the hardware stacking of registers, and the
ability to suspend load-multiple and store-multiple operations. Interrupt handlers do not require wrapping in
assembler code, removing any code overhead from the ISRs. A tail-chain optimization also significantly reduces
the overhead when switching from one ISR to another.
To optimize low-power designs, the NVIC integrates with the sleep modes, that include a deep sleep function that
enables the entire device to be rapidly powered down while still retaining program state.
12.1.1 System Level Interface
The Cortex-M4 processor provides multiple interfaces using AMBA® technology to provide high speed, low latency
memory accesses. It supports unaligned data accesses and implements atomic bit manipulation that enables
faster peripheral controls, system spinlocks and thread-safe Boolean data handling.
The Cortex-M4 processor has a Memory Protection Unit (MPU) that provides fine grain memory control, enabling
applications to utilize multiple privilege levels, separating and protecting code, data and stack on a task-by-task
basis. Such requirements are becoming critical in many embedded applications such as automotive.
12.1.2 Integrated Configurable Debug
The Cortex-M4 processor implements a complete hardware debug solution. This provides high system visibility of
the processor and memory through either a traditional JTAG port or a 2-pin Serial Wire Debug (SWD) port that is
ideal for microcontrollers and other small package devices.
For system trace the processor integrates an Instrumentation Trace Macrocell (ITM) alongside data watchpoints
and a profiling unit. To enable simple and cost-effective profiling of the system events these generate, a Serial
Wire Viewer (SWV) can export a stream of software-generated messages, data trace, and profiling information
through a single pin.
34
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
The Flash Patch and Breakpoint Unit (FPB) provides up to eight hardware breakpoint comparators that debuggers
can use. The comparators in the FPB also provide remap functions of up to eight words in the program code in the
CODE memory region. This enables applications stored on a non-erasable, ROM-based microcontroller to be
patched if a small programmable memory, for example flash, is available in the device. During initialization, the
application in ROM detects, from the programmable memory, whether a patch is required. If a patch is required,
the application programs the FPB to remap a number of addresses. When those addresses are accessed, the
accesses are redirected to a remap table specified in the FPB configuration, which means the program in the nonmodifiable ROM can be patched.
12.2
Embedded Characteristics
Tight integration of system peripherals reduces area and development costs
Thumb instruction set combines high code density with 32-bit performance
IEEE754-compliant single-precision FPU
Code-patch ability for ROM system updates
Power control optimization of system components
Integrated sleep modes for low power consumption
Fast code execution permits slower processor clock or increases sleep mode time
Hardware division and fast digital-signal-processing oriented multiply accumulate
Saturating arithmetic for signal processing
Deterministic, high-performance interrupt handling for time-critical applications
Memory Protection Unit (MPU) for safety-critical applications
Extensive debug and trace capabilities:
̶
12.3
Serial Wire Debug and Serial Wire Trace reduce the number of pins required for debugging, tracing,
and code profiling.
Block Diagram
Figure 12-1.
Typical Cortex-M4F Implementation
Cortex-M4F
Processor
FPU
NVIC
Debug
Access
Port
Processor
Core
Memory
Protection Unit
Flash
Patch
Serial
Wire
Viewer
Data
Watchpoints
Bus Matrix
Code
Interface
SRAM and
Peripheral Interface
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
35
12.4
Cortex-M4 Models
12.4.1 Programmers Model
This section describes the Cortex-M4 programmers model. In addition to the individual core register descriptions, it
contains information about the processor modes and privilege levels for software execution and stacks.
12.4.1.1
Processor Modes and Privilege Levels for Software Execution
The processor modes are:
Thread mode
Used to execute application software. The processor enters the Thread mode when it comes out of reset.
Handler mode
Used to handle exceptions. The processor returns to the Thread mode when it has finished exception
processing.
The privilege levels for software execution are:
Unprivileged
The software:
̶
Has limited access to the MSR and MRS instructions, and cannot use the CPS instruction
̶
Cannot access the System Timer, NVIC, or System Control Block
̶
Might have a restricted access to memory or peripherals.
Unprivileged software executes at the unprivileged level.
Privileged
The software can use all the instructions and has access to all resources. Privileged software executes at
the privileged level.
In Thread mode, the Control Register controls whether the software execution is privileged or unprivileged, see
“Control Register”. In Handler mode, software execution is always privileged.
Only privileged software can write to the Control Register to change the privilege level for software execution in
Thread mode. Unprivileged software can use the SVC instruction to make a supervisor call to transfer control to
privileged software.
12.4.1.2
Stacks
The processor uses a full descending stack. This means the stack pointer holds the address of the last stacked
item in memory When the processor pushes a new item onto the stack, it decrements the stack pointer and then
writes the item to the new memory location. The processor implements two stacks, the main stack and the process
stack, with a pointer for each held in independent registers, see “Stack Pointer”.
In Thread mode, the Control Register controls whether the processor uses the main stack or the process stack,
see “Control Register”.
In Handler mode, the processor always uses the main stack.
36
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
The options for processor operations are:
Table 12-1.
Processor
Mode
Used to Execute
Privilege Level for
Software Execution
Thread
Applications
Privileged or unprivileged
Handler
Exception handlers
Always privileged
Note:
12.4.1.3
Summary of processor mode, execution privilege level, and stack use options
1.
Stack Used
(1)
Main stack or process stack(1)
Main stack
See “Control Register”.
Core Registers
Figure 12-2.
Processor Core Registers
R0
R1
R2
Low registers
R3
R4
R5
R6
General-purpose registers
R7
R8
R9
High registers
R10
R11
R12
Stack Pointer
SP (R13)
Link Register
LR (R14)
Program Counter
PC (R15)
PSR
PSP‡
MSP‡
‡
Banked version of SP
Program status register
PRIMASK
FAULTMASK
Exception mask registers
Special registers
BASEPRI
CONTROL
CONTROL register
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
37
Table 12-2.
Core Processor Registers
Register
Name
Access(1)
Required Privilege(2)
Reset
General-purpose registers
R0–R12
Read/Write
Either
Unknown
Stack Pointer
MSP
Read/Write
Privileged
See description
Stack Pointer
PSP
Read/Write
Either
Unknown
Link Register
LR
Read/Write
Either
0xFFFFFFFF
Program Counter
PC
Read/Write
Either
See description
Program Status Register
PSR
Read/Write
Privileged
0x01000000
Application Program Status Register
APSR
Read/Write
Either
0x00000000
Interrupt Program Status Register
IPSR
Read-only
Privileged
0x00000000
Execution Program Status Register
EPSR
Read-only
Privileged
0x01000000
Priority Mask Register
PRIMASK
Read/Write
Privileged
0x00000000
Fault Mask Register
FAULTMASK
Read/Write
Privileged
0x00000000
Base Priority Mask Register
BASEPRI
Read/Write
Privileged
0x00000000
Control Register
CONTROL
Read/Write
Privileged
0x00000000
Notes:
1. Describes access type during program execution in thread mode and Handler mode. Debug access can differ.
2. An entry of Either means privileged and unprivileged software can access the register.
12.4.1.4
General-purpose Registers
R0–R12 are 32-bit general-purpose registers for data operations.
12.4.1.5
Stack Pointer
The Stack Pointer (SP) is register R13. In Thread mode, bit[1] of the Control Register indicates the stack pointer to
use:
0 = Main Stack Pointer (MSP). This is the reset value.
1 = Process Stack Pointer (PSP).
On reset, the processor loads the MSP with the value from address 0x00000000.
12.4.1.6
Link Register
The Link Register (LR) is register R14. It stores the return information for subroutines, function calls, and
exceptions. On reset, the processor loads the LR value 0xFFFFFFFF.
12.4.1.7
Program Counter
The Program Counter (PC) is register R15. It contains the current program address. On reset, the processor loads
the PC with the value of the reset vector, which is at address 0x00000004. Bit[0] of the value is loaded into the
EPSR T-bit at reset and must be 1.
38
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.4.1.8
Program Status Register
Name:
PSR
Access:
Read/Write
Reset:
0x000000000
31
N
30
Z
29
C
28
V
27
Q
26
23
22
21
20
25
24
T
19
18
17
16
12
11
10
9
–
8
ISR_NUMBER
4
3
2
1
0
ICI/IT
–
15
14
13
ICI/IT
7
6
5
ISR_NUMBER
The Program Status Register (PSR) combines:
• Application Program Status Register (APSR)
• Interrupt Program Status Register (IPSR)
• Execution Program Status Register (EPSR).
These registers are mutually exclusive bitfields in the 32-bit PSR.
The PSR accesses these registers individually or as a combination of any two or all three registers, using the register
name as an argument to the MSR or MRS instructions. For example:
• Read of all the registers using PSR with the MRS instruction
• Write to the APSR N, Z, C, V and Q bits using APSR_nzcvq with the MSR instruction.
The PSR combinations and attributes are:
Name
Access
Combination
PSR
Read/Write(1)(2)
APSR, EPSR, and IPSR
IEPSR
Read-only
EPSR and IPSR
IAPSR
APSR and IPSR
(2)
APSR and EPSR
Read/Write
EAPSR
Notes:
(1)
Read/Write
1. The processor ignores writes to the IPSR bits.
2. Reads of the EPSR bits return zero, and the processor ignores writes to these bits.
See the instruction descriptions “MRS” and “MSR” for more information about how to access the program status registers.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
39
12.4.1.9
Application Program Status Register
Name:
APSR
Access:
Read/Write
Reset:
0x000000000
31
N
30
Z
23
22
29
C
28
V
27
Q
26
21
20
19
18
–
15
14
25
–
24
17
16
GE[3:0]
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
–
7
6
5
4
–
The APSR contains the current state of the condition flags from previous instruction executions.
• N: Negative Flag
0: Operation result was positive, zero, greater than, or equal
1: Operation result was negative or less than.
• Z: Zero Flag
0: Operation result was not zero
1: Operation result was zero.
• C: Carry or Borrow Flag
Carry or borrow flag:
0: Add operation did not result in a carry bit or subtract operation resulted in a borrow bit
1: Add operation resulted in a carry bit or subtract operation did not result in a borrow bit.
• V: Overflow Flag
0: Operation did not result in an overflow
1: Operation resulted in an overflow.
• Q: DSP Overflow and Saturation Flag
Sticky saturation flag:
0: Indicates that saturation has not occurred since reset or since the bit was last cleared to zero
1: Indicates when an SSAT or USAT instruction results in saturation.
This bit is cleared to zero by software using an MRS instruction.
• GE[19:16]: Greater Than or Equal Flags
See “SEL” for more information.
40
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.4.1.10
Interrupt Program Status Register
Name:
IPSR
Access:
Read/Write
Reset:
0x000000000
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
–
23
22
21
20
–
15
14
13
12
–
11
10
9
8
ISR_NUMBER
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ISR_NUMBER
The IPSR contains the exception type number of the current Interrupt Service Routine (ISR).
• ISR_NUMBER: Number of the Current Exception
0 = Thread mode
1 = Reserved
2 = NMI
3 = Hard fault
4 = Memory management fault
5 = Bus fault
6 = Usage fault
7–10 = Reserved
11 = SVCall
12 = Reserved for Debug
13 = Reserved
14 = PendSV
15 = SysTick
16 = IRQ0
61 = IRQ46
See “Exception Types” for more information.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
41
12.4.1.11
Execution Program Status Register
Name:
EPSR
Access:
Read/Write
Reset:
0x000000000
31
30
23
22
29
–
28
21
20
27
26
25
24
T
16
ICI/IT
19
18
17
11
10
9
–
15
14
13
12
ICI/IT
7
6
5
8
–
4
3
2
1
0
–
The EPSR contains the Thumb state bit, and the execution state bits for either the If-Then (IT) instruction, or the Interruptible-Continuable Instruction (ICI) field for an interrupted load multiple or store multiple instruction.
Attempts to read the EPSR directly through application software using the MSR instruction always return zero. Attempts to
write the EPSR using the MSR instruction in the application software are ignored. Fault handlers can examine the EPSR
value in the stacked PSR to indicate the operation that is at fault. See “Exception Entry and Return”.
• ICI: Interruptible-continuable Instruction
When an interrupt occurs during the execution of an LDM, STM, PUSH, POP, VLDM, VSTM, VPUSH, or VPOP instruction,
the processor:
– Stops the load multiple or store multiple instruction operation temporarily
– Stores the next register operand in the multiple operation to EPSR bits[15:12].
After servicing the interrupt, the processor:
– Returns to the register pointed to by bits[15:12]
– Resumes the execution of the multiple load or store instruction.
When the EPSR holds the ICI execution state, bits[26:25,11:10] are zero.
• IT: If-Then Instruction
Indicates the execution state bits of the IT instruction.
The If-Then block contains up to four instructions following an IT instruction. Each instruction in the block is conditional.
The conditions for the instructions are either all the same, or some can be the inverse of others. See “IT” for more
information.
• T: Thumb State
The Cortex-M4 processor only supports the execution of instructions in Thumb state. The following can clear the T bit to 0:
– Instructions BLX, BX and POP{PC}
– Restoration from the stacked xPSR value on an exception return
– Bit[0] of the vector value on an exception entry or reset.
Attempting to execute instructions when the T bit is 0 results in a fault or lockup. See “Lockup” for more information.
42
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.4.1.12
Exception Mask Registers
The exception mask registers disable the handling of exceptions by the processor. Disable exceptions where they
might impact on timing critical tasks.
To access the exception mask registers use the MSR and MRS instructions, or the CPS instruction to change the
value of PRIMASK or FAULTMASK. See “MRS”, “MSR”, and “CPS” for more information.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
43
12.4.1.13
Priority Mask Register
Name:
PRIMASK
Access:
Read/Write
Reset:
0x000000000
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
PRIMASK
–
23
22
21
20
–
15
14
13
12
–
7
6
5
4
–
The PRIMASK register prevents the activation of all exceptions with a configurable priority.
• PRIMASK
0: No effect
1: Prevents the activation of all exceptions with a configurable priority.
44
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.4.1.14
Fault Mask Register
Name:
FAULTMASK
Access:
Read/Write
Reset:
0x000000000
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
FAULTMASK
–
23
22
21
20
–
15
14
13
12
–
7
6
5
4
–
The FAULTMASK register prevents the activation of all exceptions except for Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI).
• FAULTMASK
0: No effect.
1: Prevents the activation of all exceptions except for NMI.
The processor clears the FAULTMASK bit to 0 on exit from any exception handler except the NMI handler.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
45
12.4.1.15
Base Priority Mask Register
Name:
BASEPRI
Access:
Read/Write
Reset:
0x000000000
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
–
23
22
21
20
–
15
14
13
12
–
7
6
5
4
BASEPRI
The BASEPRI register defines the minimum priority for exception processing. When BASEPRI is set to a nonzero value, it
prevents the activation of all exceptions with same or lower priority level as the BASEPRI value.
• BASEPRI
Priority mask bits:
0x0000: No effect
Nonzero: Defines the base priority for exception processing
The processor does not process any exception with a priority value greater than or equal to BASEPRI.
This field is similar to the priority fields in the interrupt priority registers. The processor implements only bits[7:4] of this
field, bits[3:0] read as zero and ignore writes. See “Interrupt Priority Registers” for more information. Remember that higher
priority field values correspond to lower exception priorities.
46
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.4.1.16
Control Register
Name:
CONTROL
Access:
Read/Write
Reset:
0x000000000
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
FPCA
1
SPSEL
0
nPRIV
–
23
22
21
20
–
15
14
13
12
–
7
6
5
–
4
The Control Register controls the stack used and the privilege level for software execution when the processor is in Thread
mode and indicates whether the FPU state is active.
• FPCA: Floating-point Context Active
Indicates whether the floating-point context is currently active:
0: No floating-point context active.
1: Floating-point context active.
The Cortex-M4 uses this bit to determine whether to preserve the floating-point state when processing an exception.
• SPSEL: Active Stack Pointer
Defines the current stack:
0: MSP is the current stack pointer.
1: PSP is the current stack pointer.
In Handler mode, this bit reads as zero and ignores writes. The Cortex-M4 updates this bit automatically on exception
return.
• nPRIV: Thread Mode Privilege Level
Defines the Thread mode privilege level:
0: Privileged.
1: Unprivileged.
Handler mode always uses the MSP, so the processor ignores explicit writes to the active stack pointer bit of the Control
Register when in Handler mode. The exception entry and return mechanisms update the Control Register based on the
EXC_RETURN value.
In an OS environment, ARM recommends that threads running in Thread mode use the process stack, and the kernel and
exception handlers use the main stack.
By default, the Thread mode uses the MSP. To switch the stack pointer used in Thread mode to the PSP, either:
• Use the MSR instruction to set the Active stack pointer bit to 1, see “MSR”, or
• Perform an exception return to Thread mode with the appropriate EXC_RETURN value, see Table 12-10.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
47
Note: When changing the stack pointer, the software must use an ISB instruction immediately after the MSR instruction. This ensures
that instructions after the ISB execute using the new stack pointer. See “ISB”.
12.4.1.17
Exceptions and Interrupts
The Cortex-M4 processor supports interrupts and system exceptions. The processor and the Nested Vectored
Interrupt Controller (NVIC) prioritize and handle all exceptions. An exception changes the normal flow of software
control. The processor uses the Handler mode to handle all exceptions except for reset. See “Exception Entry” and
“Exception Return” for more information.
The NVIC registers control interrupt handling. See “Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC)” for more
information.
12.4.1.18
Data Types
The processor supports the following data types:
32-bit words
16-bit halfwords
8-bit bytes
The processor manages all data memory accesses as little-endian. Instruction memory and Private
Peripheral Bus (PPB) accesses are always little-endian. See “Memory Regions, Types and Attributes” for
more information.
12.4.1.19
Cortex Microcontroller Software Interface Standard (CMSIS)
For a Cortex-M4 microcontroller system, the Cortex Microcontroller Software Interface Standard (CMSIS) defines:
A common way to:
̶
Access peripheral registers
̶
Define exception vectors
The names of:
̶
The registers of the core peripherals
̶
The core exception vectors
A device-independent interface for RTOS kernels, including a debug channel.
The CMSIS includes address definitions and data structures for the core peripherals in the Cortex-M4 processor.
The CMSIS simplifies the software development by enabling the reuse of template code and the combination of
CMSIS-compliant software components from various middleware vendors. Software vendors can expand the
CMSIS to include their peripheral definitions and access functions for those peripherals.
This document includes the register names defined by the CMSIS, and gives short descriptions of the CMSIS
functions that address the processor core and the core peripherals.
Note:
This document uses the register short names defined by the CMSIS. In a few cases, these differ from the architectural
short names that might be used in other documents.
The following sections give more information about the CMSIS:
48
Section 12.5.3 ”Power Management Programming Hints”
Section 12.6.2 ”CMSIS Functions”
Section 12.8.2.1 ”NVIC Programming Hints”.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.4.2 Memory Model
This section describes the processor memory map, the behavior of memory accesses, and the bit-banding
features. The processor has a fixed memory map that provides up to 4 GB of addressable memory.
Figure 12-3.
Memory Map
0xFFFFFFFF
Vendor-specific
511 MB
memory
Private peripheral
1.0 MB
bus
External device
0xE0100000
0xE00FFFFF
0xE000 0000
0x DFFFFFFF
1.0 GB
0xA0000000
0x9FFFFFFF
External RAM
0x43FFFFFF
1.0 GB
32 MB Bit-band alias
0x60000000
0x5FFFFFFF
0x42000000
0x400FFFFF
0x40000000
Peripheral
0.5 GB
1 MB Bit-band region
0x40000000
0x3FFFFFFF
0x23FFFFFF
32 MB Bit-band alias
SRAM
0.5 GB
0x20000000
0x1FFFFFFF
0x22000000
Code
0x200FFFFF
0x20000000
1 MB Bit-band region
0.5 GB
0x00000000
The regions for SRAM and peripherals include bit-band regions. Bit-banding provides atomic operations to bit
data, see “Bit-banding”.
The processor reserves regions of the Private peripheral bus (PPB) address range for core peripheral registers.
This memory mapping is generic to ARM Cortex-M4 products. To get the specific memory mapping of this product,
refer to the Memories section of the datasheet.
12.4.2.1
Memory Regions, Types and Attributes
The memory map and the programming of the MPU split the memory map into regions. Each region has a defined
memory type, and some regions have additional memory attributes. The memory type and attributes determine the
behavior of accesses to the region.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
49
Memory Types
Normal
The processor can re-order transactions for efficiency, or perform speculative reads.
Device
The processor preserves transaction order relative to other transactions to Device or Strongly-ordered
memory.
Strongly-ordered
The processor preserves transaction order relative to all other transactions.
The different ordering requirements for Device and Strongly-ordered memory mean that the memory system can
buffer a write to Device memory, but must not buffer a write to Strongly-ordered memory.
Additional Memory Attributes
Shareable
For a shareable memory region, the memory system provides data synchronization between bus masters in
a system with multiple bus masters, for example, a processor with a DMA controller.
Strongly-ordered memory is always shareable.
If multiple bus masters can access a non-shareable memory region, the software must ensure data
coherency between the bus masters.
Execute Never (XN)
Means the processor prevents instruction accesses. A fault exception is generated only on execution of an
instruction executed from an XN region.
12.4.2.2
Memory System Ordering of Memory Accesses
For most memory accesses caused by explicit memory access instructions, the memory system does not
guarantee that the order in which the accesses complete matches the program order of the instructions, providing
this does not affect the behavior of the instruction sequence. Normally, if correct program execution depends on
two memory accesses completing in program order, the software must insert a memory barrier instruction between
the memory access instructions, see “Software Ordering of Memory Accesses”.
However, the memory system does guarantee some ordering of accesses to Device and Strongly-ordered
memory. For two memory access instructions A1 and A2, if A1 occurs before A2 in program order, the ordering of
the memory accesses is described below.
Table 12-3.
Ordering of the Memory Accesses Caused by Two Instructions
A2
Device Access
Normal
Access
Nonshareable
Shareable
Stronglyordered
Access
Normal Access
–
–
–
–
Device access, non-shareable
–
<
–
<
Device access, shareable
–
–
<
<
Strongly-ordered access
–
<
<
<
A1
Where:
50
–
Means that the memory system does not guarantee the ordering of the accesses.
<
Means that accesses are observed in program order, that is, A1 is always observed
before A2.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.4.2.3
Behavior of Memory Accesses
The following table describes the behavior of accesses to each region in the memory map.
Table 12-4.
Memory Access Behavior
Address Range
Memory Region
Memory
Type
XN
0x00000000–0x1FFFFFFF
Code
Normal(1)
–
Executable region for program code. Data can also be
put here.
0x20000000–0x3FFFFFFF
SRAM
Normal (1)
–
Executable region for data. Code can also be put here.
This region includes bit band and bit band alias areas,
see Table 12-6.
0x40000000–0x5FFFFFFF
Peripheral
Device (1)
XN
This region includes bit band and bit band alias areas,
see Table 12-6.
0x60000000–0x9FFFFFFF
External RAM
Normal (1)
–
0xA0000000–0xDFFFFFFF
External device
Device
0xE0000000–0xE00FFFFF
Private Peripheral Bus
0xE0100000–0xFFFFFFFF
Reserved
Note:
(1)
Description
Executable region for data
XN
External Device memory
Stronglyordered (1)
XN
This region includes the NVIC, system timer, and system
control block.
Device (1)
XN
Reserved
1. See “Memory Regions, Types and Attributes” for more information.
The Code, SRAM, and external RAM regions can hold programs. However, ARM recommends that programs
always use the Code region. This is because the processor has separate buses that enable instruction fetches and
data accesses to occur simultaneously.
The MPU can override the default memory access behavior described in this section. For more information, see
“Memory Protection Unit (MPU)”.
Additional Memory Access Constraints For Shared Memory
When a system includes shared memory, some memory regions have additional access constraints, and some
regions are subdivided, as Table 12-5 shows.
Table 12-5.
Memory Region Shareability Policies
Address Range
Memory Region
Memory Type
Shareability
(1)
–
0x00000000–0x1FFFFFFF
Code
Normal
0x20000000–0x3FFFFFFF
SRAM
Normal (1)
–
0x40000000–0x5FFFFFFF
Peripheral
Device (1)
–
External RAM
Normal (1)
–
External device
Device (1)
0xE0000000–0xE00FFFFF
Private Peripheral Bus
Strongly-ordered(1)
Shareable (1)
0xE0100000–0xFFFFFFFF
Vendor-specific device
Device (1)
–
0x60000000–0x7FFFFFFF
0x80000000–0x9FFFFFFF
0xA0000000–0xBFFFFFFF
Shareable (1)
Non-shareable (1)
0xC0000000–0xDFFFFFFF
Notes:
1. See “Memory Regions, Types and Attributes” for more information.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
51
Instruction Prefetch and Branch Prediction
The Cortex-M4 processor:
Prefetches instructions ahead of execution
Speculatively prefetches from branch target addresses.
12.4.2.4
Software Ordering of Memory Accesses
The order of instructions in the program flow does not always guarantee the order of the corresponding memory
transactions. This is because:
The processor can reorder some memory accesses to improve efficiency, providing this does not affect the
behavior of the instruction sequence.
The processor has multiple bus interfaces
Memory or devices in the memory map have different wait states
Some memory accesses are buffered or speculative.
“Memory System Ordering of Memory Accesses” describes the cases where the memory system guarantees the
order of memory accesses. Otherwise, if the order of memory accesses is critical, the software must include
memory barrier instructions to force that ordering. The processor provides the following memory barrier
instructions:
DMB
The Data Memory Barrier (DMB) instruction ensures that outstanding memory transactions complete before
subsequent memory transactions. See “DMB”.
DSB
The Data Synchronization Barrier (DSB) instruction ensures that outstanding memory transactions complete
before subsequent instructions execute. See “DSB”.
ISB
The Instruction Synchronization Barrier (ISB) ensures that the effect of all completed memory transactions is
recognizable by subsequent instructions. See “ISB”.
MPU Programming
Use a DSB followed by an ISB instruction or exception return to ensure that the new MPU configuration is used by
subsequent instructions.
12.4.2.5
Bit-banding
A bit-band region maps each word in a bit-band alias region to a single bit in the bit-band region. The bit-band
regions occupy the lowest 1 MB of the SRAM and peripheral memory regions.
The memory map has two 32 MB alias regions that map to two 1 MB bit-band regions:
52
Accesses to the 32 MB SRAM alias region map to the 1 MB SRAM bit-band region, as shown in Table 12-6.
Accesses to the 32 MB peripheral alias region map to the 1 MB peripheral bit-band region, as shown in
Table 12-7.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Table 12-6.
SRAM Memory Bit-banding Regions
Address Range
Memory Region
Instruction and Data Accesses
0x20000000–0x200FFFFF
SRAM bit-band region
Direct accesses to this memory range behave as SRAM memory accesses,
but this region is also bit-addressable through bit-band alias.
0x22000000–0x23FFFFFF
SRAM bit-band alias
Data accesses to this region are remapped to bit-band region. A write
operation is performed as read-modify-write. Instruction accesses are not
remapped.
Table 12-7.
Peripheral Memory Bit-banding Regions
Address Range
Memory Region
Instruction and Data Accesses
0x40000000–0x400FFFFF
Peripheral bit-band alias
Direct accesses to this memory range behave as peripheral memory
accesses, but this region is also bit-addressable through bit-band alias.
0x42000000–0x43FFFFFF
Peripheral bit-band region
Data accesses to this region are remapped to bit-band region. A write
operation is performed as read-modify-write. Instruction accesses are not
permitted.
Notes:
1. A word access to the SRAM or peripheral bit-band alias regions map to a single bit in the SRAM or peripheral bit-band
region.
2. Bit-band accesses can use byte, halfword, or word transfers. The bit-band transfer size matches the transfer size of the
instruction making the bit-band access.
The following formula shows how the alias region maps onto the bit-band region:
bit_word_offset = (byte_offset x 32) + (bit_number x 4)
bit_word_addr = bit_band_base + bit_word_offset
where:
Bit_word_offset is the position of the target bit in the bit-band memory region.
Bit_word_addr is the address of the word in the alias memory region that maps to the targeted bit.
Bit_band_base is the starting address of the alias region.
Byte_offset is the number of the byte in the bit-band region that contains the targeted bit.
Bit_number is the bit position, 0–7, of the targeted bit.
Figure 12-4 shows examples of bit-band mapping between the SRAM bit-band alias region and the SRAM bitband region:
The alias word at 0x23FFFFE0 maps to bit[0] of the bit-band byte at 0x200FFFFF: 0x23FFFFE0 =
0x22000000 + (0xFFFFF*32) + (0*4).
The alias word at 0x23FFFFFC maps to bit[7] of the bit-band byte at 0x200FFFFF: 0x23FFFFFC =
0x22000000 + (0xFFFFF*32) + (7*4).
The alias word at 0x22000000 maps to bit[0] of the bit-band byte at 0x20000000: 0x22000000 =
0x22000000 + (0*32) + (0*4).
The alias word at 0x2200001C maps to bit[7] of the bit-band byte at 0x20000000: 0x2200001C =
0x22000000+ (0*32) + (7*4).
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
53
Figure 12-4.
Bit-band Mapping
32 MB alias region
0x23FFFFFC
0x23FFFFF8
0x23FFFFF4
0x23FFFFF0
0x23FFFFEC
0x23FFFFE8
0x23FFFFE4
0x23FFFFE0
0x2200001C
0x22000018
0x22000014
0x22000010
0x2200000C
0x22000008
0x22000004
0x22000000
1 MB SRAM bit-band region
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
0x200FFFFF
7
6
5
4
3
2
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
0x200FFFFE
1
0
7
6
0x20000003
5
4
3
2
0x20000002
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
0x200FFFFD
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
0
0x200FFFFC
1
0
7
0x20000001
6
5
4
3
2
0x20000000
Directly Accessing an Alias Region
Writing to a word in the alias region updates a single bit in the bit-band region.
Bit[0] of the value written to a word in the alias region determines the value written to the targeted bit in the bitband region. Writing a value with bit[0] set to 1 writes a 1 to the bit-band bit, and writing a value with bit[0] set to 0
writes a 0 to the bit-band bit.
Bits[31:1] of the alias word have no effect on the bit-band bit. Writing 0x01 has the same effect as writing 0xFF.
Writing 0x00 has the same effect as writing 0x0E.
Reading a word in the alias region:
0x00000000 indicates that the targeted bit in the bit-band region is set to 0
0x00000001 indicates that the targeted bit in the bit-band region is set to 1
Directly Accessing a Bit-band Region
“Behavior of Memory Accesses” describes the behavior of direct byte, halfword, or word accesses to the bit-band
regions.
12.4.2.6
Memory Endianness
The processor views memory as a linear collection of bytes numbered in ascending order from zero. For example,
bytes 0–3 hold the first stored word, and bytes 4–7 hold the second stored word. “Little-endian Format” describes
how words of data are stored in memory.
Little-endian Format
In little-endian format, the processor stores the least significant byte of a word at the lowest-numbered byte, and
the most significant byte at the highest-numbered byte. For example:
54
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 12-5.
Little-endian Format
Memory
7
Register
0
31
12.4.2.7
Address A
B0
A+1
B1
A+2
B2
A+3
B3
lsbyte
24 23
B3
16 15
B2
8 7
B1
0
B0
msbyte
Synchronization Primitives
The Cortex-M4 instruction set includes pairs of synchronization primitives. These provide a non-blocking
mechanism that a thread or process can use to obtain exclusive access to a memory location. The software can
use them to perform a guaranteed read-modify-write memory update sequence, or for a semaphore mechanism.
A pair of synchronization primitives comprises:
A Load-exclusive Instruction, used to read the value of a memory location, requesting exclusive access to that
location.
A Store-Exclusive instruction, used to attempt to write to the same memory location, returning a status bit to a
register. If this bit is:
0: It indicates that the thread or process gained exclusive access to the memory, and the write succeeds,
1: It indicates that the thread or process did not gain exclusive access to the memory, and no write is
performed.
The pairs of Load-Exclusive and Store-Exclusive instructions are:
The word instructions LDREX and STREX
The halfword instructions LDREXH and STREXH
The byte instructions LDREXB and STREXB.
The software must use a Load-Exclusive instruction with the corresponding Store-Exclusive instruction.
To perform an exclusive read-modify-write of a memory location, the software must:
1. Use a Load-Exclusive instruction to read the value of the location.
2.
Update the value, as required.
3.
Use a Store-Exclusive instruction to attempt to write the new value back to the memory location
4.
Test the returned status bit. If this bit is:
0: The read-modify-write completed successfully.
1: No write was performed. This indicates that the value returned at step 1 might be out of date. The
software must retry the read-modify-write sequence.
The software can use the synchronization primitives to implement a semaphore as follows:
1. Use a Load-Exclusive instruction to read from the semaphore address to check whether the semaphore
is free.
2.
If the semaphore is free, use a Store-Exclusive instruction to write the claim value to the semaphore
address.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
55
3.
If the returned status bit from step 2 indicates that the Store-Exclusive instruction succeeded then the
software has claimed the semaphore. However, if the Store-Exclusive instruction failed, another process
might have claimed the semaphore after the software performed the first step.
The Cortex-M4 includes an exclusive access monitor, that tags the fact that the processor has executed a LoadExclusive instruction. If the processor is part of a multiprocessor system, the system also globally tags the memory
locations addressed by exclusive accesses by each processor.
The processor removes its exclusive access tag if:
It executes a CLREX instruction
It executes a Store-Exclusive instruction, regardless of whether the write succeeds.
An exception occurs. This means that the processor can resolve semaphore conflicts between different
threads.
In a multiprocessor implementation:
Executing a CLREX instruction removes only the local exclusive access tag for the processor
Executing a Store-Exclusive instruction, or an exception, removes the local exclusive access tags, and all
global exclusive access tags for the processor.
For more information about the synchronization primitive instructions, see “LDREX and STREX” and “CLREX”.
12.4.2.8
Programming Hints for the Synchronization Primitives
ISO/IEC C cannot directly generate the exclusive access instructions. CMSIS provides intrinsic functions for
generation of these instructions:
Table 12-8.
CMSIS Functions for Exclusive Access Instructions
Instruction
CMSIS Function
LDREX
uint32_t __LDREXW (uint32_t *addr)
LDREXH
uint16_t __LDREXH (uint16_t *addr)
LDREXB
uint8_t __LDREXB (uint8_t *addr)
STREX
uint32_t __STREXW (uint32_t value, uint32_t *addr)
STREXH
uint32_t __STREXH (uint16_t value, uint16_t *addr)
STREXB
uint32_t __STREXB (uint8_t value, uint8_t *addr)
CLREX
void __CLREX (void)
The actual exclusive access instruction generated depends on the data type of the pointer passed to the intrinsic
function. For example, the following C code generates the required LDREXB operation:
__ldrex((volatile char *) 0xFF);
56
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.4.3 Exception Model
This section describes the exception model.
12.4.3.1
Exception States
Each exception is in one of the following states:
Inactive
The exception is not active and not pending.
Pending
The exception is waiting to be serviced by the processor.
An interrupt request from a peripheral or from software can change the state of the corresponding interrupt to
pending.
Active
An exception is being serviced by the processor but has not completed.
An exception handler can interrupt the execution of another exception handler. In this case, both exceptions are in
the active state.
Active and Pending
The exception is being serviced by the processor and there is a pending exception from the same source.
12.4.3.2
Exception Types
The exception types are:
Reset
Reset is invoked on power up or a warm reset. The exception model treats reset as a special form of exception.
When reset is asserted, the operation of the processor stops, potentially at any point in an instruction. When reset
is deasserted, execution restarts from the address provided by the reset entry in the vector table. Execution
restarts as privileged execution in Thread mode.
Non Maskable Interrupt (NMI)
A non maskable interrupt (NMI) can be signalled by a peripheral or triggered by software. This is the highest
priority exception other than reset. It is permanently enabled and has a fixed priority of -2.
NMIs cannot be:
Masked or prevented from activation by any other exception.
Preempted by any exception other than Reset.
Hard Fault
A hard fault is an exception that occurs because of an error during exception processing, or because an exception
cannot be managed by any other exception mechanism. Hard Faults have a fixed priority of -1, meaning they have
higher priority than any exception with configurable priority.
Memory Management Fault (MemManage)
A Memory Management Fault is an exception that occurs because of a memory protection related fault. The MPU
or the fixed memory protection constraints determines this fault, for both instruction and data memory transactions.
This fault is used to abort instruction accesses to Execute Never (XN) memory regions, even if the MPU is
disabled.
Bus Fault
A Bus Fault is an exception that occurs because of a memory related fault for an instruction or data memory
transaction. This might be from an error detected on a bus in the memory system.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
57
Usage Fault
A Usage Fault is an exception that occurs because of a fault related to an instruction execution. This includes:
An undefined instruction
An illegal unaligned access
An invalid state on instruction execution
An error on exception return.
The following can cause a Usage Fault when the core is configured to report them:
An unaligned address on word and halfword memory access
A division by zero.
SVCall
A supervisor call (SVC) is an exception that is triggered by the SVC instruction. In an OS environment, applications
can use SVC instructions to access OS kernel functions and device drivers.
PendSV
PendSV is an interrupt-driven request for system-level service. In an OS environment, use PendSV for context
switching when no other exception is active.
SysTick
A SysTick exception is an exception the system timer generates when it reaches zero. Software can also generate
a SysTick exception. In an OS environment, the processor can use this exception as system tick.
Interrupt (IRQ)
A interrupt, or IRQ, is an exception signalled by a peripheral, or generated by a software request. All interrupts are
asynchronous to instruction execution. In the system, peripherals use interrupts to communicate with the
processor.
Table 12-9.
Properties of the Different Exception Types
Exception
Number (1)
Irq Number (1)
Exception Type
Priority
Vector Address
or Offset (2)
Activation
1
–
Reset
-3, the highest
0x00000004
Asynchronous
2
-14
NMI
-2
0x00000008
Asynchronous
3
-13
Hard fault
-1
0x0000000C
–
4
-12
Memory
management fault
Configurable (3)
0x00000010
Synchronous
5
-11
Bus fault
Configurable (3)
0x00000014
Synchronous when precise,
asynchronous when imprecise
6
-10
Usage fault
Configurable (3)
0x00000018
Synchronous
7–10
–
–
–
Reserved
–
0x0000002C
Synchronous
Reserved
–
Asynchronous
(3)
11
-5
SVCall
Configurable
12–13
–
–
–
14
-2
PendSV
Configurable (3)
0x00000038
SysTick
(3)
0x0000003C
15
-1
16 and above
Notes:
58
0 and above
Interrupt (IRQ)
Configurable
(4)
Configurable
0x00000040 and above
Asynchronous
(5)
Asynchronous
1. To simplify the software layer, the CMSIS only uses IRQ numbers and therefore uses negative values for exceptions other
than interrupts. The IPSR returns the Exception number, see “Interrupt Program Status Register”.
2. See “Vector Table” for more information
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
3. See “System Handler Priority Registers”
4. See “Interrupt Priority Registers”
5. Increasing in steps of 4.
For an asynchronous exception, other than reset, the processor can execute another instruction between when the
exception is triggered and when the processor enters the exception handler.
Privileged software can disable the exceptions that Table 12-9 shows as having configurable priority, see:
“System Handler Control and State Register”
“Interrupt Clear-enable Registers”.
For more information about hard faults, memory management faults, bus faults, and usage faults, see “Fault
Handling”.
12.4.3.3
Exception Handlers
The processor handles exceptions using:
12.4.3.4
Interrupt Service Routines (ISRs)
Interrupts IRQ0 to IRQ46 are the exceptions handled by ISRs.
Fault Handlers
Hard fault, memory management fault, usage fault, bus fault are fault exceptions handled by the fault
handlers.
System Handlers
NMI, PendSV, SVCall SysTick, and the fault exceptions are all system exceptions that are handled by
system handlers.
Vector Table
The vector table contains the reset value of the stack pointer, and the start addresses, also called exception
vectors, for all exception handlers. Figure 12-6 shows the order of the exception vectors in the vector table. The
least-significant bit of each vector must be 1, indicating that the exception handler is Thumb code.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
59
Figure 12-6.
Vector Table
Exception number IRQ number
255
239
.
.
.
18
2
17
1
16
0
15
-1
14
-2
13
IRQ239
0x03FC
.
.
.
0x004C
.
.
.
IRQ2
0x0048
IRQ1
0x0044
IRQ0
0x0040
SysTick
0x003C
PendSV
0x0038
12
11
Vector
Offset
Reserved
Reserved for Debug
-5
10
SVCall
0x002C
9
Reserved
8
7
6
-10
5
-11
4
-12
3
-13
2
-14
1
Usage fault
0x0018
0x0014
0x0010
Bus fault
Memory management fault
Hard fault
0x000C
NMI
0x0008
0x0004
0x0000
Reset
Initial SP value
On system reset, the vector table is fixed at address 0x00000000. Privileged software can write to the SCB_VTOR
to relocate the vector table start address to a different memory location, in the range 0x00000080 to 0x3FFFFF80,
see “Vector Table Offset Register”.
12.4.3.5
Exception Priorities
As Table 12-9 shows, all exceptions have an associated priority, with:
A lower priority value indicating a higher priority
Configurable priorities for all exceptions except Reset, Hard fault and NMI.
If the software does not configure any priorities, then all exceptions with a configurable priority have a priority of 0.
For information about configuring exception priorities see “System Handler Priority Registers”, and “Interrupt
Priority Registers”.
Note:
Configurable priority values are in the range 0–15. This means that the Reset, Hard fault, and NMI exceptions, with
fixed negative priority values, always have higher priority than any other exception.
For example, assigning a higher priority value to IRQ[0] and a lower priority value to IRQ[1] means that IRQ[1] has
higher priority than IRQ[0]. If both IRQ[1] and IRQ[0] are asserted, IRQ[1] is processed before IRQ[0].
If multiple pending exceptions have the same priority, the pending exception with the lowest exception number
takes precedence. For example, if both IRQ[0] and IRQ[1] are pending and have the same priority, then IRQ[0] is
processed before IRQ[1].
60
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
When the processor is executing an exception handler, the exception handler is preempted if a higher priority
exception occurs. If an exception occurs with the same priority as the exception being handled, the handler is not
preempted, irrespective of the exception number. However, the status of the new interrupt changes to pending.
12.4.3.6
Interrupt Priority Grouping
To increase priority control in systems with interrupts, the NVIC supports priority grouping. This divides each
interrupt priority register entry into two fields:
An upper field that defines the group priority
A lower field that defines a subpriority within the group.
Only the group priority determines preemption of interrupt exceptions. When the processor is executing an
interrupt exception handler, another interrupt with the same group priority as the interrupt being handled does not
preempt the handler.
If multiple pending interrupts have the same group priority, the subpriority field determines the order in which they
are processed. If multiple pending interrupts have the same group priority and subpriority, the interrupt with the
lowest IRQ number is processed first.
For information about splitting the interrupt priority fields into group priority and subpriority, see “Application
Interrupt and Reset Control Register”.
12.4.3.7
Exception Entry and Return
Descriptions of exception handling use the following terms:
Preemption
When the processor is executing an exception handler, an exception can preempt the exception handler if its
priority is higher than the priority of the exception being handled. See “Interrupt Priority Grouping” for more
information about preemption by an interrupt.
When one exception preempts another, the exceptions are called nested exceptions. See “Exception Entry” more
information.
Return
This occurs when the exception handler is completed, and:
There is no pending exception with sufficient priority to be serviced
The completed exception handler was not handling a late-arriving exception.
The processor pops the stack and restores the processor state to the state it had before the interrupt occurred.
See “Exception Return” for more information.
Tail-chaining
This mechanism speeds up exception servicing. On completion of an exception handler, if there is a pending
exception that meets the requirements for exception entry, the stack pop is skipped and control transfers to the
new exception handler.
Late-arriving
This mechanism speeds up preemption. If a higher priority exception occurs during state saving for a previous
exception, the processor switches to handle the higher priority exception and initiates the vector fetch for that
exception. State saving is not affected by late arrival because the state saved is the same for both exceptions.
Therefore the state saving continues uninterrupted. The processor can accept a late arriving exception until the
first instruction of the exception handler of the original exception enters the execute stage of the processor. On
return from the exception handler of the late-arriving exception, the normal tail-chaining rules apply.
Exception Entry
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
61
An Exception entry occurs when there is a pending exception with sufficient priority and either the processor is in
Thread mode, or the new exception is of a higher priority than the exception being handled, in which case the new
exception preempts the original exception.
When one exception preempts another, the exceptions are nested.
Sufficient priority means that the exception has more priority than any limits set by the mask registers, see
“Exception Mask Registers”. An exception with less priority than this is pending but is not handled by the
processor.
When the processor takes an exception, unless the exception is a tail-chained or a late-arriving exception, the
processor pushes information onto the current stack. This operation is referred as stacking and the structure of
eight data words is referred to as stack frame.
When using floating-point routines, the Cortex-M4 processor automatically stacks the architected floating-point
state on exception entry. Figure 12-7 ”Exception Stack Frame” shows the Cortex-M4 stack frame layout when
floating-point state is preserved on the stack as the result of an interrupt or an exception.
Note:
Where stack space for floating-point state is not allocated, the stack frame is the same as that of ARMv7-M
implementations without an FPU. Figure 12-7 ”Exception Stack Frame” shows this stack frame also.
Figure 12-7.
Exception Stack Frame
...
{aligner}
FPSCR
S15
S14
S13
S12
S11
S10
S9
S8
S7
S6
S5
S4
S3
S2
S1
S0
xPSR
PC
LR
R12
R3
R2
R1
R0
Pre-IRQ top of stack
Decreasing
memory
address
IRQ top of stack
Exception frame with
floating-point storage
...
{aligner}
xPSR
PC
LR
R12
R3
R2
R1
R0
Pre-IRQ top of stack
IRQ top of stack
Exception frame without
floating-point storage
Immediately after stacking, the stack pointer indicates the lowest address in the stack frame. The alignment of the
stack frame is controlled via the STKALIGN bit of the Configuration Control Register (CCR).
The stack frame includes the return address. This is the address of the next instruction in the interrupted program.
This value is restored to the PC at exception return so that the interrupted program resumes.
62
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
In parallel to the stacking operation, the processor performs a vector fetch that reads the exception handler start
address from the vector table. When stacking is complete, the processor starts executing the exception handler. At
the same time, the processor writes an EXC_RETURN value to the LR. This indicates which stack pointer
corresponds to the stack frame and what operation mode the processor was in before the entry occurred.
If no higher priority exception occurs during the exception entry, the processor starts executing the exception
handler and automatically changes the status of the corresponding pending interrupt to active.
If another higher priority exception occurs during the exception entry, the processor starts executing the exception
handler for this exception and does not change the pending status of the earlier exception. This is the late arrival
case.
Exception Return
An Exception return occurs when the processor is in Handler mode and executes one of the following instructions
to load the EXC_RETURN value into the PC:
An LDM or POP instruction that loads the PC
An LDR instruction with the PC as the destination.
A BX instruction using any register.
EXC_RETURN is the value loaded into the LR on exception entry. The exception mechanism relies on this value
to detect when the processor has completed an exception handler. The lowest five bits of this value provide
information on the return stack and processor mode. Table 12-10 shows the EXC_RETURN values with a
description of the exception return behavior.
All EXC_RETURN values have bits[31:5] set to one. When this value is loaded into the PC, it indicates to the
processor that the exception is complete, and the processor initiates the appropriate exception return sequence.
Table 12-10.
Exception Return Behavior
EXC_RETURN[31:0]
Description
0xFFFFFFF1
Return to Handler mode, exception return uses non-floating-point state
from the MSP and execution uses MSP after return.
0xFFFFFFF9
Return to Thread mode, exception return uses state from MSP and
execution uses MSP after return.
0xFFFFFFFD
Return to Thread mode, exception return uses state from the PSP and
execution uses PSP after return.
0xFFFFFFE1
Return to Handler mode, exception return uses floating-point-state from
MSP and execution uses MSP after return.
0xFFFFFFE9
Return to Thread mode, exception return uses floating-point state from
MSP and execution uses MSP after return.
0xFFFFFFED
Return to Thread mode, exception return uses floating-point state from PSP
and execution uses PSP after return.
12.4.3.8
Fault Handling
Faults are a subset of the exceptions, see “Exception Model”. The following generate a fault:
A bus error on:
̶
An instruction fetch or vector table load
̶
A data access
An internally-detected error such as an undefined instruction
An attempt to execute an instruction from a memory region marked as Non-Executable (XN).
A privilege violation or an attempt to access an unmanaged region causing an MPU fault.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
63
Fault Types
Table 12-11 shows the types of fault, the handler used for the fault, the corresponding fault status register, and the
register bit that indicates that the fault has occurred. See “Configurable Fault Status Register” for more information
about the fault status registers.
Table 12-11.
Faults
Fault
Handler
Bus error on a vector read
Bit Name
Fault Status Register
VECTTBL
Hard fault
“Hard Fault Status Register”
Fault escalated to a hard fault
FORCED
MPU or default memory map mismatch:
–
on instruction access
on data access
during exception stacking
IACCVIOL
Memory
management
fault
–
(1)
DACCVIOL(2)
MSTKERR
during exception unstacking
MUNSTKERR
during lazy floating-point state preservation
MLSPERR(3)
Bus error:
–
during exception stacking
STKERR
during exception unstacking
UNSTKERR
during instruction prefetch
Bus fault
Precise data bus error
PRECISERR
Imprecise data bus error
IMPRECISERR
Attempt to access a coprocessor
NOCP
Undefined instruction
UNDEFINSTR
Attempt to enter an invalid instruction set state
“BFSR: Bus Fault Status Subregister”
INVSTATE
Usage fault
“UFSR: Usage Fault Status Subregister”
Invalid EXC_RETURN value
INVPC
Illegal unaligned load or store
UNALIGNED
Divide By 0
DIVBYZERO
Notes:
–
IBUSERR
LSPERR(3)
during lazy floating-point state preservation
“MMFSR: Memory Management Fault Status
Subregister”
1. Occurs on an access to an XN region even if the processor does not include an MPU or the MPU is disabled.
2. Attempt to use an instruction set other than the Thumb instruction set, or return to a non load/store-multiple instruction with
ICI continuation.
3. Only present in a Cortex-M4F device
Fault Escalation and Hard Faults
All faults exceptions except for hard fault have configurable exception priority, see “System Handler Priority
Registers”. The software can disable the execution of the handlers for these faults, see “System Handler Control
and State Register”.
Usually, the exception priority, together with the values of the exception mask registers, determines whether the
processor enters the fault handler, and whether a fault handler can preempt another fault handler, as described in
“Exception Model”.
In some situations, a fault with configurable priority is treated as a hard fault. This is called priority escalation, and
the fault is described as escalated to hard fault. Escalation to hard fault occurs when:
64
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
A fault handler causes the same kind of fault as the one it is servicing. This escalation to hard fault occurs
because a fault handler cannot preempt itself; it must have the same priority as the current priority level.
A fault handler causes a fault with the same or lower priority as the fault it is servicing. This is because the
handler for the new fault cannot preempt the currently executing fault handler.
An exception handler causes a fault for which the priority is the same as or lower than the currently
executing exception.
A fault occurs and the handler for that fault is not enabled.
If a bus fault occurs during a stack push when entering a bus fault handler, the bus fault does not escalate to a
hard fault. This means that if a corrupted stack causes a fault, the fault handler executes even though the stack
push for the handler failed. The fault handler operates but the stack contents are corrupted.
Note:
Only Reset and NMI can preempt the fixed priority hard fault. A hard fault can preempt any exception other than
Reset, NMI, or another hard fault.
Fault Status Registers and Fault Address Registers
The fault status registers indicate the cause of a fault. For bus faults and memory management faults, the fault
address register indicates the address accessed by the operation that caused the fault, as shown in Table 12-12.
Table 12-12.
Fault Status and Fault Address Registers
Handler
Status Register
Name
Address Register
Name
Register Description
Hard fault
SCB_HFSR
–
“Hard Fault Status Register”
Memory
management fault
MMFSR
SCB_MMFAR
Bus fault
BFSR
SCB_BFAR
Usage fault
UFSR
–
“MMFSR: Memory Management Fault Status Subregister”
“MemManage Fault Address Register”
“BFSR: Bus Fault Status Subregister”
“Bus Fault Address Register”
“UFSR: Usage Fault Status Subregister”
Lockup
The processor enters a lockup state if a hard fault occurs when executing the NMI or hard fault handlers. When the
processor is in lockup state, it does not execute any instructions. The processor remains in lockup state until
either:
It is reset
An NMI occurs
It is halted by a debugger.
Note:
If the lockup state occurs from the NMI handler, a subsequent NMI does not cause the processor to leave the lockup
state.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
65
12.5
Power Management
The Cortex-M4 processor sleep modes reduce the power consumption:
Sleep mode stops the processor clock
Deep sleep mode stops the system clock and switches off the PLL and flash memory.
The SLEEPDEEP bit of the SCR selects which sleep mode is used; see “System Control Register”.
This section describes the mechanisms for entering sleep mode, and the conditions for waking up from sleep
mode.
12.5.1 Entering Sleep Mode
This section describes the mechanisms software can use to put the processor into sleep mode.
The system can generate spurious wakeup events, for example a debug operation wakes up the processor.
Therefore, the software must be able to put the processor back into sleep mode after such an event. A program
might have an idle loop to put the processor back to sleep mode.
12.5.1.1
Wait for Interrupt
The wait for interrupt instruction, WFI, causes immediate entry to sleep mode. When the processor executes a
WFI instruction it stops executing instructions and enters sleep mode. See “WFI” for more information.
12.5.1.2
Wait for Event
The wait for event instruction, WFE, causes entry to sleep mode conditional on the value of an one-bit event
register. When the processor executes a WFE instruction, it checks this register:
If the register is 0, the processor stops executing instructions and enters sleep mode
If the register is 1, the processor clears the register to 0 and continues executing instructions without
entering sleep mode.
See “WFE” for more information.
12.5.1.3
Sleep-on-exit
If the SLEEPONEXIT bit of the SCR is set to 1 when the processor completes the execution of an exception
handler, it returns to Thread mode and immediately enters sleep mode. Use this mechanism in applications that
only require the processor to run when an exception occurs.
12.5.2 Wakeup from Sleep Mode
The conditions for the processor to wake up depend on the mechanism that cause it to enter sleep mode.
12.5.2.1
Wakeup from WFI or Sleep-on-exit
Normally, the processor wakes up only when it detects an exception with sufficient priority to cause exception
entry.
Some embedded systems might have to execute system restore tasks after the processor wakes up, and before it
executes an interrupt handler. To achieve this, set the PRIMASK bit to 1 and the FAULTMASK bit to 0. If an
interrupt arrives that is enabled and has a higher priority than the current exception priority, the processor wakes
up but does not execute the interrupt handler until the processor sets PRIMASK to zero. For more information
about PRIMASK and FAULTMASK, see “Exception Mask Registers”.
66
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.5.2.2
Wakeup from WFE
The processor wakes up if:
It detects an exception with sufficient priority to cause an exception entry
It detects an external event signal. See “External Event Input”
In a multiprocessor system, another processor in the system executes an SEV instruction.
In addition, if the SEVONPEND bit in the SCR is set to 1, any new pending interrupt triggers an event and wakes
up the processor, even if the interrupt is disabled or has insufficient priority to cause an exception entry. For more
information about the SCR, see “System Control Register”.
12.5.2.3
External Event Input
The processor provides an external event input signal. Peripherals can drive this signal, either to wake the
processor from WFE, or to set the internal WFE event register to 1 to indicate that the processor must not enter
sleep mode on a later WFE instruction. See “Wait for Event” for more information.
12.5.3 Power Management Programming Hints
ISO/IEC C cannot directly generate the WFI and WFE instructions. The CMSIS provides the following functions for
these instructions:
void __WFE(void) // Wait for Event
void __WFI(void) // Wait for Interrupt
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
67
12.6
Cortex-M4 Instruction Set
12.6.1 Instruction Set Summary
The processor implements a version of the Thumb instruction set. Table 12-13 lists the supported instructions.
Angle brackets, <>, enclose alternative forms of the operand
Braces, {}, enclose optional operands
The Operands column is not exhaustive
Op2 is a flexible second operand that can be either a register or a constant
Most instructions can use an optional condition code suffix.
For more information on the instructions and operands, see the instruction descriptions.
Table 12-13.
Cortex-M4 Instructions
Mnemonic
Operands
Description
Flags
ADC, ADCS
{Rd,} Rn, Op2
Add with Carry
N,Z,C,V
ADD, ADDS
{Rd,} Rn, Op2
Add
N,Z,C,V
ADD, ADDW
{Rd,} Rn, #imm12
Add
N,Z,C,V
ADR
Rd, label
Load PC-relative address
–
AND, ANDS
{Rd,} Rn, Op2
Logical AND
N,Z,C
ASR, ASRS
Rd, Rm, <Rs|#n>
Arithmetic Shift Right
N,Z,C
B
label
Branch
–
BFC
Rd, #lsb, #width
Bit Field Clear
–
BFI
Rd, Rn, #lsb, #width
Bit Field Insert
–
BIC, BICS
{Rd,} Rn, Op2
Bit Clear
N,Z,C
BKPT
#imm
Breakpoint
–
BL
label
Branch with Link
–
BLX
Rm
Branch indirect with Link
–
BX
Rm
Branch indirect
–
CBNZ
Rn, label
Compare and Branch if Non Zero
–
CBZ
Rn, label
Compare and Branch if Zero
–
CLREX
–
Clear Exclusive
–
CLZ
Rd, Rm
Count leading zeros
–
CMN
Rn, Op2
Compare Negative
N,Z,C,V
CMP
Rn, Op2
Compare
N,Z,C,V
CPSID
i
Change Processor State, Disable Interrupts
–
CPSIE
i
Change Processor State, Enable Interrupts
–
DMB
–
Data Memory Barrier
–
DSB
–
Data Synchronization Barrier
–
EOR, EORS
{Rd,} Rn, Op2
Exclusive OR
N,Z,C
ISB
–
Instruction Synchronization Barrier
–
IT
–
If-Then condition block
–
LDM
Rn{!}, reglist
Load Multiple registers, increment after
–
68
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Table 12-13.
Cortex-M4 Instructions (Continued)
Mnemonic
Operands
Description
Flags
LDMDB, LDMEA
Rn{!}, reglist
Load Multiple registers, decrement before
–
LDMFD, LDMIA
Rn{!}, reglist
Load Multiple registers, increment after
–
LDR
Rt, [Rn, #offset]
Load Register with word
–
LDRB, LDRBT
Rt, [Rn, #offset]
Load Register with byte
–
LDRD
Rt, Rt2, [Rn, #offset]
Load Register with two bytes
–
LDREX
Rt, [Rn, #offset]
Load Register Exclusive
–
LDREXB
Rt, [Rn]
Load Register Exclusive with byte
–
LDREXH
Rt, [Rn]
Load Register Exclusive with halfword
–
LDRH, LDRHT
Rt, [Rn, #offset]
Load Register with halfword
–
LDRSB, DRSBT
Rt, [Rn, #offset]
Load Register with signed byte
–
LDRSH, LDRSHT
Rt, [Rn, #offset]
Load Register with signed halfword
–
LDRT
Rt, [Rn, #offset]
Load Register with word
–
LSL, LSLS
Rd, Rm, <Rs|#n>
Logical Shift Left
N,Z,C
LSR, LSRS
Rd, Rm, <Rs|#n>
Logical Shift Right
N,Z,C
MLA
Rd, Rn, Rm, Ra
Multiply with Accumulate, 32-bit result
–
MLS
Rd, Rn, Rm, Ra
Multiply and Subtract, 32-bit result
–
MOV, MOVS
Rd, Op2
Move
N,Z,C
MOVT
Rd, #imm16
Move Top
–
MOVW, MOV
Rd, #imm16
Move 16-bit constant
N,Z,C
MRS
Rd, spec_reg
Move from special register to general register
–
MSR
spec_reg, Rm
Move from general register to special register
N,Z,C,V
MUL, MULS
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Multiply, 32-bit result
N,Z
MVN, MVNS
Rd, Op2
Move NOT
N,Z,C
NOP
–
No Operation
–
ORN, ORNS
{Rd,} Rn, Op2
Logical OR NOT
N,Z,C
ORR, ORRS
{Rd,} Rn, Op2
Logical OR
N,Z,C
PKHTB, PKHBT
{Rd,} Rn, Rm, Op2
Pack Halfword
–
POP
reglist
Pop registers from stack
–
PUSH
reglist
Push registers onto stack
–
QADD
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Saturating double and Add
Q
QADD16
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Saturating Add 16
–
QADD8
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Saturating Add 8
–
QASX
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Saturating Add and Subtract with Exchange
–
QDADD
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Saturating Add
Q
QDSUB
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Saturating double and Subtract
Q
QSAX
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Saturating Subtract and Add with Exchange
–
QSUB
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Saturating Subtract
Q
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
69
Table 12-13.
Cortex-M4 Instructions (Continued)
Mnemonic
Operands
Description
Flags
QSUB16
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Saturating Subtract 16
–
QSUB8
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Saturating Subtract 8
–
RBIT
Rd, Rn
Reverse Bits
–
REV
Rd, Rn
Reverse byte order in a word
–
REV16
Rd, Rn
Reverse byte order in each halfword
–
REVSH
Rd, Rn
Reverse byte order in bottom halfword and sign extend
–
ROR, RORS
Rd, Rm, <Rs|#n>
Rotate Right
N,Z,C
RRX, RRXS
Rd, Rm
Rotate Right with Extend
N,Z,C
RSB, RSBS
{Rd,} Rn, Op2
Reverse Subtract
N,Z,C,V
SADD16
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Signed Add 16
GE
SADD8
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Signed Add 8 and Subtract with Exchange
GE
SASX
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Signed Add
GE
SBC, SBCS
{Rd,} Rn, Op2
Subtract with Carry
N,Z,C,V
SBFX
Rd, Rn, #lsb, #width
Signed Bit Field Extract
–
SDIV
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Signed Divide
–
SEL
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Select bytes
–
SEV
–
Send Event
–
SHADD16
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Signed Halving Add 16
–
SHADD8
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Signed Halving Add 8
–
SHASX
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Signed Halving Add and Subtract with Exchange
–
SHSAX
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Signed Halving Subtract and Add with Exchange
–
SHSUB16
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Signed Halving Subtract 16
–
SHSUB8
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Signed Halving Subtract 8
–
SMLABB, SMLABT,
SMLATB, SMLATT
Rd, Rn, Rm, Ra
Signed Multiply Accumulate Long (halfwords)
Q
SMLAD, SMLADX
Rd, Rn, Rm, Ra
Signed Multiply Accumulate Dual
Q
SMLAL
RdLo, RdHi, Rn, Rm
Signed Multiply with Accumulate (32 × 32 + 64), 64-bit result
–
SMLALBB, SMLALBT,
SMLALTB, SMLALTT
RdLo, RdHi, Rn, Rm
Signed Multiply Accumulate Long, halfwords
–
SMLALD, SMLALDX
RdLo, RdHi, Rn, Rm
Signed Multiply Accumulate Long Dual
–
SMLAWB, SMLAWT
Rd, Rn, Rm, Ra
Signed Multiply Accumulate, word by halfword
Q
SMLSD
Rd, Rn, Rm, Ra
Signed Multiply Subtract Dual
Q
SMLSLD
RdLo, RdHi, Rn, Rm
Signed Multiply Subtract Long Dual
SMMLA
Rd, Rn, Rm, Ra
Signed Most significant word Multiply Accumulate
–
SMMLS, SMMLR
Rd, Rn, Rm, Ra
Signed Most significant word Multiply Subtract
–
SMMUL, SMMULR
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Signed Most significant word Multiply
–
SMUAD
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Signed dual Multiply Add
Q
70
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Table 12-13.
Cortex-M4 Instructions (Continued)
Mnemonic
Operands
Description
Flags
SMULBB, SMULBT
SMULTB, SMULTT
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Signed Multiply (halfwords)
–
SMULL
RdLo, RdHi, Rn, Rm
Signed Multiply (32 × 32), 64-bit result
–
SMULWB, SMULWT
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Signed Multiply word by halfword
–
SMUSD, SMUSDX
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Signed dual Multiply Subtract
–
SSAT
Rd, #n, Rm {,shift #s}
Signed Saturate
Q
SSAT16
Rd, #n, Rm
Signed Saturate 16
Q
SSAX
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Signed Subtract and Add with Exchange
GE
SSUB16
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Signed Subtract 16
–
SSUB8
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Signed Subtract 8
–
STM
Rn{!}, reglist
Store Multiple registers, increment after
–
STMDB, STMEA
Rn{!}, reglist
Store Multiple registers, decrement before
–
STMFD, STMIA
Rn{!}, reglist
Store Multiple registers, increment after
–
STR
Rt, [Rn, #offset]
Store Register word
–
STRB, STRBT
Rt, [Rn, #offset]
Store Register byte
–
STRD
Rt, Rt2, [Rn, #offset]
Store Register two words
–
STREX
Rd, Rt, [Rn, #offset]
Store Register Exclusive
–
STREXB
Rd, Rt, [Rn]
Store Register Exclusive byte
–
STREXH
Rd, Rt, [Rn]
Store Register Exclusive halfword
–
STRH, STRHT
Rt, [Rn, #offset]
Store Register halfword
–
STRT
Rt, [Rn, #offset]
Store Register word
–
SUB, SUBS
{Rd,} Rn, Op2
Subtract
N,Z,C,V
SUB, SUBW
{Rd,} Rn, #imm12
Subtract
N,Z,C,V
SVC
#imm
Supervisor Call
–
SXTAB
{Rd,} Rn, Rm,{,ROR #}
Extend 8 bits to 32 and add
–
SXTAB16
{Rd,} Rn, Rm,{,ROR #}
Dual extend 8 bits to 16 and add
–
SXTAH
{Rd,} Rn, Rm,{,ROR #}
Extend 16 bits to 32 and add
–
SXTB16
{Rd,} Rm {,ROR #n}
Signed Extend Byte 16
–
SXTB
{Rd,} Rm {,ROR #n}
Sign extend a byte
–
SXTH
{Rd,} Rm {,ROR #n}
Sign extend a halfword
–
TBB
[Rn, Rm]
Table Branch Byte
–
TBH
[Rn, Rm, LSL #1]
Table Branch Halfword
–
TEQ
Rn, Op2
Test Equivalence
N,Z,C
TST
Rn, Op2
Test
N,Z,C
UADD16
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Unsigned Add 16
GE
UADD8
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Unsigned Add 8
GE
USAX
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Unsigned Subtract and Add with Exchange
GE
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
71
Table 12-13.
Cortex-M4 Instructions (Continued)
Mnemonic
Operands
Description
Flags
UHADD16
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Unsigned Halving Add 16
–
UHADD8
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Unsigned Halving Add 8
–
UHASX
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Unsigned Halving Add and Subtract with Exchange
–
UHSAX
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Unsigned Halving Subtract and Add with Exchange
–
UHSUB16
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Unsigned Halving Subtract 16
–
UHSUB8
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Unsigned Halving Subtract 8
–
UBFX
Rd, Rn, #lsb, #width
Unsigned Bit Field Extract
–
UDIV
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Unsigned Divide
–
UMAAL
RdLo, RdHi, Rn, Rm
Unsigned Multiply Accumulate Accumulate Long (32 × 32 + 32 + 32),
64-bit result
–
UMLAL
RdLo, RdHi, Rn, Rm
Unsigned Multiply with Accumulate (32 × 32 + 64), 64-bit result
–
UMULL
RdLo, RdHi, Rn, Rm
Unsigned Multiply (32 × 32), 64-bit result
–
UQADD16
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Unsigned Saturating Add 16
–
UQADD8
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Unsigned Saturating Add 8
–
UQASX
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Unsigned Saturating Add and Subtract with Exchange
–
UQSAX
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Unsigned Saturating Subtract and Add with Exchange
–
UQSUB16
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Unsigned Saturating Subtract 16
–
UQSUB8
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Unsigned Saturating Subtract 8
–
USAD8
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Unsigned Sum of Absolute Differences
–
USADA8
{Rd,} Rn, Rm, Ra
Unsigned Sum of Absolute Differences and Accumulate
–
USAT
Rd, #n, Rm {,shift #s}
Unsigned Saturate
Q
USAT16
Rd, #n, Rm
Unsigned Saturate 16
Q
UASX
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Unsigned Add and Subtract with Exchange
GE
USUB16
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Unsigned Subtract 16
GE
USUB8
{Rd,} Rn, Rm
Unsigned Subtract 8
GE
UXTAB
{Rd,} Rn, Rm,{,ROR #}
Rotate, extend 8 bits to 32 and Add
–
UXTAB16
{Rd,} Rn, Rm,{,ROR #}
Rotate, dual extend 8 bits to 16 and Add
–
UXTAH
{Rd,} Rn, Rm,{,ROR #}
Rotate, unsigned extend and Add Halfword
–
UXTB
{Rd,} Rm {,ROR #n}
Zero extend a byte
–
UXTB16
{Rd,} Rm {,ROR #n}
Unsigned Extend Byte 16
–
UXTH
{Rd,} Rm {,ROR #n}
Zero extend a halfword
–
VABS.F32
Sd, Sm
Floating-point Absolute
–
VADD.F32
{Sd,} Sn, Sm
Floating-point Add
–
VCMP.F32
Sd, <Sm | #0.0>
Compare two floating-point registers, or one floating-point register
and zero
FPSCR
VCMPE.F32
Sd, <Sm | #0.0>
Compare two floating-point registers, or one floating-point register
and zero with Invalid Operation check
FPSCR
VCVT.S32.F32
Sd, Sm
Convert between floating-point and integer
–
72
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Table 12-13.
Cortex-M4 Instructions (Continued)
Mnemonic
Operands
Description
Flags
VCVT.S16.F32
Sd, Sd, #fbits
Convert between floating-point and fixed point
–
VCVTR.S32.F32
Sd, Sm
Convert between floating-point and integer with rounding
–
VCVT<B|H>.F32.F16
Sd, Sm
Converts half-precision value to single-precision
–
VCVTT<B|T>.F32.F16
Sd, Sm
Converts single-precision register to half-precision
–
VDIV.F32
{Sd,} Sn, Sm
Floating-point Divide
–
VFMA.F32
{Sd,} Sn, Sm
Floating-point Fused Multiply Accumulate
–
VFNMA.F32
{Sd,} Sn, Sm
Floating-point Fused Negate Multiply Accumulate
–
VFMS.F32
{Sd,} Sn, Sm
Floating-point Fused Multiply Subtract
–
VFNMS.F32
{Sd,} Sn, Sm
Floating-point Fused Negate Multiply Subtract
–
VLDM.F<32|64>
Rn{!}, list
Load Multiple extension registers
–
VLDR.F<32|64>
<Dd|Sd>, [Rn]
Load an extension register from memory
–
VLMA.F32
{Sd,} Sn, Sm
Floating-point Multiply Accumulate
–
VLMS.F32
{Sd,} Sn, Sm
Floating-point Multiply Subtract
–
VMOV.F32
Sd, #imm
Floating-point Move immediate
–
VMOV
Sd, Sm
Floating-point Move register
–
VMOV
Sn, Rt
Copy ARM core register to single precision
–
VMOV
Sm, Sm1, Rt, Rt2
Copy 2 ARM core registers to 2 single precision
–
VMOV
Dd[x], Rt
Copy ARM core register to scalar
–
VMOV
Rt, Dn[x]
Copy scalar to ARM core register
–
VMRS
Rt, FPSCR
Move FPSCR to ARM core register or APSR
N,Z,C,V
VMSR
FPSCR, Rt
Move to FPSCR from ARM Core register
FPSCR
VMUL.F32
{Sd,} Sn, Sm
Floating-point Multiply
–
VNEG.F32
Sd, Sm
Floating-point Negate
–
VNMLA.F32
Sd, Sn, Sm
Floating-point Multiply and Add
–
VNMLS.F32
Sd, Sn, Sm
Floating-point Multiply and Subtract
–
VNMUL
{Sd,} Sn, Sm
Floating-point Multiply
–
VPOP
list
Pop extension registers
–
VPUSH
list
Push extension registers
–
VSQRT.F32
Sd, Sm
Calculates floating-point Square Root
–
VSTM
Rn{!}, list
Floating-point register Store Multiple
–
VSTR.F<32|64>
Sd, [Rn]
Stores an extension register to memory
–
VSUB.F<32|64>
{Sd,} Sn, Sm
Floating-point Subtract
–
WFE
–
Wait For Event
–
WFI
–
Wait For Interrupt
–
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
73
12.6.2 CMSIS Functions
ISO/IEC cannot directly access some Cortex-M4 instructions. This section describes intrinsic functions that can
generate these instructions, provided by the CMIS and that might be provided by a C compiler. If a C compiler
does not support an appropriate intrinsic function, the user might have to use inline assembler to access some
instructions.
The CMSIS provides the following intrinsic functions to generate instructions that ISO/IEC C code cannot directly
access:
Table 12-14.
CMSIS Functions to Generate some Cortex-M4 Instructions
Instruction
CMSIS Function
CPSIE I
void __enable_irq(void)
CPSID I
void __disable_irq(void)
CPSIE F
void __enable_fault_irq(void)
CPSID F
void __disable_fault_irq(void)
ISB
void __ISB(void)
DSB
void __DSB(void)
DMB
void __DMB(void)
REV
uint32_t __REV(uint32_t int value)
REV16
uint32_t __REV16(uint32_t int value)
REVSH
uint32_t __REVSH(uint32_t int value)
RBIT
uint32_t __RBIT(uint32_t int value)
SEV
void __SEV(void)
WFE
void __WFE(void)
WFI
void __WFI(void)
The CMSIS also provides a number of functions for accessing the special registers using MRS and MSR
instructions:
Table 12-15.
CMSIS Intrinsic Functions to Access the Special Registers
Special Register
Access
CMSIS Function
Read
uint32_t __get_PRIMASK (void)
Write
void __set_PRIMASK (uint32_t value)
Read
uint32_t __get_FAULTMASK (void
Write
void __set_FAULTMASK (uint32_t value)
Read
uint32_t __get_BASEPRI (void)
Write
void __set_BASEPRI (uint32_t value)
Read
uint32_t __get_CONTROL (void)
Write
void __set_CONTROL (uint32_t value)
Read
uint32_t __get_MSP (void)
Write
void __set_MSP (uint32_t TopOfMainStack)
Read
uint32_t __get_PSP (void)
Write
void __set_PSP (uint32_t TopOfProcStack)
PRIMASK
FAULTMASK
BASEPRI
CONTROL
MSP
PSP
74
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.3 Instruction Descriptions
12.6.3.1
Operands
An instruction operand can be an ARM register, a constant, or another instruction-specific parameter. Instructions
act on the operands and often store the result in a destination register. When there is a destination register in the
instruction, it is usually specified before the operands.
Operands in some instructions are flexible, can either be a register or a constant. See “Flexible Second Operand”.
12.6.3.2
Restrictions when Using PC or SP
Many instructions have restrictions on whether the Program Counter (PC) or Stack Pointer (SP) for the operands
or destination register can be used. See instruction descriptions for more information.
Note:
12.6.3.3
Bit[0] of any address written to the PC with a BX, BLX, LDM, LDR, or POP instruction must be 1 for correct execution,
because this bit indicates the required instruction set, and the Cortex-M4 processor only supports Thumb instructions.
Flexible Second Operand
Many general data processing instructions have a flexible second operand. This is shown as Operand2 in the
descriptions of the syntax of each instruction.
Operand2 can be a:
“Constant”
“Register with Optional Shift”
Constant
Specify an Operand2 constant in the form:
#constant
where constant can be:
Any constant that can be produced by shifting an 8-bit value left by any number of bits within a 32-bit word
Any constant of the form 0x00XY00XY
Any constant of the form 0xXY00XY00
Any constant of the form 0xXYXYXYXY.
Note:
In the constants shown above, X and Y are hexadecimal digits.
In addition, in a small number of instructions, constant can take a wider range of values. These are described in
the individual instruction descriptions.
When an Operand2 constant is used with the instructions MOVS, MVNS, ANDS, ORRS, ORNS, EORS, BICS,
TEQ or TST, the carry flag is updated to bit[31] of the constant, if the constant is greater than 255 and can be
produced by shifting an 8-bit value. These instructions do not affect the carry flag if Operand2 is any other
constant.
Instruction Substitution
The assembler might be able to produce an equivalent instruction in cases where the user specifies a constant
that is not permitted. For example, an assembler might assemble the instruction CMP Rd, #0xFFFFFFFE as the
equivalent instruction CMN Rd, #0x2.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
75
Register with Optional Shift
Specify an Operand2 register in the form:
Rm {, shift}
where:
Rm
is the register holding the data for the second operand.
shift
is an optional shift to be applied to Rm. It can be one of:
ASR #n
arithmetic shift right n bits, 1 ≤ n ≤ 32.
LSL #n
logical shift left n bits, 1 ≤ n ≤ 31.
LSR #n
logical shift right n bits, 1 ≤ n ≤ 32.
ROR #n
rotate right n bits, 1 ≤ n ≤ 31.
RRX
rotate right one bit, with extend.
-
if omitted, no shift occurs, equivalent to LSL #0.
If the user omits the shift, or specifies LSL #0, the instruction uses the value in Rm.
If the user specifies a shift, the shift is applied to the value in Rm, and the resulting 32-bit value is used by the
instruction. However, the contents in the register Rm remains unchanged. Specifying a register with shift also
updates the carry flag when used with certain instructions. For information on the shift operations and how they
affect the carry flag, see “Flexible Second Operand”.
12.6.3.4
Shift Operations
Register shift operations move the bits in a register left or right by a specified number of bits, the shift length.
Register shift can be performed:
Directly by the instructions ASR, LSR, LSL, ROR, and RRX, and the result is written to a destination register
During the calculation of Operand2 by the instructions that specify the second operand as a register with
shift. See “Flexible Second Operand”. The result is used by the instruction.
The permitted shift lengths depend on the shift type and the instruction. If the shift length is 0, no shift occurs.
Register shift operations update the carry flag except when the specified shift length is 0. The following
subsections describe the various shift operations and how they affect the carry flag. In these descriptions, Rm is
the register containing the value to be shifted, and n is the shift length.
ASR
Arithmetic shift right by n bits moves the left-hand 32-n bits of the register, Rm, to the right by n places, into the
right-hand 32-n bits of the result. And it copies the original bit[31] of the register into the left-hand n bits of the
result. See Figure 12-8.
The ASR #n operation can be used to divide the value in the register Rm by 2n, with the result being rounded
towards negative-infinity.
When the instruction is ASRS or when ASR #n is used in Operand2 with the instructions MOVS, MVNS, ANDS,
ORRS, ORNS, EORS, BICS, TEQ or TST, the carry flag is updated to the last bit shifted out, bit[n-1], of the
register Rm.
76
If n is 32 or more, then all the bits in the result are set to the value of bit[31] of Rm.
If n is 32 or more and the carry flag is updated, it is updated to the value of bit[31] of Rm.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 12-8.
ASR #3
LSR
Logical shift right by n bits moves the left-hand 32-n bits of the register Rm, to the right by n places, into the righthand 32-n bits of the result. And it sets the left-hand n bits of the result to 0. See Figure 12-9.
The LSR #n operation can be used to divide the value in the register Rm by 2n, if the value is regarded as an
unsigned integer.
When the instruction is LSRS or when LSR #n is used in Operand2 with the instructions MOVS, MVNS, ANDS,
ORRS, ORNS, EORS, BICS, TEQ or TST, the carry flag is updated to the last bit shifted out, bit[n-1], of the
register Rm.
If n is 32 or more, then all the bits in the result are cleared to 0.
If n is 33 or more and the carry flag is updated, it is updated to 0.
Figure 12-9.
LSR #3
&DUU\
)ODJ
LSL
Logical shift left by n bits moves the right-hand 32-n bits of the register Rm, to the left by n places, into the left-hand
32-n bits of the result; and it sets the right-hand n bits of the result to 0. See Figure 12-10.
The LSL #n operation can be used to multiply the value in the register Rm by 2n, if the value is regarded as an
unsigned integer or a two’s complement signed integer. Overflow can occur without warning.
When the instruction is LSLS or when LSL #n, with non-zero n, is used in Operand2 with the instructions MOVS,
MVNS, ANDS, ORRS, ORNS, EORS, BICS, TEQ or TST, the carry flag is updated to the last bit shifted out, bit[32n], of the register Rm. These instructions do not affect the carry flag when used with LSL #0.
If n is 32 or more, then all the bits in the result are cleared to 0.
If n is 33 or more and the carry flag is updated, it is updated to 0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
77
Figure 12-10. LSL #3
&DUU\
)ODJ
ROR
Rotate right by n bits moves the left-hand 32-n bits of the register Rm, to the right by n places, into the right-hand
32-n bits of the result; and it moves the right-hand n bits of the register into the left-hand n bits of the result. See
Figure 12-11.
When the instruction is RORS or when ROR #n is used in Operand2 with the instructions MOVS, MVNS, ANDS,
ORRS, ORNS, EORS, BICS, TEQ or TST, the carry flag is updated to the last bit rotation, bit[n-1], of the register
Rm.
If n is 32, then the value of the result is same as the value in Rm, and if the carry flag is updated, it is updated
to bit[31] of Rm.
ROR with shift length, n, more than 32 is the same as ROR with shift length n-32.
Figure 12-11. ROR #3
&DUU\
)ODJ
RRX
Rotate right with extend moves the bits of the register Rm to the right by one bit; and it copies the carry flag into
bit[31] of the result. See Figure 12-12.
When the instruction is RRXS or when RRX is used in Operand2 with the instructions MOVS, MVNS, ANDS,
ORRS, ORNS, EORS, BICS, TEQ or TST, the carry flag is updated to bit[0] of the register Rm.
Figure 12-12. RRX
&DUU\
)ODJ
78
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.3.5
Address Alignment
An aligned access is an operation where a word-aligned address is used for a word, dual word, or multiple word
access, or where a halfword-aligned address is used for a halfword access. Byte accesses are always aligned.
The Cortex-M4 processor supports unaligned access only for the following instructions:
LDR, LDRT
LDRH, LDRHT
LDRSH, LDRSHT
STR, STRT
STRH, STRHT
All other load and store instructions generate a usage fault exception if they perform an unaligned access, and
therefore their accesses must be address-aligned. For more information about usage faults, see “Fault Handling”.
Unaligned accesses are usually slower than aligned accesses. In addition, some memory regions might not
support unaligned accesses. Therefore, ARM recommends that programmers ensure that accesses are aligned.
To avoid accidental generation of unaligned accesses, use the UNALIGN_TRP bit in the Configuration and Control
Register to trap all unaligned accesses, see “Configuration and Control Register”.
12.6.3.6
PC-relative Expressions
A PC-relative expression or label is a symbol that represents the address of an instruction or literal data. It is
represented in the instruction as the PC value plus or minus a numeric offset. The assembler calculates the
required offset from the label and the address of the current instruction. If the offset is too big, the assembler
produces an error.
For B, BL, CBNZ, and CBZ instructions, the value of the PC is the address of the current instruction plus 4
bytes.
For all other instructions that use labels, the value of the PC is the address of the current instruction plus 4
bytes, with bit[1] of the result cleared to 0 to make it word-aligned.
Your assembler might permit other syntaxes for PC-relative expressions, such as a label plus or minus a
number, or an expression of the form [PC, #number].
12.6.3.7
Conditional Execution
Most data processing instructions can optionally update the condition flags in the Application Program Status
Register (APSR) according to the result of the operation, see “Application Program Status Register”. Some
instructions update all flags, and some only update a subset. If a flag is not updated, the original value is
preserved. See the instruction descriptions for the flags they affect.
An instruction can be executed conditionally, based on the condition flags set in another instruction, either:
Immediately after the instruction that updated the flags
After any number of intervening instructions that have not updated the flags.
Conditional execution is available by using conditional branches or by adding condition code suffixes to
instructions. See Table 12-16 for a list of the suffixes to add to instructions to make them conditional instructions.
The condition code suffix enables the processor to test a condition based on the flags. If the condition test of a
conditional instruction fails, the instruction:
Does not execute
Does not write any value to its destination register
Does not affect any of the flags
Does not generate any exception.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
79
Conditional instructions, except for conditional branches, must be inside an If-Then instruction block. See “IT” for
more information and restrictions when using the IT instruction. Depending on the vendor, the assembler might
automatically insert an IT instruction if there are conditional instructions outside the IT block.
The CBZ and CBNZ instructions are used to compare the value of a register against zero and branch on the result.
This section describes:
“Condition Flags”
“Condition Code Suffixes”.
Condition Flags
The APSR contains the following condition flags:
N
Set to 1 when the result of the operation was negative, cleared to 0 otherwise.
Z
Set to 1 when the result of the operation was zero, cleared to 0 otherwise.
C
Set to 1 when the operation resulted in a carry, cleared to 0 otherwise.
V
Set to 1 when the operation caused overflow, cleared to 0 otherwise.
For more information about the APSR, see “Program Status Register”.
A carry occurs:
If the result of an addition is greater than or equal to 232
If the result of a subtraction is positive or zero
As the result of an inline barrel shifter operation in a move or logical instruction.
An overflow occurs when the sign of the result, in bit[31], does not match the sign of the result, had the operation
been performed at infinite precision, for example:
If adding two negative values results in a positive value
If adding two positive values results in a negative value
If subtracting a positive value from a negative value generates a positive value
If subtracting a negative value from a positive value generates a negative value.
The Compare operations are identical to subtracting, for CMP, or adding, for CMN, except that the result is
discarded. See the instruction descriptions for more information.
Note:
Most instructions update the status flags only if the S suffix is specified. See the instruction descriptions for more
information.
Condition Code Suffixes
The instructions that can be conditional have an optional condition code, shown in syntax descriptions as {cond}.
Conditional execution requires a preceding IT instruction. An instruction with a condition code is only executed if
the condition code flags in the APSR meet the specified condition. Table 12-16 shows the condition codes to use.
A conditional execution can be used with the IT instruction to reduce the number of branch instructions in code.
Table 12-16 also shows the relationship between condition code suffixes and the N, Z, C, and V flags.
Table 12-16.
80
Condition Code Suffixes
Suffix
Flags
Meaning
EQ
Z=1
Equal
NE
Z=0
Not equal
CS or HS
C=1
Higher or same, unsigned ≥
CC or LO
C=0
Lower, unsigned <
MI
N=1
Negative
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Table 12-16.
Condition Code Suffixes (Continued)
Suffix
Flags
Meaning
PL
N=0
Positive or zero
VS
V=1
Overflow
VC
V=0
No overflow
HI
C = 1 and Z = 0
Higher, unsigned >
LS
C = 0 or Z = 1
Lower or same, unsigned ≤
GE
N=V
Greater than or equal, signed ≥
LT
N != V
Less than, signed <
GT
Z = 0 and N = V
Greater than, signed >
LE
Z = 1 and N != V
Less than or equal, signed ≤
AL
Can have any value
Always. This is the default when no suffix is specified.
Absolute Value
The example below shows the use of a conditional instruction to find the absolute value of a number. R0 =
ABS(R1).
MOVS
R0, R1
; R0 = R1, setting flags
IT
MI
; IT instruction for the negative condition
RSBMI
R0, R1, #0
; If negative, R0 = -R1
Compare and Update Value
The example below shows the use of conditional instructions to update the value of R4 if the signed values R0 is
greater than R1 and R2 is greater than R3.
CMP
R0, R1
; Compare R0 and R1, setting flags
ITT
GT
; IT instruction for the two GT conditions
CMPGT
R2, R3
; If 'greater than', compare R2 and R3, setting flags
MOVGT
R4, R5
; If still 'greater than', do R4 = R5
12.6.3.8
Instruction Width Selection
There are many instructions that can generate either a 16-bit encoding or a 32-bit encoding depending on the
operands and destination register specified. For some of these instructions, the user can force a specific
instruction size by using an instruction width suffix. The .W suffix forces a 32-bit instruction encoding. The .N suffix
forces a 16-bit instruction encoding.
If the user specifies an instruction width suffix and the assembler cannot generate an instruction encoding of the
requested width, it generates an error.
Note:
In some cases, it might be necessary to specify the .W suffix, for example if the operand is the label of an instruction or
literal data, as in the case of branch instructions. This is because the assembler might not automatically generate the
right size encoding.
To use an instruction width suffix, place it immediately after the instruction mnemonic and condition code, if any.
The example below shows instructions with the instruction width suffix.
BCS.W label
; creates a 32-bit instruction even for a short
; branch
ADDS.W R0, R0, R1 ; creates a 32-bit instruction even though the same
; operation can be done by a 16-bit instruction
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
81
12.6.4 Memory Access Instructions
The table below shows the memory access instructions.
Table 12-17.
82
Memory Access Instructions
Mnemonic
Description
ADR
Load PC-relative address
CLREX
Clear Exclusive
LDM{mode}
Load Multiple registers
LDR{type}
Load Register using immediate offset
LDR{type}
Load Register using register offset
LDR{type}T
Load Register with unprivileged access
LDR
Load Register using PC-relative address
LDRD
Load Register Dual
LDREX{type}
Load Register Exclusive
POP
Pop registers from stack
PUSH
Push registers onto stack
STM{mode}
Store Multiple registers
STR{type}
Store Register using immediate offset
STR{type}
Store Register using register offset
STR{type}T
Store Register with unprivileged access
STREX{type}
Store Register Exclusive
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.4.1
ADR
Load PC-relative address.
Syntax
ADR{cond} Rd, label
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
label
is a PC-relative expression. See “PC-relative Expressions”.
Operation
ADR determines the address by adding an immediate value to the PC, and writes the result to the destination
register.
ADR produces position-independent code, because the address is PC-relative.
If ADR is used to generate a target address for a BX or BLX instruction, ensure that bit[0] of the address generated
is set to 1 for correct execution.
Values of label must be within the range of −4095 to +4095 from the address in the PC.
Note:
The user might have to use the .W suffix to get the maximum offset range or to generate addresses that are not wordaligned. See “Instruction Width Selection”.
Restrictions
Rd must not be SP and must not be PC.
Condition Flags
This instruction does not change the flags.
Examples
ADR
R1, TextMessage
; Write address value of a location labelled as
; TextMessage to R1
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
83
12.6.4.2
LDR and STR, Immediate Offset
Load and Store with immediate offset, pre-indexed immediate offset, or post-indexed immediate offset.
Syntax
op{type}{cond} Rt,
op{type}{cond} Rt,
op{type}{cond} Rt,
opD{cond} Rt, Rt2,
opD{cond} Rt, Rt2,
opD{cond} Rt, Rt2,
[Rn {, #offset}]
[Rn, #offset]!
[Rn], #offset
[Rn {, #offset}]
[Rn, #offset]!
[Rn], #offset
;
;
;
;
;
;
immediate offset
pre-indexed
post-indexed
immediate offset, two words
pre-indexed, two words
post-indexed, two words
where:
op
is one of:
LDR
Load Register.
STR
Store Register.
type
is one of:
B
unsigned byte, zero extend to 32 bits on loads.
SB
signed byte, sign extend to 32 bits (LDR only).
H
unsigned halfword, zero extend to 32 bits on loads.
SH
signed halfword, sign extend to 32 bits (LDR only).
-
omit, for word.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rt
is the register to load or store.
Rn
is the register on which the memory address is based.
offset
is an offset from Rn. If offset is omitted, the address is the contents of Rn.
Rt2
is the additional register to load or store for two-word operations.
Operation
LDR instructions load one or two registers with a value from memory.
STR instructions store one or two register values to memory.
Load and store instructions with immediate offset can use the following addressing modes:
Offset Addressing
The offset value is added to or subtracted from the address obtained from the register Rn. The result is used as the
address for the memory access. The register Rn is unaltered. The assembly language syntax for this mode is:
[Rn, #offset]
84
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Pre-indexed Addressing
The offset value is added to or subtracted from the address obtained from the register Rn. The result is used as the
address for the memory access and written back into the register Rn. The assembly language syntax for this mode
is:
[Rn, #offset]!
Post-indexed Addressing
The address obtained from the register Rn is used as the address for the memory access. The offset value is
added to or subtracted from the address, and written back into the register Rn. The assembly language syntax for
this mode is:
[Rn], #offset
The value to load or store can be a byte, halfword, word, or two words. Bytes and halfwords can either be signed
or unsigned. See “Address Alignment”.
The table below shows the ranges of offset for immediate, pre-indexed and post-indexed forms.
Table 12-18.
Offset Ranges
Instruction Type
Immediate Offset
Pre-indexed
Post-indexed
Word, halfword, signed
halfword, byte, or signed byte
-255 to 4095
-255 to 255
-255 to 255
Two words
multiple of 4 in the
range -1020 to 1020
multiple of 4 in the
range -1020 to 1020
multiple of 4 in the
range -1020 to 1020
Restrictions
For load instructions:
Rt can be SP or PC for word loads only
Rt must be different from Rt2 for two-word loads
Rn must be different from Rt and Rt2 in the pre-indexed or post-indexed forms.
When Rt is PC in a word load instruction:
Bit[0] of the loaded value must be 1 for correct execution
A branch occurs to the address created by changing bit[0] of the loaded value to 0
If the instruction is conditional, it must be the last instruction in the IT block.
For store instructions:
Rt can be SP for word stores only
Rt must not be PC
Rn must not be PC
Rn must be different from Rt and Rt2 in the pre-indexed or post-indexed forms.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
85
Examples
LDR
LDRNE
R8, [R10]
R2, [R5, #960]!
STR
R2, [R9,#const-struc]
STRH
R3, [R4], #4
LDRD
R8, R9, [R3, #0x20]
STRD
R0, R1, [R8], #-16
12.6.4.3
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Loads R8 from the address in R10.
Loads (conditionally) R2 from a word
960 bytes above the address in R5, and
increments R5 by 960.
const-struc is an expression evaluating
to a constant in the range 0-4095.
Store R3 as halfword data into address in
R4, then increment R4 by 4
Load R8 from a word 32 bytes above the
address in R3, and load R9 from a word 36
bytes above the address in R3
Store R0 to address in R8, and store R1 to
a word 4 bytes above the address in R8,
and then decrement R8 by 16.
LDR and STR, Register Offset
Load and Store with register offset.
Syntax
op{type}{cond} Rt, [Rn, Rm {, LSL #n}]
where:
op
is one of:
LDR
Load Register.
STR
Store Register.
type
is one of:
B
unsigned byte, zero extend to 32 bits on loads.
SB
signed byte, sign extend to 32 bits (LDR only).
H
unsigned halfword, zero extend to 32 bits on loads.
SH
signed halfword, sign extend to 32 bits (LDR only).
-
omit, for word.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rt
is the register to load or store.
Rn
is the register on which the memory address is based.
Rm
is a register containing a value to be used as the offset.
LSL #n
is an optional shift, with n in the range 0 to 3.
Operation
LDR instructions load a register with a value from memory.
STR instructions store a register value into memory.
The memory address to load from or store to is at an offset from the register Rn. The offset is specified by the
register Rm and can be shifted left by up to 3 bits using LSL.
The value to load or store can be a byte, halfword, or word. For load instructions, bytes and halfwords can either
be signed or unsigned. See “Address Alignment”.
86
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Restrictions
In these instructions:
Rn must not be PC
Rm must not be SP and must not be PC
Rt can be SP only for word loads and word stores
Rt can be PC only for word loads.
When Rt is PC in a word load instruction:
Bit[0] of the loaded value must be 1 for correct execution, and a branch occurs to this halfword-aligned
address
If the instruction is conditional, it must be the last instruction in the IT block.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
STR
LDRSB
STR
R0, [R5, R1]
;
;
R0, [R5, R1, LSL #1] ;
;
;
R0, [R1, R2, LSL #2] ;
;
Store value of R0 into an address equal to
sum of R5 and R1
Read byte value from an address equal to
sum of R5 and two times R1, sign extended it
to a word value and put it in R0
Stores R0 to an address equal to sum of R1
and four times R2
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
87
12.6.4.4
LDR and STR, Unprivileged
Load and Store with unprivileged access.
Syntax
op{type}T{cond} Rt, [Rn {, #offset}]
; immediate offset
where:
op
is one of:
LDR
Load Register.
STR
Store Register.
type is one of:
B
unsigned byte, zero extend to 32 bits on loads.
SB
signed byte, sign extend to 32 bits (LDR only).
H
unsigned halfword, zero extend to 32 bits on loads.
SH
signed halfword, sign extend to 32 bits (LDR only).
-
omit, for word.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rt
is the register to load or store.
Rn
is the register on which the memory address is based.
offset
is an offset from Rn and can be 0 to 255.
If offset is omitted, the address is the value in Rn.
Operation
These load and store instructions perform the same function as the memory access instructions with immediate
offset, see “LDR and STR, Immediate Offset”. The difference is that these instructions have only unprivileged
access even when used in privileged software.
When used in unprivileged software, these instructions behave in exactly the same way as normal memory access
instructions with immediate offset.
Restrictions
In these instructions:
Rn must not be PC
Rt must not be SP and must not be PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
88
STRBTEQ
R4, [R7]
LDRHT
R2, [R2, #8]
;
;
;
;
Conditionally store least significant byte in
R4 to an address in R7, with unprivileged access
Load halfword value from an address equal to
sum of R2 and 8 into R2, with unprivileged access
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.4.5
LDR, PC-relative
Load register from memory.
Syntax
LDR{type}{cond} Rt, label
LDRD{cond} Rt, Rt2, label
; Load two words
where:
type
is one of:
B
unsigned byte, zero extend to 32 bits.
SB
signed byte, sign extend to 32 bits.
H
unsigned halfword, zero extend to 32 bits.
SH
signed halfword, sign extend to 32 bits.
-
omit, for word.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rt
is the register to load or store.
Rt2
is the second register to load or store.
label
is a PC-relative expression. See “PC-relative Expressions”.
Operation
LDR loads a register with a value from a PC-relative memory address. The memory address is specified by a label
or by an offset from the PC.
The value to load or store can be a byte, halfword, or word. For load instructions, bytes and halfwords can either
be signed or unsigned. See “Address Alignment”.
label must be within a limited range of the current instruction. The table below shows the possible offsets between
label and the PC.
Table 12-19.
Offset Ranges
Instruction Type
Offset Range
Word, halfword, signed halfword, byte, signed byte
-4095 to 4095
Two words
-1020 to 1020
The user might have to use the .W suffix to get the maximum offset range. See “Instruction Width Selection”.
Restrictions
In these instructions:
Rt can be SP or PC only for word loads
Rt2 must not be SP and must not be PC
Rt must be different from Rt2.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
89
When Rt is PC in a word load instruction:
Bit[0] of the loaded value must be 1 for correct execution, and a branch occurs to this halfword-aligned
address
If the instruction is conditional, it must be the last instruction in the IT block.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
LDR
R0, LookUpTable
LDRSB
R7, localdata
12.6.4.6
;
;
;
;
;
Load R0 with a word of data from an address
labelled as LookUpTable
Load a byte value from an address labelled
as localdata, sign extend it to a word
value, and put it in R7
LDM and STM
Load and Store Multiple registers.
Syntax
op{addr_mode}{cond} Rn{!}, reglist
where:
op
is one of:
LDM
Load Multiple registers.
STM
Store Multiple registers.
addr_mode
is any one of the following:
IA
Increment address After each access. This is the default.
DB
Decrement address Before each access.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rn
is the register on which the memory addresses are based.
!
is an optional writeback suffix.
If ! is present, the final address, that is loaded from or stored to, is written back into Rn.
reglist
is a list of one or more registers to be loaded or stored, enclosed in braces. It
can contain register ranges. It must be comma separated if it contains more
than one register or register range, see “Examples”.
LDM and LDMFD are synonyms for LDMIA. LDMFD refers to its use for popping data from Full Descending
stacks.
LDMEA is a synonym for LDMDB, and refers to its use for popping data from Empty Ascending stacks.
STM and STMEA are synonyms for STMIA. STMEA refers to its use for pushing data onto Empty Ascending
stacks.
STMFD is s synonym for STMDB, and refers to its use for pushing data onto Full Descending stacks
Operation
LDM instructions load the registers in reglist with word values from memory addresses based on Rn.
STM instructions store the word values in the registers in reglist to memory addresses based on Rn.
For LDM, LDMIA, LDMFD, STM, STMIA, and STMEA the memory addresses used for the accesses are at 4-byte
intervals ranging from Rn to Rn + 4 * (n-1), where n is the number of registers in reglist. The accesses happens in
order of increasing register numbers, with the lowest numbered register using the lowest memory address and the
90
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
highest number register using the highest memory address. If the writeback suffix is specified, the value of Rn + 4
* (n-1) is written back to Rn.
For LDMDB, LDMEA, STMDB, and STMFD the memory addresses used for the accesses are at 4-byte intervals
ranging from Rn to Rn - 4 * (n-1), where n is the number of registers in reglist. The accesses happen in order of
decreasing register numbers, with the highest numbered register using the highest memory address and the
lowest number register using the lowest memory address. If the writeback suffix is specified, the value of Rn - 4 *
(n-1) is written back to Rn.
The PUSH and POP instructions can be expressed in this form. See “PUSH and POP”for details.
Restrictions
In these instructions:
Rn must not be PC
reglist must not contain SP
In any STM instruction, reglist must not contain PC
In any LDM instruction, reglist must not contain PC if it contains LR
reglist must not contain Rn if the writeback suffix is specified.
When PC is in reglist in an LDM instruction:
Bit[0] of the value loaded to the PC must be 1 for correct execution, and a branch occurs to this halfwordaligned address
If the instruction is conditional, it must be the last instruction in the IT block.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
LDM
STMDB
R8,{R0,R2,R9}
; LDMIA is a synonym for LDM
R1!,{R3-R6,R11,R12}
Incorrect Examples
STM
LDM
R5!,{R5,R4,R9} ; Value stored for R5 is unpredictable
R2, {}
; There must be at least one register in the list
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
91
12.6.4.7
PUSH and POP
Push registers onto, and pop registers off a full-descending stack.
Syntax
PUSH{cond} reglist
POP{cond} reglist
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
reglist
is a non-empty list of registers, enclosed in braces. It can contain register
ranges. It must be comma separated if it contains more than one register or
register range.
PUSH and POP are synonyms for STMDB and LDM (or LDMIA) with the memory addresses for the access based
on SP, and with the final address for the access written back to the SP. PUSH and POP are the preferred
mnemonics in these cases.
Operation
PUSH stores registers on the stack in order of decreasing the register numbers, with the highest numbered
register using the highest memory address and the lowest numbered register using the lowest memory address.
POP loads registers from the stack in order of increasing register numbers, with the lowest numbered register
using the lowest memory address and the highest numbered register using the highest memory address.
See “LDM and STM” for more information.
Restrictions
In these instructions:
reglist must not contain SP
For the PUSH instruction, reglist must not contain PC
For the POP instruction, reglist must not contain PC if it contains LR.
When PC is in reglist in a POP instruction:
Bit[0] of the value loaded to the PC must be 1 for correct execution, and a branch occurs to this halfwordaligned address
If the instruction is conditional, it must be the last instruction in the IT block.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
PUSH
PUSH
POP
92
{R0,R4-R7}
{R2,LR}
{R0,R10,PC}
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.4.8
LDREX and STREX
Load and Store Register Exclusive.
Syntax
LDREX{cond} Rt, [Rn {, #offset}]
STREX{cond} Rd, Rt, [Rn {, #offset}]
LDREXB{cond} Rt, [Rn]
STREXB{cond} Rd, Rt, [Rn]
LDREXH{cond} Rt, [Rn]
STREXH{cond} Rd, Rt, [Rn]
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register for the returned status.
Rt
is the register to load or store.
Rn
is the register on which the memory address is based.
offset
is an optional offset applied to the value in Rn.
If offset is omitted, the address is the value in Rn.
Operation
LDREX, LDREXB, and LDREXH load a word, byte, and halfword respectively from a memory address.
STREX, STREXB, and STREXH attempt to store a word, byte, and halfword respectively to a memory address.
The address used in any Store-Exclusive instruction must be the same as the address in the most recently
executed Load-exclusive instruction. The value stored by the Store-Exclusive instruction must also have the same
data size as the value loaded by the preceding Load-exclusive instruction. This means software must always use a
Load-exclusive instruction and a matching Store-Exclusive instruction to perform a synchronization operation, see
“Synchronization Primitives”.
If an Store-Exclusive instruction performs the store, it writes 0 to its destination register. If it does not perform the
store, it writes 1 to its destination register. If the Store-Exclusive instruction writes 0 to the destination register, it is
guaranteed that no other process in the system has accessed the memory location between the Load-exclusive
and Store-Exclusive instructions.
For reasons of performance, keep the number of instructions between corresponding Load-Exclusive and StoreExclusive instruction to a minimum.
The result of executing a Store-Exclusive instruction to an address that is different from that used in the preceding
Load-Exclusive instruction is unpredictable.
Restrictions
In these instructions:
Do not use PC
Do not use SP for Rd and Rt
For STREX, Rd must be different from both Rt and Rn
The value of offset must be a multiple of four in the range 0–1020.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
93
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
MOV
LDREX
CMP
ITT
STREXEQ
CMPEQ
BNE
....
12.6.4.9
R1,
R0,
R0,
EQ
R0,
R0,
try
#0x1
[LockAddr]
#0
R1, [LockAddr]
#0
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Initialize the ‘lock taken’ value try
Load the lock value
Is the lock free?
IT instruction for STREXEQ and CMPEQ
Try and claim the lock
Did this succeed?
No – try again
Yes – we have the lock
CLREX
Clear Exclusive.
Syntax
CLREX{cond}
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Operation
Use CLREX to make the next STREX, STREXB, or STREXH instruction write a 1 to its destination register and fail
to perform the store. It is useful in exception handler code to force the failure of the store exclusive if the exception
occurs between a load exclusive instruction and the matching store exclusive instruction in a synchronization
operation.
See “Synchronization Primitives” for more information.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
CLREX
94
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.5 General Data Processing Instructions
The table below shows the data processing instructions.
Table 12-20.
Data Processing Instructions
Mnemonic
Description
ADC
Add with Carry
ADD
Add
ADDW
Add
AND
Logical AND
ASR
Arithmetic Shift Right
BIC
Bit Clear
CLZ
Count leading zeros
CMN
Compare Negative
CMP
Compare
EOR
Exclusive OR
LSL
Logical Shift Left
LSR
Logical Shift Right
MOV
Move
MOVT
Move Top
MOVW
Move 16-bit constant
MVN
Move NOT
ORN
Logical OR NOT
ORR
Logical OR
RBIT
Reverse Bits
REV
Reverse byte order in a word
REV16
Reverse byte order in each halfword
REVSH
Reverse byte order in bottom halfword and sign extend
ROR
Rotate Right
RRX
Rotate Right with Extend
RSB
Reverse Subtract
SADD16
Signed Add 16
SADD8
Signed Add 8
SASX
Signed Add and Subtract with Exchange
SSAX
Signed Subtract and Add with Exchange
SBC
Subtract with Carry
SHADD16
Signed Halving Add 16
SHADD8
Signed Halving Add 8
SHASX
Signed Halving Add and Subtract with Exchange
SHSAX
Signed Halving Subtract and Add with Exchange
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
95
Table 12-20.
96
Data Processing Instructions (Continued)
Mnemonic
Description
SHSUB16
Signed Halving Subtract 16
SHSUB8
Signed Halving Subtract 8
SSUB16
Signed Subtract 16
SSUB8
Signed Subtract 8
SUB
Subtract
SUBW
Subtract
TEQ
Test Equivalence
TST
Test
UADD16
Unsigned Add 16
UADD8
Unsigned Add 8
UASX
Unsigned Add and Subtract with Exchange
USAX
Unsigned Subtract and Add with Exchange
UHADD16
Unsigned Halving Add 16
UHADD8
Unsigned Halving Add 8
UHASX
Unsigned Halving Add and Subtract with Exchange
UHSAX
Unsigned Halving Subtract and Add with Exchange
UHSUB16
Unsigned Halving Subtract 16
UHSUB8
Unsigned Halving Subtract 8
USAD8
Unsigned Sum of Absolute Differences
USADA8
Unsigned Sum of Absolute Differences and Accumulate
USUB16
Unsigned Subtract 16
USUB8
Unsigned Subtract 8
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.5.1
ADD, ADC, SUB, SBC, and RSB
Add, Add with carry, Subtract, Subtract with carry, and Reverse Subtract.
Syntax
op{S}{cond} {Rd,} Rn, Operand2
op{cond} {Rd,} Rn, #imm12
; ADD and SUB only
where:
op
is one of:
ADD Add.
ADC Add with Carry.
SUB Subtract.
SBC Subtract with Carry.
RSB Reverse Subtract.
S
is an optional suffix. If S is specified, the condition code flags are updated on the result
operation, see “Conditional Execution”.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register. If Rd is omitted, the destination register is Rn.
Rn
is the register holding the first operand.
Operand2
is a flexible second operand. See “Flexible Second Operand” for details of the
options.
imm12
is any value in the range 0–4095.
of
the
Operation
The ADD instruction adds the value of Operand2 or imm12 to the value in Rn.
The ADC instruction adds the values in Rn and Operand2, together with the carry flag.
The SUB instruction subtracts the value of Operand2 or imm12 from the value in Rn.
The SBC instruction subtracts the value of Operand2 from the value in Rn. If the carry flag is clear, the result is
reduced by one.
The RSB instruction subtracts the value in Rn from the value of Operand2. This is useful because of the wide
range of options for Operand2.
Use ADC and SBC to synthesize multiword arithmetic, see Multiword arithmetic examples on.
See also “ADR”.
Note:
ADDW is equivalent to the ADD syntax that uses the imm12 operand. SUBW is equivalent to the SUB syntax that uses
the imm12 operand.
Restrictions
In these instructions:
Operand2 must not be SP and must not be PC
Rd can be SP only in ADD and SUB, and only with the additional restrictions:
̶
Rn must also be SP
̶
Any shift in Operand2 must be limited to a maximum of 3 bits using LSL
Rn can be SP only in ADD and SUB
Rd can be PC only in the ADD{cond} PC, PC, Rm instruction where:
̶
The user must not specify the S suffix
̶
Rm must not be PC and must not be SP
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
97
̶
If the instruction is conditional, it must be the last instruction in the IT block
With the exception of the ADD{cond} PC, PC, Rm instruction, Rn can be PC only in ADD and SUB, and only
with the additional restrictions:
̶
The user must not specify the S suffix
̶
The second operand must be a constant in the range 0 to 4095.
̶
Note: When using the PC for an addition or a subtraction, bits[1:0] of the PC are rounded to 0b00
before performing the calculation, making the base address for the calculation word-aligned.
̶
Note: To generate the address of an instruction, the constant based on the value of the PC must be
adjusted. ARM recommends to use the ADR instruction instead of ADD or SUB with Rn equal to the
PC, because the assembler automatically calculates the correct constant for the ADR instruction.
When Rd is PC in the ADD{cond} PC, PC, Rm instruction:
Bit[0] of the value written to the PC is ignored
A branch occurs to the address created by forcing bit[0] of that value to 0.
Condition Flags
If S is specified, these instructions update the N, Z, C and V flags according to the result.
Examples
ADD
SUBS
RSB
ADCHI
R2, R1, R3
R8, R6, #240
R4, R4, #1280
R11, R0, R3
;
;
;
;
Sets the flags on the result
Subtracts contents of R4 from 1280
Only executed if C flag set and Z
flag clear.
Multiword Arithmetic Examples
The example below shows two instructions that add a 64-bit integer contained in R2 and R3 to another 64-bit
integer contained in R0 and R1, and place the result in R4 and R5.
64-bit Addition Example
ADDS
R4, R0, R2
ADC
R5, R1, R3
; add the least significant words
; add the most significant words with carry
Multiword values do not have to use consecutive registers. The example below shows instructions that subtract a
96-bit integer contained in R9, R1, and R11 from another contained in R6, R2, and R8. The example stores the
result in R6, R9, and R2.
96-bit Subtraction Example
SUBS
R6, R6, R9
SBCS
R9, R2, R1
SBC
R2, R8, R11
98
; subtract the least significant words
; subtract the middle words with carry
; subtract the most significant words with carry
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.5.2
AND, ORR, EOR, BIC, and ORN
Logical AND, OR, Exclusive OR, Bit Clear, and OR NOT.
Syntax
op{S}{cond} {Rd,} Rn, Operand2
where:
op
is one of:
AND logical AND.
ORR logical OR, or bit set.
EOR logical Exclusive OR.
BIC logical AND NOT, or bit clear.
ORN logical OR NOT.
S
is an optional suffix. If S is specified, the condition code flags are updated on the result
operation, see “Conditional Execution”.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn
is the register holding the first operand.
Operand2
is a flexible second operand. See “Flexible Second Operand” for details of the
options.
of
the
Operation
The AND, EOR, and ORR instructions perform bitwise AND, Exclusive OR, and OR operations on the values in Rn
and Operand2.
The BIC instruction performs an AND operation on the bits in Rn with the complements of the corresponding bits in
the value of Operand2.
The ORN instruction performs an OR operation on the bits in Rn with the complements of the corresponding bits in
the value of Operand2.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
If S is specified, these instructions:
Update the N and Z flags according to the result
Can update the C flag during the calculation of Operand2, see “Flexible Second Operand”
Do not affect the V flag.
Examples
AND
ORREQ
ANDS
EORS
BIC
ORN
ORNS
R9, R2, #0xFF00
R2, R0, R5
R9, R8, #0x19
R7, R11, #0x18181818
R0, R1, #0xab
R7, R11, R14, ROR #4
R7, R11, R14, ASR #32
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
99
12.6.5.3
ASR, LSL, LSR, ROR, and RRX
Arithmetic Shift Right, Logical Shift Left, Logical Shift Right, Rotate Right, and Rotate Right with Extend.
Syntax
op{S}{cond} Rd, Rm, Rs
op{S}{cond} Rd, Rm, #n
RRX{S}{cond} Rd, Rm
where:
op
is one of:
ASR Arithmetic Shift Right.
LSL Logical Shift Left.
LSR Logical Shift Right.
ROR Rotate Right.
S
is an optional suffix. If S is specified, the condition code flags are updated on the result
operation, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rm
is the register holding the value to be shifted.
Rs
is the register holding the shift length to apply to the value in Rm. Only the least
of
the
significant byte is used and can be in the range 0 to 255.
n
is the shift length. The range of shift length depends on the instruction:
ASR shift length from 1 to 32
LSL shift length from 0 to 31
LSR shift length from 1 to 32
ROR shift length from 0 to 31
MOVS Rd, Rm is the preferred syntax for LSLS Rd, Rm, #0.
Operation
ASR, LSL, LSR, and ROR move the bits in the register Rm to the left or right by the number of places specified by
constant n or register Rs.
RRX moves the bits in register Rm to the right by 1.
In all these instructions, the result is written to Rd, but the value in register Rm remains unchanged. For details on
what result is generated by the different instructions, see “Shift Operations”.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
If S is specified:
These instructions update the N and Z flags according to the result
The C flag is updated to the last bit shifted out, except when the shift length is 0, see “Shift Operations”.
Examples
ASR
SLS
LSR
ROR
RRX
100
R7,
R1,
R4,
R4,
R4,
R8,
R2,
R5,
R5,
R5
#9
#3
#6
R6
;
;
;
;
;
Arithmetic shift right by 9 bits
Logical shift left by 3 bits with flag update
Logical shift right by 6 bits
Rotate right by the value in the bottom byte of R6
Rotate right with extend.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.5.4
CLZ
Count Leading Zeros.
Syntax
CLZ{cond} Rd, Rm
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rm
is the operand register.
Operation
The CLZ instruction counts the number of leading zeros in the value in Rm and returns the result in Rd. The result
value is 32 if no bits are set and zero if bit[31] is set.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
This instruction does not change the flags.
Examples
CLZ
CLZNE
R4,R9
R2,R3
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
101
12.6.5.5
CMP and CMN
Compare and Compare Negative.
Syntax
CMP{cond} Rn, Operand2
CMN{cond} Rn, Operand2
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rn
is the register holding the first operand.
Operand2
is a flexible second operand. See “Flexible Second Operand” for details of the
options.
Operation
These instructions compare the value in a register with Operand2. They update the condition flags on the result,
but do not write the result to a register.
The CMP instruction subtracts the value of Operand2 from the value in Rn. This is the same as a SUBS
instruction, except that the result is discarded.
The CMN instruction adds the value of Operand2 to the value in Rn. This is the same as an ADDS instruction,
except that the result is discarded.
Restrictions
In these instructions:
Do not use PC
Operand2 must not be SP.
Condition Flags
These instructions update the N, Z, C and V flags according to the result.
Examples
CMP
CMN
CMPGT
102
R2, R9
R0, #6400
SP, R7, LSL #2
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.5.6
MOV and MVN
Move and Move NOT.
Syntax
MOV{S}{cond} Rd, Operand2
MOV{cond} Rd, #imm16
MVN{S}{cond} Rd, Operand2
where:
S
is an optional suffix. If S is specified, the condition code flags are updated on the result
operation, see “Conditional Execution”.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Operand2
is a flexible second operand. See “Flexible Second Operand” for details of the
options.
imm16
is any value in the range 0–65535.
of
the
Operation
The MOV instruction copies the value of Operand2 into Rd.
When Operand2 in a MOV instruction is a register with a shift other than LSL #0, the preferred syntax is the
corresponding shift instruction:
ASR{S}{cond} Rd, Rm, #n is the preferred syntax for MOV{S}{cond} Rd, Rm, ASR #n
LSL{S}{cond} Rd, Rm, #n is the preferred syntax for MOV{S}{cond} Rd, Rm, LSL #n if n != 0
LSR{S}{cond} Rd, Rm, #n is the preferred syntax for MOV{S}{cond} Rd, Rm, LSR #n
ROR{S}{cond} Rd, Rm, #n is the preferred syntax for MOV{S}{cond} Rd, Rm, ROR #n
RRX{S}{cond} Rd, Rm is the preferred syntax for MOV{S}{cond} Rd, Rm, RRX.
Also, the MOV instruction permits additional forms of Operand2 as synonyms for shift instructions:
MOV{S}{cond} Rd, Rm, ASR Rs is a synonym for ASR{S}{cond} Rd, Rm, Rs
MOV{S}{cond} Rd, Rm, LSL Rs is a synonym for LSL{S}{cond} Rd, Rm, Rs
MOV{S}{cond} Rd, Rm, LSR Rs is a synonym for LSR{S}{cond} Rd, Rm, Rs
MOV{S}{cond} Rd, Rm, ROR Rs is a synonym for ROR{S}{cond} Rd, Rm, Rs
See “ASR, LSL, LSR, ROR, and RRX”.
The MVN instruction takes the value of Operand2, performs a bitwise logical NOT operation on the value, and
places the result into Rd.
The MOVW instruction provides the same function as MOV, but is restricted to using the imm16 operand.
Restrictions
SP and PC only can be used in the MOV instruction, with the following restrictions:
The second operand must be a register without shift
The S suffix must not be specified.
When Rd is PC in a MOV instruction:
Bit[0] of the value written to the PC is ignored
A branch occurs to the address created by forcing bit[0] of that value to 0.
Though it is possible to use MOV as a branch instruction, ARM strongly recommends the use of a BX or BLX
instruction to branch for software portability to the ARM instruction set.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
103
Condition Flags
If S is specified, these instructions:
Update the N and Z flags according to the result
Can update the C flag during the calculation of Operand2, see “Flexible Second Operand”
Do not affect the V flag.
Examples
MOVS R11, #0x000B
; Write value of 0x000B to
R11, flags get updated
MOV
R1, #0xFA05
; Write value of 0xFA05 to
R1, flags are not updated
MOVS R10, R12
; Write value in R12 to R10,
flags get updated
MOV
R3, #23
; Write value of 23 to R3
MOV
R8, SP
; Write value of stack pointer to R8
MVNS R2, #0xF
; Write value of 0xFFFFFFF0 (bitwise inverse of 0xF)
; to the R2 and update flags.
12.6.5.7
MOVT
Move Top.
Syntax
MOVT{cond} Rd, #imm16
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
imm16
is a 16-bit immediate constant.
Operation
MOVT writes a 16-bit immediate value, imm16, to the top halfword, Rd[31:16], of its destination register. The write
does not affect Rd[15:0].
The MOV, MOVT instruction pair enables to generate any 32-bit constant.
Restrictions
Rd must not be SP and must not be PC.
Condition Flags
This instruction does not change the flags.
Examples
MOVT
104
R3, #0xF123 ; Write 0xF123 to upper halfword of R3, lower halfword
; and APSR are unchanged.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.5.8
REV, REV16, REVSH, and RBIT
Reverse bytes and Reverse bits.
Syntax
op{cond} Rd, Rn
where:
op
is any of:
REV Reverse byte order in a word.
REV16 Reverse byte order in each halfword independently.
REVSH Reverse byte order in the bottom halfword, and sign extend to 32 bits.
RBIT Reverse the bit order in a 32-bit word.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn
is the register holding the operand.
Operation
Use these instructions to change endianness of data:
REV converts either:
32-bit big-endian data into little-endian data
32-bit little-endian data into big-endian data.
REV16 converts either:
16-bit big-endian data into little-endian data
16-bit little-endian data into big-endian data.
REVSH converts either:
16-bit signed big-endian data into 32-bit signed little-endian data
16-bit signed little-endian data into 32-bit signed big-endian data.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
REV
REV16
REVSH
REVHS
RBIT
R3,
R0,
R0,
R3,
R7,
R7;
R0;
R5;
R7;
R8;
Reverse
Reverse
Reverse
Reverse
Reverse
byte order of value in R7 and write it to R3
byte order of each 16-bit halfword in R0
Signed Halfword
with Higher or Same condition
bit order of value in R8 and write the result to R7.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
105
12.6.5.9
SADD16 and SADD8
Signed Add 16 and Signed Add 8
Syntax
op{cond}{Rd,} Rn, Rm
where:
op
is any of:
SADD16 Performs two 16-bit signed integer additions.
SADD8 Performs four 8-bit signed integer additions.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn
is the first register holding the operand.
Rm
is the second register holding the operand.
Operation
Use these instructions to perform a halfword or byte add in parallel:
The SADD16 instruction:
1. Adds each halfword from the first operand to the corresponding halfword of the second operand.
2.
Writes the result in the corresponding halfwords of the destination register.
The SADD8 instruction:
1. Adds each byte of the first operand to the corresponding byte of the second operand.
Writes the result in the corresponding bytes of the destination register.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
SADD16 R1, R0
SADD8
106
;
;
;
R4, R0, R5 ;
;
Adds the halfwords in R0 to the corresponding
halfwords of R1 and writes to corresponding halfword
of R1.
Adds bytes of R0 to the corresponding byte in R5 and
writes to the corresponding byte in R4.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.5.10
SHADD16 and SHADD8
Signed Halving Add 16 and Signed Halving Add 8
Syntax
op{cond}{Rd,} Rn, Rm
where:
op
is any of:
SHADD16 Signed Halving Add 16.
SHADD8 Signed Halving Add 8.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn
is the first operand register.
Rm
is the second operand register.
Operation
Use these instructions to add 16-bit and 8-bit data and then to halve the result before writing the result to the
destination register:
The SHADD16 instruction:
1. Adds each halfword from the first operand to the corresponding halfword of the second operand.
2.
Shuffles the result by one bit to the right, halving the data.
3.
Writes the halfword results in the destination register.
The SHADDB8 instruction:
1. Adds each byte of the first operand to the corresponding byte of the second operand.
2.
Shuffles the result by one bit to the right, halving the data.
3.
Writes the byte results in the destination register.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
SHADD16 R1, R0
SHADD8
;
;
;
R4, R0, R5 ;
;
Adds halfwords in R0 to corresponding halfword of R1
and writes halved result to corresponding halfword in
R1
Adds bytes of R0 to corresponding byte in R5 and
writes halved result to corresponding byte in R4.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
107
12.6.5.11
SHASX and SHSAX
Signed Halving Add and Subtract with Exchange and Signed Halving Subtract and Add with Exchange.
Syntax
op{cond} {Rd}, Rn, Rm
where:
op
is any of:
SHASX Add and Subtract with Exchange and Halving.
SHSAX Subtract and Add with Exchange and Halving.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn, Rm
are registers holding the first and second operands.
Operation
The SHASX instruction:
1. Adds the top halfword of the first operand with the bottom halfword of the second operand.
2.
Writes the halfword result of the addition to the top halfword of the destination register, shifted by one bit to
the right causing a divide by two, or halving.
3.
Subtracts the top halfword of the second operand from the bottom highword of the first operand.
4.
Writes the halfword result of the division in the bottom halfword of the destination register, shifted by one bit
to the right causing a divide by two, or halving.
The SHSAX instruction:
1. Subtracts the bottom halfword of the second operand from the top highword of the first operand.
2.
Writes the halfword result of the addition to the bottom halfword of the destination register, shifted by one bit
to the right causing a divide by two, or halving.
3.
Adds the bottom halfword of the first operand with the top halfword of the second operand.
4.
Writes the halfword result of the division in the top halfword of the destination register, shifted by one bit to
the right causing a divide by two, or halving.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not affect the condition code flags.
108
Examples
SHASX
R7, R4, R2
SHSAX
R0, R3, R5
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Adds top halfword of R4 to bottom halfword of R2
and writes halved result to top halfword of R7
Subtracts top halfword of R2 from bottom halfword of
R4 and writes halved result to bottom halfword of R7
Subtracts bottom halfword of R5 from top halfword
of R3 and writes halved result to top halfword of R0
Adds top halfword of R5 to bottom halfword of R3 and
writes halved result to bottom halfword of R0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.5.12
SHSUB16 and SHSUB8
Signed Halving Subtract 16 and Signed Halving Subtract 8
Syntax
op{cond}{Rd,} Rn, Rm
where:
op
is any of:
SHSUB16 Signed Halving Subtract 16.
SHSUB8 Signed Halving Subtract 8.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn
is the first operand register.
Rm
is the second operand register.
Operation
Use these instructions to add 16-bit and 8-bit data and then to halve the result before writing the result to the
destination register:
The SHSUB16 instruction:
1. Subtracts each halfword of the second operand from the corresponding halfwords of the first operand.
2.
Shuffles the result by one bit to the right, halving the data.
3.
Writes the halved halfword results in the destination register.
The SHSUBB8 instruction:
1. Subtracts each byte of the second operand from the corresponding byte of the first operand,
2.
Shuffles the result by one bit to the right, halving the data,
3.
Writes the corresponding signed byte results in the destination register.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
SHSUB16 R1, R0
SHSUB8
;
;
R4, R0, R5 ;
;
Subtracts halfwords in R0 from corresponding halfword
of R1 and writes to corresponding halfword of R1
Subtracts bytes of R0 from corresponding byte in R5,
and writes to corresponding byte in R4.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
109
12.6.5.13
SSUB16 and SSUB8
Signed Subtract 16 and Signed Subtract 8
Syntax
op{cond}{Rd,} Rn, Rm
where:
op
is any of:
SSUB16 Performs two 16-bit signed integer subtractions.
SSUB8 Performs four 8-bit signed integer subtractions.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn
is the first operand register.
Rm
is the second operand register.
Operation
Use these instructions to change endianness of data:
The SSUB16 instruction:
1. Subtracts each halfword from the second operand from the corresponding halfword of the first operand
2.
Writes the difference result of two signed halfwords in the corresponding halfword of the destination register.
The SSUB8 instruction:
1. Subtracts each byte of the second operand from the corresponding byte of the first operand
2.
Writes the difference result of four signed bytes in the corresponding byte of the destination register.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
SSUB16 R1, R0
SSUB8
110
;
;
R4, R0, R5 ;
;
Subtracts halfwords in R0 from corresponding halfword
of R1 and writes to corresponding halfword of R1
Subtracts bytes of R5 from corresponding byte in
R0, and writes to corresponding byte of R4.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.5.14
SASX and SSAX
Signed Add and Subtract with Exchange and Signed Subtract and Add with Exchange.
Syntax
op{cond} {Rd}, Rm, Rn
where:
op
is any of:
SASX Signed Add and Subtract with Exchange.
SSAX Signed Subtract and Add with Exchange.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn, Rm
are registers holding the first and second operands.
Operation
The SASX instruction:
1. Adds the signed top halfword of the first operand with the signed bottom halfword of the second operand.
2.
Writes the signed result of the addition to the top halfword of the destination register.
3.
Subtracts the signed bottom halfword of the second operand from the top signed highword of the first
operand.
4.
Writes the signed result of the subtraction to the bottom halfword of the destination register.
The SSAX instruction:
1. Subtracts the signed bottom halfword of the second operand from the top signed highword of the first
operand.
2.
Writes the signed result of the addition to the bottom halfword of the destination register.
3.
Adds the signed top halfword of the first operand with the signed bottom halfword of the second operand.
4.
Writes the signed result of the subtraction to the top halfword of the destination register.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not affect the condition code flags.
Examples
SASX
SSAX
R0, R4, R5 ;
;
;
;
R7, R3, R2 ;
;
;
;
Adds top halfword of R4 to bottom halfword of R5 and
writes to top halfword of R0
Subtracts bottom halfword of R5 from top halfword of R4
and writes to bottom halfword of R0
Subtracts top halfword of R2 from bottom halfword of R3
and writes to bottom halfword of R7
Adds top halfword of R3 with bottom halfword of R2 and
writes to top halfword of R7.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
111
12.6.5.15
TST and TEQ
Test bits and Test Equivalence.
Syntax
TST{cond} Rn, Operand2
TEQ{cond} Rn, Operand2
where
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rn
is the register holding the first operand.
Operand2
is a flexible second operand. See “Flexible Second Operand” for details of the
options.
Operation
These instructions test the value in a register against Operand2. They update the condition flags based on the
result, but do not write the result to a register.
The TST instruction performs a bitwise AND operation on the value in Rn and the value of Operand2. This is the
same as the ANDS instruction, except that it discards the result.
To test whether a bit of Rn is 0 or 1, use the TST instruction with an Operand2 constant that has that bit set to 1
and all other bits cleared to 0.
The TEQ instruction performs a bitwise Exclusive OR operation on the value in Rn and the value of Operand2.
This is the same as the EORS instruction, except that it discards the result.
Use the TEQ instruction to test if two values are equal without affecting the V or C flags.
TEQ is also useful for testing the sign of a value. After the comparison, the N flag is the logical Exclusive OR of the
sign bits of the two operands.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions:
Update the N and Z flags according to the result
Can update the C flag during the calculation of Operand2, see “Flexible Second Operand”
Do not affect the V flag.
Examples
TST
TEQEQ
112
R0, #0x3F8 ;
;
R10, R9
;
;
Perform bitwise AND of R0 value to 0x3F8,
APSR is updated but result is discarded
Conditionally test if value in R10 is equal to
value in R9, APSR is updated but result is discarded.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.5.16
UADD16 and UADD8
Unsigned Add 16 and Unsigned Add 8
Syntax
op{cond}{Rd,} Rn, Rm
where:
op
is any of:
UADD16 Performs two 16-bit unsigned integer additions.
UADD8 Performs four 8-bit unsigned integer additions.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn
is the first register holding the operand.
Rm
is the second register holding the operand.
Operation
Use these instructions to add 16- and 8-bit unsigned data:
The UADD16 instruction:
1. Adds each halfword from the first operand to the corresponding halfword of the second operand.
2.
Writes the unsigned result in the corresponding halfwords of the destination register.
The UADD16 instruction:
1. Adds each byte of the first operand to the corresponding byte of the second operand.
2.
Writes the unsigned result in the corresponding byte of the destination register.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
UADD16 R1, R0
UADD8
R4, R0, R5
;
;
;
;
Adds halfwords in R0 to corresponding halfword of R1,
writes to corresponding halfword of R1
Adds bytes of R0 to corresponding byte in R5 and
writes to corresponding byte in R4.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
113
12.6.5.17
UASX and USAX
Add and Subtract with Exchange and Subtract and Add with Exchange.
Syntax
op{cond} {Rd}, Rn, Rm
where:
op
is one of:
UASX Add and Subtract with Exchange.
USAX Subtract and Add with Exchange.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn, Rm
are registers holding the first and second operands.
Operation
The UASX instruction:
1. Subtracts the top halfword of the second operand from the bottom halfword of the first operand.
2.
Writes the unsigned result from the subtraction to the bottom halfword of the destination register.
3.
Adds the top halfword of the first operand with the bottom halfword of the second operand.
4.
Writes the unsigned result of the addition to the top halfword of the destination register.
The USAX instruction:
1. Adds the bottom halfword of the first operand with the top halfword of the second operand.
2.
Writes the unsigned result of the addition to the bottom halfword of the destination register.
3.
Subtracts the bottom halfword of the second operand from the top halfword of the first operand.
4.
Writes the unsigned result from the subtraction to the top halfword of the destination register.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not affect the condition code flags.
Examples
UASX
USAX
114
R0, R4, R5 ;
;
;
;
R7, R3, R2 ;
;
;
;
Adds top halfword of R4 to bottom halfword of R5 and
writes to top halfword of R0
Subtracts bottom halfword of R5 from top halfword of R0
and writes to bottom halfword of R0
Subtracts top halfword of R2 from bottom halfword of R3
and writes to bottom halfword of R7
Adds top halfword of R3 to bottom halfword of R2 and
writes to top halfword of R7.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.5.18
UHADD16 and UHADD8
Unsigned Halving Add 16 and Unsigned Halving Add 8
Syntax
op{cond}{Rd,} Rn, Rm
where:
op
is any of:
UHADD16 Unsigned Halving Add 16.
UHADD8 Unsigned Halving Add 8.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn
is the register holding the first operand.
Rm
is the register holding the second operand.
Operation
Use these instructions to add 16- and 8-bit data and then to halve the result before writing the result to the
destination register:
The UHADD16 instruction:
1. Adds each halfword from the first operand to the corresponding halfword of the second operand.
2.
Shuffles the halfword result by one bit to the right, halving the data.
3.
Writes the unsigned results to the corresponding halfword in the destination register.
The UHADD8 instruction:
1. Adds each byte of the first operand to the corresponding byte of the second operand.
2.
Shuffles the byte result by one bit to the right, halving the data.
3.
Writes the unsigned results in the corresponding byte in the destination register.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
UHADD16 R7, R3
UHADD8
R4, R0, R5
;
;
;
;
;
Adds halfwords in R7 to corresponding halfword of R3
and writes halved result to corresponding halfword
in R7
Adds bytes of R0 to corresponding byte in R5 and
writes halved result to corresponding byte in R4.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
115
12.6.5.19
UHASX and UHSAX
Unsigned Halving Add and Subtract with Exchange and Unsigned Halving Subtract and Add with Exchange.
Syntax
op{cond} {Rd}, Rn, Rm
where:
op
is one of:
UHASX Add and Subtract with Exchange and Halving.
UHSAX Subtract and Add with Exchange and Halving.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn, Rm
are registers holding the first and second operands.
Operation
The UHASX instruction:
1. Adds the top halfword of the first operand with the bottom halfword of the second operand.
2.
Shifts the result by one bit to the right causing a divide by two, or halving.
3.
Writes the halfword result of the addition to the top halfword of the destination register.
4.
Subtracts the top halfword of the second operand from the bottom highword of the first operand.
5.
Shifts the result by one bit to the right causing a divide by two, or halving.
6.
Writes the halfword result of the division in the bottom halfword of the destination register.
The UHSAX instruction:
1. Subtracts the bottom halfword of the second operand from the top highword of the first operand.
2.
Shifts the result by one bit to the right causing a divide by two, or halving.
3.
Writes the halfword result of the subtraction in the top halfword of the destination register.
4.
Adds the bottom halfword of the first operand with the top halfword of the second operand.
5.
Shifts the result by one bit to the right causing a divide by two, or halving.
6.
Writes the halfword result of the addition to the bottom halfword of the destination register.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not affect the condition code flags.
Examples
UHASX
UHSAX
116
R7, R4, R2 ;
;
;
;
R0, R3, R5 ;
;
;
;
Adds top halfword of R4 with bottom halfword of R2
and writes halved result to top halfword of R7
Subtracts top halfword of R2 from bottom halfword of
R7 and writes halved result to bottom halfword of R7
Subtracts bottom halfword of R5 from top halfword of
R3 and writes halved result to top halfword of R0
Adds top halfword of R5 to bottom halfword of R3 and
writes halved result to bottom halfword of R0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.5.20
UHSUB16 and UHSUB8
Unsigned Halving Subtract 16 and Unsigned Halving Subtract 8
Syntax
op{cond}{Rd,} Rn, Rm
where:
op
is any of:
UHSUB16 Performs two unsigned 16-bit integer additions, halves the results,
and writes the results to the destination register.
UHSUB8 Performs four unsigned 8-bit integer additions, halves the results, and
writes the results to the destination register.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn
is the first register holding the operand.
Rm
is the second register holding the operand.
Operation
Use these instructions to add 16-bit and 8-bit data and then to halve the result before writing the result to the
destination register:
The UHSUB16 instruction:
1. Subtracts each halfword of the second operand from the corresponding halfword of the first operand.
2.
Shuffles each halfword result to the right by one bit, halving the data.
3.
Writes each unsigned halfword result to the corresponding halfwords in the destination register.
The UHSUB8 instruction:
1. Subtracts each byte of second operand from the corresponding byte of the first operand.
2.
Shuffles each byte result by one bit to the right, halving the data.
3.
Writes the unsigned byte results to the corresponding byte of the destination register.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
UHSUB16 R1, R0
UHSUB8
R4, R0, R5
;
;
;
;
Subtracts halfwords in R0 from corresponding halfword of
R1 and writes halved result to corresponding halfword in R1
Subtracts bytes of R5 from corresponding byte in R0 and
writes halved result to corresponding byte in R4.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
117
12.6.5.21
SEL
Select Bytes. Selects each byte of its result from either its first operand or its second operand, according to the
values of the GE flags.
Syntax
SEL{<c>}{<q>} {<Rd>,} <Rn>, <Rm>
where:
c, q
are standard assembler syntax fields.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn
is the first register holding the operand.
Rm
is the second register holding the operand.
Operation
The SEL instruction:
1. Reads the value of each bit of APSR.GE.
2.
Depending on the value of APSR.GE, assigns the destination register the value of either the first or second
operand register.
Restrictions
None.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
SADD16 R0, R1, R2
SEL
R0, R0, R3
118
; Set GE bits based on result
; Select bytes from R0 or R3, based on GE.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.5.22
USAD8
Unsigned Sum of Absolute Differences
Syntax
USAD8{cond}{Rd,} Rn, Rm
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn
is the first operand register.
Rm
is the second operand register.
Operation
The USAD8 instruction:
1. Subtracts each byte of the second operand register from the corresponding byte of the first operand
register.
2.
Adds the absolute values of the differences together.
3.
Writes the result to the destination register.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
USAD8 R1, R4, R0 ;
;
USAD8 R0, R5
;
;
Subtracts each byte in R0 from corresponding byte of R4
adds the differences and writes to R1
Subtracts bytes of R5 from corresponding byte in R0,
adds the differences and writes to R0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
119
12.6.5.23
USADA8
Unsigned Sum of Absolute Differences and Accumulate
Syntax
USADA8{cond}{Rd,} Rn, Rm, Ra
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn
is the first operand register.
Rm
is the second operand register.
Ra
is the register that contains the accumulation value.
Operation
The USADA8 instruction:
1. Subtracts each byte of the second operand register from the corresponding byte of the first operand
register.
2.
Adds the unsigned absolute differences together.
3.
Adds the accumulation value to the sum of the absolute differences.
4.
Writes the result to the destination register.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
USADA8 R1, R0, R6
USADA8 R4, R0, R5, R2
120
;
;
;
;
Subtracts bytes in R0 from corresponding halfword of R1
adds differences, adds value of R6, writes to R1
Subtracts bytes of R5 from corresponding byte in R0
adds differences, adds value of R2 writes to R4.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.5.24
USUB16 and USUB8
Unsigned Subtract 16 and Unsigned Subtract 8
Syntax
op{cond}{Rd,} Rn, Rm
where
op
is any of:
USUB16 Unsigned Subtract 16.
USUB8 Unsigned Subtract 8.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn
is the first operand register.
Rm
is the second operand register.
Operation
Use these instructions to subtract 16-bit and 8-bit data before writing the result to the destination register:
The USUB16 instruction:
1. Subtracts each halfword from the second operand register from the corresponding halfword of the first
operand register.
2.
Writes the unsigned result in the corresponding halfwords of the destination register.
The USUB8 instruction:
1. Subtracts each byte of the second operand register from the corresponding byte of the first operand
register.
2.
Writes the unsigned byte result in the corresponding byte of the destination register.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
USUB16 R1, R0
;
;
;
;
Subtracts halfwords in R0 from corresponding halfword of R1
and writes to corresponding halfword in R1USUB8 R4, R0, R5
Subtracts bytes of R5 from corresponding byte in R0 and
writes to the corresponding byte in R4.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
121
12.6.6 Multiply and Divide Instructions
The table below shows the multiply and divide instructions.
Table 12-21.
Multiply and Divide Instructions
Mnemonic
Description
MLA
Multiply with Accumulate, 32-bit result
MLS
Multiply and Subtract, 32-bit result
MUL
Multiply, 32-bit result
SDIV
Signed Divide
SMLA[B,T]
Signed Multiply Accumulate (halfwords)
SMLAD, SMLADX
Signed Multiply Accumulate Dual
SMLAL
Signed Multiply with Accumulate (32 × 32 + 64), 64-bit result
SMLAL[B,T]
Signed Multiply Accumulate Long (halfwords)
SMLALD, SMLALDX
Signed Multiply Accumulate Long Dual
SMLAW[B|T]
Signed Multiply Accumulate (word by halfword)
SMLSD
Signed Multiply Subtract Dual
SMLSLD
Signed Multiply Subtract Long Dual
SMMLA
Signed Most Significant Word Multiply Accumulate
SMMLS, SMMLSR
Signed Most Significant Word Multiply Subtract
SMUAD, SMUADX
Signed Dual Multiply Add
SMUL[B,T]
Signed Multiply (word by halfword)
SMMUL, SMMULR
Signed Most Significant Word Multiply
SMULL
Signed Multiply (32x32), 64-bit result
SMULWB, SMULWT
Signed Multiply (word by halfword)
SMUSD, SMUSDX
Signed Dual Multiply Subtract
UDIV
Unsigned Divide
UMAAL
Unsigned Multiply Accumulate Accumulate Long (32 × 32 + 32 + 32), 64-bit result
UMLAL
Unsigned Multiply with Accumulate (32 × 32 + 64), 64-bit result
UMULL
Unsigned Multiply (32 × 32), 64-bit result
122
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.6.1
MUL, MLA, and MLS
Multiply, Multiply with Accumulate, and Multiply with Subtract, using 32-bit operands, and producing a 32-bit result.
Syntax
MUL{S}{cond} {Rd,} Rn, Rm ; Multiply
MLA{cond} Rd, Rn, Rm, Ra ; Multiply with accumulate
MLS{cond} Rd, Rn, Rm, Ra ; Multiply with subtract
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
S
is an optional suffix. If S is specified, the condition code flags are updated on the result
operation, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register. If Rd is omitted, the destination register is Rn.
Rn, Rm
are registers holding the values to be multiplied.
Ra
is a register holding the value to be added or subtracted from.
of
the
Operation
The MUL instruction multiplies the values from Rn and Rm, and places the least significant 32 bits of the result in
Rd.
The MLA instruction multiplies the values from Rn and Rm, adds the value from Ra, and places the least
significant 32 bits of the result in Rd.
The MLS instruction multiplies the values from Rn and Rm, subtracts the product from the value from Ra, and
places the least significant 32 bits of the result in Rd.
The results of these instructions do not depend on whether the operands are signed or unsigned.
Restrictions
In these instructions, do not use SP and do not use PC.
If the S suffix is used with the MUL instruction:
Rd, Rn, and Rm must all be in the range R0 to R7
Rd must be the same as Rm
The cond suffix must not be used.
Condition Flags
If S is specified, the MUL instruction:
Updates the N and Z flags according to the result
Does not affect the C and V flags.
Examples
MUL
MLA
MULS
MULLT
MLS
R10, R2, R5
R10, R2, R1, R5
R0, R2, R2
R2, R3, R2
R4, R5, R6, R7
;
;
;
;
;
Multiply, R10
Multiply with
Multiply with
Conditionally
Multiply with
= R2 x R5
accumulate, R10 =
flag update, R0 =
multiply, R2 = R3
subtract, R4 = R7
(R2 x R1) + R5
R2 x R2
x R2
- (R5 x R6)
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
123
12.6.6.2
UMULL, UMAAL, UMLAL
Unsigned Long Multiply, with optional Accumulate, using 32-bit operands and producing a 64-bit result.
Syntax
op{cond} RdLo, RdHi, Rn, Rm
where:
op
is one of:
UMULL Unsigned Long Multiply.
UMAAL Unsigned Long Multiply with Accumulate Accumulate.
UMLAL Unsigned Long Multiply, with Accumulate.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
RdHi, RdLo
are the destination registers. For UMAAL, UMLAL and UMLAL they also hold
the accumulating value.
Rn, Rm
are registers holding the first and second operands.
Operation
These instructions interpret the values from Rn and Rm as unsigned 32-bit integers.
The UMULL instruction:
Multiplies the two unsigned integers in the first and second operands.
Writes the least significant 32 bits of the result in RdLo.
Writes the most significant 32 bits of the result in RdHi.
The UMAAL instruction:
Multiplies the two unsigned 32-bit integers in the first and second operands.
Adds the unsigned 32-bit integer in RdHi to the 64-bit result of the multiplication.
Adds the unsigned 32-bit integer in RdLo to the 64-bit result of the addition.
Writes the top 32-bits of the result to RdHi.
Writes the lower 32-bits of the result to RdLo.
The UMLAL instruction:
Multiplies the two unsigned integers in the first and second operands.
Adds the 64-bit result to the 64-bit unsigned integer contained in RdHi and RdLo.
Writes the result back to RdHi and RdLo.
Restrictions
In these instructions:
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
RdHi and RdLo must be different registers.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not affect the condition code flags.
Examples
UMULL
R0, R4, R5, R6
UMAAL
R3, R6, R2, R7
UMLAL
R2, R1, R3, R5
124
;
;
;
;
;
Multiplies R5 and R6, writes the top 32 bits to R4
and the bottom 32 bits to R0
Multiplies R2 and R7, adds R6, adds R3, writes the
top 32 bits to R6, and the bottom 32 bits to R3
Multiplies R5 and R3, adds R1:R2, writes to R1:R2.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.6.3
SMLA and SMLAW
Signed Multiply Accumulate (halfwords).
Syntax
op{XY}{cond} Rd, Rn, Rm
op{Y}{cond} Rd, Rn, Rm, Ra
where:
op
is one of:
SMLA Signed Multiply Accumulate Long (halfwords).
X and Y specifies which half of the source registers Rn and Rm are used as the
first and second multiply operand.
If X is B, then the bottom halfword, bits [15:0], of Rn is used.
If X is T, then the top halfword, bits [31:16], of Rn is used.
If Y is B, then the bottom halfword, bits [15:0], of Rm is used.
If Y is T, then the top halfword, bits [31:16], of Rm is used
SMLAW Signed Multiply Accumulate (word by halfword).
Y specifies which half of the source register Rm is used as the second multiply
operand.
If Y is T, then the top halfword, bits [31:16] of Rm is used.
If Y is B, then the bottom halfword, bits [15:0] of Rm is used.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register. If Rd is omitted, the destination register is Rn.
Rn, Rm
are registers holding the values to be multiplied.
Ra
is a register holding the value to be added or subtracted from.
Operation
The SMALBB, SMLABT, SMLATB, SMLATT instructions:
Multiplies the specified signed halfword, top or bottom, values from Rn and Rm.
Adds the value in Ra to the resulting 32-bit product.
Writes the result of the multiplication and addition in Rd.
The non-specified halfwords of the source registers are ignored.
The SMLAWB and SMLAWT instructions:
Multiply the 32-bit signed values in Rn with:
̶
̶
The top signed halfword of Rm, T instruction suffix.
The bottom signed halfword of Rm, B instruction suffix.
Add the 32-bit signed value in Ra to the top 32 bits of the 48-bit product
Writes the result of the multiplication and addition in Rd.
The bottom 16 bits of the 48-bit product are ignored.
If overflow occurs during the addition of the accumulate value, the instruction sets the Q flag in the APSR. No
overflow can occur during the multiplication.
Restrictions
In these instructions, do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
If an overflow is detected, the Q flag is set.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
125
Examples
SMLABB
SMLATB
SMLATT
SMLABT
SMLABT
SMLAWB
SMLAWT
126
R5, R6, R4, R1
;
;
R5, R6, R4, R1 ;
;
R5, R6, R4, R1 ;
;
R5, R6, R4, R1 ;
;
R4, R3, R2
;
;
R10, R2, R5, R3 ;
;
R10, R2, R1, R5 ;
;
Multiplies bottom halfwords of R6 and R4, adds
R1 and writes to R5
Multiplies top halfword of R6 with bottom halfword
of R4, adds R1 and writes to R5
Multiplies top halfwords of R6 and R4, adds
R1 and writes the sum to R5
Multiplies bottom halfword of R6 with top halfword
of R4, adds R1 and writes to R5
Multiplies bottom halfword of R4 with top halfword of
R3, adds R2 and writes to R4
Multiplies R2 with bottom halfword of R5, adds
R3 to the result and writes top 32-bits to R10
Multiplies R2 with top halfword of R1, adds R5
and writes top 32-bits to R10.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.6.4
SMLAD
Signed Multiply Accumulate Long Dual
Syntax
op{X}{cond} Rd, Rn, Rm, Ra
;
where:
op
is one of:
SMLAD Signed Multiply Accumulate Dual.
SMLADX Signed Multiply Accumulate Dual Reverse.
X specifies which halfword of the source register Rn is used as the multiply
operand.
If X is omitted, the multiplications are bottom × bottom and top × top.
If X is present, the multiplications are bottom × top and top × bottom.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn
is the first operand register holding the values to be multiplied.
Rm
the second operand register.
Ra
is the accumulate value.
Operation
The SMLAD and SMLADX instructions regard the two operands as four halfword 16-bit values. The SMLAD and
SMLADX instructions:
If X is not present, multiply the top signed halfword value in Rn with the top signed halfword of Rm and the
bottom signed halfword values in Rn with the bottom signed halfword of Rm.
Or if X is present, multiply the top signed halfword value in Rn with the bottom signed halfword of Rm and
the bottom signed halfword values in Rn with the top signed halfword of Rm.
Add both multiplication results to the signed 32-bit value in Ra.
Writes the 32-bit signed result of the multiplication and addition to Rd.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
SMLAD
R10, R2, R1, R5 ;
;
;
SMLALDX R0, R2, R4, R6 ;
;
;
;
Multiplies two halfword values in R2 with
corresponding halfwords in R1, adds R5 and
writes to R10
Multiplies top halfword of R2 with bottom
halfword of R4, multiplies bottom halfword of R2
with top halfword of R4, adds R6 and writes to
R0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
127
12.6.6.5
SMLAL and SMLALD
Signed Multiply Accumulate Long, Signed Multiply Accumulate Long (halfwords) and Signed Multiply Accumulate
Long Dual.
Syntax
op{cond} RdLo, RdHi, Rn, Rm
op{XY}{cond} RdLo, RdHi, Rn, Rm
op{X}{cond} RdLo, RdHi, Rn, Rm
where:
op
is one of:
MLAL Signed Multiply Accumulate Long.
SMLAL Signed Multiply Accumulate Long (halfwords, X and Y).
X and Y specify which halfword of the source registers Rn and Rm are used as
the first and second multiply operand:
If X is B, then the bottom halfword, bits [15:0], of Rn is used.
If X is T, then the top halfword, bits [31:16], of Rn is used.
If Y is B, then the bottom halfword, bits [15:0], of Rm is used.
If Y is T, then the top halfword, bits [31:16], of Rm is used.
SMLALD Signed Multiply Accumulate Long Dual.
SMLALDX Signed Multiply Accumulate Long Dual Reversed.
If the X is omitted, the multiplications are bottom × bottom and top × top.
If X is present, the multiplications are bottom × top and top × bottom.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
RdHi, RdLo
are the destination registers.
RdLo is the lower 32 bits and RdHi is the upper 32 bits of the 64-bit integer.
For SMLAL, SMLALBB, SMLALBT, SMLALTB, SMLALTT, SMLALD and SMLA
LDX, they also hold the accumulating value.
Rn, Rm
are registers holding the first and second operands.
Operation
The SMLAL instruction:
Multiplies the two’s complement signed word values from Rn and Rm.
Adds the 64-bit value in RdLo and RdHi to the resulting 64-bit product.
Writes the 64-bit result of the multiplication and addition in RdLo and RdHi.
The SMLALBB, SMLALBT, SMLALTB and SMLALTT instructions:
Multiplies the specified signed halfword, Top or Bottom, values from Rn and Rm.
Adds the resulting sign-extended 32-bit product to the 64-bit value in RdLo and RdHi.
Writes the 64-bit result of the multiplication and addition in RdLo and RdHi.
The non-specified halfwords of the source registers are ignored.
The SMLALD and SMLALDX instructions interpret the values from Rn and Rm as four halfword two’s complement
signed 16-bit integers. These instructions:
128
If X is not present, multiply the top signed halfword value of Rn with the top signed halfword of Rm and the
bottom signed halfword values of Rn with the bottom signed halfword of Rm.
Or if X is present, multiply the top signed halfword value of Rn with the bottom signed halfword of Rm and
the bottom signed halfword values of Rn with the top signed halfword of Rm.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Add the two multiplication results to the signed 64-bit value in RdLo and RdHi to create the resulting 64-bit
product.
Write the 64-bit product in RdLo and RdHi.
Restrictions
In these instructions:
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
RdHi and RdLo must be different registers.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not affect the condition code flags.
Examples
SMLAL
R4, R5, R3, R8
SMLALBT
R2, R1, R6, R7
SMLALTB
R2, R1, R6, R7
SMLALD
R6, R8, R5, R1
SMLALDX
R6, R8, R5, R1
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Multiplies R3 and R8, adds R5:R4 and writes to
R5:R4
Multiplies bottom halfword of R6 with top
halfword of R7, sign extends to 32-bit, adds
R1:R2 and writes to R1:R2
Multiplies top halfword of R6 with bottom
halfword of R7,sign extends to 32-bit, adds R1:R2
and writes to R1:R2
Multiplies top halfwords in R5 and R1 and bottom
halfwords of R5 and R1, adds R8:R6 and writes to
R8:R6
Multiplies top halfword in R5 with bottom
halfword of R1, and bottom halfword of R5 with
top halfword of R1, adds R8:R6 and writes to
R8:R6.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
129
12.6.6.6
SMLSD and SMLSLD
Signed Multiply Subtract Dual and Signed Multiply Subtract Long Dual
Syntax
op{X}{cond} Rd, Rn, Rm, Ra
where:
op
is one of:
SMLSD Signed Multiply Subtract Dual.
SMLSDX Signed Multiply Subtract Dual Reversed.
SMLSLD Signed Multiply Subtract Long Dual.
SMLSLDX Signed Multiply Subtract Long Dual Reversed.
SMLAW Signed Multiply Accumulate (word by halfword).
If X is present, the multiplications are bottom × top and top × bottom.
If the X is omitted, the multiplications are bottom × bottom and top × top.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn, Rm
are registers holding the first and second operands.
Ra
is the register holding the accumulate value.
Operation
The SMLSD instruction interprets the values from the first and second operands as four signed halfwords. This
instruction:
Optionally rotates the halfwords of the second operand.
Performs two signed 16 × 16-bit halfword multiplications.
Subtracts the result of the upper halfword multiplication from the result of the lower halfword multiplication.
Adds the signed accumulate value to the result of the subtraction.
Writes the result of the addition to the destination register.
The SMLSLD instruction interprets the values from Rn and Rm as four signed halfwords.
This instruction:
Optionally rotates the halfwords of the second operand.
Performs two signed 16 × 16-bit halfword multiplications.
Subtracts the result of the upper halfword multiplication from the result of the lower halfword multiplication.
Adds the 64-bit value in RdHi and RdLo to the result of the subtraction.
Writes the 64-bit result of the addition to the RdHi and RdLo.
Restrictions
In these instructions:
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
This instruction sets the Q flag if the accumulate operation overflows. Overflow cannot occur during the
multiplications or subtraction.
For the Thumb instruction set, these instructions do not affect the condition code flags.
130
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Examples
SMLSD
R0, R4, R5, R6 ;
;
;
;
SMLSDX R1, R3, R2, R0 ;
;
;
;
SMLSLD R3, R6, R2, R7 ;
;
;
;
SMLSLDX R3, R6, R2, R7 ;
;
;
;
Multiplies bottom halfword of R4 with bottom
halfword of R5, multiplies top halfword of R4
with top halfword of R5, subtracts second from
first, adds R6, writes to R0
Multiplies bottom halfword of R3 with top
halfword of R2, multiplies top halfword of R3
with bottom halfword of R2, subtracts second from
first, adds R0, writes to R1
Multiplies bottom halfword of R6 with bottom
halfword of R2, multiplies top halfword of R6
with top halfword of R2, subtracts second from
first, adds R6:R3, writes to R6:R3
Multiplies bottom halfword of R6 with top
halfword of R2, multiplies top halfword of R6
with bottom halfword of R2, subtracts second from
first, adds R6:R3, writes to R6:R3.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
131
12.6.6.7
SMMLA and SMMLS
Signed Most Significant Word Multiply Accumulate and Signed Most Significant Word Multiply Subtract
Syntax
op{R}{cond} Rd, Rn, Rm, Ra
where:
op
is one of:
SMMLA Signed Most Significant Word Multiply Accumulate.
SMMLS Signed Most Significant Word Multiply Subtract.
If the X is omitted, the multiplications are bottom × bottom and top × top.
R
is a rounding error flag. If R is specified, the result is rounded instead of being
truncated. In this case the constant 0x80000000 is added to the product before
the high word is extracted.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn, Rm
are registers holding the first and second multiply operands.
Ra
is the register holding the accumulate value.
Operation
The SMMLA instruction interprets the values from Rn and Rm as signed 32-bit words.
The SMMLA instruction:
Multiplies the values in Rn and Rm.
Optionally rounds the result by adding 0x80000000.
Extracts the most significant 32 bits of the result.
Adds the value of Ra to the signed extracted value.
Writes the result of the addition in Rd.
The SMMLS instruction interprets the values from Rn and Rm as signed 32-bit words.
The SMMLS instruction:
Multiplies the values in Rn and Rm.
Optionally rounds the result by adding 0x80000000.
Extracts the most significant 32 bits of the result.
Subtracts the extracted value of the result from the value in Ra.
Writes the result of the subtraction in Rd.
Restrictions
In these instructions:
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not affect the condition code flags.
132
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Examples
SMMLA
R0, R4, R5, R6
SMMLAR R6, R2, R1, R4
SMMLSR R3, R6, R2, R7
SMMLS
12.6.6.8
R4, R5, R3, R8
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Multiplies R4 and R5, extracts top
R6, truncates and writes to R0
Multiplies R2 and R1, extracts top
R4, rounds and writes to R6
Multiplies R6 and R2, extracts top
subtracts R7, rounds and writes to
Multiplies R5 and R3, extracts top
subtracts R8, truncates and writes
32 bits, adds
32 bits, adds
32 bits,
R3
32 bits,
to R4.
SMMUL
Signed Most Significant Word Multiply
Syntax
op{R}{cond} Rd, Rn, Rm
where:
op
is one of:
SMMUL Signed Most Significant Word Multiply.
R
is a rounding error flag. If R is specified, the result is rounded instead of being
truncated. In this case the constant 0x80000000 is added to the product before
the high word is extracted.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn, Rm
are registers holding the first and second operands.
Operation
The SMMUL instruction interprets the values from Rn and Rm as two’s complement 32-bit signed integers. The
SMMUL instruction:
Multiplies the values from Rn and Rm.
Optionally rounds the result, otherwise truncates the result.
Writes the most significant signed 32 bits of the result in Rd.
Restrictions
In this instruction:
do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
This instruction does not affect the condition code flags.
Examples
SMULL
SMULLR
R0, R4, R5
R6, R2
;
;
;
;
Multiplies
and writes
Multiplies
and writes
R4
to
R6
to
and R5, truncates top 32 bits
R0
and R2, rounds the top 32 bits
R6.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
133
12.6.6.9
SMUAD and SMUSD
Signed Dual Multiply Add and Signed Dual Multiply Subtract
Syntax
op{X}{cond} Rd, Rn, Rm
where:
op
is one of:
SMUAD Signed Dual Multiply Add.
SMUADX Signed Dual Multiply Add Reversed.
SMUSD Signed Dual Multiply Subtract.
SMUSDX Signed Dual Multiply Subtract Reversed.
If X is present, the multiplications are bottom × top and top × bottom.
If the X is omitted, the multiplications are bottom × bottom and top × top.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn, Rm
are registers holding the first and second operands.
Operation
The SMUAD instruction interprets the values from the first and second operands as two signed halfwords in each
operand. This instruction:
Optionally rotates the halfwords of the second operand.
Performs two signed 16 × 16-bit multiplications.
Adds the two multiplication results together.
Writes the result of the addition to the destination register.
The SMUSD instruction interprets the values from the first and second operands as two’s complement signed
integers. This instruction:
Optionally rotates the halfwords of the second operand.
Performs two signed 16 × 16-bit multiplications.
Subtracts the result of the top halfword multiplication from the result of the bottom halfword multiplication.
Writes the result of the subtraction to the destination register.
Restrictions
In these instructions:
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
Sets the Q flag if the addition overflows. The multiplications cannot overflow.
134
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Examples
SMUAD
R0, R4, R5
SMUADX
R3, R7, R4
SMUSD
R3, R6, R2
SMUSDX
R4, R5, R3
12.6.6.10
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Multiplies bottom halfword of R4 with the bottom
halfword of R5, adds multiplication of top halfword
of R4 with top halfword of R5, writes to R0
Multiplies bottom halfword of R7 with top halfword
of R4, adds multiplication of top halfword of R7
with bottom halfword of R4, writes to R3
Multiplies bottom halfword of R4 with bottom halfword
of R6, subtracts multiplication of top halfword of R6
with top halfword of R3, writes to R3
Multiplies bottom halfword of R5 with top halfword of
R3, subtracts multiplication of top halfword of R5
with bottom halfword of R3, writes to R4.
SMUL and SMULW
Signed Multiply (halfwords) and Signed Multiply (word by halfword)
Syntax
op{XY}{cond} Rd,Rn, Rm
op{Y}{cond} Rd. Rn, Rm
For SMULXY only:
op
is one of:
SMUL{XY}
Signed Multiply (halfwords).
X and Y specify which halfword of the source registers Rn and Rm is used as
the first and second multiply operand.
If X is B, then the bottom halfword, bits [15:0] of Rn is used.
If X is T, then the top halfword, bits [31:16] of Rn is used.If Y is B, then the bot
tom halfword, bits [15:0], of Rm is used.
If Y is T, then the top halfword, bits [31:16], of Rm is used.
SMULW{Y}
Signed Multiply (word by halfword).
Y specifies which halfword of the source register Rm is used as the second mul
tiply operand.
If Y is B, then the bottom halfword (bits [15:0]) of Rm is used.
If Y is T, then the top halfword (bits [31:16]) of Rm is used.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn, Rm
are registers holding the first and second operands.
Operation
The SMULBB, SMULTB, SMULBT and SMULTT instructions interprets the values from Rn and Rm as four signed
16-bit integers. These instructions:
Multiplies the specified signed halfword, Top or Bottom, values from Rn and Rm.
Writes the 32-bit result of the multiplication in Rd.
The SMULWT and SMULWB instructions interprets the values from Rn as a 32-bit signed integer and Rm as two
halfword 16-bit signed integers. These instructions:
Multiplies the first operand and the top, T suffix, or the bottom, B suffix, halfword of the second operand.
Writes the signed most significant 32 bits of the 48-bit result in the destination register.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
135
Restrictions
In these instructions:
136
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
RdHi and RdLo must be different registers.
Examples
SMULBT
R0, R4, R5
SMULBB
R0, R4, R5
SMULTT
R0, R4, R5
SMULTB
R0, R4, R5
SMULWT
R4, R5, R3
SMULWB
R4, R5, R3
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Multiplies the bottom halfword of R4 with the
top halfword of R5, multiplies results and
writes to R0
Multiplies the bottom halfword of R4 with the
bottom halfword of R5, multiplies results and
writes to R0
Multiplies the top halfword of R4 with the top
halfword of R5, multiplies results and writes
to R0
Multiplies the top halfword of R4 with the
bottom halfword of R5, multiplies results and
and writes to R0
Multiplies R5 with the top halfword of R3,
extracts top 32 bits and writes to R4
Multiplies R5 with the bottom halfword of R3,
extracts top 32 bits and writes to R4.
12.6.6.11
UMULL, UMLAL, SMULL, and SMLAL
Signed and Unsigned Long Multiply, with optional Accumulate, using 32-bit operands and producing a 64-bit
result.
Syntax
op{cond} RdLo, RdHi, Rn, Rm
where:
op
is one of:
UMULL Unsigned Long Multiply.
UMLAL Unsigned Long Multiply, with Accumulate.
SMULL Signed Long Multiply.
SMLAL Signed Long Multiply, with Accumulate.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
RdHi, RdLo
are the destination registers. For UMLAL and SMLAL they also hold the accu
mulating value.
Rn, Rm
are registers holding the operands.
Operation
The UMULL instruction interprets the values from Rn and Rm as unsigned integers. It multiplies these integers and
places the least significant 32 bits of the result in RdLo, and the most significant 32 bits of the result in RdHi.
The UMLAL instruction interprets the values from Rn and Rm as unsigned integers. It multiplies these integers,
adds the 64-bit result to the 64-bit unsigned integer contained in RdHi and RdLo, and writes the result back to
RdHi and RdLo.
The SMULL instruction interprets the values from Rn and Rm as two’s complement signed integers. It multiplies
these integers and places the least significant 32 bits of the result in RdLo, and the most significant 32 bits of the
result in RdHi.
The SMLAL instruction interprets the values from Rn and Rm as two’s complement signed integers. It multiplies
these integers, adds the 64-bit result to the 64-bit signed integer contained in RdHi and RdLo, and writes the result
back to RdHi and RdLo.
Restrictions
In these instructions:
Do not use SP and do not use PC
RdHi and RdLo must be different registers.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not affect the condition code flags.
Examples
UMULL
SMLAL
R0, R4, R5, R6
R4, R5, R3, R8
; Unsigned (R4,R0) = R5 x R6
; Signed (R5,R4) = (R5,R4) + R3 x R8
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
137
12.6.6.12
SDIV and UDIV
Signed Divide and Unsigned Divide.
Syntax
SDIV{cond} {Rd,} Rn, Rm
UDIV{cond} {Rd,} Rn, Rm
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register. If Rd is omitted, the destination register is Rn.
Rn
is the register holding the value to be divided.
Rm
is a register holding the divisor.
Operation
SDIV performs a signed integer division of the value in Rn by the value in Rm.
UDIV performs an unsigned integer division of the value in Rn by the value in Rm.
For both instructions, if the value in Rn is not divisible by the value in Rm, the result is rounded towards zero.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
SDIV
UDIV
138
R0, R2, R4
R8, R8, R1
; Signed divide, R0 = R2/R4
; Unsigned divide, R8 = R8/R1
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.7 Saturating Instructions
The table below shows the saturating instructions.
Table 12-22.
Saturating Instructions
Mnemonic
Description
SSAT
Signed Saturate
SSAT16
Signed Saturate Halfword
USAT
Unsigned Saturate
USAT16
Unsigned Saturate Halfword
QADD
Saturating Add
QSUB
Saturating Subtract
QSUB16
Saturating Subtract 16
QASX
Saturating Add and Subtract with Exchange
QSAX
Saturating Subtract and Add with Exchange
QDADD
Saturating Double and Add
QDSUB
Saturating Double and Subtract
UQADD16
Unsigned Saturating Add 16
UQADD8
Unsigned Saturating Add 8
UQASX
Unsigned Saturating Add and Subtract with Exchange
UQSAX
Unsigned Saturating Subtract and Add with Exchange
UQSUB16
Unsigned Saturating Subtract 16
UQSUB8
Unsigned Saturating Subtract 8
For signed n-bit saturation, this means that:
If the value to be saturated is less than -2n-1, the result returned is -2n-1
If the value to be saturated is greater than 2n-1-1, the result returned is 2n-1-1
Otherwise, the result returned is the same as the value to be saturated.
For unsigned n-bit saturation, this means that:
If the value to be saturated is less than 0, the result returned is 0
If the value to be saturated is greater than 2n-1, the result returned is 2n-1
Otherwise, the result returned is the same as the value to be saturated.
If the returned result is different from the value to be saturated, it is called saturation. If saturation occurs, the
instruction sets the Q flag to 1 in the APSR. Otherwise, it leaves the Q flag unchanged. To clear the Q flag to 0, the
MSR instruction must be used; see “MSR”.
To read the state of the Q flag, the MRS instruction must be used; see “MRS”.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
139
12.6.7.1
SSAT and USAT
Signed Saturate and Unsigned Saturate to any bit position, with optional shift before saturating.
Syntax
op{cond} Rd, #n, Rm {, shift #s}
where:
op
is one of:
SSAT Saturates a signed value to a signed range.
USAT Saturates a signed value to an unsigned range.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
n
specifies the bit position to saturate to:
n ranges from 1
n ranges from 0 to 31 for USAT.
to 32 for SSAT
Rm
is the register containing the value to saturate.
shift #s
is an optional shift applied to Rm before saturating. It must be one of the
following:
ASR #s
where s is in the range 1 to 31.
LSL #s
where s is in the range 0 to 31.
Operation
These instructions saturate to a signed or unsigned n-bit value.
The SSAT instruction applies the specified shift, then saturates to the signed range
-2n–1 ≤ x ≤ 2n–1-1.
The USAT instruction applies the specified shift, then saturates to the unsigned range 0 ≤ x ≤ 2n-1.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not affect the condition code flags.
If saturation occurs, these instructions set the Q flag to 1.
Examples
140
SSAT
R7, #16, R7, LSL #4
USATNE
R0, #7, R5
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
;
;
;
;
;
Logical shift left value in R7 by 4, then
saturate it as a signed 16-bit value and
write it back to R7
Conditionally saturate value in R5 as an
unsigned 7 bit value and write it to R0.
12.6.7.2
SSAT16 and USAT16
Signed Saturate and Unsigned Saturate to any bit position for two halfwords.
Syntax
op{cond} Rd, #n, Rm
where:
op
is one of:
SSAT16 Saturates a signed halfword value to a signed range.
USAT16 Saturates a signed halfword value to an unsigned range.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
n
specifies the bit position to saturate to:
n ranges from 1
n ranges from 0 to 15 for USAT.
to 16 for SSAT
Rm
is the register containing the value to saturate.
Operation
The SSAT16 instruction:
Saturates two signed 16-bit halfword values of the register with the value to saturate from selected by the bit
position in n.
Writes the results as two signed 16-bit halfwords to the destination register.
The USAT16 instruction:
Saturates two unsigned 16-bit halfword values of the register with the value to saturate from selected by the bit
position in n.
Writes the results as two unsigned halfwords in the destination register.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not affect the condition code flags.
If saturation occurs, these instructions set the Q flag to 1.
Examples
SSAT16
USAT16NE
R7, #9, R2
R0, #13, R5
;
;
;
;
;
;
Saturates the top and bottom highwords of R2
as 9-bit values, writes to corresponding halfword
of R7
Conditionally saturates the top and bottom
halfwords of R5 as 13-bit values, writes to
corresponding halfword of R0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
141
12.6.7.3
QADD and QSUB
Saturating Add and Saturating Subtract, signed.
Syntax
op{cond} {Rd}, Rn, Rm
op{cond} {Rd}, Rn, Rm
where:
op
is one of:
QADD Saturating 32-bit add.
QADD8 Saturating four 8-bit integer additions.
QADD16 Saturating two 16-bit integer additions.
QSUB Saturating 32-bit subtraction.
QSUB8 Saturating four 8-bit integer subtraction.
QSUB16 Saturating two 16-bit integer subtraction.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn, Rm
are registers holding the first and second operands.
Operation
These instructions add or subtract two, four or eight values from the first and second operands and then writes a
signed saturated value in the destination register.
The QADD and QSUB instructions apply the specified add or subtract, and then saturate the result to the signed
range -2n–1 ≤ x ≤ 2n–1-1, where x is given by the number of bits applied in the instruction, 32, 16 or 8.
If the returned result is different from the value to be saturated, it is called saturation. If saturation occurs, the
QADD and QSUB instructions set the Q flag to 1 in the APSR. Otherwise, it leaves the Q flag unchanged. The 8-bit
and 16-bit QADD and QSUB instructions always leave the Q flag unchanged.
To clear the Q flag to 0, the MSR instruction must be used; see “MSR”.
To read the state of the Q flag, the MRS instruction must be used; see “MRS”.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not affect the condition code flags.
If saturation occurs, these instructions set the Q flag to 1.
142
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Examples
QADD16
12.6.7.4
R7, R4, R2
QADD8
R3, R1, R6
QSUB16
R4, R2, R3
QSUB8
R4, R2, R5
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Adds halfwords of R4 with corresponding halfword of
R2, saturates to 16 bits and writes to
corresponding halfword of R7
Adds bytes of R1 to the corresponding bytes of R6,
saturates to 8 bits and writes to corresponding
byte of R3
Subtracts halfwords of R3 from corresponding
halfword of R2, saturates to 16 bits, writes to
corresponding halfword of R4
Subtracts bytes of R5 from the corresponding byte
in R2, saturates to 8 bits, writes to corresponding
byte of R4.
QASX and QSAX
Saturating Add and Subtract with Exchange and Saturating Subtract and Add with Exchange, signed.
Syntax
op{cond} {Rd}, Rm, Rn
where:
op
is one of:
QASX Add and Subtract with Exchange and Saturate.
QSAX Subtract and Add with Exchange and Saturate.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn, Rm
are registers holding the first and second operands.
Operation
The QASX instruction:
1. Adds the top halfword of the source operand with the bottom halfword of the second operand.
2.
Subtracts the top halfword of the second operand from the bottom highword of the first operand.
3.
Saturates the result of the subtraction and writes a 16-bit signed integer in the range –215 ≤ x ≤ 215 – 1,
where x equals 16, to the bottom halfword of the destination register.
4.
Saturates the results of the sum and writes a 16-bit signed integer in the range
–215 ≤ x ≤ 215 – 1, where x equals 16, to the top halfword of the destination register.
The QSAX instruction:
1. Subtracts the bottom halfword of the second operand from the top highword of the first operand.
2.
Adds the bottom halfword of the source operand with the top halfword of the second operand.
3.
Saturates the results of the sum and writes a 16-bit signed integer in the range
–215 ≤ x ≤ 215 – 1, where x equals 16, to the bottom halfword of the destination register.
4.
Saturates the result of the subtraction and writes a 16-bit signed integer in the range –215 ≤ x ≤ 215 – 1,
where x equals 16, to the top halfword of the destination register.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not affect the condition code flags.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
143
Examples
QASX
QSAX
144
R7, R4, R2 ;
;
;
;
;
R0, R3, R5 ;
;
;
;
Adds top halfword of R4 to bottom halfword of R2,
saturates to 16 bits, writes to top halfword of R7
Subtracts top highword of R2 from bottom halfword of
R4, saturates to 16 bits and writes to bottom halfword
of R7
Subtracts bottom halfword of R5 from top halfword of
R3, saturates to 16 bits, writes to top halfword of R0
Adds bottom halfword of R3 to top halfword of R5,
saturates to 16 bits, writes to bottom halfword of R0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.7.5
QDADD and QDSUB
Saturating Double and Add and Saturating Double and Subtract, signed.
Syntax
op{cond} {Rd}, Rm, Rn
where:
op
is one of:
QDADD Saturating Double and Add.
QDSUB Saturating Double and Subtract.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rm, Rn
are registers holding the first and second operands.
Operation
The QDADD instruction:
Doubles the second operand value.
Adds the result of the doubling to the signed saturated value in the first operand.
Writes the result to the destination register.
The QDSUB instruction:
Doubles the second operand value.
Subtracts the doubled value from the signed saturated value in the first operand.
Writes the result to the destination register.
Both the doubling and the addition or subtraction have their results saturated to the 32-bit signed integer range –
231 ≤ x ≤ 231– 1. If saturation occurs in either operation, it sets the Q flag in the APSR.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
If saturation occurs, these instructions set the Q flag to 1.
Examples
QDADD
R7, R4, R2
QDSUB
R0, R3, R5
;
;
;
;
Doubles and saturates R4 to 32 bits, adds R2,
saturates to 32 bits, writes to R7
Subtracts R3 doubled and saturated to 32 bits
from R5, saturates to 32 bits, writes to R0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
145
12.6.7.6
UQASX and UQSAX
Saturating Add and Subtract with Exchange and Saturating Subtract and Add with Exchange, unsigned.
Syntax
op{cond} {Rd}, Rm, Rn
where:
type
is one of:
UQASX Add and Subtract with Exchange and Saturate.
UQSAX Subtract and Add with Exchange and Saturate.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn, Rm
are registers holding the first and second operands.
Operation
The UQASX instruction:
1. Adds the bottom halfword of the source operand with the top halfword of the second operand.
2.
Subtracts the bottom halfword of the second operand from the top highword of the first operand.
3.
Saturates the results of the sum and writes a 16-bit unsigned integer in the range
0 ≤ x ≤ 216 – 1, where x equals 16, to the top halfword of the destination register.
4.
Saturates the result of the subtraction and writes a 16-bit unsigned integer in the range 0 ≤ x ≤ 216 – 1, where
x equals 16, to the bottom halfword of the destination register.
The UQSAX instruction:
1. Subtracts the bottom halfword of the second operand from the top highword of the first operand.
2.
Adds the bottom halfword of the first operand with the top halfword of the second operand.
3.
Saturates the result of the subtraction and writes a 16-bit unsigned integer in the range 0 ≤ x ≤ 216 – 1, where
x equals 16, to the top halfword of the destination register.
4.
Saturates the results of the addition and writes a 16-bit unsigned integer in the range 0 ≤ x ≤ 216 – 1, where x
equals 16, to the bottom halfword of the destination register.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not affect the condition code flags.
Examples
UQASX
R7, R4, R2
UQSAX
R0, R3, R5
146
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Adds top halfword of R4 with bottom halfword of R2,
saturates to 16 bits, writes to top halfword of R7
Subtracts top halfword of R2 from bottom halfword of
R4, saturates to 16 bits, writes to bottom halfword of R7
Subtracts bottom halfword of R5 from top halfword of R3,
saturates to 16 bits, writes to top halfword of R0
Adds bottom halfword of R4 to top halfword of R5
saturates to 16 bits, writes to bottom halfword of R0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.7.7
UQADD and UQSUB
Saturating Add and Saturating Subtract Unsigned.
Syntax
op{cond} {Rd}, Rn, Rm
op{cond} {Rd}, Rn, Rm
where:
op
is one of:
UQADD8 Saturating four unsigned 8-bit integer additions.
UQADD16 Saturating two unsigned 16-bit integer additions.
UDSUB8 Saturating four unsigned 8-bit integer subtractions.
UQSUB16 Saturating two unsigned 16-bit integer subtractions.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn, Rm
are registers holding the first and second operands.
Operation
These instructions add or subtract two or four values and then writes an unsigned saturated value in the
destination register.
The UQADD16 instruction:
Adds the respective top and bottom halfwords of the first and second operands.
Saturates the result of the additions for each halfword in the destination register to the unsigned range
0 ≤ x ≤ 216-1, where x is 16.
The UQADD8 instruction:
Adds each respective byte of the first and second operands.
Saturates the result of the addition for each byte in the destination register to the unsigned range 0 ≤ x ≤ 281, where x is 8.
The UQSUB16 instruction:
Subtracts both halfwords of the second operand from the respective halfwords of the first operand.
Saturates the result of the differences in the destination register to the unsigned range 0 ≤ x ≤ 216-1, where x
is 16.
The UQSUB8 instructions:
Subtracts the respective bytes of the second operand from the respective bytes of the first operand.
Saturates the results of the differences for each byte in the destination register to the unsigned range
0 ≤ x ≤ 28-1, where x is 8.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
147
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not affect the condition code flags.
Examples
UQADD16
R7, R4, R2
UQADD8
R4, R2, R5
UQSUB16
R6, R3, R0
UQSUB8
R1, R5, R6
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Adds halfwords in R4 to corresponding halfword in R2,
saturates to 16 bits, writes to corresponding halfword of R7
Adds bytes of R2 to corresponding byte of R5, saturates
to 8 bits, writes to corresponding bytes of R4
Subtracts halfwords in R0 from corresponding halfword
in R3, saturates to 16 bits, writes to corresponding
halfword in R6
Subtracts bytes in R6 from corresponding byte of R5,
saturates to 8 bits, writes to corresponding byte of R1.
12.6.8 Packing and Unpacking Instructions
The table below shows the instructions that operate on packing and unpacking data.
Table 12-23.
148
Packing and Unpacking Instructions
Mnemonic
Description
PKH
Pack Halfword
SXTAB
Extend 8 bits to 32 and add
SXTAB16
Dual extend 8 bits to 16 and add
SXTAH
Extend 16 bits to 32 and add
SXTB
Sign extend a byte
SXTB16
Dual extend 8 bits to 16 and add
SXTH
Sign extend a halfword
UXTAB
Extend 8 bits to 32 and add
UXTAB16
Dual extend 8 bits to 16 and add
UXTAH
Extend 16 bits to 32 and add
UXTB
Zero extend a byte
UXTB16
Dual zero extend 8 bits to 16 and add
UXTH
Zero extend a halfword
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.8.1
PKHBT and PKHTB
Pack Halfword
Syntax
op{cond} {Rd}, Rn, Rm {, LSL #imm}
op{cond} {Rd}, Rn, Rm {, ASR #imm}
where:
op
is one of:
PKHBT Pack Halfword, bottom and top with shift.
PKHTB Pack Halfword, top and bottom with shift.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn
is the first operand register
Rm
is the second operand register holding the value to be optionally shifted.
imm
is the shift length. The type of shift length depends on the instruction:
For PKHBT
LSL a left shift with a shift length from 1 to 31, 0 means no shift.
For PKHTB
ASR an arithmetic shift right with a shift length from 1 to 32,
a shift of 32-bits is encoded as 0b00000.
Operation
The PKHBT instruction:
1. Writes the value of the bottom halfword of the first operand to the bottom halfword of the destination
register.
2.
If shifted, the shifted value of the second operand is written to the top halfword of the destination register.
The PKHTB instruction:
1. Writes the value of the top halfword of the first operand to the top halfword of the destination register.
2.
If shifted, the shifted value of the second operand is written to the bottom halfword of the destination register.
Restrictions
Rd must not be SP and must not be PC.
Condition Flags
This instruction does not change the flags.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
149
Examples
PKHBT
R3, R4, R5 LSL #0
PKHTB
R4, R0, R2 ASR #1
12.6.8.2
;
;
;
;
;
;
Writes bottom halfword of R4 to bottom halfword of
R3, writes top halfword of R5, unshifted, to top
halfword of R3
Writes R2 shifted right by 1 bit to bottom halfword
of R4, and writes top halfword of R0 to top
halfword of R4.
SXT and UXT
Sign extend and Zero extend.
Syntax
op{cond} {Rd,} Rm {, ROR #n}
op{cond} {Rd}, Rm {, ROR #n}
where:
op
is one of:
SXTB Sign extends an 8-bit value to a 32-bit value.
SXTH Sign extends a 16-bit value to a 32-bit value.
SXTB16 Sign extends two 8-bit values to two 16-bit values.
UXTB Zero extends an 8-bit value to a 32-bit value.
UXTH Zero extends a 16-bit value to a 32-bit value.
UXTB16 Zero extends two 8-bit values to two 16-bit values.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rm
is the register holding the value to extend.
ROR #n
is one of:
ROR #8 Value from Rm is rotated right 8 bits.
Operation
These instructions do the following:
1. Rotate the value from Rm right by 0, 8, 16 or 24 bits.
2.
Extract bits from the resulting value:
̶
SXTB extracts bits[7:0] and sign extends to 32 bits.
̶
UXTB extracts bits[7:0] and zero extends to 32 bits.
̶
SXTH extracts bits[15:0] and sign extends to 32 bits.
̶
UXTH extracts bits[15:0] and zero extends to 32 bits.
̶
SXTB16 extracts bits[7:0] and sign extends to 16 bits,
and extracts bits [23:16] and sign extends to 16 bits.
̶
UXTB16 extracts bits[7:0] and zero extends to 16 bits,
and extracts bits [23:16] and zero extends to 16 bits.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not affect the flags.
150
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Examples
SXTH
R4, R6, ROR #16
UXTB
R3, R10
12.6.8.3
;
;
;
;
Rotates R6 right by 16 bits, obtains bottom halfword of
of result, sign extends to 32 bits and writes to R4
Extracts lowest byte of value in R10, zero extends, and
writes to R3.
SXTA and UXTA
Signed and Unsigned Extend and Add
Syntax
op{cond} {Rd,} Rn, Rm {, ROR #n}
op{cond} {Rd,} Rn, Rm {, ROR #n}
where:
op
is one of:
SXTAB Sign extends an 8-bit value to a 32-bit value and add.
SXTAH Sign extends a 16-bit value to a 32-bit value and add.
SXTAB16 Sign extends two 8-bit values to two 16-bit values and add.
UXTAB Zero extends an 8-bit value to a 32-bit value and add.
UXTAH Zero extends a 16-bit value to a 32-bit value and add.
UXTAB16 Zero extends two 8-bit values to two 16-bit values and add.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn
is the first operand register.
Rm
is the register holding the value to rotate and extend.
ROR #n
is one of:
ROR #8 Value from Rm is rotated right 8 bits.
ROR #16 Value from Rm is rotated right 16 bits.
ROR #24 Value from Rm is rotated right 24 bits.
If ROR #n is omitted, no rotation is performed.
Operation
These instructions do the following:
1. Rotate the value from Rm right by 0, 8, 16 or 24 bits.
2.
Extract bits from the resulting value:
̶
̶
̶
̶
3.
̶
SXTAB extracts bits[7:0] from Rm and sign extends to 32 bits.
̶
UXTAB extracts bits[7:0] from Rm and zero extends to 32 bits.
SXTAH extracts bits[15:0] from Rm and sign extends to 32 bits.
UXTAH extracts bits[15:0] from Rm and zero extends to 32 bits.
SXTAB16 extracts bits[7:0] from Rm and sign extends to 16 bits,
and extracts bits [23:16] from Rm and sign extends to 16 bits.
UXTAB16 extracts bits[7:0] from Rm and zero extends to 16 bits,
and extracts bits [23:16] from Rm and zero extends to 16 bits.
Adds the signed or zero extended value to the word or corresponding halfword of Rn and writes the result in
Rd.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
151
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not affect the flags.
Examples
SXTAH
UXTAB
152
R4, R8, R6, ROR #16 ;
;
;
R3, R4, R10
;
;
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Rotates R6 right by 16 bits, obtains bottom
halfword, sign extends to 32 bits, adds
R8,and writes to R4
Extracts bottom byte of R10 and zero extends
to 32 bits, adds R4, and writes to R3.
12.6.9 Bitfield Instructions
The table below shows the instructions that operate on adjacent sets of bits in registers or bitfields.
Table 12-24.
Packing and Unpacking Instructions
Mnemonic
Description
BFC
Bit Field Clear
BFI
Bit Field Insert
SBFX
Signed Bit Field Extract
SXTB
Sign extend a byte
SXTH
Sign extend a halfword
UBFX
Unsigned Bit Field Extract
UXTB
Zero extend a byte
UXTH
Zero extend a halfword
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
153
12.6.9.1
BFC and BFI
Bit Field Clear and Bit Field Insert.
Syntax
BFC{cond} Rd, #lsb, #width
BFI{cond} Rd, Rn, #lsb, #width
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn
is the source register.
lsb
is the position of the least significant bit of the bitfield. lsb must be in the range
0 to 31.
width
is the width of the bitfield and must be in the range 1 to 32-lsb.
Operation
BFC clears a bitfield in a register. It clears width bits in Rd, starting at the low bit position lsb. Other bits in Rd are
unchanged.
BFI copies a bitfield into one register from another register. It replaces width bits in Rd starting at the low bit
position lsb, with width bits from Rn starting at bit[0]. Other bits in Rd are unchanged.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not affect the flags.
Examples
BFC
BFI
154
R4, #8, #12
R9, R2, #8, #12
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
; Clear bit 8 to bit 19 (12 bits) of R4 to 0
; Replace bit 8 to bit 19 (12 bits) of R9 with
; bit 0 to bit 11 from R2.
12.6.9.2
SBFX and UBFX
Signed Bit Field Extract and Unsigned Bit Field Extract.
Syntax
SBFX{cond} Rd, Rn, #lsb, #width
UBFX{cond} Rd, Rn, #lsb, #width
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rn
is the source register.
lsb
is the position of the least significant bit of the bitfield. lsb must be in the range
0 to 31.
width
is the width of the bitfield and must be in the range 1 to 32-lsb.
Operation
SBFX extracts a bitfield from one register, sign extends it to 32 bits, and writes the result to the destination register.
UBFX extracts a bitfield from one register, zero extends it to 32 bits, and writes the result to the destination
register.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not affect the flags.
Examples
SBFX
UBFX
R0, R1, #20, #4
;
;
R8, R11, #9, #10 ;
;
Extract bit 20 to bit 23 (4 bits) from R1 and sign
extend to 32 bits and then write the result to R0.
Extract bit 9 to bit 18 (10 bits) from R11 and zero
extend to 32 bits and then write the result to R8.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
155
12.6.9.3
SXT and UXT
Sign extend and Zero extend.
Syntax
SXTextend{cond} {Rd,} Rm {, ROR #n}
UXTextend{cond} {Rd}, Rm {, ROR #n}
where:
extend
is one of:
B Extends an 8-bit value to a 32-bit value.
H Extends a 16-bit value to a 32-bit value.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
Rm
is the register holding the value to extend.
ROR #n
is one of:
ROR #8 Value from Rm is rotated right 8 bits.
ROR #16 Value from Rm is rotated right 16 bits.
ROR #24 Value from Rm is rotated right 24 bits.
If ROR #n is omitted, no rotation is performed.
Operation
These instructions do the following:
1. Rotate the value from Rm right by 0, 8, 16 or 24 bits.
2.
Extract bits from the resulting value:
̶
SXTB extracts bits[7:0] and sign extends to 32 bits.
̶
UXTB extracts bits[7:0] and zero extends to 32 bits.
̶
SXTH extracts bits[15:0] and sign extends to 32 bits.
̶
UXTH extracts bits[15:0] and zero extends to 32 bits.
Restrictions
Do not use SP and do not use PC.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not affect the flags.
Examples
156
SXTH
R4, R6, ROR #16
UXTB
R3, R10
;
;
;
;
;
Rotate R6 right by 16 bits, then obtain the lower
halfword of the result and then sign extend to
32 bits and write the result to R4.
Extract lowest byte of the value in R10 and zero
extend it, and write the result to R3.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.10 Branch and Control Instructions
The table below shows the branch and control instructions.
Table 12-25.
Branch and Control Instructions
Mnemonic
Description
B
Branch
BL
Branch with Link
BLX
Branch indirect with Link
BX
Branch indirect
CBNZ
Compare and Branch if Non Zero
CBZ
Compare and Branch if Zero
IT
If-Then
TBB
Table Branch Byte
TBH
Table Branch Halfword
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
157
12.6.10.1
B, BL, BX, and BLX
Branch instructions.
Syntax
B{cond} label
BL{cond} label
BX{cond} Rm
BLX{cond} Rm
where:
B
is branch (immediate).
BL
is branch with link (immediate).
BX
is branch indirect (register).
BLX
is branch indirect with link (register).
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
label
is a PC-relative expression. See “PC-relative Expressions”.
Rm
is a register that indicates an address to branch to. Bit[0] of the value in Rm
must be 1, but the address to branch to is created by changing bit[0] to 0.
Operation
All these instructions cause a branch to label, or to the address indicated in Rm. In addition:
The BL and BLX instructions write the address of the next instruction to LR (the link register, R14).
The BX and BLX instructions result in a UsageFault exception if bit[0] of Rm is 0.
Bcond label is the only conditional instruction that can be either inside or outside an IT block. All other branch
instructions must be conditional inside an IT block, and must be unconditional outside the IT block, see “IT”.
The table below shows the ranges for the various branch instructions.
Table 12-26.
Branch Ranges
Instruction
Branch Range
B label
−16 MB to +16 MB
Bcond label (outside IT block)
−1 MB to +1 MB
Bcond label (inside IT block)
−16 MB to +16 MB
BL{cond} label
−16 MB to +16 MB
BX{cond} Rm
Any value in register
BLX{cond} Rm
Any value in register
The .W suffix might be used to get the maximum branch range. See “Instruction Width Selection”.
Restrictions
The restrictions are:
Do not use PC in the BLX instruction
For BX and BLX, bit[0] of Rm must be 1 for correct execution but a branch occurs to the target address
created by changing bit[0] to 0
When any of these instructions is inside an IT block, it must be the last instruction of the IT block.
Bcond is the only conditional instruction that is not required to be inside an IT block. However, it has a longer
branch range when it is inside an IT block.
158
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
B
BLE
B.W
BEQ
BEQ.W
BL
loopA
ng
target
target
target
funC
BX
BXNE
BLX
LR
R0
R0
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Branch to loopA
Conditionally branch to label ng
Branch to target within 16MB range
Conditionally branch to target
Conditionally branch to target within 1MB
Branch with link (Call) to function funC, return address
stored in LR
Return from function call
Conditionally branch to address stored in R0
Branch with link and exchange (Call) to a address stored in R0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
159
12.6.10.2
CBZ and CBNZ
Compare and Branch on Zero, Compare and Branch on Non-Zero.
Syntax
CBZ Rn, label
CBNZ Rn, label
where:
Rn
is the register holding the operand.
label
is the branch destination.
Operation
Use the CBZ or CBNZ instructions to avoid changing the condition code flags and to reduce the number of
instructions.
CBZ Rn, label does not change condition flags but is otherwise equivalent to:
CMP
Rn, #0
BEQ
label
CBNZ Rn, label does not change condition flags but is otherwise equivalent to:
CMP
Rn, #0
BNE
label
Restrictions
The restrictions are:
Rn must be in the range of R0 to R7
The branch destination must be within 4 to 130 bytes after the instruction
These instructions must not be used inside an IT block.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
Examples
CBZ
CBNZ
160
R5, target
R0, target
; Forward branch if R5 is zero
; Forward branch if R0 is not zero
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.10.3
IT
If-Then condition instruction.
Syntax
IT{x{y{z}}} cond
where:
x
specifies the condition switch for the second instruction in the IT block.
y
specifies the condition switch for the third instruction in the IT block.
z
specifies the condition switch for the fourth instruction in the IT block.
cond
specifies the condition for the first instruction in the IT block.
The condition switch for the second, third and fourth instruction in the IT block can be either:
T
Then. Applies the condition cond to the instruction.
E
Else. Applies the inverse condition of cond to the instruction.
It is possible to use AL (the always condition) for cond in an IT instruction. If this is done, all of the instructions in
the IT block must be unconditional, and each of x, y, and z must be T or omitted but not E.
Operation
The IT instruction makes up to four following instructions conditional. The conditions can be all the same, or some
of them can be the logical inverse of the others. The conditional instructions following the IT instruction form the IT
block.
The instructions in the IT block, including any branches, must specify the condition in the {cond} part of their
syntax.
The assembler might be able to generate the required IT instructions for conditional instructions automatically, so
that the user does not have to write them. See the assembler documentation for details.
A BKPT instruction in an IT block is always executed, even if its condition fails.
Exceptions can be taken between an IT instruction and the corresponding IT block, or within an IT block. Such an
exception results in entry to the appropriate exception handler, with suitable return information in LR and stacked
PSR.
Instructions designed for use for exception returns can be used as normal to return from the exception, and
execution of the IT block resumes correctly. This is the only way that a PC-modifying instruction is permitted to
branch to an instruction in an IT block.
Restrictions
The following instructions are not permitted in an IT block:
IT
CBZ and CBNZ
CPSID and CPSIE.
Other restrictions when using an IT block are:
A branch or any instruction that modifies the PC must either be outside an IT block or must be the last
instruction inside the IT block. These are:
̶
ADD PC, PC, Rm
̶
MOV PC, Rm
̶
B, BL, BX, BLX
̶
Any LDM, LDR, or POP instruction that writes to the PC
̶
TBB and TBH
Do not branch to any instruction inside an IT block, except when returning from an exception handler
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
161
All conditional instructions except Bcond must be inside an IT block. Bcond can be either outside or inside
an IT block but has a larger branch range if it is inside one
Each instruction inside the IT block must specify a condition code suffix that is either the same or logical
inverse as for the other instructions in the block.
Your assembler might place extra restrictions on the use of IT blocks, such as prohibiting the use of assembler
directives within them.
Condition Flags
This instruction does not change the flags.
Example
12.6.10.4
ITTE
ANDNE
ADDSNE
MOVEQ
NE
R0, R0, R1
R2, R2, #1
R2, R3
;
;
;
;
Next 3 instructions are conditional
ANDNE does not update condition flags
ADDSNE updates condition flags
Conditional move
CMP
R0, #9
ITE
ADDGT
ADDLE
GT
R1, R0, #55
R1, R0, #48
;
;
;
;
;
Convert R0 hex value (0 to 15) into ASCII
('0'-'9', 'A'-'F')
Next 2 instructions are conditional
Convert 0xA -> 'A'
Convert 0x0 -> '0'
IT
ADDGT
GT
R1, R1, #1
; IT block with only one conditional instruction
; Increment R1 conditionally
ITTEE
MOVEQ
ADDEQ
ANDNE
BNE.W
EQ
R0, R1
R2, R2, #10
R3, R3, #1
dloop
;
;
;
;
;
;
IT
ADD
NE
R0, R0, R1
; Next instruction is conditional
; Syntax error: no condition code used in IT block
Next 4 instructions are conditional
Conditional move
Conditional add
Conditional AND
Branch instruction can only be used in the last
instruction of an IT block
TBB and TBH
Table Branch Byte and Table Branch Halfword.
Syntax
TBB [Rn, Rm]
TBH [Rn, Rm, LSL #1]
where:
Rn
is the register containing the address of the table of branch lengths.
If Rn is PC, then the address of the table is the address of the byte immediately
following the TBB or TBH instruction.
Rm
162
is the index register. This contains an index into the table. For halfword tables,
LSL #1 doubles the value in Rm to form the right offset into the table.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Operation
These instructions cause a PC-relative forward branch using a table of single byte offsets for TBB, or halfword
offsets for TBH. Rn provides a pointer to the table, and Rm supplies an index into the table. For TBB the branch
offset is twice the unsigned value of the byte returned from the table. and for TBH the branch offset is twice the
unsigned value of the halfword returned from the table. The branch occurs to the address at that offset from the
address of the byte immediately after the TBB or TBH instruction.
Restrictions
The restrictions are:
Rn must not be SP
Rm must not be SP and must not be PC
When any of these instructions is used inside an IT block, it must be the last instruction of the IT block.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
163
Examples
ADR.W
TBB
R0, BranchTable_Byte
[R0, R1]
; R1 is the index, R0 is the base address of the
; branch table
Case1
; an instruction sequence follows
Case2
; an instruction sequence follows
Case3
; an instruction sequence follows
BranchTable_Byte
DCB
0
; Case1 offset calculation
DCB
((Case2-Case1)/2) ; Case2 offset calculation
DCB
((Case3-Case1)/2) ; Case3 offset calculation
TBH
[PC, R1, LSL #1]
; R1 is the index, PC is used as base of the
; branch table
BranchTable_H
DCI
((CaseA - BranchTable_H)/2)
DCI
((CaseB - BranchTable_H)/2)
DCI
((CaseC - BranchTable_H)/2)
CaseA
; an instruction sequence follows
CaseB
; an instruction sequence follows
CaseC
; an instruction sequence follows
164
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
; CaseA offset calculation
; CaseB offset calculation
; CaseC offset calculation
12.6.11 Floating-point Instructions
The table below shows the floating-point instructions.
These instructions are only available if the FPU is included, and enabled, in the system. See “Enabling the FPU”
for information about enabling the floating-point unit.
Table 12-27.
Floating-point Instructions
Mnemonic
Description
VABS
Floating-point Absolute
VADD
Floating-point Add
VCMP
Compare two floating-point registers, or one floating-point register and zero
VCMPE
Compare two floating-point registers, or one floating-point register and zero with Invalid
Operation check
VCVT
Convert between floating-point and integer
VCVT
Convert between floating-point and fixed point
VCVTR
Convert between floating-point and integer with rounding
VCVTB
Converts half-precision value to single-precision
VCVTT
Converts single-precision register to half-precision
VDIV
Floating-point Divide
VFMA
Floating-point Fused Multiply Accumulate
VFNMA
Floating-point Fused Negate Multiply Accumulate
VFMS
Floating-point Fused Multiply Subtract
VFNMS
Floating-point Fused Negate Multiply Subtract
VLDM
Load Multiple extension registers
VLDR
Loads an extension register from memory
VLMA
Floating-point Multiply Accumulate
VLMS
Floating-point Multiply Subtract
VMOV
Floating-point Move Immediate
VMOV
Floating-point Move Register
VMOV
Copy ARM core register to single precision
VMOV
Copy 2 ARM core registers to 2 single precision
VMOV
Copies between ARM core register to scalar
VMOV
Copies between Scalar to ARM core register
VMRS
Move to ARM core register from floating-point System Register
VMSR
Move to floating-point System Register from ARM Core register
VMUL
Multiply floating-point
VNEG
Floating-point negate
VNMLA
Floating-point multiply and add
VNMLS
Floating-point multiply and subtract
VNMUL
Floating-point multiply
VPOP
Pop extension registers
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
165
Table 12-27.
166
Floating-point Instructions (Continued)
Mnemonic
Description
VPUSH
Push extension registers
VSQRT
Floating-point square root
VSTM
Store Multiple extension registers
VSTR
Stores an extension register to memory
VSUB
Floating-point Subtract
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.11.1
VABS
Floating-point Absolute.
Syntax
VABS{cond}.F32 Sd, Sm
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Sd, Sm
are the destination floating-point value and the operand floating-point value.
Operation
This instruction:
1. Takes the absolute value of the operand floating-point register.
2.
Places the results in the destination floating-point register.
Restrictions
There are no restrictions.
Condition Flags
The floating-point instruction clears the sign bit.
Examples
VABS.F32 S4, S6
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
167
12.6.11.2
VADD
Floating-point Add
Syntax
VADD{cond}.F32 {Sd,} Sn, Sm
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Sd,
is the destination floating-point value.
Sn, Sm
are the operand floating-point values.
Operation
This instruction:
1. Adds the values in the two floating-point operand registers.
2.
Places the results in the destination floating-point register.
Restrictions
There are no restrictions.
Condition Flags
This instruction does not change the flags.
Examples
VADD.F32 S4, S6, S7
168
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.11.3
VCMP, VCMPE
Compares two floating-point registers, or one floating-point register and zero.
Syntax
VCMP{E}{cond}.F32 Sd, Sm
VCMP{E}{cond}.F32 Sd, #0.0
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
E
If present, any NaN operand causes an Invalid Operation exception.
Otherwise, only a signaling NaN causes the exception.
Sd
is the floating-point operand to compare.
Sm
is the floating-point operand that is compared with.
Operation
This instruction:
1. Compares:
2.
̶
Two floating-point registers.
̶
One floating-point register and zero.
Writes the result to the FPSCR flags.
Restrictions
This instruction can optionally raise an Invalid Operation exception if either operand is any type of NaN. It always raises
an Invalid Operation exception if either operand is a signaling NaN.
Condition Flags
When this instruction writes the result to the FPSCR flags, the values are normally transferred to the ARM flags by a
subsequent VMRS instruction, see “”.
Examples
VCMP.F32
VCMP.F32
S4, #0.0
S4, S2
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
169
12.6.11.4
VCVT, VCVTR between Floating-point and Integer
Converts a value in a register from floating-point to a 32-bit integer.
Syntax
VCVT{R}{cond}.Tm.F32 Sd, Sm
VCVT{cond}.F32.Tm Sd, Sm
where:
R
If R is specified, the operation uses the rounding mode specified by the FPSCR.
If R is omitted. the operation uses the Round towards Zero rounding mode.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Tm
is the data type for the operand. It must be one of:
S32 signed 32-
U32
unsigned 32-bit value.
bit value.
Sd, Sm
are the destination register and the operand register.
Operation
These instructions:
1. Either
2.
̶
Converts a value in a register from floating-point value to a 32-bit integer.
̶
Converts from a 32-bit integer to floating-point value.
Places the result in a second register.
The floating-point to integer operation normally uses the Round towards Zero rounding mode, but can optionally
use the rounding mode specified by the FPSCR.
The integer to floating-point operation uses the rounding mode specified by the FPSCR.
Restrictions
There are no restrictions.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
170
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.11.5
VCVT between Floating-point and Fixed-point
Converts a value in a register from floating-point to and from fixed-point.
Syntax
VCVT{cond}.Td.F32 Sd, Sd, #fbits
VCVT{cond}.F32.Td Sd, Sd, #fbits
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Td
is the data type for the fixed-point number. It must be one of:
S16
U16
signed 16-bit value.
unsigned 16-bit value.
S32
U32
signed 32-bit value.
unsigned 32-bit value.
Sd
is the destination register and the operand register.
fbits
is the number of fraction bits in the fixed-point number:
If Td is S16 or U16, fbits must be in the range 0–16.
If Td is S32 or U32, fbits must be in the range 1–32.
Operation
These instructions:
1. Either
̶
̶
2.
Converts a value in a register from floating-point to fixed-point.
Converts a value in a register from fixed-point to floating-point.
Places the result in a second register.
The floating-point values are single-precision.
The fixed-point value can be 16-bit or 32-bit. Conversions from fixed-point values take their operand from the loworder bits of the source register and ignore any remaining bits.
Signed conversions to fixed-point values sign-extend the result value to the destination register width.
Unsigned conversions to fixed-point values zero-extend the result value to the destination register width.
The floating-point to fixed-point operation uses the Round towards Zero rounding mode. The fixed-point to floatingpoint operation uses the Round to Nearest rounding mode.
Restrictions
There are no restrictions.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
171
12.6.11.6
VCVTB, VCVTT
Converts between a half-precision value and a single-precision value.
Syntax
VCVT{y}{cond}.F32.F16 Sd, Sm
VCVT{y}{cond}.F16.F32 Sd, Sm
where:
y
Specifies which half of the operand register Sm or destination register Sd is used for the
operand or destination:
- If y is B, then the bottom half, bits [15:0], of Sm or Sd is used.
- If y is T, then the top half, bits [31:16], of Sm or Sd is used.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Sd
is the destination register.
Sm
is the operand register.
Operation
This instruction with the.F16.32 suffix:
1. Converts the half-precision value in the top or bottom half of a single-precision. register to singleprecision.
2.
Writes the result to a single-precision register.
This instruction with the.F32.F16 suffix:
1. Converts the value in a single-precision register to half-precision.
2.
Writes the result into the top or bottom half of a single-precision register, preserving the other half of the
target register.
Restrictions
There are no restrictions.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
172
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.11.7
VDIV
Divides floating-point values.
Syntax
VDIV{cond}.F32 {Sd,} Sn, Sm
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Sd
is the destination register.
Sn, Sm
are the operand registers.
Operation
This instruction:
1. Divides one floating-point value by another floating-point value.
2.
Writes the result to the floating-point destination register.
Restrictions
There are no restrictions.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
173
12.6.11.8
VFMA, VFMS
Floating-point Fused Multiply Accumulate and Subtract.
Syntax
VFMA{cond}.F32 {Sd,} Sn, Sm
VFMS{cond}.F32 {Sd,} Sn, Sm
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Sd
is the destination register.
Sn, Sm
are the operand registers.
Operation
The VFMA instruction:
1. Multiplies the floating-point values in the operand registers.
2.
Accumulates the results into the destination register.
The result of the multiply is not rounded before the accumulation.
The VFMS instruction:
1. Negates the first operand register.
2.
Multiplies the floating-point values of the first and second operand registers.
3.
Adds the products to the destination register.
4.
Places the results in the destination register.
The result of the multiply is not rounded before the addition.
Restrictions
There are no restrictions.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
174
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.11.9
VFNMA, VFNMS
Floating-point Fused Negate Multiply Accumulate and Subtract.
Syntax
VFNMA{cond}.F32 {Sd,} Sn, Sm
VFNMS{cond}.F32 {Sd,} Sn, Sm
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Sd
is the destination register.
Sn, Sm
are the operand registers.
Operation
The VFNMA instruction:
1. Negates the first floating-point operand register.
2.
Multiplies the first floating-point operand with second floating-point operand.
3.
Adds the negation of the floating -point destination register to the product
4.
Places the result into the destination register.
The result of the multiply is not rounded before the addition.
The VFNMS instruction:
1. Multiplies the first floating-point operand with second floating-point operand.
2.
Adds the negation of the floating-point value in the destination register to the product.
3.
Places the result in the destination register.
The result of the multiply is not rounded before the addition.
Restrictions
There are no restrictions.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
175
12.6.11.10
VLDM
Floating-point Load Multiple
Syntax
VLDM{mode}{cond}{.size} Rn{!}, list
where:
mode
is the addressing mode:
- IA
Increment After. The consecutive addresses start at the address speci
fied in Rn.
- DB Decrement Before. The consecutive addresses end just before the
address specified in Rn.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
size
is an optional data size specifier.
Rn
is the base register. The SP can be used
!
is the command to the instruction to write a modified value back to Rn. This is
required if mode == DB, and is optional if mode == IA.
list
is the list of extension registers to be loaded, as a list of consecutively numbered
doubleword or singleword registers, separated by commas and surrounded by
brackets.
Operation
This instruction loads:
Multiple extension registers from consecutive memory locations using an address from an ARM core register
as the base address.
Restrictions
The restrictions are:
If size is present, it must be equal to the size in bits, 32 or 64, of the registers in list.
For the base address, the SP can be used.
In the ARM instruction set, if ! is not specified the PC can be used.
list must contain at least one register. If it contains doubleword registers, it must not contain more than 16
registers.
If using the Decrement Before addressing mode, the write back flag, !, must be appended to the base
register specification.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
176
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.11.11
VLDR
Loads a single extension register from memory
Syntax
VLDR{cond}{.64}
VLDR{cond}{.64}
VLDR{cond}{.64}
VLDR{cond}{.32}
VLDR{cond}{.32}
VLDR{cond}{.32}
Dd,
Dd,
Dd,
Sd,
Sd,
Sd,
[Rn{#imm}]
label
[PC, #imm}]
[Rn {, #imm}]
label
[PC, #imm]
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
64, 32
are the optional data size specifiers.
Dd
is the destination register for a doubleword load.
Sd
is the destination register for a singleword load.
Rn
is the base register. The SP can be used.
imm
is the + or - immediate offset used to form the address.
Permitted address values are multiples of 4 in the range 0 to 1020.
label
is the label of the literal data item to be loaded.
Operation
This instruction:
Loads a single extension register from memory, using a base address from an ARM core register, with an
optional offset.
Restrictions
There are no restrictions.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
177
12.6.11.12
VLMA, VLMS
Multiplies two floating-point values, and accumulates or subtracts the results.
Syntax
VLMA{cond}.F32 Sd, Sn, Sm
VLMS{cond}.F32 Sd, Sn, Sm
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Sd
is the destination floating-point value.
Sn, Sm
are the operand floating-point values.
Operation
The floating-point Multiply Accumulate instruction:
1. Multiplies two floating-point values.
2.
Adds the results to the destination floating-point value.
The floating-point Multiply Subtract instruction:
1. Multiplies two floating-point values.
2.
Subtracts the products from the destination floating-point value.
3.
Places the results in the destination register.
Restrictions
There are no restrictions.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
178
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.11.13
VMOV Immediate
Move floating-point Immediate
Syntax
VMOV{cond}.F32 Sd, #imm
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Sd
is the branch destination.
imm
is a floating-point constant.
Operation
This instruction copies a constant value to a floating-point register.
Restrictions
There are no restrictions.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
179
12.6.11.14
VMOV Register
Copies the contents of one register to another.
Syntax
VMOV{cond}.F64 Dd, Dm
VMOV{cond}.F32 Sd, Sm
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Dd
is the destination register, for a doubleword operation.
Dm
is the source register, for a doubleword operation.
Sd
is the destination register, for a singleword operation.
Sm
is the source register, for a singleword operation.
Operation
This instruction copies the contents of one floating-point register to another.
Restrictions
There are no restrictions
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
180
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.11.15
VMOV Scalar to ARM Core Register
Transfers one word of a doubleword floating-point register to an ARM core register.
Syntax
VMOV{cond} Rt, Dn[x]
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rt
is the destination ARM core register.
Dn
is the 64-bit doubleword register.
x
Specifies which half of the doubleword register to use:
- If x is 0, use lower half of doubleword register
- If x is 1, use upper half of doubleword register.
Operation
This instruction transfers:
One word from the upper or lower half of a doubleword floating-point register to an ARM core register.
Restrictions
Rt cannot be PC or SP.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
181
12.6.11.16
VMOV ARM Core Register to Single Precision
Transfers a single-precision register to and from an ARM core register.
Syntax
VMOV{cond} Sn, Rt
VMOV{cond} Rt, Sn
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Sn
is the single-precision floating-point register.
Rt
is the ARM core register.
Operation
This instruction transfers:
The contents of a single-precision register to an ARM core register.
The contents of an ARM core register to a single-precision register.
Restrictions
Rt cannot be PC or SP.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
182
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.11.17
VMOV Two ARM Core Registers to Two Single Precision
Transfers two consecutively numbered single-precision registers to and from two ARM core registers.
Syntax
VMOV{cond} Sm, Sm1, Rt, Rt2
VMOV{cond} Rt, Rt2, Sm, Sm
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Sm
is the first single-precision register.
Sm1
is the second single-precision register.
This is the next single-precision register after Sm.
Rt
is the ARM core register that Sm is transferred to or from.
Rt2
is the The ARM core register that Sm1 is transferred to or from.
Operation
This instruction transfers:
The contents of two consecutively numbered single-precision registers to two ARM core registers.
The contents of two ARM core registers to a pair of single-precision registers.
Restrictions
The restrictions are:
The floating-point registers must be contiguous, one after the other.
The ARM core registers do not have to be contiguous.
Rt cannot be PC or SP.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
183
12.6.11.18
VMOV ARM Core Register to Scalar
Transfers one word to a floating-point register from an ARM core register.
Syntax
VMOV{cond}{.32} Dd[x], Rt
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
32
is an optional data size specifier.
Dd[x]
is the destination, where [x] defines which half of the doubleword is transferred,
as follows:
If x is 0, the lower half is extracted
If x is 1, the upper half is extracted.
Rt
is the source ARM core register.
Operation
This instruction transfers one word to the upper or lower half of a doubleword floating-point register from an ARM
core register.
Restrictions
Rt cannot be PC or SP.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
184
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.11.19
VMRS
Move to ARM Core register from floating-point System Register.
Syntax
VMRS{cond} Rt, FPSCR
VMRS{cond} APSR_nzcv, FPSCR
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rt
is the destination ARM core register. This register can be R0–R14.
APSR_nzcv Transfer floating-point flags to the APSR flags.
Operation
This instruction performs one of the following actions:
Copies the value of the FPSCR to a general-purpose register.
Copies the value of the FPSCR flag bits to the APSR N, Z, C, and V flags.
Restrictions
Rt cannot be PC or SP.
Condition Flags
These instructions optionally change the flags: N, Z, C, V
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
185
12.6.11.20
VMSR
Move to floating-point System Register from ARM Core register.
Syntax
VMSR{cond} FPSCR, Rt
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rt
is the general-purpose register to be transferred to the FPSCR.
Operation
This instruction moves the value of a general-purpose register to the FPSCR. See “Floating-point Status Control
Register” for more information.
Restrictions
The restrictions are:
Rt cannot be PC or SP.
Condition Flags
This instruction updates the FPSCR.
186
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.11.21
VMUL
Floating-point Multiply.
Syntax
VMUL{cond}.F32 {Sd,} Sn, Sm
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Sd
is the destination floating-point value.
Sn, Sm
are the operand floating-point values.
Operation
This instruction:
1. Multiplies two floating-point values.
2.
Places the results in the destination register.
Restrictions
There are no restrictions.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
187
12.6.11.22
VNEG
Floating-point Negate.
Syntax
VNEG{cond}.F32 Sd, Sm
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Sd
is the destination floating-point value.
Sm
is the operand floating-point value.
Operation
This instruction:
1. Negates a floating-point value.
2.
Places the results in a second floating-point register.
The floating-point instruction inverts the sign bit.
Restrictions
There are no restrictions.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
188
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.11.23
VNMLA, VNMLS, VNMUL
Floating-point multiply with negation followed by add or subtract.
Syntax
VNMLA{cond}.F32 Sd, Sn, Sm
VNMLS{cond}.F32 Sd, Sn, Sm
VNMUL{cond}.F32 {Sd,} Sn, Sm
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Sd
is the destination floating-point register.
Sn, Sm
are the operand floating-point registers.
Operation
The VNMLA instruction:
1. Multiplies two floating-point register values.
2.
Adds the negation of the floating-point value in the destination register to the negation of the product.
3.
Writes the result back to the destination register.
The VNMLS instruction:
1. Multiplies two floating-point register values.
2.
Adds the negation of the floating-point value in the destination register to the product.
3.
Writes the result back to the destination register.
The VNMUL instruction:
1. Multiplies together two floating-point register values.
2.
Writes the negation of the result to the destination register.
Restrictions
There are no restrictions.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
189
12.6.11.24
VPOP
Floating-point extension register Pop.
Syntax
VPOP{cond}{.size} list
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
size
is an optional data size specifier.
If present, it must be equal to the size in bits, 32 or 64, of the registers in list.
list
is the list of extension registers to be loaded, as a list of consecutively numbered
doubleword or singleword registers, separated by commas and surrounded by
brackets.
Operation
This instruction loads multiple consecutive extension registers from the stack.
Restrictions
The list must contain at least one register, and not more than sixteen registers.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
190
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.11.25
VPUSH
Floating-point extension register Push.
Syntax
VPUSH{cond}{.size} list
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
size
is an optional data size specifier.
If present, it must be equal to the size in bits, 32 or 64, of the registers in list.
list
is a list of the extension registers to be stored, as a list of consecutively num
bered doubleword or singleword registers, separated by commas and sur
rounded by brackets.
Operation
This instruction:
Stores multiple consecutive extension registers to the stack.
Restrictions
The restrictions are:
list must contain at least one register, and not more than sixteen.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
191
12.6.11.26
VSQRT
Floating-point Square Root.
Syntax
VSQRT{cond}.F32 Sd, Sm
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Sd
is the destination floating-point value.
Sm
is the operand floating-point value.
Operation
This instruction:
Calculates the square root of the value in a floating-point register.
Writes the result to another floating-point register.
Restrictions
There are no restrictions.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
192
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.11.27
VSTM
Floating-point Store Multiple.
Syntax
VSTM{mode}{cond}{.size} Rn{!}, list
where:
mode
is the addressing mode:
- IA
Increment After. The consecutive addresses start at the address speci
fied in Rn.
This is the default and can be omitted.
- DB Decrement Before. The consecutive addresses end just before the
address specified in Rn.
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
size
is an optional data size specifier.
If present, it must be equal to the size in bits, 32 or 64, of the registers in list.
Rn
is the base register. The SP can be used
!
is the function that causes the instruction to write a modified value back to Rn.
Required if mode == DB.
list
is a list of the extension registers to be stored, as a list of consecutively num
bered doubleword or singleword registers, separated by commas and sur
rounded by brackets.
Operation
This instruction:
Stores multiple extension registers to consecutive memory locations using a base address from an ARM
core register.
Restrictions
The restrictions are:
list must contain at least one register.
If it contains doubleword registers it must not contain more than 16 registers.
Use of the PC as Rn is deprecated.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
193
12.6.11.28
VSTR
Floating-point Store.
Syntax
VSTR{cond}{.32} Sd, [Rn{, #imm}]
VSTR{cond}{.64} Dd, [Rn{, #imm}]
where
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
32, 64
are the optional data size specifiers.
Sd
is the source register for a singleword store.
Dd
is the source register for a doubleword store.
Rn
is the base register. The SP can be used.
imm
is the + or - immediate offset used to form the address. Values are multiples of 4
in the range 0–1020. imm can be omitted, meaning an offset of +0.
Operation
This instruction:
Stores a single extension register to memory, using an address from an ARM core register, with an optional
offset, defined in imm.
Restrictions
The restrictions are:
The use of PC for Rn is deprecated.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
194
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.11.29
VSUB
Floating-point Subtract.
Syntax
VSUB{cond}.F32 {Sd,} Sn, Sm
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Sd
is the destination floating-point value.
Sn, Sm
are the operand floating-point value.
Operation
This instruction:
1. Subtracts one floating-point value from another floating-point value.
2.
Places the results in the destination floating-point register.
Restrictions
There are no restrictions.
Condition Flags
These instructions do not change the flags.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
195
12.6.12 Miscellaneous Instructions
The table below shows the remaining Cortex-M4 instructions.
Table 12-28.
196
Miscellaneous Instructions
Mnemonic
Description
BKPT
Breakpoint
CPSID
Change Processor State, Disable Interrupts
CPSIE
Change Processor State, Enable Interrupts
DMB
Data Memory Barrier
DSB
Data Synchronization Barrier
ISB
Instruction Synchronization Barrier
MRS
Move from special register to register
MSR
Move from register to special register
NOP
No Operation
SEV
Send Event
SVC
Supervisor Call
WFE
Wait For Event
WFI
Wait For Interrupt
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.12.1
BKPT
Breakpoint.
Syntax
BKPT #imm
where:
imm
is an expression evaluating to an integer in the range 0–255 (8-bit value).
Operation
The BKPT instruction causes the processor to enter Debug state. Debug tools can use this to investigate system
state when the instruction at a particular address is reached.
imm is ignored by the processor. If required, a debugger can use it to store additional information about the
breakpoint.
The BKPT instruction can be placed inside an IT block, but it executes unconditionally, unaffected by the condition
specified by the IT instruction.
Condition Flags
This instruction does not change the flags.
Examples
BKPT 0xAB
Note:
; Breakpoint with immediate value set to 0xAB (debugger can
; extract the immediate value by locating it using the PC)
ARM does not recommend the use of the BKPT instruction with an immediate value set to 0xAB for any purpose other
than Semi-hosting.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
197
12.6.12.2
CPS
Change Processor State.
Syntax
CPSeffect iflags
where:
effect
is one of:
IE
Clears the special purpose register.
ID
Sets the special purpose register.
iflags
is a sequence of one or more flags:
i
Set or clear PRIMASK.
f
Set or clear FAULTMASK.
Operation
CPS changes the PRIMASK and FAULTMASK special register values. See “Exception Mask Registers” for more
information about these registers.
Restrictions
The restrictions are:
Use CPS only from privileged software, it has no effect if used in unprivileged software
CPS cannot be conditional and so must not be used inside an IT block.
Condition Flags
This instruction does not change the condition flags.
Examples
CPSID
CPSID
CPSIE
CPSIE
198
i
f
i
f
;
;
;
;
Disable interrupts and configurable fault handlers (set PRIMASK)
Disable interrupts and all fault handlers (set FAULTMASK)
Enable interrupts and configurable fault handlers (clear PRIMASK)
Enable interrupts and fault handlers (clear FAULTMASK)
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.12.3
DMB
Data Memory Barrier.
Syntax
DMB{cond}
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Operation
DMB acts as a data memory barrier. It ensures that all explicit memory accesses that appear, in program order,
before the DMB instruction are completed before any explicit memory accesses that appear, in program order,
after the DMB instruction. DMB does not affect the ordering or execution of instructions that do not access
memory.
Condition Flags
This instruction does not change the flags.
Examples
DMB
; Data Memory Barrier
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
199
12.6.12.4
DSB
Data Synchronization Barrier.
Syntax
DSB{cond}
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Operation
DSB acts as a special data synchronization memory barrier. Instructions that come after the DSB, in program
order, do not execute until the DSB instruction completes. The DSB instruction completes when all explicit memory
accesses before it complete.
Condition Flags
This instruction does not change the flags.
Examples
DSB ; Data Synchronisation Barrier
200
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.12.5
ISB
Instruction Synchronization Barrier.
Syntax
ISB{cond}
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Operation
ISB acts as an instruction synchronization barrier. It flushes the pipeline of the processor, so that all instructions
following the ISB are fetched from memory again, after the ISB instruction has been completed.
Condition Flags
This instruction does not change the flags.
Examples
ISB
; Instruction Synchronisation Barrier
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
201
12.6.12.6
MRS
Move the contents of a special register to a general-purpose register.
Syntax
MRS{cond} Rd, spec_reg
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rd
is the destination register.
spec_reg
can be any of: APSR, IPSR, EPSR, IEPSR, IAPSR, EAPSR, PSR, MSP, PSP,
PRIMASK, BASEPRI, BASEPRI_MAX, FAULTMASK, or CONTROL.
Operation
Use MRS in combination with MSR as part of a read-modify-write sequence for updating a PSR, for example to
clear the Q flag.
In process swap code, the programmers model state of the process being swapped out must be saved, including
relevant PSR contents. Similarly, the state of the process being swapped in must also be restored. These
operations use MRS in the state-saving instruction sequence and MSR in the state-restoring instruction sequence.
Note:
BASEPRI_MAX is an alias of BASEPRI when used with the MRS instruction.
See “MSR”.
Restrictions
Rd must not be SP and must not be PC.
Condition Flags
This instruction does not change the flags.
Examples
MRS
202
R0, PRIMASK ; Read PRIMASK value and write it to R0
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.12.7
MSR
Move the contents of a general-purpose register into the specified special register.
Syntax
MSR{cond} spec_reg, Rn
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Rn
is the source register.
spec_reg
can be any of: APSR, IPSR, EPSR, IEPSR, IAPSR, EAPSR, PSR, MSP, PSP,
PRIMASK, BASEPRI, BASEPRI_MAX, FAULTMASK, or CONTROL.
Operation
The register access operation in MSR depends on the privilege level. Unprivileged software can only access the
APSR. See “Application Program Status Register”. Privileged software can access all special registers.
In unprivileged software writes to unallocated or execution state bits in the PSR are ignored.
Note:
When the user writes to BASEPRI_MAX, the instruction writes to BASEPRI only if either:
Rn is non-zero and the current BASEPRI value is 0
Rn is non-zero and less than the current BASEPRI value.
See “MRS”.
Restrictions
Rn must not be SP and must not be PC.
Condition Flags
This instruction updates the flags explicitly based on the value in Rn.
Examples
MSR
CONTROL, R1 ; Read R1 value and write it to the CONTROL register
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
203
12.6.12.8
NOP
No Operation.
Syntax
NOP{cond}
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Operation
NOP does nothing. NOP is not necessarily a time-consuming NOP. The processor might remove it from the
pipeline before it reaches the execution stage.
Use NOP for padding, for example to place the following instruction on a 64-bit boundary.
Condition Flags
This instruction does not change the flags.
Examples
NOP
204
; No operation
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.12.9
SEV
Send Event.
Syntax
SEV{cond}
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Operation
SEV is a hint instruction that causes an event to be signaled to all processors within a multiprocessor system. It
also sets the local event register to 1, see “Power Management”.
Condition Flags
This instruction does not change the flags.
Examples
SEV ; Send Event
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
205
12.6.12.10 SVC
Supervisor Call.
Syntax
SVC{cond} #imm
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
imm
is an expression evaluating to an integer in the range 0-255 (8-bit value).
Operation
The SVC instruction causes the SVC exception.
imm is ignored by the processor. If required, it can be retrieved by the exception handler to determine what service
is being requested.
Condition Flags
This instruction does not change the flags.
Examples
SVC
206
0x32
; Supervisor Call (SVC handler can extract the immediate value
; by locating it via the stacked PC)
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.6.12.11
WFE
Wait For Event.
Syntax
WFE{cond}
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Operation
WFE is a hint instruction.
If the event register is 0, WFE suspends execution until one of the following events occurs:
An exception, unless masked by the exception mask registers or the current priority level
An exception enters the Pending state, if SEVONPEND in the System Control Register is set
A Debug Entry request, if Debug is enabled
An event signaled by a peripheral or another processor in a multiprocessor system using the SEV
instruction.
If the event register is 1, WFE clears it to 0 and returns immediately.
For more information, see “Power Management”.
Condition Flags
This instruction does not change the flags.
Examples
WFE
; Wait for event
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
207
12.6.12.12 WFI
Wait for Interrupt.
Syntax
WFI{cond}
where:
cond
is an optional condition code, see “Conditional Execution”.
Operation
WFI is a hint instruction that suspends execution until one of the following events occurs:
An exception
A Debug Entry request, regardless of whether Debug is enabled.
Condition Flags
This instruction does not change the flags.
Examples
WFI ; Wait for interrupt
208
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.7
Cortex-M4 Core Peripherals
12.7.1 Peripherals
Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC)
The Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) is an embedded interrupt controller that supports low
latency interrupt processing. See Section 12.8 ”Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC)”.
System Control Block (SCB)
The System Control Block (SCB) is the programmers model interface to the processor. It provides system
implementation information and system control, including configuration, control, and reporting of system
exceptions. See Section 12.9 ”System Control Block (SCB)”.
System Timer (SysTick)
The System Timer, SysTick, is a 24-bit count-down timer. Use this as a Real Time Operating System
(RTOS) tick timer or as a simple counter. See Section 12.10 ”System Timer (SysTick)”.
Memory Protection Unit (MPU)
The Memory Protection Unit (MPU) improves system reliability by defining the memory attributes for different
memory regions. It provides up to eight different regions, and an optional predefined background region.
See Section 12.11 ”Memory Protection Unit (MPU)”.
Floating-point Unit (FPU)
The Floating-point Unit (FPU) provides IEEE754-compliant operations on single-precision, 32-bit, floatingpoint values. See Section 12.12 ”Floating Point Unit (FPU)”.
12.7.2 Address Map
The address map of the Private peripheral bus (PPB) is given in the following table.
Table 12-29.
Core Peripheral Register Regions
Address
Core Peripheral
0xE000E008–0xE000E00F
System Control Block
0xE000E010–0xE000E01F
System Timer
0xE000E100–0xE000E4EF
Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller
0xE000ED00–0xE000ED3F
System control block
0xE000ED90–0xE000EDB8
Memory Protection Unit
0xE000EF00–0xE000EF03
Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller
0xE000EF30–0xE000EF44
Floating-point Unit
In register descriptions:
The required privilege gives the privilege level required to access the register, as follows:
̶
Privileged: Only privileged software can access the register.
̶
Unprivileged: Both unprivileged and privileged software can access the register.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
209
12.8
Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC)
This section describes the NVIC and the registers it uses. The NVIC supports:
Up to 47 interrupts
A programmable priority level of 0–15 for each interrupt. A higher level corresponds to a lower priority, so
level 0 is the highest interrupt priority.
Level detection of interrupt signals
Dynamic reprioritization of interrupts
Grouping of priority values into group priority and subpriority fields
Interrupt tail-chaining
An external Non-maskable interrupt (NMI)
The processor automatically stacks its state on exception entry and unstacks this state on exception exit, with no
instruction overhead. This provides low latency exception handling.
12.8.1 Level-sensitive Interrupts
The processor supports level-sensitive interrupts. A level-sensitive interrupt is held asserted until the peripheral
deasserts the interrupt signal. Typically, this happens because the ISR accesses the peripheral, causing it to clear
the interrupt request.
When the processor enters the ISR, it automatically removes the pending state from the interrupt (see “Hardware
and Software Control of Interrupts”). For a level-sensitive interrupt, if the signal is not deasserted before the
processor returns from the ISR, the interrupt becomes pending again, and the processor must execute its ISR
again. This means that the peripheral can hold the interrupt signal asserted until it no longer requires servicing.
12.8.1.1
Hardware and Software Control of Interrupts
The Cortex-M4 latches all interrupts. A peripheral interrupt becomes pending for one of the following reasons:
The NVIC detects that the interrupt signal is HIGH and the interrupt is not active
The NVIC detects a rising edge on the interrupt signal
A software writes to the corresponding interrupt set-pending register bit, see “Interrupt Set-pending
Registers”, or to the NVIC_STIR to make an interrupt pending, see “Software Trigger Interrupt Register”.
A pending interrupt remains pending until one of the following:
The processor enters the ISR for the interrupt. This changes the state of the interrupt from pending to active.
Then:
̶
For a level-sensitive interrupt, when the processor returns from the ISR, the NVIC samples the
interrupt signal. If the signal is asserted, the state of the interrupt changes to pending, which might
cause the processor to immediately re-enter the ISR. Otherwise, the state of the interrupt changes to
inactive.
Software writes to the corresponding interrupt clear-pending register bit.
For a level-sensitive interrupt, if the interrupt signal is still asserted, the state of the interrupt does not
change. Otherwise, the state of the interrupt changes to inactive.
12.8.2 NVIC Design Hints and Tips
Ensure that the software uses correctly aligned register accesses. The processor does not support unaligned
accesses to NVIC registers. See the individual register descriptions for the supported access sizes.
A interrupt can enter a pending state even if it is disabled. Disabling an interrupt only prevents the processor from
taking that interrupt.
210
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Before programming SCB_VTOR to relocate the vector table, ensure that the vector table entries of the new vector
table are set up for fault handlers, NMI and all enabled exception like interrupts. For more information, see the
“Vector Table Offset Register”.
12.8.2.1
NVIC Programming Hints
The software uses the CPSIE I and CPSID I instructions to enable and disable the interrupts. The CMSIS provides
the following intrinsic functions for these instructions:
void __disable_irq(void) // Disable Interrupts
void __enable_irq(void) // Enable Interrupts
In addition, the CMSIS provides a number of functions for NVIC control, including:
Table 12-30.
CMSIS Functions for NVIC Control
CMSIS Interrupt Control Function
Description
void NVIC_SetPriorityGrouping(uint32_t priority_grouping)
Set the priority grouping
void NVIC_EnableIRQ(IRQn_t IRQn)
Enable IRQn
void NVIC_DisableIRQ(IRQn_t IRQn)
Disable IRQn
uint32_t NVIC_GetPendingIRQ (IRQn_t IRQn)
Return true (IRQ-Number) if IRQn is pending
void NVIC_SetPendingIRQ (IRQn_t IRQn)
Set IRQn pending
void NVIC_ClearPendingIRQ (IRQn_t IRQn)
Clear IRQn pending status
uint32_t NVIC_GetActive (IRQn_t IRQn)
Return the IRQ number of the active interrupt
void NVIC_SetPriority (IRQn_t IRQn, uint32_t priority)
Set priority for IRQn
uint32_t NVIC_GetPriority (IRQn_t IRQn)
Read priority of IRQn
void NVIC_SystemReset (void)
Reset the system
The input parameter IRQn is the IRQ number. For more information about these functions, see the CMSIS
documentation.
To improve software efficiency, the CMSIS simplifies the NVIC register presentation. In the CMSIS:
The Set-enable, Clear-enable, Set-pending, Clear-pending and Active Bit registers map to arrays of 32-bit
integers, so that:
̶
The array ISER[0] to ISER[1] corresponds to the registers ISER0–ISER1
̶
The array ICER[0] to ICER[1] corresponds to the registers ICER0–ICER1
̶
The array ISPR[0] to ISPR[1] corresponds to the registers ISPR0–ISPR1
̶
The array ICPR[0] to ICPR[1] corresponds to the registers ICPR0–ICPR1
̶
The array IABR[0] to IABR[1] corresponds to the registers IABR0–IABR1
The Interrupt Priority Registers (IPR0–IPR11) provide an 8-bit priority field for each interrupt and each
register holds four priority fields.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
211
The CMSIS provides thread-safe code that gives atomic access to the Interrupt Priority Registers. Table 12-31
shows how the interrupts, or IRQ numbers, map onto the interrupt registers and corresponding CMSIS variables
that have one bit per interrupt.
Table 12-31.
Mapping of Interrupts
CMSIS Array Elements (1)
Interrupts
Set-enable
Clear-enable
Set-pending
Clear-pending
Active Bit
0–31
ISER[0]
ICER[0]
ISPR[0]
ICPR[0]
IABR[0]
32–47
ISER[1]
ICER[1]
ISPR[1]
ICPR[1]
IABR[1]
Note:
212
1.
Each array element corresponds to a single NVIC register, for example the ICER[0] element corresponds to the
ICER0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.8.3 Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) User Interface
Table 12-32.
Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0xE000E100
Interrupt Set-enable Register 0
NVIC_ISER0
Read/Write
0x00000000
...
...
...
...
...
0xE000E11C
Interrupt Set-enable Register 7
NVIC_ISER7
Read/Write
0x00000000
0XE000E180
Interrupt Clear-enable Register 0
NVIC_ICER0
Read/Write
0x00000000
...
...
...
...
...
0xE000E19C
Interrupt Clear-enable Register 7
NVIC_ICER7
Read/Write
0x00000000
0XE000E200
Interrupt Set-pending Register 0
NVIC_ISPR0
Read/Write
0x00000000
...
...
...
...
...
0xE000E21C
Interrupt Set-pending Register 7
NVIC_ISPR7
Read/Write
0x00000000
0XE000E280
Interrupt Clear-pending Register 0
NVIC_ICPR0
Read/Write
0x00000000
...
...
...
...
...
0xE000E29C
Interrupt Clear-pending Register 7
NVIC_ICPR7
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE000E300
Interrupt Active Bit Register 0
NVIC_IABR0
Read/Write
0x00000000
...
...
...
...
...
0xE000E31C
Interrupt Active Bit Register 7
NVIC_IABR7
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE000E400
Interrupt Priority Register 0
NVIC_IPR0
Read/Write
0x00000000
...
...
...
...
...
0xE000E42C
Interrupt Priority Register 11
NVIC_IPR11
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE000EF00
Software Trigger Interrupt Register
NVIC_STIR
Write-only
0x00000000
Note: If an offset is not listed in the table, it must be considered as reserved.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
213
12.8.3.1
Interrupt Set-enable Registers
Name:
NVIC_ISERx [x=0..7]
Access:
Read/Write
Reset:
0x000000000
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
SETENA
23
22
21
20
SETENA
15
14
13
12
SETENA
7
6
5
4
SETENA
These registers enable interrupts and show which interrupts are enabled.
• SETENA: Interrupt Set-enable
Write:
0: No effect.
1: Enables the interrupt.
Read:
0: Interrupt disabled.
1: Interrupt enabled.
Notes:
214
1. If a pending interrupt is enabled, the NVIC activates the interrupt based on its priority.
2. If an interrupt is not enabled, asserting its interrupt signal changes the interrupt state to pending, the NVIC never activates
the interrupt, regardless of its priority.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.8.3.2
Interrupt Clear-enable Registers
Name:
NVIC_ICERx [x=0..7]
Access:
Read/Write
Reset:
0x000000000
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CLRENA
23
22
21
20
CLRENA
15
14
13
12
CLRENA
7
6
5
4
CLRENA
These registers disable interrupts, and show which interrupts are enabled.
• CLRENA: Interrupt Clear-enable
Write:
0: No effect.
1: Disables the interrupt.
Read:
0: Interrupt disabled.
1: Interrupt enabled.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
215
12.8.3.3
Interrupt Set-pending Registers
Name:
NVIC_ISPRx [x=0..7]
Access:
Read/Write
Reset:
0x000000000
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
SETPEND
23
22
21
20
SETPEND
15
14
13
12
SETPEND
7
6
5
4
SETPEND
These registers force interrupts into the pending state, and show which interrupts are pending.
• SETPEND: Interrupt Set-pending
Write:
0: No effect.
1: Changes the interrupt state to pending.
Read:
0: Interrupt is not pending.
1: Interrupt is pending.
Notes:
216
1. Writing a 1 to an ISPR bit corresponding to an interrupt that is pending has no effect.
2. Writing a 1 to an ISPR bit corresponding to a disabled interrupt sets the state of that interrupt to pending.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.8.3.4
Interrupt Clear-pending Registers
Name:
NVIC_ICPRx [x=0..7]
Access:
Read/Write
Reset:
0x000000000
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CLRPEND
23
22
21
20
CLRPEND
15
14
13
12
CLRPEND
7
6
5
4
CLRPEND
These registers remove the pending state from interrupts, and show which interrupts are pending.
• CLRPEND: Interrupt Clear-pending
Write:
0: No effect.
1: Removes the pending state from an interrupt.
Read:
0: Interrupt is not pending.
1: Interrupt is pending.
Note: Writing a 1 to an ICPR bit does not affect the active state of the corresponding interrupt.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
217
12.8.3.5
Interrupt Active Bit Registers
Name:
NVIC_IABRx [x=0..7]
Access:
Read/Write
Reset:
0x000000000
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
ACTIVE
23
22
21
20
ACTIVE
15
14
13
12
ACTIVE
7
6
5
4
ACTIVE
These registers indicate which interrupts are active.
• ACTIVE: Interrupt Active Flags
0: Interrupt is not active.
1: Interrupt is active.
Note: A bit reads as one if the status of the corresponding interrupt is active, or active and pending.
218
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.8.3.6
Interrupt Priority Registers
Name:
NVIC_IPRx [x=0..11]
Access:
Read/Write
Reset:
0x000000000
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
PRI3
23
22
21
20
PRI2
15
14
13
12
PRI1
7
6
5
4
PRI0
The NVIC_IPR0–NVIC_IPR11 registers provide a 8-bit priority field for each interrupt. These registers are byte-accessible.
Each register holds four priority fields that map up to four elements in the CMSIS interrupt priority array IP[0] to IP[46].
• PRI3: Priority (4m+3)
Priority, Byte Offset 3, refers to register bits [31:24].
• PRI2: Priority (4m+2)
Priority, Byte Offset 2, refers to register bits [23:16].
• PRI1: Priority (4m+1)
Priority, Byte Offset 1, refers to register bits [15:8].
• PRI0: Priority (4m)
Priority, Byte Offset 0, refers to register bits [7:0].
Notes:
1. Each priority field holds a priority value, 0–15. The lower the value, the greater the priority of the corresponding interrupt.
The processor implements only bits[7:4] of each field; bits[3:0] read as zero and ignore writes.
2. For more information about the IP[0] to IP[46] interrupt priority array, that provides the software view of the interrupt
priorities, see Table 12-30, “CMSIS Functions for NVIC Control” .
3. The corresponding IPR number n is given by n = m DIV 4.
4. The byte offset of the required Priority field in this register is m MOD 4.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
219
12.8.3.7
Software Trigger Interrupt Register
Name:
NVIC_STIR
Access:
Write-only
Reset:
0x000000000
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
INTID
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
INTID
Write to this register to generate an interrupt from the software.
• INTID: Interrupt ID
Interrupt ID of the interrupt to trigger, in the range 0–239. For example, a value of 0x03 specifies interrupt IRQ3.
220
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.9
System Control Block (SCB)
The System Control Block (SCB) provides system implementation information, and system control. This includes
configuration, control, and reporting of the system exceptions.
Ensure that the software uses aligned accesses of the correct size to access the system control block registers:
Except for the SCB_CFSR and SCB_SHPR1–SCB_SHPR3 registers, it must use aligned word accesses
For the SCB_CFSR and SCB_SHPR1–SCB_SHPR3 registers, it can use byte or aligned halfword or word
accesses.
The processor does not support unaligned accesses to system control block registers.
In a fault handler, to determine the true faulting address:
1. Read and save the MMFAR or SCB_BFAR value.
2.
Read the MMARVALID bit in the MMFSR subregister, or the BFARVALID bit in the BFSR subregister. The
SCB_MMFAR or SCB_BFAR address is valid only if this bit is 1.
The software must follow this sequence because another higher priority exception might change the SCB_MMFAR
or SCB_BFAR value. For example, if a higher priority handler preempts the current fault handler, the other fault
might change the SCB_MMFAR or SCB_BFAR value.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
221
12.9.1 System Control Block (SCB) User Interface
Table 12-33.
System Control Block (SCB) Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0xE000E008
Auxiliary Control Register
SCB_ACTLR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE000ED00
CPUID Base Register
SCB_CPUID
Read-only
0x410FC240
0xE000ED04
Interrupt Control and State Register
SCB_ICSR
Read/Write(1)
0x00000000
0xE000ED08
Vector Table Offset Register
SCB_VTOR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE000ED0C
Application Interrupt and Reset Control Register
SCB_AIRCR
Read/Write
0xFA050000
0xE000ED10
System Control Register
SCB_SCR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE000ED14
Configuration and Control Register
SCB_CCR
Read/Write
0x00000200
0xE000ED18
System Handler Priority Register 1
SCB_SHPR1
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE000ED1C
System Handler Priority Register 2
SCB_SHPR2
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE000ED20
System Handler Priority Register 3
SCB_SHPR3
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE000ED24
System Handler Control and State Register
SCB_SHCSR
Read/Write
0x00000000
(2)
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE000ED28
Configurable Fault Status Register
SCB_CFSR
0xE000ED2C
HardFault Status Register
SCB_HFSR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE000ED34
MemManage Fault Address Register
SCB_MMFAR
Read/Write
Unknown
0xE000ED38
BusFault Address Register
SCB_BFAR
Read/Write
Unknown
0xE000ED3C
Auxiliary Fault Status Register
SCB_AFSR
Read/Write
0x00000000
Notes:
222
1. See the register description for more information.
2. This register contains the subregisters: “MMFSR: Memory Management Fault Status Subregister” (0xE000ED28 - 8 bits),
“BFSR: Bus Fault Status Subregister” (0xE000ED29 - 8 bits), “UFSR: Usage Fault Status Subregister” (0xE000ED2A - 16
bits).
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.9.1.1
Auxiliary Control Register
Name:
SCB_ACTLR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
DISOOFP
8
DISFPCA
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
DISFOLD
1
DISDEFWBUF
0
DISMCYCINT
The SCB_ACTLR provides disable bits for the following processor functions:
• IT folding
• Write buffer use for accesses to the default memory map
• Interruption of multi-cycle instructions.
By default, this register is set to provide optimum performance from the Cortex-M4 processor, and does not normally
require modification.
• DISOOFP: Disable Out Of Order Floating Point
Disables floating point instructions that complete out of order with respect to integer instructions.
• DISFPCA: Disable FPCA
Disables an automatic update of CONTROL.FPCA.
• DISFOLD: Disable Folding
When set to 1, disables the IT folding.
Note: In some situations, the processor can start executing the first instruction in an IT block while it is still executing the IT instruction.
This behavior is called IT folding, and it improves the performance. However, IT folding can cause jitter in looping. If a task must
avoid jitter, set the DISFOLD bit to 1 before executing the task, to disable the IT folding.
• DISDEFWBUF: Disable Default Write Buffer
When set to 1, it disables the write buffer use during default memory map accesses. This causes BusFault to be precise
but decreases the performance, as any store to memory must complete before the processor can execute the next
instruction.
This bit only affects write buffers implemented in the Cortex-M4 processor.
• DISMCYCINT: Disable Multiple Cycle Interruption
When set to 1, it disables the interruption of load multiple and store multiple instructions. This increases the interrupt
latency of the processor, as any LDM or STM must complete before the processor can stack the current state and enter the
interrupt handler.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
223
12.9.1.2
CPUID Base Register
Name:
SCB_CPUID
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
19
18
25
24
17
16
9
8
1
0
Implementer
23
22
21
20
Variant
15
14
Constant
13
12
11
10
3
2
PartNo
7
6
5
4
PartNo
Revision
The SCB_CPUID register contains the processor part number, version, and implementation information.
• Implementer: Implementer Code
0x41: ARM.
• Variant: Variant Number
It is the r value in the rnpn product revision identifier:
0x0: Revision 0.
• Constant: Reads as 0xF
Reads as 0xF.
• PartNo: Part Number of the Processor
0xC24 = Cortex-M4.
• Revision: Revision Number
It is the p value in the rnpn product revision identifier:
0x0: Patch 0.
224
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.9.1.3
Interrupt Control and State Register
Name:
SCB_ICSR
Access:
Read/Write
31
NMIPENDSET
30
29
28
PENDSVSET
23
–
22
ISRPENDING
21
20
15
14
13
VECTPENDING
12
7
6
4
–
5
27
PENDSVCLR
26
PENDSTSET
19
18
VECTPENDING
25
PENDSTCLR
24
–
17
16
11
RETTOBASE
10
–
9
–
8
VECTACTIVE
3
2
1
0
VECTACTIVE
The SCB_ICSR provides a set-pending bit for the Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI) exception, and set-pending and clearpending bits for the PendSV and SysTick exceptions.
It indicates:
• The exception number of the exception being processed, and whether there are preempted active exceptions,
• The exception number of the highest priority pending exception, and whether any interrupts are pending.
• NMIPENDSET: NMI Set-pending
Write:
PendSV set-pending bit.
Write:
0: No effect.
1: Changes NMI exception state to pending.
Read:
0: NMI exception is not pending.
1: NMI exception is pending.
As NMI is the highest-priority exception, the processor normally enters the NMI exception handler as soon as it registers a
write of 1 to this bit. Entering the handler clears this bit to 0. A read of this bit by the NMI exception handler returns 1 only if
the NMI signal is reasserted while the processor is executing that handler.
• PENDSVSET: PendSV Set-pending
Write:
0: No effect.
1: Changes PendSV exception state to pending.
Read:
0: PendSV exception is not pending.
1: PendSV exception is pending.
Writing a 1 to this bit is the only way to set the PendSV exception state to pending.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
225
• PENDSVCLR: PendSV Clear-pending
Write:
0: No effect.
1: Removes the pending state from the PendSV exception.
• PENDSTSET: SysTick Exception Set-pending
Write:
0: No effect.
1: Changes SysTick exception state to pending.
Read:
0: SysTick exception is not pending.
1: SysTick exception is pending.
• PENDSTCLR: SysTick Exception Clear-pending
Write:
0: No effect.
1: Removes the pending state from the SysTick exception.
This bit is Write-only. On a register read, its value is Unknown.
• ISRPENDING: Interrupt Pending Flag (Excluding NMI and Faults)
0: Interrupt not pending.
1: Interrupt pending.
• VECTPENDING: Exception Number of the Highest Priority Pending Enabled Exception
0: No pending exceptions.
Nonzero: The exception number of the highest priority pending enabled exception.
The value indicated by this field includes the effect of the BASEPRI and FAULTMASK registers, but not any effect of the
PRIMASK register.
• RETTOBASE: Preempted Active Exceptions Present or Not
0: There are preempted active exceptions to execute.
1: There are no active exceptions, or the currently-executing exception is the only active exception.
• VECTACTIVE: Active Exception Number Contained
0: Thread mode.
Nonzero: The exception number of the currently active exception. The value is the same as IPSR bits [8:0]. See “Interrupt
Program Status Register”.
Subtract 16 from this value to obtain the IRQ number required to index into the Interrupt Clear-Enable, Set-Enable, ClearPending, Set-Pending, or Priority Registers, see “Interrupt Program Status Register”.
Note: When the user writes to the SCB_ICSR, the effect is unpredictable if:
- Writing a 1 to the PENDSVSET bit and writing a 1 to the PENDSVCLR bit
- Writing a 1 to the PENDSTSET bit and writing a 1 to the PENDSTCLR bit.
226
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.9.1.4
Vector Table Offset Register
Name:
SCB_VTOR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
TBLOFF
23
22
21
20
TBLOFF
15
14
13
12
TBLOFF
7
TBLOFF
6
–
5
–
4
–
The SCB_VTOR indicates the offset of the vector table base address from memory address 0x00000000.
• TBLOFF: Vector Table Base Offset
It contains bits [29:7] of the offset of the table base from the bottom of the memory map.
Bit [29] determines whether the vector table is in the code or SRAM memory region:
0: Code.
1: SRAM.
It is sometimes called the TBLBASE bit.
Note: When setting TBLOFF, the offset must be aligned to the number of exception entries in the vector table. Configure the next
statement to give the information required for your implementation; the statement reminds the user of how to determine the
alignment requirement. The minimum alignment is 32 words, enough for up to 16 interrupts. For more interrupts, adjust the
alignment by rounding up to the next power of two. For example, if 21 interrupts are required, the alignment must be on a 64-word
boundary because the required table size is 37 words, and the next power of two is 64.
Table alignment requirements mean that bits[6:0] of the table offset are always zero.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
227
12.9.1.5
Application Interrupt and Reset Control Register
Name:
SCB_AIRCR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
VECTKEYSTAT/VECTKEY
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
VECTKEYSTAT/VECTKEY
18
17
16
15
ENDIANNESS
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
9
PRIGROUP
8
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
1
0
SYSRESETREQ VECTCLRACTIVE
VECTRESET
The SCB_AIRCR provides priority grouping control for the exception model, endian status for data accesses, and reset
control of the system. To write to this register, write 0x5FA to the VECTKEY field, otherwise the processor ignores the
write.
• VECTKEYSTAT: Register Key (Read)
Reads as 0xFA05.
• VECTKEY: Register Key (Write)
Writes 0x5FA to VECTKEY, otherwise the write is ignored.
• ENDIANNESS: Data Endianness
0: Little-endian.
1: Big-endian.
• PRIGROUP: Interrupt Priority Grouping
This field determines the split of group priority from subpriority. It shows the position of the binary point that splits the PRI_n
fields in the Interrupt Priority Registers into separate group priority and subpriority fields. The table below shows how the
PRIGROUP value controls this split.
Interrupt Priority Level Value, PRI_N[7:0]
Number of
PRIGROUP
Binary Point (1)
Group Priority Bits
Subpriority Bits
Group Priorities
Subpriorities
0b000
bxxxxxxx.y
[7:1]
None
128
2
0b001
bxxxxxx.yy
[7:2]
[4:0]
64
4
0b010
bxxxxx.yyy
[7:3]
[4:0]
32
8
0b011
bxxxx.yyyy
[7:4]
[4:0]
16
16
0b100
bxxx.yyyyy
[7:5]
[4:0]
8
32
0b101
bxx.yyyyyy
[7:6]
[5:0]
4
64
0b110
bx.yyyyyyy
[7]
[6:0]
2
128
0b111
b.yyyyyyy
None
[7:0]
1
256
Note:
1. PRI_n[7:0] field showing the binary point. x denotes a group priority field bit, and y denotes a subpriority field bit.
Determining preemption of an exception uses only the group priority field.
228
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
• SYSRESETREQ: System Reset Request
0: No system reset request.
1: Asserts a signal to the outer system that requests a reset.
This is intended to force a large system reset of all major components except for debug. This bit reads as 0.
• VECTCLRACTIVE: Reserved for Debug use
This bit reads as 0. When writing to the register, write a 0 to this bit, otherwise the behavior is unpredictable.
• VECTRESET: Reserved for Debug use
This bit reads as 0. When writing to the register, write a 0 to this bit, otherwise the behavior is unpredictable.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
229
12.9.1.6
System Control Register
Name:
SCB_SCR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
SEVONPEND
3
–
2
SLEEPDEEP
1
SLEEPONEXIT
0
–
• SEVONPEND: Send Event on Pending Bit
0: Only enabled interrupts or events can wake up the processor; disabled interrupts are excluded.
1: Enabled events and all interrupts, including disabled interrupts, can wake up the processor.
When an event or an interrupt enters the pending state, the event signal wakes up the processor from WFE. If the processor is not waiting for an event, the event is registered and affects the next WFE.
The processor also wakes up on execution of an SEV instruction or an external event.
• SLEEPDEEP: Sleep or Deep Sleep
Controls whether the processor uses sleep or deep sleep as its low power mode:
0: Sleep.
1: Deep sleep.
• SLEEPONEXIT: Sleep-on-exit
Indicates sleep-on-exit when returning from the Handler mode to the Thread mode:
0: Do not sleep when returning to Thread mode.
1: Enter sleep, or deep sleep, on return from an ISR.
Setting this bit to 1 enables an interrupt-driven application to avoid returning to an empty main application.
230
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.9.1.7
Configuration and Control Register
Name:
SCB_CCR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
STKALIGN
8
BFHFNMIGN
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
DIV_0_TRP
UNALIGN_TRP
–
NONBASETHRDE
USERSETMPEND
NA
The SCB_CCR controls the entry to the Thread mode and enables the handlers for NMI, hard fault and faults escalated by
FAULTMASK to ignore BusFaults. It also enables the division by zero and unaligned access trapping, and the access to
the NVIC_STIR by unprivileged software (see “Software Trigger Interrupt Register”).
• STKALIGN: Stack Alignment
Indicates the stack alignment on exception entry:
0: 4-byte aligned.
1: 8-byte aligned.
On exception entry, the processor uses bit [9] of the stacked PSR to indicate the stack alignment. On return from the
exception, it uses this stacked bit to restore the correct stack alignment.
• BFHFNMIGN: Bus Faults Ignored
Enables handlers with priority -1 or -2 to ignore data bus faults caused by load and store instructions. This applies to the
hard fault and FAULTMASK escalated handlers:
0: Data bus faults caused by load and store instructions cause a lock-up.
1: Handlers running at priority -1 and -2 ignore data bus faults caused by load and store instructions.
Set this bit to 1 only when the handler and its data are in absolutely safe memory. The normal use of this bit is to probe system devices and bridges to detect control path problems and fix them.
• DIV_0_TRP: Division by Zero Trap
Enables faulting or halting when the processor executes an SDIV or UDIV instruction with a divisor of 0:
0: Do not trap divide by 0.
1: Trap divide by 0.
When this bit is set to 0, a divide by zero returns a quotient of 0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
231
• UNALIGN_TRP: Unaligned Access Trap
Enables unaligned access traps:
0: Do not trap unaligned halfword and word accesses.
1: Trap unaligned halfword and word accesses.
If this bit is set to 1, an unaligned access generates a usage fault.
Unaligned LDM, STM, LDRD, and STRD instructions always fault irrespective of whether UNALIGN_TRP is set to 1.
• USERSETMPEND: Unprivileged Software Access
Enables unprivileged software access to the NVIC_STIR, see “Software Trigger Interrupt Register”:
0: Disable.
1: Enable.
• NONBASETHRDENA: Thread Mode Enable
Indicates how the processor enters Thread mode:
0: The processor can enter the Thread mode only when no exception is active.
1: The processor can enter the Thread mode from any level under the control of an EXC_RETURN value, see “Exception
Return”.
232
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.9.1.8
System Handler Priority Registers
The SCB_SHPR1–SCB_SHPR3 registers set the priority level, 0 to 15 of the exception handlers that have configurable priority. They are byte-accessible.
The system fault handlers and the priority field and register for each handler are:
Table 12-34.
System Fault Handler Priority Fields
Handler
Field
Memory management fault (MemManage)
PRI_4
Bus fault (BusFault)
PRI_5
Usage fault (UsageFault)
PRI_6
SVCall
PRI_11
PendSV
PRI_14
SysTick
PRI_15
Register Description
System Handler Priority Register 1
System Handler Priority Register 2
System Handler Priority Register 3
Each PRI_N field is 8 bits wide, but the processor implements only bits [7:4] of each field, and bits [3:0] read as zero and
ignore writes.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
233
12.9.1.9
System Handler Priority Register 1
Name:
SCB_SHPR1
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
23
22
21
20
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
PRI_6
15
14
13
12
PRI_5
7
6
5
4
PRI_4
• PRI_6: Priority
Priority of system handler 6, UsageFault.
• PRI_5: Priority
Priority of system handler 5, BusFault.
• PRI_4: Priority
Priority of system handler 4, MemManage.
234
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.9.1.10
System Handler Priority Register 2
Name:
SCB_SHPR2
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
PRI_11
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
• PRI_11: Priority
Priority of system handler 11, SVCall.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
235
12.9.1.11
System Handler Priority Register 3
Name:
SCB_SHPR3
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
PRI_15
23
22
21
20
PRI_14
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
• PRI_15: Priority
Priority of system handler 15, SysTick exception.
• PRI_14: Priority
Priority of system handler 14, PendSV.
236
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.9.1.12
System Handler Control and State Register
Name:
SCB_SHCSR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
15
14
13
12
11
SVCALLPENDED
7
SVCALLACT
26
–
5
–
4
–
24
–
18
17
16
USGFAULTENA BUSFAULTENA MEMFAULTENA
BUSFAULTPEND MEMFAULTPEND USGFAULTPEND
SYSTICKACT
ED
ED
ED
6
–
25
–
3
USGFAULTACT
10
9
8
PENDSVACT
–
MONITORACT
2
–
1
0
BUSFAULTACT MEMFAULTACT
The SHCSR enables the system handlers, and indicates the pending status of the bus fault, memory management fault,
and SVC exceptions; it also indicates the active status of the system handlers.
• USGFAULTENA: Usage Fault Enable
0: Disables the exception.
1: Enables the exception.
• BUSFAULTENA: Bus Fault Enable
0: Disables the exception.
1: Enables the exception.
• MEMFAULTENA: Memory Management Fault Enable
0: Disables the exception.
1: Enables the exception.
• SVCALLPENDED: SVC Call Pending
Read:
0: The exception is not pending.
1: The exception is pending.
Note: The user can write to these bits to change the pending status of the exceptions.
• BUSFAULTPENDED: Bus Fault Exception Pending
Read:
0: The exception is not pending.
1: The exception is pending.
Note: The user can write to these bits to change the pending status of the exceptions.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
237
• MEMFAULTPENDED: Memory Management Fault Exception Pending
Read:
0: The exception is not pending.
1: The exception is pending.
Note: The user can write to these bits to change the pending status of the exceptions.
• USGFAULTPENDED: Usage Fault Exception Pending
Read:
0: The exception is not pending.
1: The exception is pending.
Note: The user can write to these bits to change the pending status of the exceptions.
• SYSTICKACT: SysTick Exception Active
Read:
0: The exception is not active.
1: The exception is active.
Note: The user can write to these bits to change the active status of the exceptions.
- Caution: A software that changes the value of an active bit in this register without a correct adjustment to the stacked content
can cause the processor to generate a fault exception. Ensure that the software writing to this register retains and subsequently
restores the current active status.
- Caution: After enabling the system handlers, to change the value of a bit in this register, the user must use a read-modify-write
procedure to ensure that only the required bit is changed.
• PENDSVACT: PendSV Exception Active
0: The exception is not active.
1: The exception is active.
• MONITORACT: Debug Monitor Active
0: Debug monitor is not active.
1: Debug monitor is active.
• SVCALLACT: SVC Call Active
0: SVC call is not active.
1: SVC call is active.
• USGFAULTACT: Usage Fault Exception Active
0: Usage fault exception is not active.
1: Usage fault exception is active.
• BUSFAULTACT: Bus Fault Exception Active
0: Bus fault exception is not active.
1: Bus fault exception is active.
238
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
• MEMFAULTACT: Memory Management Fault Exception Active
0: Memory management fault exception is not active.
1: Memory management fault exception is active.
If the user disables a system handler and the corresponding fault occurs, the processor treats the fault as a hard fault.
The user can write to this register to change the pending or active status of system exceptions. An OS kernel can write to
the active bits to perform a context switch that changes the current exception type.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
239
12.9.1.13
Configurable Fault Status Register
Name:
SCB_CFSR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
DIVBYZERO
24
UNALIGNED
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
NOCP
18
INVPC
17
INVSTATE
16
UNDEFINSTR
15
BFARVALID
14
–
13
LSPERR
12
STKERR
11
UNSTKERR
10
IMPRECISERR
9
PRECISERR
8
IBUSERR
7
MMARVALID
6
–
4
MSTKERR
3
MUNSTKERR
2
–
1
DACCVIOL
0
IACCVIOL
5
MLSPERR
• IACCVIOL: Instruction Access Violation Flag
This is part of “MMFSR: Memory Management Fault Status Subregister”.
0: No instruction access violation fault.
1: The processor attempted an instruction fetch from a location that does not permit execution.
This fault occurs on any access to an XN region, even when the MPU is disabled or not present.
When this bit is 1, the PC value stacked for the exception return points to the faulting instruction. The processor has not
written a fault address to the SCB_MMFAR.
• DACCVIOL: Data Access Violation Flag
This is part of “MMFSR: Memory Management Fault Status Subregister”.
0: No data access violation fault.
1: The processor attempted a load or store at a location that does not permit the operation.
When this bit is 1, the PC value stacked for the exception return points to the faulting instruction. The processor has loaded
the SCB_MMFAR with the address of the attempted access.
• MUNSTKERR: Memory Manager Fault on Unstacking for a Return From Exception
This is part of “MMFSR: Memory Management Fault Status Subregister”.
0: No unstacking fault.
1: Unstack for an exception return has caused one or more access violations.
This fault is chained to the handler. This means that when this bit is 1, the original return stack is still present. The processor has not adjusted the SP from the failing return, and has not performed a new save. The processor has not written a
fault address to the SCB_MMFAR.
• MSTKERR: Memory Manager Fault on Stacking for Exception Entry
This is part of “MMFSR: Memory Management Fault Status Subregister”.
0: No stacking fault.
1: Stacking for an exception entry has caused one or more access violations.
When this bit is 1, the SP is still adjusted but the values in the context area on the stack might be incorrect. The processor
has not written a fault address to SCB_MMFAR.
240
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
• MLSPERR: MemManage During Lazy State Preservation
This is part of “MMFSR: Memory Management Fault Status Subregister”.
0: No MemManage fault occurred during the floating-point lazy state preservation.
1: A MemManage fault occurred during the floating-point lazy state preservation.
• MMARVALID: Memory Management Fault Address Register (SCB_MMFAR) Valid Flag
This is part of “MMFSR: Memory Management Fault Status Subregister”.
0: The value in SCB_MMFAR is not a valid fault address.
1: SCB_MMFAR holds a valid fault address.
If a memory management fault occurs and is escalated to a hard fault because of priority, the hard fault handler must set
this bit to 0. This prevents problems on return to a stacked active memory management fault handler whose SCB_MMFAR
value has been overwritten.
• IBUSERR: Instruction Bus Error
This is part of “BFSR: Bus Fault Status Subregister”.
0: No instruction bus error.
1: Instruction bus error.
The processor detects the instruction bus error on prefetching an instruction, but it sets the IBUSERR flag to 1 only if it
attempts to issue the faulting instruction.
When the processor sets this bit to 1, it does not write a fault address to the BFAR.
• PRECISERR: Precise Data Bus Error
This is part of “BFSR: Bus Fault Status Subregister”.
0: No precise data bus error.
1: A data bus error has occurred, and the PC value stacked for the exception return points to the instruction that caused
the fault.
When the processor sets this bit to 1, it writes the faulting address to the SCB_BFAR.
• IMPRECISERR: Imprecise Data Bus Error
This is part of “BFSR: Bus Fault Status Subregister”.
0: No imprecise data bus error.
1: A data bus error has occurred, but the return address in the stack frame is not related to the instruction that caused the
error.
When the processor sets this bit to 1, it does not write a fault address to the SCB_BFAR.
This is an asynchronous fault. Therefore, if it is detected when the priority of the current process is higher than the bus fault
priority, the bus fault becomes pending and becomes active only when the processor returns from all higher priority processes. If a precise fault occurs before the processor enters the handler for the imprecise bus fault, the handler detects
that both this bit and one of the precise fault status bits are set to 1.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
241
• UNSTKERR: Bus Fault on Unstacking for a Return From Exception
This is part of “BFSR: Bus Fault Status Subregister”.
0: No unstacking fault.
1: Unstack for an exception return has caused one or more bus faults.
This fault is chained to the handler. This means that when the processor sets this bit to 1, the original return stack is still
present. The processor does not adjust the SP from the failing return, does not performed a new save, and does not write
a fault address to the BFAR.
• STKERR: Bus Fault on Stacking for Exception Entry
This is part of “BFSR: Bus Fault Status Subregister”.
0: No stacking fault.
1: Stacking for an exception entry has caused one or more bus faults.
When the processor sets this bit to 1, the SP is still adjusted but the values in the context area on the stack might be incorrect. The processor does not write a fault address to the SCB_BFAR.
• LSPERR: Bus Error During Lazy Floating-point State Preservation
This is part of “BFSR: Bus Fault Status Subregister”.
0: No bus fault occurred during floating-point lazy state preservation
1: A bus fault occurred during floating-point lazy state preservation.
• BFARVALID: Bus Fault Address Register (BFAR) Valid flag
This is part of “BFSR: Bus Fault Status Subregister”.
0: The value in SCB_BFAR is not a valid fault address.
1: SCB_BFAR holds a valid fault address.
The processor sets this bit to 1 after a bus fault where the address is known. Other faults can set this bit to 0, such as a
memory management fault occurring later.
If a bus fault occurs and is escalated to a hard fault because of priority, the hard fault handler must set this bit to 0. This
prevents problems if returning to a stacked active bus fault handler whose SCB_BFAR value has been overwritten.
• UNDEFINSTR: Undefined Instruction Usage Fault
This is part of “UFSR: Usage Fault Status Subregister”.
0: No undefined instruction usage fault.
1: The processor has attempted to execute an undefined instruction.
When this bit is set to 1, the PC value stacked for the exception return points to the undefined instruction.
An undefined instruction is an instruction that the processor cannot decode.
• INVSTATE: Invalid State Usage Fault
This is part of “UFSR: Usage Fault Status Subregister”.
0: No invalid state usage fault.
1: The processor has attempted to execute an instruction that makes illegal use of the EPSR.
When this bit is set to 1, the PC value stacked for the exception return points to the instruction that attempted the illegal
use of the EPSR.
This bit is not set to 1 if an undefined instruction uses the EPSR.
242
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
• INVPC: Invalid PC Load Usage Fault
This is part of “UFSR: Usage Fault Status Subregister”. It is caused by an invalid PC load by EXC_RETURN:
0: No invalid PC load usage fault.
1: The processor has attempted an illegal load of EXC_RETURN to the PC, as a result of an invalid context, or an invalid
EXC_RETURN value.
When this bit is set to 1, the PC value stacked for the exception return points to the instruction that tried to perform the illegal load of the PC.
• NOCP: No Coprocessor Usage Fault
This is part of “UFSR: Usage Fault Status Subregister”. The processor does not support coprocessor instructions:
0: No usage fault caused by attempting to access a coprocessor.
1: The processor has attempted to access a coprocessor.
• UNALIGNED: Unaligned Access Usage Fault
This is part of “UFSR: Usage Fault Status Subregister”.
0: No unaligned access fault, or unaligned access trapping not enabled.
1: The processor has made an unaligned memory access.
Enable trapping of unaligned accesses by setting the UNALIGN_TRP bit in the SCB_CCR to 1. See “Configuration and
Control Register”. Unaligned LDM, STM, LDRD, and STRD instructions always fault irrespective of the setting of
UNALIGN_TRP.
• DIVBYZERO: Divide by Zero Usage Fault
This is part of “UFSR: Usage Fault Status Subregister”.
0: No divide by zero fault, or divide by zero trapping not enabled.
1: The processor has executed an SDIV or UDIV instruction with a divisor of 0.
When the processor sets this bit to 1, the PC value stacked for the exception return points to the instruction that performed
the divide by zero. Enable trapping of divide by zero by setting the DIV_0_TRP bit in the SCB_CCR to 1. See “Configuration and Control Register”.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
243
12.9.1.14
Configurable Fault Status Register (Byte Access)
Name:
SCB_CFSR (BYTE)
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
UFSR
23
22
21
20
UFSR
15
14
13
12
BFSR
7
6
5
4
MMFSR
• MMFSR: Memory Management Fault Status Subregister
The flags in the MMFSR subregister indicate the cause of memory access faults. See bitfield [7..0] description in Section
12.9.1.13.
• BFSR: Bus Fault Status Subregister
The flags in the BFSR subregister indicate the cause of a bus access fault. See bitfield [14..8] description in Section
12.9.1.13.
• UFSR: Usage Fault Status Subregister
The flags in the UFSR subregister indicate the cause of a usage fault. See bitfield [31..15] description in Section 12.9.1.13.
Note: The UFSR bits are sticky. This means that as one or more fault occurs, the associated bits are set to 1. A bit that is set to 1 is
cleared to 0 only by wrting a 1 to that bit, or by a reset.
The SCB_CFSR indicates the cause of a memory management fault, bus fault, or usage fault. It is byte accessible. The
user can access the SCB_CFSR or its subregisters as follows:
• Access complete SCB_CFSR with a word access to 0xE000ED28
• Access MMFSR with a byte access to 0xE000ED28
• Access MMFSR and BFSR with a halfword access to 0xE000ED28
• Access BFSR with a byte access to 0xE000ED29
• Access UFSR with a halfword access to 0xE000ED2A.
244
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.9.1.15
Hard Fault Status Register
Name:
SCB_HFSR
Access:
Read/Write
31
DEBUGEVT
30
FORCED
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
VECTTBL
0
–
The SCB_HFSR gives information about events that activate the hard fault handler. This register is read, write to clear.
This means that bits in the register read normally, but wrting a 1 to any bit clears that bit to 0.
• DEBUGEVT: Reserved for Debug Use
When writing to the register, write a 0 to this bit, otherwise the behavior is unpredictable.
• FORCED: Forced Hard Fault
It indicates a forced hard fault, generated by escalation of a fault with configurable priority that cannot be handles, either
because of priority or because it is disabled:
0: No forced hard fault.
1: Forced hard fault.
When this bit is set to 1, the hard fault handler must read the other fault status registers to find the cause of the fault.
• VECTTBL: Bus Fault on a Vector Table
It indicates a bus fault on a vector table read during an exception processing:
0: No bus fault on vector table read.
1: Bus fault on vector table read.
This error is always handled by the hard fault handler.
When this bit is set to 1, the PC value stacked for the exception return points to the instruction that was preempted by the
exception.
Note: The HFSR bits are sticky. This means that, as one or more fault occurs, the associated bits are set to 1. A bit that is set to 1 is
cleared to 0 only by wrting a 1 to that bit, or by a reset.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
245
12.9.1.16
MemManage Fault Address Register
Name:
SCB_MMFAR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
ADDRESS
23
22
21
20
ADDRESS
15
14
13
12
ADDRESS
7
6
5
4
ADDRESS
The SCB_MMFAR contains the address of the location that generated a memory management fault.
• ADDRESS: Memory Management Fault Generation Location Address
When the MMARVALID bit of the MMFSR subregister is set to 1, this field holds the address of the location that generated
the memory management fault.
Notes:
246
1. When an unaligned access faults, the address is the actual address that faulted. Because a single read or write instruction
can be split into multiple aligned accesses, the fault address can be any address in the range of the requested access size.
2. Flags in the MMFSR subregister indicate the cause of the fault, and whether the value in the SCB_MMFAR is valid. See
“MMFSR: Memory Management Fault Status Subregister”.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.9.1.17
Bus Fault Address Register
Name:
SCB_BFAR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
ADDRESS
23
22
21
20
ADDRESS
15
14
13
12
ADDRESS
7
6
5
4
ADDRESS
The SCB_BFAR contains the address of the location that generated a bus fault.
• ADDRESS: Bus Fault Generation Location Address
When the BFARVALID bit of the BFSR subregister is set to 1, this field holds the address of the location that generated the
bus fault.
Notes:
1. When an unaligned access faults, the address in the SCB_BFAR is the one requested by the instruction, even if it is not the
address of the fault.
2. Flags in the BFSR indicate the cause of the fault, and whether the value in the SCB_BFAR is valid. See “BFSR: Bus Fault
Status Subregister”.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
247
12.10 System Timer (SysTick)
The processor has a 24-bit system timer, SysTick, that counts down from the reload value to zero, reloads (wraps
to) the value in the SYST_RVR on the next clock edge, then counts down on subsequent clocks.
When the processor is halted for debugging, the counter does not decrement.
The SysTick counter runs on the processor clock. If this clock signal is stopped for low power mode, the SysTick
counter stops.
Ensure that the software uses aligned word accesses to access the SysTick registers.
The SysTick counter reload and current value are undefined at reset; the correct initialization sequence for the
SysTick counter is:
1. Program the reload value.
248
2.
Clear the current value.
3.
Program the Control and Status register.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.10.1 System Timer (SysTick) User Interface
Table 12-35.
System Timer (SYST) Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0xE000E010
SysTick Control and Status Register
SYST_CSR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE000E014
SysTick Reload Value Register
SYST_RVR
Read/Write
Unknown
0xE000E018
SysTick Current Value Register
SYST_CVR
Read/Write
Unknown
0xE000E01C
SysTick Calibration Value Register
SYST_CALIB
Read-only
0x00001770
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
249
12.10.1.1
SysTick Control and Status Register
Name:
SYST_CSR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
COUNTFLAG
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
CLKSOURCE
1
TICKINT
0
ENABLE
The SysTick SYST_CSR enables the SysTick features.
• COUNTFLAG: Count Flag
Returns 1 if the timer counted to 0 since the last time this was read.
• CLKSOURCE: Clock Source
Indicates the clock source:
0: External Clock.
1: Processor Clock.
• TICKINT: SysTick Exception Request Enable
Enables a SysTick exception request:
0: Counting down to zero does not assert the SysTick exception request.
1: Counting down to zero asserts the SysTick exception request.
The software can use COUNTFLAG to determine if SysTick has ever counted to zero.
• ENABLE: Counter Enable
Enables the counter:
0: Counter disabled.
1: Counter enabled.
When ENABLE is set to 1, the counter loads the RELOAD value from the SYST_RVR and then counts down. On reaching
0, it sets the COUNTFLAG to 1 and optionally asserts the SysTick depending on the value of TICKINT. It then loads the
RELOAD value again, and begins counting.
250
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.10.1.2
SysTick Reload Value Registers
Name:
SYST_RVR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
23
22
21
20
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RELOAD
15
14
13
12
RELOAD
7
6
5
4
RELOAD
The SYST_RVR specifies the start value to load into the SYST_CVR.
• RELOAD: SYST_CVR Load Value
Value to load into the SYST_CVR when the counter is enabled and when it reaches 0.
The RELOAD value can be any value in the range 0x00000001–0x00FFFFFF. A start value of 0 is possible, but has no
effect because the SysTick exception request and COUNTFLAG are activated when counting from 1 to 0.
The RELOAD value is calculated according to its use: For example, to generate a multi-shot timer with a period of N processor clock cycles, use a RELOAD value of N-1. If the SysTick interrupt is required every 100 clock pulses, set RELOAD
to 99.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
251
12.10.1.3
SysTick Current Value Register
Name:
SYST_CVR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
23
22
21
20
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CURRENT
15
14
13
12
CURRENT
7
6
5
4
CURRENT
The SysTick SYST_CVR contains the current value of the SysTick counter.
• CURRENT: SysTick Counter Current Value
Reads return the current value of the SysTick counter.
A write of any value clears the field to 0, and also clears the SYST_CSR.COUNTFLAG bit to 0.
252
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.10.1.4
SysTick Calibration Value Register
Name:
SYST_CALIB
Access:
Read/Write
31
NOREF
30
SKEW
29
–
28
–
23
22
21
20
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
TENMS
15
14
13
12
TENMS
7
6
5
4
TENMS
The SysTick SYST_CSR indicates the SysTick calibration properties.
• NOREF: No Reference Clock
It indicates whether the device provides a reference clock to the processor:
0: Reference clock provided.
1: No reference clock provided.
If your device does not provide a reference clock, the SYST_CSR.CLKSOURCE bit reads-as-one and ignores writes.
• SKEW: TENMS Value Verification
It indicates whether the TENMS value is exact:
0: TENMS value is exact.
1: TENMS value is inexact, or not given.
An inexact TENMS value can affect the suitability of SysTick as a software real time clock.
• TENMS: Ten Milliseconds
The reload value for 10 ms (100 Hz) timing is subject to system clock skew errors. If the value reads as zero, the calibration value is not known.
The TENMS field default value is 0x00001770 (6000 decimal).
In order to achieve a 1 ms timebase on SystTick, the TENMS field must be programmed to a value corresponding to the
processor clock frequency (in kHz) divided by 8.
For example, for devices running the processor clock at 48 MHz, the TENMS field value must be 0x0001770
(48000 kHz/8).
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
253
12.11 Memory Protection Unit (MPU)
The MPU divides the memory map into a number of regions, and defines the location, size, access permissions,
and memory attributes of each region. It supports:
Independent attribute settings for each region
Overlapping regions
Export of memory attributes to the system.
The memory attributes affect the behavior of memory accesses to the region. The Cortex-M4 MPU defines:
Eight separate memory regions, 0–7
A background region.
When memory regions overlap, a memory access is affected by the attributes of the region with the highest
number. For example, the attributes for region 7 take precedence over the attributes of any region that overlaps
region 7.
The background region has the same memory access attributes as the default memory map, but is accessible
from privileged software only.
The Cortex-M4 MPU memory map is unified. This means that instruction accesses and data accesses have the
same region settings.
If a program accesses a memory location that is prohibited by the MPU, the processor generates a memory
management fault. This causes a fault exception, and might cause the termination of the process in an OS
environment.
In an OS environment, the kernel can update the MPU region setting dynamically based on the process to be
executed. Typically, an embedded OS uses the MPU for memory protection.
The configuration of MPU regions is based on memory types (see “Memory Regions, Types and Attributes”).
Table 12-36 shows the possible MPU region attributes. These include Share ability and cache behavior attributes
that are not relevant to most microcontroller implementations. See “MPU Configuration for a Microcontroller” for
guidelines for programming such an implementation.
Table 12-36.
Memory Attributes Summary
Memory Type
Shareability
Other Attributes
Description
Strongly-ordered
–
–
All accesses to Strongly-ordered memory occur in program order. All
Strongly-ordered regions are assumed to be shared.
Shared
–
Memory-mapped peripherals that several processors share.
Non-shared
–
Memory-mapped peripherals that only a single processor uses.
Shared
–
Normal memory that is shared between several processors.
Non-shared
–
Normal memory that only a single processor uses.
Device
Normal
254
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.11.1 MPU Access Permission Attributes
This section describes the MPU access permission attributes. The access permission bits (TEX, C, B, S, AP, and
XN) of the MPU_RASR control the access to the corresponding memory region. If an access is made to an area of
memory without the required permissions, then the MPU generates a permission fault.
The table below shows the encodings for the TEX, C, B, and S access permission bits.
Table 12-37.
TEX
C
0
TEX, C, B, and S Encoding
B
S
(1)
0
x
1
x (1)
Memory Type
Shareability
Other Attributes
Strongly-ordered
Shareable
–
Device
Shareable
–
Normal
Not
shareable
0
0
b000
1
Shareable
0
Not
shareable
Outer and inner write-through. No
write allocate.
1
1
0
Normal
1
Shareable
0
Not
shareable
0
Normal
1
x (1)
Reserved encoding
–
0
x (1)
Implementation defined
attributes.
–
1
0
1
Normal
1
A
1.
Not
shareable
x (1)
Device
1
x (1)
Reserved encoding
–
(1)
Reserved encoding
–
x
(1)
x
A
Normal
1
Note:
Outer and inner write-back. Write and
read allocate.
0
0
b1BB
Not
shareable
Shareable
0
1
–
Shareable
1
b001
b010
Outer and inner write-back. No write
allocate.
Not
shareable
Nonshared Device.
–
Shareable
The MPU ignores the value of this bit.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
255
Table 12-38 shows the cache policy for memory attribute encodings with a TEX value is in the range 4–7.
Table 12-38.
Cache Policy for Memory Attribute Encoding
Encoding, AA or BB
Corresponding Cache Policy
00
Non-cacheable
01
Write back, write and read allocate
10
Write through, no write allocate
11
Write back, no write allocate
Table 12-39 shows the AP encodings that define the access permissions for privileged and unprivileged software.
Table 12-39.
12.11.1.1
AP Encoding
AP[2:0]
Privileged
Permissions
Unprivileged
Permissions
Description
000
No access
No access
All accesses generate a permission fault
001
RW
No access
Access from privileged software only
010
RW
RO
Writes by unprivileged software generate a permission
fault
011
RW
RW
Full access
100
Unpredictable
Unpredictable
Reserved
101
RO
No access
Reads by privileged software only
110
RO
RO
Read only, by privileged or unprivileged software
111
RO
RO
Read only, by privileged or unprivileged software
MPU Mismatch
When an access violates the MPU permissions, the processor generates a memory management fault, see
“Exceptions and Interrupts”. The MMFSR indicates the cause of the fault. See “MMFSR: Memory Management
Fault Status Subregister” for more information.
12.11.1.2
Updating an MPU Region
To update the attributes for an MPU region, update the MPU_RNR, MPU_RBAR and MPU_RASRs. Each register
can be programed separately, or a multiple-word write can be used to program all of these registers. MPU_RBAR
and MPU_RASR aliases can be used to program up to four regions simultaneously using an STM instruction.
12.11.1.3
Updating an MPU Region Using Separate Words
Simple code to configure one region:
; R1 = region number
; R2 = size/enable
; R3 = attributes
; R4 = address
LDR R0,=MPU_RNR
STR R1, [R0, #0x0]
STR R4, [R0, #0x4]
STRH R2, [R0, #0x8]
STRH R3, [R0, #0xA]
256
;
;
;
;
;
0xE000ED98, MPU region number register
Region Number
Region Base Address
Region Size and Enable
Region Attribute
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Disable a region before writing new region settings to the MPU, if the region being changed was previously
enabled. For example:
; R1 = region number
; R2 = size/enable
; R3 = attributes
; R4 = address
LDR R0,=MPU_RNR
; 0xE000ED98, MPU region number register
STR R1, [R0, #0x0]
; Region Number
BIC R2, R2, #1
; Disable
STRH R2, [R0, #0x8]
; Region Size and Enable
STR R4, [R0, #0x4]
; Region Base Address
STRH R3, [R0, #0xA]
; Region Attribute
ORR R2, #1
; Enable
STRH R2, [R0, #0x8]
; Region Size and Enable
The software must use memory barrier instructions:
Before the MPU setup, if there might be outstanding memory transfers, such as buffered writes, that might
be affected by the change in MPU settings
After the MPU setup, if it includes memory transfers that must use the new MPU settings.
However, memory barrier instructions are not required if the MPU setup process starts by entering an exception
handler, or is followed by an exception return, because the exception entry and exception return mechanisms
cause memory barrier behavior.
The software does not need any memory barrier instructions during an MPU setup, because it accesses the MPU
through the PPB, which is a Strongly-Ordered memory region.
For example, if the user wants all of the memory access behavior to take effect immediately after the programming
sequence, a DSB instruction and an ISB instruction must be used. A DSB is required after changing MPU settings,
such as at the end of a context switch. An ISB is required if the code that programs the MPU region or regions is
entered using a branch or call. If the programming sequence is entered using a return from exception, or by taking
an exception, then an ISB is not required.
12.11.1.4
Updating an MPU Region Using Multi-word Writes
The user can program directly using multi-word writes, depending on how the information is divided. Consider the
following reprogramming:
; R1 = region number
; R2 = address
; R3 = size, attributes in one
LDR R0, =MPU_RNR
; 0xE000ED98, MPU region number register
STR R1, [R0, #0x0] ; Region Number
STR R2, [R0, #0x4] ; Region Base Address
STR R3, [R0, #0x8] ; Region Attribute, Size and Enable
Use an STM instruction to optimize this:
; R1 = region number
; R2 = address
; R3 = size, attributes in one
LDR R0, =MPU_RNR
; 0xE000ED98, MPU region number register
STM R0, {R1-R3}
; Region Number, address, attribute, size and enable
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
257
This can be done in two words for pre-packed information. This means that the MPU_RBAR contains the required
region number and had the VALID bit set to 1. See “MPU Region Base Address Register”. Use this when the data
is statically packed, for example in a boot loader:
; R1 = address and region number in one
; R2 = size and attributes in one
LDR R0, =MPU_RBAR
; 0xE000ED9C, MPU Region Base register
STR R1, [R0, #0x0] ; Region base address and
; region number combined with VALID (bit 4) set to 1
STR R2, [R0, #0x4] ; Region Attribute, Size and Enable
Use an STM instruction to optimize this:
; R1 = address and region number in one
; R2 = size and attributes in one
LDR R0,=MPU_RBAR
; 0xE000ED9C, MPU Region Base register
STM R0, {R1-R2}
; Region base address, region number and VALID bit,
; and Region Attribute, Size and Enable
12.11.1.5
Subregions
Regions of 256 bytes or more are divided into eight equal-sized subregions. Set the corresponding bit in the SRD
field of the MPU_RASR field to disable a subregion. See “MPU Region Attribute and Size Register”. The least
significant bit of SRD controls the first subregion, and the most significant bit controls the last subregion. Disabling
a subregion means another region overlapping the disabled range matches instead. If no other enabled region
overlaps the disabled subregion, the MPU issues a fault.
Regions of 32, 64, and 128 bytes do not support subregions. With regions of these sizes, the SRD field must be
set to 0x00, otherwise the MPU behavior is unpredictable.
12.11.1.6
Example of SRD Use
Two regions with the same base address overlap. Region 1 is 128 KB, and region 2 is 512 KB. To ensure the
attributes from region 1 apply to the first 128 KB region, set the SRD field for region 2 to b00000011 to disable the
first two subregions, as in Figure 12-13 below:
Figure 12-13. SRD Use
Region 2, with
subregions
Region 1
Base address of both regions
12.11.1.7
Offset from
base address
512KB
448KB
384KB
320KB
256KB
192KB
128KB
Disabled subregion
64KB
Disabled subregion
0
MPU Design Hints And Tips
To avoid unexpected behavior, disable the interrupts before updating the attributes of a region that the interrupt
handlers might access.
Ensure the software uses aligned accesses of the correct size to access MPU registers:
Except for the MPU_RASR, it must use aligned word accesses
For the MPU_RASR, it can use byte or aligned halfword or word accesses.
The processor does not support unaligned accesses to MPU registers.
258
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
When setting up the MPU, and if the MPU has previously been programmed, disable unused regions to prevent
any previous region settings from affecting the new MPU setup.
MPU Configuration for a Microcontroller
Usually, a microcontroller system has only a single processor and no caches. In such a system, program the MPU
as follows:
Table 12-40.
Memory Region Attributes for a Microcontroller
Memory Region
TEX
C
B
S
Memory Type and Attributes
Flash memory
b000
1
0
0
Normal memory, non-shareable, write-through
Internal SRAM
b000
1
0
1
Normal memory, shareable, write-through
External SRAM
b000
1
1
1
Normal memory, shareable, write-back, write-allocate
Peripherals
b000
0
1
1
Device memory, shareable
In most microcontroller implementations, the shareability and cache policy attributes do not affect the system
behavior. However, using these settings for the MPU regions can make the application code more portable. The
values given are for typical situations. In special systems, such as multiprocessor designs or designs with a
separate DMA engine, the shareability attribute might be important. In these cases, refer to the recommendations
of the memory device manufacturer.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
259
12.11.2 Memory Protection Unit (MPU) User Interface
Table 12-41.
Memory Protection Unit (MPU) Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0xE000ED90
MPU Type Register
MPU_TYPE
Read-only
0x00000800
0xE000ED94
MPU Control Register
MPU_CTRL
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE000ED98
MPU Region Number Register
MPU_RNR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE000ED9C
MPU Region Base Address Register
MPU_RBAR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE000EDA0
MPU Region Attribute and Size Register
MPU_RASR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE000EDA4
MPU Region Base Address Register Alias 1
MPU_RBAR_A1
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE000EDA8
MPU Region Attribute and Size Register Alias 1
MPU_RASR_A1
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE000EDAC
MPU Region Base Address Register Alias 2
MPU_RBAR_A2
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE000EDB0
MPU Region Attribute and Size Register Alias 2
MPU_RASR_A2
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE000EDB4
MPU Region Base Address Register Alias 3
MPU_RBAR_A3
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE000EDB8
MPU Region Attribute and Size Register Alias 3
MPU_RASR_A3
Read/Write
0x00000000
260
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.11.2.1
MPU Type Register
Name:
MPU_TYPE
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
23
22
21
20
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
SEPARATE
IREGION
15
14
13
12
DREGION
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
The MPU_TYPE register indicates whether the MPU is present, and if so, how many regions it supports.
• IREGION: Instruction Region
Indicates the number of supported MPU instruction regions.
Always contains 0x00. The MPU memory map is unified and is described by the DREGION field.
• DREGION: Data Region
Indicates the number of supported MPU data regions:
0x08 = Eight MPU regions.
• SEPARATE: Separate Instruction
Indicates support for unified or separate instruction and date memory maps:
0: Unified.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
261
12.11.2.2
MPU Control Register
Name:
MPU_CTRL
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
PRIVDEFENA
1
HFNMIENA
0
ENABLE
The MPU CTRL register enables the MPU, enables the default memory map background region, and enables the use of
the MPU when in the hard fault, Non-maskable Interrupt (NMI), and FAULTMASK escalated handlers.
• PRIVDEFENA: Privileged Default Memory Map Enable
Enables privileged software access to the default memory map:
0: If the MPU is enabled, disables the use of the default memory map. Any memory access to a location not covered by
any enabled region causes a fault.
1: If the MPU is enabled, enables the use of the default memory map as a background region for privileged software
accesses.
When enabled, the background region acts as a region number -1. Any region that is defined and enabled has priority over
this default map.
If the MPU is disabled, the processor ignores this bit.
• HFNMIENA: Hard Fault and NMI Enable
Enables the operation of MPU during hard fault, NMI, and FAULTMASK handlers.
When the MPU is enabled:
0: MPU is disabled during hard fault, NMI, and FAULTMASK handlers, regardless of the value of the ENABLE bit.
1: The MPU is enabled during hard fault, NMI, and FAULTMASK handlers.
When the MPU is disabled, if this bit is set to 1, the behavior is unpredictable.
• ENABLE: MPU Enable
Enables the MPU:
0: MPU disabled.
1: MPU enabled.
When ENABLE and PRIVDEFENA are both set to 1:
• For privileged accesses, the default memory map is as described in “Memory Model”. Any access by privileged
software that does not address an enabled memory region behaves as defined by the default memory map.
• Any access by unprivileged software that does not address an enabled memory region causes a memory management
fault.
262
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
XN and Strongly-ordered rules always apply to the System Control Space regardless of the value of the ENABLE bit.
When the ENABLE bit is set to 1, at least one region of the memory map must be enabled for the system to function unless
the PRIVDEFENA bit is set to 1. If the PRIVDEFENA bit is set to 1 and no regions are enabled, then only privileged software can operate.
When the ENABLE bit is set to 0, the system uses the default memory map. This has the same memory attributes as if the
MPU is not implemented. The default memory map applies to accesses from both privileged and unprivileged software.
When the MPU is enabled, accesses to the System Control Space and vector table are always permitted. Other areas are
accessible based on regions and whether PRIVDEFENA is set to 1.
Unless HFNMIENA is set to 1, the MPU is not enabled when the processor is executing the handler for an exception with
priority –1 or –2. These priorities are only possible when handling a hard fault or NMI exception, or when FAULTMASK is
enabled. Setting the HFNMIENA bit to 1 enables the MPU when operating with these two priorities.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
263
12.11.2.3
MPU Region Number Register
Name:
MPU_RNR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
REGION
The MPU_RNR selects which memory region is referenced by the MPU_RBAR and MPU_RASRs.
• REGION: MPU Region Referenced by the MPU_RBAR and MPU_RASRs
Indicates the MPU region referenced by the MPU_RBAR and MPU_RASRs.
The MPU supports 8 memory regions, so the permitted values of this field are 0–7.
Normally, the required region number is written to this register before accessing the MPU_RBAR or MPU_RASR. However, the region number can be changed by writing to the MPU_RBAR with the VALID bit set to 1; see “MPU Region Base
Address Register”. This write updates the value of the REGION field.
264
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.11.2.4
MPU Region Base Address Register
Name:
MPU_RBAR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
ADDR
23
22
21
20
ADDR
15
14
13
12
ADDR
7
6
ADDR
5
4
VALID
REGION
The MPU_RBAR defines the base address of the MPU region selected by the MPU_RNR, and can update the value of the
MPU_RNR.
Write MPU_RBAR with the VALID bit set to 1 to change the current region number and update the MPU_RNR.
• ADDR: Region Base Address
Software must ensure that the value written to the ADDR field aligns with the size of the selected region (SIZE field in the
MPU_RASR).
If the region size is configured to 4 GB, in the MPU_RASR, there is no valid ADDR field. In this case, the region occupies
the complete memory map, and the base address is 0x00000000.
The base address is aligned to the size of the region. For example, a 64 KB region must be aligned on a multiple of 64 KB,
for example, at 0x00010000 or 0x00020000.
• VALID: MPU Region Number Valid
Write:
0: MPU_RNR not changed, and the processor updates the base address for the region specified in the MPU_RNR, and
ignores the value of the REGION field.
1: The processor updates the value of the MPU_RNR to the value of the REGION field, and updates the base address for
the region specified in the REGION field.
Always reads as zero.
• REGION: MPU Region
For the behavior on writes, see the description of the VALID field.
On reads, returns the current region number, as specified by the MPU_RNR.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
265
12.11.2.5
MPU Region Attribute and Size Register
Name:
MPU_RASR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
XN
27
–
26
25
AP
24
23
–
22
–
21
20
TEX
19
18
S
17
C
16
B
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
SIZE
2
1
0
ENABLE
SRD
7
–
6
–
5
4
The MPU_RASR defines the region size and memory attributes of the MPU region specified by the MPU_RNR, and
enables that region and any subregions.
MPU_RASR is accessible using word or halfword accesses:
• The most significant halfword holds the region attributes.
• The least significant halfword holds the region size, and the region and subregion enable bits.
• XN: Instruction Access Disable
0: Instruction fetches enabled.
1: Instruction fetches disabled.
• AP: Access Permission
See Table 12-39.
• TEX, C, B: Memory Access Attributes
See Table 12-37.
• S: Shareable
See Table 12-37.
• SRD: Subregion Disable
For each bit in this field:
0: Corresponding subregion is enabled.
1: Corresponding subregion is disabled.
See “Subregions” for more information.
Region sizes of 128 bytes and less do not support subregions. When writing the attributes for such a region, write the SRD
field as 0x00.
266
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
• SIZE: Size of the MPU Protection Region
The minimum permitted value is 3 (b00010).
The SIZE field defines the size of the MPU memory region specified by the MPU_RNR. as follows:
(Region size in bytes) = 2(SIZE+1)
The smallest permitted region size is 32B, corresponding to a SIZE value of 4. The table below gives an example of SIZE
values, with the corresponding region size and value of N in the MPU_RBAR.
SIZE Value
Region Size
Value of N (1)
Note
b00100 (4)
32 B
5
Minimum permitted size
b01001 (9)
1 KB
10
–
b10011 (19)
1 MB
20
–
b11101 (29)
1 GB
30
–
b11111 (31)
4 GB
b01100
Maximum possible size
Note:
1. In the MPU_RBAR; see “MPU Region Base Address Register”
• ENABLE: Region Enable
Note: For information about access permission, see “MPU Access Permission Attributes”.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
267
12.11.2.6
MPU Region Base Address Register Alias 1
Name:
MPU_RBAR_A1
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
ADDR
23
22
21
20
ADDR
15
14
13
12
ADDR
7
6
ADDR
5
4
VALID
REGION
The MPU_RBAR defines the base address of the MPU region selected by the MPU_RNR, and can update the value of the
MPU_RNR.
Write MPU_RBAR with the VALID bit set to 1 to change the current region number and update the MPU_RNR.
• ADDR: Region Base Address
Software must ensure that the value written to the ADDR field aligns with the size of the selected region.
The value of N depends on the region size. The ADDR field is bits[31:N] of the MPU_RBAR. The region size, as specified
by the SIZE field in the MPU_RASR, defines the value of N:
N = Log2(Region size in bytes),
If the region size is configured to 4 GB, in the MPU_RASR, there is no valid ADDR field. In this case, the region occupies
the complete memory map, and the base address is 0x00000000.
The base address is aligned to the size of the region. For example, a 64 KB region must be aligned on a multiple of 64 KB,
for example, at 0x00010000 or 0x00020000.
• VALID: MPU Region Number Valid
Write:
0: MPU_RNR not changed, and the processor updates the base address for the region specified in the MPU_RNR, and
ignores the value of the REGION field.
1: The processor updates the value of the MPU_RNR to the value of the REGION field, and updates the base address for
the region specified in the REGION field.
Always reads as zero.
• REGION: MPU Region
For the behavior on writes, see the description of the VALID field.
On reads, returns the current region number, as specified by the MPU_RNR.
268
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.11.2.7
MPU Region Attribute and Size Register Alias 1
Name:
MPU_RASR_A1
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
23
30
–
29
–
28
XN
27
–
26
25
AP
24
22
21
20
TEX
19
18
S
17
C
16
B
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
SIZE
2
1
0
ENABLE
–
15
SRD
7
–
6
–
5
4
The MPU_RASR defines the region size and memory attributes of the MPU region specified by the MPU_RNR, and
enables that region and any subregions.
MPU_RASR is accessible using word or halfword accesses:
• The most significant halfword holds the region attributes.
• The least significant halfword holds the region size, and the region and subregion enable bits.
• XN: Instruction Access Disable
0: Instruction fetches enabled.
1: Instruction fetches disabled.
• AP: Access Permission
See Table 12-39.
• TEX, C, B: Memory Access Attributes
See Table 12-37.
• S: Shareable
See Table 12-37.
• SRD: Subregion Disable
For each bit in this field:
0: Corresponding subregion is enabled.
1: Corresponding subregion is disabled.
See “Subregions” for more information.
Region sizes of 128 bytes and less do not support subregions. When writing the attributes for such a region, write the SRD
field as 0x00.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
269
• SIZE: Size of the MPU Protection Region
The minimum permitted value is 3 (b00010).
The SIZE field defines the size of the MPU memory region specified by the MPU_RNR. as follows:
(Region size in bytes) = 2(SIZE+1)
The smallest permitted region size is 32B, corresponding to a SIZE value of 4. The table below gives an example of SIZE
values, with the corresponding region size and value of N in the MPU_RBAR.
SIZE Value
Region Size
Value of N (1)
Note
b00100 (4)
32 B
5
Minimum permitted size
b01001 (9)
1 KB
10
–
b10011 (19)
1 MB
20
–
b11101 (29)
1 GB
30
–
b11111 (31)
4 GB
b01100
Maximum possible size
Note:
1. In the MPU_RBAR; see “MPU Region Base Address Register”
• ENABLE: Region Enable
Note: For information about access permission, see “MPU Access Permission Attributes”.
270
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.11.2.8
MPU Region Base Address Register Alias 2
Name:
MPU_RBAR_A2
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
ADDR
23
22
21
20
ADDR
15
14
13
12
ADDR
7
6
ADDR
5
4
VALID
REGION
The MPU_RBAR defines the base address of the MPU region selected by the MPU_RNR, and can update the value of the
MPU_RNR.
Write MPU_RBAR with the VALID bit set to 1 to change the current region number and update the MPU_RNR.
• ADDR: Region Base Address
Software must ensure that the value written to the ADDR field aligns with the size of the selected region.
The value of N depends on the region size. The ADDR field is bits[31:N] of the MPU_RBAR. The region size, as specified
by the SIZE field in the MPU_RASR, defines the value of N:
N = Log2(Region size in bytes),
If the region size is configured to 4 GB, in the MPU_RASR, there is no valid ADDR field. In this case, the region occupies
the complete memory map, and the base address is 0x00000000.
The base address is aligned to the size of the region. For example, a 64 KB region must be aligned on a multiple of 64 KB,
for example, at 0x00010000 or 0x00020000.
• VALID: MPU Region Number Valid
Write:
0: MPU_RNR not changed, and the processor updates the base address for the region specified in the MPU_RNR, and
ignores the value of the REGION field.
1: The processor updates the value of the MPU_RNR to the value of the REGION field, and updates the base address for
the region specified in the REGION field.
Always reads as zero.
• REGION: MPU Region
For the behavior on writes, see the description of the VALID field.
On reads, returns the current region number, as specified by the MPU_RNR.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
271
12.11.2.9
MPU Region Attribute and Size Register Alias 2
Name:
MPU_RASR_A2
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
XN
27
–
26
25
AP
24
23
–
22
–
21
20
TEX
19
18
S
17
C
16
B
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
SIZE
2
1
0
ENABLE
SRD
7
–
6
–
5
4
The MPU_RASR defines the region size and memory attributes of the MPU region specified by the MPU_RNR, and
enables that region and any subregions.
MPU_RASR is accessible using word or halfword accesses:
• The most significant halfword holds the region attributes.
• The least significant halfword holds the region size, and the region and subregion enable bits.
• XN: Instruction Access Disable
0: Instruction fetches enabled.
1: Instruction fetches disabled.
• AP: Access Permission
See Table 12-39.
• TEX, C, B: Memory Access Attributes
See Table 12-37.
• S: Shareable
See Table 12-37.
• SRD: Subregion Disable
For each bit in this field:
0: Corresponding subregion is enabled.
1: Corresponding subregion is disabled.
See “Subregions” for more information.
Region sizes of 128 bytes and less do not support subregions. When writing the attributes for such a region, write the SRD
field as 0x00.
272
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
• SIZE: Size of the MPU Protection Region
The minimum permitted value is 3 (b00010).
The SIZE field defines the size of the MPU memory region specified by the MPU_RNR. as follows:
(Region size in bytes) = 2(SIZE+1)
The smallest permitted region size is 32B, corresponding to a SIZE value of 4. The table below gives an example of SIZE
values, with the corresponding region size and value of N in the MPU_RBAR.
SIZE Value
Region Size
Value of N (1)
Note
b00100 (4)
32 B
5
Minimum permitted size
b01001 (9)
1 KB
10
–
b10011 (19)
1 MB
20
–
b11101 (29)
1 GB
30
–
b11111 (31)
4 GB
b01100
Maximum possible size
Note:
1. In the MPU_RBAR; see “MPU Region Base Address Register”
• ENABLE: Region Enable
Note: For information about access permission, see “MPU Access Permission Attributes”.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
273
12.11.2.10
MPU Region Base Address Register Alias 3
Name:
MPU_RBAR_A3
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
ADDR
23
22
21
20
ADDR
15
14
13
12
ADDR
7
6
ADDR
5
4
VALID
REGION
The MPU_RBAR defines the base address of the MPU region selected by the MPU_RNR, and can update the value of the
MPU_RNR.
Write MPU_RBAR with the VALID bit set to 1 to change the current region number and update the MPU_RNR.
• ADDR: Region Base Address
Software must ensure that the value written to the ADDR field aligns with the size of the selected region.
The value of N depends on the region size. The ADDR field is bits[31:N] of the MPU_RBAR. The region size, as specified
by the SIZE field in the MPU_RASR, defines the value of N:
N = Log2(Region size in bytes),
If the region size is configured to 4 GB, in the MPU_RASR, there is no valid ADDR field. In this case, the region occupies
the complete memory map, and the base address is 0x00000000.
The base address is aligned to the size of the region. For example, a 64 KB region must be aligned on a multiple of 64 KB,
for example, at 0x00010000 or 0x00020000.
• VALID: MPU Region Number Valid
Write:
0: MPU_RNR not changed, and the processor updates the base address for the region specified in the MPU_RNR, and
ignores the value of the REGION field.
1: The processor updates the value of the MPU_RNR to the value of the REGION field, and updates the base address for
the region specified in the REGION field.
Always reads as zero.
• REGION: MPU Region
For the behavior on writes, see the description of the VALID field.
On reads, returns the current region number, as specified by the MPU_RNR.
274
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.11.2.11
MPU Region Attribute and Size Register Alias 3
Name:
MPU_RASR_A3
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
XN
27
–
26
25
AP
24
23
–
22
–
21
20
TEX
19
18
S
17
C
16
B
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
SIZE
2
1
0
ENABLE
SRD
7
–
6
–
5
4
The MPU_RASR defines the region size and memory attributes of the MPU region specified by the MPU_RNR, and
enables that region and any subregions.
MPU_RASR is accessible using word or halfword accesses:
• The most significant halfword holds the region attributes.
• The least significant halfword holds the region size, and the region and subregion enable bits.
• XN: Instruction Access Disable
0: Instruction fetches enabled.
1: Instruction fetches disabled.
• AP: Access Permission
See Table 12-39.
• TEX, C, B: Memory Access Attributes
See Table 12-37.
• S: Shareable
See Table 12-37.
• SRD: Subregion Disable
For each bit in this field:
0: Corresponding subregion is enabled.
1: Corresponding subregion is disabled.
See “Subregions” for more information.
Region sizes of 128 bytes and less do not support subregions. When writing the attributes for such a region, write the SRD
field as 0x00.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
275
• SIZE: Size of the MPU Protection Region
The minimum permitted value is 3 (b00010).
The SIZE field defines the size of the MPU memory region specified by the MPU_RNR. as follows:
(Region size in bytes) = 2(SIZE+1)
The smallest permitted region size is 32B, corresponding to a SIZE value of 4. The table below gives an example of SIZE
values, with the corresponding region size and value of N in the MPU_RBAR.
SIZE Value
Region Size
Value of N (1)
Note
b00100 (4)
32 B
5
Minimum permitted size
b01001 (9)
1 KB
10
–
b10011 (19)
1 MB
20
–
b11101 (29)
1 GB
30
–
b11111 (31)
4 GB
b01100
Maximum possible size
Note:
1. In the MPU_RBAR; see “MPU Region Base Address Register”
• ENABLE: Region Enable
Note: For information about access permission, see “MPU Access Permission Attributes”.
276
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.12 Floating Point Unit (FPU)
The Cortex-M4F FPU implements the FPv4-SP floating-point extension.
The FPU fully supports single-precision add, subtract, multiply, divide, multiply and accumulate, and square root
operations. It also provides conversions between fixed-point and floating-point data formats, and floating-point
constant instructions.
The FPU provides floating-point computation functionality that is compliant with the ANSI/IEEE Std 754-2008,
IEEE Standard for Binary Floating-Point Arithmetic, referred to as the IEEE 754 standard.
The FPU contains 32 single-precision extension registers, which can also be accessed as 16 doubleword registers
for load, store, and move operations.
12.12.1 Enabling the FPU
The FPU is disabled from reset. It must be enabled before any floating-point instructions can be used. Example 41 shows an example code sequence for enabling the FPU in both privileged and user modes. The processor must
be in privileged mode to read from and write to the CPACR.
Example of Enabling the FPU:
; CPACR is located at address 0xE000ED88
LDR.W R0, =0xE000ED88
; Read CPACR
LDR R1, [R0]
; Set bits 20-23 to enable CP10 and CP11 coprocessors
ORR R1, R1, #(0xF << 20)
; Write back the modified value to the CPACR
STR R1, [R0]; wait for store to complete
DSB
;reset pipeline now the FPU is enabled
ISB
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
277
12.12.2 Floating Point Unit (FPU) User Interface
Table 12-42.
Floating Point Unit (FPU) Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0xE000ED88
Coprocessor Access Control Register
CPACR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE000EF34
Floating-point Context Control Register
FPCCR
Read/Write
0xC0000000
0xE000EF38
Floating-point Context Address Register
FPCAR
Read/Write
–
–
Floating-point Status Control Register
FPSCR
Read/Write
–
0xE000E01C
Floating-point Default Status Control Register
FPDSCR
Read/Write
0x00000000
278
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.12.2.1
Coprocessor Access Control Register
Name:
CPACR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
23
30
–
29
–
22
21
CP11
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
20
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
CP10
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
The CPACR specifies the access privileges for coprocessors.
• CP10: Access Privileges for Coprocessor 10
The possible values of each field are:
0: Access denied. Any attempted access generates a NOCP UsageFault.
1: Privileged access only. An unprivileged access generates a NOCP fault.
2: Reserved. The result of any access is unpredictable.
3: Full access.
• CP11: Access Privileges for Coprocessor 11
The possible values of each field are:
0: Access denied. Any attempted access generates a NOCP UsageFault.
1: Privileged access only. An unprivileged access generates a NOCP fault.
2: Reserved. The result of any access is unpredictable.
3: Full access.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
279
12.12.2.2
Floating-point Context Control Register
Name:
FPCCR
Access:
Read/Write
31
ASPEN
30
LSPEN
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
MONRDY
7
–
6
BFRDY
5
MMRDY
4
HFRDY
3
THREAD
2
–
1
USER
0
LSPACT
The FPCCR sets or returns FPU control data.
• ASPEN: Automatic Hardware State Preservation And Restoration
Enables CONTROL bit [2] setting on execution of a floating-point instruction. This results in an automatic hardware state
preservation and restoration, for floating-point context, on exception entry and exit.
0: Disable CONTROL bit [2] setting on execution of a floating-point instruction.
1: Enable CONTROL bit [2] setting on execution of a floating-point instruction.
• LSPEN: Automatic Lazy State Preservation
0: Disable automatic lazy state preservation for floating-point context.
1: Enable automatic lazy state preservation for floating-point context.
• MONRDY: Debug Monitor Ready
0: DebugMonitor is disabled or the priority did not permit to set MON_PEND when the floating-point stack frame was
allocated.
1: DebugMonitor is enabled and the priority permitted to set MON_PEND when the floating-point stack frame was
allocated.
• BFRDY: Bus Fault Ready
0: BusFault is disabled or the priority did not permit to set the BusFault handler to the pending state when the floating-point
stack frame was allocated.
1: BusFault is enabled and the priority permitted to set the BusFault handler to the pending state when the floating-point
stack frame was allocated.
• MMRDY: Memory Management Ready
0: MemManage is disabled or the priority did not permit to set the MemManage handler to the pending state when the floating-point stack frame was allocated.
1: MemManage is enabled and the priority permitted to set the MemManage handler to the pending state when the floating-point stack frame was allocated.
280
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
• HFRDY: Hard Fault Ready
0: The priority did not permit to set the HardFault handler to the pending state when the floating-point stack frame was
allocated.
1: The priority permitted to set the HardFault handler to the pending state when the floating-point stack frame was
allocated.
• THREAD: Thread Mode
0: The mode was not the Thread Mode when the floating-point stack frame was allocated.
1: The mode was the Thread Mode when the floating-point stack frame was allocated.
• USER: User Privilege Level
0: The privilege level was not User when the floating-point stack frame was allocated.
1: The privilege level was User when the floating-point stack frame was allocated.
• LSPACT: Lazy State Preservation Active
0: The lazy state preservation is not active.
1: The lazy state preservation is active. The floating-point stack frame has been allocated but saving the state to it has
been deferred.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
281
12.12.2.3
Floating-point Context Address Register
Name:
FPCAR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
–
1
–
0
–
ADDRESS
23
22
21
20
ADDRESS
15
14
13
12
ADDRESS
7
6
5
ADDRESS
4
The FPCAR holds the location of the unpopulated floating-point register space allocated on an exception stack frame.
• ADDRESS: Location of Unpopulated Floating-point Register Space Allocated on an Exception Stack Frame
The location of the unpopulated floating-point register space allocated on an exception stack frame.
282
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.12.2.4
Floating-point Status Control Register
Name:
FPSCR
Access:
Read/Write
31
N
30
Z
29
C
28
V
27
–
26
AHP
25
DN
24
FZ
22
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
IDC
6
–
5
–
4
IXC
3
UFC
2
OFC
1
DZC
0
IOC
23
RMode
The FPSCR provides all necessary User level control of the floating-point system.
• N: Negative Condition Code Flag
Floating-point comparison operations update this flag.
• Z: Zero Condition Code Flag
Floating-point comparison operations update this flag.
• C: Carry Condition Code Flag
Floating-point comparison operations update this flag.
• V: Overflow Condition Code Flag
Floating-point comparison operations update this flag.
• AHP: Alternative Half-precision Control
0: IEEE half-precision format selected.
1: Alternative half-precision format selected.
• DN: Default NaN Mode Control
0: NaN operands propagate through to the output of a floating-point operation.
1: Any operation involving one or more NaNs returns the Default NaN.
• FZ: Flush-to-zero Mode Control
0: Flush-to-zero mode disabled. The behavior of the floating-point system is fully compliant with the IEEE 754 standard.
1: Flush-to-zero mode enabled.
• RMode: Rounding Mode Control
The encoding of this field is:
0b00: Round to Nearest (RN) mode
0b01: Round towards Plus Infinity (RP) mode.
0b10: Round towards Minus Infinity (RM) mode.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
283
0b11: Round towards Zero (RZ) mode.
The specified rounding mode is used by almost all floating-point instructions.
• IDC: Input Denormal Cumulative Exception
IDC is a cumulative exception bit for floating-point exception; see also bits [4:0].
This bit is set to 1 to indicate that the corresponding exception has occurred since 0 was last written to it.
• IXC: Inexact Cumulative Exception
IXC is a cumulative exception bit for floating-point exception; see also bit [7].
This bit is set to 1 to indicate that the corresponding exception has occurred since 0 was last written to it.
• UFC: Underflow Cumulative Exception
UFC is a cumulative exception bit for floating-point exception; see also bit [7].
This bit is set to 1 to indicate that the corresponding exception has occurred since 0 was last written to it.
• OFC: Overflow Cumulative Exception
OFC is a cumulative exception bit for floating-point exception; see also bit [7].
This bit is set to 1 to indicate that the corresponding exception has occurred since 0 was last written to it.
• DZC: Division by Zero Cumulative Exception
DZC is a cumulative exception bit for floating-point exception; see also bit [7].
This bit is set to 1 to indicate that the corresponding exception has occurred since 0 was last written to it.
• IOC: Invalid Operation Cumulative Exception
IOC is a cumulative exception bit for floating-point exception; see also bit [7].
This bit is set to 1 to indicate that the corresponding exception has occurred since 0 was last written to it.
284
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
12.12.2.5
Floating-point Default Status Control Register
Name:
FPDSCR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
AHP
25
DN
24
FZ
22
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
23
RMode
The FPDSCR holds the default values for the floating-point status control data.
• AHP: FPSCR.AHP Default Value
Default value for FPSCR.AHP.
• DN: FPSCR.DN Default Value
Default value for FPSCR.DN.
• FZ: FPSCR.FZ Default Value
Default value for FPSCR.FZ.
• RMode: FPSCR.RMode Default Value
Default value for FPSCR.RMode.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
285
12.13 Glossary
This glossary describes some of the terms used in technical documents from ARM.
Abort
A mechanism that indicates to a processor that the value associated with a memory access is invalid.
An abort can be caused by the external or internal memory system as a result of attempting to access
invalid instruction or data memory.
Aligned
A data item stored at an address that is divisible by the number of bytes that defines the data size is
said to be aligned. Aligned words and halfwords have addresses that are divisible by four and two
respectively. The terms word-aligned and halfword-aligned therefore stipulate addresses that are
divisible by four and two respectively.
Banked register
A register that has multiple physical copies, where the state of the processor determines which copy is
used. The Stack Pointer, SP (R13) is a banked register.
Base register
In instruction descriptions, a register specified by a load or store instruction that is used to hold the
base value for the instruction’s address calculation. Depending on the instruction and its addressing
mode, an offset can be added to or subtracted from the base register value to form the address that is
sent to memory.
See also “Index register”.
Big-endian (BE)
Byte ordering scheme in which bytes of decreasing significance in a data word are stored at
increasing addresses in memory.
See also “Byte-invariant”, “Endianness”, “Little-endian (LE)”.
Big-endian memory
Memory in which:
a byte or halfword at a word-aligned address is the most significant byte or halfword within the word at
that address,
a byte at a halfword-aligned address is the most significant byte within the halfword at that address.
See also “Little-endian memory”.
Breakpoint
A breakpoint is a mechanism provided by debuggers to identify an instruction at which program
execution is to be halted. Breakpoints are inserted by the programmer to enable inspection of register
contents, memory locations, variable values at fixed points in the program execution to test that the
program is operating correctly. Breakpoints are removed after the program is successfully tested.
Byte-invariant
In a byte-invariant system, the address of each byte of memory remains unchanged when switching
between little-endian and big-endian operation. When a data item larger than a byte is loaded from or
stored to memory, the bytes making up that data item are arranged into the correct order depending
on the endianness of the memory access.
An ARM byte-invariant implementation also supports unaligned halfword and word memory accesses.
It expects multi-word accesses to be word-aligned.
Condition field
A four-bit field in an instruction that specifies a condition under which the instruction can execute.
286
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Conditional execution
If the condition code flags indicate that the corresponding condition is true when the instruction starts
executing, it executes normally. Otherwise, the instruction does nothing.
Context
The environment that each process operates in for a multitasking operating system. In ARM
processors, this is limited to mean the physical address range that it can access in memory and the
associated memory access permissions.
Coprocessor
A processor that supplements the main processor. Cortex-M4 does not support any coprocessors.
Debugger
A debugging system that includes a program, used to detect, locate, and correct software faults,
together with custom hardware that supports software debugging.
Direct Memory Access
(DMA)
An operation that accesses main memory directly, without the processor performing any accesses to
the data concerned.
Doubleword
A 64-bit data item. The contents are taken as being an unsigned integer unless otherwise stated.
Doubleword-aligned
A data item having a memory address that is divisible by eight.
Endianness
Byte ordering. The scheme that determines the order that successive bytes of a data word are stored
in memory. An aspect of the system’s memory mapping.
See also “Little-endian (LE)” and “Big-endian (BE)”.
Exception
An event that interrupts program execution. When an exception occurs, the processor suspends the
normal program flow and starts execution at the address indicated by the corresponding exception
vector. The indicated address contains the first instruction of the handler for the exception.
An exception can be an interrupt request, a fault, or a software-generated system exception. Faults
include attempting an invalid memory access, attempting to execute an instruction in an invalid
processor state, and attempting to execute an undefined instruction.
Exception service routine
See “Interrupt handler”.
Exception vector
See “Interrupt vector”.
Flat address mapping
A system of organizing memory in which each physical address in the memory space is the same as
the corresponding virtual address.
Halfword
A 16-bit data item.
Illegal instruction
An instruction that is architecturally Undefined.
Implementation-defined
The behavior is not architecturally defined, but is defined and documented by individual
implementations.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
287
Implementation-specific
The behavior is not architecturally defined, and does not have to be documented by individual
implementations. Used when there are a number of implementation options available and the option
chosen does not affect software compatibility.
Index register
In some load and store instruction descriptions, the value of this register is used as an offset to be
added to or subtracted from the base register value to form the address that is sent to memory. Some
addressing modes optionally enable the index register value to be shifted prior to the addition or
subtraction.
See also “Base register”.
Instruction cycle count
The number of cycles that an instruction occupies the Execute stage of the pipeline.
Interrupt handler
A program that control of the processor is passed to when an interrupt occurs.
Interrupt vector
One of a number of fixed addresses in low memory, or in high memory if high vectors are configured,
that contains the first instruction of the corresponding interrupt handler.
Little-endian (LE)
Byte ordering scheme in which bytes of increasing significance in a data word are stored at increasing
addresses in memory.
See also “Big-endian (BE)”, “Byte-invariant”, “Endianness”.
Little-endian memory
Memory in which:
a byte or halfword at a word-aligned address is the least significant byte or halfword within the word at
that address,
a byte at a halfword-aligned address is the least significant byte within the halfword at that address.
See also “Big-endian memory”.
Load/store architecture
A processor architecture where data-processing operations only operate on register contents, not
directly on memory contents.
Memory Protection Unit
(MPU)
Hardware that controls access permissions to blocks of memory. An MPU does not perform any
address translation.
Prefetching
In pipelined processors, the process of fetching instructions from memory to fill up the pipeline before
the preceding instructions have finished executing. Prefetching an instruction does not mean that the
instruction has to be executed.
Preserved
Preserved by writing the same value back that has been previously read from the same field on the
same processor.
Read
Reads are defined as memory operations that have the semantics of a load. Reads include the Thumb
instructions LDM, LDR, LDRSH, LDRH, LDRSB, LDRB, and POP.
288
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Region
A partition of memory space.
Reserved
A field in a control register or instruction format is reserved if the field is to be defined by the
implementation, or produces Unpredictable results if the contents of the field are not zero. These fields
are reserved for use in future extensions of the architecture or are implementation-specific. All
reserved bits not used by the implementation must be written as 0 and read as 0.
Thread-safe
In a multi-tasking environment, thread-safe functions use safeguard mechanisms when accessing
shared resources, to ensure correct operation without the risk of shared access conflicts.
Thumb instruction
One or two halfwords that specify an operation for a processor to perform. Thumb instructions must be
halfword-aligned.
Unaligned
A data item stored at an address that is not divisible by the number of bytes that defines the data size
is said to be unaligned. For example, a word stored at an address that is not divisible by four.
Undefined
Indicates an instruction that generates an Undefined instruction exception.
Unpredictable
One cannot rely on the behavior. Unpredictable behavior must not represent security holes.
Unpredictable behavior must not halt or hang the processor, or any parts of the system.
Warm reset
Also known as a core reset. Initializes the majority of the processor excluding the debug controller and
debug logic. This type of reset is useful if debugging features of a processor.
Word
A 32-bit data item.
Write
Writes are defined as operations that have the semantics of a store. Writes include the Thumb
instructions STM, STR, STRH, STRB, and PUSH.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
289
13.
Debug and Test Features
13.1
Description
The SAM G53 features a number of complementary debug and test capabilities. The Serial Wire/JTAG Debug Port
(SWJ-DP) combining a Serial Wire Debug Port (SW-DP) and JTAG Debug Port (JTAG-DP) is used for standard
debugging functions, such as downloading code and single-stepping through programs. It also embeds a serial
wire trace.
13.2
Embedded Characteristics
Debug access to all memories and registers in the system, including Cortex-M4 register bank when the core
is running, halted or in sleep state, or held in reset.
Serial Wire Debug Port (SW-DP) and Serial Wire JTAG Debug Port (SWJ-DP) debug access.
Flash Patch and Breakpoint (FPB) unit for implementing breakpoints and code patches.
Data Watchpoint and Trace (DWT) unit for implementing watchpoints, data tracing, and system profiling.
Instrumentation Trace Macrocell (ITM) for support of printf style debugging.
IEEE1149.1 JTAG Boundary-scan on all digital pins.
Figure 13-1.
Debug and Test Block Diagram
TMS
TCK/SWCLK
TDI
Boundary
TAP
JTAGSEL
SWJ-DP
TDO/TRACESWO
Reset
and
Test
290
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
POR
TST
13.3
Application Examples
13.3.1 Debug Environment
Figure 13-2 shows a complete debug environment example. The SWJ-DP interface is used for standard
debugging functions, such as downloading code and single-stepping through the program, and viewing core and
peripheral registers.
Figure 13-2.
Application Debug Environment Example
Host Debugger
PC
SWJ-DP
Emulator/Probe
SWJ-DP
Connector
SAM4
SAM4-based Application Board
13.3.2 Test Environment
Figure 13-3 shows a test environment example (JTAG boundary scan). Test vectors are sent and interpreted by
the tester. In this example, the “board in test” is designed using a number of JTAG-compliant devices. These
devices can be connected to form a single scan chain.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
291
Figure 13-3.
Application Test Environment Example
Test Adaptor
Tester
JTAG
Probe
JTAG
Connector
Chip n
SAM4
Chip 2
Chip 1
SAM4-based Application Board In Test
13.4
Debug and Test Pin Description
Table 13-1.
Debug and Test Signal List
Signal Name
Function
Type
Active Level
Input/Output
Low
Reset/Test
NRST
Microcontroller Reset
TST
Test Select
Input
SWD/JTAG
TCK/SWCLK
Test Clock/Serial Wire Clock
Input
TDI
Test Data In
Input
TDO/TRACESWO
Test Data Out/Trace
Asynchronous Data Out
TMS/SWDIO
Test Mode Select/Serial Wire
Input/Output
Input
JTAGSEL
JTAG Selection
Input
Note:
292
1.
Output
(1)
High
TDO pin is set in input mode when the Cortex-M4 Core is not in debug mode. Thus the internal pull-up
corresponding to this PIO line must be enabled to avoid current consumption due to floating input.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
13.5
Functional Description
13.5.1 Test Pin
One dedicated pin, TST, is used to define the device operating mode. When this pin is at low level during powerup, the device is in normal operating mode. When at high level, the device is in test mode or FFPI mode. The TST
pin integrates a permanent pull-down resistor of about 15 kΩ, so that it can be left unconnected for normal
operation. Note that when setting the TST pin to low or high level at power up, it must remain in the same state
during the duration of the whole operation.
13.5.2 NRST Pin
The NRST pin is bidirectional. It is handled by the on-chip reset controller and can be driven low to provide a reset
signal to the external components or asserted low externally to reset the microcontroller. It will reset the Core and
the peripherals except the Backup region (RTC, RTT and Supply Controller). There is no constraint on the length
of the reset pulse and the reset controller can guarantee a minimum pulse length. The NRST pin integrates a
permanent pull-up resistor to VDDIO of about 100 kΩ. By default, the NRST pin is configured as an input.
13.5.3 ERASE Pin
The ERASE pin is used to reinitialize the Flash content (and some of its NVM bits) to an erased state (all bits read
as logic level 1). The ERASE pin ensures an in-situ reprogrammability of the Flash content without the use of a
debug tool. When the security bit is activated, the ERASE pin provides the capability to reprogram the Flash
content. It integrates a pull-down resistor of about 100 kΩ to GND, so that it can be left unconnected for normal
operations.
This pin is debounced by SCLK to improve the glitch tolerance. To avoid unexpected erase at power-up, a
minimum ERASE pin assertion time is required. This time is defined in Table 37-41, “AC Flash Characteristics,” on
page 915.
The ERASE pin is a system I/O pin and can be used as a standard I/O. At startup, the ERASE pin is not configured
as a PIO pin. If the ERASE pin is used as a standard I/O, start-up level of this pin must be low to prevent unwanted
erasing. Also, if the ERASE pin is used as a standard I/O output, asserting the pin to low does not erase the Flash.
For details, please refer to Section 10.16 “Peripherals Signals Multiplexing on I/O Lines”.
13.5.4 Debug Architecture
Figure 13-4 shows the Debug Architecture used in the SAM G53. The Cortex-M4 embeds four functional units for
debug:
SWJ-DP (Serial Wire/JTAG Debug Port).
FPB (Flash Patch Breakpoint.
DWT (Data Watchpoint and Trace).
ITM (Instrumentation Trace Macrocell).
TPIU (Trace Port Interface Unit).
The debug architecture information that follows is mainly dedicated to developers of SWJ-DP emulators/probes
and debugging tool vendors for Cortex M4-based microcontrollers. For further details on SWJ-DP see the Cortex
M4 technical reference manual.
Figure 13-4.
Debug Architecture
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
293
DWT
4 watchpoints
FPB
SWJ-DP
PC sampler
6 breakpoints
data address sampler
SWD/JTAG
ITM
data sampler
software trace
32 channels
interrupt trace
SWO trace
TPIU
time stamping
CPU statistics
13.5.5 Serial Wire/JTAG Debug Port (SWJ-DP)
The Cortex-M4 embeds a SWJ-DP debug port which is the standard CoreSight™ debug port. It combines Serial
Wire Debug Port (SW-DP), from 2 to 3 pins and JTAG Debug Port(JTAG-DP), 5 pins.
By default, the JTAG Debug Port is active. If the host debugger wants to switch to the Serial Wire Debug Port, it
must provide a dedicated JTAG sequence on TMS/SWDIO and TCK/SWCLK which disables JTAG-DP and
enables SW-DP.
When the Serial Wire Debug Port is active, TDO/TRACESWO can be used for trace. The asynchronous TRACE
output (TRACESWO) is multiplexed with TDO. So the asynchronous trace can only be used with SW-DP, not
JTAG-DP.
Table 13-2.
SWJ-DP Pin List
Pin Name
JTAG Port
Serial Wire Debug Port
TMS/SWDIO
TMS
SWDIO
TCK/SWCLK
TCK
SWCLK
TDI
TDI
-
TDO/TRACESWO
TDO
TRACESWO (optional: trace)
SW-DP or JTAG-DP mode is selected when JTAGSEL is low. It is not possible to switch directly between SWJ-DP
and JTAG boundary scan operations. A chip reset must be performed after JTAGSEL is changed.
13.5.5.1
SW-DP and JTAG-DP Selection Mechanism
Debug port selection mechanism is done by sending specific SWDIOTMS sequence. The JTAG-DP is selected by
default after reset.
Switch from JTAG-DP to SW-DP. The sequence is:
̶
Send more than 50 SWCLKTCK cycles with SWDIOTMS = 1
̶
Send the 16-bit sequence on SWDIOTMS = 0111100111100111 (0x79E7 MSB first)
̶
Send more than 50 SWCLKTCK cycles with SWDIOTMS = 1
Switch from SWD to JTAG. The sequence is:
̶
294
Send more than 50 SWCLKTCK cycles with SWDIOTMS = 1
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
̶
Send the 16-bit sequence on SWDIOTMS = 0011110011100111 (0x3CE7 MSB first)
̶
Send more than 50 SWCLKTCK cycles with SWDIOTMS = 1
13.5.6 FPB (Flash Patch Breakpoint)
The FPB:
Implements hardware breakpoints.
Patches code and data from code space to system space.
The FPB unit contains:
Two literal comparators for matching against literal loads from code space, and remapping to a
corresponding area in system space.
Six instruction comparators for matching against instruction fetches from code space and remapping to a
corresponding area in system space.
Alternatively, comparators can also be configured to generate a breakpoint instruction to the processor core
on a match.
13.5.7 DWT (Data Watchpoint and Trace)
The DWT contains four comparators which can be configured to generate the following:
PC sampling packets at set intervals.
PC or data watchpoint packets.
Watchpoint event to halt core.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
295
The DWT contains counters for the items that follow:
Clock cycle (CYCCNT).
Folded instructions.
Load Store Unit (LSU) operations.
Sleep cycles.
CPI (all instruction cycles except for the first cycle).
Interrupt overhead.
13.5.8 ITM (Instrumentation Trace Macrocell)
The ITM is an application driven trace source that supports printf style debugging to trace Operating System (OS)
and application events, and emits diagnostic system information. The ITM emits trace information as packets
which can be generated by three different sources with several priority levels:
Software trace: Software can write directly to ITM stimulus registers. This can be done thanks to the “printf”
function. For more information, refer to Section 13.5.8.1 “How to Configure the ITM”.
Hardware trace: The ITM emits packets generated by the DWT.
Time stamping: Timestamps are emitted relative to packets. The ITM contains a 21-bit counter to generate
the timestamp.
13.5.8.1
How to Configure the ITM
The following example describes how to output trace data in asynchronous trace mode.
Configure the TPIU for asynchronous trace mode (refer to Section 13.5.8.3 “How to Configure the TPIU”).
Enable the write accesses into the ITM registers by writing “0xC5ACCE55” into the Lock Access Register
(address: 0xE0000FB0).
Write 0x00010015 into the Trace Control Register:
̶
Enable ITM.
̶
Enable synchronization packets.
̶
Enable SWO behavior.
̶
Fix the ATB ID to 1.
Write 0x1 into the Trace Enable Register:
̶
Enable the stimulus port 0.
Write 0x1 into the Trace Privilege Register:
̶
Write into the Stimulus Port 0 Register: TPIU (Trace Port Interface Unit).
̶
̶
13.5.8.2
Stimulus port 0 only accessed in privileged mode (clearing a bit in this register will result in the
corresponding stimulus port being accessible in user mode).
The TPIU acts as a bridge between the on-chip trace data and the Instruction Trace Macrocell (ITM).
The TPIU formats and transmits trace data off-chip at frequencies asynchronous to the core.
Asynchronous Mode
The TPIU is configured in asynchronous mode, trace data are output using the single TRACESWO pin. The
TRACESWO signal is multiplexed with the TDO signal of the JTAG Debug Port. As a consequence, asynchronous
trace mode is only available when the serial wire debug mode is selected since TDO signal is used in JTAG debug
mode.
Two encoding formats are available for the single pin output:
296
Manchester encoded stream. This is the reset value.
NRZ-based UART byte structure.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
13.5.8.3
How to Configure the TPIU
This example only concerns the asynchronous trace mode.
Set the TRCENA bit to 1 into the Debug Exception and Monitor Register (0xE000EDFC) to enable the use of
trace and debug blocks.
Write 0x2 into the Selected Pin Protocol Register.
̶
Select the Serial Wire Output – NRZ.
Write 0x100 into the Formatter and Flush Control Register.
Set the suitable clock prescaler value into the Async Clock Prescaler Register to scale the baud rate of the
asynchronous output (this can be done automatically by the debugging tool).
13.5.9 IEEE 1149.1 JTAG Boundary Scan
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG Boundary Scan allows pin-level access independent of the device packaging technology.
IEEE 1149.1 JTAG Boundary Scan is enabled when TST is tied to low, while JTAG SEL is high during power-up
and must be kept in this state during the whole boundary scan operation. The SAMPLE, EXTEST and BYPASS
functions are implemented. In SWD/JTAG debug mode, the ARM processor responds with a non-JTAG chip ID
that identifies the processor. This is not IEEE 1149.1 JTAG-compliant.
It is not possible to switch directly between JTAG Boundary Scan and SWJ Debug Port operations. A chip reset
must be performed after JTAGSEL is changed. A Boundary-scan Descriptor Language (BSDL) file is provided on
Atmel’s web site to set up the test.
13.5.9.1
JTAG Boundary-scan Register
The Boundary-scan Register (BSR) contains a number of bits which corresponds to active pins and associated
control signals.
Each SAM G53 input/output pin corresponds to a 3-bit register in the BSR. The OUTPUT bit contains data that
can be forced on the pad. The INPUT bit facilitates the observability of data applied to the pad. The CONTROL bit
selects the direction of the pad.
For more information, refer to BSDL files available for the SAMG53 Series.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
297
13.5.10 ID Code Register
Access: Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
VERSION
23
22
26
25
24
PART NUMBER
21
20
19
18
17
16
10
9
8
PART NUMBER
15
14
13
12
11
PART NUMBER
7
6
MANUFACTURER IDENTITY
5
4
3
2
1
MANUFACTURER IDENTITY
• VERSION[31:28]: Product Version Number
Set to 0x0.
• PART NUMBER[27:12]: Product Part Number
Chip Name
Chip ID
SAM G53G19
0X247E_0AE0
SAM G53N19
0X247E_0AE8
• MANUFACTURER IDENTITY[11:1]
Set to 0x01F.
• Bit[0] Required by IEEE Std. 1149.1.
Set to 0x1.
Chip Name
JTAG ID Code
SAM G53
0x05B3_C03F
298
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
0
1
14.
Reset Controller (RSTC)
14.1
Description
The Reset Controller (RSTC), based on power-on reset cells, handles all the resets of the system without any
external components. It reports which reset occurred last.
The Reset Controller also drives independently or simultaneously the external reset and the peripheral and
processor resets.
14.2
Embedded Characteristics
Management of All System Resets, Including
̶
Processor Reset
̶
Processor Peripheral Set Reset
Based on Embedded Power-on Cell
Reset Source Status
14.3
External Devices through the NRST Pin
̶
̶
Status of the Last Reset
̶
Either Software Reset, User Reset, Watchdog Reset
External Reset Signal Shaping
Block Diagram
Figure 14-1.
Reset Controller Block Diagram
Reset Controller
core_backup_reset
rstc_irq
vddcore_nreset
user_reset
NRST
nrst_out
NRST
Manager
Reset
State
Manager
proc_nreset
periph_nreset
exter_nreset
WDRPROC
wd_fault
SLCK
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
299
14.4
Functional Description
14.4.1 Reset Controller Overview
The Reset Controller is made up of an NRST manager and a reset state manager. It runs at slow clock and
generates the following reset signals:
proc_nreset: processor reset line (also resets the Watchdog Timer)
periph_nreset: affects the whole set of embedded peripherals
nrst_out: drives the NRST pin
These reset signals are asserted by the Reset Controller, either on events generated by peripherals, events on
NRST pin, or on software action. The reset state manager controls the generation of reset signals and provides a
signal to the NRST manager when an assertion of the NRST pin is required.
The NRST manager shapes the NRST assertion during a programmable time, thus controlling external device
resets.
The Reset Controller Mode Register (RSTC_MR), used to configure the Reset Controller, is powered with VDDIO,
so that its configuration is saved as long as VDDIO is on.
14.4.2 NRST Manager
The NRST manager samples the NRST input pin and drives this pin low when required by the reset state
manager. Figure 14-2 shows the block diagram of the NRST manager.
Figure 14-2.
NRST Manager
RSTC_MR
URSTIEN
RSTC_SR
URSTS
NRSTL
rstc_irq
RSTC_MR
URSTEN
Other
interrupt
sources
user_reset
NRST
RSTC_MR
ERSTL
nrst_out
14.4.2.1
External Reset Timer
exter_nreset
NRST Signal or Interrupt
The NRST manager samples the NRST pin at slow clock speed. When the line is detected low, a User Reset is
reported to the reset state manager.
However, the NRST manager can be programmed to not trigger a reset when an assertion of NRST occurs.
Writing a 0 to the URSTEN bit in the RSTC_MR disables the User Reset trigger.
The level of the pin NRST can be read at any time in the bit NRSTL (NRST level) in the Reset Controller Status
Register (RSTC_SR). As soon as the NRST pin is asserted, bit URSTS in the RSTC_SR is set. This bit is cleared
only when the RSTC_SR is read.
The Reset Controller can also be programmed to generate an interrupt instead of generating a reset. To do so, set
the URSTIEN bit in the RSTC_MR.
300
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
14.4.2.2
NRST External Reset Control
The reset state manager asserts the signal exter_nreset to assert the NRST pin. When this occurs, the “nrst_out”
signal is driven low by the NRST manager for a time programmed by field ERSTL in the RSTC_MR. This assertion
duration, named External Reset Length, lasts 2(ERSTL+1) slow clock cycles. This gives the approximate duration of
an assertion between 60 µs and 2 seconds. Note that ERSTL at 0 defines a two-cycle duration for the NRST
pulse.
This feature allows the Reset Controller to shape the NRST pin level, and thus to guarantee that the NRST line is
driven low for a time compliant with potential external devices connected on the system reset.
RSTC_MR is backed up, making it possible to use the ERSTL field to shape the system power-up reset for devices
requiring a longer startup time than that of the slow clock oscillator.
14.4.3 Reset States
The reset state manager handles the different reset sources and generates the internal reset signals. It reports the
reset status in field RSTTYP of the Status Register (RSTC_SR). The update of RSTC_SR.RSTTYP is performed
when the processor reset is released.
14.4.3.1
General Reset
A general reset occurs when a VDDIO power-on-reset is detected, a brownout or a voltage regulation loss is
detected by the Supply Controller. The vddcore_nreset signal is asserted by the Supply Controller when a general
reset occurs.
All the reset signals are released and field RSTC_SR.RSTTYP reports a general reset. As the RSTC_MR is reset,
the NRST line rises two cycles after the vddcore_nreset, as ERSTL defaults at value 0x0.
Figure 14-3 shows how the general reset affects the reset signals.
Figure 14-3.
General Reset State
SLCK
Any
Freq.
MCK
vddio_nreset
Processor Startup
= 2 cycles
proc_nreset
RSTTYP
XXX
0x0 = General Reset
XXX
periph_nreset
NRST
(nrst_out)
External Reset Length
= 2 cycles
14.4.3.2
Watchdog Reset
The watchdog reset is entered when a watchdog fault occurs. This reset lasts three slow clock cycles.
When in watchdog reset, assertion of the reset signals depends on the WDRPROC bit in the WDT_MR:
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
301
If WDRPROC = 0, the processor reset and the peripheral reset are asserted. The NRST line is also
asserted, depending on how field RSTC_MR.ERSTL is programmed. However, the resulting low level on
NRST does not result in a user reset state.
If WDRPROC = 1, only the processor reset is asserted.
The Watchdog Timer is reset by the proc_nreset signal. As the watchdog fault always causes a processor reset if
WDRSTEN in the WDT_MR is set, the Watchdog Timer is always reset after a watchdog reset, and the Watchdog
is enabled by default and with a period set to a maximum.
When bit WDT_MR.WDRSTEN is reset, the watchdog fault has no impact on the Reset Controller.
Figure 14-4.
Watchdog Reset
SLCK
MCK
Any
Freq.
wd_fault
Processor Startup
= 2 cycles
proc_nreset
RSTTYP
Any
XXX
0x2 = Watchdog Reset
periph_nreset
Only if
WDRPROC = 0
NRST
(nrst_out)
EXTERNAL RESET LENGTH
8 cycles (ERSTL=2)
14.4.3.3
Software Reset
The Reset Controller offers commands to assert the different reset signals. These commands are performed by
writing the Control Register (RSTC_CR) with the following bits at 1:
RSTC_CR.PROCRST: Writing a 1 to PROCRST resets the processor and the watchdog timer.
RSTC_CR.PERRST: Writing a 1 to PERRST resets all the embedded peripherals including the memory
system, and, in particular, the Remap Command. The Peripheral Reset is generally used for debug
purposes.
Except for debug purposes, PERRST must always be used in conjunction with PROCRST (PERRST and
PROCRST set both at 1 simultaneously).
RSTC_CR.EXTRST: Writing a 1 to EXTRST asserts low the NRST pin during a time defined by the field
RSTC_MR.ERSTL.
The software reset is entered if at least one of these bits is set by the software. All these commands can be
performed independently or simultaneously. The software reset lasts three slow clock cycles.
The internal reset signals are asserted as soon as the register write is performed. This is detected on the Master
Clock (MCK). They are released when the software reset has ended, i.e., synchronously to SLCK.
If EXTRST is set, the nrst_out signal is asserted depending on the configuration of field RSTC_MR.ERSTL.
However, the resulting falling edge on NRST does not lead to a user reset.
302
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
If and only if the PROCRST bit is set, the Reset Controller reports the software status in field RSTC_SR.RSTTYP.
Other software resets are not reported in RSTTYP.
As soon as a software operation is detected, the bit SRCMP (Software Reset Command in Progress) is set in the
RSTC_SR. SRCMP is cleared at the end of the software reset. No other software reset can be performed while the
SRCMP bit is set, and writing any value in the RSTC_CR has no effect.
Figure 14-5.
Software Reset
SLCK
MCK
Any
Freq.
Write RSTC_CR
Resynch. Processor Startup
1 cycle
= 2 cycles
proc_nreset
if PROCRST=1
RSTTYP
Any
XXX
0x3 = Software Reset
periph_nreset
if PERRST=1
NRST
(nrst_out)
if EXTRST=1
EXTERNAL RESET LENGTH
8 cycles (ERSTL=2)
SRCMP in RSTC_SR
14.4.3.4
User Reset
The user reset is entered when a low level is detected on the NRST pin and bit URSTEN in the RSTC_MR is at 1.
The NRST input signal is resynchronized with SLCK to insure proper behavior of the system.
The user reset is entered as soon as a low level is detected on NRST. The processor reset and the peripheral
reset are asserted.
The user reset ends when NRST rises, after a two-cycle resynchronization time and a three-cycle processor
startup. The processor clock is re-enabled as soon as NRST is confirmed high.
When the processor reset signal is released, field RSTC_SR.RSTTYP is loaded with the value 0x4, indicating a
user reset.
The NRST manager guarantees that the NRST line is asserted for External Reset Length slow clock cycles, as
programmed in field RSTC_MR.ERSTL. However, if NRST does not rise after External Reset Length because it is
driven low externally, the internal reset lines remain asserted until NRST actually rises.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
303
Figure 14-6.
User Reset State
SLCK
Any
Freq.
MCK
NRST
Resynch.
2 cycles
Resynch.
2 cycles
Processor Startup
= 2 cycles
proc_nreset
RSTTYP
Any
XXX
0x4 = User Reset
periph_nreset
NRST
(nrst_out)
>= EXTERNAL RESET LENGTH
14.4.4 Reset State Priorities
The reset state manager manages the priorities among the different reset sources. The resets are listed in order of
priority as follows:
1. General reset
2.
Watchdog reset
3.
Software reset
4.
User reset
Particular cases are listed below:
When in user reset:
̶
A watchdog event is impossible because the Watchdog Timer is being reset by the proc_nreset signal.
̶
304
A software reset is impossible, since the processor reset is being activated.
When in software reset:
̶
A watchdog event has priority over the current state.
̶
The NRST has no effect.
When in watchdog reset:
̶
The processor reset is active and so a software reset cannot be programmed.
̶
A user reset cannot be entered.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
14.5
Reset Controller (RSTC) User Interface
Table 14-1.
Offset
Note:
Register Mapping
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x00
Control Register
RSTC_CR
Write-only
–
0x04
Status Register
RSTC_SR
Read-only
0x0000_0000(1)
0x08
Mode Register
RSTC_MR
Read/Write
0x0000 0001
1. This value assumes that a general reset has been performed, subject to change if other types of reset are generated.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
305
14.5.1 Reset Controller Control Register
Name:
RSTC_CR
Address:
0x400E1400
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
KEY
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
EXTRST
2
PERRST
1
–
0
PROCRST
• PROCRST: Processor Reset
0: No effect
1: If KEY is correct, resets the processor
• PERRST: Peripheral Reset
0: No effect
1: If KEY is correct, resets the peripherals
• EXTRST: External Reset
0: No effect
1: If KEY is correct, asserts the NRST pin
• KEY: System Reset Key
306
Value
Name
Description
0xA5
PASSWD
Writing any other value in this field aborts the write operation.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
14.5.2 Reset Controller Status Register
Name:
RSTC_SR
Address:
0x400E1404
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
SRCMP
16
NRSTL
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
9
RSTTYP
8
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
URSTS
• URSTS: User Reset Status
A high-to-low transition of the NRST pin sets the URSTS bit. This transition is also detected on the MCK rising edge. If the
user reset is disabled (URSTEN = 0 in RSTC_MR) and if the interruption is enabled by the URSTIEN bit in the RSTC_MR,
the URSTS bit triggers an interrupt. Reading the RSTC_SR resets the URSTS bit and clears the interrupt.
0: No high-to-low edge on NRST happened since the last read of RSTC_SR.
1: At least one high-to-low transition of NRST has been detected since the last read of RSTC_SR.
• RSTTYP: Reset Type
This field reports the cause of the last processor reset. Reading this RSTC_SR does not reset this field.
Value
Name
Description
0
GENERAL_RST
First power-up reset
1
–
Reserved
2
WDT_RST
Watchdog fault occurred
3
SOFT_RST
Processor reset required by the software
4
USER_RST
NRST pin detected low
5
–
Reserved
6
–
Reserved
7
–
Reserved
• NRSTL: NRST Pin Level
This bit registers the NRST pin level sampled on each Master Clock (MCK) rising edge.
• SRCMP: Software Reset Command in Progress
When set, this bit indicates that a software reset command is in progress and that no further software reset should be performed until the end of the current one. This bit is automatically cleared at the end of the current software reset.
0: No software command is being performed by the Reset Controller. The Reset Controller is ready for a software
command.
1: A software reset command is being performed by the Reset Controller. The Reset Controller is busy.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
307
14.5.3 Reset Controller Mode Register
Name:
RSTC_MR
Address:
0x400E1408
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
17
–
16
–
9
8
1
–
0
URSTEN
KEY
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
10
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
URSTIEN
3
–
ERSTL
2
–
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the System Controller Write Protection Mode Register
(SYSC_WPMR).
• URSTEN: User Reset Enable
0: The detection of a low level on the NRST pin does not generate a user reset.
1: The detection of a low level on the NRST pin triggers a user reset.
• URSTIEN: User Reset Interrupt Enable
0: USRTS bit in RSTC_SR at 1 has no effect on rstc_irq.
1: USRTS bit in RSTC_SR at 1 asserts rstc_irq if URSTEN = 0.
• ERSTL: External Reset Length
This field defines the external reset length. The external reset is asserted during a time of 2(ERSTL+1) slow clock cycles. This
allows assertion duration to be programmed between 60 µs and 2 seconds. Note that synchronization cycles must also be
considered when calculating the actual reset length as previously described.
• KEY: Write Access Password
308
Value
Name
0xA5
PASSWD
Description
Writing any other value in this field aborts the write operation.
Always reads as 0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
15.
Real-time Timer (RTT)
15.1
Description
The Real-time Timer (RTT) is built around a 32-bit counter used to count roll-over events of the programmable 16bit prescaler driven from the 32-kHz slow clock source. It generates a periodic interrupt and/or triggers an alarm on
a programmed value.
The RTT can also be configured to be driven by the 1Hz RTC signal, thus taking advantage of a calibrated 1Hz
clock.
The slow clock source can be fully disabled to reduce power consumption when only an elapsed seconds count is
required.
15.2
15.3
Embedded Characteristics
32-bit Free-running Counter on prescaled slow clock or RTC calibrated 1Hz clock
16-bit Configurable Prescaler
Interrupt on Alarm or Counter Increment
Block Diagram
Figure 15-1.
RTT_MR
RTTDIS
Real-time Timer
RTT_MR
RTT_MR
RTTRST
RTPRES
RTT_MR
reload
16-bit
Prescaler
SLCK
RTTINCIEN
set
0
RTT_MR
RTC 1Hz
RTTRST
RTT_MR
RTC1HZ
1
RTTINC
RTT_SR
1
reset
0
rtt_int
0
32-bit
Counter
read
RTT_SR
RTT_MR
ALMIEN
RTT_VR
reset
CRTV
RTT_SR
ALMS
set
rtt_alarm
=
RTT_AR
ALMV
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
309
15.4
Functional Description
The programmable 16-bit prescaler value can be configured through the RTPRES field in the “Real-time Timer
Mode Register” (RTT_MR).
Configuring the RTPRES field value to 0x8000 (default value) corresponds to feeding the real-time counter with a
1Hz signal (if the slow clock is 32.768 kHz). The 32-bit counter can count up to 232 seconds, corresponding to
more than 136 years, then roll over to 0. Bit RTTINC in the “Real-time Timer Status Register” (RTT_SR) is set
each time there is a prescaler roll-over (see Figure 15-2)
The real-time 32-bit counter can also be supplied by the 1Hz RTC clock. This mode is interesting when the RTC
1Hz is calibrated (CORRECTION field ≠ 0 in RTC_MR) in order to guaranty the synchronism between RTC and
RTT counters.
Setting the RTC1HZ bit in the RTT_MR drives the 32-bit RTT counter from the 1Hz RTC clock. In this mode, the
RTPRES field has no effect on the 32-bit counter.
The prescaler roll-over generates an increment of the real-time timer counter if RTC1HZ = 0. Otherwise, if
RTC1HZ = 1, the real-time timer counter is incremented every second. The RTTINC bit is set independently from
the 32-bit counter increment.
The real-time timer can also be used as a free-running timer with a lower time-base. The best accuracy is achieved
by writing RTPRES to 3 in RTT_MR.
Programming RTPRES to 1 or 2 is forbidden.
If the RTT is configured to trigger an interrupt, the interrupt occurs two slow clock cycles after reading the RTT_SR.
To prevent several executions of the interrupt handler, the interrupt must be disabled in the interrupt handler and
re-enabled when the RTT_SR is cleared.
The CRTV field can be read at any time in the “Real-time Timer Value Register” (RTT_VR). As this value can be
updated asynchronously with the Master Clock, the CRTV field must be read twice at the same value to read a
correct value.
The current value of the counter is compared with the value written in the “Real-time Timer Alarm Register”
(RTT_AR). If the counter value matches the alarm, the ALMS bit in the RTT_SR is set. The RTT_AR is set to its
maximum value (0xFFFF_FFFF) after a reset.
The ALMS flag is always a source of the RTT alarm signal that may be used to exit the system from low power
modes (see Figure 15-1).
The alarm interrupt must be disabled (ALMIEN must be cleared in RTT_MR) when writing a new ALMV value in
the RTT_AR.
The RTTINC bit can be used to start a periodic interrupt, the period being one second when the RTPRES field
value = 0x8000 and the slow clock = 32.768 kHz.
The RTTINCIEN bit must be cleared prior to writing a new RTPRES value in the RTT_MR.
Reading the RTT_SR automatically clears the RTTINC and ALMS bits.
Writing the RTTRST bit in the RTT_MR immediately reloads and restarts the clock divider with the new
programmed value. This also resets the 32-bit counter.
When not used, the Real-time Timer can be disabled in order to suppress dynamic power consumption in this
module. This can be achieved by setting the RTTDIS bit in the RTT_MR.
310
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 15-2.
RTT Counting
SLCK
RTPRES - 1
Prescaler
0
CRTV
0
...
ALMV-1
ALMV
ALMV+1
ALMV+2
ALMV+3
RTTINC (RTT_SR)
ALMS (RTT_SR)
APB Interface
APB cycle
read RTT_SR
APB cycle
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
311
15.5
Real-time Timer (RTT) User Interface
Table 15-1.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x00
Mode Register
RTT_MR
Read/Write
0x0000_8000
0x04
Alarm Register
RTT_AR
Read/Write
0xFFFF_FFFF
0x08
Value Register
RTT_VR
Read-only
0x0000_0000
0x0C
Status Register
RTT_SR
Read-only
0x0000_0000
312
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
15.5.1 Real-time Timer Mode Register
Name:
RTT_MR
Address:
0x400E1430
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
RTC1HZ
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
RTTDIS
19
–
18
RTTRST
17
RTTINCIEN
16
ALMIEN
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RTPRES
7
6
5
4
RTPRES
• RTPRES: Real-time Timer Prescaler Value
Defines the number of SLCK periods required to increment the Real-time timer. RTPRES is defined as follows:
RTPRES = 0: The prescaler period is equal to 216 * SLCK periods.
RTPRES = 1 or 2: forbidden.
RTPRES ≠ 0,1 or 2: The prescaler period is equal to RTPRES * SLCK periods.
Note:
The RTTINCIEN bit must be cleared prior to writing a new RTPRES value.
• ALMIEN: Alarm Interrupt Enable
0: The bit ALMS in RTT_SR has no effect on interrupt.
1: The bit ALMS in RTT_SR asserts interrupt.
• RTTINCIEN: Real-time Timer Increment Interrupt Enable
0: The bit RTTINC in RTT_SR has no effect on interrupt.
1: The bit RTTINC in RTT_SR asserts interrupt.
• RTTRST: Real-time Timer Restart
0: No effect.
1: Reloads and restarts the clock divider with the new programmed value. This also resets the 32-bit counter.
• RTTDIS: Real-time Timer Disable
0: The real-time timer is enabled.
1: The real-time timer is disabled (no dynamic power consumption).
• RTC1HZ: Real-Time Clock 1Hz Clock Selection
0: The RTT 32-bit counter is driven by the 16-bit prescaler roll-over events.
1: The RTT 32-bit counter is driven by the 1Hz RTC clock.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
313
15.5.2 Real-time Timer Alarm Register
Name:
RTT_AR
Address:
0x400E1434
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
ALMV
23
22
21
20
ALMV
15
14
13
12
ALMV
7
6
5
4
ALMV
• ALMV: Alarm Value
When the CRTV value in RTT_VR equals the ALMV field, the ALMS flag is set in RTT_SR. As soon as the ALMS flag
rises, the CRTV value equals ALMV+1 (refer to Figure 15-2).
Note:
314
The alarm interrupt must be disabled (ALMIEN must be cleared in RTT_MR) when writing a new ALMV value.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
15.5.3 Real-time Timer Value Register
Name:
RTT_VR
Address:
0x400E1438
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CRTV
23
22
21
20
CRTV
15
14
13
12
CRTV
7
6
5
4
CRTV
• CRTV: Current Real-time Value
Returns the current value of the Real-time Timer.
Note:
As CRTV can be updated asynchronously, it must be read twice at the same value.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
315
15.5.4 Real-time Timer Status Register
Name:
RTT_SR
Address:
0x400E143C
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
RTTINC
0
ALMS
• ALMS: Real-time Alarm Status (cleared on read)
0: The Real-time Alarm has not occurred since the last read of RTT_SR.
1: The Real-time Alarm occurred since the last read of RTT_SR.
• RTTINC: Prescaler Roll-over Status (cleared on read)
0: No prescaler roll-over occurred since the last read of the RTT_SR.
1: Prescaler roll-over occurred since the last read of the RTT_SR.
316
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
16.
Real-time Clock (RTC)
16.1
Description
The Real-time Clock (RTC) peripheral is designed for very low power consumption. For optimal functionality, the
RTC requires an accurate external 32.768 kHz clock, which can be provided by a crystal oscillator.
It combines a complete time-of-day clock with alarm and a Gregorian or Persian calendar, complemented by a
programmable periodic interrupt. The alarm and calendar registers are accessed by a 32-bit data bus.
The time and calendar values are coded in binary-coded decimal (BCD) format. The time format can be 24-hour
mode or 12-hour mode with an AM/PM indicator.
Updating time and calendar fields and configuring the alarm fields are performed by a parallel capture on the 32-bit
data bus. An entry control is performed to avoid loading registers with incompatible BCD format data or with an
incompatible date according to the current month/year/century.
A clock divider calibration circuitry can be used to compensate for crystal oscillator frequency variations.
16.2
Embedded Characteristics
Full Asynchronous Design for Ultra Low Power Consumption
Gregorian and Persian Modes Supported
Programmable Periodic Interrupt
Safety/security Features:
̶
Valid Time and Date Programmation Check
̶
On-The-Fly Time and Date Validity Check
Counters Calibration Circuitry to Compensate for Crystal Oscillator Variations
Waveform Generation for Trigger Event
Register Write Protection
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
317
16.3
Block Diagram
Figure 16-1.
Real-time Clock Block Diagram
Slow
Clock:
SLCK
32768 Divider
Time
Wave
Generator
Date
Clock Calibration
System
Bus
16.4
User Interface
Entry
Control
Alarm
RTCOUT0
(e.g ADC AD[7:0] trigger)
RTCOUT1
(e.g ADC AD[7] trigger)
Interrupt
Control
RTC Interrupt
Product Dependencies
16.4.1 Power Management
The Real-time Clock is continuously clocked at 32.768 kHz. The Power Management Controller has no effect on
RTC behavior.
16.4.2 Interrupt
RTC interrupt line is connected on one of the internal sources of the interrupt controller. RTC interrupt requires the
interrupt controller to be programmed first.
Table 16-1.
16.5
Peripheral IDs
Instance
ID
RTC
2
Functional Description
The RTC provides a full binary-coded decimal (BCD) clock that includes century (19/20), year (with leap years),
month, date, day, hours, minutes and seconds reported in RTC Time Register (RTC_TIMR) and RTC Calendar
Register (RTC_CALR).
The valid year range is up to 2099 in Gregorian mode (or 1300 to 1499 in Persian mode).
The RTC can operate in 24-hour mode or in 12-hour mode with an AM/PM indicator.
Corrections for leap years are included (all years divisible by 4 being leap years except 1900). This is correct up to
the year 2099.
The RTC can generate events to trigger ADC measurements.
16.5.1 Reference Clock
The reference clock is the Slow Clock (SLCK). It can be driven internally or by an external 32.768 kHz crystal.
During low power modes of the processor, the oscillator runs and power consumption is critical. The crystal
selection has to take into account the current consumption for power saving and the frequency drift due to
temperature effect on the circuit for time accuracy.
318
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
16.5.2 Timing
The RTC is updated in real time at one-second intervals in Normal mode for the counters of seconds, at oneminute intervals for the counter of minutes and so on.
Due to the asynchronous operation of the RTC with respect to the rest of the chip, to be certain that the value read
in the RTC registers (century, year, month, date, day, hours, minutes, seconds) are valid and stable, it is
necessary to read these registers twice. If the data is the same both times, then it is valid. Therefore, a minimum of
two and a maximum of three accesses are required.
16.5.3 Alarm
The RTC has five programmable fields: month, date, hours, minutes and seconds.
Each of these fields can be enabled or disabled to match the alarm condition:
If all the fields are enabled, an alarm flag is generated (the corresponding flag is asserted and an interrupt
generated if enabled) at a given month, date, hour/minute/second.
If only the “seconds” field is enabled, then an alarm is generated every minute.
Depending on the combination of fields enabled, a large number of possibilities are available to the user ranging
from minutes to 365/366 days.
Hour, minute and second matching alarm (SECEN, MINEN, HOUREN) can be enabled independently of SEC,
MIN, HOUR fields.
Note:
To change one of the SEC, MIN, HOUR, DATE, MONTH fields, it is recommended to disable the field before changing
the value and then re-enable it after the change has been made. This requires up to three accesses to the
RTC_TIMALR or RTC_CALALR. The first access clears the enable corresponding to the field to change (SECEN,
MINEN, HOUREN, DATEEN, MTHEN). If the field is already cleared, this access is not required. The second access
performs the change of the value (SEC, MIN, HOUR, DATE, MONTH). The third access is required to re-enable the
field by writing 1 in SECEN, MINEN, HOUREn, DATEEN, MTHEN fields.
16.5.4 Error Checking when Programming
Verification on user interface data is performed when accessing the century, year, month, date, day, hours,
minutes, seconds and alarms. A check is performed on illegal BCD entries such as illegal date of the month with
regard to the year and century configured.
If one of the time fields is not correct, the data is not loaded into the register/counter and a flag is set in the validity
register. The user can not reset this flag. It is reset as soon as an acceptable value is programmed. This avoids
any further side effects in the hardware. The same procedure is followed for the alarm.
The following checks are performed:
1. Century (check if it is in range 19–20 or 13–14 in Persian mode)
2.
Year (BCD entry check)
3.
Date (check range 01–31)
4.
Month (check if it is in BCD range 01–12, check validity regarding “date”)
5.
Day (check range 1–7)
6.
Hour (BCD checks: in 24-hour mode, check range 00–23 and check that AM/PM flag is not set if RTC is set
in 24-hour mode; in 12-hour mode check range 01–12)
7.
Minute (check BCD and range 00–59)
8.
Second (check BCD and range 00–59)
Note:
If the 12-hour mode is selected by means of the RTC Mode Register (RTC_MR), a 12-hour value can be programmed
and the returned value on RTC_TIMR will be the corresponding 24-hour value. The entry control checks the value of
the AM/PM indicator (bit 22 of RTC_TIMR) to determine the range to be checked.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
319
16.5.5 RTC Internal Free Running Counter Error Checking
To improve the reliability and security of the RTC, a permanent check is performed on the internal free running
counters to report non-BCD or invalid date/time values.
An error is reported by TDERR bit in the status register (RTC_SR) if an incorrect value has been detected. The
flag can be cleared by setting the TDERRCLR bit in the Status Clear Command Register (RTC_SCCR).
Anyway the TDERR error flag will be set again if the source of the error has not been cleared before clearing the
TDERR flag. The clearing of the source of such error can be done by reprogramming a correct value on
RTC_CALR and/or RTC_TIMR.
The RTC internal free running counters may automatically clear the source of TDERR due to their roll-over (i.e.,
every 10 seconds for SECONDS[3:0] field in RTC_TIMR). In this case the TDERR is held high until a clear
command is asserted by TDERRCLR bit in RTC_SCCR.
16.5.6 Updating Time/Calendar
To update any of the time/calendar fields, the user must first stop the RTC by setting the corresponding field in the
Control Register (RTC_CR). Bit UPDTIM must be set to update time fields (hour, minute, second) and bit UPDCAL
must be set to update calendar fields (century, year, month, date, day).
The ACKUPD bit is automatically set within a second after setting the UPDTIM and/or UPDCAL bit (meaning one
second is the maximum duration of the polling or wait for interrupt period). Once ACKUPD is set, it is mandatory to
clear this flag by writing the corresponding bit in the RTC_SCCR, after which the user can write to the Time
Register, the Calendar Register, or both.
Once the update is finished, the user must clear UPDTIM and/or UPDCAL in the RTC_CR.
When entering the programming mode of the calendar fields, the time fields remain enabled. When entering the
programming mode of the time fields, both time and calendar fields are stopped. This is due to the location of the
calendar logic circuity (downstream for low-power considerations). It is highly recommended to prepare all the
fields to be updated before entering programming mode. In successive update operations, the user must wait at
least one second after resetting the UPDTIM/UPDCAL bit in the RTC_CR before setting these bits again. This is
done by waiting for the SEC flag in the RTC_SR before setting UPDTIM/UPDCAL bit. After clearing
UPDTIM/UPDCAL, the SEC flag must also be cleared.
320
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 16-2.
Update Sequence
Begin
Prepare Time or Calendar Fields
Set UPDTIM and/or UPDCAL
bit(s) in RTC_CR
Read RTC_SR
Polling or
IRQ (if enabled)
ACKUPD
=1?
No
Yes
Clear ACKUPD bit in RTC_SCCR
Update Time and/or Calendar values in
RTC_TIMR/RTC_CALR
Clear UPDTIM and/or UPDCAL bit in
RTC_CR
End
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
321
16.5.7 RTC Accurate Clock Calibration
The crystal oscillator that drives the RTC may not be as accurate as expected mainly due to temperature variation.
The RTC is equipped with circuitry able to correct slow clock crystal drift.
To compensate for possible temperature variations over time, this accurate clock calibration circuitry can be
programmed on-the-fly and also programmed during application manufacturing, in order to correct the crystal
frequency accuracy at room temperature (20–25°C). The typical clock drift range at room temperature is ±20 ppm.
In the device operating temperature range, the 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator clock inaccuracy can be up to -200
ppm.
The RTC clock calibration circuitry allows positive or negative correction in a range of 1.5 ppm to 1950 ppm.
The calibration circuitry is fully digital. Thus, the configured correction is independent of temperature, voltage,
process, etc., and no additional measurement is required to check that the correction is effective.
If the correction value configured in the calibration circuitry results from an accurate crystal frequency measure,
the remaining accuracy is bounded by the values listed below:
Below 1 ppm, for an initial crystal drift between 1.5 ppm up to 20 ppm, and from 30 ppm to 90 ppm
Below 2 ppm, for an initial crystal drift between 20 ppm up to 30 ppm, and from 90 ppm to 130 ppm
Below 5 ppm, for an initial crystal drift between 130 ppm up to 200 ppm
The calibration circuitry does not modify the 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator clock frequency but it acts by slightly
modifying the 1 Hz clock period from time to time. The correction event occurs every 1 + [(20 (19 x HIGHPPM)) x CORRECTION] seconds. When the period is modified, depending on the sign of the
correction, the 1 Hz clock period increases or reduces by around 4 ms. Depending on the CORRECTION,
NEGPPM and HIGHPPM values configured in RTC_MR, the period interval between two correction events differs.
Figure 16-3.
Calibration Circuitry
RTC
Divider by 32768
32.768 kHz
Oscillator
Add
32.768 kHz
Integrator
Comparator
Other Logic
322
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
1Hz
Time/Calendar
Suppress
CORRECTION, HIGHPPM
NEGPPM
Figure 16-4.
Calibration Circuitry Waveforms
Monotonic 1 Hz
Counter value
32.768 kHz +50 ppm
Phase adjustment
(~4 ms)
Nominal 32.768 kHz
32.768 kHz -50 ppm
-25 ppm
Crystal frequency
remains unadjusted
-50 ppm
Internal 1 Hz clock
is adjusted
Time
User configurable period
(integer multiple of 1s or 20s)
-50 ppm correction period
-25 ppm correction period
Time
NEGATIVE CORRECTION
Crystal clock
Internally divided clock (256 Hz)
Clock pulse periodically suppressed
when correction period elapses
Internally divided clock (128 Hz)
1.000 second
128 Hz clock edge delayed by 3.906 ms
when correction period elapses
POSITIVE CORRECTION
1.003906 second
Internally divided clock (256 Hz)
Internally divided clock (128 Hz)
Clock edge periodically added
when correction period elapses
Internally divided clock (64 Hz)
128 Hz clock edge delayed by 3.906 ms
when correction period elapses
0.996094 second
1.000 second
The inaccuracy of a crystal oscillator at typical room temperature (±20 ppm at 20–25 °C) can be compensated if a
reference clock/signal is used to measure such inaccuracy. This kind of calibration operation can be set up during
the final product manufacturing by means of measurement equipment embedding such a reference clock. The
correction of value must be programmed into the (RTC_MR), and this value is kept as long as the circuitry is
powered (backup area). Removing the backup power supply cancels this calibration. This room temperature
calibration can be further processed by means of the networking capability of the target application.
In any event, this adjustment does not take into account the temperature variation.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
323
The frequency drift (up to -200 ppm) due to temperature variation can be compensated using a reference time if
the application can access such a reference. If a reference time cannot be used, a temperature sensor can be
placed close to the crystal oscillator in order to get the operating temperature of the crystal oscillator. Once
obtained, the temperature may be converted using a lookup table (describing the accuracy/temperature curve of
the crystal oscillator used) and RTC_MR configured accordingly. The calibration can be performed on-the-fly. This
adjustment method is not based on a measurement of the crystal frequency/drift and therefore can be improved by
means of the networking capability of the target application.
If no crystal frequency adjustment has been done during manufacturing, it is still possible to do it. In the case
where a reference time of the day can be obtained through LAN/WAN network, it is possible to calculate the drift of
the application crystal oscillator by comparing the values read on RTC Time Register (RTC_TIMR) and
programming the HIGHPPM and CORRECTION fields on RTC_MR according to the difference measured
between the reference time and those of RTC_TIMR.
16.5.8 Waveform Generation
Waveforms can be generated by the RTC in order to take advantage of the RTC inherent prescalers while the RTC
is the only powered circuitry (Low-power mode of operation, Backup mode) or in any active mode. Going into
Backup or Low-power operating modes does not affect the waveform generation outputs.
The RTC waveforms are internally routed to ADC trigger events and those events have a source driver selected
among five possibilities. Two different triggers can be generated at a time, the first one is configurable through field
OUT0 in RTC_MR while the second trigger is configurable through field OUT1 in RTC_MR. OUT0 field manages
the trigger for channel AD[7:0] while OUT1 manages the channel AD[7] only for specific modes. See the ADC
section for selection of the measurement triggers and associated mode of operations.
The first selection choice sticks the associated output at 0 (This is the reset value and it can be used at any time to
disable the waveform generation).
Selection choices 1 to 4 respectively select 1 Hz, 32 Hz, 64 Hz and 512 Hz.
Selection choice 6 provides a copy of the alarm flag, so the associated output is set high (logical 1) when an alarm
occurs and immediately cleared when software clears the alarm interrupt source.
324
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 16-5.
Waveform Generation for ADC Trigger Event
‘0’
0
‘0’
0
1 Hz
1
1 Hz
1
32 Hz
2
32 Hz
2
64 Hz
3
64 Hz
3
512 Hz
4
512 Hz
4
reserved
5
reserved
5
flag_alarm
6
To ADC trigger
event for all channels
flag_alarm
RTC_MR(OUT0)
alarm match
event 1
To ADC trigger
event for AD[n]
n = higher index
available
6
RTC_MR(OUT1)
alarm match
event 2
flag_alarm
RTC_SCCR(ALRCLR)
RTC_SCCR(ALRCLR)
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
325
16.6
Real-time Clock (RTC) User Interface
Table 16-2.
Offset
Register Mapping
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x00
Control Register
RTC_CR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x04
Mode Register
RTC_MR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x08
Time Register
RTC_TIMR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x0C
Calendar Register
RTC_CALR
Read/Write
0x01A11020
0x10
Time Alarm Register
RTC_TIMALR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x14
Calendar Alarm Register
RTC_CALALR
Read/Write
0x01010000
0x18
Status Register
RTC_SR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x1C
Status Clear Command Register
RTC_SCCR
Write-only
–
0x20
Interrupt Enable Register
RTC_IER
Write-only
–
0x24
Interrupt Disable Register
RTC_IDR
Write-only
–
0x28
Interrupt Mask Register
RTC_IMR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x2C
Valid Entry Register
RTC_VER
Read-only
0x00000000
0x30–0xC8
Reserved
–
–
–
0xCC
Reserved
–
–
–
0xD0
Reserved
–
–
–
0xD4–0xF8
Reserved
–
–
–
0xFC
Reserved
–
–
–
Note: If an offset is not listed in the table it must be considered as reserved.
326
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
16.6.1 RTC Control Register
Name:
RTC_CR
Address:
0x400E1460
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
–
–
–
–
–
–
16
CALEVSEL
9
8
TIMEVSEL
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
UPDCAL
UPDTIM
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the System Controller Write Protection Mode Register
(SYSC_WPMR).
• UPDTIM: Update Request Time Register
0: No effect or, if UPDTIM has been previously written to 1, stops the update procedure.
1: Stops the RTC time counting.
Time counting consists of second, minute and hour counters. Time counters can be programmed once this bit is set and
acknowledged by the bit ACKUPD of the RTC_SR.
• UPDCAL: Update Request Calendar Register
0: No effect or, if UPDCAL has been previously written to 1, stops the update procedure.
1: Stops the RTC calendar counting.
Calendar counting consists of day, date, month, year and century counters. Calendar counters can be programmed once
this bit is set and acknowledged by the bit ACKUPD of the RTC_SR.
• TIMEVSEL: Time Event Selection
The event that generates the flag TIMEV in RTC_SR depends on the value of TIMEVSEL.
Value
Name
Description
0
MINUTE
Minute change
1
HOUR
Hour change
2
MIDNIGHT
Every day at midnight
3
NOON
Every day at noon
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
327
• CALEVSEL: Calendar Event Selection
The event that generates the flag CALEV in RTC_SR depends on the value of CALEVSEL
Value
Name
Description
0
WEEK
Week change (every Monday at time 00:00:00)
1
MONTH
Month change (every 01 of each month at time 00:00:00)
2
YEAR
Year change (every January 1 at time 00:00:00)
328
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
16.6.2 RTC Mode Register
Name:
RTC_MR
Address:
0x400E1464
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
15
OUT1
14
13
–
12
HIGHPPM
OUT0
11
10
9
8
CORRECTION
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
NEGPPM
–
–
PERSIAN
HRMOD
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the System Controller Write Protection Mode Register
(SYSC_WPMR).
• HRMOD: 12-/24-hour Mode
0: 24-hour mode is selected.
1: 12-hour mode is selected.
• PERSIAN: PERSIAN Calendar
0: Gregorian calendar.
1: Persian calendar.
• NEGPPM: NEGative PPM Correction
0: Positive correction (the divider will be slightly higher than 32768).
1: Negative correction (the divider will be slightly lower than 32768).
Refer to CORRECTION and HIGHPPM field descriptions.
Note: NEGPPM must be cleared to correct a crystal slower than 32.768 kHz.
• CORRECTION: Slow Clock Correction
0: No correction
1–127: The slow clock will be corrected according to the formula given in HIGHPPM description.
• HIGHPPM: HIGH PPM Correction
0: Lower range ppm correction with accurate correction.
1: Higher range ppm correction with accurate correction.
If the absolute value of the correction to be applied is lower than 30 ppm, it is recommended to clear HIGHPPM. HIGHPPM
set to 1 is recommended for 30 ppm correction and above.
Formula:
If HIGHPPM = 0, then the clock frequency correction range is from 1.5 ppm up to 98 ppm. The RTC accuracy is less
than 1 ppm for a range correction from 1.5 ppm up to 30 ppm.
The correction field must be programmed according to the required correction in ppm; the formula is as follows:
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
329
3906
CORRECTION = ----------------------- – 1
20 × ppm
The value obtained must be rounded to the nearest integer prior to being programmed into CORRECTION field.
If HIGHPPM = 1, then the clock frequency correction range is from 30.5 ppm up to 1950 ppm. The RTC accuracy is
less than 1 ppm for a range correction from 30.5 ppm up to 90 ppm.
The correction field must be programmed according to the required correction in ppm; the formula is as follows:
3906
CORRECTION = ------------ – 1
ppm
The value obtained must be rounded to the nearest integer prior to be programmed into CORRECTION field.
If NEGPPM is set to 1, the ppm correction is negative (used to correct crystals that are faster than the nominal 32.768
kHz).
• OUT0: All ADC Channel Trigger Event Source Selection
Value
Name
Description
0
NO_WAVE
No waveform, stuck at ‘0’
1
FREQ1HZ
1 Hz square wave
2
FREQ32HZ
32 Hz square wave
3
FREQ64HZ
64 Hz square wave
4
FREQ512HZ
512 Hz square wave
6
ALARM_FLAG
Output is a copy of the alarm flag
• OUT1: ADC Last Channel Trigger Event Source Selection
Value
330
Name
Description
0
NO_WAVE
No waveform, stuck at ‘0’
1
FREQ1HZ
1 Hz square wave
2
FREQ32HZ
32 Hz square wave
3
FREQ64HZ
64 Hz square wave
4
FREQ512HZ
512 Hz square wave
6
ALARM_FLAG
Output is a copy of the alarm flag
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
16.6.3 RTC Time Register
Name:
RTC_TIMR
Address:
0x400E1468
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
AMPM
15
14
10
9
8
2
1
0
HOUR
13
12
–
7
11
MIN
6
5
–
4
3
SEC
• SEC: Current Second
The range that can be set is 0–59 (BCD).
The lowest four bits encode the units. The higher bits encode the tens.
• MIN: Current Minute
The range that can be set is 0–59 (BCD).
The lowest four bits encode the units. The higher bits encode the tens.
• HOUR: Current Hour
The range that can be set is 1–12 (BCD) in 12-hour mode or 0–23 (BCD) in 24-hour mode.
• AMPM: Ante Meridiem Post Meridiem Indicator
This bit is the AM/PM indicator in 12-hour mode.
0: AM.
1: PM.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
331
16.6.4 RTC Calendar Register
Name:
RTC_CALR
Address:
0x400E146C
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
–
–
23
22
29
28
27
21
20
19
DAY
15
14
26
25
24
18
17
16
DATE
MONTH
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
YEAR
7
6
5
–
4
CENT
• CENT: Current Century
The range that can be set is 19–20 (Gregorian) or 13–14 (Persian) (BCD).
The lowest four bits encode the units. The higher bits encode the tens.
• YEAR: Current Year
The range that can be set is 00–99 (BCD).
The lowest four bits encode the units. The higher bits encode the tens.
• MONTH: Current Month
The range that can be set is 01–12 (BCD).
The lowest four bits encode the units. The higher bits encode the tens.
• DAY: Current Day in Current Week
The range that can be set is 1–7 (BCD).
The coding of the number (which number represents which day) is user-defined as it has no effect on the date counter.
• DATE: Current Day in Current Month
The range that can be set is 01–31 (BCD).
The lowest four bits encode the units. The higher bits encode the tens.
332
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
16.6.5 RTC Time Alarm Register
Name:
RTC_TIMALR
Address:
0x400E1470
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
21
20
19
18
17
16
10
9
8
2
1
0
23
22
HOUREN
AMPM
15
14
HOUR
13
12
MINEN
7
11
MIN
6
5
SECEN
4
3
SEC
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the System Controller Write Protection Mode Register
(SYSC_WPMR).
Note: To change one of the SEC, MIN, HOUR fields, it is recommended to disable the field before changing the value and then reenable it after the change has been made. This requires up to three accesses to the RTC_TIMALR. The first access clears the
enable corresponding to the field to change (SECEN, MINEN, HOUREN). If the field is already cleared, this access is not
required. The second access performs the change of the value (SEC, MIN, HOUR). The third access is required to re-enable the
field by writing 1 in SECEN, MINEN, HOUREN fields.
• SEC: Second Alarm
This field is the alarm field corresponding to the BCD-coded second counter.
• SECEN: Second Alarm Enable
0: The second-matching alarm is disabled.
1: The second-matching alarm is enabled.
• MIN: Minute Alarm
This field is the alarm field corresponding to the BCD-coded minute counter.
• MINEN: Minute Alarm Enable
0: The minute-matching alarm is disabled.
1: The minute-matching alarm is enabled.
• HOUR: Hour Alarm
This field is the alarm field corresponding to the BCD-coded hour counter.
• AMPM: AM/PM Indicator
This field is the alarm field corresponding to the BCD-coded hour counter.
• HOUREN: Hour Alarm Enable
0: The hour-matching alarm is disabled.
1: The hour-matching alarm is enabled.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
333
16.6.6 RTC Calendar Alarm Register
Name:
RTC_CALALR
Address:
0x400E1474
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
DATEEN
–
29
28
27
26
25
24
18
17
16
DATE
23
22
21
MTHEN
–
–
20
19
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
MONTH
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the System Controller Write Protection Mode Register
(SYSC_WPMR).
Note: To change one of the DATE, MONTH fields, it is recommended to disable the field before changing the value and then re-enable
it after the change has been made. This requires up to three accesses to the RTC_CALALR. The first access clears the enable
corresponding to the field to change (DATEEN, MTHEN). If the field is already cleared, this access is not required. The second
access performs the change of the value (DATE, MONTH). The third access is required to re-enable the field by writing 1 in
DATEEN, MTHEN fields.
• MONTH: Month Alarm
This field is the alarm field corresponding to the BCD-coded month counter.
• MTHEN: Month Alarm Enable
0: The month-matching alarm is disabled.
1: The month-matching alarm is enabled.
• DATE: Date Alarm
This field is the alarm field corresponding to the BCD-coded date counter.
• DATEEN: Date Alarm Enable
0: The date-matching alarm is disabled.
1: The date-matching alarm is enabled.
334
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
16.6.7 RTC Status Register
Name:
RTC_SR
Address:
0x400E1478
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
TDERR
CALEV
TIMEV
SEC
ALARM
ACKUPD
• ACKUPD: Acknowledge for Update
Value
Name
Description
0
FREERUN
Time and calendar registers cannot be updated.
1
UPDATE
Time and calendar registers can be updated.
• ALARM: Alarm Flag
Value
Name
Description
0
NO_ALARMEVENT
No alarm matching condition occurred.
1
ALARMEVENT
An alarm matching condition has occurred.
• SEC: Second Event
Value
Name
Description
0
NO_SECEVENT
No second event has occurred since the last clear.
1
SECEVENT
At least one second event has occurred since the last clear.
• TIMEV: Time Event
Value
Name
Description
0
NO_TIMEVENT
No time event has occurred since the last clear.
1
TIMEVENT
At least one time event has occurred since the last clear.
Note: The time event is selected in the TIMEVSEL field in the Control Register (RTC_CR) and can be any one of the following events:
minute change, hour change, noon, midnight (day change).
• CALEV: Calendar Event
Value
Name
Description
0
NO_CALEVENT
No calendar event has occurred since the last clear.
1
CALEVENT
At least one calendar event has occurred since the last clear.
Note: The calendar event is selected in the CALEVSEL field in the Control Register (RTC_CR) and can be any one of the following
events: week change, month change and year change.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
335
• TDERR: Time and/or Date Free Running Error
Value
336
Name
Description
0
CORRECT
The internal free running counters are carrying valid values since the last read of the Status
Register (RTC_SR).
1
ERR_TIMEDATE
The internal free running counters have been corrupted (invalid date or time, non-BCD
values) since the last read and/or they are still invalid.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
16.6.8 RTC Status Clear Command Register
Name:
RTC_SCCR
Address:
0x400E147C
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
TDERRCLR
CALCLR
TIMCLR
SECCLR
ALRCLR
ACKCLR
• ACKCLR: Acknowledge Clear
0: No effect.
1: Clears corresponding status flag in the Status Register (RTC_SR).
• ALRCLR: Alarm Clear
0: No effect.
1: Clears corresponding status flag in the Status Register (RTC_SR).
• SECCLR: Second Clear
0: No effect.
1: Clears corresponding status flag in the Status Register (RTC_SR).
• TIMCLR: Time Clear
0: No effect.
1: Clears corresponding status flag in the Status Register (RTC_SR).
• CALCLR: Calendar Clear
0: No effect.
1: Clears corresponding status flag in the Status Register (RTC_SR).
• TDERRCLR: Time and/or Date Free Running Error Clear
0: No effect.
1: Clears corresponding status flag in the Status Register (RTC_SR).
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
337
16.6.9 RTC Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
RTC_IER
Address:
0x400E1480
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
TDERREN
CALEN
TIMEN
SECEN
ALREN
ACKEN
• ACKEN: Acknowledge Update Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: The acknowledge for update interrupt is enabled.
• ALREN: Alarm Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: The alarm interrupt is enabled.
• SECEN: Second Event Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: The second periodic interrupt is enabled.
• TIMEN: Time Event Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: The selected time event interrupt is enabled.
• CALEN: Calendar Event Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: The selected calendar event interrupt is enabled.
• TDERREN: Time and/or Date Error Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: The time and date error interrupt is enabled.
338
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
16.6.10 RTC Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
RTC_IDR
Address:
0x400E1484
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
TDERRDIS
CALDIS
TIMDIS
SECDIS
ALRDIS
ACKDIS
• ACKDIS: Acknowledge Update Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: The acknowledge for update interrupt is disabled.
• ALRDIS: Alarm Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: The alarm interrupt is disabled.
• SECDIS: Second Event Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: The second periodic interrupt is disabled.
• TIMDIS: Time Event Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: The selected time event interrupt is disabled.
• CALDIS: Calendar Event Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: The selected calendar event interrupt is disabled.
• TDERRDIS: Time and/or Date Error Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: The time and date error interrupt is disabled.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
339
16.6.11 RTC Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
RTC_IMR
Address:
0x400E1488
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
TDERR
CAL
TIM
SEC
ALR
ACK
• ACK: Acknowledge Update Interrupt Mask
0: The acknowledge for update interrupt is disabled.
1: The acknowledge for update interrupt is enabled.
• ALR: Alarm Interrupt Mask
0: The alarm interrupt is disabled.
1: The alarm interrupt is enabled.
• SEC: Second Event Interrupt Mask
0: The second periodic interrupt is disabled.
1: The second periodic interrupt is enabled.
• TIM: Time Event Interrupt Mask
0: The selected time event interrupt is disabled.
1: The selected time event interrupt is enabled.
• CAL: Calendar Event Interrupt Mask
0: The selected calendar event interrupt is disabled.
1: The selected calendar event interrupt is enabled.
• TDERR: Time and/or Date Error Mask
0: The time and/or date error event is disabled.
1: The time and/or date error event is enabled.
340
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
16.6.12 RTC Valid Entry Register
Name:
RTC_VER
Address:
0x400E148C
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
NVCALALR
NVTIMALR
NVCAL
NVTIM
• NVTIM: Non-valid Time
0: No invalid data has been detected in RTC_TIMR (Time Register).
1: RTC_TIMR has contained invalid data since it was last programmed.
• NVCAL: Non-valid Calendar
0: No invalid data has been detected in RTC_CALR (Calendar Register).
1: RTC_CALR has contained invalid data since it was last programmed.
• NVTIMALR: Non-valid Time Alarm
0: No invalid data has been detected in RTC_TIMALR (Time Alarm Register).
1: RTC_TIMALR has contained invalid data since it was last programmed.
• NVCALALR: Non-valid Calendar Alarm
0: No invalid data has been detected in RTC_CALALR (Calendar Alarm Register).
1: RTC_CALALR has contained invalid data since it was last programmed.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
341
17.
Watchdog Timer (WDT)
17.1
Description
The Watchdog Timer (WDT) is used to prevent system lock-up if the software becomes trapped in a deadlock. It
features a 12-bit down counter that allows a watchdog period of up to 16 seconds (slow clock around 32 kHz). It
can generate a general reset or a processor reset only. In addition, it can be stopped while the processor is in
Debug mode or Idle mode.
17.2
342
Embedded Characteristics
12-bit Key-protected Programmable Counter
Watchdog Clock is Independent from Processor Clock
Provides Reset or Interrupt Signals to the System
Counter May Be Stopped while the Processor is in Debug State or in Idle Mode
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
17.3
Block Diagram
Figure 17-1.
Watchdog Timer Block Diagram
write WDT_MR
WDT_MR
WDV
WDT_CR
WDRSTT
reload
1
0
12-bit Down
Counter
WDT_MR
WDD
reload
Current
Value
1/128
SLCK
<= WDD
WDT_MR
WDRSTEN
=0
wdt_fault
(to Reset Controller)
set
set
read WDT_SR
or
reset
WDERR
reset
WDUNF
reset
wdt_int
WDFIEN
WDT_MR
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
343
17.4
Functional Description
The Watchdog Timer is used to prevent system lock-up if the software becomes trapped in a deadlock. It is
supplied with VDDCORE. It restarts with initial values on processor reset.
The watchdog is built around a 12-bit down counter, which is loaded with the value defined in the field WDV of the
Mode Register (WDT_MR). The Watchdog Timer uses the slow clock divided by 128 to establish the maximum
watchdog period to be 16 seconds (with a typical slow clock of 32.768 kHz).
After a processor reset, the value of WDV is 0xFFF, corresponding to the maximum value of the counter with the
external reset generation enabled (field WDRSTEN at 1 after a backup reset). This means that a default watchdog
is running at reset, i.e., at power-up. The user can either disable the WDT by setting bit WDT_MR.WDDIS or
reprogram the WDT to meet the maximum watchdog period the application requires.
When the WDDIS bit is set, the fields WDV and WDD must not be modified.
If the watchdog is restarted by writing into the Control Register (WDT_CR), WDT_MR must not be programmed
during a period of time of three slow clock periods following the WDT_CR write access. In any case, programming
a new value in WDT_MR automatically initiates a restart instruction.
WDT_MR can be written only once. Only a processor reset resets it. Writing WDT_MR reloads the timer with the
newly programmed mode parameters.
In normal operation, the user reloads the watchdog at regular intervals before the timer underflow occurs, by
setting bit WDT_CR.WDRSTT. The watchdog counter is then immediately reloaded from WDT_MR and restarted,
and the slow clock 128 divider is reset and restarted. WDT_CR is write-protected. As a result, writing WDT_CR
without the correct hard-coded key has no effect. If an underflow does occur, the “wdt_fault” signal to the Reset
Controller is asserted if bit WDT_MR.WDRSTEN is set. Moreover, the bit WDUNF is set in the Status Register
(WDT_SR).
To prevent a software deadlock that continuously triggers the watchdog, the reload of the watchdog must occur
while the watchdog counter is within a window between 0 and WDD. WDD is defined in WDT_MR.
Any attempt to restart the watchdog while the watchdog counter is between WDV and WDD results in a watchdog
error, even if the watchdog is disabled. The bit WDT_SR.WDERR is updated and the “wdt_fault” signal to the
Reset Controller is asserted.
Note that this feature can be disabled by programming a WDD value greater than or equal to the WDV value. In
such a configuration, restarting the Watchdog Timer is permitted in the whole range [0; WDV] and does not
generate an error. This is the default configuration on reset (the WDD and WDV values are equal).
The status bits WDUNF (Watchdog Underflow) and WDERR (Watchdog Error) trigger an interrupt, provided the bit
WDT_MR.WDFIEN is set. The signal “wdt_fault” to the Reset Controller causes a watchdog reset if the
WDRSTEN bit is set as already explained in the Reset Controller documentation. In this case, the processor and
the Watchdog Timer are reset, and the WDERR and WDUNF flags are reset.
If a reset is generated or if WDT_SR is read, the status bits are reset, the interrupt is cleared, and the “wdt_fault”
signal to the reset controller is deasserted.
Writing WDT_MR reloads and restarts the down counter.
While the processor is in debug state or in idle mode, the counter may be stopped depending on the value
programmed for the bits WDIDLEHLT and WDDBGHLT in WDT_MR.
344
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 17-2.
Watchdog Behavior
Watchdog Error
Watchdog Underflow
if WDRSTEN is 1
FFF
if WDRSTEN is 0
Normal behavior
WDV
Forbidden
Window
WDD
Permitted
Window
0
WDT_CR.WDRSTT=1
Watchdog
Fault
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
345
17.5
Watchdog Timer (WDT) User Interface
Table 17-1.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
0x00
Control Register
0x04
0x08
346
Access
Reset
WDT_CR
Write-only
–
Mode Register
WDT_MR
Read/Write Once
0x3FFF_2FFF
Status Register
WDT_SR
Read-only
0x0000_0000
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
17.5.1 Watchdog Timer Control Register
Name:
WDT_CR
Address:
0x400E1450
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
KEY
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
WDRSTT
Note: The WDT_CR register values must not be modified within three slow clock periods following a restart of the watchdog performed
by a write access in WDT_CR. Any modification will cause the watchdog to trigger an end of period earlier than expected.
• WDRSTT: Watchdog Restart
0: No effect.
1: Restarts the watchdog if KEY is written to 0xA5.
• KEY: Password
Value
Name
Description
0xA5
PASSWD
Writing any other value in this field aborts the write operation.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
347
17.5.2 Watchdog Timer Mode Register
Name:
WDT_MR
Address:
0x400E1454
Access:
Read/Write Once
31
–
30
–
29
WDIDLEHLT
28
WDDBGHLT
27
23
22
21
20
19
11
26
25
24
18
17
16
10
9
8
1
0
WDD
WDD
15
WDDIS
14
13
12
WDRPROC
WDRSTEN
WDFIEN
7
6
5
4
WDV
3
2
WDV
Note: The first write access prevents any further modification of the value of this register. Read accesses remain possible.
Note: The WDT_MR register values must not be modified within three slow clock periods following a restart of the watchdog performed
by a write access in WDT_CR. Any modification will cause the watchdog to trigger an end of period earlier than expected.
• WDV: Watchdog Counter Value
Defines the value loaded in the 12-bit watchdog counter.
• WDFIEN: Watchdog Fault Interrupt Enable
0: A watchdog fault (underflow or error) has no effect on interrupt.
1: A watchdog fault (underflow or error) asserts interrupt.
• WDRSTEN: Watchdog Reset Enable
0: A watchdog fault (underflow or error) has no effect on the resets.
1: A watchdog fault (underflow or error) triggers a watchdog reset.
• WDRPROC: Watchdog Reset Processor
0: If WDRSTEN is 1, a watchdog fault (underflow or error) activates all resets.
1: If WDRSTEN is 1, a watchdog fault (underflow or error) activates the processor reset.
• WDDIS: Watchdog Disable
0: Enables the Watchdog Timer.
1: Disables the Watchdog Timer.
Note: When the WDDIS bit is set, the fields WDV and WDD must not be modified.
• WDD: Watchdog Delta Value
Defines the permitted range for reloading the Watchdog Timer.
If the Watchdog Timer value is less than or equal to WDD, setting bit WDT_CR.WDRSTT restarts the timer.
If the Watchdog Timer value is greater than WDD, setting bit WDT_CR.WDRSTT causes a watchdog error.
348
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
• WDDBGHLT: Watchdog Debug Halt
0: The watchdog runs when the processor is in debug state.
1: The watchdog stops when the processor is in debug state.
• WDIDLEHLT: Watchdog Idle Halt
0: The watchdog runs when the system is in idle state.
1: The watchdog stops when the system is in idle state.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
349
17.5.3 Watchdog Timer Status Register
Name:
WDT_SR
Address:
0x400E1458
Access
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
WDERR
0
WDUNF
• WDUNF: Watchdog Underflow (cleared on read)
0: No watchdog underflow occurred since the last read of WDT_SR.
1: At least one watchdog underflow occurred since the last read of WDT_SR.
• WDERR: Watchdog Error (cleared on read)
0: No watchdog error occurred since the last read of WDT_SR.
1: At least one watchdog error occurred since the last read of WDT_SR.
350
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
18.
Supply Controller (SUPC) Description
The Supply Controller (SUPC) controls the supply voltages of the system. The SUPC also generates the slow
clock by selecting either the low-power RC oscillator or the low-power crystal oscillator.
18.1
Embedded Characteristics
Supply Monitor Detection on VDDIO or a POR (Power-On Reset) on VDDCORE Can Trigger a Core Reset
Generates the Slow Clock SLCK, by Selecting Either the 32 kHz Low-power RC Oscillator or the 32 kHz
Low-power Crystal Oscillator
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
351
18.2
Block Diagram
Figure 18-1.
Supply Controller Block Diagram
VDDIO
PIOx
VDDIO Power Supply
PIOA/B
Input/Output Buffers
Supply
Controller
Zero-Power
Power-on Reset
ADC Analog
Circuitry
ADx
ON
Supply
Monitor
out
WKUP0 - WKUP15
VDDOUT
General Purpose
Backup Registers
SLCK
RTC
SLCK
RTT
Voltage Regulator
rtc_alarm
RTTDIS
rtt_alarm
BODDIS
osc32k_xtal_en
Power-on Reset
Core
XTALSEL
XIN32
XOUT32
Xtal 32 kHz
Oscillator
Slow Clock
SLCK
VDDCORE
Embedded
32 kHz RC
Oscillator
osc32k_rc_en
SRAM
vddcore_nreset
Peripherals
VDDIO Power Supply
Reset
Controller
proc_nreset
periph_nreset
Matrix
Peripheral
Bridge
NRST
FSTT0 - FSTT15 (1)
Cortex-M4
SLCK
Flash
Embedded
24/16/8 MHz
RC Oscillator
XIN
XOUT
Main Clock
MAINCK
3 - 20 MHz
XTAL Oscillator
Power
Management
Controller
Master Clock
MCK
VDDIO
PLLACK
SLCK
PLL
SLCK
Watchdog
Timer
Core Power Supply
Note 1: FSTT0 - FSTT15 are possible Fast Startup sources, generated by WKUP0 - WKUP15 pins,
but are not physical pins.
352
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
18.3
Supply Controller Functional Description
18.3.1 Supply Controller Overview
The device can be divided into two power supply areas:
VDDIO power supply: includes the Supply Controller, part of the Reset Controller, the slow clock switch, the
General-purpose Backup Registers, the Supply Monitor and the clock which includes the Real-time Timer
and the Real-time Clock
Core power supply: includes part of the Reset Controller, the POR core, the processor, the SRAM memory,
the Flash memory and the peripherals
The SUPC intervenes when the VDDIO power supply rises (when the system is starting).
The SUPC also integrates the slow clock generator which is based on a 32 kHz crystal oscillator and an embedded
32 kHz RC oscillator. The slow clock defaults to the RC oscillator, but the software can enable the crystal oscillator
and select it as the slow clock source.
The SUPC and the VDDIO power supply have a reset circuitry based on a zero-power power-on reset cell. The
zero-power power-on reset allows the SUPC to start properly as soon as the VDDIO voltage becomes valid.
At start-up of the system, once the backup voltage VDDIO is valid and the embedded 32 kHz RC oscillator is
stabilized, the SUPC starts up the core by sequentially enabling the internal voltage regulator, waiting for the core
voltage VDDCORE to be valid, then releasing the reset signal of the core “vddcore_nreset” signal.
Once the system has started, the user can program a supply monitor and/or a brownout detector. If the supply
monitor detects a voltage on VDDIO that is too low, the SUPC can assert the reset signal of the core
“vddcore_nreset” signal until VDDIO is valid. Likewise, if the POR core detects a core voltage VDDCORE that is
too low, the SUPC can assert the reset signal “vddcore_nreset” until VDDCORE is valid.
18.3.2 Slow Clock Generator
The SUPC embeds a slow clock generator that is supplied with the VDDIO power supply. As soon as the VDDIO is
supplied, both the crystal oscillator and the embedded RC oscillator are powered up, but only the embedded RC
oscillator is enabled. This allows the slow clock to be valid in a short time (about 100 µs).
The user can select the crystal oscillator to be the source of the slow clock, as it provides a more accurate
frequency. The command is made by writing the SUPC Control Register (SUPC_CR) with the XTALSEL bit at
1.This results in a sequence which first configures the PIO lines multiplexed with XIN32 and XOUT32 to be driven
by the oscillator, then enables the crystal oscillator, then counts a number of slow RC oscillator clock periods to
cover the start-up time of the crystal oscillator (refer to the section “Electrical Characteristics” for details of 32 kHz
crystal oscillator start-up time), then switches the slow clock on the output of the crystal oscillator and then
disables the RC oscillator to save power. The switching time may vary according to the slow RC oscillator clock
frequency range. The switch of the slow clock source is glitch free. The OSCSEL bit of the SUPC Status Register
(SUPC_SR) allows knowing when the switch sequence is done.
Coming back on the RC oscillator is only possible by shutting down the VDDIO power supply.
If the user does not need the crystal oscillator, the XIN32 and XOUT32 pins should be left unconnected.
The user can also set the crystal oscillator in Bypass mode instead of connecting a crystal. In this case, the user
has to provide the external clock signal on XIN32. The input characteristics of the XIN32 pin are given in the
product electrical characteristics section. In order to set the Bypass mode, the OSCBYPASS bit of the SUPC Mode
Register (SUPC_MR) needs to be set to 1 prior to writing a 1 in bit XTALSEL.
18.3.3 Supply Monitor
The SUPC embeds a supply monitor which is located in the VDDIO power supply and which monitors VDDIO
power supply.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
353
The supply monitor can be used to prevent the processor from falling into an unpredictable state if the main power
supply drops below a certain level.
The threshold of the supply monitor is programmable (refer to the “VDDIO Supply Monitor” characteristics in the
“Electrical Characteristics” section of the datasheet). This threshold is programmed in the SMTH field of the SUPC
Supply Monitor Mode Register (SUPC_SMMR).
The supply monitor can also be enabled during one slow clock period on every one of either 32, 256 or 2048 slow
clock periods, depending on the choice of the user. This is configured by programming the SMSMPL field in
SUPC_SMMR.
By enabling the supply monitor for such reduced times, the typical supply monitor power consumption is divided,
respectively, by factors of 2, 16 and 128, if the user does not require continuous monitoring of the VDDIO power
supply.
A supply monitor detection can generate a reset of the core power supply. Generating a core reset when a supply
monitor detection occurs is enabled by writing the SMRSTEN bit to 1 in SUPC_SMMR.
The SUPC provides two status bits in the SUPC_SR for the supply monitor:
The SMOS bit provides real-time information, which is updated at each measurement cycle, or at each slow
clock cycle if the measurement is continuous.
The SMS bit provides saved information and shows a supply monitor detection has occurred since the last
read of SUPC_SR.
The SMS bit can generate an interrupt if the SMIEN bit is set to 1 in SUPC_SMMR.
Figure 18-2.
Supply Monitor Status Bit and Associated Interrupt
Continuous Sampling (SMSMPL = 1)
Periodic Sampling
Supply Monitor ON
3.3V
Threshold
0V
Read SUPC_SR
SMS and SUPC interrupt
18.3.4 Power Supply Reset
18.3.4.1
Raising the Power Supply
As soon as the voltage VDDIO rises, the RC oscillator is powered up and the zero-power power-on reset cell
maintains its output low as long as VDDIO has not reached its target voltage. During this time, the SUPC is entirely
reset. When the VDDIO voltage becomes valid and zero-power power-on reset signal is released, a counter is
started for 5 slow clock cycles. This is the time it takes for the 32 kHz RC oscillator to stabilize.
354
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
After this time, the voltage regulator is enabled. The core power supply rises and the POR core provides the
bodcore_in signal as soon as the core voltage VDDCORE is valid. This results in releasing the vddcore_nreset
signal to the Reset Controller after the bodcore_in signal has been confirmed as valid for at least one slow clock
cycle.
Figure 18-3.
Raising the VDDIO Power Supply
TON Voltage
7 x Slow Clock Cycles
(5 for startup slow RC + 2 for synchro.) Regulator
Backup Power Supply
3 x Slow Clock
Cycles
2 x Slow Clock
Cycles
6.5 x Slow Clock
Cycles
Zero-Power POR
Zero-Power Power-On
Reset Cell output
22 - 42 kHz RC
Oscillator output
vr_on
Core Power Supply
Fast RC
Oscillator output
bodcore_in
(POR Core output)
vddcore_nreset
RSTC.ERSTL
default = 2
NRST
(no ext. drive assumed)
periph_nreset
proc_nreset
Note: After “proc_nreset” rising, the core starts fetching instructions from Flash at 8 MHz.
18.3.5 Core Reset
The SUPC manages the vddcore_nreset signal to the Reset Controller, as described in Section 18.3.4 ”Power
Supply Reset”. The vddcore_nreset signal is normally asserted before shutting down the core power supply and
released as soon as the core power supply is correctly regulated.
There are two additional sources which can be programmed to activate vddcore_nreset:
18.3.5.1
VDDIO supply monitor detection
POR core detection
Supply Monitor Reset
The supply monitor is capable of generating a reset of the system. This can be enabled by setting the SMRSTEN
bit in SUPC_SMMR.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
355
If SMRSTEN is set and if a supply monitor detection occurs, the vddcore_nreset signal is immediately activated for
a minimum of one slow clock cycle.
18.3.5.2
POR Core Reset
The POR Core provides the bodcore_in signal to the SUPC which indicates that the voltage regulation is operating
as programmed. If this signal is lost for longer than one slow clock period while the voltage regulator is enabled,
the SUPC can assert vddcore_nreset. This feature is enabled by writing the bit BODRSTEN (POR Core Reset
Enable) to 1 in SUPC_MR.
If BODRSTEN is set and the voltage regulation is lost (output voltage of the regulator too low), the vddcore_nreset
signal is asserted for a minimum of one slow clock cycle and then released if bodcore_in has been reactivated.
The BODRSTS bit is set in SUPC_SR so that the user can know the source of the last reset.
While the POR core output (bodcore_in) is cleared, the vddcore_nreset signal remains active.
18.3.6 Register Write Protection
To prevent any single software error from corrupting SUPC behavior, certain registers in the address space can be
write-protected by setting the WPEN bit in the System Controller Write Protection Mode Register (SYSC_WPMR).
The following registers can be write-protected:
RSTC Mode Register
RTT Mode Register
RTT Alarm Register
RTC Control Register
RTC Mode Register
RTC Time Alarm Register
RTC Calendar Alarm Register
General Purpose Backup Registers
Supply Controller Control Register
Supply Controller Supply Monitor Mode Register
Supply Controller Mode Register
18.3.7 Register Bits in Backup Domain (VDDIO)
The following configuration registers are physically located in the product backup domain:
356
RSTC Mode Register
RTT Mode Register
RTT Alarm Register
RTC Control Register
RTC Mode Register
RTC Time Alarm Register
RTC Calendar Alarm Register
General Purpose Backup Registers
Supply Controller Control Register
Supply Controller Supply Monitor Mode Register
Supply Controller Mode Register
Supply Controller Status Register
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
18.4
Supply Controller (SUPC) User Interface
The user interface of the Supply Controller is part of the System Controller User Interface.
18.4.1 System Controller (SYSC) User Interface
Table 18-1.
System Controller Registers
Offset
System Controller Peripheral
Name
0x00-0x0c
Reset Controller
RSTC
0x10-0x2C
Supply Controller
SUPC
0x30-0x3C
Real-Time Timer
RTT
0x50-0x5C
Watchdog Timer
WDT
0x60-0x8C
Real-Time Clock
RTC
0x90-0xDC
General-Purpose Backup Register
GPBR
0xE0
Reserved
–
0xE4
Write Protection Mode Register
SYSC_WPMR
0xE8-0xF8
Reserved
–
18.4.2 Supply Controller (SUPC) User Interface
Table 18-2.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
0x00
Supply Controller Control Register
0x04
Name
Access
Reset
SUPC_CR
Write-only
–
Supply Controller Supply Monitor Mode Register
SUPC_SMMR
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x08
Supply Controller Mode Register
SUPC_MR
Read/Write
0x00E0_5A00
0x0C-0x10
Reserved
–
–
–
0x14
Supply Controller Status Register
SUPC_SR
Read-only
0x0000_0000
0x18-0x2C
Reserved
–
–
–
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
357
18.4.3 Supply Controller Control Register
Name:
SUPC_CR
Address:
0x400E1410
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
KEY
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
XTALSEL
2
ZERO
1
–
0
–
• ZERO: This bit must always be written to 0.
This bit must always be written to 0.
• XTALSEL: Crystal Oscillator Select
0 (NO_EFFECT): No effect.
1 (CRYSTAL_SEL): If KEY is correct, switches the slow clock on the crystal oscillator output.
• KEY: Password
358
Value
Name
0xA5
PASSWD
Description
Writing any other value in this field aborts the write operation.
Always reads as 0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
18.4.4 Supply Controller Supply Monitor Mode Register
Name:
SUPC_SMMR
Address:
0x400E1414
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
SMIEN
12
SMRSTEN
11
–
10
9
SMSMPL
8
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
2
1
0
SMTH
• SMTH: Supply Monitor Threshold
Selects the threshold voltage of the supply monitor. Refer to the section “Electrical Characteristics” for voltage values.
• SMSMPL: Supply Monitor Sampling Period
Value
Name
Description
0
SMD
Supply Monitor disabled
1
CSM
Continuous Supply Monitor
2
32SLCK
Supply Monitor enables one SLCK period every 32 SLCK periods
3
256SLCK
Supply Monitor enables one SLCK period every 256 SLCK periods
4
2048SLCK
Supply Monitor enables one SLCK period every 2,048 SLCK periods
• SMRSTEN: Supply Monitor Reset Enable
0 (NOT_ENABLE): The core reset signal vddcore_nreset is not affected when a supply monitor detection occurs.
1 (ENABLE): The core reset signal vddcore_nreset is asserted when a supply monitor detection occurs.
• SMIEN: Supply Monitor Interrupt Enable
0 (NOT_ENABLE): The SUPC interrupt signal is not affected when a supply monitor detection occurs.
1 (ENABLE): The SUPC interrupt signal is asserted when a supply monitor detection occurs.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
359
18.4.5 Supply Controller Mode Register
Name:
SUPC_MR
Address:
0x400E1418
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
KEY
23
PSWITCH2
22
PSWITCH1
21
–
20
OSCBYPASS
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
BODDIS
12
BODRSTEN
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
• BODRSTEN: POR Core Reset Enable
0 (NOT_ENABLE): The core reset signal vddcore_nreset is not affected when a brownout detection occurs.
1 (ENABLE): The core reset signal vddcore_nreset is asserted when a brownout detection occurs.
• BODDIS: POR Core Disable
0 (ENABLE): The core brownout detector is enabled.
1 (DISABLE): The core brownout detector is disabled.
• OSCBYPASS: Oscillator Bypass
0 (NO_EFFECT): No effect. Clock selection depends on XTALSEL value.
1 (BYPASS): The 32 kHz crystal oscillator is bypassed if XTALSEL=1. OSCBYPASS must be set prior to write
XTALSEL=1.
• PSWITCH1: SRAM1 Power Switch
0 (OFF): The SRAM1 is not powered.
1 (ON): The SRAM1 is powered.
Refer to “Internal SRAM” in the section “Memories”.
• PSWITCH2: SRAM2 Power Switch
0 (OFF): The SRAM2 is not powered.
1 (ON): The SRAM2 is powered.
Refer to “Internal SRAM” in the section “Memories”.
• KEY: Password Key
360
Value
Name
0xA5
PASSWD
Description
Writing any other value in this field aborts the write operation.
Always reads as 0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
18.4.6 Supply Controller Status Register
Name:
SUPC_SR
Address:
0x400E1424
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
OSCSEL
6
SMOS
5
SMS
4
SMRSTS
3
BODRSTS
2
–
1
–
0
–
Note: Because of the asynchronism between the slow clock (SLCK) and the system clock (MCK), the status register flag reset is taken
into account only two slow clock cycles after the read of the SUPC_SR.
• BODRSTS: Brownout Detector Reset Status (cleared on read)
0 (NO): No core brownout rising edge event has been detected since the last read of SUPC_SR.
1 (PRESENT): At least one brownout output rising edge event has been detected since the last read of SUPC_SR.
When the voltage remains below the defined threshold, there is no rising edge event at the output of the brownout detection cell. The rising edge event occurs only when there is a voltage transition below the threshold.
• SMRSTS: Supply Monitor Reset Status (cleared on read)
0 (NO): No supply monitor detection has generated a core reset since the last read of SUPC_SR.
1 (PRESENT): At least one supply monitor detection has generated a core reset since the last read of SUPC_SR.
• SMS: Supply Monitor Status (cleared on read)
0 (NO): No supply monitor detection since the last read of SUPC_SR.
1 (PRESENT): At least one supply monitor detection since the last read of SUPC_SR.
• SMOS: Supply Monitor Output Status
0 (HIGH): The supply monitor detected VDDIO higher than its threshold at its last measurement.
1 (LOW): The supply monitor detected VDDIO lower than its threshold at its last measurement.
• OSCSEL: 32-kHz Oscillator Selection Status
0 (RC): The slow clock SLCK is generated by the embedded 32 kHz RC oscillator.
1 (CRYST): The slow clock SLCK is generated by the 32 kHz crystal oscillator.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
361
18.4.7 System Controller Write Protection Mode Register
Name:
SYSC_WPMR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
WPEN
WPKEY
23
22
21
20
WPKEY
15
14
13
12
WPKEY
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
• WPEN: Write Protection Enable
0: Disables the write protection if WPKEY corresponds to 0x525443 (“RTC” in ASCII).
1: Enables the write protection if WPKEY corresponds to 0x525443 (“RTC” in ASCII).
See Section 18.3.6 ”Register Write Protection” for the list of registers that can be write-protected.
• WPKEY: Write Protection Key
Value
Name
0x525443
PASSWD
362
Description
Writing any other value in this field aborts the write operation of the WPEN bit.
Always reads as 0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
19.
General Purpose Backup Registers (GPBR)
19.1
Description
The System Controller embeds 256 bits of General Purpose Backup registers organized as Eight 32-bit registers.
19.2
Embedded Characteristics
256 bits of General Purpose Backup Registers
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
363
19.3
General Purpose Backup Registers (GPBR) User Interface
Table 19-1.
Offset
0x0
...
0xAC
364
Register Mapping
Register
Name
General Purpose Backup Register 0
SYS_GPBR0
...
...
General Purpose Backup Register 7
SYS_GPBR7
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Access
Reset
Read/Write
0x00000000
...
...
Read/Write
0x00000000
19.3.1 General Purpose Backup Register x
Name:
SYS_GPBRx
Address:
0x400E1490
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
18
17
16
10
9
8
2
1
0
GPBR_VALUE
23
22
21
20
19
GPBR_VALUE
15
14
13
12
11
GPBR_VALUE
7
6
5
4
3
GPBR_VALUE
These registers are reset at first power-up and on each loss of VDDIO.
• GPBR_VALUE: Value of GPBR x
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
365
20.
Memory to Memory (MEM2MEM)
20.1
Description
The Memory to Memory (MEM2MEM) module allows the Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC) to perform memory to
memory transfer without CPU intervention. The transfer size can be configured in byte, half-word or word. Two
PDC channels are required to perform the transfer; one channel defines the source of the transfer and the other
defines the destination.
20.2
366
Embedded Characteristics
Allows PDC to perform memory to memory transfer
Supports byte, half-word and word transfer
Interrupt for End of Transfer
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
20.3
Block Diagram
Figure 20-1.
Memory to Memory Block Diagram
PDC
MEM2MEM
Receive
Channel
MEM2MEM
Transmit
Channel
MEM2MEM
RXEND
RXBUFF
Interrupt
Controller
Control Logic
peripheral clock
User Interface
PMC
THR
APB
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
367
20.4
Product Dependencies
20.4.1 Power Management
The MEM2MEM is not continuously clocked. The user must first configure the Power Management Controller
(PMC) to enable the MEM2MEM clock.
20.4.2 Interrupt Sources
The MEM2MEM interface has an interrupt line connected to the Interrupt Controller.
Handling the MEM2MEM interrupt requires programming the Interrupt Controller before configuring the
MEM2MEM.
Table 20-1.
20.5
Peripheral IDs
Instance
ID
MEM2MEM
15
Functional Description
The memory to memory transfer requires two operations.
The PDC receive channel associated to the MEM2MEM module must be configured with the transfer destination
address and buffer size.
The PDC transmit channel associated to the MEM2MEM module must be configured with the source address and
buffer size. The transmit channel buffer size must be equal to the receive channel buffer size.
The two PDC channels exchange data through the Memory to Memory Transfer Holding Register
(MEM2MEM_THR) which appears fully transparent from configuration. This register can be used as a general
purpose register in case the memory to memory transfer capability is not used.
The size of each element of the data buffer can be configured in byte, half-word or word by writing TSIZE field in
the Memory to Memory Mode Register (MEM2MEM_MR). Word transfer (32-bit) is the default size.
The transfer ends when either RXEND rises and/or RXBUFF rises in the Memory to Memory Interrupt Status
Register (MEM2MEM_ISR).
An interrupt can be triggered at the end of transfer by configuring the Memory to Memory Interrupt Enable Register
(MEM2MEM_IER). Refer to the PDC section of the product datasheet for detailed information.
368
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
20.6
Memory to Memory (MEM2MEM) User Interface
Table 20-2.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x00
Memory to Memory Transfer Holding Register
MEM2MEM_THR
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x04
Memory to Memory Mode Register
MEM2MEM_MR
Read/Write
0x0000_0002
0x08
Memory to Memory Interrupt Enable Register
MEM2MEM_IER
Write-only
–
0x0C
Memory to Memory Interrupt Disable Register
MEM2MEM_IDR
Write-only
–
0x10
Memory to Memory Interrupt Mask Register
MEM2MEM_IMR
Read-only
0x0000_0000
0x14
Memory to Memory Interrupt Status Register
MEM2MEM_ISR
Read-only
0x0000_0000
0x18–0xFC
Reserved
–
–
–
0x100–0x124
Reserved for PDC Registers
–
–
–
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
369
20.6.1 Memory to Memory Transfer Holding Register
Name:
MEM2MEM_THR
Address:
0x40028000
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
THDATA
23
22
21
20
THDATA
15
14
13
12
THDATA
7
6
5
4
THDATA
• THDATA: Transfer Holding Data
Must be written by the PDC transmit channel and read by the PDC receive channel.
370
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
20.6.2 Memory to Memory Mode Register
Name:
MEM2MEM_MR
Address:
0x40028004
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
0
TSIZE
• TSIZE: Transfer Size
Value
Name
Description
0x0
T_8BIT
The buffer size is defined in byte.
0x1
T_16BIT
The buffer size is defined in half-word (16-bit).
0x2
T_32BIT
The buffer size is defined in word (32-bit). Default value.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
371
20.6.3 Memory to Memory Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
MEM2MEM_IER
Address:
0x40028008
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
RXBUFF
0
RXEND
• RXEND: End of Transfer Interrupt Enable
0: No effect
1: Enables the corresponding interrupt.
• RXBUFF: Buffer Full Interrupt Enable
0: No effect
1: Enables the corresponding interrupt.
372
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
20.6.4 Memory to Memory Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
MEM2MEM_IDR
Address:
0x4002800C
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
RXBUFF
0
RXEND
• RXEND: End of Transfer Interrupt Disable
0: No effect
1: Disables the corresponding interrupt.
• RXBUFF: Buffer Full Interrupt Disable
0: No effect
1: Disables the corresponding interrupt.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
373
20.6.5 Memory to Memory Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
MEM2MEM_IMR
Address:
0x40028010
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
RXBUFF
0
RXEND
• RXEND: End of Transfer Interrupt Mask
0: The corresponding interrupt is not enabled.
1: The corresponding interrupt is enabled.
• RXBUFF: Buffer Full Interrupt Mask
0: The corresponding interrupt is not enabled.
1: The corresponding interrupt is enabled.
374
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
20.6.6 Memory to Memory Interrupt Status Register
Name:
MEM2MEM_ISR
Address:
0x40028014
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
RXBUFF
0
RXEND
• RXEND: End of Transfer
0: The End of Transfer signal from the PDC receive channel is inactive.
1: The End of Transfer signal from the PDC receive channel is active.
• RXBUFF: Buffer Full
0: The signal Buffer Full from the PDC receive channel is inactive.
1: The signal Buffer Full from the PDC receive channel is active.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
375
21.
Enhanced Embedded Flash Controller (EEFC)
21.1
Description
The Enhanced Embedded Flash Controller (EEFC) provides the interface of the Flash block with the 32-bit internal
bus.
Its 128-bit or 64-bit wide memory interface increases performance. It also manages the programming, erasing,
locking and unlocking sequences of the Flash using a full set of commands. One of the commands returns the
embedded Flash descriptor definition that informs the system about the Flash organization, thus making the
software generic.
21.2
21.3
Embedded Characteristics
Increases Performance in Thumb-2 Mode with 128-bit or 64-bit-wide Memory Interface up to 48 MHz
Code Loop Optimization
64 Lock Bits, Each Protecting a Lock Region
8 General-purpose GPNVM Bits
One-by-one Lock Bit Programming
Commands Protected by a Keyword
Erase the Entire Flash
Erase by Plane
Erase by Sector
Erase by Page
Provides Unique Identifier
Provides 512-byte User Signature Area
Supports Erasing before Programming
Locking and Unlocking Operations
Supports Read of the Calibration Bits
Product Dependencies
21.3.1 Power Management
The Enhanced Embedded Flash Controller (EEFC) is continuously clocked. The Power Management Controller
has no effect on its behavior.
21.3.2 Interrupt Sources
The EEFC interrupt line is connected to the interrupt controller. Using the EEFC interrupt requires the interrupt
controller to be programmed first. The EEFC interrupt is generated only if the value of bit EEFC_FMR.FRDY is 1.
Table 21-1.
21.4
Peripheral IDs
Instance
ID
EFC
6
Functional Description
21.4.1 Embedded Flash Organization
The embedded Flash interfaces directly with the internal bus. The embedded Flash is composed of:
376
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
One memory plane organized in several pages of the same size for the code
A separate 2 x 512-byte memory area which includes the unique chip identifier
A separate 512-byte memory area for the user signature
Two 128-bit or 64-bit read buffers used for code read optimization
One 128-bit or 64-bit read buffer used for data read optimization
One write buffer that manages page programming. The write buffer size is equal to the page size. This buffer
is write-only and accessible all along the 1 Mbyte address space, so that each word can be written to its final
address.
Several lock bits used to protect write/erase operation on several pages (lock region). A lock bit is
associated with a lock region composed of several pages in the memory plane.
Several bits that may be set and cleared through the EEFC interface, called general-purpose non-volatile
memory bits (GPNVM bits)
The embedded Flash size, the page size, the organization of lock regions and the definition of GPNVM bits are
specific to the device. The EEFC returns a descriptor of the Flash controller after a ‘Get Flash Descriptor’
command has been issued by the application (see Section 21.4.3.1 ”Get Flash Descriptor Command”).
C
od
e
Ar
ea
Flash Memory Areas
@FBA+0x010
@FBA+0x000
Write “Stop Unique Identifier”
(Flash Command SPUI)
Write “Start Unique Identifier”
(Flash Command STUI)
U
ni
qu
e
Id
en
tif
ie
rA
re
a
@FBA+0x3FF
@FBA+0x010
Unique Identifier @FBA+0x000
Write “Stop User signature”
(Flash Command SPUS)
Write “Start User Signature”
(Flash Command STUS)
se
rS
ig
na
tu
re
Ar
ea
@FBA+0x1FF
U
Figure 21-1.
@FBA+0x000
FBA = Flash Base Address
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
377
Figure 21-2.
Organization of Embedded Flash for Code
Memory Plane
Start Address
Page 0
Lock Region 0
Lock Bit 0
Lock Region 1
Lock Bit 1
Lock Region (n-1)
Lock Bit (n-1)
Page (m-1)
Start Address + Flash size -1
378
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Page (n*m-1)
21.4.2 Read Operations
An optimized controller manages embedded Flash reads, thus increasing performance when the processor is
running in Thumb-2 mode by means of the 128- or 64-bit-wide memory interface.
The Flash memory is accessible through 8-, 16- and 32-bit reads.
As the Flash block size is smaller than the address space reserved for the internal memory area, the embedded
Flash wraps around the address space and appears to be repeated within it.
The read operations can be performed with or without wait states. Wait states must be programmed in the field
FWS in the Flash Mode register (EEFC_FMR). Defining FWS as 0 enables the single-cycle access of the
embedded Flash. For mre details, refer to the section “Electrical Characteristics” of this datasheet.
21.4.2.1
128- or 64-bit Access Mode
By default, the read accesses of the Flash are performed through a 128-bit wide memory interface. It improves
system performance especially when two or three wait states are needed.
For systems requiring only 1 wait state, or to focus on current consumption rather than performance, the user can
select a 64-bit wide memory access via the bit EEFC_FMR.FAM.
For more details, refer to the section “Electrical Characteristics” of this datasheet.
21.4.2.2
Code Read Optimization
Code read optimization is enabled if the bit EEFC_FMR.SCOD is cleared.
A system of 2 x 128-bit or 2 x 64-bit buffers is added in order to optimize sequential code fetch.
Note:
Immediate consecutive code read accesses are not mandatory to benefit from this optimization.
The sequential code read optimization is enabled by default. If the bit EEFC_FMR.SCOD is set to 1, these buffers
are disabled and the sequential code read is no longer optimized.
Another system of 2 x 128-bit or 2 x 64-bit buffers is added in order to optimize loop code fetch. Refer to
Section 21.4.2.3 ”Code Loop Optimization” for more details.
Figure 21-3.
Code Read Optimization for FWS = 0
Master Clock
ARM Request
(32-bit)
@0
@+4
@ +8
@+12
@+16
@+20
@+24
@+28
@+32
anticipation of @16-31
Flash Access
Buffer 0 (128 bits)
Buffer 1 (128 bits)
Data to ARM XXX
Bytes 0–15
Bytes 16–31
XXX
Bytes 32–47
Bytes 32–47
Bytes 0–15
XXX
Bytes 0–3
Bytes 16–31
Bytes 4–7
Bytes 8–11
Bytes 12–15
Bytes 16–19
Bytes 20–23
Bytes 24–27
Bytes 28–31
Note: When FWS is equal to 0, all the accesses are performed in a single-cycle access.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
379
Figure 21-4.
Code Read Optimization for FWS = 3
Master Clock
ARM Request
(32-bit)
@+4 @+8 @+12 @+16 @+20 @+24 @+28 @+32 @+36 @+40 @+44 @+48 @+52
@0
wait 3 cycles before
128-bit data is stable
@0/4/8/12 are ready
Flash Access
anticipation of @32-47
anticipation of @16-31
@16/20/24/28 are ready
Bytes 0–15
Bytes 16–31
Buffer 0 (128 bits)
Bytes 32–47
Bytes 0–15
Buffer 1 (128 bits)
Bytes 32–47
Bytes 16–31
XXX
XXX
Data to ARM
0–3
Bytes 48–6
4–7
8–11
12–15
16–19 20–23
24–27
28–31 32–35
36–39
40–43
44–47
48–51
Note: When FWS is between 1 and 3, in case of sequential reads, the first access takes (FWS + 1) cycles. The following accesses take
only one cycle.
21.4.2.3
Code Loop Optimization
Code loop optimization is enabled when the bit EEFC_FMR.CLOE is set to 1.
When a backward jump is inserted in the code, the pipeline of the sequential optimization is broken and becomes
inefficient. In this case, the loop code read optimization takes over from the sequential code read optimization to
prevent the insertion of wait states. The loop code read optimization is enabled by default. In EEFC_FMR, if the bit
CLOE is reset to 0 or the bit SCOD is set to 1, these buffers are disabled and the loop code read is not optimized.
When code loop optimization is enabled, if inner loop body instructions L0 to Ln are positioned from the 128-bit
Flash memory cell Mb0 to the memory cell Mp1, after recognition of a first backward branch, the first two Flash
memory cells Mb0 and Mb1 targeted by this branch are cached for fast access from the processor at the next loop
iteration.
Then by combining the sequential prefetch (described in Section 21.4.2.2 ”Code Read Optimization”) through the
loop body with the fast read access to the loop entry cache, the entire loop can be iterated with no wait state.
Figure 21-5 illustrates code loop optimization.
Figure 21-5.
Code Loop Optimization
Backward address jump
Flash Memory
128-bit words
Mb0
B0
B1
Mb1
Mp0
L0
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
Ln-5
Ln-4
Ln-3
Ln-2
Ln-1
Ln
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
2x128-bit loop entry
cache
380
Mp1
2x128-bit prefetch
buffer
Mb0 Branch Cache 0
L0 Loop Entry instruction
Mp0 Prefetch Buffer 0
Mb1 Branch Cache 1
Ln Loop End instruction
Mp1 Prefetch Buffer 1
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
P6
P7
21.4.2.4
Data Read Optimization
The organization of the Flash in 128 bits or 64 bits is associated with two 128-bit or 64-bit prefetch buffers and one
128-bit or 64-bit data read buffer, thus providing maximum system performance. This buffer is added in order to
store the requested data plus all the data contained in the 128-bit or 64-bit aligned data. This speeds up sequential
data reads if, for example, FWS is equal to 1 (see Figure 21-6). The data read optimization is enabled by default. If
the bit EEFC_FMR.SCOD is set to 1, this buffer is disabled and the data read is no longer optimized.
Note:
Figure 21-6.
No consecutive data read accesses are mandatory to benefit from this optimization.
Data Read Optimization for FWS = 1
Master Clock
ARM Request
(32-bit)
@Byte 0
@4
Flash Access XXX
@ 12
@ 16
Bytes 0–15
XXX
@ 20
@ 24
@ 28
4–7
8–11
@ 36
Bytes 32–47
Bytes 0–15
Bytes 0–3
@ 32
Bytes 16–31
XXX
Buffer (128 bits)
Data to ARM
@8
Bytes 16–31
12–15
16–19
20–23
24–27
28–31
32–35
21.4.3 Flash Commands
The EEFC offers a set of commands to manage programming the Flash memory, locking and unlocking lock
regions, consecutive programming, locking and full Flash erasing, etc.
The commands are listed in the following table.
Table 21-2.
Set of Commands
Command
Value
Mnemonic
Get Flash descriptor
0x00
GETD
Write page
0x01
WP
Write page and lock
0x02
WPL
Erase page and write page
0x03
EWP
Erase page and write page then lock
0x04
EWPL
Erase all
0x05
EA
Erase pages
0x07
EPA
Set lock bit
0x08
SLB
Clear lock bit
0x09
CLB
Get lock bit
0x0A
GLB
Set GPNVM bit
0x0B
SGPB
Clear GPNVM bit
0x0C
CGPB
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
381
Table 21-2.
Set of Commands (Continued)
Command
Value
Mnemonic
Get GPNVM bit
0x0D
GGPB
Start read unique identifier
0x0E
STUI
Stop read unique identifier
0x0F
SPUI
Get CALIB bit
0x10
GCALB
Erase sector
0x11
ES
Write user signature
0x12
WUS
Erase user signature
0x13
EUS
Start read user signature
0x14
STUS
Stop read user signature
0x15
SPUS
In order to execute one of these commands, select the required command using the FCMD field in the Flash
Command register (EEFC_FCR). As soon as EEFC_FCR is written, the FRDY flag and the FVALUE field in the
Flash Result register (EEFC_FRR) are automatically cleared. Once the current command has completed, the
FRDY flag is automatically set. If an interrupt has been enabled by setting the bit EEFC_FMR.FRDY, the
corresponding interrupt line of the interrupt controller is activated. (Note that this is true for all commands except
for the STUI command. The FRDY flag is not set when the STUI command has completed.)
All the commands are protected by the same keyword, which must be written in the eight highest bits of
EEFC_FCR.
Writing EEFC_FCR with data that does not contain the correct key and/or with an invalid command has no effect
on the whole memory plane, but the FCMDE flag is set in the Flash Status register (EEFC_FSR). This flag is
automatically cleared by a read access to EEFC_FSR.
When the current command writes or erases a page in a locked region, the command has no effect on the whole
memory plane, but the FLOCKE flag is set in EEFC_FSR. This flag is automatically cleared by a read access to
EEFC_FSR.
382
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 21-7.
Command State Chart
Read Status: EEFC_FSR
No
Check if FRDY flag Set
Yes
Write FCMD and PAGENB in Flash Command Register
Read Status: EEFC_FSR
No
Check if FRDY flag Set
Yes
Check if FLOCKE flag Set
Yes
Locking region violation
No
Check if FCMDE flag Set
Yes
Bad keyword violation
No
Command Successful
21.4.3.1
Get Flash Descriptor Command
This command provides the system with information on the Flash organization. The system can take full
advantage of this information. For instance, a device could be replaced by one with more Flash capacity, and so
the software is able to adapt itself to the new configuration.
To get the embedded Flash descriptor, the application writes the GETD command in EEFC_FCR. The first word of
the descriptor can be read by the software application in EEFC_FRR as soon as the FRDY flag in EEFC_FSR
rises. The next reads of EEFC_FRR provide the following word of the descriptor. If extra read operations to
EEFC_FRR are done after the last word of the descriptor has been returned, the EEFC_FRR value is 0 until the
next valid command.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
383
Table 21-3.
Flash Descriptor Definition
Symbol
Word Index
Description
FL_ID
0
Flash interface description
FL_SIZE
1
Flash size in bytes
FL_PAGE_SIZE
2
Page size in bytes
FL_NB_PLANE
3
Number of planes
FL_PLANE[0]
4
Number of bytes in the plane
FL_NB_LOCK
4 + FL_NB_PLANE
Number of lock bits. A bit is associated with a lock region. A lock bit is
used to prevent write or erase operations in the lock region.
FL_LOCK[0]
4 + FL_NB_PLANE + 1
Number of bytes in the first lock region
21.4.3.2
Write Commands
Several commands are used to program the Flash.
Only 0 values can be programmed using Flash technology; 1 is the erased value. In order to program words in a
page, the page must first be erased. Commands are available to erase the full memory plane or a given number of
pages. With the EWP and EWPL commands, a page erase is done automatically before a page programming.
After programming, the page (the entire lock region) can be locked to prevent miscellaneous write or erase
sequences. The lock bit can be automatically set after page programming using WPL or EWPL commands.
Data to be programmed in the Flash must be written in an internal latch buffer before writing the programming
command in EEFC_FCR. Data can be written at their final destination address, as the latch buffer is mapped into
the Flash memory address space and wraps around within this Flash address space.
Byte and half-word AHB accesses to the latch buffer are not allowed. Only 32-bit word accesses are supported.
32-bit words must be written continuously, in either ascending or descending order. Writing the latch buffer in a
random order is not permitted. This prevents mapping a C-code structure to the latch buffer and accessing the
data of the structure in any order. It is instead recommended to fill in a C-code structure in SRAM and copy it in the
latch buffer in a continuous order.
Write operations in the latch buffer are performed with the number of wait states programmed for reading the
Flash.
The latch buffer is automatically re-initialized, i.e., written with logical 1, after execution of each programming
command.
The programming sequence is the following:
1. Write the data to be programmed in the latch buffer.
2.
Write the programming command in EEFC_FCR. This automatically clears the bit EEFC_FSR.FRDY.
3.
When Flash programming is completed, the bit EEFC_FSR.FRDY rises. If an interrupt has been enabled by
setting the bit EEFC_FMR.FRDY, the interrupt line of the EEFC is activated.
Three errors can be detected in EEFC_FSR after a programming sequence:
Command Error: A bad keyword has been written in EEFC_FCR.
Lock Error: The page to be programmed belongs to a locked region. A command must be run previously to
unlock the corresponding region.
Flash Error: When programming is completed, the WriteVerify test of the Flash memory has failed.
Only one page can be programmed at a time. It is possible to program all the bits of a page (full page
programming) or only some of the bits of the page (partial page programming).
384
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Depending on the number of bits to be programmed within the page, the EEFC adapts the write operations
required to program the Flash.
When a ‘Write Page’ (WP) command is issued, the EEFC starts the programming sequence and all the bits written
at 0 in the latch buffer are cleared in the Flash memory array.
During programming, i.e., until EEFC_FSR.FDRY rises, access to the Flash is not allowed.
Full Page Programming
To program a full page, all the bits of the page must be erased before writing the latch buffer and issuing the WP
command. The latch buffer must be written in ascending order, starting from the first address of the page. See
Figure 21-8 "Full Page Programming".
Partial Page Programming
To program only part of a page using the WP command, the following constraints must be respected:
Data to be programmed must be contained in integer multiples of 64-bit address-aligned
words.
64-bit words can be programmed only if all the corresponding bits in the Flash array are
erased (at logical value 1).
See Figure 21-9 "Partial Page Programming".
Optimized Partial Page Programming
The EEFC automatically detects the number of 128-bit words to be programmed. If only one 128-bit aligned word
is to be programmed in the Flash array, the process is optimized to reduce the time needed for programming.
If several 128-bit words are to be programmed, a standard page programming operation is performed.
See Figure 21-10 "Optimized Partial Page Programming".
Programming Bytes
Individual bytes can be programmed using the Partial page programming mode.
In this case, an area of 64 bits must be reserved for each byte.
Refer to Figure 21-11 "Programming Bytes in the Flash".
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
385
Figure 21-8.
Full Page Programming
32 bits wide
32 bits wide
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX1C
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX14
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX10
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX0C
0xX08
FF
FF
FE
0xX04
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX04
FE
0xX00
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX00
CA
FE
CA
FE
CA
FE
CA
FE
0xX1C
CA
FE
CA
FE
0xX18
CA
FE
CA
FE
0xX14
CA
FE
CA
FE
0xX10
CA
FE
CA
FE
0xX0C
CA
FE
CA
FE
CA
FE
CA
CA
FE
CA
address space
for
Page N
Before programming: Unerased page in Flash array
0xX18
0xX08
Step 1: Flash array after page erase
DE
CA
DE
CA
DE
CA
DE
CA
0xX1C
DE
CA
DE
CA
0xX18
DE
DE
CA
CA
DE
DE
CA
CA
0xX14
0xX0C
DE
CA
DE
CA
0xX0C
CA
0xX08
DE
CA
DE
CA
0xX08
DE
CA
0xX04
DE
CA
DE
CA
0xX04
DE
CA
0xX00
DE
CA
DE
CA
0xX00
DE
CA
DE
CA
DE
CA
DE
CA
0xX1C
DE
CA
DE
CA
0xX18
DE
DE
CA
CA
DE
DE
CA
CA
0xX14
DE
CA
DE
CA
DE
CA
DE
DE
CA
DE
CA
0xX10
address space
for
latch buffer
Step 2: Writing a page in the latch buffer
0xX10
Step 3: Page in Flash array after issuing
WP command and FRDY=1
386
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
address space
for
Page N
Figure 21-9.
Partial Page Programming
32 bits wide
32 bits wide
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX1C
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX14
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX10
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
CA
CA
FE
FE
CA
CA
FE
FE
0xX0C
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX04
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX00
address space
for
Page N
Step 1: Flash array after page erase
0xX18
0xX08
Step 2: Flash array after programming
64-bit at address 0xX08 (write latch buffer + WP)
32 bits wide
32 bits wide
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
CA
CA
FE
FE
CA
CA
FE
FE
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX1C
CA
FE
CA
FE
0xX1C
0xX18
CA
FE
CA
FE
0xX18
FF
0xX14
CA
FE
CA
FE
0xX14
FF
FF
0xX10
CA
FE
CA
FE
0xX10
CA
CA
FE
FE
0xX0C
CA
FE
CA
FE
0xX0C
0xX08
CA
FE
CA
FE
0xX08
FE
FE
0xX04
CA
FE
CA
FE
0xX04
0xX00
CA
FE
CA
FE
0xX00
CA
CA
Step 3: Flash array after programming
Step 4: Flash array after programming
a second 64-bit data at address 0xX00
a 128-bit data word at address 0xX10
(write latch buffer + WP)
(write latch buffer + WP)
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
387
Figure 21-10. Optimized Partial Page Programming
32 bits wide
4 x 32 bits
4 x 32 bits
32 bits wide
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX1C
0xX18
FF
FF
FF
0xX14
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX14
FF
FF
0xX10
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX10
FF
FF
FF
0xX0C
CA
FE
FF
FF
0xX0C
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX08
FF
FF
CA
FE
0xX08
CA
FE
CA
FE
0xX04
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX04
CA
FE
CA
FE
0xX00
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX00
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX1C
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX18
Case 1: 2 x 32 bits modified, not crossing 128-bit boundary
Case 2: 2 x 32 bits modified, not crossing 128-bit boundary
User programs WP, Flash Controller sends Write Word
User programs WP, Flash Controller sends Write Word
=> Only 1 word programmed => programming period reduced
=> Only 1 word programmed => programming period reduced
32 bits wide
4 x 32 bits
4 x 32 bits
32 bits wide
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX1C
0xX18
FF
FF
FE
0xX14
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX14
CA
CA
FE
FE
0xX10
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX10
0xX0C
CA
FE
CA
FE
0xX0C
FE
CA
FE
0xX08
CA
FE
CA
FE
0xX08
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX04
CA
FE
CA
FE
0xX04
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX00
CA
FE
CA
FE
0xX00
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX1C
FF
FF
FF
FF
CA
FE
CA
CA
CA
FE
FE
CA
0xX18
Case 3: 4 x 32 bits modified across 128-bit boundary
Case 4: 4 x 32 bits modified, not crossing 128-bit boundary
User programs WP, Flash Controller sends WP
User programs WP, Flash Controller sends Write Word
=> Whole page programmed
=> Only 1 word programmed => programming period reduced
388
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 21-11. Programming Bytes in the Flash
32 bits wide
4 x 32 bits =
1 Flash word
4 x 32 bits =
1 Flash word
32 bits wide
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX1C
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
address space
0xX14
for
Page N
0xX10
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX14
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX10
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX0C
xx
xx
xx
xx
0xX0C
FF
FF
FF
FF
0xX08
xx
xx
xx
55
0xX08
xx
xx
xx
xx
0xX04
xx
xx
xx
xx
0xX04
xx
xx
xx
AA
0xX00
xx
xx
xx
AA
0xX00
0xX1C
0xX18
0xX18
Step 1: Flash array after programming first byte (0xAA)
Step 2: Flash array after programming second byte (0x55)
64-bit used at address 0xX00 (write latch buffer + WP)
64-bit used at address 0xX08 (write latch buffer + WP)
Note: The byte location shown here is for example only, it can be any byte location within a 64-bit word.
21.4.3.3
Erase Commands
Erase commands are allowed only on unlocked regions. Depending on the Flash memory, several commands can
be used to erase the Flash:
Erase All Memory (EA): All memory is erased. The processor must not fetch code from the Flash memory.
Erase Pages (EPA): 8 or 16 pages are erased in the Flash sector selected. The first page to be erased is
specified in the FARG[15:2] field of the EEFC_FCR. The first page number must be a multiple of 8, 16 or 32
depending on the number of pages to erase at the same time.
Erase Sector (ES): A full memory sector is erased. Sector size depends on the Flash memory.
EEFC_FCR.FARG must be set with a page number that is in the sector to be erased.
Note: If one subsector is locked within the first sector, the Erase Sector (ES) command cannot
be processed on non-locked subsectors of the first sector. All the lock bits of the first sector must
be cleared prior to issuing an ES command on the first sector. After the ES command has been
issued, the first sector lock bits must be reverted to the state before clearing them.
If the processor is fetching code from the Flash memory while the EPA or ES command is being executed, the
processor accesses are stalled until the EPA command is completed. To avoid stalling the processor, the code can
be run out of internal SRAM.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
389
The erase sequence is the following:
1. Erase starts as soon as one of the erase commands and the FARG field are written in EEFC_FCR.
̶
For the EPA command, the two lowest bits of the FARG field define the number of pages to be erased
(FARG[1:0]):
Table 21-4.
EEFC_FCR.FARG Field for EPA Command
FARG[1:0]
2.
Number of pages to be erased with EPA command
0
4 pages (only valid for small 8 KB sectors)
1
8 pages
2
16 pages
3
32 pages (not valid for small 8 KB sectors)
When erasing is completed, the bit EEFC_FSR.FRDY rises. If an interrupt has been enabled by setting the
bit EEFC_FMR.FRDY, the interrupt line of the interrupt controller is activated.
Three errors can be detected in EEFC_FSR after an erasing sequence:
Command Error: A bad keyword has been written in EEFC_FCR.
Lock Error: At least one page to be erased belongs to a locked region. The erase command has been
refused, no page has been erased. A command must be run previously to unlock the corresponding region.
Flash Error: At the end of the erase period, the EraseVerify test of the Flash memory has failed.
21.4.3.4
Lock Bit Protection
Lock bits are associated with several pages in the embedded Flash memory plane. This defines lock regions in the
embedded Flash memory plane. They prevent writing/erasing protected pages.
The lock sequence is the following:
1. Execute the ‘Set Lock Bit’ command by writing EEFC_FCR.FCMD with the SLB command and
EEFC_FCR.FARG with a page number to be protected.
2.
When the locking completes, the bit EEFC_FSR.FRDY rises. If an interrupt has been enabled by setting the
bit EEFC_FMR.FRDY, the interrupt line of the interrupt controller is activated.
3.
The result of the SLB command can be checked running a ‘Get Lock Bit’ (GLB) command.
Note:
The value of the FARG argument passed together with SLB command must not exceed the higher lock bit index
available in the product.
Two errors can be detected in EEFC_FSR after a programming sequence:
Command Error: A bad keyword has been written in EEFC_FCR.
Flash Error: At the end of the programming, the EraseVerify or WriteVerify test of the Flash memory has
failed.
It is possible to clear lock bits previously set. After the lock bits are cleared, the locked region can be erased or
programmed. The unlock sequence is the following:
1. Execute the ‘Clear Lock Bit’ command by writing EEFC_FCR.FCMD with the CLB command and
EEFC_FCR.FARG with a page number to be unprotected.
2.
Note:
When the unlock completes, the bit EEFC_FSR.FRDY rises. If an interrupt has been enabled by setting the
bit EEFC_FMR.FRDY, the interrupt line of the interrupt controller is activated.
The value of the FARG argument passed together with CLB command must not exceed the higher lock bit index
available in the product.
Two errors can be detected in EEFC_FSR after a programming sequence:
390
Command Error: A bad keyword has been written in EEFC_FCR.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Flash Error: At the end of the programming, the EraseVerify or WriteVerify test of the Flash memory has
failed.
The status of lock bits can be returned by the EEFC. The ‘Get Lock Bit’ sequence is the following:
1. Execute the ‘Get Lock Bit’ command by writing EEFC_FCR.FCMD with the GLB command. Field
EEFC_FCR.FARG is meaningless.
2.
Lock bits can be read by the software application in EEFC_FRR. The first word read corresponds to the 32
first lock bits, next reads providing the next 32 lock bits as long as it is meaningful. Extra reads to
EEFC_FRR return 0.
For example, if the third bit of the first word read in EEFC_FRR is set, the third lock region is locked.
Two errors can be detected in EEFC_FSR after a programming sequence:
Command Error: A bad keyword has been written in EEFC_FCR.
Flash Error: At the end of the programming, the EraseVerify or WriteVerify test of the Flash memory has
failed.
Note:
21.4.3.5
Access to the Flash in read is permitted when a ‘Set Lock Bit’, ‘Clear Lock Bit’ or ‘Get Lock Bit’ command is executed.
GPNVM Bit
GPNVM bits do not interfere with the embedded Flash memory plane. For more details, refer to the section
“Memories” of this datasheet.
The ‘Set GPNVM Bit’ sequence is the following:
1. Execute the ‘Set GPNVM Bit’ command by writing EEFC_FCR.FCMD with the SGPB command and
EEFC_FCR.FARG with the number of GPNVM bits to be set.
2.
When the GPNVM bit is set, the bit EEFC_FSR.FRDY rises. If an interrupt was enabled by setting the bit
EEFC_FMR.FRDY, the interrupt line of the interrupt controller is activated.
3.
The result of the SGPB command can be checked by running a ‘Get GPNVM Bit’ (GGPB) command.
Note:
The value of the FARG argument passed together with SGPB command must not exceed the higher GPNVM index
available in the product. Flash data content is not altered if FARG exceeds the limit. Command Error is detected only if
FARG is greater than 8.
Two errors can be detected in EEFC_FSR after a programming sequence:
Command Error: A bad keyword has been written in EEFC_FCR.
Flash Error: At the end of the programming, the EraseVerify or WriteVerify test of the Flash memory has
failed.
It is possible to clear GPNVM bits previously set. The ‘Clear GPNVM Bit’ sequence is the following:
1. Execute the ‘Clear GPNVM Bit’ command by writing EEFC_FCR.FCMD with the CGPB command and
EEFC_FCR.FARG with the number of GPNVM bits to be cleared.
2.
Note:
When the clear completes, the bit EEFC_FSR.FRDY rises. If an interrupt has been enabled by setting the bit
EEFC_FMR.FRDY, the interrupt line of the interrupt controller is activated.
The value of the FARG argument passed together with CGPB command must not exceed the higher GPNVM index
available in the product. Flash data content is not altered if FARG exceeds the limit. Command Error is detected only if
FARG is greater than 8.
Two errors can be detected in EEFC_FSR after a programming sequence:
Command Error: A bad keyword has been written in EEFC_FCR.
Flash Error: At the end of the programming, the EraseVerify or WriteVerify test of the Flash memory has
failed.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
391
The status of GPNVM bits can be returned by the EEFC. The sequence is the following:
1. Execute the ‘Get GPNVM Bit’ command by writing EEFC_FCR.FCMD with the GGPB command. Field
EEFC_FCR.FARG is meaningless.
2.
GPNVM bits can be read by the software application in EEFC_FRR. The first word read corresponds to the
32 first GPNVM bits, following reads provide the next 32 GPNVM bits as long as it is meaningful. Extra reads
to EEFC_FRR return 0.
For example, if the third bit of the first word read in EEFC_FRR is set, the third GPNVM bit is active.
One error can be detected in EEFC_FSR after a programming sequence:
Command Error: A bad keyword has been written in EEFC_FCR.
Note:
21.4.3.6
Access to the Flash in read is permitted when a ‘Set GPNVM Bit’, ‘Clear GPNVM Bit’ or ‘Get GPNVM Bit’ command is
executed.
Calibration Bit
Calibration bits do not interfere with the embedded Flash memory plane.
The calibration bits cannot be modified.
The status of calibration bits are returned by the EEFC. The sequence is the following:
1. Execute the ‘Get CALIB Bit’ command by writing EEFC_FCR.FCMD with the GCALB command. Field
EEFC_FCR.FARG is meaningless.
2.
Calibration bits can be read by the software application in EEFC_FRR. The first word read corresponds to
the first 32 calibration bits. The following reads provide the next 32 calibration bits as long as it is meaningful.
Extra reads to EEFC_FRR return 0.
The 8/16/24 MHz fast RC oscillator is calibrated in production. This calibration can be read through the GCALB
command. The following table shows the bit implementation for each frequency.
Table 21-5.
Calibration Bit Indexes
RC Calibration Frequency
EEFC_FRR Bits
16 MHz output
[28–22]
24 MHz output
[38–32]
The RC calibration for the 8 MHz is set to ‘1000000’.
21.4.3.7
Security Bit Protection
When the security bit is enabled, access to the Flash through the SWD interface or through the Fast Flash
Programming interface is forbidden. This ensures the confidentiality of the code programmed in the Flash.
The security bit is GPNVM0.
Disabling the security bit can only be achieved by asserting the ERASE pin at ‘1’, and after a full Flash erase is
performed. When the security bit is deactivated, all accesses to the Flash are permitted.
21.4.3.8
Unique Identifier Area
Each device is programmed with a 2*512-bytes unique identifier area . See Figure 21-1 "Flash Memory Areas".
The sequence to read the unique identifier area is the following:
1. Execute the ‘Start Read Unique Identifier’ command by writing EEFC_FCR.FCMD with the STUI command. Field EEFC_FCR.FARG is meaningless.
2.
392
Wait until the bit EEFC_FSR.FRDY falls to read the unique identifier area. The unique identifier field is
located in the first 128 bits of the Flash memory mapping. The ‘Start Read Unique Identifier’ command
reuses some addresses of the memory plane for code, but the unique identifier area is physically different
from the memory plane for code.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
3.
To stop reading the unique identifier area, execute the ‘Stop Read Unique Identifier’ command by writing
EEFC_FCR.FCMD with the SPUI command. Field EEFC_FCR.FARG is meaningless.
4.
When the SPUI command has been executed, the bit EEFC_FSR.FRDY rises. If an interrupt was enabled
by setting the bit EEFC_FMR.FRDY, the interrupt line of the interrupt controller is activated.
Note that during the sequence, the software cannot be fetched from the Flash.
21.4.3.9
User Signature Area
Each product contains a user signature area of 512-bytes. It can be used for storage. Read, write and erase of this
area is allowed.
See Figure 21-1 "Flash Memory Areas".
The sequence to read the user signature area is the following:
1. Execute the ‘Start Read User Signature’ command by writing EEFC_FCR.FCMD with the STUS command. Field EEFC_FCR.FARG is meaningless.
2.
Wait until the bit EEFC_FSR.FRDY falls to read the user signature area. The user signature area is located
in the first 512 bytes of the Flash memory mapping. The ‘Start Read User Signature’ command reuses some
addresses of the memory plane but the user signature area is physically different from the memory plane
3.
To stop reading the user signature area, execute the ‘Stop Read User Signature’ command by writing
EEFC_FCR.FCMD with the SPUS command. Field EEFC_FCR.FARG is meaningless.
4.
When the SPUI command has been executed, the bit EEFC_FSR.FRDY rises. If an interrupt was enabled
by setting the bit EEFC_FMR.FRDY, the interrupt line of the interrupt controller is activated.
Note that during the sequence, the software cannot be fetched from the Flash or from the second plane in case of
dual plane.
One error can be detected in EEFC_FSR after this sequence:
Command Error: A bad keyword has been written in EEFC_FCR.
The sequence to write the user signature area is the following:
1. Write the full page, at any page address, within the internal memory area address space.
2.
Execute the ‘Write User Signature’ command by writing EEFC_FCR.FCMD with the WUS command. Field
EEFC_FCR.FARG is meaningless.
3.
When programming is completed, the bit EEFC_FSR.FRDY rises. If an interrupt has been enabled by
setting the bit EEFC_FMR.FRDY, the corresponding interrupt line of the interrupt controller is activated.
Two errors can be detected in EEFC_FSR after this sequence:
Command Error: A bad keyword has been written in EEFC_FCR.
Flash Error: At the end of the programming, the WriteVerify test of the Flash memory has failed.
The sequence to erase the user signature area is the following:
1. Execute the ‘Erase User Signature’ command by writing EEFC_FCR.FCMD with the EUS command.
Field EEFC_FCR.FARG is meaningless.
2.
When programming is completed, the bit EEFC_FSR.FRDY rises. If an interrupt has been enabled by
setting the bit EEFC_FMR.FRDY, the corresponding interrupt line of the interrupt controller is activated.
Two errors can be detected in EEFC_FSR after this sequence:
Command Error: A bad keyword has been written in EEFC_FCR.
Flash Error: At the end of the programming, the EraseVerify test of the Flash memory has failed.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
393
21.5
Enhanced Embedded Flash Controller (EEFC) User Interface
The User Interface of the Embedded Flash Controller (EEFC) is integrated within the System Controller with base address
0x400E0800.
Table 21-6.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset State
0x00
EEFC Flash Mode Register
EEFC_FMR
Read/Write
0x0400_0000
0x04
EEFC Flash Command Register
EEFC_FCR
Write-only
–
0x08
EEFC Flash Status Register
EEFC_FSR
Read-only
0x0000_0001
0x0C
EEFC Flash Result Register
EEFC_FRR
Read-only
0x0
0x10–0x14
Reserved
–
–
–
0x18–0xE4
Reserved
–
–
–
394
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
21.5.1 EEFC Flash Mode Register
Name:
EEFC_FMR
Address:
0x400E0A00
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
CLOE
–
FAM
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SCOD
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
FWS
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FRDY
• FRDY: Flash Ready Interrupt Enable
0: Flash ready does not generate an interrupt.
1: Flash ready (to accept a new command) generates an interrupt.
• FWS: Flash Wait State
This field defines the number of wait states for read and write operations:
FWS = Number of cycles for Read/Write operations - 1
• SCOD: Sequential Code Optimization Disable
0: The sequential code optimization is enabled.
1: The sequential code optimization is disabled.
No Flash read should be done during change of this field.
• FAM: Flash Access Mode
0: 128-bit access in Read mode only, to enhance access speed.
1: 64-bit access in Read mode only, to enhance power consumption.
No Flash read should be done during change of this field.
• CLOE: Code Loop Optimization Enable
0: The opcode loop optimization is disabled.
1: The opcode loop optimization is enabled.
No Flash read should be done during change of this field.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
395
21.5.2 EEFC Flash Command Register
Name:
EEFC_FCR
Address:
0x400E0A04
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
FKEY
23
22
21
20
FARG
15
14
13
12
FARG
7
6
5
4
FCMD
• FCMD: Flash Command
Value
Name
Description
0x00
GETD
Get Flash descriptor
0x01
WP
Write page
0x02
WPL
Write page and lock
0x03
EWP
Erase page and write page
0x04
EWPL
Erase page and write page then lock
0x05
EA
Erase all
0x07
EPA
Erase pages
0x08
SLB
Set lock bit
0x09
CLB
Clear lock bit
0x0A
GLB
Get lock bit
0x0B
SGPB
Set GPNVM bit
0x0C
CGPB
Clear GPNVM bit
0x0D
GGPB
Get GPNVM bit
0x0E
STUI
Start read unique identifier
0x0F
SPUI
Stop read unique identifier
0x10
GCALB
Get CALIB bit
0x11
ES
Erase sector
0x12
WUS
Write user signature
0x13
EUS
Erase user signature
0x14
STUS
Start read user signature
0x15
SPUS
Stop read user signature
396
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
• FARG: Flash Command Argument
GETD, GLB,
GGPB, STUI,
SPUI, GCALB,
WUS, EUS, STUS,
SPUS, EA
Commands
requiring no
argument, including
Erase all command
FARG is meaningless, must be written with 0
ES
Erase sector
command
FARG must be written with any page number within the sector to be erased
FARG[1:0] defines the number of pages to be erased
The start page must be written in FARG[15:2].
FARG[1:0] = 0: Four pages to be erased. FARG[15:2] = Page_Number / 4
EPA
Erase pages
command
FARG[1:0] = 1: Eight pages to be erased. FARG[15:3] = Page_Number / 8, FARG[2]=0
FARG[1:0] = 2: Sixteen pages to be erased. FARG[15:4] = Page_Number / 16,
FARG[3:2]=0
FARG[1:0] = 3: Thirty-two pages to be erased. FARG[15:5] = Page_Number / 32,
FARG[4:2]=0
Refer to Table 21-4 “EEFC_FCR.FARG Field for EPA Command”.
WP, WPL, EWP,
EWPL
Programming
commands
FARG must be written with the page number to be programmed
SLB, CLB
Lock bit commands
FARG defines the page number to be locked or unlocked
SGPB, CGPB
GPNVM commands
FARG defines the GPNVM number to be programmed
• FKEY: Flash Writing Protection Key
Value
Name
0x5A
PASSWD
Description
The 0x5A value enables the command defined by the bits of the register. If the field is written with a
different value, the write is not performed and no action is started.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
397
21.5.3 EEFC Flash Status Register
Name:
EEFC_FSR
Address:
0x400E0A08
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
FLERR
FLOCKE
FCMDE
FRDY
• FRDY: Flash Ready Status (cleared when Flash is busy)
0: The EEFC is busy.
1: The EEFC is ready to start a new command.
When set, this flag triggers an interrupt if the FRDY flag is set in EEFC_FMR.
This flag is automatically cleared when the EEFC is busy.
• FCMDE: Flash Command Error Status (cleared on read or by writing EEFC_FCR)
0: No invalid commands and no bad keywords were written in EEFC_FMR.
1: An invalid command and/or a bad keyword was/were written in EEFC_FMR.
• FLOCKE: Flash Lock Error Status (cleared on read)
0: No programming/erase of at least one locked region has happened since the last read of EEFC_FSR.
1: Programming/erase of at least one locked region has happened since the last read of EEFC_FSR.
This flag is automatically cleared when EEFC_FSR is read or EEFC_FCR is written.
• FLERR: Flash Error Status (cleared when a programming operation starts)
0: No Flash memory error occurred at the end of programming (EraseVerify or WriteVerify test has passed).
1: A Flash memory error occurred at the end of programming (EraseVerify or WriteVerify test has failed).
398
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
21.5.4 EEFC Flash Result Register
Name:
EEFC_FRR
Address:
0x400E0A0C
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
FVALUE
23
22
21
20
FVALUE
15
14
13
12
FVALUE
7
6
5
4
FVALUE
• FVALUE: Flash Result Value
The result of a Flash command is returned in this register. If the size of the result is greater than 32 bits, the next resulting
value is accessible at the next register read.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
399
22.
Bus Matrix (MATRIX)
22.1
Description
The Bus Matrix (MATRIX) implements a multi-layer AHB that enables parallel access paths between multiple AHB
masters and slaves in a system, thus increasing overall bandwidth. The Bus Matrix interconnects three AHB
masters to four AHB slaves. The normal latency to connect a master to a slave is one cycle. The exception is the
default master of the accessed slave which is connected directly (zero cycle latency).
The Bus Matrix user interface also provides a System I/O Configuration user interface with registers that support
application-specific features.
22.2
Embedded Characteristics
One Decoder for Each Master
Support for Long Bursts of 32, 64 and 128 Beats and Up to the 256-beat Word Burst AHB Limit
Enhanced Programmable Mixed Arbitration for Each Slave
400
̶
Round-robin
̶
Fixed Priority
̶
Latency Quality of Service
Programmable Default Master for Each Slave
̶
No Default Master
̶
Last Accessed Default Master
̶
Fixed Default Master
Deterministic Maximum Access Latency for Masters
Zero or One Cycle Arbitration Latency for the First Access of a Burst
Bus Lock Forwarding to Slaves
Master Number Forwarding to Slaves
Register Write Protection
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
22.3
Master/Slave Management
22.3.1 Matrix Masters
The Bus Matrix manages three masters. Each master can perform an access concurrently with others to an
available slave.
Each master has its own specifically-defined decoder. In order to simplify the addressing, all the masters have the
same decoding.
Table 22-1.
List of Bus Matrix Masters
Master No.
Name
0
Processor Instruction/Data Bus
1
Processor System Bus
2
Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC)
22.3.2 Matrix Slaves
The Bus Matrix manages four slaves. Each slave has its own arbiter, providing a different arbitration per slave
Table 22-2.
List of Bus Matrix Slaves
Slave No.
Name
0
Internal SRAM
1
Internal ROM
2
Internal Flash
3
Peripheral Bridge
22.3.3 Master to Slave Access
Table 22-3 gives valid paths for master to slave access. The paths shown as “–” are forbidden or not wired, e.g.,
access from the processor I/D bus to internal SRAM.
Table 22-3.
Master to Slave Access
Masters
Slaves
22.4
0
1
2
Processor
I/D Bus
Processor
System Bus
PDC
0
Internal SRAM
–
X
X
1
Internal ROM
X
–
X
2
Internal Flash
X
–
X
3
Peripheral Bridge
–
X
X
Memory Mapping
The Bus Matrix provides one decoder for every AHB master interface. The decoder offers each AHB master
several memory mappings. Depending on the product, each memory area may be assigned to several slaves.
Thus it is possible to boot at the same address while using different AHB slaves.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
401
22.5
Special Bus Granting Techniques
The Bus Matrix provides some speculative bus granting techniques in order to anticipate access requests from
some masters, reducing latency at the first access of a burst or single transfer. The bus granting technique sets a
default master for every slave.
At the end of the current access, if no other request is pending, the slave remains connected to its associated
default master. A slave can be associated with three kinds of default masters:
No default master
Last access master
Fixed default master
22.5.1 No Default Master
At the end of the current access, if no other request is pending, the slave is disconnected from all masters. This is
suitable when the device is in low-power mode.
22.5.2 Last Access Master
At the end of the current access, if no other request is pending, the slave remains connected to the last master that
performed an access request.
22.5.3 Fixed Default Master
At the end of the current access, if no other request is pending, the slave connects to its fixed default master.
Unlike the last access master, the fixed master does not change unless the user modifies it by software (field
FIXED_DEFMSTR of the related MATRIX_SCFG).
To change from one kind of default master to another, the Bus Matrix user interface provides the Slave
Configuration registers (MATRIX_SCFGx), one for each slave, used to set a default master for each slave.
MATRIX_SCFGx contain the fields DEFMSTR_TYPE and FIXED_DEFMSTR. The 2-bit DEFMSTR_TYPE field
selects the default master type (no default, last access master, fixed default master) whereas the 4-bit
FIXED_DEFMSTR field selects a fixed default master, provided that DEFMSTR_TYPE is set to fixed default
master. Refer to the Section 22.9 “Bus Matrix (MATRIX) User Interface”.
22.6
Arbitration
The Bus Matrix provides an arbitration technique that reduces latency when conflicting cases occur; for example,
when two or more masters try to access the same slave at the same time. One arbiter per AHB slave is provided,
so that each slave can be arbitrated differently.
The Bus Matrix provides the user with two types of arbitration for each slave:
Round-robin arbitration (default)
Fixed priority arbitration
Each algorithm may be complemented by selecting a default master configuration for each slave.
When a re-arbitration must be done, specific conditions apply. See Section 22.6.1 “Arbitration Rules”.
22.6.1 Arbitration Rules
Each arbiter has the ability to arbitrate between requests from two or more masters. To avoid burst breaking and to
provide the maximum throughput for slave interfaces, arbitration should take place during the following cycles:
402
Idle cycles: When a slave is not connected to any master or is connected to a master which is not currently
accessing it.
Single cycles: When a slave is currently doing a single access.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
End of Burst cycles: When the current cycle is the last cycle of a burst transfer. For a defined burst length,
predicted end of burst matches the size of the transfer but is managed differently for undefined length burst.
See Section 22.6.1.1 “Undefined Length Burst Arbitration”.
Slot cycle limit: When the slot cycle counter has reached the limit value indicating that the current master
access is too long and must be broken. See Section 22.6.1.2 “Slot Cycle Limit Arbitration”.
22.6.1.1
Undefined Length Burst Arbitration
In order to prevent long AHB burst lengths that can lock the access to the slave for an excessive period of time, the
user can trigger the re-arbitration before the end of the incremental bursts. The re-arbitration period can be
selected from the following Undefined Length Burst Type (ULBT) possibilities:
Unlimited: no predetermined end of burst is generated. This value enables 1 Kbyte burst lengths.
4-beat bursts: predetermined end of burst is generated at the end of each 4-beat boundary during INCR
transfer.
8-beat bursts: predetermined end of burst is generated at the end of each 8-beat boundary during INCR
transfer.
16-beat bursts: predetermined end of burst is generated at the end of each 16-beat boundary during INCR
transfer.
This selection is made through the ULBT field of the Master Configuration registers (MATRIX_MCFG).
22.6.1.2
Slot Cycle Limit Arbitration
The Bus Matrix contains specific logic to break long accesses, such as very long bursts on a very slow slave (e.g.,
an external low speed memory). At the beginning of the burst access, a counter is loaded with the value previously
written in the SLOT_CYCLE field of the related MATRIX_SCFG and decreased at each clock cycle. When the
counter reaches zero, the arbiter has the ability to re-arbitrate at the end of the current byte, half-word or word
transfer.
22.6.1.3
Round-Robin Arbitration
The Bus Matrix arbiters use the round-robin algorithm to dispatch the requests from different masters to the same
slave. If two or more masters make a request at the same time, the master with the lowest number is serviced first.
The others are then serviced in a round-robin manner.
Three round-robin algorithms are implemented:
Round-robin arbitration without default master
Round-robin arbitration with last access master
Round-robin arbitration with fixed default master
Round-robin arbitration without default master
Round-robin arbitration without default master is the main algorithm used by Bus Matrix arbiters. Using this
algorithm, the Bus Matrix dispatches requests from different masters to the same slave in a pure round-robin
manner. At the end of the current access, if no other request is pending, the slave is disconnected from all
masters. This configuration incurs one latency cycle for the first access of a burst. Arbitration without default
master can be used for masters that perform significant bursts.
Round-robin arbitration with last access master
Round-robin arbitration with last access master is a biased round-robin algorithm used by Bus Matrix arbiters to
remove one latency cycle for the last master that accessed the slave. At the end of the current transfer, if no other
master request is pending, the slave remains connected to the last master that performs the access. Other nonprivileged masters still get one latency cycle if they attempt to access the same slave. This technique can be used
for masters that mainly perform single accesses.
Round-robin arbitration with fixed default master
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
403
Round-robin arbitration with fixed default master is an algorithm used by the Bus Matrix arbiters to remove the one
latency cycle for the fixed default master per slave. At the end of the current access, the slave remains connected
to its fixed default master. Every request attempted by this fixed default master will not cause any latency whereas
other non-privileged masters will still get one latency cycle. This technique can be used for masters that mainly
perform single accesses.
22.6.1.4
Fixed Priority Arbitration
The fixed priority algorithm is used by the Bus Matrix arbiters to dispatch the requests from different masters to the
same slave by using the fixed priority defined by the user. If requests from two or more masters are active at the
same time, the master with the highest priority number is serviced first. If requests from two or more master with
the same priority are active at the same time, the master with the highest number is serviced first.
For each slave, the priority of each master may be defined through the Priority registers for slaves
(MATRIX_PRAS and MATRIX_PRBS).
22.7
System I/O Configuration
The System I/O Configuration register (CCFG_SYSIO) configures I/O lines in system I/O mode (such as JTAG,
ERASE, etc.) or as general-purpose I/O lines. Enabling or disabling the corresponding I/O lines in peripheral mode
or in PIO mode (PIO_PER or PIO_PDR registers) in the PIO controller has no effect. However, the direction (input
or output), pull-up, pull-down and other mode control is still managed by the PIO controller.
22.8
Register Write Protection
To prevent any single software error from corrupting MATRIX behavior, certain registers in the address space can
be write-protected by setting the WPEN bit in the “Bus Matrix Write Protection Mode Register” (MATRIX_WPMR).
If a write access to a write-protected register is detected, the WPVS flag in the “Bus Matrix Write Protection Status
Register” (MATRIX_WPSR) is set and the field WPVSRC indicates the register in which the write access has
been attempted.
The WPVS flag is reset by writing the MATRIX_WPMR with the appropriate access key WPKEY.
The following registers can be write-protected:
404
“Bus Matrix Master Configuration Registers”
“Bus Matrix Slave Configuration Registers”
“Bus Matrix Priority Registers For Slaves”
“System I/O Configuration Register”
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
22.9
Bus Matrix (MATRIX) User Interface
Table 22-4.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x0000
Master Configuration Register 0
MATRIX_MCFG0
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x0004
Master Configuration Register 1
MATRIX_MCFG1
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x0008
Master Configuration Register 2
MATRIX_MCFG2
Read/Writ
0x00000000
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0040
Slave Configuration Register 0
MATRIX_SCFG0
Read/Write
0x00010010
0x0044
Slave Configuration Register 1
MATRIX_SCFG1
Read/Write
0x00050010
0x0048
Slave Configuration Register 2
MATRIX_SCFG2
Read/Write
0x00000010
0x004C
Slave Configuration Register 3
MATRIX_SCFG3
Read/Write
0x00000010
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0080
Priority Register A for Slave 0
MATRIX_PRAS0
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x0084
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0088
Priority Register A for Slave 1
MATRIX_PRAS1
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x008C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0090
Priority Register A for Slave 2
MATRIX_PRAS2
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x0094
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0098
Priority Register A for Slave 3
MATRIX_PRAS3
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x009C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0110
Reserved
–
–
0x22222224 (1)
0x0114
System I/O Configuration Register
CCFG_SYSIO
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
Reserved
–
–
–
0x1E4
Write Protection Mode Register
MATRIX_WPMR
Read/Write
0x0
0x1E8
Write Protection Status Register
MATRIX_WPSR
Read-only
0x0
Reserved
–
–
–
0x000C–0x003C
0x0050–0x007C
0x0118–0x01E0
0x01EC–0x01FC
Note:
1. This default reset value must not be modified.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
405
22.9.1 Bus Matrix Master Configuration Registers
Name:
MATRIX_MCFGx [x = 0..2]
Address:
0x400E0200
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
–
–
–
–
–
ULBT
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the Bus Matrix Write Protection Mode Register.
• ULBT: Undefined Length Burst Type
Value
Name
Description
0
UNLIMITED
No predicted end of burst is generated and therefore INCR bursts coming from this master cannot be
broken.
1
SINGLE
The undefined length burst is treated as a succession of single access allowing rearbitration at each beat
of the INCR burst.
2
4_BEAT
The undefined length burst is split into a 4-beat bursts allowing rearbitration at each 4-beat burst end.
3
8_BEAT
The undefined length burst is split into 8-beat bursts allowing rearbitration at each 8-beat burst end.
4
16_BEAT
The undefined length burst is split into 16-beat bursts allowing rearbitration at each 16-beat burst end.
406
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
22.9.2 Bus Matrix Slave Configuration Registers
Name:
MATRIX_SCFGx [x = 0..3]
Address:
0x400E0240
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
FIXED_DEFMSTR
DEFMSTR_TYPE
SLOT_CYCLE
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the Bus Matrix Write Protection Mode Register.
• SLOT_CYCLE: Maximum Number of Allowed Cycles for a Burst
When SLOT_CYCLE AHB clock cycles have elapsed since the last arbitration, a new arbitration takes place to let another
master access this slave. If another master is requesting the slave bus, then the current master burst is broken.
If SLOT_CYCLE = 0, the slot cycle limit feature is disabled and bursts always complete unless broken according to the
ULBT.
This limit has been placed in order to enforce arbitration so as to meet potential latency constraints of masters waiting for
slave access.
This limit must not be too small. Unreasonably small values break every burst and the Bus Matrix arbitrates without performing any data transfer. The default maximum value is usually an optimal conservative choice.
In most cases, this feature is not needed and should be disabled for power saving.
See Section 22.6.1.2 “Slot Cycle Limit Arbitration” for details.
• DEFMSTR_TYPE: Default Master Type
Value
0
1
Name
NO_DEFAUL
T
LAST
Description
At the end of current slave access, if no other master request is pending, the slave is disconnected from all
masters.
This results in having a one cycle latency for the first access of a burst transfer or for a single access.
At the end of current slave access, if no other master request is pending, the slave stays connected to the
last master having accessed it.
This results in not having the one cycle latency when the last master tries to access the slave again.
2
FIXED
At the end of the current slave access, if no other master request is pending, the slave connects to the
fixed master the number that has been written in the FIXED_DEFMSTR field.
This results in not having the one cycle latency when the fixed master tries to access the slave again.
• FIXED_DEFMSTR: Fixed Default Master
The number of the default master for this slave. Only used if DEFMSTR_TYPE is 2. Specifying the number of a master
which is not connected to the selected slave is equivalent to setting DEFMSTR_TYPE to 0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
407
22.9.3 Bus Matrix Priority Registers For Slaves
Name:
MATRIX_PRAS0..MATRIX_PRAS3
Address:
0x400E0280 [0], 0x400E0288 [1], 0x400E0290 [2], 0x400E0298 [3]
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
7
6
–
–
M3PR
5
4
M1PR
3
2
–
–
M2PR
1
0
M0PR
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the Bus Matrix Write Protection Mode Register.
• MxPR: Master x Priority
Fixed priority of master x to access the selected slave. The higher the number, the higher the priority.
408
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
22.9.4 System I/O Configuration Register
Name:
CCFG_SYSIO
Address:
0x400E0314
Access
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
SYSIO12
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SYSIO7
SYSIO6
SYSIO5
SYSIO4
–
–
–
–
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the Bus Matrix Write Protection Mode Register.
• SYSIO4: PB4 or TDI Assignment
0: TDI function selected.
1: PB4 function selected.
• SYSIO5: PB5 or TDO/TRACESWO Assignment
0: TDO/TRACESWO function selected.
1: PB5 function selected.
• SYSIO6: PB6 or TMS/SWDIO Assignment
0: TMS/SWDIO function selected.
1: PB6 function selected.
• SYSIO7: PB7 or TCK/SWCLK Assignment
0: TCK/SWCLK function selected.
1: PB7 function selected.
• SYSIO12: PB12 or ERASE Assignment
0: ERASE function selected.
1: PB12 function selected.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
409
22.9.5 Bus Matrix Write Protection Mode Register
Name:
MATRIX_WPMR
Address:
0x400E03E4
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
WPKEY
23
22
21
20
WPKEY
15
14
13
12
WPKEY
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
WPEN
• WPEN: Write Protection Enable
0: Disables the write protection if WPKEY corresponds to 0x4D4154 (“MAT” in ASCII).
1: Enables the write protection if WPKEY corresponds to 0x4D4154 (“MAT” in ASCII).
See Section 22.8 “Register Write Protection“ for the list of registers that can be write-protected.
• WPKEY: Write Protection Key
Value
Name
0x4D4154
PASSWD
410
Description
Writing any other value in this field aborts the write operation of the WPEN bit. Always reads as 0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
22.9.6 Bus Matrix Write Protection Status Register
Name:
MATRIX_WPSR
Address:
0x400E03E8
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
WPVSRC
15
14
13
12
WPVSRC
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
WPVS
• WPVS: Write Protection Violation Status
0: No write protection violation has occurred since the last write of the MATRIX_WPMR.
1: A write protection violation has occurred since the last write of the MATRIX_WPMR. If this violation is an unauthorized
attempt to write a protected register, the associated violation is reported into field WPVSRC.
• WPVSRC: Write Protection Violation Source
When WPVS = 1, WPVSRC indicates the register address offset at which a write access has been attempted.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
411
23.
Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC)
23.1
Description
The Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC) transfers data between on-chip serial peripherals and the target memories.
The link between the PDC and a serial peripheral is operated by the AHB to APB bridge.
The user interface of each PDC channel is integrated into the user interface of the peripheral it serves. The user
interface of mono-directional channels (receive-only or transmit-only) contains two 32-bit memory pointers and two
16-bit counters, one set (pointer, counter) for the current transfer and one set (pointer, counter) for the next
transfer. The bidirectional channel user interface contains four 32-bit memory pointers and four 16-bit counters.
Each set (pointer, counter) is used by the current transmit, next transmit, current receive and next receive.
Using the PDC decreases processor overhead by reducing its intervention during the transfer. This lowers
significantly the number of clock cycles required for a data transfer, improving microcontroller performance.
To launch a transfer, the peripheral triggers its associated PDC channels by using transmit and receive signals.
When the programmed data is transferred, an end of transfer interrupt is generated by the peripheral itself.
23.2
412
Embedded Characteristics
Performs Transfers to/from APB Communication Serial Peripherals
Supports Half-duplex and Full-duplex Peripherals
Automatic Circular Buffer Mode
Transfer Bus Error Report
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
23.3
Block Diagram
Figure 23-1.
Block Diagram
FULL DUPLEX
PERIPHERAL
PDC
THR
PDC Channel A
RHR
PDC Channel B
Control
Status & Control
HALF DUPLEX
PERIPHERAL
Control
THR
PDC Channel C
RHR
Control
Status & Control
RECEIVE or TRANSMIT
PERIPHERAL
RHR or THR
Control
PDC Channel D
Status & Control
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
413
23.4
Functional Description
23.4.1 Configuration
The PDC channel user interface enables the user to configure and control data transfers for each channel. The
user interface of each PDC channel is integrated into the associated peripheral user interface.
The user interface of a serial peripheral, whether it is full- or half-duplex, contains four 32-bit pointers (RPR,
RNPR, TPR, TNPR) and four 16-bit counter registers (RCR, RNCR, TCR, TNCR). However, the transmit and
receive parts of each type are programmed differently: the transmit and receive parts of a full-duplex peripheral
can be programmed at the same time, whereas only one part (transmit or receive) of a half-duplex peripheral can
be programmed at a time.
32-bit pointers define the access location in memory for the current and next transfer, whether it is for read
(transmit) or write (receive). 16-bit counters define the size of the current and next transfers. It is possible, at any
moment, to read the number of transfers remaining for each channel.
The PDC has dedicated status registers which indicate if the transfer is enabled or disabled for each channel. The
status for each channel is located in the associated peripheral status register. Transfers can be enabled and/or
disabled by setting TXTEN/TXTDIS and RXTEN/RXTDIS in the peripheral’s Transfer Control register.
At the end of a transfer, the PDC channel sends status flags to its associated peripheral. These flags are visible in
the peripheral Status register (ENDRX, ENDTX, RXBUFF, and TXBUFE). Refer to Section 23.4.3 and to the
associated peripheral user interface.
The peripheral where a PDC transfer is configured must have its peripheral clock enabled. The peripheral clock
must be also enabled to access the PDC register set associated to this peripheral.
23.4.2 Memory Pointers
Each full-duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC by a receive channel and a transmit channel. Both channels
have 32-bit memory pointers that point to a receive area and to a transmit area, respectively, in the target memory.
Each half-duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC by a bidirectional channel. This channel has two 32-bit
memory pointers, one for current transfer and the other for next transfer. These pointers point to transmit or
receive data depending on the operating mode of the peripheral.
Depending on the type of transfer (byte, half-word or word), the memory pointer is incremented respectively by 1,
2 or 4 bytes.
If a memory pointer address changes in the middle of a transfer, the PDC channel continues operating using the
new address.
23.4.3 Transfer Counters
Each channel has two 16-bit counters, one for the current transfer and the one for the next transfer. These
counters define the size of data to be transferred by the channel. The current transfer counter is decremented first
as the data addressed by the current memory pointer starts to be transferred. When the current transfer counter
reaches zero, the channel checks its next transfer counter. If the value of the next counter is zero, the channel
stops transferring data and sets the appropriate flag. If the next counter value is greater than zero, the values of
the next pointer/next counter are copied into the current pointer/current counter and the channel resumes the
transfer, whereas next pointer/next counter get zero/zero as values. When the Circular buffer mode is activated,
the register set {next counter, next pointer} is not reset when the next counter value is copied to the current
counter, both next and current registers must be written to the same value. At the end of this transfer, the PDC
channel sets the appropriate flags in the Peripheral Status register.
The following list gives an overview of how status register flags behave depending on the counters’ values:
414
ENDRX flag is set when the PDC Receive Counter Register (PERIPH_RCR) reaches zero.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
RXBUFF flag is set when both PERIPH_RCR and the PDC Receive Next Counter Register
(PERIPH_RNCR) reach zero.
ENDTX flag is set when the PDC Transmit Counter Register (PERIPH_TCR) reaches zero.
TXBUFE flag is set when both PERIPH_TCR and the PDC Transmit Next Counter Register
(PERIPH_TNCR) reach zero.
These status flags are described in the Transfer Status Register (PERIPH_PTSR).
23.4.4 Data Transfers
The serial peripheral triggers its associated PDC channels’ transfers using transmit enable (TXEN) and receive
enable (RXEN) flags in the transfer control register integrated in the peripheral’s user interface.
When the peripheral receives external data, it sends a Receive Ready signal to its PDC receive channel which
then requests access to the Matrix. When access is granted, the PDC receive channel starts reading the
peripheral Receive Holding register (RHR). The read data are stored in an internal buffer and then written to
memory.
When the peripheral is about to send data, it sends a Transmit Ready to its PDC transmit channel which then
requests access to the Matrix. When access is granted, the PDC transmit channel reads data from memory and
transfers the data to the Transmit Holding register (THR) of its associated peripheral. The same peripheral sends
data depending on its mechanism.
In case of invalid memory address resulting from a badly programmed PDC transmit or receive pointer, the bus
matrix does not perform the requested access and signals a bus error to the PDC. This transfer bus error drives
the PERIPH_PTSR.ERR bit high to flag the error in the Transfer Status Register.
23.4.5 PDC Flags and Peripheral Status Register
Each peripheral connected to the PDC sends out receive ready and transmit ready flags and the PDC returns flags
to the peripheral. All these flags are only visible in the peripheral’s Status register.
Depending on whether the peripheral is half- or full-duplex, the flags belong to either one single channel or two
different channels.
23.4.5.1
Receive Transfer End
The receive transfer end flag is set when PERIPH_RCR reaches zero and the last data has been transferred to
memory.
This flag is reset by writing a non-zero value to PERIPH_RCR or PERIPH_RNCR.
23.4.5.2
Transmit Transfer End
The transmit transfer end flag is set when PERIPH_TCR reaches zero and the last data has been written to the
peripheral THR.
This flag is reset by writing a non-zero value to PERIPH_TCR or PERIPH_TNCR.
23.4.5.3
Receive Buffer Full
The receive buffer full flag is set when PERIPH_RCR reaches zero, with PERIPH_RNCR also set to zero and the
last data transferred to memory.
This flag is reset by writing a non-zero value to PERIPH_TCR or PERIPH_TNCR.
23.4.5.4
Transmit Buffer Empty
The transmit buffer empty flag is set when PERIPH_TCR reaches zero, with PERIPH_TNCR also set to zero and
the last data written to peripheral THR.
This flag is reset by writing a non-zero value to PERIPH_TCR or PERIPH_TNCR.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
415
23.5
Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC) User Interface
Table 23-1.
Offset
Register Mapping
Register
Name
(1)
Access
Reset
0x00
Receive Pointer Register
PERIPH _RPR
Read/Write
0
0x04
Receive Counter Register
PERIPH_RCR
Read/Write
0
0x08
Transmit Pointer Register
PERIPH_TPR
Read/Write
0
0x0C
Transmit Counter Register
PERIPH_TCR
Read/Write
0
0x10
Receive Next Pointer Register
PERIPH_RNPR
Read/Write
0
0x14
Receive Next Counter Register
PERIPH_RNCR
Read/Write
0
0x18
Transmit Next Pointer Register
PERIPH_TNPR
Read/Write
0
0x1C
Transmit Next Counter Register
PERIPH_TNCR
Read/Write
0
0x20
Transfer Control Register
PERIPH_PTCR
Write-only
–
0x24
Transfer Status Register
PERIPH_PTSR
Read-only
0
Note:
416
1. PERIPH: Ten registers are mapped in the peripheral memory space at the same offset. These can be defined by the user
depending on the function and the desired peripheral.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
23.5.1 Receive Pointer Register
Name:
PERIPH_RPR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RXPTR
23
22
21
20
RXPTR
15
14
13
12
RXPTR
7
6
5
4
RXPTR
• RXPTR: Receive Pointer Register
RXPTR must be set to receive buffer address.
When a half-duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, RXPTR = TXPTR.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
417
23.5.2 Receive Counter Register
Name:
PERIPH_RCR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RXCTR
7
6
5
4
RXCTR
• RXCTR: Receive Counter Register
RXCTR must be set to receive buffer size.
When a half-duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, RXCTR = TXCTR.
0: Stops peripheral data transfer to the receiver.
1–65535: Starts peripheral data transfer if the corresponding channel is active.
418
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
23.5.3 Transmit Pointer Register
Name:
PERIPH_TPR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
TXPTR
23
22
21
20
TXPTR
15
14
13
12
TXPTR
7
6
5
4
TXPTR
• TXPTR: Transmit Counter Register
TXPTR must be set to transmit buffer address.
When a half-duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, RXPTR = TXPTR.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
419
23.5.4 Transmit Counter Register
Name:
PERIPH_TCR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
TXCTR
7
6
5
4
TXCTR
• TXCTR: Transmit Counter Register
TXCTR must be set to transmit buffer size.
When a half-duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, RXCTR = TXCTR.
0: Stops peripheral data transfer to the transmitter.
1–65535: Starts peripheral data transfer if the corresponding channel is active.
420
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
23.5.5 Receive Next Pointer Register
Name:
PERIPH_RNPR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RXNPTR
23
22
21
20
RXNPTR
15
14
13
12
RXNPTR
7
6
5
4
RXNPTR
• RXNPTR: Receive Next Pointer
RXNPTR contains the next receive buffer address.
When a half-duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, RXNPTR = TXNPTR.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
421
23.5.6 Receive Next Counter Register
Name:
PERIPH_RNCR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RXNCTR
7
6
5
4
RXNCTR
• RXNCTR: Receive Next Counter
RXNCTR contains the next receive buffer size.
When a half-duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, RXNCTR = TXNCTR.
422
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
23.5.7 Transmit Next Pointer Register
Name:
PERIPH_TNPR
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
TXNPTR
23
22
21
20
TXNPTR
15
14
13
12
TXNPTR
7
6
5
4
TXNPTR
• TXNPTR: Transmit Next Pointer
TXNPTR contains the next transmit buffer address.
When a half-duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, RXNPTR = TXNPTR.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
423
23.5.8 Transmit Next Counter Register
Name:
PERIPH_TNCR
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
TXNCTR
7
6
5
4
TXNCTR
• TXNCTR: Transmit Counter Next
TXNCTR contains the next transmit buffer size.
When a half-duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, RXNCTR = TXNCTR.
424
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
23.5.9 Transfer Control Register
Name:
PERIPH_PTCR
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
ERRCLR
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
TXCBDIS
18
TXCBEN
17
RXCBDIS
16
RXCBEN
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
TXTDIS
8
TXTEN
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
RXTDIS
0
RXTEN
• RXTEN: Receiver Transfer Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables PDC receiver channel requests if RXTDIS is not set.
When a half-duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, enabling the receiver channel requests automatically disables the
transmitter channel requests. It is forbidden to set both TXTEN and RXTEN for a half-duplex peripheral.
• RXTDIS: Receiver Transfer Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the PDC receiver channel requests.
When a half-duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, disabling the receiver channel requests also disables the transmitter channel requests.
• TXTEN: Transmitter Transfer Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the PDC transmitter channel requests.
When a half-duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, it enables the transmitter channel requests only if RXTEN is not
set. It is forbidden to set both TXTEN and RXTEN for a half-duplex peripheral.
• TXTDIS: Transmitter Transfer Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the PDC transmitter channel requests.
When a half-duplex peripheral is connected to the PDC, disabling the transmitter channel requests disables the receiver
channel requests.
• RXCBEN: Receiver Circular Buffer Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the PDC circular buffer for the receiver operation.
• RXCBDIS: Receiver Circular Buffer Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the PDC circular buffer for the receiver operation.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
425
• TXCBEN: Transmitter Circular Buffer Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the PDC circular buffer for the transmitter operation.
• TXCBDIS: Transmitter Circular Buffer Disable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the PDC circular buffer for the transmitter operation.
• ERRCLR: Transfer Bus Error Clear
0: No effect.
1: Clears the transfer bus error status bit.
426
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
23.5.10 Transfer Status Register
Name:
PERIPH_PTSR
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
ERR
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
TXCBEN
17
–
16
RXCBEN
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
TXTEN
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
RXTEN
• RXTEN: Receiver Transfer Enable
0: PDC receiver channel requests are disabled.
1: PDC receiver channel requests are enabled.
• TXTEN: Transmitter Transfer Enable
0: PDC transmitter channel requests are disabled.
1: PDC transmitter channel requests are enabled.
• RXCBEN: Receiver Circular Buffer Enable
0: PDC Receiver circular buffer mode is disabled.
1: PDC Receiver circular buffer mode is enabled.
• TXCBEN: Transmitter Circular Buffer Enable
0: PDC Transmitter circular buffer mode is disabled.
1: PDC Transmitter circular buffer mode is enabled.
• ERR: Transfer Bus Error
0: PDC accesses are performed on valid memory address since the last write of ERRCLR bit in PERIPH_PTCR.
1: PDC transmit or receive pointer (or next pointer) is programmed with an invalid memory address since the last write of
ERRCLR bit in PERIPH_PTCR.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
427
24.
Clock Generator
24.1
Description
The Clock Generator user interface is embedded within the Power Management Controller and is described in
Section 25.17 ”Power Management Controller (PMC) User Interface”. However, the Clock Generator registers are
named CKGR_.
24.2
Embedded Characteristics
The Clock Generator is made up of:
A low-power 32768 Hz crystal oscillator with Bypass mode
A low-power embedded 32 kHz (typical) RC oscillator
A 3 to 20 MHz crystal or ceramic resonator-based oscillator, which can be bypassed.
A factory-trimmed embedded RC oscillator. Three output frequencies can be selected: 8/16/24 MHz. By
default 8 MHz is selected.
A 24 to 48 MHz programmable PLL (input from 32 to 1000 KHz), capable of providing the clock MCK to the
processor and to the peripherals.
It provides the following clocks:
428
SLCK, the slow clock, which is the only permanent clock within the system.
MAINCK is the output of the main clock oscillator selection: either the crystal or ceramic resonator-based
oscillator or 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator.
PLLACK is the output of the 24 to 48 MHz programmable PLL (PLLA).
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
24.3
Block Diagram
Figure 24-1.
Clock Generator Block Diagram
Clock Generator
XTALSEL
(Supply Controller)
Embedded
32 kHz RC
Oscillator
0
Slow Clock
SLCK
XIN32
XOUT32
32768 Hz
Crystal
Oscillator
1
CKGR_MOR
MOSCSEL
Embedded
8/16/24 MHz
RC Oscillator
0
Main Clock
MAINCK
XIN
XOUT
3–20 MHz
Crystal
Oscillator
1
PLLA
Status
PLLA Clock
PLLACK
Control
Power
Management
Controller
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
429
24.4
Slow Clock
The Supply Controller embeds a slow clock generator that is supplied with the VDDIO power supply. As soon as
VDDIO is supplied, both the 32768 Hz crystal oscillator and the embedded 32 kHz (typical) RC oscillator are
powered up, but only the RC oscillator is enabled. This allows the slow clock to be valid in a short time (about
100 µs).
The slow clock is generated either by the 32768 Hz crystal oscillator or by the embedded 32 kHz (typical) RC
oscillator.
The selection of the slow clock source is made via the XTALSEL bit in the Supply Controller Control Register
(SUPC_CR).
The OSCSEL bit of the Supply Controller Status Register (SUPC_SR) and the OSCSELS bit of the PMC Status
Register (PMC_SR) report which oscillator is selected as the slow clock source. PMC_SR.OSCSELS informs
when the switch sequence initiated by a new value written in SUPC_CR.XTALSEL is done.
24.4.1 Embedded 32 kHz (typical) RC Oscillator
By default, the embedded 32 kHz (typical) RC oscillator is enabled and selected. The user has to take into account
the possible drifts of this oscillator. More details are given in the section “DC Characteristics”.
This oscillator is disabled by clearing the SUPC_CR.XTALSEL.
24.4.2 32768 Hz Crystal Oscillator
The Clock Generator integrates a low-power 32768 Hz crystal oscillator. To use this oscillator, the XIN32 and
XOUT32 pins must be connected to a 32768 Hz crystal. Two external capacitors must be wired as shown in Figure
24-2. More details are given in the section “DC Characteristics”.
Note that the user is not obliged to use the 32768 Hz crystal oscillator and can use the 32 kHz (typical) RC
oscillator instead.
Figure 24-2.
Typical 32768-Hz Crystal Oscillator Connection
XIN32
XOUT32
GND
32768 Hz
Crystal
The 32768 Hz crystal oscillator provides a more accurate frequency than the 32 kHz (typical) RC oscillator.
To select the 32768 Hz crystal oscillator as the source of the slow clock, the bit SUPC_CR.XTALSEL must be set.
This results in a sequence which first configures the PIO lines multiplexed with XIN32 and XOUT32 to be driven by
the slow clock oscillator, then enables the 32768 Hz crystal oscillator and then disables the 32 kHz (typical) RC
oscillator to save power. The switch of the slow clock source is glitch-free.
Reverting to the 32 kHz (typical) RC oscillator is only possible by shutting down the VDDIO power supply. If the
user does not need the 32768 Hz crystal oscillator, the XIN32 and XOUT32 pins can be left unconnected since by
default the XIN32 and XOUT32 system I/O pins are in PIO input mode with pull-up after reset.
The user can also set the 32768 Hz crystal oscillator in Bypass mode instead of connecting a crystal. In this case,
the user must provide the external clock signal on XIN32. The input characteristics of the XIN32 pin are given in
the section “Electrical Characteristics”. To enter Bypass mode, the OSCBYPASS bit of the Supply Controller Mode
Register (SUPC_MR) must be set prior to setting SUPC_CR.XTALSEL.
430
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
24.5
Main Clock
Figure 24-3 shows the main clock block diagram.
Figure 24-3.
Main Clock Block Diagram
CKGR_MOR
MOSCRCEN
CKGR_MOR
MOSCRCF
PMC_SR
MOSCRCS
Fast RC
Oscillator
CKGR_MOR
PMC_SR
MOSCSEL
MOSCSELS
0
CKGR_MOR
MAINCK
Main Clock
MOSCXTEN
1
3–20 MHz
Crystal
or
Ceramic Resonator
Oscillator
XIN
XOUT
CKGR_MOR
MOSCXTST
PMC_SR
3–20 MHz
Oscillator
Counter
SLCK
Slow Clock
MOSCXTS
CKGR_MOR
MOSCRCEN
CKGR_MOR
CKGR_MCFR
MOSCXTEN
RCMEAS
CKGR_MOR
MOSCSEL
CKGR_MCFR
MAINCK
Main Clock
Ref.
MAINF
Main Clock
Frequency
Counter
CKGR_MCFR
MAINFRDY
The main clock has two sources:
A 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator with a fast start-up time and that is selected by default to start the system
A 3 to 20 MHz crystal or ceramic resonator-based oscillator which can be bypassed
24.5.1 Embedded 8/16/24 MHz RC Oscillator
After reset, the 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator is enabled with the 8 MHz frequency selected. This oscillator is selected
as the source of MAINCK. MAINCK is the default clock selected to start the system.
The 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator frequencies are calibrated in production except for the lowest frequency which is
not calibrated.
Refer to the section “DC Characteristics”.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
431
The software can disable or enable the 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator with the MOSCRCEN bit in the Clock Generator
Main Oscillator Register (CKGR_MOR).
The output frequency of the RC oscillator can be selected among 8/16/24 MHz. The selection is done via the
CKGR_MOR.MOSCRCF field. When changing the frequency selection, the MOSCRCS bit in the Power
Management Controller Status Register (PMC_SR) is automatically cleared and MAINCK is stopped until the
oscillator is stabilized. Once the oscillator is stabilized, MAINCK restarts and PMC_SR.MOSCRCS is set.
When disabling the main clock by clearing the CKGR_MOR.MOSCRCEN bit, the PMC_SR.MOSCRCS bit is
automatically cleared, indicating the main clock is off.
Setting the MOSCRCS bit in the Power Management Controller Interrupt Enable Register (PMC_IER) can trigger
an interrupt to the processor.
When main clock (MAINCK) is not used to drive the processor and frequency monitor (SLCK or PLLACK is used
instead), it is recommended to disable the 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator and 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator.
The CAL8, CAL16 and CAL24 values in the PMC Oscillator Calibration Register (PMC_OCR) are the default
values set by Atmel during production. These values are stored in a specific Flash memory area different from the
memory plane for code. These values cannot be modified by the user and cannot be erased by a Flash erase
command or by the ERASE pin. Values written by the user application in PMC_OCR are reset after each power up
or peripheral reset.
24.5.2 8/16/24 MHz RC Oscillator Clock Frequency Adjustment
It is possible for the user to adjust the 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator frequency through PMC_OCR. By default,
SEL8/16/24 bits are cleared, so the RC oscillator will be driven with Flash calibration bits which are programmed
during chip production.
The user can adjust the trimming of the 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator through this register. This can be used to
compensate derating factors such as temperature and voltage, thus providing greater accuracy.
In order to calibrate the RC oscillator lower frequency, SEL8 bit must be set to 1 and a frequency value must be
configured in the field CAL8. Likewise, SEL16/24 bit must be set to 1 and a trim value must be configured in the
field CAL16/24 in order to adjust the other frequencies of the RC oscillator.
It is possible to adjust the RC oscillator frequency while operating from this clock. For example, when running on
lowest frequency it is possible to change the CAL8 value if PMC_OCR.SEL8 bit is set.
At any time, it is possible to restart a measurement of the frequency of the selected clock via the RCMEAS bit in
Main Clock Frequency Register (CKGR_MCFR). Thus, when CKGR_MCFR.MAINFRDY reads 1, another read
access on CKGR_MCFR provides an image of the frequency on CKGR_MCFR.MAINF field. The software can
calculate the error with an expected frequency and correct the CAL8 (or CAL16/CAL24) field accordingly. This
may be used to compensate frequency drift due to derating factors such as temperature and/or voltage.
24.5.3 3 to 20 MHz Crystal or Ceramic Resonator-based Oscillator
After reset, the 3 to 20 MHz crystal or ceramic resonator-based oscillator is disabled and is not selected as the
source of MAINCK.
As the source of MAINCK, the 3 to 20 MHz crystal or ceramic resonator-based oscillator provides a very precise
frequency. The software enables or disables this oscillator in order to reduce power consumption via
CKGR_MOR.MOSCXTEN.
When disabling this oscillator by clearing the CKGR_MOR.MOSCXTEN, PMC_SR.MOSCXTS is automatically
cleared, indicating the 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator is off.
When enabling this oscillator, the user must initiate the start-up time counter. The start-up time depends on the
characteristics of the external device connected to this oscillator.
432
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
When CKGR_MOR.MOSCXTEN and CKGR_MOR.MOSCXTST are written to enable this oscillator, the XIN and
XOUT pins are automatically switched into Oscillator mode. PMC_SR.MOSCXTS is cleared and the counter starts
counting down on the slow clock divided by 8 from the CKGR_MOR.MOSCXTST value. Since the
CKGR_MOR.MOSCXTST value is coded with 8 bits, the maximum start-up time is about 62 ms.
When the start-up time counter reaches 0, PMC_SR.MOSCXTS is set, indicating that the 3 to 20 MHz crystal
oscillator is stabilized. Setting the MOSCXTS bit in the Interrupt Mask Register (PMC_IMR) can trigger an interrupt
to the processor.
24.5.4 Main Clock Source Selection
The user can select the source of the main clock from either the 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator, the 3 to 20 MHz crystal
oscillator or the ceramic resonator-based oscillator.
The advantage of the 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator is its fast start-up time. By default, this oscillator is selected to
start the system and when entering Wait mode.
The advantage of the 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator or ceramic resonator-based oscillator is its precise frequency.
The selection of the oscillator is made by writing CKGR_MOR.MOSCSEL. The switch of the main clock source is
glitch-free, so there is no need to ru n out of SLCK, PLLACK in orde r to change the selection.
PMC_SR.MOSCSELS indicates when the switch sequence is done.
Setting PMC_IMR.MOSCSELS triggers an interrupt to the processor.
Enabling the 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator (MOSCRCEN = 1) and changing its frequency (MOSCCRF) at the same
time is not allowed.
This oscillator must be enabled first and its frequency changed in a second step.
24.5.5 Bypassing the 3 to 20 MHz Crystal Oscillator
Prior to bypassing the 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator, the external clock frequency provided on the XIN pin must be
stable and within the values specified in the XIN Clock characteristics in the section “Electrical Characteristics”.
The sequence is as follows:
1. Ensure that an external clock is connected on XIN.
2.
Enable the bypass by writing a 1 to CKGR_MOR.MOSCXTBY.
3.
Disable the 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator by writing a 0 to bit CKGR_MOR.MOSCXTEN.
24.5.6 Main Clock Frequency Counter
The frequency counter is managed by CKGR_MCFR.
During the measurement period, the frequency counter increments at the main clock speed.
A measurement is started in the following cases:
When the RCMEAS bit of CKGR_MCFR is written to 1.
When the 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator is selected as the source of main clock and when this oscillator
becomes stable (i.e., when the MOSCRCS bit is set)
When the 3 to 20 MHz crystal or ceramic resonator-based oscillator is selected as the source of main clock
and when this oscillator becomes stable (i.e., when the MOSCXTS bit is set)
When the main clock source selection is modified
The measurement period ends at the 16th falling edge of slow clock, the MAINFRDY bit in CKGR_MCFR is set
and the counter stops counting. Its value can be read in the MAINF field of CKGR_MCFR and gives the number of
clock cycles during 16 periods of slow clock, so that the frequency of the 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator or 3 to 20 MHz
crystal or ceramic resonator-based oscillator can be determined.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
433
24.5.7 Switching Main Clock between the RC Oscillator and the Crystal Oscillator
When switching the source of the main clock between the RC oscillator and the crystal oscillator, both oscillators
must be enabled. After completion of the switch, the unused oscillator can be disabled.
If switching to the crystal oscillator, a check must be carried out to ensure that the oscillator is present and that its
frequency is valid. Follow the sequence below:
1. Select the slow clock as MCK by configuring bit CSS = 0 in the Master Clock Register (PMC_MCKR)).
2.
Wait for PMC_SR.MCKRDY flag in PMC_SR to rise.
3.
Enable the crystal oscillator by setting CKGR_MOR.MOSCXTEN. Configure the CKGR_MOR. MOSCXTST
field with the crystal oscillator start-up time as defined in the section “Electrical Characteristics”.
4.
Wait for PMC_SR.MOSCXTS flag to rise, indicating the end of a start-up period of the crystal oscillator.
5.
Select the crystal oscillator as the source of the main clock by setting CKGR_MOR.MOSCSEL.
6.
Read CKGR_MOR.MOSCSEL until its value equals 1.
7.
Check the status of PMC_SR.MOSCSELS flag:
̶
If MOSCSELS = 1: There is a crystal oscillator connected.
a. Initiate a new frequency measurement by setting CKGR_MCFR.RCMEAS.
b.
Read CKGR_MCFR.MAINFRDY until its value equals 1.
c.
Read CKGR_MCFR.MAINF and compute the value of the crystal frequency.
d. If the MAINF value is valid, the main clock can be switched to the crystal oscillator.
̶
If MOSCSELS = 0:
a. There is no crystal oscillator connected or the crystal oscillator is out of specification.
b.
434
Select the RC oscillator as the source of the main clock by clearing CKGR_MOR.MOSCSEL.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
24.6
Divider and PLL Block
The device features one PLL block that permits a wide range of frequencies to be selected on either the master
clock, the processor clock or the programmable clock outputs.
Figure 24-4 shows the block diagram of the PLL block.
Figure 24-4.
PLL Block Diagram
CKGR_PLLAR
MULA
SLCK
PLLA
PLLACK
CKGR_PLLAR
PLLACOUNT
PMC_SR
SLCK
PLLA
Counter
LOCKA
24.6.1 Phase Lock Loop Programming
The PLL (PLLA) allows multiplication of the SLCK clock source. The PLL clock signal has a frequency that
depends on the respective source signal frequency and MUL (MULA) and PLLEN (PLLAEN). The factor applied to
the source signal frequency is MUL + 1. When MUL is written to 0 or PLLEN = 0, the PLL is disabled and its power
consumption is saved. Note that there is a delay of two SLCK clock cycles between the disable command and the
real disable of the PLL. Re-enabling the PLL can be performed by writing a value higher than 0 in the MUL field
and PLLAEN higher than 0.
Whenever the PLL is re-enabled or one of its parameters is changed, the LOCK (LOCKA) bit in PMC_SR is
automatically cleared. The values written in the PLLCOUNT field (PLLACOUNT) in CKGR_PLLR (CKGR_PLLAR)
are loaded in the PLL counter. The PLL counter then decrements at the speed of the slow clock until it reaches 0.
At this time, the LOCK bit is set in PMC_SR and can trigger an interrupt to the processor. The user has to load the
number of slow clock cycles required to cover the PLL transient time into the PLLCOUNT field.
The PLL clock can be divided by 2 by writing the PLLDIV2 (PLLADIV2) bit in PMC_MCKR.
To avoid programming the PLL with a multiplication factor that is too high, the user can saturate the multiplication
factor value sent to the PLL by setting the PLLA_MMAX field in PMC_PMMR.
It is prohibited to change the frequency of the 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator or to change the source of the main clock
in CKGR_MOR while the master clock source is the PLL.
The user must:
1. Switch on the 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator by writing a 1 to the CSS field of PMC_MCKR.
2.
Change the frequency (MOSCRCF) or oscillator selection (MOSCSEL) in CKGR_MOR.
3.
Wait for MOSCRCS (if frequency changes) or MOSCSELS (if oscillator selection changes) in PMC_SR.
4.
Disable and then enable the PLL.
5.
Wait for the LOCK flag in PMC_SR.
6.
Switch back to the PLL by writing the appropriate value to the CSS field of PMC_MCKR.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
435
25.
Power Management Controller (PMC)
25.1
Description
The Power Management Controller (PMC) optimizes power consumption by controlling all system and user
peripheral clocks. The PMC enables/disables the clock inputs to many of the peripherals and the Cortex-M4
processor.
The Supply Controller selects either the embedded 32 kHz RC oscillator or the 32768 Hz crystal oscillator. The
unused oscillator is disabled automatically so that power consumption is optimized.
By default, at startup, the chip runs out of the master clock using the 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator running at 8 MHz.
The user can trim the 16 and 24 MHz RC oscillator frequencies by software.
25.2
Embedded Characteristics
The PMC provides the following clocks:
MCK, the Master Clock, programmable from a few hundred Hz to the maximum operating frequency of the
device. It is available to the modules running permanently, such as the Enhanced Embedded Flash
Controller.
Processor Clock (HCLK) , automatically switched off when entering the processor in Sleep Mode
Free-running processor Clock (FCLK)
The Cortex-M4 SysTick external clock
Peripheral Clocks, provided to the embedded peripherals (USART, SPI, TWI, TC, etc.) and independently
controllable.
Programmable Clock Outputs (PCKx), selected from the clock generator outputs to drive the device PCK
pins
The PMC also provides the following features on clocks:
436
A 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator clock failure detector
A frequency counter on main clock
An on-the-fly adjustable 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator frequency
Asynchronous partial wake-up (SleepWalking™) for UART0, UART1, TWI0
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
25.3
Block Diagram
Figure 25-1.
General Clock Block Diagram
Clock Generator
Processor
Clock
Controller
XTALSEL
(Supply Controller)
Processor clock
HCLK
int
Sleep Mode
Embedded
32 kHz RC
Oscillator
0
Divider
/8
Slow Clock
SLCK
XOUT32
32768 Hz
Crystal
Oscillator
SLCK
1
CKGR_MOR
Prescaler
/1,/2,/3,/4,/8,
/16,/32,/64
MOSCSEL
PLLACK
Embedded
8/16/24 MHz
RC Oscillator
XIN
XOUT
Master Clock
MCK
Peripherals
Clock Controller
(PMC_PCERx) ON/OFF
0
CSS
PRES
Main Clock
MAINCK
3-20 MHz
Crystal
or
Ceramic
Resonator
Oscillator
periph_clk[..]
1
Programmable Clock Controller
(PMC_PCKx)
SLCK
MAINCK
PLLA and
Divider/2
PLLA Clock
PLLACK
Prescaler
/1,/2,/4,/8,
/16,/32,/64
PLLACK
MCK
CSS
PLLADIV2
PMC_MCKR
Status
Free Running Clock
FCLK
MAINCK
PRES
ON/OFF
pck[..]
(PMC_SCER/SCDR)
XIN32
SysTick
Master Clock Controller
(PMC_MCKR)
Control
Power
Management
Controller
25.4
Master Clock Controller
The Master Clock Controller provides selection and division of the master clock (MCK). MCK is the source clock of
the peripheral clocks. The master clock is selected from one of the clocks provided by the Clock Generator.
Selecting the slow clock provides a slow clock signal to the whole device. Selecting the main clock saves power
consumption of the PLL. The Master Clock Controller is made up of a clock selector and a prescaler.
The master clock selection is made by writing the CSS field (Clock Source Selection) in PMC_MCKR.
The prescaler supports the division by a power of 2 of the selected clock between 1 and 64, and the division by 3.
The PRES field in PMC_MCKR programs the prescaler.
Each time PMC_MCKR is written to define a new master clock, the MCKRDY bit is cleared in PMC_SR. It reads 0
until the master clock is established. Then, the MCKRDY bit is set and can trigger an interrupt to the processor.
This feature is useful when switching from a high-speed clock to a lower one to inform the software when the
change is actually done.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
437
Figure 25-2.
Master Clock Controller
PMC_MCKR
CSS
PMC_MCKR
PRES
SLCK
MAINCK
Master Clock
Prescaler
MCK
PLLACK
To the Processor
Clock Controller (HCLK)
25.5
Processor Clock Controller
The PMC features a Processor Clock Controller (HCLK) that implements the processor Sleep mode. These
processor clock can be disabled by executing the WFI (WaitForInterrupt) or the WFE (WaitForEvent) processor
instruction while the LPM bit is at 0 in the PMC Fast Startup Mode Register (PMC_FSMR).
The Processor Clock Controller HCLK is enabled after a reset and is automatically re-enabled by any enabled
interrupt. The processor Sleep mode is entered by disabling the processor clock, which is automatically re-enabled
by any enabled fast or normal interrupt, or by the reset of the product.
When processor Sleep mode is entered, the current instruction is finished before the clock is stopped, but this
does not prevent data transfers from other masters of the system bus.
25.6
SysTick Clock
The SysTick calibration value is fixed to 6000 which allows the generation of a time base of 1 ms with SysTick
clock to the maximum frequency on MCK divided by 8.
25.7
Peripheral Clock Controller
The PMC controls the clocks of each embedded peripheral by means of the Peripheral Clock Controller. The user
can individually enable and disable the clock on the peripherals.
The user can also enable and disable these clocks by writing Peripheral Clock Enable 0 (PMC_PCER0),
Peripheral Clock Disable 0 (PMC_PCDR0). The status of the peripheral clock activity can be read in the Peripheral
Clock Status Register (PMC_PCSR0) .
When a peripheral clock is disabled, the clock is immediately stopped. The peripheral clocks are automatically
disabled after a reset.
To stop a peripheral, it is recommended that the system software wait until the peripheral has executed its last
programmed operation before disabling the clock. This is to avoid data corruption or erroneous behavior of the
system.
The bit number within the Peripheral Clock Control registers (PMC_PCER0, PMC_PCDR0, and PMC_PCSR0) is
the Peripheral Identifier defined at the product level. The bit number corresponds to the interrupt source number
assigned to the peripheral.
25.8
Asynchronous Partial Wake-up (SleepWalking)
25.8.1 Description
The asynchronous partial wake-up (SleepWalking) wakes up a peripheral in a fully asynchronous way when
activity is detected on the communication line. Moreover, under some user configurable conditions, the
asynchronous partial wake-up can trigger an exit of the system from Wait mode (full system wake-up).
438
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
The asynchronous partial wake-up function automatically manages the peripheral clock. It improves the overall
power consumption of the system by clocking peripherals only when needed.
Only the following peripherals can be configured with asynchronous partial wake-up: UART0, UART1, TWI0.
The peripheral selected for asynchronous partial wake-up must be first configured so that its clock is enabled by
setting the appropriate PIDx bit in PMC_PCERx.
When the system is in Wait mode, all clocks of the system (except SLCK) are stopped. When an asynchronous
clock request from a peripheral occurs, the PMC partially wakes up the system to feed the clock only to this
peripheral. The rest of the system is not fed with the clock, thus optimizing power consumption. Finally, depending
on user-configurable conditions, the peripheral either wakes up the whole system if these conditions are met or
stops the peripheral clock until the next clock request. If a wake-up request occurs, the Asynchronous Partial
Wake-up mode is automatically disabled until the user instructs the PMC to enable asynchronous partial wake-up.
This is done by setting PIDx in the PMC SleepWalking Enable Register (PMC_SLPWK_ER).
Figure 25-3.
SleepWalking During Wait Mode
system_clock
The system is in wait mode. No clock is fed to the system.
peripheral_clock
peripheral
clock request
peripheral
wakeup request
peripheral
sleepwalking status
The wakeup request wakes up the system
and resets the sleepwalking status of the
peripheral
When the system is in Active mode, peripherals enabled for asynchronous partial wake-up have their respective
clocks stopped until the peripherals request a clock. When a peripheral requests the clock, the PMC provides the
clock without CPU intervention.
The triggering of the peripheral clock request depends on conditions which can be configured for each peripheral.
If these conditions are met, the peripheral asserts a request to the PMC. The PMC disables the Asynchronous
Partial Wake-up mode of the peripheral and provides the clock to the peripheral until the user instructs the PMC to
re-enable partial wake-up on the peripheral. This is done by setting PIDx in the PMC_SLPWK_ER.
If the conditions are not met, the peripheral clears the clock request and PMC stops the peripheral clock until the
clock request is re-asserted by the peripheral.
Figure 25-4.
SleepWalking During Active Mode
system_clock
peripheral_clock
peripheral
clock request
peripheral
wakeup request
peripheral
sleepwalking status
The wakeup request resets the
sleepwalking status of the peripheral
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
439
25.8.2 Configuration Procedure
Before configuring the asynchronous partial wake-up (SleepWalking) function of a peripheral, check that the PIDx
bit in the PMC Peripheral Clock Status Register (PMC_PCSR) is set. This ensures that the peripheral clock is
enabled.
To enable the asynchronous partial wake-up (SleepWalking) function of a peripheral, follow the steps below:
1. Check that the corresponding PIDx bit in the PMC SleepWalking Activity Status Register
(PMC_SLPWK_ASR) is cleared. This ensures that the peripheral has no activity in progress.
2.
Enable the asynchronous partial wake-up function of the peripheral by writing a one to the corresponding
PIDx bit in the PMC_SLPWK_ER.
3.
Check that the corresponding PIDx bit in PMC_SLPWK_ASR is cleared. This ensures that no activity has
started during the enable phase.
4.
In the PMC_SLPWK_ASR, if the corresponding PIDx bit is set, the asynchronous partial wake-up function
must be immediately disabled by writing a one to the PIDx bit in the PMC SleepWalking Disable Register
(PMC_SLPWK_DR). Wait for the end of peripheral activity before reinitializing the procedure.
If the corresponding PIDx bit is cleared, the peripheral clock is disabled and the system can now be placed
in Wait mode.
Before entering Wait mode, check that all the PIDx bits in PMC_SLPWK_ASR are cleared. This
ensures that none of the peripherals has any activity in progress.
Note:
25.9
When asynchronous partial wake-up (SleepWalking) of a peripheral is enabled and the core is running (system not in
Wait mode), the peripheral must not be accessed before a wake-up of the peripheral is performed.
Free-Running Processor Clock
The free-running processor clock (FCLK)used for sampling interrupts and clocking debug blocks ensures that
interrupts can be sampled, and sleep events can be traced, while the processor is sleeping. It is connected to
master clock (MCK).
25.10 Programmable Clock Output Controller
The PMC controls three signals to be output on external pins, PCKx. Each signal can be independently
programmed via the Programmable Clock Registers (PMC_PCKx).
PCKx can be independently selected between the slow clock (SLCK), the main clock (MAINCK), the PLLA clock
(PLLACK),and the master clock (MCK) by writing the CSS field in PMC_PCKx. Each output signal can also be
divided by a power of 2 between 1 and 64 by writing the PRES (Prescaler) field in PMC_PCKx.
Each output signal can be enabled and disabled by writing a 1 to the corresponding PCKx bit of PMC_SCER and
PMC_SCDR, respectively. Status of the active programmable output clocks are given in the PCKx bits of
PMC_SCSR.
The PCKRDYx status flag in PMC_SR indicates that the programmable clock is actually what has been
programmed in the programmable clock registers.
As the Programmable Clock Controller does not manage with glitch prevention when switching clocks, it is strongly
recommended to disable the programmable clock before any configuration change and to re-enable it after the
change is actually performed.
25.11 Fast Startup
At exit from Wait mode, the device allows the processor to restart in less than 5 microseconds only if the C-code
function that manages the Wait mode entry and exit is linked to and executed from on-chip SRAM.
The fast startup time cannot be achieved if the first instruction after an exit is located in the embedded Flash.
440
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
If fast startup is not required, or if the first instruction after a Wait mode exit is located in embedded Flash, see
Section 25.12 ”Startup from Embedded Flash”.
Prior to instructing the device to enter Wait mode:
1. Select the 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator as the master clock source (the CSS field in PMC_MCKR must be
written to 1).
2.
Disable the PLL if enabled.
3.
Wait for two SLCK clock cycles.
4.
Clear the internal wake-up sources.
The system enters Wait mode either by setting the WAITMODE bit in CKGR_MOR, or by executing the
WaitForEvent (WFE) instruction of the processor while the LPM bit is at 1 in PMC_FSMR. Immediately after setting
the WAITMODE bit or using the WFE instruction, wait for the MCKRDY bit to be set in PMC_SR.
A fast startup is enabled upon the detection of a programmed level on one the wake-up input pins WKUPx (up to
16 inputs, see Peripheral Signal Multiplexing on I/O Lines section for exact number) or upon an active alarm from
the RTC and RTT. The polarity of each wake-up input is programmable by writing the PMC Fast Startup Polarity
Register (PMC_FSPR).
The fast startup circuitry, as shown in Figure 25-5, is fully asynchronous and provides a fast startup signal to the
PMC. As soon as the fast startup signal is asserted, the embedded 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator restarts
automatically.
When entering Wait mode, the embedded Flash can be placed in one of the Low-power modes (Deep-powerdown or Standby modes) depending on the configuration of the FLPM field in the PMC_FSMR. The FLPM field
can be programmed at anytime and its value will be applied to the next Wait mode period.
The power consumption reduction is optimal when configuring 1 (Deep-power-down mode) in field FLPM. If 0 is
programmed (Standby mode), the power consumption is slightly higher than in Deep-power-down mode.
When programming 2 in field FLPM, the Wait mode Flash power consumption is equivalent to that of the Active
mode when there is no read access on the Flash.
Figure 25-5.
Fast Startup Circuitry
FSTT0
WKUP0
FSTP0
FSTT1
WKUP1
FSTP1
FSTT15
WKUP15
fast_restart
FSTP15
RTTAL
RTT Alarm
RTCAL
RTC Alarm
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
441
Each wake-up input pin and alarm can be enabled to generate a fast startup event by setting the corresponding bit
in PMC_FSMR.
The user interface does not provide any status for fast startup, but the user can easily recover this information by
reading the PIO Controller and the status registers of the RTC and RTT.
25.12 Startup from Embedded Flash
The inherent start-up time of the embedded Flash cannot provide a fast startup of the system.
If system fast start-up time is not required, the first instruction after a Wait mode exit can be located in the
embedded Flash. Under these conditions, prior to entering Wait mode, the Flash controller must be programmed
to perform access in 0 wait-state. Refer to the section “Enhanced Embedded Flash Controller (EEFC)”.
If the 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator is configured to generate 16 MHz or 24 MHz (MOSCRCF = 1 or 2 in
CKGR_MOR), the first instruction after an exit must not be located in the embedded Flash and the fast startup
procedure must be used (see Section 25.11 ”Fast Startup”). If this RC oscillator is configured to generate 8 MHz
(MOSCRCF = 0 in CKGR_MOR), the instructions managing start-up time can be located in any on-chip memory.
The procedure and conditions to enter Wait mode and the circuitry to exit Wait mode are strictly the same as fast
startup (see Section 25.11 ”Fast Startup”).
25.13 Main Clock Failure Detector
The clock failure detector monitors the 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator or ceramic resonator-based oscillator to
identify a failure of this oscillator when selected as main clock.
The clock failure detector can be enabled or disabled by bit CFDEN in CKGR_MOR. After a VDDCORE reset, the
detector is disabled. However, if the oscillator is disabled (MOSCXTEN = 0), the detector is also disabled.
A failure is detected by means of a counter incrementing on the main clock and detection logic is triggered by the
32 kHz (typical) RC oscillator which is automatically enabled when CFDEN=1.
The counter is cleared when the 32 kHz (typical) RC oscillator clock signal is low and enabled when the signal is
high. Thus, the failure detection time is one RC oscillator period. If, during the high level period of the 32 kHz
(typical) RC oscillator clock signal, less than eight 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator clock periods have been counted,
then a failure is reported.
If a failure of the main clock is detected, bit CFDEV in PMC_SR indicates a failure event and generates an
interrupt if the corresponding interrupt source is enabled. The interrupt remains active until a read occurs in
PMC_SR. The user can know the status of the clock failure detection at any time by reading the CFDS bit in
PMC_SR.
Figure 25-6.
Clock Failure Detection (Example)
Main Crytal Clock
SLCK
CDFEV
Read PMC_SR
CDFS
Note: ratio of clock periods is for illustration purposes only
If the 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator or ceramic resonator-based oscillator is selected as the source clock of
MAINCK (MOSCSEL in CKGR_MOR = 1), and if MCK source is PLLACK (CSS = 2), a clock failure detection
442
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
automatically forces MAINCK to be the source clock for MCK. Then, regardless of the PMC configuration, a clock
failure detection automatically forces the 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator to be the source clock for MAINCK. If this
oscillator is disabled when a clock failure detection occurs, it is automatically re-enabled by the clock failure
detection mechanism.
It takes two 32 kHz (typical) RC oscillator clock cycles to detect and switch from the 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator,
to the 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator if the source master clock (MCK) is main clock (MAINCK), or three 32 kHz
(typical) RC oscillator clock cycles if the source of MCK is PLLACK.
The user can know the status of the clock failure detector at any time by reading the FOS bit in PMC_SR.
This fault output remains active until the defect is detected and until it is cleared by the bit FOCLR in the PMC Fault
Output Clear Register (PMC_FOCR).
25.14 Programming Sequence
1. If the 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator is not required, the PLL and divider can be directly configured (Step
6.) else this oscillator must be started (Step 2.).
2.
Enable the 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator by setting the MOSCXTEN field in CKGR_MOR:
The user can define a start-up time. This is done by writing a value in the MOSCXTST field in CKGR_MOR.
Once this register has been correctly configured, the user must wait for MOSCXTS field in PMC_SR to be
set. This is done either by polling MOSCXTS in PMC_SR, or by waiting for the interrupt line to be raised if
the associated interrupt source (MOSCXTS) has been enabled in PMC_IER.
3.
Switch the MAINCK to the 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator by setting MOSCSEL in CKGR_MOR.
4.
Wait for the MOSCSELS to be set in PMC_SR to ensure the switch is complete.
5.
Check the main clock frequency:
This main clock frequency can be measured via CKGR_MCFR.
Read CKGR_MCFR until the MAINFRDY field is set, after which the user can read the MAINF field in
CKGR_MCFR by performing an additional read. This provides the number of main clock cycles that have
been counted during a period of 16 slow clock cycles.
If MAINF = 0, switch the MAINCK to the 8/16/24 MHz RC Oscillator by clearing MOSCSEL in CKGR_MOR.
If MAINF ≠ 0, proceed to Step 6.
6.
Set PLLx and Divider (if not required, proceed to Step 7.):
In the names PLLx, DIVx, MULx, LOCKx, PLLxCOUNT, and CKGR_PLLxR, ‘x’ represents A.
All parameters needed to configure PLLx and the divider are located in CKGR_PLLxR.
The DIVx field is used to control the divider itself. This parameter can be programmed between 0 and 127.
Divider output is divider input divided by DIVx parameter. By default, DIVx field is cleared which means that
the divider and PLLx are turned off.
The MULx field is the PLLx multiplier factor. This parameter can be programmed between 0 and 1500. If
MULx is cleared, PLLx will be turned off, otherwise the PLLx output frequency is PLLx input frequency
multiplied by (MULx + 1).
The PLLxCOUNT field specifies the number of slow clock cycles before the LOCKx bit is set in the PMC_SR
after CKGR_PLLxR has been written.
Once CKGR_PLLxR has been written, the user must wait for the LOCKx bit to be set in the PMC_SR. This
can be done either by polling LOCKx in PMC_SR or by waiting for the interrupt line to be raised if the
associated interrupt source (LOCKx) has been enabled in PMC_IER. All fields in CKGR_PLLxR can be
programmed in a single write operation. If at some stage one of the following parameters, MULx or DIVx is
modified, the LOCKx bit goes low to indicate that PLLx is not yet ready. When PLLx is locked, LOCKx is set
again. The user must wait for the LOCKx bit to be set before using the PLLx output clock.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
443
7.
Select the master clock and processor clock
The master clock and the processor clock are configurable via PMC_MCKR.
The CSS field is used to select the clock source of the master clock and processor clock dividers. By default,
the selected clock source is the main clock.
The PRES field is used to define the processor clock and master clock prescaler. The user can choose
between different values (1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64). Prescaler output is the selected clock source frequency
divided by the PRES value.
Once the PMC_MCKR has been written, the user must wait for the MCKRDY bit to be set in the PMC_SR.
This can be done either by polling MCKRDY in PMC_SR or by waiting for the interrupt line to be raised if the
associated interrupt source (MCKRDY) has been enabled in PMC_IER. PMC_MCKR must not be
programmed in a single write operation. The programming sequence for PMC_MCKR is as follows:
If a new value for CSS field corresponds to PLL clock,
̶
Program the PRES field in PMC_MCKR.
̶
Wait for the MCKRDY bit to be set in PMC_SR.
̶
Program the CSS field in PMC_MCKR.
̶
Wait for the MCKRDY bit to be set in PMC_SR.
If a new value for CSS field corresponds to main clock or slow clock,
̶
Program the CSS field in PMC_MCKR.
̶
Wait for the MCKRDY bit to be set in the PMC_SR.
̶
Program the PRES field in PMC_MCKR.
̶
Wait for the MCKRDY bit to be set in PMC_SR.
If at some stage, parameters CSS or PRES are modified, the MCKRDY bit goes low to indicate that the
master clock and the processor clock are not yet ready. The user must wait for MCKRDY bit to be set again
before using the master and processor clocks.
Note:
IF PLLx clock was selected as the master clock and the user decides to modify it by writing in CKGR_PLLxR, the
MCKRDY flag will go low while PLLx is unlocked. Once PLLx is locked again, LOCKx goes high and MCKRDY is set.
While PLLx is unlocked, the master clock selection is automatically changed to slow clock for PLLA. For further
information, see Section 25.15.2 ”Clock Switching Waveforms”.
Code Example:
write_register(PMC_MCKR,0x00000001)
wait (MCKRDY=1)
write_register(PMC_MCKR,0x00000011)
wait (MCKRDY=1)
The master clock is main clock divided by 2.
8.
Select the programmable clocks
Programmable clocks are controlled via registers, PMC_SCER, PMC_SCDR and PMC_SCSR.
Programmable clocks can be enabled and/or disabled via PMC_SCER and PMC_SCDR. Three
programmable clocks can be used. PMC_SCSR indicates which programmable clock is enabled. By default
all programmable clocks are disabled.
PMC_PCKx registers are used to configure programmable clocks.
The CSS field is used to select the programmable clock divider source. Several clock options are available:
main clock, slow clock, master clock, PLLACK. The slow clock is the default clock source.
The PRES field is used to control the programmable clock prescaler. It is possible to choose between
different values (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64). Programmable clock output is prescaler input divided by PRES
parameter. By default, the PRES value is cleared which means that PCKx is equal to slow clock.
444
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Once PMC_PCKx register has been configured, the corresponding programmable clock must be enabled
and the user is constrained to wait for the PCKRDYx bit to be set in the PMC_SR. This can be done either by
polling PCKRDYx in PMC_SR or by waiting for the interrupt line to be raised if the associated interrupt
source (PCKRDYx) has been enabled in PMC_IER. All parameters in PMC_PCKx can be programmed in a
single write operation.
If the CSS and PRES parameters are to be modified, the corresponding programmable clock must be
disabled first. The parameters can then be modified. Once this has been done, the user must re-enable the
programmable clock and wait for the PCKRDYx bit to be set.
9.
Enable the peripheral clocks
Once all of the previous steps have been completed, the peripheral clocks can be enabled and/or disabled
via registers PMC_PCER0, PMC_PCDR0.
25.15 Clock Switching Details
25.15.1 Master Clock Switching Timings
Table 25-1 gives the worst case timings required for the master clock to switch from one selected clock to another
one. This is in the event that the prescaler is de-activated. When the prescaler is activated, an additional time of 64
clock cycles of the newly selected clock has to be added.
Table 25-1.
Clock Switching Timings (Worst Case)
From
Main Clock
SLCK
PLL Clock
–
4 x SLCK +
2.5 x Main Clock
0.5 x Main Clock +
4.5 x SLCK
–
3 x PLL Clock +
5 x SLCK
0.5 x Main Clock +
4 x SLCK +
PLLCOUNT x SLCK +
2.5 x PLLx Clock
2.5 x PLL Clock +
5 x SLCK +
PLLCOUNT x SLCK
2.5 x PLL Clock +
4 x SLCK +
PLLCOUNT x SLCK
To
Main Clock
SLCK
PLL Clock
Notes:
1.
2.
3 x PLL Clock +
4 x SLCK +
1 x Main Clock
PLL designates the PLLA .
PLLCOUNT designates PLLACOUNT .
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
445
25.15.2 Clock Switching Waveforms
Figure 25-7.
Switch Master Clock from Slow Clock to PLLx Clock
Slow Clock
PLLx Clock
LOCK
MCKRDY
Master Clock
Write PMC_MCKR
Figure 25-8.
Switch Master Clock from Main Clock to Slow Clock
Slow Clock
Main Clock
MCKRDY
Master Clock
Write PMC_MCKR
446
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 25-9.
Change PLLx Programming
Slow Clock
PLLx Clock
LOCKx
MCKRDY
Master Clock
Slow Clock
Write CKGR_PLLxR
Figure 25-10. Programmable Clock Output Programming
PLLx Clock
PCKRDY
PCKx Output
Write PMC_PCKx
Write PMC_SCER
Write PMC_SCDR
PLL Clock is selected
PCKx is enabled
PCKx is disabled
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
447
25.16 Register Write Protection
To prevent any single software error from corrupting PMC behavior, certain registers in the address space can be
write-protected by setting the WPEN bit in the PMC Write Protection Mode Register (PMC_WPMR).
If a write access to a write-protected register is detected, the WPVS flag in the PMC Write Protection Status
Register (PMC_WPSR) is set and the field WPVSRC indicates the register in which the write access has been
attempted.
The WPVS bit is automatically cleared after reading the PMC_WPSR.
The following registers can be write-protected:
448
PMC System Clock Enable Register
PMC System Clock Disable Register
PMC Peripheral Clock Enable Register 0
PMC Peripheral Clock Disable Register 0
PMC Clock Generator Main Oscillator Register
PMC Clock Generator PLLA Register
PMC Master Clock Register
PMC Programmable Clock Register
PMC Fast Startup Mode Register
PMC Fast Startup Polarity Register
PMC Oscillator Calibration Register
PMC SleepWalking Enable Register 0
PMC SleepWalking Disable Register 0
PLL Maximum Multiplier Value Register
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
25.17 Power Management Controller (PMC) User Interface
Table 25-2.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x0000
System Clock Enable Register
PMC_SCER
Write-only
–
0x0004
System Clock Disable Register
PMC_SCDR
Write-only
–
0x0008
System Clock Status Register
PMC_SCSR
Read-only
0x0000_0001
0x000C
Reserved
–
–
0x0010
Peripheral Clock Enable Register 0
PMC_PCER0
Write-only
–
0x0014
Peripheral Clock Disable Register 0
PMC_PCDR0
Write-only
–
0x0018
Peripheral Clock Status Register 0
PMC_PCSR0
Read-only
0x0000_0000
0x0020
Main Oscillator Register
CKGR_MOR
Read/Write
0x0000_0008
0x0024
Main Clock Frequency Register
CKGR_MCFR
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x0028
PLLA Register
CKGR_PLLAR
Read/Write
0x0000_3F00
0x002C
Reserved
–
–
0x0030
Master Clock Register
Read/Write
0x0000_0001
–
–
0x0034–0x003C
–
–
PMC_MCKR
Reserved
–
0x0040
Programmable Clock 0 Register
PMC_PCK0
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x0044
Programmable Clock 1 Register
PMC_PCK1
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x0048
Programmable Clock 2 Register
PMC_PCK2
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
–
–
0x004C– 0x005C
Reserved
–
0x0060
Interrupt Enable Register
PMC_IER
Write-only
–
0x0064
Interrupt Disable Register
PMC_IDR
Write-only
–
0x0068
Status Register
PMC_SR
Read-only
0x0003_0008
0x006C
Interrupt Mask Register
PMC_IMR
Read-only
0x0000_0000
0x0070
Fast Startup Mode Register
PMC_FSMR
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x0074
Fast Startup Polarity Register
PMC_FSPR
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x0078
Fault Output Clear Register
PMC_FOCR
Write-only
–
–
–
0x007C–0x00E0
Reserved
–
0x00E4
Write Protection Mode Register
PMC_WPMR
Read/Write
0x0000_0000
0x00E8
Write Protection Status Register
PMC_WPSR
Read-only
0x0000_0000
0x00EC–0x00FC
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0100–0x0108
Reserved
–
–
–
0x010C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0110
Oscillator Calibration Register
PMC_OCR
Read/Write
0x0040_4040
0x114
SleepWalking Enable Register 0
PMC_SLPWK_ER0
Write-only
–
0x118
SleepWalking Disable Register 0
PMC_SLPWK_DR0
Write-only
–
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
449
Table 25-2.
Register Mapping (Continued)
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x11C
SleepWalking Status Register 0
PMC_SLPWK_SR0
Read-only
0x0000_0000
0x120
SleepWalking Activity Status Register 0
PMC_SLPWK_ASR0
Read-Only
–
Read/Write
0x07FF_07FF
0x130
PLL Maximum Multiplier Value Register
PMC_PMMR
Note: If an offset is not listed in the table it must be considered as “reserved”.
450
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
25.17.1 PMC System Clock Enable Register
Name:
PMC_SCER
Address:
0x400E0400
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
PCK2
9
PCK1
8
PCK0
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PMC Write Protection Mode Register.
• PCKx: Programmable Clock x Output Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the corresponding Programmable Clock output.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
451
25.17.2 PMC System Clock Disable Register
Name:
PMC_SCDR
Address:
0x400E0404
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
PCK2
9
PCK1
8
PCK0
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PMC Write Protection Mode Register.
• PCKx: Programmable Clock x Output Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the corresponding Programmable Clock output.
452
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
25.17.3 PMC System Clock Status Register
Name:
PMC_SCSR
Address:
0x400E0408
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
PCK2
9
PCK1
8
PCK0
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
• PCKx: Programmable Clock x Output Status
0: The corresponding Programmable Clock output is disabled.
1: The corresponding Programmable Clock output is enabled.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
453
25.17.4 PMC Peripheral Clock Enable Register 0
Name:
PMC_PCER0
Address:
0x400E0410
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
PID29
28
PID28
27
PID27
26
PID26
25
PID25
24
PID24
23
PID23
22
PID22
21
PID21
20
PID20
19
PID19
18
PID18
17
PID17
16
PID16
15
PID15
14
PID14
13
PID13
12
PID12
11
PID11
10
PID10
9
PID9
8
PID8
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PMC Write Protection Mode Register.
• PIDx: Peripheral Clock x Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the corresponding peripheral clock.
Note: PIDx refers to identifiers defined in the section “Peripheral Identifiers”.
Note: Programming the control bits of the Peripheral ID that are not implemented has no effect on the behavior of the PMC.
454
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
25.17.5 PMC Peripheral Clock Disable Register 0
Name:
PMC_PCDR0
Address:
0x400E0414
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
PID29
28
PID28
27
PID27
26
PID26
25
PID25
24
PID24
23
PID23
22
PID22
21
PID21
20
PID20
19
PID19
18
PID18
17
PID17
16
PID16
15
PID15
14
PID14
13
PID13
12
PID12
11
PID11
10
PID10
9
PID9
8
PID8
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PMC Write Protection Mode Register.
• PIDx: Peripheral Clock x Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the corresponding peripheral clock.
Note: PIDx refers to identifiers defined in the section “Peripheral Identifiers”.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
455
25.17.6 PMC Peripheral Clock Status Register 0
Name:
PMC_PCSR0
Address:
0x400E0418
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
PID29
28
PID28
27
PID27
26
PID26
25
PID25
24
PID24
23
PID23
22
PID22
21
PID21
20
PID20
19
PID19
18
PID18
17
PID17
16
PID16
15
PID15
14
PID14
13
PID13
12
PID12
11
PID11
10
PID10
9
PID9
8
PID8
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
• PIDx: Peripheral Clock x Status
0: The corresponding peripheral clock is disabled.
1: The corresponding peripheral clock is enabled.
Note: PIDx refers to identifiers defined in the section “Peripheral Identifiers”.
456
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
25.17.7 PMC Clock Generator Main Oscillator Register
Name:
CKGR_MOR
Address:
0x400E0420
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
CFDEN
24
MOSCSEL
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
MOSCRCEN
2
WAITMODE
1
MOSCXTBY
0
MOSCXTEN
KEY
15
14
13
12
MOSCXTST
7
–
6
5
MOSCRCF
4
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PMC Write Protection Mode Register.
• MOSCXTEN: 3 to 20 MHz Crystal Oscillator Enable
A crystal must be connected between XIN and XOUT.
0: The 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator is disabled.
1: The 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator is enabled. MOSCXTBY must be cleared.
When MOSCXTEN is set, the MOSCXTS flag is set once the crystal oscillator start-up time is achieved.
• MOSCXTBY: 3 to 20 MHz Crystal Oscillator Bypass
0: No effect.
1: The 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator is bypassed. MOSCXTEN must be cleared. An external clock must be connected on
XIN.
When MOSCXTBY is set, the MOSCXTS flag in PMC_SR is automatically set.
Clearing MOSCXTEN and MOSCXTBY bits resets the MOSCXTS flag.
Note:
When the crystal oscillator bypass is disabled (MOSCXTBY = 0), the MOSCXTS flag must be read at 0 in PMC_SR before
enabling the crystal oscillator (MOSCXTEN = 1).
• WAITMODE: Wait Mode Command (Write-only)
0: No effect.
1: Puts the device in Wait mode.
• MOSCRCEN: 8/16/24 MHz RC Oscillator Enable
0: The 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator is disabled.
1: The 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator is enabled.
When MOSCRCEN is set, the MOSCRCS flag is set once the RC oscillator start-up time is achieved.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
457
• MOSCRCF: 8/16/24 MHz RC Oscillator Frequency Selection
At startup, the RC oscillator frequency is 8 MHz.
Value
Name
Description
0
8_MHz
The RC oscillator frequency is at 8 MHz (default)
1
16_MHz
The RC oscillator frequency is at 16 MHz
2
24_MHz
The RC oscillator frequency is at 24 MHz
Note: MOSCRCF must be changed only if MOSCRCS is set in the PMC_SR. Therefore MOSCRCF and MOSCRCEN cannot be
changed at the same time.
• MOSCXTST: 3 to 20 MHz Crystal Oscillator Start-up Time
Specifies the number of slow clock cycles multiplied by 8 for the crystal oscillator start-up time.
• KEY: Write Access Password
Value
Name
0x37
PASSWD
Description
Writing any other value in this field aborts the write operation.
Always reads as 0.
• MOSCSEL: Main Clock Oscillator Selection
0: The 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator is selected.
1: The 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator is selected.
• CFDEN: Clock Failure Detector Enable
0: The clock failure detector is disabled.
1: The clock failure detector is enabled.
Note:
458
1. The 32 kHz (typical) RC oscillator is automatically enabled when CFDEN=1.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
25.17.8 PMC Clock Generator Main Clock Frequency Register
Name:
CKGR_MCFR
Address:
0x400E0424
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
RCMEAS
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
MAINFRDY
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
MAINF
7
6
5
4
MAINF
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PMC Write Protection Mode Register.
• MAINF: Main Clock Frequency
Gives the number of main clock cycles within 16 slow clock periods. To calculate the frequency of the measured clock:
fMAINCK = (MAINF × fSLCK) / 16
where frequency is in MHz.
• MAINFRDY: Main Clock Frequency Measure Ready
0: MAINF value is not valid or the measured oscillator is disabled or a measure has just been started by means of
RCMEAS.
1: The measured oscillator has been enabled previously and MAINF value is available.
Note: To ensure that a correct value is read on the MAINF field, the MAINFRDY flag must be read at 1 then another read access must
be performed on the register to get a stable value on the MAINF field.
• RCMEAS: Restart Main Clock Source Frequency Measure (write-only)
0: No effect.
1: Restarts measuring of the frequency of the main clock source. MAINF will carry the new frequency as soon as a low to
high transition occurs on the MAINFRDY flag.
The measure is performed on the main frequency (i.e. not limited to RC oscillator only), but if the main clock frequency
source is the 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator, the restart of measuring is not needed because of the well known stability of
crystal oscillators.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
459
25.17.9 PMC Clock Generator PLLA Register
Name:
CKGR_PLLAR
Address:
0x400E0428
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
ZERO
28
–
27
23
22
21
20
19
26
25
24
18
17
16
10
9
8
2
1
0
MULA
MULA
15
–
14
–
13
7
6
5
12
11
PLLACOUNT
4
3
PLLAEN
Possible limitations on PLLA input frequencies and multiplier factors should be checked before using the PMC.
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PMC Write Protection Mode Register.
• PLLAEN: PLLA Control
0: PLLA is disabled
1: PLLA is enabled
2–255: Forbidden
• PLLACOUNT: PLLA Counter
Specifies the number of Slow Clock cycles before the LOCKA bit is set in PMC_SR after CKGR_PLLAR is written.
• MULA: PLLA Multiplier
0: The PLLA is deactivated (PLLA also disabled if DIVA = 0).
24 up to 1500 = The PLLA Clock frequency is the PLLA input frequency multiplied by MULA + 1.
Unlisted values are forbidden.
• ZERO: Must Be Written to 0
Bit 29 must always be written to 0 when programming the CKGR_PLLAR.
460
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
25.17.10PMC Master Clock Register
Name:
PMC_MCKR
Address:
0x400E0430
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
PLLADIV2
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
5
PRES
4
3
–
2
–
1
0
CSS
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PMC Write Protection Mode Register.
• CSS: Master Clock Source Selection
Value
Name
Description
0
SLOW_CLK
Slow Clock is selected
1
MAIN_CLK
Main Clock is selected
2
PLLA_CLK
PLLA Clock is selected
• PRES: Processor Clock Prescaler
Value
Name
Description
0
CLK_1
Selected clock
1
CLK_2
Selected clock divided by 2
2
CLK_4
Selected clock divided by 4
3
CLK_8
Selected clock divided by 8
4
CLK_16
Selected clock divided by 16
5
CLK_32
Selected clock divided by 32
6
CLK_64
Selected clock divided by 64
7
CLK_3
Selected clock divided by 3
• PLLADIV2: PLLA Divisor by 2
PLLADIV2
PLLA Clock Division
0
PLLA clock frequency is divided by 1.
1
PLLA clock frequency is divided by 2.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
461
25.17.11PMC Programmable Clock Register
Name:
PMC_PCKx
Address:
0x400E0440
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
5
PRES
4
3
–
2
1
CSS
0
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PMC Write Protection Mode Register.
• CSS: Master Clock Source Selection
Value
Name
Description
0
SLOW_CLK
Slow Clock is selected
1
MAIN_CLK
Main Clock is selected
2
PLLA_CLK
PLLA Clock is selected
4
MCK
Master Clock is selected
• PRES: Programmable Clock Prescaler
462
Value
Name
Description
0
CLK_1
Selected clock
1
CLK_2
Selected clock divided by 2
2
CLK_4
Selected clock divided by 4
3
CLK_8
Selected clock divided by 8
4
CLK_16
Selected clock divided by 16
5
CLK_32
Selected clock divided by 32
6
CLK_64
Selected clock divided by 64
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
25.17.12PMC Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
PMC_IER
Address:
0x400E0460
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
CFDEV
17
MOSCRCS
16
MOSCSELS
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
PCKRDY2
9
PCKRDY1
8
PCKRDY0
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
MCKRDY
2
–
1
LOCKA
0
MOSCXTS
The following configuration values are valid for all listed bit names of this register:
0: No effect.
1: Enables the corresponding interrupt.
• MOSCXTS: 3 to 20 MHz Crystal Oscillator Status Interrupt Enable
• LOCKA: PLLA Lock Interrupt Enable
• MCKRDY: Master Clock Ready Interrupt Enable
• PCKRDYx: Programmable Clock Ready x Interrupt Enable
• MOSCSELS: Main Clock Source Oscillator Selection Status Interrupt Enable
• MOSCRCS: 8/16/24 MHz RC Oscillator Status Interrupt Enable
• CFDEV: Clock Failure Detector Event Interrupt Enable
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
463
25.17.13PMC Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
PMC_IDR
Address:
0x400E0464
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
CFDEV
17
MOSCRCS
16
MOSCSELS
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
PCKRDY2
9
PCKRDY1
8
PCKRDY0
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
MCKRDY
2
–
1
LOCKA
0
MOSCXTS
The following configuration values are valid for all listed bit names of this register:
0: No effect.
1: Disables the corresponding interrupt.
• MOSCXTS: 3 to 20 MHz Crystal Oscillator Status Interrupt Disable
• LOCKA: PLLA Lock Interrupt Disable
• MCKRDY: Master Clock Ready Interrupt Disable
• PCKRDYx: Programmable Clock Ready x Interrupt Disable
• MOSCSELS: Main Clock Source Oscillator Selection Status Interrupt Disable
• MOSCRCS: 8/16/24 MHz RC Oscillator Status Interrupt Disable
• CFDEV: Clock Failure Detector Event Interrupt Disable
464
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
25.17.14PMC Status Register
Name:
PMC_SR
Address:
0x400E0468
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
FOS
19
CFDS
18
CFDEV
17
MOSCRCS
16
MOSCSELS
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
PCKRDY2
9
PCKRDY1
8
PCKRDY0
7
OSCSELS
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
MCKRDY
2
–
1
LOCKA
0
MOSCXTS
• MOSCXTS: 3 to 20 MHz Crystal Oscillator Status
0: 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator is not stabilized.
1: 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator is stabilized.
• LOCKA: PLLA Lock Status
0: PLLA is not locked
1: PLLA is locked.
• MCKRDY: Master Clock Status
0: Master Clock is not ready.
1: Master Clock is ready.
• OSCSELS: Slow Clock Oscillator Selection
0: Embedded 32 kHz RC oscillator is selected.
1: 32768 Hz crystal oscillator is selected.
• PCKRDYx: Programmable Clock Ready Status
0: Programmable Clock x is not ready.
1: Programmable Clock x is ready.
• MOSCSELS: Main Clock Source Oscillator Selection Status
0: Selection is in progress.
1: Selection is done.
• MOSCRCS: 8/16/24 MHz RC Oscillator Status
0: 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator is not stabilized.
1: 8/16/24 MHz RC oscillator is stabilized.
• CFDEV: Clock Failure Detector Event
0: No clock failure detection of the 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator has occurred since the last read of PMC_SR.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
465
1: At least one clock failure detection of the 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator has occurred since the last read of PMC_SR.
• CFDS: Clock Failure Detector Status
0: A clock failure of the 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator is not detected.
1: A clock failure of the 3 to 20 MHz crystal oscillator is detected.
• FOS: Clock Failure Detector Fault Output Status
0: The fault output of the clock failure detector is inactive.
1: The fault output of the clock failure detector is active.
466
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
25.17.15PMC Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
PMC_IMR
Address:
0x400E046C
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
CFDEV
17
MOSCRCS
16
MOSCSELS
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
PCKRDY2
9
PCKRDY1
8
PCKRDY0
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
MCKRDY
2
–
1
LOCKA
0
MOSCXTS
The following configuration values are valid for all listed bit names of this register:
0: No effect.
1: Enables the corresponding interrupt.
• MOSCXTS: 3 to 20 MHz Crystal Oscillator Status Interrupt Mask
• LOCKA: PLLA Lock Interrupt Mask
• MCKRDY: Master Clock Ready Interrupt Mask
• PCKRDYx: Programmable Clock Ready x Interrupt Mask
• MOSCSELS: Main Clock Source Oscillator Selection Status Interrupt Mask
• MOSCRCS: 8/16/24 MHz RC Oscillator Status Interrupt Mask
• CFDEV: Clock Failure Detector Event Interrupt Mask
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
467
25.17.16PMC Fast Startup Mode Register
Name:
PMC_FSMR
Address:
0x400E0470
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
21
20
LPM
19
–
18
17
RTCAL
16
RTTAL
15
FSTT15
14
FSTT14
13
FSTT13
12
FSTT12
11
FSTT11
10
FSTT10
9
FSTT9
8
FSTT8
7
FSTT7
6
FSTT6
5
FSTT5
4
FSTT4
3
FSTT3
2
FSTT2
1
FSTT1
0
FSTT0
FLPM
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PMC Write Protection Mode Register.
• FSTT0–FSTT15: Fast Startup Input Enable 0 to 15
0: The corresponding wake-up input has no effect on the PMC.
1: The corresponding wake-up input enables a fast restart signal to the PMC.
• RTTAL: RTT Alarm Enable
0: The RTT alarm has no effect on the PMC.
1: The RTT alarm enables a fast restart signal to the PMC.
• RTCAL: RTC Alarm Enable
0: The RTC alarm has no effect on the PMC.
1: The RTC alarm enables a fast restart signal to the PMC.
• LPM: Low-power Mode
0: The WaitForInterrupt (WFI) or the WaitForEvent (WFE) instruction of the processor makes the processor enter Sleep
mode.
1: The WaitForEvent (WFE) instruction of the processor makes the system to enter Wait mode.
• FLPM: Flash Low-power Mode
Value
468
Name
Description
0
FLASH_STANDBY
Flash is in Standby Mode when system enters Wait Mode
1
FLASH_DEEP_POWERDOWN
Flash is in Deep-power-down mode when system enters Wait Mode
2
FLASH_IDLE
Idle mode
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
25.17.17PMC Fast Startup Polarity Register
Name:
PMC_FSPR
Address:
0x400E0474
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
FSTP15
14
FSTP14
13
FSTP13
12
FSTP12
11
FSTP11
10
FSTP10
9
FSTP9
8
FSTP8
7
FSTP7
6
FSTP6
5
FSTP5
4
FSTP4
3
FSTP3
2
FSTP2
1
FSTP1
0
FSTP0
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PMC Write Protection Mode Register.
• FSTPx: Fast Startup Input Polarityx
Defines the active polarity of the corresponding wake-up input. If the corresponding wake-up input is enabled and at the
FSTP level, it enables a fast restart signal.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
469
25.17.18PMC Fault Output Clear Register
Name:
PMC_FOCR
Address:
0x400E0478
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
FOCLR
• FOCLR: Fault Output Clear
Clears the clock failure detector fault output.
470
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
25.17.19PMC Write Protection Mode Register
Name:
PMC_WPMR
Address:
0x400E04E4
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
WPEN
WPKEY
23
22
21
20
WPKEY
15
14
13
12
WPKEY
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
• WPEN: Write Protection Enable
0: Disables the write protection if WPKEY corresponds to 0x504D43 (“PMC” in ASCII).
1: Enables the write protection if WPKEY corresponds to 0x504D43 (“PMC” in ASCII).
See Section 25.16 ”Register Write Protection” for the list of registers that can be write-protected.
• WPKEY: Write Protection Key
Value
0x504D43
Name
Description
PASSWD
Writing any other value in this field aborts the write operation of the WPEN bit.
Always reads as 0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
471
25.17.20PMC Write Protection Status Register
Name:
PMC_WPSR
Address:
0x400E04E8
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
WPVS
WPVSRC
15
14
13
12
WPVSRC
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
• WPVS: Write Protection Violation Status
0: No write protection violation has occurred since the last read of the PMC_WPSR.
1: A write protection violation has occurred since the last read of the PMC_WPSR. If this violation is an unauthorized
attempt to write a protected register, the associated violation is reported into field WPVSRC.
• WPVSRC: Write Protection Violation Source
When WPVS = 1, WPVSRC indicates the register address offset at which a write access has been attempted.
472
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
25.17.21PMC Oscillator Calibration Register
Name:
PMC_OCR
Address:
0x400E0510
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
SEL24
22
21
20
19
CAL24
18
17
16
15
SEL16
14
13
12
11
CAL16
10
9
8
7
SEL8
6
5
4
3
CAL8
2
1
0
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PMC Write Protection Mode Register.
• CAL8: RC Oscillator Calibration bits for 8 MHz
Calibration bits applied to the RC Oscillator when SEL8 is set.
• SEL8: Selection of RC Oscillator Calibration bits for 8 MHz
0: Default value stored in Flash memory.
1: Value written by user in CAL8 field of this register.
• CAL16: RC Oscillator Calibration bits for 16 MHz
Calibration bits applied to the RC Oscillator when SEL16 is set.
• SEL16: Selection of RC Oscillator Calibration bits for 16 MHz
0: Factory-determined value stored in Flash memory.
1: Value written by user in CAL16 field of this register.
• CAL24: RC Oscillator Calibration bits for 24 MHz
Calibration bits applied to the RC Oscillator when SEL24 is set.
• SEL24: Selection of RC Oscillator Calibration bits for 24 MHz
0: Factory-determined value stored in Flash memory.
1: Value written by user in CAL24 field of this register.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
473
25.17.22PMC SleepWalking Enable Register 0
Name:
PMC_SLPWK_ER0
Address:
0x400E0514
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
PID29
28
PID28
27
PID27
26
PID26
25
PID25
24
PID24
23
PID23
22
PID22
21
PID21
20
PID20
19
PID19
18
PID18
17
PID17
16
PID16
15
PID15
14
PID14
13
PID13
12
PID12
11
PID11
10
PID10
9
PID9
8
PID8
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PMC Write Protection Mode Register.
• PIDx: Peripheral x SleepWalking Enable
0: No effect.
1: The asynchronous partial wake-up (SleepWalking) function of the corresponding peripheral is enabled.
Not all PIDs can be configured with asynchronous partial wake-up.
Only the following PID can be configured with asynchronous partial wake-up: UART0, UART1, TWI0.
The clock of the peripheral must be enabled before using its asynchronous partial wake-up (SleepWalking) function (its
associated PIDx field in PMC Peripheral Clock Status Register 0 is set to ‘1’).
Note: The values for PIDx are defined in section “Peripheral Identifiers”.
474
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
25.17.23PMC SleepWalking Disable Register 0
Name:
PMC_SLPWK_DR0
Address:
0x400E0518
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
PID29
28
PID28
27
PID27
26
PID26
25
PID25
24
PID24
23
PID23
22
PID22
21
PID21
20
PID20
19
PID19
18
PID18
17
PID17
16
PID16
15
PID15
14
PID14
13
PID13
12
PID12
11
PID11
10
PID10
9
PID9
8
PID8
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PMC Write Protection Mode Register.
• PIDx: Peripheral x SleepWalking Disable
0: No effect.
1: The asynchronous partial wake-up (SleepWalking) function of the corresponding peripheral is disabled.
Not all PIDs can be configured with asynchronous partial wake-up.
Only the following PIDs can be configured with asynchronous partial wake-up: UART0, UART1, TWI0.
Note: The values for PIDx are defined in the section “Peripheral Identifiers”.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
475
25.17.24PMC SleepWalking Status Register 0
Name:
PMC_SLPWK_SR0
Address:
0x400E051C
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
PID29
28
PID28
27
PID27
26
PID26
25
PID25
24
PID24
23
PID23
22
PID22
21
PID21
20
PID20
19
PID19
18
PID18
17
PID17
16
PID16
15
PID15
14
PID14
13
PID13
12
PID12
11
PID11
10
PID10
9
PID9
8
PID8
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
• PIDx: Peripheral x SleepWalking Status
0: The asynchronous partial wake-up (SleepWalking) function of the peripheral is currently disabled or the peripheral
enabled for asynchronous partial wake-up (SleepWalking) cleared the PIDx bit upon detection of a wake-up condition.
1: The asynchronous partial wake-up (SleepWalking) function of the peripheral is currently enabled.
Not all PIDs can be configured with asynchronous partial wake-up.
Only the following PIDs can be configured with asynchronous partial wake-up: UART0, UART1, TWI0.
Note: The values for PIDx are defined in the section “Peripheral Identifiers”.
476
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
25.17.25PMC SleepWalking Activity Status Register 0
Name:
PMC_SLPWK_ASR0
Address:
0x400E0520
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
PID29
28
PID28
27
PID27
26
PID26
25
PID25
24
PID24
23
PID23
22
PID22
21
PID21
20
PID20
19
PID19
18
PID18
17
PID17
16
PID16
15
PID15
14
PID14
13
PID13
12
PID12
11
PID11
10
PID10
9
PID9
8
PID8
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
• PIDx: Peripheral x Activity Status
0: The peripheral x is not presently active. The asynchronous partial wake-up (SleepWalking) function can be activated.
1: The peripheral x is presently active. The asynchronous partial wake-up (SleepWalking) function must not be activated.
Only the following PIDs can be configured with asynchronous partial wake-up: UART0, UART1, TWI0.
All other PIDs are always read at 0.
Note: The values for PIDx are defined in the section “Peripheral Identifiers”.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
477
25.17.26PLL Maximum Multiplier Value Register
Name:
PMC_PMMR
Address:
0x400E0530
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
9
PLLA_MMAX
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PLLA_MMAX
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PMC Write Protection Mode Register.
• PLLA_MMAX: PLLA Maximum Allowed Multiplier Value
Defines the maximum value of multiplication factor that can be sent to PLLA. Any value of the MULA field (see PMC Clock
Generator PLLA Register) above PLLA_MMAX is saturated to PLLA_MMAX. PLLA_MMAX write operation is cancelled in
the following cases:
• The value of MULA is currently saturated by PLLA_MMAX
• The user is trying to write a value of PLLA_MMAX that is smaller than the current value of MULA
478
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
26.
Chip Identifier (CHIPID)
26.1
Description
Chip Identifier (CHIPID) registers are used to recognize the device and its revision. These registers provide the
sizes and types of the on-chip memories, as well as the set of embedded peripherals.
Two CHIPID registers are embedded: Chip ID Register (CHIPID_CIDR) and Chip ID Extension Register
(CHIPID_EXID). Both registers contain a hard-wired value that is read-only.
The CHIPID_CIDR register contains the following fields:
VERSION: Identifies the revision of the silicon
EPROC: Indicates the embedded ARM processor
NVPTYP and NVPSIZ: Identify the type of embedded non-volatile memory and the size
SRAMSIZ: Indicates the size of the embedded SRAM
ARCH: Identifies the set of embedded peripherals
EXT: Shows the use of the extension identifier register
The CHIPID_EXID register is device-dependent and reads 0 if CHIPID_CIDR.EXT = 0.
26.2
Embedded Characteristics
Chip ID Registers
̶
Table 26-1.
Identification of the Device Revision, Sizes of the Embedded Memories, Set of Peripherals,
Embedded Processor
SAM G53 Chip ID Registers
Chip Name
CHIPID_CIDR
CHIPID_EXID
SAM G53G19 Rev A
0x247E_0AE0
0x0
SAM G53N19 Rev A
0x247E_0AE8
0x0
SAM G53G19 Rev B
0X247E_0AE1
0x0
SAM G53N19 Rev B
0X247E_0AE9
0x0
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
479
26.3
Chip Identifier (CHIPID) User Interface
Table 26-2.
Offset
480
Register Mapping
Register
Name
0x0
Chip ID Register
0x4
Chip ID Extension Register
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Access
Reset
CHIPID_CIDR
Read-only
–
CHIPID_EXID
Read-only
–
26.3.1 Chip ID Register
Name:
CHIPID_CIDR
Address:
0x400E0740
Access:
Read-only
31
EXT
30
23
22
29
NVPTYP
28
21
20
27
26
19
18
ARCH
15
14
13
6
EPROC
24
17
16
9
8
1
0
SRAMSIZ
12
11
NVPSIZ2
7
25
ARCH
10
NVPSIZ
5
4
3
2
VERSION
• VERSION: Version of the Device
Current version of the device.
• EPROC: Embedded Processor
Value
Name
Description
0
SAM x7
Cortex-M7
1
ARM946ES
ARM946ES
2
ARM7TDMI
ARM7TDMI
3
CM3
Cortex-M3
4
ARM920T
ARM920T
5
ARM926EJS
ARM926EJS
6
CA5
Cortex-A5
7
CM4
Cortex-M4
• NVPSIZ: Nonvolatile Program Memory Size
Value
Name
Description
0
NONE
None
1
8K
8 Kbytes
2
16K
16 Kbytes
3
32K
32 Kbytes
4
–
Reserved
5
64K
64 Kbytes
6
–
Reserved
7
128K
128 Kbytes
8
160K
160 Kbytes
9
256K
256 Kbytes
10
512K
512 Kbytes
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
481
Value
Name
Description
11
–
Reserved
12
1024K
1024 Kbytes
13
–
Reserved
14
2048K
2048 Kbytes
15
–
Reserved
• NVPSIZ2: Second Nonvolatile Program Memory Size
Value
Name
Description
0
NONE
None
1
8K
8 Kbytes
2
16K
16 Kbytes
3
32K
32 Kbytes
4
–
Reserved
5
64K
64 Kbytes
6
–
Reserved
7
128K
128 Kbytes
8
–
Reserved
9
256K
256 Kbytes
10
512K
512 Kbytes
11
–
Reserved
12
1024K
1024 Kbytes
13
–
Reserved
14
2048K
2048 Kbytes
15
–
Reserved
• SRAMSIZ: Internal SRAM Size
Value
482
Name
Description
0
48K
48 Kbytes
1
192K
192 Kbytes
2
384K
384 Kbytes
3
6K
6 Kbytes
4
24K
24 Kbytes
5
4K
4 Kbytes
6
80K
80 Kbytes
7
160K
160 Kbytes
8
8K
8 Kbytes
9
16K
16 Kbytes
10
32K
32 Kbytes
11
64K
64 Kbytes
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Value
Name
Description
12
128K
128 Kbytes
13
256K
256 Kbytes
14
96K
96 Kbytes
15
512K
512 Kbytes
• ARCH: Architecture Identifier
Value
Name
Description
0x47
SAM G53
SAM G53
0x66
SAM4CxxE
SAM4CxE (144-pin version)
• NVPTYP: Nonvolatile Program Memory Type
Value
Name
Description
0
ROM
ROM
1
ROMLESS
ROMless or on-chip Flash
2
FLASH
Embedded Flash Memory
ROM and Embedded Flash Memory
3
ROM_FLASH
NVPSIZ is ROM size
NVPSIZ2 is Flash size
4
SRAM
SRAM emulating ROM
• EXT: Extension Flag
0: Chip ID has a single register definition without extension.
1: An extended Chip ID exists.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
483
26.3.2 Chip ID Extension Register
Name:
CHIPID_EXID
Address:
0x400E0744
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
EXID
23
22
21
20
EXID
15
14
13
12
EXID
7
6
5
4
EXID
• EXID: Chip ID Extension
This field is cleared if CHIPID_CIDR.EXT = 0.
484
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.
Parallel Input/Output Controller (PIO)
27.1
Description
The Parallel Input/Output Controller (PIO) manages up to 25 fully programmable input/output lines. Each I/O line
may be dedicated as a general-purpose I/O or be assigned to a function of an embedded peripheral. This ensures
effective optimization of the pins of the product.
Each I/O line is associated with a bit number in all of the 32-bit registers of the 32-bit wide user interface.
Each I/O line of the PIO Controller features:
An input change interrupt enabling level change detection on any I/O line.
Additional Interrupt modes enabling rising edge, falling edge, low-level or high-level detection on any I/O
line.
A glitch filter providing rejection of glitches lower than one-half of peripheral clock cycle.
A debouncing filter providing rejection of unwanted pulses from key or push button operations.
Multi-drive capability similar to an open drain I/O line.
Control of the pull-up and pull-down of the I/O line.
Input visibility and output control.
The PIO Controller also features a synchronous output providing up to 25 bits of data output in a single write
operation.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
485
27.2
486
Embedded Characteristics
Up to 25 Programmable I/O Lines
Fully Programmable through Set/Clear Registers
Multiplexing of Four Peripheral Functions per I/O Line
For each I/O Line (Whether Assigned to a Peripheral or Used as General Purpose I/O)
̶
Input Change Interrupt
̶
Programmable Glitch Filter
̶
Programmable Debouncing Filter
̶
Multi-drive Option Enables Driving in Open Drain
̶
Programmable Pull-Up on Each I/O Line
̶
Pin Data Status Register, Supplies Visibility of the Level on the Pin at Any Time
̶
Additional Interrupt Modes on a Programmable Event: Rising Edge, Falling Edge, Low-Level or HighLevel
Synchronous Output, Provides Set and Clear of Several I/O Lines in a Single Write
Register Write Protection
Programmable Schmitt Trigger Inputs
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.3
Block Diagram
Figure 27-1.
Block Diagram
PIO Controller
Interrupt Controller
PMC
PIO Interrupt
Peripheral Clock
Data, Enable
Up to x
peripheral IOs
Embedded
Peripheral
PIN 0
Data, Enable
PIN 1
Embedded
Peripheral
x is an integer representing the maximum number
of IOs managed by one PIO controller.
27.4
Up to x
peripheral IOs
PIN x-1
APB
Product Dependencies
27.4.1 Pin Multiplexing
Each pin is configurable, depending on the product, as either a general-purpose I/O line only, or as an I/O line
multiplexed with one or two peripheral I/Os. As the multiplexing is hardware defined and thus product-dependent,
the hardware designer and programmer must carefully determine the configuration of the PIO Controllers required
by their application. When an I/O line is general-purpose only, i.e., not multiplexed with any peripheral I/O,
programming of the PIO Controller regarding the assignment to a peripheral has no effect and only the PIO
Controller can control how the pin is driven by the product.
27.4.2 External Interrupt Lines
When the WKUPx input pins must be used as external interrupt lines, the PIO Controller must be configured to
disable the peripheral control on these IOs, and the corresponding IO lines must be set to Input mode.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
487
27.4.3 Power Management
The Power Management Controller controls the peripheral clock in order to save power. Writing any of the
registers of the user interface does not require the peripheral clock to be enabled. This means that the
configuration of the I/O lines does not require the peripheral clock to be enabled.
However, when the clock is disabled, not all of the features of the PIO Controller are available, including glitch
filtering. Note that the input change interrupt, the interrupt modes on a programmable event and the read of the pin
level require the clock to be validated.
After a hardware reset, the peripheral clock is disabled by default.
The user must configure the Power Management Controller before any access to the input line information.
27.4.4 Interrupt Sources
For interrupt handling, the PIO Controllers are considered as user peripherals. This means that the PIO Controller
interrupt lines are connected among the interrupt sources. Refer to the PIO Controller peripheral identifier in the
Peripheral Identifiers table to identify the interrupt sources dedicated to the PIO Controllers. Using the PIO
Controller requires the Interrupt Controller to be programmed first.
The PIO Controller interrupt can be generated only if the peripheral clock is enabled.
Table 27-1.
488
Peripheral IDs
Instance
ID
PIOA
11
PIOB
12
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.5
Functional Description
The PIO Controller features up to 25 fully-programmable I/O lines. Most of the control logic associated to each I/O
is represented in Figure 27-2. In this description each signal shown represents one of up to 25 possible indexes.
Figure 27-2.
I/O Line Control Logic
PIO_OER[0]
VDD
PIO_OSR[0]
PIO_PUER[0]
PIO_ODR[0]
PIO_PUSR[0]
PIO_PUDR[0]
1
Peripheral A Output Enable
00
01
10
11
Peripheral B Output Enable
Peripheral C Output Enable
Peripheral D Output Enable
0
0
PIO_PER[0]
PIO_ABCDSR1[0]
PIO_PDR[0]
00
01
10
11
Peripheral B Output
Peripheral C Output
Peripheral D Output
1
PIO_PSR[0]
PIO_ABCDSR2[0]
Peripheral A Output
Integrated
Pull-Up
Resistor
PIO_MDER[0]
PIO_MDSR[0]
PIO_MDDR[0]
0
0
PIO_SODR[0]
1
PIO_ODSR[0]
Pad
PIO_CODR[0]
1
PIO_PPDER[0]
Integrated
Pull-Down
Resistor
PIO_PPDSR[0]
PIO_PPDDR[0]
GND
Peripheral A Input
Peripheral B Input
Peripheral C Input
Peripheral D Input
PIO_PDSR[0]
PIO_ISR[0]
0
D
Peripheral Clock
0
Slow Clock
PIO_SCDR
Clock
Divider
div_slck
1
Programmable
Glitch
or
Debouncing
Filter
Q
DFF
D
Q
DFF
EVENT
DETECTOR
(Up to 32 possible inputs)
PIO Interrupt
1
Peripheral Clock
Resynchronization
Stage
PIO_IER[0]
PIO_IMR[0]
PIO_IFER[0]
PIO_IDR[0]
PIO_IFSR[0]
PIO_IFSCER[0]
PIO_IFDR[0]
PIO_IFSCSR[0]
PIO_IFSCDR[0]
PIO_ISR[31]
PIO_IER[31]
PIO_IMR[31]
PIO_IDR[31]
27.5.1 Pull-up and Pull-down Resistor Control
Each I/O line is designed with an embedded pull-up resistor and an embedded pull-down resistor. The pull-up
resistor can be enabled or disabled by writing to the Pull-up Enable Register (PIO_PUER) or Pull-up Disable
Register (PIO_PUDR), respectively. Writing to these registers results in setting or clearing the corresponding bit in
the Pull-up Status Register (PIO_PUSR). Reading a one in PIO_PUSR means the pull-up is disabled and reading
a zero means the pull-up is enabled. The pull-down resistor can be enabled or disabled by writing the Pull-down
Enable Register (PIO_PPDER) or the Pull-down Disable Register (PIO_PPDDR), respectively. Writing in these
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
489
registers results in setting or clearing the corresponding bit in the Pull-down Status Register (PIO_PPDSR).
Reading a one in PIO_PPDSR means the pull-up is disabled and reading a zero means the pull-down is enabled.
Enabling the pull-down resistor while the pull-up resistor is still enabled is not possible. In this case, the write of
PIO_PPDER for the relevant I/O line is discarded. Likewise, enabling the pull-up resistor while the pull-down
resistor is still enabled is not possible. In this case, the write of PIO_PUER for the relevant I/O line is discarded.
Control of the pull-up resistor is possible regardless of the configuration of the I/O line.
After reset, depending on the I/O, pull-up or pull-down can be set.
27.5.2 I/O Line or Peripheral Function Selection
When a pin is multiplexed with one or two peripheral functions, the selection is controlled with the Enable Register
(PIO_PER) and the Disable Register (PIO_PDR). The Status Register (PIO_PSR) is the result of the set and clear
registers and indicates whether the pin is controlled by the corresponding peripheral or by the PIO Controller. A
value of zero indicates that the pin is controlled by the corresponding on-chip peripheral selected in the ABCD
Select registers (PIO_ABCDSR1 and PIO_ABCDSR2). A value of one indicates the pin is controlled by the PIO
Controller.
If a pin is used as a general-purpose I/O line (not multiplexed with an on-chip peripheral), PIO_PER and PIO_PDR
have no effect and PIO_PSR returns a one for the corresponding bit.
After reset, the I/O lines are controlled by the PIO Controller, i.e., PIO_PSR resets at one. However, in some
events, it is important that PIO lines are controlled by the peripheral (as in the case of memory chip select lines that
must be driven inactive after reset, or for address lines that must be driven low for booting out of an external
memory). Thus, the reset value of PIO_PSR is defined at the product level and depends on the multiplexing of the
device.
27.5.3 Peripheral A or B or C or D Selection
The PIO Controller provides multiplexing of up to four peripheral functions on a single pin. The selection is
performed by writing PIO_ABCDSR1 and PIO_ABCDSR2.
For each pin:
The corresponding bit at level zero in PIO_ABCDSR1 and the corresponding bit at level zero in
PIO_ABCDSR2 means peripheral A is selected.
The corresponding bit at level one in PIO_ABCDSR1 and the corresponding bit at level zero in
PIO_ABCDSR2 means peripheral B is selected.
The corresponding bit at level zero in PIO_ABCDSR1 and the corresponding bit at level one in
PIO_ABCDSR2 means peripheral C is selected.
The corresponding bit at level one in PIO_ABCDSR1 and the corresponding bit at level one in
PIO_ABCDSR2 means peripheral D is selected.
Note that multiplexing of peripheral lines A, B, C and D only affects the output line. The peripheral input lines are
always connected to the pin input (see Figure 27-2).
Writing in PIO_ABCDSR1 and PIO_ABCDSR2 manages the multiplexing regardless of the configuration of the
pin. However, assignment of a pin to a peripheral function requires a write in PIO_ABCDSR1 and PIO_ABCDSR2
in addition to a write in PIO_PDR.
After reset, PIO_ABCDSR1 and PIO_ABCDSR2 are zero, thus indicating that all the PIO lines are configured on
peripheral A. However, peripheral A generally does not drive the pin as the PIO Controller resets in I/O line mode.
If the software selects a peripheral A, B, C or D which does not exist for a pin, no alternate functions are enabled
for this pin and the selection is taken into account. The PIO Controller does not carry out checks to prevent
selection of a peripheral which does not exist.
490
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.5.4 Output Control
When the I/O line is assigned to a peripheral function, i.e., the corresponding bit in PIO_PSR is at zero, the drive of
the I/O line is controlled by the peripheral. Peripheral A or B or C or D depending on the value in PIO_ABCDSR1
and PIO_ABCDSR2 determines whether the pin is driven or not.
When the I/O line is controlled by the PIO Controller, the pin can be configured to be driven. This is done by writing
the Output Enable Register (PIO_OER) and Output Disable Register (PIO_ODR). The results of these write
operations are detected in the Output Status Register (PIO_OSR). When a bit in this register is at zero, the
corresponding I/O line is used as an input only. When the bit is at one, the corresponding I/O line is driven by the
PIO Controller.
The level driven on an I/O line can be determined by writing in the Set Output Data Register (PIO_SODR) and the
Clear Output Data Register (PIO_CODR). These write operations, respectively, set and clear the Output Data
Status Register (PIO_ODSR), which represents the data driven on the I/O lines. Writing in PIO_OER and
PIO_ODR manages PIO_OSR whether the pin is configured to be controlled by the PIO Controller or assigned to
a peripheral function. This enables configuration of the I/O line prior to setting it to be managed by the PIO
Controller.
Similarly, writing in PIO_SODR and PIO_CODR affects PIO_ODSR. This is important as it defines the first level
driven on the I/O line.
27.5.5 Synchronous Data Output
Clearing one or more PIO line(s) and setting another one or more PIO line(s) synchronously cannot be done by
using PIO_SODR and PIO_CODR. It requires two successive write operations into two different registers. To
overcome this, the PIO Controller offers a direct control of PIO outputs by single write access to PIO_ODSR. Only
bits unmasked by the Output Write Status Register (PIO_OWSR) are written. The mask bits in PIO_OWSR are set
by writing to the Output Write Enable Register (PIO_OWER) and cleared by writing to the Output Write Disable
Register (PIO_OWDR).
After reset, the synchronous data output is disabled on all the I/O lines as PIO_OWSR resets at 0x0.
27.5.6 Multi-Drive Control (Open Drain)
Each I/O can be independently programmed in open drain by using the multi-drive feature. This feature permits
several drivers to be connected on the I/O line which is driven low only by each device. An external pull-up resistor
(or enabling of the internal one) is generally required to guarantee a high level on the line.
The multi-drive feature is controlled by the Multi-driver Enable Register (PIO_MDER) and the Multi-driver Disable
Register (PIO_MDDR). The multi-drive can be selected whether the I/O line is controlled by the PIO Controller or
assigned to a peripheral function. The Multi-driver Status Register (PIO_MDSR) indicates the pins that are
configured to support external drivers.
After reset, the multi-drive feature is disabled on all pins, i.e., PIO_MDSR resets at value 0x0.
27.5.7 Output Line Timings
Figure 27-3 shows how the outputs are driven either by writing PIO_SODR or PIO_CODR, or by directly writing
PIO_ODSR. This last case is valid only if the corresponding bit in PIO_OWSR is set. Figure 27-3 also shows when
the feedback in the Pin Data Status Register (PIO_PDSR) is available.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
491
Figure 27-3.
Output Line Timings
Peripheral clock
Write PIO_SODR
Write PIO_ODSR at 1
APB Access
Write PIO_CODR
Write PIO_ODSR at 0
APB Access
PIO_ODSR
2 cycles
2 cycles
PIO_PDSR
27.5.8 Inputs
The level on each I/O line can be read through PIO_PDSR. This register indicates the level of the I/O lines
regardless of their configuration, whether uniquely as an input, or driven by the PIO Controller, or driven by a
peripheral.
Reading the I/O line levels requires the clock of the PIO Controller to be enabled, otherwise PIO_PDSR reads the
levels present on the I/O line at the time the clock was disabled.
27.5.9 Input Glitch and Debouncing Filters
Optional input glitch and debouncing filters are independently programmable on each I/O line.
The glitch filter can filter a glitch with a duration of less than 1/2 peripheral clock and the debouncing filter can filter
a pulse of less than 1/2 period of a programmable divided slow clock.
The selection between glitch filtering or debounce filtering is done by writing in the PIO Input Filter Slow Clock
Disable Register (PIO_IFSCDR) and the PIO Input Filter Slow Clock Enable Register (PIO_IFSCER). Writing
PIO_IFSCDR and PIO_IFSCER, respectively, sets and clears bits in the Input Filter Slow Clock Status Register
(PIO_IFSCSR).
The current selection status can be checked by reading the PIO_IFSCSR.
If PIO_IFSCSR[i] = 0: The glitch filter can filter a glitch with a duration of less than 1/2 master clock period.
If PIO_IFSCSR[i] = 1: The debouncing filter can filter a pulse with a duration of less than 1/2 programmable
divided slow clock period.
For the debouncing filter, the period of the divided slow clock is defined by writing in the DIV field of the Slow Clock
Divider Debouncing Register (PIO_SCDR):
tdiv_slck = ((DIV + 1) × 2) × tslck
When the glitch or debouncing filter is enabled, a glitch or pulse with a duration of less than 1/2 selected clock
cycle (selected clock represents peripheral clock or divided slow clock depending on PIO_IFSCDR and
PIO_IFSCER programming) is automatically rejected, while a pulse with a duration of one selected clock
(peripheral clock or divided slow clock) cycle or more is accepted. For pulse durations between 1/2 selected clock
cycle and one selected clock cycle, the pulse may or may not be taken into account, depending on the precise
timing of its occurrence. Thus for a pulse to be visible, it must exceed one selected clock cycle, whereas for a glitch
to be reliably filtered out, its duration must not exceed 1/2 selected clock cycle.
The filters also introduce some latencies, illustrated in Figure 27-4 and Figure 27-5.
492
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
The glitch filters are controlled by the Input Filter Enable Register (PIO_IFER), the Input Filter Disable Register
(PIO_IFDR) and the Input Filter Status Register (PIO_IFSR). Writing PIO_IFER and PIO_IFDR respectively sets
and clears bits in PIO_IFSR. This last register enables the glitch filter on the I/O lines.
When the glitch and/or debouncing filter is enabled, it does not modify the behavior of the inputs on the
peripherals. It acts only on the value read in PIO_PDSR and on the input change interrupt detection. The glitch and
debouncing filters require that the peripheral clock is enabled.
Figure 27-4.
Input Glitch Filter Timing
PIO_IFCSR = 0
Peripheral clcok
up to 1.5 cycles
Pin Level
1 cycle
1 cycle
1 cycle
1 cycle
PIO_PDSR
if PIO_IFSR = 0
2 cycles
up to 2.5 cycles
PIO_PDSR
if PIO_IFSR = 1
Figure 27-5.
1 cycle
up to 2 cycles
Input Debouncing Filter Timing
PIO_IFCSR = 1
Divided Slow Clock
(div_slck)
Pin Level
up to 2 cycles tperipheral clock
up to 2 cycles tperipheral clock
PIO_PDSR
if PIO_IFSR = 0
1 cycle tdiv_slck
PIO_PDSR
if PIO_IFSR = 1
1 cycle tdiv_slck
up to 1.5 cycles tdiv_slck
up to 1.5 cycles tdiv_slck
up to 2 cycles tperipheral clock
up to 2 cycles tperipheral clock
27.5.10 Input Edge/Level Interrupt
The PIO Controller can be programmed to generate an interrupt when it detects an edge or a level on an I/O line.
The Input Edge/Level interrupt is controlled by writing the Interrupt Enable Register (PIO_IER) and the Interrupt
Disable Register (PIO_IDR), which enable and disable the input change interrupt respectively by setting and
clearing the corresponding bit in the Interrupt Mask Register (PIO_IMR). As input change detection is possible only
by comparing two successive samplings of the input of the I/O line, the peripheral clock must be enabled. The
Input Change interrupt is available regardless of the configuration of the I/O line, i.e., configured as an input only,
controlled by the PIO Controller or assigned to a peripheral function.
By default, the interrupt can be generated at any time an edge is detected on the input.
Some additional interrupt modes can be enabled/disabled by writing in the Additional Interrupt Modes Enable
Register (PIO_AIMER) and Additional Interrupt Modes Disable Register (PIO_AIMDR). The current state of this
selection can be read through the Additional Interrupt Modes Mask Register (PIO_AIMMR).
These additional modes are:
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
493
Rising edge detection
Falling edge detection
Low-level detection
High-level detection
In order to select an additional interrupt mode:
The type of event detection (edge or level) must be selected by writing in the Edge Select Register
(PIO_ESR) and Level Select Register (PIO_LSR) which select, respectively, the edge and level detection.
The current status of this selection is accessible through the Edge/Level Status Register (PIO_ELSR).
The polarity of the event detection (rising/falling edge or high/low-level) must be selected by writing in the
Falling Edge/Low-Level Select Register (PIO_FELLSR) and Rising Edge/High-Level Select Register
(PIO_REHLSR) which allow to select falling or rising edge (if edge is selected in PIO_ELSR) edge or highor low-level detection (if level is selected in PIO_ELSR). The current status of this selection is accessible
through the Fall/Rise - Low/High Status Register (PIO_FRLHSR).
When an input edge or level is detected on an I/O line, the corresponding bit in the Interrupt Status Register
(PIO_ISR) is set. If the corresponding bit in PIO_IMR is set, the PIO Controller interrupt line is asserted.The
interrupt signals of the 25 channels are ORed-wired together to generate a single interrupt signal to the interrupt
controller.
When the software reads PIO_ISR, all the interrupts are automatically cleared. This signifies that all the interrupts
that are pending when PIO_ISR is read must be handled. When an Interrupt is enabled on a “level”, the interrupt is
generated as long as the interrupt source is not cleared, even if some read accesses in PIO_ISR are performed.
494
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 27-6.
Event Detector on Input Lines (Figure Represents Line 0)
Event Detector
Rising Edge
Detector
1
Falling Edge
Detector
0
0
PIO_REHLSR[0]
1
PIO_FRLHSR[0]
Resynchronized input on line 0
Event detection on line 0
1
PIO_FELLSR[0]
0
High Level
Detector
1
Low Level
Detector
0
PIO_LSR[0]
PIO_ELSR[0]
PIO_AIMER[0]
PIO_ESR[0]
PIO_AIMMR[0]
PIO_AIMDR[0]
Edge
Detector
Example of interrupt generation on following lines:
Rising edge on PIO line 0
Falling edge on PIO line 1
Rising edge on PIO line 2
Low-level on PIO line 3
High-level on PIO line 4
High-level on PIO line 5
Falling edge on PIO line 6
Rising edge on PIO line 7
Any edge on the other lines
Table 27-2 provides the required configuration for this example.
Table 27-2.
Configuration for Example Interrupt Generation
Configuration
Description
All the interrupt sources are enabled by writing 32’hFFFF_FFFF in PIO_IER.
Interrupt Mode
Then the additional interrupt mode is enabled for lines 0 to 7 by writing 32’h0000_00FF in
PIO_AIMER.
Edge or Level Detection
The other lines are configured in edge detection by default, if they have not been previously
configured. Otherwise, lines 0, 1, 2, 6 and 7 must be configured in edge detection by writing
32’h0000_00C7 in PIO_ESR.
Lines 3, 4 and 5 are configured in level detection by writing 32’h0000_0038 in PIO_LSR.
Falling/Rising Edge or Low/High-Level
Detection
Lines 0, 2, 4, 5 and 7 are configured in rising edge or high-level detection by writing
32’h0000_00B5 in PIO_REHLSR.
The other lines are configured in falling edge or low-level detection by default if they have
not been previously configured. Otherwise, lines 1, 3 and 6 must be configured in falling
edge/low-level detection by writing 32’h0000_004A in PIO_FELLSR.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
495
Figure 27-7.
Input Change Interrupt Timings When No Additional Interrupt Modes
Peripheral clock
Pin Level
PIO_ISR
Read PIO_ISR
APB Access
APB Access
27.5.11 Programmable Schmitt Trigger
It is possible to configure each input for the Schmitt trigger. By default the Schmitt trigger is active. Disabling the
Schmitt trigger is requested when using the QTouch® Library.
27.5.12 I/O Lines Programming Example
The programming example shown in Table 27-3 is used to obtain the following configuration:
4-bit output port on I/O lines 0 to 3 (should be written in a single write operation), open-drain, with pull-up
resistor
Four output signals on I/O lines 4 to 7 (to drive LEDs for example), driven high and low, no pull-up resistor,
no pull-down resistor
Four input signals on I/O lines 8 to 11 (to read push-button states for example), with pull-up resistors, glitch
filters and input change interrupts
Four input signals on I/O line 12 to 15 to read an external device status (polled, thus no input change
interrupt), no pull-up resistor, no glitch filter
I/O lines 16 to 19 assigned to peripheral A functions with pull-up resistor
I/O lines 20 to 23 assigned to peripheral B functions with pull-down resistor
I/O lines 24 to 27 assigned to peripheral C with input change interrupt, no pull-up resistor and no pull-down
resistor
I/O lines 28 to 31 assigned to peripheral D, no pull-up resistor and no pull-down resistor
Table 27-3.
496
Programming Example
Register
Value to be Written
PIO_PER
0x0000_FFFF
PIO_PDR
0xFFFF_0000
PIO_OER
0x0000_00FF
PIO_ODR
0xFFFF_FF00
PIO_IFER
0x0000_0F00
PIO_IFDR
0xFFFF_F0FF
PIO_SODR
0x0000_0000
PIO_CODR
0x0FFF_FFFF
PIO_IER
0x0F00_0F00
PIO_IDR
0xF0FF_F0FF
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Table 27-3.
Programming Example (Continued)
PIO_MDER
0x0000_000F
PIO_MDDR
0xFFFF_FFF0
PIO_PUDR
0xFFF0_00F0
PIO_PUER
0x000F_FF0F
PIO_PPDDR
0xFF0F_FFFF
PIO_PPDER
0x00F0_0000
PIO_ABCDSR1
0xF0F0_0000
PIO_ABCDSR2
0xFF00_0000
PIO_OWER
0x0000_000F
PIO_OWDR
0x0FFF_ FFF0
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
497
27.5.13 Register Write Protection
To prevent any single software error from corrupting PIO behavior, certain registers in the address space can be
write-protected by setting the WPEN bit in the PIO Write Protection Mode Register (PIO_WPMR).
If a write access to a write-protected register is detected, the WPVS flag in the PIO Write Protection Status
Register (PIO_WPSR) is set and the field WPVSRC indicates the register in which the write access has been
attempted.
The WPVS bit is automatically cleared after reading the PIO_WPSR.
The following registers can be write-protected:
498
PIO Enable Register
PIO Disable Register
PIO Output Enable Register
PIO Output Disable Register
PIO Input Filter Enable Register
PIO Input Filter Disable Register
PIO Multi-driver Enable Register
PIO Multi-driver Disable Register
PIO Pull-Up Disable Register
PIO Pull-Up Enable Register
PIO Peripheral ABCD Select Register 1
PIO Peripheral ABCD Select Register 2
PIO Output Write Enable Register
PIO Output Write Disable Register
PIO Pad Pull-Down Disable Register
PIO Pad Pull-Down Enable Register
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6
Parallel Input/Output Controller (PIO) User Interface
Each I/O line controlled by the PIO Controller is associated with a bit in each of the PIO Controller User Interface
registers. Each register is 32-bit wide. If a parallel I/O line is not defined, writing to the corresponding bits has no
effect. Undefined bits read zero. If the I/O line is not multiplexed with any peripheral, the I/O line is controlled by the
PIO Controller and PIO_PSR returns one systematically.
Table 27-4.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x0000
PIO Enable Register
PIO_PER
Write-only
–
0x0004
PIO Disable Register
PIO_PDR
Write-only
–
Read-only
(1)
–
–
0x0008
PIO Status Register
PIO_PSR
0x000C
Reserved
–
0x0010
Output Enable Register
PIO_OER
Write-only
–
0x0014
Output Disable Register
PIO_ODR
Write-only
–
0x0018
Output Status Register
PIO_OSR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x001C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0020
Glitch Input Filter Enable Register
PIO_IFER
Write-only
–
0x0024
Glitch Input Filter Disable Register
PIO_IFDR
Write-only
–
0x0028
Glitch Input Filter Status Register
PIO_IFSR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x002C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0030
Set Output Data Register
PIO_SODR
Write-only
–
0x0034
Clear Output Data Register
PIO_CODR
Write-only
0x0038
Output Data Status Register
PIO_ODSR
Read-only
or(2)
Read/Write
–
0x003C
Pin Data Status Register
PIO_PDSR
Read-only
(3)
0x0040
Interrupt Enable Register
PIO_IER
Write-only
–
0x0044
Interrupt Disable Register
PIO_IDR
Write-only
–
0x0048
Interrupt Mask Register
PIO_IMR
Read-only
0x00000000
(4)
0x004C
Interrupt Status Register
PIO_ISR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x0050
Multi-driver Enable Register
PIO_MDER
Write-only
–
0x0054
Multi-driver Disable Register
PIO_MDDR
Write-only
–
0x0058
Multi-driver Status Register
PIO_MDSR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x005C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0060
Pull-up Disable Register
PIO_PUDR
Write-only
–
0x0064
Pull-up Enable Register
PIO_PUER
Write-only
–
0x0068
Pad Pull-up Status Register
PIO_PUSR
Read-only
(1)
0x006C
Reserved
–
–
–
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
499
Table 27-4.
Register Mapping (Continued)
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x0070
Peripheral Select Register 1
PIO_ABCDSR1
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x0074
Peripheral Select Register 2
PIO_ABCDSR2
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x0078–0x007C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0080
Input Filter Slow Clock Disable Register
PIO_IFSCDR
Write-only
–
0x0084
Input Filter Slow Clock Enable Register
PIO_IFSCER
Write-only
–
0x0088
Input Filter Slow Clock Status Register
PIO_IFSCSR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x008C
Slow Clock Divider Debouncing Register
PIO_SCDR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x0090
Pad Pull-down Disable Register
PIO_PPDDR
Write-only
–
0x0094
Pad Pull-down Enable Register
PIO_PPDER
Write-only
–
Read-only
(1)
–
–
0x0098
Pad Pull-down Status Register
PIO_PPDSR
0x009C
Reserved
–
0x00A0
Output Write Enable
PIO_OWER
Write-only
–
0x00A4
Output Write Disable
PIO_OWDR
Write-only
–
0x00A8
Output Write Status Register
PIO_OWSR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x00AC
Reserved
–
–
–
0x00B0
Additional Interrupt Modes Enable Register
PIO_AIMER
Write-only
–
0x00B4
Additional Interrupt Modes Disable Register
PIO_AIMDR
Write-only
–
0x00B8
Additional Interrupt Modes Mask Register
PIO_AIMMR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x00BC
Reserved
–
–
–
0x00C0
Edge Select Register
PIO_ESR
Write-only
–
0x00C4
Level Select Register
PIO_LSR
Write-only
–
0x00C8
Edge/Level Status Register
PIO_ELSR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x00CC
Reserved
–
–
–
0x00D0
Falling Edge/Low-Level Select Register
PIO_FELLSR
Write-only
–
0x00D4
Rising Edge/High-Level Select Register
PIO_REHLSR
Write-only
–
0x00D8
Fall/Rise - Low/High Status Register
PIO_FRLHSR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x00DC
Reserved
–
–
–
0x00E0
Reserved
–
–
–
0x00E4
Write Protection Mode Register
PIO_WPMR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x00E8
Write Protection Status Register
PIO_WPSR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x00EC–0x00FC
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0100
Schmitt Trigger Register
PIO_SCHMITT
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x0104–0x010C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0110
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0114–0x011C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x0120–0x014C
Reserved
Notes: 1. Reset value depends on the product implementation.
500
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
–
–
–
2. PIO_ODSR is Read-only or Read/Write depending on PIO_OWSR I/O lines.
3. Reset value of PIO_PDSR depends on the level of the I/O lines. Reading the I/O line levels requires the clock of the PIO
Controller to be enabled, otherwise PIO_PDSR reads the levels present on the I/O line at the time the clock was disabled.
4. PIO_ISR is reset at 0x0. However, the first read of the register may read a different value as input changes may have
occurred.
5. If an offset is not listed in the table it must be considered as reserved.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
501
27.6.1 PIO Enable Register
Name:
PIO_PER
Address:
0x400E0E00 (PIOA), 0x400E1000 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PIO Write Protection Mode Register.
• P0–P31: PIO Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the PIO to control the corresponding pin (disables peripheral control of the pin).
502
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.2 PIO Disable Register
Name:
PIO_PDR
Address:
0x400E0E04 (PIOA), 0x400E1004 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PIO Write Protection Mode Register.
• P0–P31: PIO Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the PIO from controlling the corresponding pin (enables peripheral control of the pin).
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
503
27.6.3 PIO Status Register
Name:
PIO_PSR
Address:
0x400E0E08 (PIOA), 0x400E1008 (PIOB)
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: PIO Status
0: PIO is inactive on the corresponding I/O line (peripheral is active).
1: PIO is active on the corresponding I/O line (peripheral is inactive).
504
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.4 PIO Output Enable Register
Name:
PIO_OER
Address:
0x400E0E10 (PIOA), 0x400E1010 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PIO Write Protection Mode Register.
• P0–P31: Output Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the output on the I/O line.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
505
27.6.5 PIO Output Disable Register
Name:
PIO_ODR
Address:
0x400E0E14 (PIOA), 0x400E1014 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PIO Write Protection Mode Register.
• P0–P31: Output Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the output on the I/O line.
506
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.6 PIO Output Status Register
Name:
PIO_OSR
Address:
0x400E0E18 (PIOA), 0x400E1018 (PIOB)
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Output Status
0: The I/O line is a pure input.
1: The I/O line is enabled in output.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
507
27.6.7 PIO Input Filter Enable Register
Name:
PIO_IFER
Address:
0x400E0E20 (PIOA), 0x400E1020 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PIO Write Protection Mode Register.
• P0–P31: Input Filter Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the input glitch filter on the I/O line.
508
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.8 PIO Input Filter Disable Register
Name:
PIO_IFDR
Address:
0x400E0E24 (PIOA), 0x400E1024 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PIO Write Protection Mode Register.
• P0–P31: Input Filter Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the input glitch filter on the I/O line.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
509
27.6.9 PIO Input Filter Status Register
Name:
PIO_IFSR
Address:
0x400E0E28 (PIOA), 0x400E1028 (PIOB)
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Input Filter Status
0: The input glitch filter is disabled on the I/O line.
1: The input glitch filter is enabled on the I/O line.
510
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.10 PIO Set Output Data Register
Name:
PIO_SODR
Address:
0x400E0E30 (PIOA), 0x400E1030 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Set Output Data
0: No effect.
1: Sets the data to be driven on the I/O line.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
511
27.6.11 PIO Clear Output Data Register
Name:
PIO_CODR
Address:
0x400E0E34 (PIOA), 0x400E1034 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Clear Output Data
0: No effect.
1: Clears the data to be driven on the I/O line.
512
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.12 PIO Output Data Status Register
Name:
PIO_ODSR
Address:
0x400E0E38 (PIOA), 0x400E1038 (PIOB)
Access:
Read-only or Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Output Data Status
0: The data to be driven on the I/O line is 0.
1: The data to be driven on the I/O line is 1.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
513
27.6.13 PIO Pin Data Status Register
Name:
PIO_PDSR
Address:
0x400E0E3C (PIOA), 0x400E103C (PIOB)
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Output Data Status
0: The I/O line is at level 0.
1: The I/O line is at level 1.
514
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.14 PIO Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
PIO_IER
Address:
0x400E0E40 (PIOA), 0x400E1040 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Input Change Interrupt Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the input change interrupt on the I/O line.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
515
27.6.15 PIO Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
PIO_IDR
Address:
0x400E0E44 (PIOA), 0x400E1044 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Input Change Interrupt Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the input change interrupt on the I/O line.
516
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.16 PIO Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
PIO_IMR
Address:
0x400E0E48 (PIOA), 0x400E1048 (PIOB)
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Input Change Interrupt Mask
0: Input change interrupt is disabled on the I/O line.
1: Input change interrupt is enabled on the I/O line.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
517
27.6.17 PIO Interrupt Status Register
Name:
PIO_ISR
Address:
0x400E0E4C (PIOA), 0x400E104C (PIOB)
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Input Change Interrupt Status
0: No input change has been detected on the I/O line since PIO_ISR was last read or since reset.
1: At least one input change has been detected on the I/O line since PIO_ISR was last read or since reset.
518
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.18 PIO Multi-driver Enable Register
Name:
PIO_MDER
Address:
0x400E0E50 (PIOA), 0x400E1050 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PIO Write Protection Mode Register.
• P0-P31: Multi-drive Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables multi-drive on the I/O line.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
519
27.6.19 PIO Multi-driver Disable Register
Name:
PIO_MDDR
Address:
0x400E0E54 (PIOA), 0x400E1054 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PIO Write Protection Mode Register.
• P0–P31: Multi-drive Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables multi-drive on the I/O line.
520
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.20 PIO Multi-driver Status Register
Name:
PIO_MDSR
Address:
0x400E0E58 (PIOA), 0x400E1058 (PIOB)
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Multi-drive Status
0: The multi-drive is disabled on the I/O line. The pin is driven at high- and low-level.
1: The multi-drive is enabled on the I/O line. The pin is driven at low-level only.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
521
27.6.21 PIO Pull-Up Disable Register
Name:
PIO_PUDR
Address:
0x400E0E60 (PIOA), 0x400E1060 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PIO Write Protection Mode Register.
• P0–P31: Pull-Up Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the pull-up resistor on the I/O line.
522
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.22 PIO Pull-Up Enable Register
Name:
PIO_PUER
Address:
0x400E0E64 (PIOA), 0x400E1064 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PIO Write Protection Mode Register.
• P0–P31: Pull-Up Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the pull-up resistor on the I/O line.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
523
27.6.23 PIO Pull-Up Status Register
Name:
PIO_PUSR
Address:
0x400E0E68 (PIOA), 0x400E1068 (PIOB)
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Pull-Up Status
0: Pull-up resistor is enabled on the I/O line.
1: Pull-up resistor is disabled on the I/O line.
524
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.24 PIO Peripheral ABCD Select Register 1
Name:
PIO_ABCDSR1
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PIO Write Protection Mode Register.
• P0–P31: Peripheral Select
If the same bit is set to 0 in PIO_ABCDSR2:
0: Assigns the I/O line to the Peripheral A function.
1: Assigns the I/O line to the Peripheral B function.
If the same bit is set to 1 in PIO_ABCDSR2:
0: Assigns the I/O line to the Peripheral C function.
1: Assigns the I/O line to the Peripheral D function.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
525
27.6.25 PIO Peripheral ABCD Select Register 2
Name:
PIO_ABCDSR2
Address:
0x400E0E70 (PIOA), 0x400E1070 (PIOB)
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PIO Write Protection Mode Register.
• P0–P31: Peripheral Select
If the same bit is set to 0 in PIO_ABCDSR1:
0: Assigns the I/O line to the Peripheral A function.
1: Assigns the I/O line to the Peripheral C function.
If the same bit is set to 1 in PIO_ABCDSR1:
0: Assigns the I/O line to the Peripheral B function.
1: Assigns the I/O line to the Peripheral D function.
526
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.26 PIO Input Filter Slow Clock Disable Register
Name:
PIO_IFSCDR
Address:
0x400E0E80 (PIOA), 0x400E1080 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Peripheral Clock Glitch Filtering Select
0: No effect.
1: The glitch filter is able to filter glitches with a duration < tperipheral clock/2.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
527
27.6.27 PIO Input Filter Slow Clock Enable Register
Name:
PIO_IFSCER
Address:
0x400E0E84 (PIOA), 0x400E1084 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Slow Clock Debouncing Filtering Select
0: No effect.
1: The debouncing filter is able to filter pulses with a duration < tdiv_slck/2.
528
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.28 PIO Input Filter Slow Clock Status Register
Name:
PIO_IFSCSR
Address:
0x400E0E88 (PIOA), 0x400E1088 (PIOB)
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Glitch or Debouncing Filter Selection Status
0: The glitch filter is able to filter glitches with a duration < tperipheral clock/2.
1: The debouncing filter is able to filter pulses with a duration < tdiv_slck/2.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
529
27.6.29 PIO Slow Clock Divider Debouncing Register
Name:
PIO_SCDR
Address:
0x400E0E8C (PIOA), 0x400E108C (PIOB)
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
2
1
0
–
–
7
6
DIV
5
4
3
DIV
• DIV: Slow Clock Divider Selection for Debouncing
tdiv_slck = ((DIV + 1) × 2) × tslck
530
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.30 PIO Pad Pull-Down Disable Register
Name:
PIO_PPDDR
Address:
0x400E0E90 (PIOA), 0x400E1090 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PIO Write Protection Mode Register.
• P0–P31: Pull-Down Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the pull-down resistor on the I/O line.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
531
27.6.31 PIO Pad Pull-Down Enable Register
Name:
PIO_PPDER
Address:
0x400E0E94 (PIOA), 0x400E1094 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PIO Write Protection Mode Register.
• P0–P31: Pull-Down Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the pull-down resistor on the I/O line.
532
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.32 PIO Pad Pull-Down Status Register
Name:
PIO_PPDSR
Address:
0x400E0E98 (PIOA), 0x400E1098 (PIOB)
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Pull-Down Status
0: Pull-down resistor is enabled on the I/O line.
1: Pull-down resistor is disabled on the I/O line.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
533
27.6.33 PIO Output Write Enable Register
Name:
PIO_OWER
Address:
0x400E0EA0 (PIOA), 0x400E10A0 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PIO Write Protection Mode Register.
• P0–P31: Output Write Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables writing PIO_ODSR for the I/O line.
534
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.34 PIO Output Write Disable Register
Name:
PIO_OWDR
Address:
0x400E0EA4 (PIOA), 0x400E10A4 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PIO Write Protection Mode Register.
• P0–P31: Output Write Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables writing PIO_ODSR for the I/O line.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
535
27.6.35 PIO Output Write Status Register
Name:
PIO_OWSR
Address:
0x400E0EA8 (PIOA), 0x400E10A8 (PIOB)
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Output Write Status
0: Writing PIO_ODSR does not affect the I/O line.
1: Writing PIO_ODSR affects the I/O line.
536
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.36 PIO Additional Interrupt Modes Enable Register
Name:
PIO_AIMER
Address:
0x400E0EB0 (PIOA), 0x400E10B0 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Additional Interrupt Modes Enable
0: No effect.
1: The interrupt source is the event described in PIO_ELSR and PIO_FRLHSR.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
537
27.6.37 PIO Additional Interrupt Modes Disable Register
Name:
PIO_AIMDR
Address:
0x400E0EB4 (PIOA), 0x400E10B4 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Additional Interrupt Modes Disable
0: No effect.
1: The interrupt mode is set to the default interrupt mode (both-edge detection).
538
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.38 PIO Additional Interrupt Modes Mask Register
Name:
PIO_AIMMR
Address:
0x400E0EB8 (PIOA), 0x400E10B8 (PIOB)
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: IO Line Index
Selects the IO event type triggering an interrupt.
0: The interrupt source is a both-edge detection event.
1: The interrupt source is described by the registers PIO_ELSR and PIO_FRLHSR.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
539
27.6.39 PIO Edge Select Register
Name:
PIO_ESR
Address:
0x400E0EC0 (PIOA), 0x400E10C0 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Edge Interrupt Selection
0: No effect.
1: The interrupt source is an edge-detection event.
540
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.40 PIO Level Select Register
Name:
PIO_LSR
Address:
0x400E0EC4 (PIOA), 0x400E10C4 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Level Interrupt Selection
0: No effect.
1: The interrupt source is a level-detection event.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
541
27.6.41 PIO Edge/Level Status Register
Name:
PIO_ELSR
Address:
0x400E0EC8 (PIOA), 0x400E10C8 (PIOB)
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Edge/Level Interrupt Source Selection
0: The interrupt source is an edge-detection event.
1: The interrupt source is a level-detection event.
542
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.42 PIO Falling Edge/Low-Level Select Register
Name:
PIO_FELLSR
Address:
0x400E0ED0 (PIOA), 0x400E10D0 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Falling Edge/Low-Level Interrupt Selection
0: No effect.
1: The interrupt source is set to a falling edge detection or low-level detection event, depending on PIO_ELSR.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
543
27.6.43 PIO Rising Edge/High-Level Select Register
Name:
PIO_REHLSR
Address:
0x400E0ED4 (PIOA), 0x400E10D4 (PIOB)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Rising Edge/High-Level Interrupt Selection
0: No effect.
1: The interrupt source is set to a rising edge detection or high-level detection event, depending on PIO_ELSR.
544
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.44 PIO Fall/Rise - Low/High Status Register
Name:
PIO_FRLHSR
Address:
0x400E0ED8 (PIOA), 0x400E10D8 (PIOB)
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
P31
P30
P29
P28
P27
P26
P25
P24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
P23
P22
P21
P20
P19
P18
P17
P16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
P9
P8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
• P0–P31: Edge/Level Interrupt Source Selection
0: The interrupt source is a falling edge detection (if PIO_ELSR = 0) or low-level detection event (if PIO_ELSR = 1).
1: The interrupt source is a rising edge detection (if PIO_ELSR = 0) or high-level detection event (if PIO_ELSR = 1).
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
545
27.6.45 PIO Write Protection Mode Register
Name:
PIO_WPMR
Address:
0x400E0EE4 (PIOA), 0x400E10E4 (PIOB)
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
WPKEY
23
22
21
20
WPKEY
15
14
13
12
WPKEY
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
WPEN
• WPEN: Write Protection Enable
0: Disables the write protection if WPKEY corresponds to 0x50494F (“PIO” in ASCII).
1: Enables the write protection if WPKEY corresponds to 0x50494F (“PIO” in ASCII).
See Section 27.5.13 “Register Write Protection” for the list of registers that can be protected.
• WPKEY: Write Protection Key
Value
Name
0x50494F
PASSWD
546
Description
Writing any other value in this field aborts the write operation of the WPEN bit. Always reads as
0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
27.6.46 PIO Write Protection Status Register
Name:
PIO_WPSR
Address:
0x400E0EE8 (PIOA), 0x400E10E8 (PIOB)
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
WPVSRC
15
14
13
12
WPVSRC
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
WPVS
• WPVS: Write Protection Violation Status
0: No write protection violation has occurred since the last read of the PIO_WPSR.
1: A write protection violation has occurred since the last read of the PIO_WPSR. If this violation is an unauthorized
attempt to write a protected register, the associated violation is reported into field WPVSRC.
• WPVSRC: Write Protection Violation Source
When WPVS = 1, WPVSRC indicates the register address offset at which a write access has been attempted.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
547
27.6.47 PIO Schmitt Trigger Register
Name:
PIO_SCHMITT
Address:
0x400E0F00 (PIOA), 0x400E1100 (PIOB)
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
SCHMITT31
SCHMITT30
SCHMITT29
SCHMITT28
SCHMITT27
SCHMITT26
SCHMITT25
SCHMITT24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
SCHMITT23
SCHMITT22
SCHMITT21
SCHMITT20
SCHMITT19
SCHMITT18
SCHMITT17
SCHMITT16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
SCHMITT15
SCHMITT14
SCHMITT13
SCHMITT12
SCHMITT11
SCHMITT10
SCHMITT9
SCHMITT8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SCHMITT7
SCHMITT6
SCHMITT5
SCHMITT4
SCHMITT3
SCHMITT2
SCHMITT1
SCHMITT0
• SCHMITTx [x=0..31]: Schmitt Trigger Control
0: Schmitt trigger is enabled.
1: Schmitt trigger is disabled.
548
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
28.
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
28.1
Description
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) circuit is a synchronous serial data link that provides communication with
external devices in Master or Slave mode. It also enables communication between processors if an external
processor is connected to the system.
The Serial Peripheral Interface is essentially a Shift register that serially transmits data bits to other SPIs. During a
data transfer, one SPI system acts as the “master”' which controls the data flow, while the other devices act as
“slaves'' which have data shifted into and out by the master. Different CPUs can take turn being masters (multiple
master protocol, contrary to single master protocol where one CPU is always the master while all of the others are
always slaves). One master can simultaneously shift data into multiple slaves. However, only one slave can drive
its output to write data back to the master at any given time.
A slave device is selected when the master asserts its NSS signal. If multiple slave devices exist, the master
generates a separate slave select signal for each slave (NPCS).
The SPI system consists of two data lines and two control lines:
28.2
Master Out Slave In (MOSI)—This data line supplies the output data from the master shifted into the input(s)
of the slave(s).
Master In Slave Out (MISO)—This data line supplies the output data from a slave to the input of the master.
There may be no more than one slave transmitting data during any particular transfer.
Serial Clock (SPCK)—This control line is driven by the master and regulates the flow of the data bits. The
master can transmit data at a variety of baud rates; there is one SPCK pulse for each bit that is transmitted.
Slave Select (NSS)—This control line allows slaves to be turned on and off by hardware.
Embedded Characteristics
Master or Slave Serial Peripheral Bus Interface
8-bit to 16-bit programmable data length per chip select
̶
Programmable phase and polarity per chip select
̶
Programmable transfer delay between consecutive transfers and delay before SPI clock per chip
select
̶
̶
̶
Programmable delay between chip selects
Selectable mode fault detection
Master Mode can drive SPCK up to Peripheral Clock
Master Mode Bit Rate can be Independent of the Processor/Peripheral Clock
Slave mode operates on SPCK, asynchronously with core and bus clock
Two chip selects with external decoder support allow communication with up to 3 peripherals
Communication with Serial External Devices Supported
̶
̶
Serial memories, such as DataFlash and 3-wire EEPROMs
̶
Serial peripherals, such as ADCs, DACs, LCD controllers, CAN controllers and sensors
External coprocessors
Connection to PDC Channel Capabilities, Optimizing Data Transfers
̶
One channel for the receiver
̶
One channel for the transmitter
Register Write Protection
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
549
28.3
Block Diagram
Figure 28-1.
Block Diagram
AHB Matrix
PDC
Peripheral bridge
Trigger
events
Bus clock
PMC
28.4
Peripheral
clock
SPI
Application Block Diagram
Figure 28-2.
Application Block Diagram: Single Master/Multiple Slave Implementation
SPI Master
SPCK
SPCK
MISO
MISO
MOSI
MOSI
NPCS0
NSS
NPCS1
Slave 0
SPCK
MISO
Slave 1
MOSI
NSS
550
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
28.5
Signal Description
Table 28-1.
Signal Description
Type
28.6
Pin Name
Pin Description
Master
Slave
MISO
Master In Slave Out
Input
Output
MOSI
Master Out Slave In
Output
Input
SPCK
Serial Clock
Output
Input
NPCS1
Peripheral Chip Select
Output
Unused
NPCS0/NSS
Peripheral Chip Select/Slave Select
Output
Input
Product Dependencies
28.6.1 I/O Lines
The pins used for interfacing the compliant external devices can be multiplexed with PIO lines. The programmer
must first program the PIO controllers to assign the SPI pins to their peripheral functions.
Table 28-2.
I/O Lines
Instance
Signal
I/O Line
Peripheral
SPI
MISO
PA12
A
SPI
MOSI
PA13
A
SPI
NPCS0
PA11
A
SPI
NPCS1
PA5
B
SPI
NPCS1
PB2
B
SPI
SPCK
PA14
A
28.6.2 Power Management
The SPI can be clocked through the Power Management Controller (PMC), thus the programmer must first
configure the PMC to enable the SPI clock.
28.6.3 Interrupt
The SPI interface has an interrupt line connected to the interrupt controller. Handling the SPI interrupt requires
programming the interrupt controller before configuring the SPI.
Table 28-3.
Peripheral IDs
Instance
ID
SPI
21
28.6.4 Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC)
The SPI interface can be used in conjunction with the PDC in order to reduce processor overhead. For a full
description of the PDC, refer to the relevant section.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
551
28.7
Functional Description
28.7.1 Modes of Operation
The SPI operates in Master mode or in Slave mode.
The SPI operates in Master mode by writing a 1 to the MSTR bit in the SPI Mode Register (SPI_MR):
̶
Pins NPCS0 to NPCS1 are all configured as outputs
̶
The SPCK pin is driven
̶
The MISO line is wired on the receiver input
̶
The MOSI line is driven as an output by the transmitter.
The SPI operates in Slave mode if the MSTR bit in the SPI_MR is written to 0:
̶
The MISO line is driven by the transmitter output
̶
The MOSI line is wired on the receiver input
̶
The SPCK pin is driven by the transmitter to synchronize the receiver.
̶
The NPCS0 pin becomes an input, and is used as a slave select signal (NSS)
̶
Pin NPCS1 is not driven and can be used for other purposes.
The data transfers are identically programmable for both modes of operation. The baud rate generator is activated
only in Master mode.
28.7.2 Data Transfer
Four combinations of polarity and phase are available for data transfers. The clock polarity is programmed with the
CPOL bit in the SPI Chip Select register (SPI_CSR). The clock phase is programmed with the NCPHA bit. These
two parameters determine the edges of the clock signal on which data is driven and sampled. Each of the two
parameters has two possible states, resulting in four possible combinations that are incompatible with one another.
Consequently, a master/slave pair must use the same parameter pair values to communicate. If multiple slaves
are connected and require different configurations, the master must reconfigure itself each time it needs to
communicate with a different slave.
Table 28-4 shows the four modes and corresponding parameter settings.
Table 28-4.
SPI Bus Protocol Modes
SPI Mode
CPOL
NCPHA
Shift SPCK Edge
Capture SPCK Edge
SPCK Inactive Level
0
0
1
Falling
Rising
Low
1
0
0
Rising
Falling
Low
2
1
1
Rising
Falling
High
3
1
0
Falling
Rising
High
Figure 28-3 and Figure 28-4 show examples of data transfers.
552
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 28-3.
SPI Transfer Format (NCPHA = 1, 8 bits per transfer)
1
SPCK cycle (for reference)
2
3
4
6
5
7
8
SPCK
(CPOL = 0)
SPCK
(CPOL = 1)
MOSI
(from master)
MSB
MISO
(from slave)
MSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB
*
NSS
(to slave)
* Not defined.
Figure 28-4.
SPI Transfer Format (NCPHA = 0, 8 bits per transfer)
1
SPCK cycle (for reference)
2
3
4
5
8
7
6
SPCK
(CPOL = 0)
SPCK
(CPOL = 1)
MOSI
(from master)
MISO
(from slave)
*
MSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
MSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB
LSB
NSS
(to slave)
* Not defined.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
553
28.7.3 Master Mode Operations
When configured in Master mode, the SPI operates on the clock generated by the internal programmable baud
rate generator. It fully controls the data transfers to and from the slave(s) connected to the SPI bus. The SPI drives
the chip select line to the slave and the serial clock signal (SPCK).
The SPI features two holding registers, the Transmit Data Register (SPI_TDR) and the Receive Data Register
(SPI_RDR), and a single shift register. The holding registers maintain the data flow at a constant rate.
After enabling the SPI, a data transfer starts when the processor writes to the SPI_TDR. The written data is
immediately transferred in the Shift register and the transfer on the SPI bus starts. While the data in the Shift
register is shifted on the MOSI line, the MISO line is sampled and shifted in the Shift register. Data cannot be
loaded in the SPI_RDR without transmitting data. If there is no data to transmit, dummy data can be used
(SPI_TDR filled with ones). When the SPI_MR.WDRBT bit is set, new data cannot be transmitted if the SPI_RDR
has not been read. If Receiving mode is not required, for example when communicating with a slave receiver only
(such as an LCD), the receive status flags in the SPI Status register (SPI_SR) can be discarded.
Before writing the SPI_TDR, the PCS field in the SPI_MR must be set in order to select a slave.
If new data is written in the SPI_TDR during the transfer, it is kept in the SPI_TDR until the current transfer is
completed. Then, the received data is transferred from the Shift register to the SPI_RDR, the data in the SPI_TDR
is loaded in the Shift register and a new transfer starts.
As soon as the SPI_TDR is written, the Transmit Data Register Empty (TDRE) flag in the SPI_SR is cleared. When
the data written in the SPI_TDR is loaded into the Shift register, the TDRE flag in the SPI_SR is set. The TDRE bit
is used to trigger the Transmit PDC channel.
See Figure 28-5.
The end of transfer is indicated by the TXEMPTY flag in the SPI_SR. If a transfer delay (DLYBCT) is greater than
0 for the last transfer, TXEMPTY is set after the completion of this delay. The peripheral clock can be switched off
at this time.
Note:
Figure 28-5.
When the SPI is enabled, the TDRE and TXEMPTY flags are set.
TDRE and TXEMPTY flag behavior
Write SPI_CR.SPIEN =1
TDRE
Write SPI_TDR
Write SPI_TDR
automatic set
TDR loaded
in shifter
Write SPI_TDR
automatic set
TDR loaded
in shifter
automatic set
TDR loaded
in shifter
TXEMPTY
Transfer
Transfer
DLYBCT
Transfer
DLYBCT
DLYBCT
The transfer of received data from the Shift register to the SPI_RDR is indicated by the Receive Data Register Full
(RDRF) bit in the SPI_SR. When the received data is read, the RDRF bit is cleared.
If the SPI_RDR has not been read before new data is received, the Overrun Error (OVRES) bit in the SPI_SR is
set. As long as this flag is set, data is loaded in the SPI_RDR. The user has to read the SPI_SR to clear the
OVRES bit.
Figure 28-6 shows a block diagram of the SPI when operating in Master mode. Figure 28-7 shows a flow chart
describing how transfers are handled.
554
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
28.7.3.1
Master Mode Block Diagram
Figure 28-6.
Master Mode Block Diagram
SPI_CSRx
SCBR
Baud Rate Generator
Peripheral clock
SPCK
SPI
Clock
SPI_CSRx
BITS
NCPHA
CPOL
LSB
MISO
SPI_RDR
RDRF
OVRES
RD
MSB
Shift Register
MOSI
SPI_TDR
TDRE
TD
SPI_CSRx
SPI_RDR
CSAAT
PCS
PS
NPCSx
PCSDEC
SPI_MR
PCS
0
Current
Peripheral
SPI_TDR
NPCS0
PCS
1
MSTR
MODF
NPCS0
MODFDIS
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
555
28.7.3.2
Master Mode Flow Diagram
Figure 28-7.
Master Mode Flow Diagram
SPI Enable
TDRE/TXEMPTY are set
TDRE ?
(SW check)
0
1
Write SPI_TDR ?
- NPCS defines the current Chip Select
- CSAAT, DLYBS, DLYBCT refer to the fields of the
Chip Select Register corresponding to the Current Chip Select
- ‘x <= y’ must be interpreted as ‘x is loaded with y’ where x,y
represent either register fields or SPI pins
- HW = hardware, SW = software
no
yes
TDRE/TXEMPTY are cleared
CSAAT ?
(HW check)
1
PS ?
(HW check)
0
1
PS ?
(HW check)
1
0
Fixed
peripheral
Variable
peripheral
NPCS <= SPI_TDR(PCS)
Fixed
peripheral
0
Variable
peripheral
SPI_TDR(PCS)
= NPCS ?
(HW check)
yes
SPI_MR(PCS)
= NPCS ?
(HW check)
no
NPCS <= SPI_MR(PCS)
no
NPCS deasserted
NPCS deasserted
Delay DLYBCS
Delay DLYBCS
NPCS <= SPI_TDR(PCS)
NPCS <= SPI_MR(PCS),
SPI_TDR(PCS)
Delay DLYBS
Shifter <= SPI_TDR(TD)
TDRE is set
Data Transfer
(SPI bus driven)
From this step,
SPI_TDR can be
rewritten for the
next transfer
SPI_RDR(RD) <= Shifter
RDRF is set
if read is required
Read SPI_RDR(RD)
Delay DLYBCT
TDRE ?
(HW check)
1
TXEMPTY is set
1
CSAAT ?
(HW check)
0
NPCS deasserted
Delay DLYBCS
556
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
0 (i.e. a new write to SPI_TDR occured while data transfer or delay DLYBCT)
Figure 28-8 shows the behavior of Transmit Data Register Empty (TDRE), Receive Data Register (RDRF) and
Transmission Register Empty (TXEMPTY) status flags within the SPI_SR during an 8-bit data transfer in Fixed
mode without the PDC involved.
Figure 28-8.
Status Register Flags Behavior
1
2
3
4
6
5
7
8
SPCK
NPCS0
MOSI
(from master)
MSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB
TDRE
RDR read
Write in
SPI_TDR
RDRF
MISO
(from slave)
MSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB
TXEMPTY
shift register empty
Figure 28-9 shows the behavior of Transmission Register Empty (TXEMPTY), End of RX buffer (ENDRX), End of
TX buffer (ENDTX), RX Buffer Full (RXBUFF) and TX Buffer Empty (TXBUFE) status flags within the SPI_SR
during an 8-bit data transfer in Fixed mode with the PDC involved. The PDC is programmed to transfer and receive
three units of data. The next pointer and counter are not used. The RDRF and TDRE are not shown because these
flags are managed by the PDC when using the PDC.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
557
Figure 28-9.
PDC Status Register Flags Behavior
1
3
2
SPCK
NPCS0
MOSI
MSB
(from master)
MISO
MSB
(from slave)
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB MSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB MSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB MSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB MSB
6
5
4
3
2
1
LSB
TDRE
(not required
if PDC is used)
PDC loads first byte
PDC loads 2nd byte
(double buffer effect)
PDC loads last byte
ENDTX
ENDRX
TXBUFE
RXBUFF
TXEMPTY
28.7.3.3
Clock Generation
The SPI Baud rate clock is generated by dividing the peripheral clock by a value between 1 and 255.
If the SCBR field in the SPI_CSR is programmed to 1, the operating baud rate is peripheral clock (see the
electrical characteristics section for the SPCK maximum frequency). Triggering a transfer while SCBR is at 0 can
lead to unpredictable results.
At reset, SCBR is 0 and the user has to program it to a valid value before performing the first transfer.
The divisor can be defined independently for each chip select, as it has to be programmed in the SCBR field. This
allows the SPI to automatically adapt the baud rate for each interfaced peripheral without reprogramming.
28.7.3.4
Transfer Delays
Figure 28-10 shows a chip select transfer change and consecutive transfers on the same chip select. Three delays
can be programmed to modify the transfer waveforms:
Delay between the chip selects—programmable only once for all chip selects by writing the DLYBCS field in
the SPI_MR. The SPI slave device deactivation delay is managed through DLYBCS. If there is only one SPI
slave device connected to the master, the DLYBCS field does not need to be configured. If several slave
devices are connected to a master, DLYBCS must be configured depending on the highest deactivation
delay. Refer to the SPI slave device electrical characteristics.
Delay before SPCK—independently programmable for each chip select by writing the DLYBS field. The SPI
slave device activation delay is managed through DLYBS. Refer to the SPI slave device electrical
characteristics to define DLYBS.
Delay between consecutive transfers—independently programmable for each chip select by writing the
DLYBCT field. The time required by the SPI slave device to process received data is managed through
DLYBCT. This time depends on the SPI slave system activity.
These delays allow the SPI to be adapted to the interfaced peripherals and their speed and bus release time.
558
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 28-10. Programmable Delays
Chip Select 1
Chip Select 2
SPCK
DLYBCS
28.7.3.5
DLYBS
DLYBCT
DLYBCT
Peripheral Selection
The serial peripherals are selected through the assertion of the NPCS0 to NPCS1 signals. By default, all NPCS
signals are high before and after each transfer.
Fixed Peripheral Select Mode: SPI exchanges data with only one peripheral.
Fixed Peripheral Select mode is enabled by writing the PS bit to zero in the SPI_MR. In this case, the current
peripheral is defined by the PCS field in the SPI_MR and the PCS field in the SPI_TDR has no effect.
Variable Peripheral Select Mode: Data can be exchanged with more than one peripheral without having to
reprogram the NPCS field in the SPI_MR.
Variable Peripheral Select mode is enabled by setting the PS bit to 1 in the SPI_MR. The PCS field in the
SPI_TDR is used to select the current peripheral. This means that the peripheral selection can be defined for
each new data. The value to write in the SPI_TDR has the following format:
[xxxxxxx(7-bit) + LASTXFER(1-bit)(1)+ xxxx(4-bit) + PCS (4-bit) + DATA (8 to 16-bit)] with PCS equals the
chip select to assert, as defined in Section 28.8.4 “SPI Transmit Data Register” and LASTXFER bit at 0 or 1
depending on the CSAAT bit.
Note:
1.
Optional
CSAAT, LASTXFER and CSNAAT bits are discussed in Section 28.7.3.9 “Peripheral Deselection with PDC”.
If LASTXFER is used, the command must be issued after writing the last character. Instead of LASTXFER,
the user can use the SPIDIS command. After the end of the PDC transfer, it is necessary to wait for the
TXEMPTY flag and then write SPIDIS into the SPI Control Register (SPI_CR). This does not change the
configuration register values). The NPCS is disabled after the last character transfer. Then, another PDC
transfer can be started if the SPIEN has previously been written in the SPI_CR.
28.7.3.6
SPI Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC)
In both Fixed and Variable Peripheral Select modes, the Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC) can be used to reduce
processor overhead.
The fixed peripheral selection allows buffer transfers with a single peripheral. Using the PDC is an optimal means,
as the size of the data transfer between the memory and the SPI is either 8 bits or 16 bits. However, if the
peripheral selection is modified, the SPI_MR must be reprogrammed.
The variable peripheral selection allows buffer transfers with multiple peripherals without reprogramming the
SPI_MR. Data written in the SPI_TDR is 32 bits wide and defines the real data to be transmitted and the
destination peripheral. Using the PDC in this mode requires 32-bit wide buffers, with the data in the LSBs and the
PCS and LASTXFER fields in the MSBs. However, the SPI still controls the number of bits (8 to16) to be
transferred through MISO and MOSI lines with the chip select configuration registers (SPI_CSRx). This is not the
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
559
optimal means in terms of memory size for the buffers, but it provides a very effective means to exchange data
with several peripherals without any intervention of the processor.
Transfer Size
Depending on the data size to transmit, from 8 to 16 bits, the PDC manages automatically the type of pointer size
it has to point to. The PDC performs the following transfer, depending on the mode and number of bits per data.
28.7.3.7
Fixed mode:
̶
8-bit data:
1-Byte transfer, PDC pointer address = address + 1 byte,
PDC counter = counter - 1
̶
9-bit to 16-bit data:
2-Byte transfer. n-bit data transfer with don’t care data (MSB) filled with 0’s,
PDC pointer address = address + 2 bytes,
PDC counter = counter - 1
Variable mode:
̶
In Variable mode, PDC pointer address = address +4 bytes and PDC counter = counter - 1 for 8 to 16bit transfer size.
̶
When using the PDC, the TDRE and RDRF flags are handled by the PDC. The user’s application
does not have to check these bits. Only End of RX Buffer (ENDRX), End of TX Buffer (ENDTX), Buffer
Full (RXBUFF), TX Buffer Empty (TXBUFE) are significant. For further details about the Peripheral
DMA Controller and user interface, refer to the PDC section.
Peripheral Chip Select Decoding
The user can program the SPI to operate with up to 3 slave peripherals by decoding the two chip select lines,
NPCS0 to NPCS1 with an external decoder/demultiplexer (refer to Figure 28-11). This can be enabled by writing a
1 to the PCSDEC bit in the SPI_MR.
When operating without decoding, the SPI makes sure that in any case only one chip select line is activated, i.e.,
one NPCS line driven low at a time. If two bits are defined low in a PCS field, only the lowest numbered chip select
is driven low.
When operating with decoding, the SPI directly outputs the value defined by the PCS field on the NPCS lines of
either SPI_MR or SPI_TDR (depending on PS).
As the SPI sets a default value of 0x3 on the chip select lines (i.e., all chip select lines at 1) when not processing
any transfer, only 3 peripherals can be decoded.
The SPI has two Chip Select registers. As a result, when external decoding is activated, each NPCS chip select
defines the characteristics of up to two peripherals. As an example, SPI_CRS0 defines the characteristics of the
externally decoded peripherals 0 to 1, corresponding to the PCS values 0x0 to 0x1. Consequently, the user has to
make sure to connect compatible peripherals on the decoded chip select lines 0 to 1 and 2. Figure 28-11 shows
this type of implementation.
If the CSAAT bit is used, with or without the PDC, the Mode Fault detection for NPCS0 line must be disabled. This
is not required for all other chip select lines since mode fault detection is only on NPCS0.
560
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 28-11. Chip Select Decoding Application Block Diagram: Single Master/Multiple Slave Implementation
SPCK
MISO
MOSI
SPCK MISO MOSI
SPCK MISO MOSI
SPCK MISO MOSI
Slave 0
Slave 1
Slave 2
NSS
NSS
NSS
SPI Master
NPCS0
NPCS1
External 1-of-n Decoder/Demultiplexer
28.7.3.8
Peripheral Deselection without PDC
During a transfer of more than one unit of data on a Chip Select without the PDC, the SPI_TDR is loaded by the
processor, the TDRE flag rises as soon as the content of the SPI_TDR is transferred into the internal Shift register.
When this flag is detected high, the SPI_TDR can be reloaded. If this reload by the processor occurs before the
end of the current transfer and if the next transfer is performed on the same chip select as the current transfer, the
Chip Select is not de-asserted between the two transfers. But depending on the application software handling the
SPI status register flags (by interrupt or polling method) or servicing other interrupts or other tasks, the processor
may not reload the SPI_TDR in time to keep the chip select active (low). A null DLYBCT value (delay between
consecutive transfers) in the SPI_CSR, gives even less time for the processor to reload the SPI_TDR. With some
SPI slave peripherals, if the chip select line must remain active (low) during a full set of transfers, communication
errors can occur.
To facilitate interfacing with such devices, the Chip Select registers [CSR0...CSR1] can be programmed with the
Chip Select Active After Transfer (CSAAT) bit to 1. This allows the chip select lines to remain in their current state
(low = active) until a transfer to another chip select is required. Even if the SPI_TDR is not reloaded, the chip select
remains active. To de-assert the chip select line at the end of the transfer, the Last Transfer (LASTXFER) bit in
SPI_CR must be set after writing the last data to transmit into SPI_TDR.
28.7.3.9
Peripheral Deselection with PDC
PDC provides faster reloads of the SPI_TDR compared to software. However, depending on the system activity, it
is not guaranteed that the SPI_TDR is written with the next data before the end of the current transfer.
Consequently, data can be lost by the de-assertion of the NPCS line for SPI slave peripherals requiring the chip
select line to remain active between two transfers. The only way to guarantee a safe transfer in this case is the use
of the CSAAT and LASTXFER bits.
When the CSAAT bit is configured to 0, the NPCS does not rise in all cases between two transfers on the same
peripheral. During a transfer on a Chip Select, the TDRE flag rises as soon as the content of the SPI_TDR is
transferred into the internal shift register. When this flag is detected, the SPI_TDR can be reloaded. If this reload
occurs before the end of the current transfer and if the next transfer is performed on the same chip select as the
current transfer, the Chip Select is not de-asserted between the two transfers. This can lead to difficulties to
interface with some serial peripherals requiring the chip select to be de-asserted after each transfer. To facilitate
interfacing with such devices, the SPI_CSR can be programmed with the Chip Select Not Active After Transfer
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
561
(CSNAAT) bit to 1. This allows the chip select lines to be de-asserted systematically during a time “DLYBCS” (the
value of the CSNAAT bit is processed only if the CSAAT bit is configured to 0 for the same chip select).
Figure 28-12 shows different peripheral deselection cases and the effect of the CSAAT and CSNAAT bits.
Figure 28-12. Peripheral Deselection
CSAAT = 0 and CSNAAT = 0
TDRE
NPCS[0..n]
CSAAT = 1 and CSNAAT= 0 / 1
DLYBCT
DLYBCT
A
A
A
A
DLYBCS
A
DLYBCS
PCS = A
PCS = A
Write SPI_TDR
TDRE
NPCS[0..n]
DLYBCT
DLYBCT
A
A
A
A
DLYBCS
A
DLYBCS
PCS=A
PCS = A
Write SPI_TDR
TDRE
NPCS[0..n]
DLYBCT
DLYBCT
A
B
A
B
DLYBCS
DLYBCS
PCS = B
PCS = B
Write SPI_TDR
CSAAT = 0 and CSNAAT = 0
CSAAT = 0 and CSNAAT = 1
DLYBCT
DLYBCT
TDRE
NPCS[0..n]
A
A
A
A
DLYBCS
PCS = A
PCS = A
Write SPI_TDR
28.7.3.10
Mode Fault Detection
The SPI has the capability to operate in multi-master environment. Consequently, the NPCS0/NSS line must be
monitored. If one of the masters on the SPI bus is currently transmitting, the NPCS0/NSS line is low and the SPI
must not transmit any data. A mode fault is detected when the SPI is programmed in Master mode and a low level
is driven by an external master on the NPCS0/NSS signal. In multi-master environment, NPCS0, MOSI, MISO and
562
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
SPCK pins must be configured in open drain (through the PIO controller). When a mode fault is detected, the
SPI_SR.MODF bit is set until SPI_SR is read and the SPI is automatically disabled until it is re-enabled by writing
a 1 to the SPI_CR.SPIEN bit.
By default, the mode fault detection is enabled. The user can disable it by setting the SPI_MR.MODFDIS bit.
28.7.4 SPI Slave Mode
When operating in Slave mode, the SPI processes data bits on the clock provided on the SPI clock pin (SPCK).
The SPI waits until NSS goes active before receiving the serial clock from an external master. When NSS falls, the
clock is validated and the data is loaded in the SPI_RDR depending on the BITS field configured in the SPI_CSR0.
These bits are processed following a phase and a polarity defined respectively by the NCPHA and CPOL bits in
the SPI_CSR0. Note that BITS, CPOL and NCPHA of the other Chip Select registers have no effect when the SPI
is programmed in Slave mode.
The bits are shifted out on the MISO line and sampled on the MOSI line.
Note:
For more information on the BITS field, see also the note below the SPI_CSRx register bitmap (Section 28.8.9 “SPI
Chip Select Register”).
When all bits are processed, the received data is transferred in the SPI_RDR and the RDRF bit rises. If the
SPI_RDR has not been read before new data is received, the Overrun Error Status (OVRES) bit in the SPI_SR is
set. As long as this flag is set, data is loaded in the SPI_RDR. The user must read SPI_SR to clear the OVRES bit.
When a transfer starts, the data shifted out is the data present in the Shift register. If no data has been written in
the SPI_TDR, the last data received is transferred. If no data has been received since the last reset, all bits are
transmitted low, as the Shift register resets to 0.
When a first data is written in the SPI_TDR, it is transferred immediately in the Shift register and the TDRE flag
rises. If new data is written, it remains in the SPI_TDR until a transfer occurs, i.e., NSS falls and there is a valid
clock on the SPCK pin. When the transfer occurs, the last data written in the SPI_TDR is transferred in the Shift
register and the TDRE flag rises. This enables frequent updates of critical variables with single transfers.
Then, new data is loaded in the Shift register from the SPI_TDR. If no character is ready to be transmitted, i.e., no
character has been written in the SPI_TDR since the last load from the SPI_TDR to the Shift register, the
SPI_TDR is retransmitted. In this case the Underrun Error Status Flag (UNDES) is set in the SPI_SR.
Figure 28-13 shows a block diagram of the SPI when operating in Slave mode.
Figure 28-13. Slave Mode Functional Block Diagram
SPCK
NSS
SPI
Clock
SPIEN
SPIENS
SPIDIS
SPI_CSR0
BITS
NCPHA
CPOL
MOSI
LSB
SPI_RDR
RDRF
OVRES
RD
MSB
Shift Register
MISO
SPI_TDR
TD
TDRE
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
563
28.7.5 Register Write Protection
To prevent any single software error from corrupting SPI behavior, certain registers in the address space can be
write-protected by setting the WPEN bit in the SPI Write Protection Mode Register (SPI_WPMR).
If a write access to a write-protected register is detected, the WPVS flag in the SPI Write Protection Status
Register (SPI_WPSR) is set and the WPVSRC field indicates the register in which the write access has been
attempted.
The WPVS bit is automatically cleared after reading SPI_WPSR.
The following registers can be write-protected:
564
SPI Mode Register
SPI Chip Select Register
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
28.8
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) User Interface
Table 28-5.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x00
Control Register
SPI_CR
Write-only
–
0x04
Mode Register
SPI_MR
Read/Write
0x0
0x08
Receive Data Register
SPI_RDR
Read-only
0x0
0x0C
Transmit Data Register
SPI_TDR
Write-only
–
0x10
Status Register
SPI_SR
Read-only
0x000000F0
0x14
Interrupt Enable Register
SPI_IER
Write-only
–
0x18
Interrupt Disable Register
SPI_IDR
Write-only
–
0x1C
Interrupt Mask Register
SPI_IMR
Read-only
0x0
Reserved
–
–
–
0x30
Chip Select Register 0
SPI_CSR0
Read/Write
0x0
0x34
Chip Select Register 1
SPI_CSR1
Read/Write
0x0
0x38–0x3C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x40-0x48
Reserved
–
–
–
0x4C–0xE0
Reserved
–
–
–
0xE4
Write Protection Mode Register
SPI_WPMR
Read/Write
0x0
0xE8
Write Protection Status Register
SPI_WPSR
Read-only
0x0
0xEC–0xF8
Reserved
–
–
–
0xFC
Reserved
–
–
–
Reserved for PDC Registers
–
–
–
0x20–0x2C
0x100–0x124
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
565
28.8.1 SPI Control Register
Name:
SPI_CR
Address:
0x40008000
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
FIFODIS
FIFOEN
–
–
–
–
–
LASTXFER
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
RXFCLR
TXFCLR
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
REQCLR
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SWRST
–
–
–
–
–
SPIDIS
SPIEN
• SPIEN: SPI Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the SPI to transfer and receive data.
• SPIDIS: SPI Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the SPI.
All pins are set in Input mode after completion of the transmission in progress, if any.
If a transfer is in progress when SPIDIS is set, the SPI completes the transmission of the shifter register and does not start
any new transfer, even if the SPI_THR is loaded.
Note: If both SPIEN and SPIDIS are equal to one when the SPI_CR is written, the SPI is disabled.
• SWRST: SPI Software Reset
0: No effect.
1: Reset the SPI. A software-triggered hardware reset of the SPI interface is performed.
The SPI is in Slave mode after software reset.
PDC channels are not affected by software reset.
• REQCLR: Request to Clear the Comparison Trigger
0: No effect.
1: Restarts the comparison trigger to enable SPI_RDR loading.
• TXFCLR: Transmit FIFO Clear
0: No effect.
1: Clears the Transmit FIFO, Transmit FIFO will become empty.
• RXFCLR: Receive FIFO Clear
0: No effect.
1: Clears the Receive FIFO, Receive FIFO will become empty.
566
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
• LASTXFER: Last Transfer
0: No effect.
1: The current NPCS is de-asserted after the character written in TD has been transferred. When SPI_CSRx.CSAAT is set,
the communication with the current serial peripheral can be closed by raising the corresponding NPCS line as soon as TD
transfer is completed.
Refer to Section 28.7.3.5 “Peripheral Selection” for more details.
• FIFOEN: FIFO Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the Transmit and Receive FIFOs
• FIFODIS: FIFO Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the Transmit and Receive FIFOs
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
567
28.8.2 SPI Mode Register
Name:
SPI_MR
Address:
0x40008004
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
17
24
DLYBCS
23
22
21
20
19
18
–
–
–
–
–
–
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
-
–
–
–
–
PCS
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LLB
–
WDRBT
MODFDIS
–
PCSDEC
PS
MSTR
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the SPI Write Protection Mode Register.
• MSTR: Master/Slave Mode
0: SPI is in Slave mode
1: SPI is in Master mode
• PS: Peripheral Select
0: Fixed Peripheral Select
1: Variable Peripheral Select
• PCSDEC: Chip Select Decode
0: The chip selects are directly connected to a peripheral device.
1: The two NPCS chip select lines are connected to a 2-bit to 4-bit decoder.
When PCSDEC = 1, up to 3 Chip Select signals can be generated with the two NPCS lines using an external 2-bit to 4-bit
decoder. The Chip Select registers define the characteristics of the 3 chip selects, with the following rules:
SPI_CSR0 defines peripheral chip select signals 0 to 1.
SPI_CSR1 defines peripheral chip select signal 2.
• MODFDIS: Mode Fault Detection
0: Mode fault detection enabled
1: Mode fault detection disabled
• WDRBT: Wait Data Read Before Transfer
0: No Effect. In Master mode, a transfer can be initiated regardless of the SPI_RDR state.
1: In Master mode, a transfer can start only if the SPI_RDR is empty, i.e., does not contain any unread data. This mode
prevents overrun error in reception.
• LLB: Local Loopback Enable
0: Local loopback path disabled.
1: Local loopback path enabled.
568
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
LLB controls the local loopback on the data shift register for testing in Master mode only (MISO is internally connected on
MOSI).
• PCS: Peripheral Chip Select
This field is only used if fixed peripheral select is active (PS = 0).
If SPI_MR.PCSDEC = 0:
PCS = x0
NPCS[1:0] = 10
PCS = 01
NPCS[1:0] = 01
PCS = 11
forbidden (no peripheral is selected)
(x = don’t care)
If SPI_MR.PCSDEC = 1:
NPCS[1:0] output signals = PCS.
• DLYBCS: Delay Between Chip Selects
This field defines the delay between the inactivation and the activation of NPCS. The DLYBCS time guarantees non-overlapping chip selects and solves bus contentions in case of peripherals having long data float times.
If DLYBCS is lower than 6, six peripheral clock periods are inserted by default.
Otherwise, the following equation determines the delay:
:
DLYBCS
Delay Between Chip Selects = --------------------------------f peripheral clock
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
569
28.8.3 SPI Receive Data Register
Name:
SPI_RDR
Address:
0x40008008
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
PCS
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RD
7
6
5
4
RD
• RD: Receive Data
Data received by the SPI Interface is stored in this register in a right-justified format. Unused bits are read as zero.
• PCS: Peripheral Chip Select
In Master mode only, these bits indicate the value on the NPCS pins at the end of a transfer. Otherwise, these bits are read
as zero.
Note: When using Variable Peripheral Select mode (PS = 1 in SPI_MR), it is mandatory to set the SPI_MR.WDRBT bit to 1 if the PCS
field must be processed in SPI_RDR.
570
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
28.8.4 SPI Transmit Data Register
Name:
SPI_TDR
Address:
0x4000800C
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
LASTXFER
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
PCS
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
TD
7
6
5
4
TD
• TD: Transmit Data
Data to be transmitted by the SPI Interface is stored in this register. Information to be transmitted must be written to the
transmit data register in a right-justified format.
• PCS: Peripheral Chip Select
This field is only used if variable peripheral select is active (PS = 1).
If SPI_MR.PCSDEC = 0:
PCS = x0
NPCS[1:0] = 10
PCS = 01
NPCS[1:0] = 01
PCS = 11
forbidden (no peripheral is selected)
(x = don’t care)
If SPI_MR.PCSDEC = 1:
NPCS[1:0] output signals = PCS.
• LASTXFER: Last Transfer
0: No effect
1: The current NPCS is de-asserted after the transfer of the character written in TD. When SPI_CSRx.CSAAT is set, the
communication with the current serial peripheral can be closed by raising the corresponding NPCS line as soon as TD
transfer is completed.
This field is only used if variable peripheral select is active (SPI_MR.PS = 1).
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
571
28.8.5 SPI Status Register
Name:
SPI_SR
Address:
0x40008010
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SPIENS
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
UNDES
TXEMPTY
NSSR
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXBUFE
RXBUFF
ENDTX
ENDRX
OVRES
MODF
TDRE
RDRF
• RDRF: Receive Data Register Full (cleared by reading SPI_RDR)
0: No data has been received since the last read of SPI_RDR.
1: Data has been received and the received data has been transferred from the shift register to SPI_RDR since the last
read of SPI_RDR.
• TDRE: Transmit Data Register Empty (cleared by writing SPI_TDR)
0: Data has been written to SPI_TDR and not yet transferred to the shift register.
1: The last data written in the SPI_TDR has been transferred to the shift register.
TDRE equals zero when the SPI is disabled or at reset. The SPI enable command sets this bit to 1.
• MODF: Mode Fault Error (cleared on read)
0: No mode fault has been detected since the last read of SPI_SR.
1: A mode fault occurred since the last read of SPI_SR.
• OVRES: Overrun Error Status (cleared on read)
0: No overrun has been detected since the last read of SPI_SR.
1: An overrun has occurred since the last read of SPI_SR.
An overrun occurs when SPI_RDR is loaded at least twice from the shift register since the last read of the SPI_RDR.
• ENDRX: End of RX Buffer (cleared by writing SPI_RCR or SPI_RNCR)
0: The Receive Counter register has not reached 0 since the last write in SPI_RCR(1) or SPI_RNCR(1).
1: The Receive Counter register has reached 0 since the last write in SPI_RCR(1) or SPI_RNCR(1).
• ENDTX: End of TX Buffer (cleared by writing SPI_TCR or SPI_TNCR)
0: The Transmit Counter register has not reached 0 since the last write in SPI_TCR(1) or SPI_TNCR(1).
1: The Transmit Counter register has reached 0 since the last write in SPI_TCR(1) or SPI_TNCR(1).
• RXBUFF: RX Buffer Full (cleared by writing SPI_RCR or SPI_RNCR)
0: SPI_RCR(1) or SPI_RNCR(1) has a value other than 0.
1: Both SPI_RCR(1) and SPI_RNCR(1) have a value of 0.
572
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
• TXBUFE: TX Buffer Empty (cleared by writing SPI_TCR or SPI_TNCR)
0: SPI_TCR(1) or SPI_TNCR(1) has a value other than 0.
1: Both SPI_TCR(1) and SPI_TNCR(1) have a value of 0.
• NSSR: NSS Rising (cleared on read)
0: No rising edge detected on NSS pin since the last read of SPI_SR.
1: A rising edge occurred on NSS pin since the last read of SPI_SR.
• TXEMPTY: Transmission Registers Empty (cleared by writing SPI_TDR)
0: As soon as data is written in SPI_TDR.
1: SPI_TDR and internal shift register are empty. If a transfer delay has been defined, TXEMPTY is set after the end of this
delay.
• UNDES: Underrun Error Status (Slave mode only) (cleared on read)
0: No underrun has been detected since the last read of SPI_SR.
1: A transfer starts whereas no data has been loaded in SPI_TDR.
• SPIENS: SPI Enable Status
0: SPI is disabled.
1: SPI is enabled.
Note:
1. SPI_RCR, SPI_RNCR, SPI_TCR, SPI_TNCR are PDC registers.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
573
28.8.6 SPI Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
SPI_IER
Address:
0x40008014
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
UNDES
TXEMPTY
NSSR
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXBUFE
RXBUFF
ENDTX
ENDRX
OVRES
MODF
TDRE
RDRF
The following configuration values are valid for all listed bit names of this register:
0: No effect.
1: Enables the corresponding interrupt.
• RDRF: Receive Data Register Full Interrupt Enable
• TDRE: SPI Transmit Data Register Empty Interrupt Enable
• MODF: Mode Fault Error Interrupt Enable
• OVRES: Overrun Error Interrupt Enable
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Enable
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Buffer Interrupt Enable
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Enable
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Enable
• NSSR: NSS Rising Interrupt Enable
• TXEMPTY: Transmission Registers Empty Enable
• UNDES: Underrun Error Interrupt Enable
574
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
28.8.7 SPI Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
SPI_IDR
Address:
0x40008018
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
UNDES
TXEMPTY
NSSR
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXBUFE
RXBUFF
ENDTX
ENDRX
OVRES
MODF
TDRE
RDRF
The following configuration values are valid for all listed bit names of this register:
0: No effect.
1: Disables the corresponding interrupt.
• RDRF: Receive Data Register Full Interrupt Disable
• TDRE: SPI Transmit Data Register Empty Interrupt Disable
• MODF: Mode Fault Error Interrupt Disable
• OVRES: Overrun Error Interrupt Disable
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Disable
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Buffer Interrupt Disable
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Disable
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Disable
• NSSR: NSS Rising Interrupt Disable
• TXEMPTY: Transmission Registers Empty Disable
• UNDES: Underrun Error Interrupt Disable
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
575
28.8.8 SPI Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
SPI_IMR
Address:
0x4000801C
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
UNDES
TXEMPTY
NSSR
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXBUFE
RXBUFF
ENDTX
ENDRX
OVRES
MODF
TDRE
RDRF
The following configuration values are valid for all listed bit names of this register:
0: The corresponding interrupt is not enabled.
1: The corresponding interrupt is enabled.
• RDRF: Receive Data Register Full Interrupt Mask
• TDRE: SPI Transmit Data Register Empty Interrupt Mask
• MODF: Mode Fault Error Interrupt Mask
• OVRES: Overrun Error Interrupt Mask
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Mask
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Buffer Interrupt Mask
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Mask
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Mask
• NSSR: NSS Rising Interrupt Mask
• TXEMPTY: Transmission Registers Empty Mask
• UNDES: Underrun Error Interrupt Mask
576
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
28.8.9 SPI Chip Select Register
Name:
SPI_CSRx[x=0..1]
Address:
0x40008030
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
DLYBCT
23
22
21
20
DLYBS
15
14
13
12
SCBR
7
6
5
4
BITS
3
2
1
0
CSAAT
CSNAAT
NCPHA
CPOL
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the SPI Write Protection Mode Register.
Note: SPI_CSRx registers must be written even if the user wants to use the default reset values. The BITS field is not updated with the
translated value unless the register is written.
• CPOL: Clock Polarity
0: The inactive state value of SPCK is logic level zero.
1: The inactive state value of SPCK is logic level one.
CPOL is used to determine the inactive state value of the serial clock (SPCK). It is used with NCPHA to produce the
required clock/data relationship between master and slave devices.
• NCPHA: Clock Phase
0: Data is changed on the leading edge of SPCK and captured on the following edge of SPCK.
1: Data is captured on the leading edge of SPCK and changed on the following edge of SPCK.
NCPHA determines which edge of SPCK causes data to change and which edge causes data to be captured. NCPHA is
used with CPOL to produce the required clock/data relationship between master and slave devices.
• CSNAAT: Chip Select Not Active After Transfer (Ignored if CSAAT = 1)
0: The Peripheral Chip Select does not rise between two transfers if the SPI_TDR is reloaded before the end of the first
transfer and if the two transfers occur on the same Chip Select.
1: The Peripheral Chip Select rises systematically after each transfer performed on the same slave. It remains inactive
after the end of transfer for a minimal duration of:
DLYBCS
--------------------------------(If field DLYBCS is lower than 6, a minimum of six periods is introduced.)
f peripheral clock
• CSAAT: Chip Select Active After Transfer
0: The Peripheral Chip Select Line rises as soon as the last transfer is achieved.
1: The Peripheral Chip Select does not rise after the last transfer is achieved. It remains active until a new transfer is
requested on a different chip select.
• BITS: Bits Per Transfer
(See the note below the register bitmap.)
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
577
The BITS field determines the number of data bits transferred. Reserved values should not be used.
Value
Name
Description
0
8_BIT
8 bits for transfer
1
9_BIT
9 bits for transfer
2
10_BIT
10 bits for transfer
3
11_BIT
11 bits for transfer
4
12_BIT
12 bits for transfer
5
13_BIT
13 bits for transfer
6
14_BIT
14 bits for transfer
7
15_BIT
15 bits for transfer
8
16_BIT
16 bits for transfer
9
–
Reserved
10
–
Reserved
11
–
Reserved
12
–
Reserved
13
–
Reserved
14
–
Reserved
15
–
Reserved
• SCBR: Serial Clock Bit Rate
In Master mode, the SPI Interface uses a modulus counter to derive the SPCK bit rate from the peripheral clock. The bit
rate is selected by writing a value from1 to 255 in the SCBR field. The following equation determines the SPCK bit rate:
SCBR = fperipheral clock / SPCK Bit Rate
Programming the SCBR field to 0 is forbidden. Triggering a transfer while SCBR is at 0 can lead to unpredictable results.
If BRSRCCLK = 1 in SPI_MR, SCBR must be programmed with a value greater than 1.
At reset, SCBR is 0 and the user has to program it at a valid value before performing the first transfer.
Note: If one of the SCBR fields in SPI_CSRx is set to 1, the other SCBR fields in SPI_CSRx must be set to 1 as well, if they are used to
process transfers. If they are not used to transfer data, they can be set at any value.
• DLYBS: Delay Before SPCK
This field defines the delay from NPCS falling edge (activation) to the first valid SPCK transition.
When DLYBS = 0, the delay is half the SPCK clock period.
Otherwise, the following equation determines the delay:
DLYBS = Delay Before SPCK × fperipheral clock
• DLYBCT: Delay Between Consecutive Transfers
This field defines the delay between two consecutive transfers with the same peripheral without removing the chip select.
The delay is always inserted after each transfer and before removing the chip select if needed.
When DLYBCT = 0, no delay between consecutive transfers is inserted and the clock keeps its duty cycle over the character transfers.
Otherwise, the following equation determines the delay:
DLYBCT = Delay Between Consecutive Transfers × fperipheral clock / 32
578
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
28.8.10 SPI Write Protection Mode Register
Name:
SPI_WPMR
Address:
0x400080E4
Access:
Read/Write.
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
WPKEY
23
22
21
20
WPKEY
15
14
13
12
WPKEY
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
WPEN
• WPEN: Write Protection Enable
0: Disables the write protection if WPKEY corresponds to 0x535049 (“SPI” in ASCII)
1: Enables the write protection if WPKEY corresponds to 0x535049 (“SPI” in ASCII)
See Section 28.7.5 “Register Write Protection” for the list of registers that can be write-protected.
• WPKEY: Write Protection Key
Value
0x535049
Name
PASSWD
Description
Writing any other value in this field aborts the write operation of the WPEN bit.
Always reads as 0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
579
28.8.11 SPI Write Protection Status Register
Name:
SPI_WPSR
Address:
0x400080E8
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
WPVSRC
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
WPVS
• WPVS: Write Protection Violation Status
0: No write protection violation has occurred since the last read of SPI_WPSR.
1: A write protection violation has occurred since the last read of SPI_WPSR. If this violation is an unauthorized attempt to
write a protected register, the associated violation is reported into field WPVSRC.
• WPVSRC: Write Protection Violation Source
When WPVS = 1, WPVSRC indicates the register address offset at which a write access has been attempted.
580
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
29.
Two-wire Interface (TWIHS)
29.1
Description
The Atmel Two-wire Interface (TWIHS) interconnects components on a unique two-wire bus, made up of one clock
line and one data line with speeds of up to 400 kbit/s in Fast mode and up to 3.4 Mbit/s in High-speed slave mode
only, based on a byte-oriented transfer format. It can be used with any Atmel Two-wire Interface bus Serial
EEPROM and I²C-compatible devices, such as a Real-Time Clock (RTC), Dot Matrix/Graphic LCD Controller and
temperature sensor. The TWIHS is programmable as a master or a slave with sequential or single-byte access.
Multiple master capability is supported.
A configurable baud rate generator permits the output data rate to be adapted to a wide range of core clock
frequencies. Table 29-1 lists the compatibility level of the Atmel Two-wire Interface in Master mode and a full I2C
compatible device.
Atmel TWI Compatibility with I2C Standard
Table 29-1.
I2C Standard
Atmel TWI
Standard Mode Speed (100 kHz)
Supported
Fast Mode Speed (400 kHz)
Supported
High-speed Mode (Slave only, 3.4 MHz)
Supported
(1)
7- or 10-bit
Slave Addressing
(2)
START Byte
Not Supported
Repeated Start (Sr) Condition
Supported
ACK and NACK Management
Supported
Input Filtering
Supported
Slope Control
Not Supported
Clock Stretching
Supported
Multi Master Capability
Supported
Notes:
29.2
Supported
1.
2.
10-bit support in Master mode only
START + b000000001 + Ack + Sr
Embedded Characteristics
1 TWIHS
Compatible with Atmel Two-wire Interface Serial Memory and I²C Compatible Devices(1)
One, Two or Three Bytes for Slave Address
Sequential Read/Write Operations
Master and Multi-master Operation (Standard and Fast Mode Only)
Slave Mode Operation (Standard, Fast and High-Speed Mode)
Bit Rate: Up to 400 kbit/s in Fast Mode and 3.4 Mbit/s in High-Speed Mode (Slave Only)
General Call Supported in Slave Mode
SleepWalking (Asynchronous and Partial Wake-up)
SMBus Quick Command Supported in Master Mode
Connection to Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC) Channel Capabilities Optimizes Data Transfers
Register Write Protection
̶
Note:
1.
One Channel for the Receiver, One Channel for the Transmitter
See Table 29-1 for details on compatibility with I²C Standard.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
581
29.3
List of Abbreviations
Table 29-2.
Abbreviations
Abbreviation
Description
TWI
Two-wire Interface
A
Acknowledge
NA
Non Acknowledge
P
Stop
S
Start
Sr
Repeated Start
SADR
Slave Address
ADR
Any address except SADR
R
Read
W
Write
29.4
Block Diagram
Figure 29-1.
Block Diagram
APB Bridge
TWCK
PIO
PMC
Peripheral Clock
TWD
Two-wire
Interface
TWIHS
Interrupt
Interrupt
Controller
29.4.1 I/O Lines Description
Table 29-3.
I/O Lines Description
Pin Name
Pin Description
Type
TWD
Two-wire Serial Data
Input/Output
TWCK
Two-wire Serial Clock
Input/Output
582
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
29.5
Product Dependencies
29.5.1 I/O Lines
Both TWD and TWCK are bidirectional lines, connected to a positive supply voltage via a current source or pull-up
resistor. When the bus is free, both lines are high. The output stages of devices connected to the bus must have
an open-drain or open-collector to perform the wired-AND function.
TWD and TWCK pins may be multiplexed with PIO lines. To enable the TWIHS, the user must program the PIO
Controller to dedicate TWD and TWCK as peripheral lines. When High-speed Slave mode is enabled, the analog
pad filter must be enabled.
The user must not program TWD and TWCK as open-drain. This is already done by the hardware.
Table 29-4.
I/O Lines
Instance
Signal
I/O Line
Peripheral
TWI0
TWCK0
PA4
A
TWI0
TWD0
PA3
A
29.5.2 Power Management
Enable the peripheral clock.
The TWIHS may be clocked through the Power Management Controller (PMC), thus the user must first configure
the PMC to enable the TWIHS clock.
29.5.3 Interrupt Sources
The TWIHS has an interrupt line connected to the Interrupt Controller. In order to handle inter-rupts, the Interrupt
Controller must be programmed before configuring the TWIHS.
Table 29-5.
Peripheral IDs
Instance
ID
TWI0
19
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
583
29.6
Functional Description
29.6.1 Transfer Format
The data put on the TWD line must be 8 bits long. Data is transferred MSB first; each byte must be followed by an
acknowledgement. The number of bytes per transfer is unlimited. See Figure 29-3.
Each transfer begins with a START condition and terminates with a STOP condition. See Figure 29-2.
A high-to-low transition on the TWD line while TWCK is high defines the START condition.
A low-to-high transition on the TWD line while TWCK is high defines the STOP condition.
Figure 29-2.
START and STOP Conditions
TWD
TWCK
Start
Figure 29-3.
Stop
Transfer Format
TWD
TWCK
Start
Address
R/W
Ack
Data
Ack
29.6.2 Modes of Operation
The TWIHS has different modes of operation:
Master Transmitter mode (Standard and Fast modes only)
Master Receiver mode (Standard and Fast modes only)
Multi-master Transmitter mode (Standard and Fast modes only)
Multi-master Receiver mode (Standard and Fast modes only)
Slave Transmitter mode (Standard, Fast and High-speed modes)
Slave Receiver mode (Standard, Fast and High-speed modes)
These modes are described in the following sections.
584
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Data
Ack
Stop
29.6.3 Master Mode
29.6.3.1
Definition
The master is the device that starts a transfer, generates a clock and stops it. This operating mode is not available
if High-speed mode is selected.
29.6.3.2
Programming Master Mode
The following registers must be programmed before entering Master mode:
1. TWIHS_MMR.DADR (+ IADRSZ + IADR if a 10-bit device is addressed): The device address is used to
access slave devices in Read or Write mode.
2.
TWIHS_CWGR.CKDIV + CHDIV + CLDIV: Clock Waveform register
3.
TWIHS_CR.SVDIS: Disables the Slave mode
4.
TWIHS_CR.MSEN: Enables the Master mode
Note:
29.6.3.3
If the TWIHS is already in Master mode, the device address (DADR) can be configured without disabling the Master
mode.
Master Transmitter Mode
This operating mode is not available if High-speed mode is selected.
After the master initiates a START condition when writing into the Transmit Holding register (TWIHS_THR), it
sends a 7-bit slave address, configured in the Master Mode register (DADR in TWIHS_MMR), to notify the slave
device. The bit following the slave address indicates the transfer direction, 0 in this case (MREAD = 0 in
TWIHS_MMR).
The TWIHS transfers require the slave to acknowledge each received byte. During the acknowledge clock pulse
(9th pulse), the master releases the data line (HIGH), enabling the slave to pull it down in order to generate the
acknowledge. If the slave does not acknowledge the byte, then the Not Acknowledge flag (NACK) is set in the
TWIHS Status Register (TWIHS_SR) of the master and a STOP condition is sent. The NACK flag must be cleared
by reading TWIHS_SR before the next write into TWIHS_THR. As with the other status bits, an interrupt can be
generated if enabled in the Interrupt Enable register (TWIHS_IER). If the slave acknowledges the byte, the data
written in the TWIHS_THR is then shifted in the internal shifter and transferred. When an acknowledge is detected,
the TXRDY bit is set until a new write in the TWIHS_THR.
TXRDY is used as Transmit Ready for the PDC transmit channel.
While no new data is written in the TWIHS_THR, the serial clock line is tied low. When new data is written in the
TWIHS_THR, the SCL is released and the data is sent. Setting the STOP bit in TWIHS_CR generates a STOP
condition.
After a master write transfer, the serial clock line is stretched (tied low) as long as no new data is written in the
TWIHS_THR or until a STOP command is performed.
To clear the TXRDY flag, first set the bit TWIHS_CR.MSDIS, then set the bit TWIHS_CR.MSEN.
See Figure 29-4, Figure 29-5, and Figure 29-6.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
585
Figure 29-4.
Master Write with One Data Byte
STOP Command sent (write in TWIHS_CR)
S
TWD
DADR
W
A
DATA
A
P
TXCOMP
TXRDY
Write THR (DATA)
Figure 29-5.
Master Write with Multiple Data Bytes
STOP command performed
(by writing in the TWIHS_CR)
S
TWD
DADR
W
A
DATA n
A
DATA n+1
A
DATA n+2
A
P
TWCK
TXCOMP
TXRDY
Write THR (Data n)
Write THR (Data n+1)
Figure 29-6.
Write THR (Data n+2)
Last data sent
Master Write with One Byte Internal Address and Multiple Data Bytes
STOP command performed
(by writing in the TWIHS_CR)
TWD
S
DADR
W
A
IADR
A
DATA n
A
DATA n+1
A
DATA n+2
TWCK
TXCOMP
TXRDY
Write THR (Data n)
Write THR (Data n+1)
586
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Write THR (Data n+2)
Last data sent
A
P
29.6.3.4
Master Receiver Mode
Master Receiver mode is not available if High-speed mode is selected.
The read sequence begins by setting the START bit. After the START condition has been sent, the master sends
a 7-bit slave address to notify the slave device. The bit following the slave address indicates the transfer direction,
1 in this case (MREAD = 1 in TWIHS_MMR). During the acknowledge clock pulse (9th pulse), the master releases
the data line (HIGH), enabling the slave to pull it down in order to generate the acknowledge. The master polls the
data line during this clock pulse and sets the NACK bit in the TWIHS_SR if the slave does not acknowledge the
byte.
If an acknowledge is received, the master is then ready to receive data from the slave. After data has been
received, the master sends an acknowledge condition to notify the slave that the data has been received except
for the last data (see Figure 29-7). When the RXRDY bit is set in the TWIHS_SR, a character has been received in
the Receive Holding register (TWIHS_RHR). The RXRDY bit is reset when reading the TWIHS_RHR.
When a single data byte read is performed, with or without internal address (IADR), the START and STOP bits
must be set at the same time. See Figure 29-7. When a multiple data byte read is performed, with or without
internal address (IADR), the STOP bit must be set after the next-to-last data received (same condition applies for
START bit to generate a REPEATED START). See Figure 29-8. For internal address usage, see Section 29.6.3.5
”Internal Address”.
If TWIHS_RHR is full (RXRDY high) and the master is receiving data, the serial clock line is tied low before
receiving the last bit of the data and until the TWIHS_RHR is read. Once the TWIHS_RHR is read, the master
stops stretching the serial clock line and ends the data reception. See Figure 29-9.
Warning: When receiving multiple bytes in Master Read mode, if the next-to-last access is not read (the RXRDY
flag remains high), the last access is not completed until TWIHS_RHR is read. The last access stops on the nextto-last bit (clock stretching). When the TWIHS_RHR is read, there is only half a bit period to send the STOP (or
START) command, else another read access might occur (spurious access).
A possible workaround is to set the STOP (or START) bit before reading the TWIHS_RHR on the next-to-last
access (within IT handler).
Figure 29-7.
Master Read with One Data Byte
TWD
S
DADR
R
A
DATA
N
P
TXCOMP
Write START &
STOP Bit
RXRDY
Read RHR
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
587
Figure 29-8.
TWD
Master Read with Multiple Data Bytes
S
DADR
R
A
DATA n
A
DATA (n+1)
A
DATA (n+m)-1
A
DATA (n+m)
N
P
TXCOMP
Write START Bit
RXRDY
Read RHR
DATA n
Read RHR
DATA (n+1)
Read RHR
DATA (n+m)-1
Read RHR
DATA (n+m)
Write STOP Bit
after next-to-last data read
Figure 29-9.
Master Read Clock Stretching with Multiple Data Bytes
STOP command performed
(by writing in the TWIHS_CR)
Clock Streching
TWD
S
DADR
W
A
DATA n
A
DATA n+1
A
DATA n+2
A
P
TWCK
TXCOMP
RXRDY
Read RHR (Data n)
Read RHR (Data n+1)
Read RHR (Data n+2)
RXRDY is used as receive ready for the PDC receive channel.
29.6.3.5
Internal Address
The TWIHS can perform transfers with 7-bit slave address devices and with 10-bit slave address devices.
7-bit Slave Addressing
When addressing 7-bit slave devices, the internal address bytes are used to perform random address (read or
write) accesses to reach one or more data bytes, e.g. within a memory page location in a serial memory. When
performing read operations with an internal address, the TWIHS performs a write operation to set the internal
address into the slave device, and then switch to Master Receiver mode. Note that the second START condition
(after sending the IADR) is sometimes called “repeated start” (Sr) in I2C fully-compatible devices. See Figure 2911.
See Figure 29-10 and Figure 29-12 for the master write operation with internal address.
The three internal address bytes are configurable through TWIHS_MMR.
If the slave device supports only a 7-bit address, i.e., no internal address, IADRSZ must be set to 0.
588
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Table 29-6 shows the abbreviations used in Figure 29-10 and Figure 29-11.
Table 29-6.
Abbreviations
Abbreviation
Definition
S
Start
Sr
Repeated Start
P
Stop
W
Write
R
Read
A
Acknowledge
NA
Not Acknowledge
DADR
Device Address
IADR
Internal Address
Figure 29-10. Master Write with One, Two or Three Bytes Internal Address and One Data Byte
Three bytes internal address
TWD
S
DADR
W
A
IADR(23:16)
A
IADR(15:8)
A
IADR(7:0)
A
W
A
IADR(15:8)
A
IADR(7:0)
A
DATA
A
W
A
IADR(7:0)
A
DATA
A
DATA
A
P
Two bytes internal address
TWD
S
DADR
P
One byte internal address
TWD
S
DADR
P
Figure 29-11. Master Read with One, Two or Three Bytes Internal Address and One Data Byte
Three bytes internal address
TWD
S
DADR
W
A
IADR(23:16)
A
IADR(15:8)
A
IADR(7:0)
A
Sr
DADR
R
A
DATA
N
P
Two bytes internal address
TWD
S
DADR
W
A
IADR(15:8)
A
IADR(7:0)
A
Sr
W
A
IADR(7:0)
A
Sr
R
A
DADR
R
A
DATA
N
P
One byte internal address
TWD
S
DADR
DADR
DATA
N
P
10-bit Slave Addressing
For a slave address higher than seven bits, configure the address size (IADRSZ) and set the other slave address
bits in the Internal Address register (TWIHS_IADR). The two remaining internal address bytes, IADR[15:8] and
IADR[23:16], can be used the same way as in 7-bit slave addressing.
Example: Address a 10-bit device (10-bit device address is b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b10)
1. Program IADRSZ = 1,
2.
Program DADR with 1 1 1 1 0 b1 b2 (b1 is the MSB of the 10-bit address, b2, etc.)
3.
Program TWIHS_IADR with b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b10 (b10 is the LSB of the 10-bit address)
Figure 29-12 shows a byte write to a memory device. This demonstrates the use of internal addresses to access
the device.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
589
Figure 29-12.
Internal Address Usage
S
T
A
R
T
W
R
I
T
E
Device
Address
FIRST
WORD ADDRESS
SECOND
WORD ADDRESS
S
T
O
P
DATA
0
M
S
B
29.6.3.6
LR A
S / C
BW K
M
S
B
A
C
K
LA
SC
BK
A
C
K
Repeated Start
In addition to Internal Address mode, REPEATED START (Sr) can be generated manually by writing the START
bit at the end of a transfer instead of the STOP bit. In such case, the parameters of the next transfer (direction,
SADR, etc.) need to be set before writing the START bit at the end of the previous transfer.
See Section 29.6.3.10 ”Read/Write Flowcharts” for detailed flowcharts.
Note that generating a REPEATED START after a single data read is not supported.
29.6.3.7
Bus Clear Command
The TWIHS can perform a Bus Clear command:
1. Configure the Master mode (DADR, CKDIV, etc).
2.
29.6.3.8
Start the transfer by setting the CLEAR bit in the TWIHS_CR.
Using the Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC) in Master Mode
The use of the PDC significantly reduces the CPU load.
To ensure correct implementation, follow the programming sequences below:
Data Transmit with the PDC in Master Mode
The PDC transfer size must be defined with the buffer size minus 1. The remaining character must be managed
without PDC to ensure that the exact number of bytes are transmitted regardless of system bus latency conditions
during the end of the buffer transfer period.
1. Initialize the transmit PDC (memory pointers, transfer size - 1).
2.
Configure the Master mode (DADR, CKDIV, MREAD = 0, etc.).
3.
Start the transfer by setting the PDC TXTEN bit.
4.
Wait for the PDC ENDTX flag either by using the polling method or ENDTX interrupt.
5.
Disable the PDC by setting the PDC TXTDIS bit.
6.
Wait for the TXRDY flag in TWIHS_SR.
7.
Set the STOP bit in TWIHS_CR.
8.
Write the last character in TWIHS_THR.
9.
(Only if peripheral clock must be disabled) Wait for the TXCOMP flag to be raised in TWIHS_SR.
Data Receive with the PDC in Master Mode
The PDC transfer size must be defined with the buffer size minus 2. The two remaining characters must be
managed without PDC to ensure that the exact number of bytes are received regardless of system bus latency
conditions during the end of the buffer transfer period.
1. Initialize the receive PDC (memory pointers, transfer size - 2).
590
2.
Configure the Master mode (DADR, CKDIV, MREAD = 1, etc.).
3.
Set the PDC RXTEN bit.
4.
(Master Only) Write the START bit in the TWIHS_CR to start the transfer.
5.
Wait for the PDC ENDRX flag either by using polling method or ENDRX interrupt.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
6.
Disable the PDC by setting the PDC RXTDIS bit.
7.
Wait for the RXRDY flag in TWIHS_SR.
8.
Set the STOP bit in TWIHS_CR to end the transfer.
9.
Read the penultimate character in TWIHS_RHR.
10. Wait for the RXRDY flag in TWIHS_SR.
11. Read the last character in TWIHS_RHR.
12. (Only if peripheral clock must be disabled) Wait for the TXCOMP flag to be raised in TWIHS_SR.
29.6.3.9
SMBus Quick Command (Master Mode Only)
The TWIHS can perform a quick command:
1. Configure the Master mode (DADR, CKDIV, etc).
2.
Write the MREAD bit in the TWIHS_MMR at the value of the one-bit command to be sent.
3.
Start the transfer by setting the QUICK bit in the TWIHS_CR.
Figure 29-13. SMBus Quick Command
TWD
S
DADR
R/W
A
P
TXCOMP
TXRDY
Write QUICK command in TWIHS_CR
29.6.3.10
Read/Write Flowcharts
The flowcharts give examples for read and write operations. A polling or interrupt method can be used to check the
status bits. The interrupt method requires that TWIHS_IER be configured first.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
591
Figure 29-14. TWIHS Write Operation with Single Data Byte without Internal Address
BEGIN
Set TWIHS clock
(CLDIV, CHDIV, CKDIV) in TWIHS_CWGR
(Needed only once)
Set the Control register:
- Master enable
TWIHS_CR = MSEN + SVDIS
Set the Master Mode register:
- Device slave address (DADR)
- Transfer direction bit
Write ==> bit MREAD = 0
Load Transmit register
TWIHS_THR = Data to send
Write STOP Command
TWIHS_CR = STOP
Read Status register
No
TXRDY = 1?
Yes
Read Status register
No
TXCOMP = 1?
Yes
Transfer finished
592
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 29-15. TWIHS Write Operation with Single Data Byte and Internal Address
BEGIN
Set TWIHS clock
(CLDIV, CHDIV, CKDIV) in TWIHS_CWGR
(Needed only once)
Set the Control register:
- Master enable
TWIHS_CR = MSEN + SVDIS
Set the Master Mode register:
- Device slave address (DADR)
- Internal address size (IADRSZ)
- Transfer direction bit
Write ==> bit MREAD = 0
Set the internal address
TWIHS_IADR = address
Load transmit register
TWIHS_THR = Data to send
Write STOP command
TWIHS_CR = STOP
Read Status register
No
TXRDY = 1?
Yes
Read Status register
TXCOMP = 1?
No
Yes
Transfer finished
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
593
Figure 29-16. TWIHS Write Operation with Multiple Data Bytes with or without Internal Address
BEGIN
Set TWIHS clock
(CLDIV, CHDIV, CKDIV) in TWIHS_CWGR
(Needed only once)
Set the Control register:
- Master enable
TWIHS_CR = MSEN + SVDIS
Set the Master Mode register:
- Device slave address
- Internal address size (if IADR used)
- Transfer direction bit
Write ==> bit MREAD = 0
No
Internal address size = 0?
Set the internal address
TWIHS_IADR = address
Yes
Load Transmit register
TWIHS_THR = Data to send
Read Status register
TWIHS_THR = data to send
No
TXRDY = 1?
Yes
Data to send?
Yes
No
Write STOP Command
TWIHS_CR = STOP
Read Status register
No
TXCOMP = 1?
Yes
END
594
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 29-17. TWIHS Write Operation with Multiple Data Bytes and Read Operation with Multiple Data Bytes (Sr)
BEGIN
Set TWIHS clock
(CLDIV, CHDIV, CKDIV) in TWIHS_CWGR
(Needed only once)
Set the Control register:
- Master enable
TWIHS_CR = MSEN + SVDIS
Set the Master Mode register:
- Device slave address
- Internal address size (if IADR used)
- Transfer direction bit
Read ==> bit MREAD = 0
No
Internal address size = 0?
Set the internal address
TWIHS_IADR = address
Yes
Load Transmit register
TWIHS_THR = Data to send
Read Status register
TWIHS_THR = data to send
No
TXRDY = 1?
Yes
Data to send ?
Yes
No
Set the Master Mode register:
- Device slave address
- Internal address size (if IADR used)
- TWIHS_IADR = address (if Internal address size = 0)
- Transfer direction bit
Read ==> bit MREAD = 1
Set the next transfer
parameters and
send the repeated start
command
Start the transfer
TWIHS_CR = START
Read Status register
No
RXRDY = 1?
Yes
Read Receive Holding register (TWIHS_RHR)
No
Last data to read
but one?
Yes
Stop the transfer
TWIHS_CR = STOP
Read Status register
No
RXRDY = 1?
Yes
Read Receive Holding register (TWIHS_RHR)
Read status register
TXCOMP = 1?
No
Yes
END
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
595
Figure 29-18. TWIHS Read Operation with Single Data Byte without Internal Address
BEGIN
Set TWIHS clock
(CLDIV, CHDIV, CKDIV) in TWIHS_CWGR
(Needed only once)
Set the Control register:
- Master enable
TWIHS_CR = MSEN + SVDIS
Set the Master Mode register:
- Device slave address
- Transfer direction bit
Read ==> bit MREAD = 1
Start the transfer
TWIHS_CR = START | STOP
Read status register
RXRDY = 1?
No
Yes
Read Receive Holding Register
Read Status register
No
TXCOMP = 1?
Yes
END
596
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 29-19. TWIHS Read Operation with Single Data Byte and Internal Address
BEGIN
Set TWIHS clock
(CLDIV, CHDIV, CKDIV) in TWIHS_CWGR
(Needed only once)
Set the Control register:
- Master enable
TWIHS_CR = MSEN + SVDIS
Set the Master Mode register:
- Device slave address
- Internal address size (IADRSZ)
- Transfer direction bit
Read ==> bit MREAD = 1
Set the internal address
TWIHS_IADR = address
Start the transfer
TWIHS_CR = START | STOP
Read Status register
No
RXRDY = 1?
Yes
Read Receive Holding register
Read Status register
No
TXCOMP = 1?
Yes
END
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
597
Figure 29-20. TWIHS Read Operation with Multiple Data Bytes with or without Internal Address
BEGIN
Set TWIHS clock
(CLDIV, CHDIV, CKDIV) in TWIHS_CWGR
(Needed only once)
Set the Control register:
- Master enable
TWIHS_CR = MSEN + SVDIS
Set the Master Mode register:
- Device slave address
- Internal address size (if IADR used)
- Transfer direction bit
Read ==> bit MREAD = 1
No
Internal address size = 0?
Set the internal address
TWIHS_IADR = address
Yes
Start the transfer
TWIHS_CR = START
Read Status register
RXRDY = 1?
No
Yes
Read Receive Holding register (TWIHS_RHR)
No
Last data to read
but one?
Yes
Stop the transfer
TWIHS_CR = STOP
Read Status register
No
RXRDY = 1?
Yes
Read Receive Holding register (TWIHS_RHR)
Read status register
TXCOMP = 1?
Yes
END
598
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
No
29.6.4 Multi-master Mode
29.6.4.1
Definition
In Multi-master mode, more than one master may handle the bus at the same time without data corruption by using
arbitration.
Arbitration starts as soon as two or more masters place information on the bus at the same time, and stops
(arbitration is lost) for the master that intends to send a logical one while the other master sends a logical zero.
As soon as arbitration is lost by a master, it stops sending data and listens to the bus in order to detect a stop.
When the stop is detected, the master that has lost arbitration may put its data on the bus by respecting arbitration.
Arbitration is illustrated in Figure 29-22.
29.6.4.2
Different Multi-master Modes
Two Multi-master modes may be distinguished:
1. The TWIHS is considered as a master only and is never addressed.
2.
Note:
The TWIHS may be either a master or a slave and may be addressed.
Arbitration in supported in both Multi-master modes.
TWIHS as Master Only
In this mode, the TWIHS is considered as a master only (MSEN is always at one) and must be driven like a master
with the ARBLST (Arbitration Lost) flag in addition.
If arbitration is lost (ARBLST = 1), the user must reinitiate the data transfer.
If starting a transfer (ex.: DADR + START + W + Write in THR) and if the bus is busy, the TWIHS automatically
waits for a STOP condition on the bus to initiate the transfer (see Figure 29-21).
Note:
The state of the bus (busy or free) is not indicated in the user interface.
TWIHS as Master or Slave
The automatic reversal from master to slave is not supported in case of a lost arbitration.
Then, in the case where TWIHS may be either a master or a slave, the user must manage the pseudo Multi-master
mode described in the steps below:
1. Program the TWIHS in Slave mode (SADR + MSDIS + SVEN) and perform a slave access (if TWIHS is
addressed).
2.
If the TWIHS has to be set in Master mode, wait until TXCOMP flag is at 1.
3.
Program the Master mode (DADR + SVDIS + MSEN) and start the transfer (ex: START + Write in THR).
4.
As soon as the Master mode is enabled, the TWIHS scans the bus in order to detect if it is busy or free.
When the bus is considered free, the TWIHS initiates the transfer.
5.
As soon as the transfer is initiated and until a STOP condition is sent, the arbitration becomes relevant and
the user must monitor the ARBLST flag.
6.
If the arbitration is lost (ARBLST is set to 1), the user must program the TWIHS in Slave mode in case the
master that won the arbitration needs to access the TWIHS.
7.
If the TWIHS has to be set in Slave mode, wait until the TXCOMP flag is at 1 and then program the Slave
mode.
Note:
If the arbitration is lost and the TWIHS is addressed, the TWIHS does not acknowledge, even if it is programmed in
Slave mode as soon as ARBLST is set to 1. Then the master must repeat SADR.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
599
Figure 29-21. User Sends Data While the Bus is Busy
TWCK
START sent by the TWIHS
STOP sent by the master
DATA sent by a master
TWD
DATA sent by the TWIHS
Bus is busy
Bus is free
Transfer is kept
TWIHS DATA transfer
A transfer is programmed
(DADR + W + START + Write THR)
Bus is considered as free
Transfer is initiated
Figure 29-22. Arbitration Cases
TWCK
TWD
TWCK
Data from a Master
Data from TWIHS
TWD
S
1
0 0 1 1
S
1
0
S
1
0 0
1
P
Arbitration is lost
TWIHS stops sending data
Data from the master
1 1
P
Arbitration is lost
S
1
0
1
S
1
0
0 1
1
S
1
0
0 1
1
The master stops sending data
Data from the TWIHS
ARBLST
Bus is busy
Transfer is kept
TWIHS DATA transfer
A transfer is programmed
(DADR + W + START + Write THR)
Bus is free
Transfer is stopped
Transfer is programmed again
(DADR + W + START + Write THR)
Bus is considered as free
Transfer is initiated
The flowchart shown in Figure 29-23 gives an example of read and write operations in Multi-master mode.
600
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 29-23. Multi-master Flowchart
START
Programm the SLAVE mode:
SADR + MSDIS + SVEN
Read Status Register
SVACC = 1 ?
Yes
GACC = 1 ?
No
No
No
SVREAD = 1 ?
Yes
No
EOSACC = 1 ?
TXRDY= 1 ?
Yes
Yes
No
Write in TWIHS_THR
TXCOMP = 1 ?
No
RXRDY= 1 ?
Yes
No
No
Yes
Read TWIHS_RHR
Need to perform
a master access ?
GENERAL CALL TREATMENT
Yes
Decoding of the
programming sequence
No
Prog seq
OK ?
Change SADR
Program the Master mode
DADR + SVDIS + MSEN + CLK + R / W
Read Status Register
Yes
No
ARBLST = 1 ?
Yes
Yes
No
MREAD = 1 ?
RXRDY= 0 ?
TXRDY= 0 ?
No
No
Read TWIHS_RHR
Yes
Yes
Data to read?
Data to send ?
Yes
Write in TWIHS_THR
No
No
Stop Transfer
TWIHS_CR = STOP
Read Status Register
Yes
TXCOMP = 0 ?
No
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
601
29.6.5 Slave Mode
29.6.5.1
Definition
Slave mode is defined as a mode where the device receives the clock and the address from another device called
the master.
In this mode, the device never initiates and never completes the transmission (START, REPEATED_START and
STOP conditions are always provided by the master).
29.6.5.2
Programming Slave Mode
The following fields must be programmed before entering Slave mode:
1. TWIHS_SMR.SADR: The slave device address is used in order to be accessed by master devices in
Read or Write mode.
2.
(Optional) TWIHS_SMR.MASK can be set to mask some SADR address bits and thus allow multiple
address matching.
3.
TWIHS_CR.MSDIS: Disables the Master mode.
4.
TWIHS_CR.SVEN: Enables the Slave mode.
As the device receives the clock, values written in TWIHS_CWGR are ignored.
29.6.5.3
Receiving Data
After a START or REPEATED START condition is detected, and if the address sent by the master matches the
slave address programmed in the SADR (Slave Address) field, the SVACC (Slave Access) flag is set and
SVREAD (Slave Read) indicates the direction of the transfer.
SVACC remains high until a STOP condition or a REPEATED START is detected. When such a condition is
detected, the EOSACC (End Of Slave Access) flag is set.
Read Sequence
In the case of a read sequence (SVREAD is high), the TWIHS transfers data written in the TWIHS_THR until a
STOP condition or a REPEATED_START + an address different from SADR is detected. Note that at the end of
the read sequence TXCOMP (Transmission Complete) flag is set and SVACC reset.
As soon as data is written in the TWIHS_THR, TXRDY (Transmit Holding Register Ready) flag is reset, and it is
set when the internal shifter is empty and the sent data acknowledged or not. If the data is not acknowledged, the
NACK flag is set.
Note that a STOP or a REPEATED START always follows a NACK.
To clear the TXRDY flag, first set the bit TWIHS_CR.SVDIS, then set the bit TWIHS_CR.SVEN.
See Figure 29-24.
Write Sequence
In the case of a write sequence (SVREAD is low), the RXRDY (Receive Holding Register Ready) flag is set as
soon as a character has been received in the TWIHS_RHR. RXRDY is reset when reading the TWIHS_RHR.
The TWIHS continues receiving data until a STOP condition or a REPEATED_START + an address different from
SADR is detected. Note that at the end of the write sequence, the TXCOMP flag is set and SVACC is reset.
See Figure 29-25.
Clock Stretching Sequence
If TWIHS_THR or TWIHS_RHR is not written/read in time, the TWIHS performs a clock stretching.
Clock stretching information is given by the SCLWS (Clock Wait State) bit.
See Figure 29-27 and Figure 29-28.
602
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Note:
Clock stretching can be disabled by configuring the SCLWSDIS bit in the TWIHS_SMR. In that case, the UNRE and
OVRE flags indicate an underrun (when TWIHS_THR is not filled on time) or an overrun (when TWIHS_RHR is not
read on time).
General Call
In the case where a GENERAL CALL is performed, the GACC (General Call Access) flag is set.
After GACC is set, the user must interpret the meaning of the GENERAL CALL and decode the new address
programming sequence.
See Figure 29-26.
29.6.5.4
Data Transfer
Read Operation
The Read mode is defined as a data requirement from the master.
After a START or a REPEATED START condition is detected, the decoding of the address starts. If the slave
address (SADR) is decoded, SVACC is set and SVREAD indicates the direction of the transfer.
Until a STOP or REPEATED START condition is detected, the TWIHS continues sending data loaded in the
TWIHS_THR.
If a STOP condition or a REPEATED START + an address different from SADR is detected, SVACC is reset.
Figure 29-24 describes the read operation.
Figure 29-24. Read Access Ordered by a Master
SADR matches,
TWIHS answers with an ACK
ACK/NACK from the Master
SADR does not match,
TWIHS answers with a NACK
TWD
S
ADR
R
NA
DATA
NA
P/S/Sr
SADR R
A
DATA
A
A
DATA
NA
S/Sr
TXRDY
NACK
Read RHR
Write THR
SVACC
SVREAD
SVREAD has to be taken into account only while SVACC is active
EOSACC
Notes:
1. When SVACC is low, the state of SVREAD becomes irrelevant.
2. TXRDY is reset when data has been transmitted from TWIHS_THR to the internal shifter and set when this data has been
acknowledged or non acknowledged.
Write Operation
The Write mode is defined as a data transmission from the master.
After a START or a REPEATED START, the decoding of the address starts. If the slave address is decoded,
SVACC is set and SVREAD indicates the direction of the transfer (SVREAD is low in this case).
Until a STOP or REPEATED START condition is detected, the TWIHS stores the received data in the
TWIHS_RHR.
If a STOP condition or a REPEATED START + an address different from SADR is detected, SVACC is reset.
Figure 29-25 describes the write operation.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
603
Figure 29-25. Write Access Ordered by a Master
SADR does not match,
TWIHS answers with a NACK
TWD
S
ADR
W
NA
DATA
NA
SADR matches,
TWIHS answers with an ACK
P/S/Sr
SADR W
A
DATA
Read RHR
A
A
DATA NA
S/Sr
RXRDY
SVACC
SVREAD has to be taken into account only while SVACC is active
SVREAD
EOSACC
Notes:
1. When SVACC is low, the state of SVREAD becomes irrelevant.
2. RXRDY is set when data has been transmitted from the internal shifter to the TWIHS_RHR and reset when this data is
read.
General Call
The general call is performed in order to change the address of the slave.
If a GENERAL CALL is detected, GACC is set.
After the detection of general call, decode the commands that follow.
In case of a WRITE command, decode the programming sequence and program a new SADR if the programming
sequence matches.
Figure 29-26 describes the general call access.
Figure 29-26. Master Performs a General Call
0000000 + W
TXD
S
GENERAL CALL
RESET command = 00000110X
WRITE command = 00000100X
A
Reset or write DADD
A
DATA1
A
DATA2
A
New SADR
A
P
New SADR
Programming sequence
GACC
Reset after read
SVACC
Note:
This method allows the user to create a personal programming sequence by choosing the programming bytes and the
number of them. The programming sequence has to be provided to the master.
Clock Stretching
In both Read and Write modes, it may occur that TWIHS_THR/TWIHS_RHR buffer is not filled/emptied before the
transmission/reception of a new character. In this case, to avoid sending/receiving undesired data, a clock
stretching mechanism is implemented.
Note:
Clock stretching can be disabled by setting the SCLWSDIS bit in the TWIHS_SMR. In that case the UNRE and OVRE
flags indicate an underrun (when TWIHS_THR is not filled on time) or an overrun (when TWIHS_RHR is not read on
time).
Clock Stretching in Read Mode
The clock is tied low if the internal shifter is empty and if a STOP or REPEATED START condition was not
detected. It is tied low until the internal shifter is loaded.
Figure 29-27 describes the clock stretching in Read mode.
604
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 29-27. Clock Stretching in Read Mode
TWIHS_THR
S
R
SADR
DATA1
1
DATA0
A
A
DATA0
DATA2
A
DATA1
XXXXXXX
DATA2
NA
S
2
TWCK
CLOCK is tied low by the TWIHS
as long as THR is empty
Write THR
SCLWS
TXRDY
SVACC
SVREAD
As soon as a START is detected
TXCOMP
Ack or Nack from the master
TWIHS_THR is transmitted to the internal shifter
Notes:
1
The data is memorized in TWIHS_THR until a new value is written
2
The clock is stretched after the ACK, the state of TWD is undefined during clock stretching
1. TXRDY is reset when data has been written in the TWIHS_THR to the internal shifter and set when this data has been
acknowledged or non acknowledged.
2. At the end of the read sequence, TXCOMP is set after a STOP or after a REPEATED_START + an address different from
SADR.
3. SCLWS is automatically set when the clock stretching mechanism is started.
Clock Stretching in Write Mode
The clock is tied low if the internal shifter and the TWIHS_RHR is full. If a STOP or REPEATED_START condition
was not detected, it is tied low until TWIHS_RHR is read.
Figure 29-28 describes the clock stretching in Write mode.
Figure 29-28. Clock Stretching in Write Mode
TWCK
CLOCK is tied low by the TWIHS as long as RHR is full
TWD
S
SADR
W
A
DATA0
TWIHS_RHR
A
DATA1
A
DATA2
DATA0 is not read in the RHR
DATA1
NA
S
ADR
DATA2
SCLWS
SCL is stretched after the acknowledge of DATA1
RXRDY
Rd DATA0
Rd DATA1
Rd DATA2
SVACC
SVREAD
TXCOMP
Notes:
As soon as a START is detected
1. At the end of the read sequence, TXCOMP is set after a STOP or after a REPEATED_START + an address different from
SADR.
2. SCLWS is automatically set when the clock stretching mechanism is started and automatically reset when the mechanism is
finished.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
605
Reversal after a Repeated Start
Reversal of Read to Write
The master initiates the communication by a read command and finishes it by a write command.
Figure 29-29 describes the REPEATED START and the reversal from Read mode to Write mode.
Figure 29-29. Repeated Start and Reversal from Read Mode to Write Mode
TWIHS_THR
TWD
DATA0
S
SADR
R
A
DATA0
DATA1
A
DATA1
NA
Sr
SADR
W
A
DATA2
TWIHS_RHR
A
DATA3
DATA2
A
P
DATA3
SVACC
SVREAD
TXRDY
RXRDY
EOSACC
Cleared after read
As soon as a START is detected
TXCOMP
Note:
1. TXCOMP is only set at the end of the transmission. This is because after the REPEATED START, SADR is detected again.
Reversal of Write to Read
The master initiates the communication by a write command and finishes it by a read command. Figure 29-30
describes the REPEATED START and the reversal from Write mode to Read mode.
Figure 29-30. Repeated Start and Reversal from Write Mode to Read Mode
DATA2
TWIHS_THR
TWD
S
SADR
W
A
DATA0
A
TWIHS_RHR
DATA1
DATA0
A
Sr
SADR
R
A
DATA3
DATA2
A
DATA3
NA
P
DATA1
SVACC
SVREAD
TXRDY
RXRDY
EOSACC
TXCOMP
Notes:
29.6.5.5
Read TWIHS_RHR
Cleared after read
As soon as a START is detected
1. In this case, if TWIHS_THR has not been written at the end of the read command, the clock is automatically stretched
before the ACK.
2. TXCOMP is only set at the end of the transmission. This is because after the REPEATED START, SADR is detected again.
Using the Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC) in Slave Mode
The use of the PDC significantly reduces the CPU load.
Data Transmit with the PDC in Slave Mode
The following procedure shows an example to transmit data with PDC.
606
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
1. Initialize the transmit PDC (memory pointers, transfer size, etc.).
2.
Start the transfer by setting the PDC TXTEN bit.
3.
Wait for the PDC ENDTX Flag either by using the polling method or ENDTX interrupt.
4.
Disable the PDC by setting the PDC TXTDIS bit.
5.
(Only if peripheral clock must be disabled) Wait for the TXCOMP flag to be raised in TWIHS_SR.
Data Receive with the PDC in Slave Mode
The following procedure shows an example to transmit data with PDC where the number of characters to receive
is known.
1. Initialize the receive PDC (memory pointers, transfer size, etc.).
2.
Set the PDC RXTEN bit.
3.
Wait for the PDC ENDRX flag either by using polling method or ENDRX interrupt.
4.
Disable the PDC by setting the PDC RXTDIS bit.
5.
(Only if peripheral clock must be disabled) Wait for the TXCOMP flag to be raised in TWIHS_SR.
29.6.5.6
High-Speed Slave Mode
High-speed mode is enabled when a one is written to the HSEN bit in the TWIHS_CR. Furthermore, the analog
pad filter must be enabled, a one must be written to the PADFEN bit in the TWIHS_FILTR and the FILT bit must be
cleared. TWIHS High-speed mode operation is similar to TWIHS operation with the following exceptions:
1. A master code is received first at normal speed before entering High-speed mode period.
2.
When TWIHS High-speed mode is active, clock stretching is only allowed after acknowledge (ACK), notacknowledge (NACK), START (S) or REPEATED START (Sr) (as consequence OVF may happen).
TWIHS High-speed mode allows transfers of up to 3.4 Mbit/s.
The TWIHS slave in High-speed mode requires that slave clock stretching is disabled (SCLWSDIS bit at ‘1’). The
peripheral clock must run at a minimum of 11 MHz.
Note:
Note:
When slave clock stretching is disabled, the TWIHS_RHR must always be read before receiving the next data
(MASTER write frame). It is strongly recommended to use either the polling method on the RXRDY flag in TWIHS_SR,
or the PDC. If the receive is managed by an interrupt, the TWIHS interrupt priority must be set to the right level and its
latency minimized to avoid receive overrun.
When slave clock stretching is disabled, the TWIHS_THR must be filled with the first data to send before the beginning
of the frame (MASTER read frame). It is strongly recommended to use either the polling method on the TXRDY flag in
TWIHS_SR, or the PDC. If the transmit is managed by an interrupt, the TWIHS interrupt priority must be set to the
right level and its latency minimized to avoid transmit underrun.
Read/Write Operation
A TWIHS high-speed frame always begins with the following sequence:
1. START condition (S)
2.
Master Code (0000 1XXX)
3.
Not-acknowledge (NACK)
When the TWIHS is programmed in Slave mode and TWIHS High-speed mode is activated, master code matching
is activated and internal timings are set to match the TWIHS High-speed mode requirements.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
607
Figure 29-31. High-Speed Mode Read/Write
F/S Mode
S
MASTER CODE
HS Mode
NA
Sr
SADR
R/W
A
F/S Mode
DATA
F/S Mode
S
MASTER CODE
A/NA
P
F/S Mode
HS Mode
NA
Sr
SADR
R/W
A
DATA
A/NA
Sr
SADR
P
Usage
TWIHS High-speed mode usage is the same as the standard TWIHS (See Section 29.6.3.10 ”Read/Write
Flowcharts”).
29.6.5.7
Asynchronous Partial Wake-up (SleepWalking)
The TWIHS includes an asynchronous start condition detector. It is capable of waking the device up from a Sleep
mode upon an address match (and optionally an additional data match), including Sleep modes where the TWIHS
peripheral clock is stopped.
After detecting the START condition on the bus, the TWIHS stretches TWCK until the TWIHS peripheral clock has
started. The time required for starting the TWIHS depends on which Sleep mode the device is in. After the TWIHS
peripheral clock has started, the TWIHS releases its TWCK stretching and receives one byte of data (slave
address) on the bus. At this time, only a limited part of the device, including the TWIHS module, receives a clock,
thus saving power. If the address phase causes a TWIHS address match (and, optionally, if the first data byte
causes data match as well), the entire device is waked and normal TWIHS address matching actions are
performed. Normal TWIHS transfer then follows. If the TWIHS is not addressed (or if the optional data match fails),
the TWIHS peripheral clock is automatically stopped and the device returns to its original Sleep mode.
The TWIHS has the capability to match on more than one address. The SADR1EN, SADR2EN and SADR3EN bits
in TWIHS_SMR enable address matching on additional addresses which can be configured through SADR1,
SADR2 and SADR3 fields in the TWIHS_SWMR. The SleepWalking matching process can be extended to the first
received data byte if DATAMEN bit in TWIHS_SMR is set and, in this case, a complete matching includes address
matching and first received data matching. The field DATAM in TWIHS_SWMR configures the data to match on
the first received byte.
When the system is in Active mode and the TWIHS enters Asynchronous Partial Wake-up mode, the flag SVACC
must be programmed as the unique source of the TWIHS interrupt and the data match comparison must be
disabled.
When the system exits Wait mode as the result of a matching condition, the SVACC flag is used to determine if the
TWIHS is the source of exit.
608
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 29-32. Address Match Only (Data Matching Disabled)
Address Matching Area
Clock
Stretching
SADR
S
PClk
R/W
A
DATA
A/NA
DATA
A/NA
P
PClk
Startup
PClk_request
SystemWakeUp_req
Figure 29-33. No Address Match (Data Matching Disabled)
Address Matching Area
Clock
Stretching
S
PClk
SADR
R/W
NA
P
PClk
Startup
PClk_request
SystemWakeUp_req
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
609
Figure 29-34. Address Match and Data Match (Data Matching Enabled)
Address Matching + Data Matching Area
Clock
Stretching
SADR
S
PClk
W
A
DATA
A
DATA
A/NA
P
NA
DATA
NA
P
PClk
Startup
PClk_request
SystemWakeUp_req
Figure 29-35. Address Match and No Data Match (Data Matching Enabled)
Address Matching + Data Matching Area
Clock
Stretching
S
PClk
SADR
W
A
DATA
PClk
Startup
PClk_request
SystemWakeUp_req
29.6.5.8
Slave Read Write Flowcharts
The flowchart shown in Figure 29-36 gives an example of read and write operations in Slave mode. A polling or
interrupt method can be used to check the status bits. The interrupt method requires that TWIHS_IER be
configured first.
610
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 29-36. Read Write Flowchart in Slave Mode
Set the SLAVE mode:
SADR + MSDIS + SVEN
Read Status Register
SVACC = 1 ?
GACC = 1 ?
No
No
No
EOSACC = 1 ?
SVREAD = 1 ?
TXRDY= 1 ?
No
No
Write in TWIHS_THR
No
TXCOMP = 1 ?
RXRDY= 1 ?
No
END
Read TWIHS_RHR
GENERAL CALL TREATMENT
Decoding of the
programming sequence
Prog seq
OK ?
No
Change SADR
29.6.6 TWIHS Comparison Function on Received Character
The comparison function differs if asynchronous partial wake-up (SleepWalking) is enabled or not.
If asynchronous partial wake-up is disabled (see the section “Power Management Controller (PMC)”), the TWIHS
can extend the address matching on up to three slave addresses. The SADR1EN, SADR2EN and SADR3EN bits
in TWIHS_SMR enable address matching on additional addresses which can be configured through SADR1,
SADR2 and SADR3 fields in the TWIHS_SWMR. The DATAMEN bit in the TWIHS_SMR has no effect.
The SVACC bit is set when there is a comparison match with the received slave address.
29.6.7 Register Write Protection
To prevent any single software error from corrupting TWIHS behavior, certain registers in the address space can
be write-protected by setting the WPEN bit in the TWIHS Write Protection Mode Register (TWIHS_WPMR).
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
611
If a write access to a write-protected register is detected, the WPVS bit in the TWIHS Write Protection Status
Register (TWIHS_WPSR) is set and the field WPVSRC indicates the register in which the write access has been
attempted.
The WPVS bit is automatically cleared after reading the TWIHS_WPSR.
The following register(s) can be write-protected:
612
TWIHS Slave Mode Register
TWIHS Clock Waveform Generator Register
TWIHS SleepWalking Matching Register
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
29.7
Two-wire Interface High Speed (TWIHS) User Interface
Table 29-7.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x00
Control Register
TWIHS_CR
Write-only
–
0x04
Master Mode Register
TWIHS_MMR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x08
Slave Mode Register
TWIHS_SMR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x0C
Internal Address Register
TWIHS_IADR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x10
Clock Waveform Generator Register
TWIHS_CWGR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x14–0x1C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x20
Status Register
TWIHS_SR
Read-only
0x0300F009
0x24
Interrupt Enable Register
TWIHS_IER
Write-only
–
0x28
Interrupt Disable Register
TWIHS_IDR
Write-only
–
0x2C
Interrupt Mask Register
TWIHS_IMR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x30
Receive Holding Register
TWIHS_RHR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x34
Transmit Holding Register
TWIHS_THR
Write-only
0x00000000
0x38
Reserved
–
–
–
0x3C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x40
Reserved
–
–
–
0x44
Filter Register
TWIHS_FILTR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x48
Reserved
–
–
–
0x4C
SleepWalking Matching Register
TWIHS_SWMR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x50–0xCC
Reserved
–
–
–
0xD0
Reserved
–
–
–
0xD4–0xE0
Reserved
–
–
–
0xE4
Write Protection Mode Register
TWIHS_WPMR
Read/Write
0x00000000
Write Protection Status Register
TWIHS_WPSR
Read-only
0x00000000
Reserved
–
–
–
Reserved for PDC registers
–
–
–
0xE8
0xEC–0xFC
(1)
0x100–0x128
Note:
1. All unlisted offset values are considered as “reserved”.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
613
29.7.1 TWIHS Control Register
Name:
TWIHS_CR
Address:
0x40018000
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
FIFODIS
28
FIFOEN
27
–
26
LOCKCLR
25
–
24
THRCLR
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
ACMDIS
16
ACMEN
15
CLEAR
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
HSDIS
8
HSEN
7
SWRST
6
QUICK
5
SVDIS
4
SVEN
3
MSDIS
2
MSEN
1
STOP
0
START
• START: Send a START Condition
0: No effect.
1: A frame beginning with a START bit is transmitted according to the features defined in the TWIHS Master Mode Register
(TWIHS_MMR).
This action is necessary when the TWIHS peripheral needs to read data from a slave. When configured in Master mode
with a write operation, a frame is sent as soon as the user writes a character in the Transmit Holding Register
(TWIHS_THR).
• STOP: Send a STOP Condition
0: No effect.
1: STOP condition is sent just after completing the current byte transmission in Master Read mode.
– In single data byte master read, both START and STOP must be set.
– In multiple data bytes master read, the STOP must be set after the last data received but one.
– In Master Read mode, if a NACK bit is received, the STOP is automatically performed.
– In master data write operation, a STOP condition will be sent after the transmission of the current data is
finished.
• MSEN: TWIHS Master Mode Enabled
0: No effect.
1: Enables the Master mode (MSDIS must be written to 0).
Note: Switching from Slave to Master mode is only permitted when TXCOMP = 1.
• MSDIS: TWIHS Master Mode Disabled
0: No effect.
1: The Master mode is disabled, all pending data is transmitted. The shifter and holding characters (if it contains data) are
transmitted in case of write operation. In read operation, the character being transferred must be completely received
before disabling.
614
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
• SVEN: TWIHS Slave Mode Enabled
0: No effect.
1: Enables the Slave mode (SVDIS must be written to 0).
Note: Switching from Master to Slave mode is only permitted when TXCOMP = 1.
• SVDIS: TWIHS Slave Mode Disabled
0: No effect.
1: The Slave mode is disabled. The shifter and holding characters (if it contains data) are transmitted in case of read operation. In write operation, the character being transferred must be completely received before disabling.
• QUICK: SMBus Quick Command
0: No effect.
1: If Master mode is enabled, a SMBus Quick Command is sent.
• SWRST: Software Reset
0: No effect.
1: Equivalent to a system reset.
• HSEN: TWIHS High-Speed Mode Enabled
0: No effect.
1: High-speed mode enabled.
• HSDIS: TWIHS High-Speed Mode Disabled
0: No effect.
1: High-speed mode disabled.
• CLEAR: Bus CLEAR Command
0: No effect.
1: If Master mode is enabled, sends a bus clear command.
• ACMEN: Alternative Command Mode Enable
0: No effect.
1: Alternative Command mode enabled.
• ACMDIS: Alternative Command Mode Disable
0: No effect.
1: Alternative Command mode disabled.
• THRCLR: Transmit Holding Register Clear
0: No effect.
1: Clears the Transmit Holding Register and set TXRDY, TXCOMP flags.
• LOCKCLR: Lock Clear
0: No effect.
1: Clears the TWIHS FSM lock.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
615
• FIFOEN: FIFO Enable
0: No effect.
1: Enables the Transmit and Receive FIFOs
• FIFODIS: FIFO Disable
0: No effect.
1: Disables the Transmit and Receive FIFOs
616
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
29.7.2 TWIHS Master Mode Register
Name:
TWIHS_MMR
Address:
0x40018004
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
21
20
19
DADR
18
17
16
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
MREAD
11
–
10
–
9
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
8
IADRSZ
0
–
• IADRSZ: Internal Device Address Size
Value
Name
Description
0
NONE
No internal device address
1
1_BYTE
One-byte internal device address
2
2_BYTE
Two-byte internal device address
3
3_BYTE
Three-byte internal device address
• MREAD: Master Read Direction
0: Master write direction.
1: Master read direction.
• DADR: Device Address
The device address is used to access slave devices in Read or Write mode. These bits are only used in Master mode.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
617
29.7.3 TWIHS Slave Mode Register
Name:
TWIHS_SMR
Address:
0x40018008
Access:
Read/Write
31
DATAMEN
30
SADR3EN
29
SADR2EN
28
SADR1EN
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
21
20
19
SADR
18
17
16
15
–
14
13
12
11
MASK
10
9
8
7
–
6
SCLWSDIS
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the TWIHS Write Protection Mode Register.
• SCLWSDIS: Clock Wait State Disable
0: No effect.
1: Clock stretching disabled in Slave mode, OVRE and UNRE indicate an overrun/underrun.
• MASK: Slave Address Mask
A mask can be applied on the slave device address in Slave mode in order to allow multiple address answer. For each bit
of the MASK field set to 1, the corresponding SADR bit is masked.
If the MASK field value is 0, no mask is applied to the SADR field.
• SADR: Slave Address
The slave device address is used in Slave mode in order to be accessed by master devices in Read or Write mode.
SADR must be programmed before enabling the Slave mode or after a general call. Writes at other times have no effect.
• SADR1EN: Slave Address 1 Enable
0: Slave address 1 matching is disabled.
1: Slave address 1 matching is enabled.
• SADR2EN: Slave Address 2 Enable
0: Slave address 2 matching is disabled.
1: Slave address 2 matching is enabled.
• SADR3EN: Slave Address 3 Enable
0: Slave address 3 matching is disabled.
1: Slave address 3 matching is enabled.
• DATAMEN: Data Matching Enable
0: Data matching on first received data is disabled.
1: Data matching on first received data is enabled.
618
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
29.7.4 TWIHS Internal Address Register
Name:
TWIHS_IADR
Address:
0x4001800C
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
IADR
15
14
13
12
IADR
7
6
5
4
IADR
• IADR: Internal Address
0, 1, 2 or 3 bytes depending on IADRSZ.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
619
29.7.5 TWIHS Clock Waveform Generator Register
Name:
TWIHS_CWGR
Address:
0x40018010
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
27
26
HOLD
25
24
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
17
CKDIV
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CHDIV
7
6
5
4
CLDIV
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the TWIHS Write Protection Mode Register.
TWIHS_CWGR is used in Master mode only.
• CLDIV: Clock Low Divider
The SCL low period is defined as follows:
tlow = ((CLDIV × 2CKDIV) + 3) × tperipheral clock
• CHDIV: Clock High Divider
The SCL high period is defined as follows:
thigh = ((CHDIV × 2CKDIV) + 3) × tperipheral clock
• CKDIV: Clock Divider
The CKDIV is used to increase both SCL high and low periods.
• HOLD: TWD Hold Time Versus TWCK Falling
If High-speed mode is selected TWD is internally modified on the TWCK falling edge to meet the I2C specified maximum
hold time, else if High-speed mode is not configured TWD is kept unchanged after TWCK falling edge for a period of
(HOLD + 3) × tperipheral clock.
620
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
29.7.6 TWIHS Status Register
Name:
TWIHS_SR
Address:
0x40018020
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
SDA
24
SCL
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
TXBUFE
14
RXBUFF
13
ENDTX
12
ENDRX
11
EOSACC
10
SCLWS
9
ARBLST
8
NACK
7
UNRE
6
OVRE
5
GACC
4
SVACC
3
SVREAD
2
TXRDY
1
RXRDY
0
TXCOMP
• TXCOMP: Transmission Completed (cleared by writing TWIHS_THR)
TXCOMP used in Master mode:
0: During the length of the current frame.
1: When both holding register and internal shifter are empty and STOP condition has been sent.
TXCOMP behavior in Master mode can be seen in Figure 29-6 and in Figure 29-8.
TXCOMP used in Slave mode:
0: As soon as a START is detected.
1: After a STOP or a REPEATED START + an address different from SADR is detected.
TXCOMP behavior in Slave mode can be seen in Figure 29-27, Figure 29-28, Figure 29-29 and Figure 29-30.
• RXRDY: Receive Holding Register Ready (cleared by reading TWIHS_RHR)
0: No character has been received since the last TWIHS_RHR read operation.
1: A byte has been received in the TWIHS_RHR since the last read.
RXRDY behavior in Master mode can be seen in Figure 29-7, Figure 29-8 and Figure 29-9.
RXRDY behavior in Slave mode can be seen in Figure 29-25, Figure 29-28, Figure 29-29 and Figure 29-30.
• TXRDY: Transmit Holding Register Ready (cleared by writing TWIHS_THR)
TXRDY used in Master mode:
0: The transmit holding register has not been transferred into the internal shifter. Set to 0 when writing into TWIHS_THR.
1: As soon as a data byte is transferred from TWIHS_THR to internal shifter or if a NACK error is detected, TXRDY is set
at the same time as TXCOMP and NACK. TXRDY is also set when MSEN is set (enables TWIHS).
TXRDY behavior in Master mode can be seen in Figure 29-4, Figure 29-5 and Figure 29-6.
TXRDY used in Slave mode:
0: As soon as data is written in the TWIHS_THR, until this data has been transmitted and acknowledged (ACK or NACK).
1: Indicates that the TWIHS_THR is empty and that data has been transmitted and acknowledged.
If TXRDY is high and if a NACK has been detected, the transmission is stopped. Thus when TRDY = NACK = 1, the user
must not fill TWIHS_THR to avoid losing it.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
621
TXRDY behavior in Slave mode can be seen in Figure 29-24, Figure 29-27, Figure 29-29 and Figure 29-30.
• SVREAD: Slave Read
This bit is used in Slave mode only. When SVACC is low (no slave access has been detected) SVREAD is irrelevant.
0: Indicates that a write access is performed by a master.
1: Indicates that a read access is performed by a master.
SVREAD behavior can be seen in Figure 29-24, Figure 29-25, Figure 29-29 and Figure 29-30.
• SVACC: Slave Access
This bit is used in Slave mode only.
0: TWIHS is not addressed. SVACC is automatically cleared after a NACK or a STOP condition is detected.
1: Indicates that the address decoding sequence has matched (A master has sent SADR). SVACC remains high until a
NACK or a STOP condition is detected.
SVACC behavior can be seen in Figure 29-24, Figure 29-25, Figure 29-29 and Figure 29-30.
• GACC: General Call Access (cleared on read)
This bit is used in Slave mode only.
0: No general call has been detected.
1: A general call has been detected. After the detection of general call, if need be, the user may acknowledge this access
and decode the following bytes and respond according to the value of the bytes.
GACC behavior can be seen in Figure 29-26.
• OVRE: Overrun Error (cleared on read)
This bit is used only if clock stretching is disabled.
0: TWIHS_RHR has not been loaded while RXRDY was set.
1: TWIHS_RHR has been loaded while RXRDY was set. Reset by read in TWIHS_SR when TXCOMP is set.
• UNRE: Underrun Error (cleared on read)
This bit is used only if clock stretching is disabled.
0: TWIHS_THR has been filled on time.
1: TWIHS_THR has not been filled on time.
• NACK: Not Acknowledged (cleared on read)
NACK used in Master mode:
0: Each data byte has been correctly received by the far-end side TWIHS slave component.
1: A data or address byte has not been acknowledged by the slave component. Set at the same time as TXCOMP.
NACK used in Slave Read mode:
0: Each data byte has been correctly received by the master.
1: In Read mode, a data byte has not been acknowledged by the master. When NACK is set, the user must not fill
TWIHS_THR even if TXRDY is set, because it means that the master stops the data transfer or re-initiate it.
Note: in Slave Write mode, all data are acknowledged by the TWIHS.
622
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
• ARBLST: Arbitration Lost (cleared on read)
This bit is used in Master mode only.
0: Arbitration won.
1: Arbitration lost. Another master of the TWIHS bus has won the multi-master arbitration. TXCOMP is set at the same
time.
• SCLWS: Clock Wait State
This bit is used in Slave mode only.
0: The clock is not stretched.
1: The clock is stretched. TWIHS_THR / TWIHS_RHR buffer is not filled / emptied before the transmission / reception of a
new character.
SCLWS behavior can be seen in Figure 29-27 and Figure 29-28.
• EOSACC: End Of Slave Access (cleared on read)
This bit is used in Slave mode only.
0: A slave access is being performing.
1: The Slave Access is finished. End Of Slave Access is automatically set as soon as SVACC is reset.
EOSACC behavior can be seen in Figure 29-29 and Figure 29-30.
• ENDRX: End of RX Buffer (cleared by writing TWIHS_RCR or TWIHS_RNCR)
0: The Receive Counter Register has not reached 0 since the last write in TWIHS_RCR or TWIHS_RNCR.
1: The Receive Counter Register has reached 0 since the last write in TWIHS_RCR or TWIHS_RNCR.
• ENDTX: End of TX Buffer (cleared by writing TWIHS_TCR or TWIHS_TNCR)
0: The Transmit Counter Register has not reached 0 since the last write in TWIHS_TCR or TWIHS_TNCR.
1: The Transmit Counter Register has reached 0 since the last write in TWIHS_TCR or TWIHS_TNCR.
• RXBUFF: RX Buffer Full (cleared by writing TWIHS_RCR or TWIHS_RNCR)
0: TWIHS_RCR or TWIHS_RNCR have a value other than 0.
1: Both TWIHS_RCR and TWIHS_RNCR have a value of 0.
• TXBUFE: TX Buffer Empty (cleared by writing TWIHS_TCR or TWIHS_TNCR)
0: TWIHS_TCR or TWIHS_TNCR have a value other than 0.
1: Both TWIHS_TCR and TWIHS_TNCR have a value of 0.
• SCL: SCL Line Value
0: SCL line sampled value is ‘0’.
1: SCL line sampled value is ‘1.’
• SDA: SDA Line Value
0: SDA line sampled value is ‘0’.
1: SDA line sampled value is ‘1’.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
623
29.7.7 TWIHS Filter Register
Name:
TWIHS_FILTR
Address:
0x40018044
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
9
THRES
8
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
PADFCFG
1
PADFEN
0
FILT
• FILT: RX Digital Filter
0: No filtering applied on TWIHS inputs.
1: TWIHS input filtering is active (only in Standard and Fast modes)
Note: TWIHS digital input filtering follows a majority decision based on three samples from SDA/SCL lines at peripheral clock frequency.
• PADFEN: PAD Filter Enable
0: PAD analog filter is disabled.
1: PAD analog filter is enabled. (The analog filter must be enabled if High-speed mode is enabled.)
• PADFCFG: PAD Filter Config
See the electrical characteristics section for filter configuration details.
• THRES: Digital Filter Threshold
0: No filtering applied on TWIHS inputs.
1–7: Maximum pulse width of spikes to be suppressed by the input filter, defined in peripheral clock cycles.
624
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
29.7.8 TWIHS Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
TWIHS_IER
Address:
0x40018024
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
TXBUFE
14
RXBUFF
13
ENDTX
12
ENDRX
11
EOSACC
10
SCL_WS
9
ARBLST
8
NACK
7
UNRE
6
OVRE
5
GACC
4
SVACC
3
–
2
TXRDY
1
RXRDY
0
TXCOMP
The following configuration values are valid for all listed bit names of this register:
0: No effect.
1: Enables the corresponding interrupt.
• TXCOMP: Transmission Completed Interrupt Enable
• RXRDY: Receive Holding Register Ready Interrupt Enable
• TXRDY: Transmit Holding Register Ready Interrupt Enable
• SVACC: Slave Access Interrupt Enable
• GACC: General Call Access Interrupt Enable
• OVRE: Overrun Error Interrupt Enable
• UNRE: Underrun Error Interrupt Enable
• NACK: Not Acknowledge Interrupt Enable
• ARBLST: Arbitration Lost Interrupt Enable
• SCL_WS: Clock Wait State Interrupt Enable
• EOSACC: End Of Slave Access Interrupt Enable
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Enable
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Buffer Interrupt Enable
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Enable
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Enable
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
625
29.7.9 TWIHS Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
TWIHS_IDR
Address:
0x40018028
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
TXBUFE
14
RXBUFF
13
ENDTX
12
ENDRX
11
EOSACC
10
SCL_WS
9
ARBLST
8
NACK
7
UNRE
6
OVRE
5
GACC
4
SVACC
3
–
2
TXRDY
1
RXRDY
0
TXCOMP
The following configuration values are valid for all listed bit names of this register:
0: No effect.
1: Disables the corresponding interrupt.
• TXCOMP: Transmission Completed Interrupt Disable
• RXRDY: Receive Holding Register Ready Interrupt Disable
• TXRDY: Transmit Holding Register Ready Interrupt Disable
• SVACC: Slave Access Interrupt Disable
• GACC: General Call Access Interrupt Disable
• OVRE: Overrun Error Interrupt Disable
• UNRE: Underrun Error Interrupt Disable
• NACK: Not Acknowledge Interrupt Disable
• ARBLST: Arbitration Lost Interrupt Disable
• SCL_WS: Clock Wait State Interrupt Disable
• EOSACC: End Of Slave Access Interrupt Disable
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Disable
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Buffer Interrupt Disable
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Disable
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Disable
626
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
29.7.10 TWIHS Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
TWIHS_IMR
Address:
0x4001802C
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
TXBUFE
14
RXBUFF
13
ENDTX
12
ENDRX
11
EOSACC
10
SCL_WS
9
ARBLST
8
NACK
7
UNRE
6
OVRE
5
GACC
4
SVACC
3
–
2
TXRDY
1
RXRDY
0
TXCOMP
The following configuration values are valid for all listed bit names of this register:
0: The corresponding interrupt is disabled.
1: The corresponding interrupt is enabled.
• TXCOMP: Transmission Completed Interrupt Mask
• RXRDY: Receive Holding Register Ready Interrupt Mask
• TXRDY: Transmit Holding Register Ready Interrupt Mask
• SVACC: Slave Access Interrupt Mask
• GACC: General Call Access Interrupt Mask
• OVRE: Overrun Error Interrupt Mask
• UNRE: Underrun Error Interrupt Mask
• NACK: Not Acknowledge Interrupt Mask
• ARBLST: Arbitration Lost Interrupt Mask
• SCL_WS: Clock Wait State Interrupt Mask
• EOSACC: End Of Slave Access Interrupt Mask
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Mask
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Buffer Interrupt Mask
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Mask
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Mask
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
627
29.7.11 TWIHS Receive Holding Register
Name:
TWIHS_RHR
Address:
0x40018030
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RXDATA
• RXDATA: Master or Slave Receive Holding Data
628
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
29.7.12 TWIHS SleepWalking Matching Register
Name:
TWIHS_SWMR
Address:
0x4001804C
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
DATAM
23
–
22
21
20
19
SADR3
18
17
16
15
–
14
13
12
11
SADR2
10
9
8
7
–
6
5
4
3
SADR1
2
1
0
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the TWIHS Write Protection Mode Register.
• SADR1: Slave Address 1
Slave address 1. The TWIHS module matches on this additional address if SADR1EN bit is enabled.
• SADR2: Slave Address 2
Slave address 2. The TWIHS module matches on this additional address if SADR2EN bit is enabled.
• SADR3: Slave Address 3
Slave address 3. The TWIHS module matches on this additional address if SADR3EN bit is enabled.
• DATAM: Data Match
The TWIHS module extends the SleepWalking matching process to the first received data, comparing it with DATAM if
DATAMEN bit is enabled.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
629
29.7.13 TWIHS Transmit Holding Register
Name:
TWIHS_THR
Address:
0x40018034
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXDATA
• TXDATA: Master or Slave Transmit Holding Data
630
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
29.7.14 TWIHS FIFO Level Register
Name:
TWIHS_FLR
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
–
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
–
–
RXFL
TXFL
• TXFL: Transmit FIFO Level
0: There is no data in the Transmit FIFO
1––: Indicates the number of DATA in the Transmit FIFO
• RXFL: Receive FIFO Level
0: There is no unread data in the Receive FIFO
1––: Indicates the number of unread DATA in the Receive FIFO
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
631
29.7.15 TWIHS Write Protection Mode Register
Name:
TWIHS_WPMR
Address:
0x400180E4
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
WPEN
WPKEY
23
22
21
20
WPKEY
15
14
13
12
WPKEY
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
• WPEN: Write Protection Enable
0: Disables the write protection if WPKEY corresponds to 0x545749 (“TWI” in ASCII).
1: Enables the write protection if WPKEY corresponds to 0x545749 (“TWI” in ASCII).
See Section 29.6.7 ”Register Write Protection” for the list of registers that can be write-protected.
• WPKEY: Write Protection Key
Value
0x545749
632
Name
PASSWD
Description
Writing any other value in this field aborts the write operation of the WPEN bit.
Always reads as 0
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
29.7.16 TWIHS Write Protection Status Register
Name:
TWIHS_WPSR
Address:
0x400180E8
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
WPVS
WPVSRC
23
22
21
20
WPVSRC
15
14
13
12
WPVSRC
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
• WPVS: Write Protection Violation Status
0: No write protection violation has occurred since the last read of the TWIHS_WPSR.
1: A write protection violation has occurred since the last read of the TWIHS_WPSR. If this violation is an unauthorized
attempt to write a protected register, the associated violation is reported into field WPVSRC.
• WPVSRC: Write Protection Violation Source
When WPVS = 1, WPVSRC indicates the register address offset at which a write access has been attempted.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
633
30.
Two-wire Interface (TWI)
30.1
Description
The Atmel Two-wire Interface (TWI) interconnects components on a unique two-wire bus, made up of one clock
line and one data line with speeds of up to 400 Kbits per second, based on a byte-oriented transfer format. It can
be used with any Atmel Two-wire Interface bus Serial EEPROM and I²C compatible device such as a Real Time
Clock (RTC), Dot Matrix/Graphic LCD Controllers and temperature sensor. The TWI is programmable as a master
or a slave with sequential or single-byte access. Multiple master capability is supported.
A configurable baud rate generator permits the output data rate to be adapted to a wide range of core clock
frequencies.
Table 30-1 lists the compatibility level of the Atmel Two-wire Interface in Master mode and a full I2C compatible
device.
Atmel TWI Compatibility with I2C Standard
Table 30-1.
I2C Standard
Atmel TWI
Standard Mode Speed (100 kHz)
Supported
Fast Mode Speed (400 kHz)
Supported
7- or 10-bit Slave Addressing
Supported
(1)
START byte
Not Supported
Repeated Start (Sr) Condition
Supported
ACK and NACK Management
Supported
Slope Control and Input Filtering (Fast mode)
Not Supported
Clock Stretching/Synchronization
Supported
Multi Master Capability
Supported
Note:
30.2
1.
Embedded Characteristics
Compatible with Atmel Two-wire Interface Serial Memory and I2C Compatible Devices(1)
One, Two or Three Bytes for Slave Address
Sequential Read/Write Operations
Master, Multi-master and Slave Mode Operation
Bit Rate: Up to 400 Kbit/s
General Call Supported in Slave Mode
Connection to Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC) Channel Capabilities Optimizes Data Transfers
̶
Note:
634
START + b000000001 + Ack + Sr
One Channel for the Receiver, One Channel for the Transmitter
Register Write Protection
1.
See Table 30-1 for details on compatibility with I²C Standard.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
30.3
List of Abbreviations
Table 30-2.
30.4
Abbreviations
Abbreviation
Description
TWI
Two-wire Interface
A
Acknowledge
NA
Non Acknowledge
P
Stop
S
Start
Sr
Repeated Start
SADR
Slave Address
ADR
Any address except SADR
R
Read
W
Write
Block Diagram
Figure 30-1.
Block Diagram
Bus clock
Peripheral Bridge
TWCK
PIO
PMC
Peripheral
clock
TWD
Two-wire Interface
TWI
Interrupt
30.5
Interrupt
Controller
I/O Lines Description
Table 30-3.
I/O Lines Description
Name
Description
Type
TWD
Two-wire Serial Data (drives external serial data line – SDA)
Input/Output
TWCK
Two-wire Serial Clock (drives external serial clock line – SCL)
Input/Output
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
635
30.6
Product Dependencies
30.6.1 I/O Lines
Both TWD and TWCK are bidirectional lines, connected to a positive supply voltage via a current source or pull-up
resistor. When the bus is free, both lines are high. The output stages of devices connected to the bus must have
an open-drain or open-collector to perform the wired-AND function.
TWD and TWCK pins may be multiplexed with PIO lines. To enable the TWI, the user must program the PIO
Controller to dedicate TWD and TWCK as peripheral lines.
The user must not program TWD and TWCK as open-drain. This is already done by the hardware.
Table 30-4.
I/O Lines
Instance
Signal
I/O Line
Peripheral
TWI1
TWCK1
PB9
A
TWI1
TWCK1
PB11
A
TWI1
TWD1
PB8
A
TWI1
TWD1
PB10
A
TWI2
TWCK2
PB1
B
TWI2
TWCK2
PB11
B
TWI2
TWD2
PB0
B
TWI2
TWD2
PB10
B
30.6.2 Power Management
The TWI may be clocked through the Power Management Controller (PMC), thus the user must first configure the
PMC to enable the TWI clock.
30.6.3 Interrupt Sources
The TWI has an interrupt line connected to the Interrupt Controller. In order to handle interrupts, the Interrupt
Controller must be programmed before configuring the TWI.
Table 30-5.
30.7
Peripheral IDs
Instance
ID
TWI1
20
TWI2
22
Functional Description
30.7.1 Transfer Format
The data put on the TWD line must be 8 bits long. Data is transferred MSB first; each byte must be followed by an
acknowledgement. The number of bytes per transfer is unlimited (see Figure 30-3).
Each transfer begins with a START condition and terminates with a STOP condition (see Figure 30-2).
636
A high-to-low transition on the TWD line while TWCK is high defines the START condition.
A low-to-high transition on the TWD line while TWCK is high defines the STOP condition.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 30-2.
START and STOP Conditions
TWD
TWCK
Start
Figure 30-3.
Stop
Transfer Format
TWD
TWCK
Start
Address
R/W
Ack
Data
Ack
Data
Ack
Stop
30.7.2 Modes of Operation
The TWI has different modes of operations:
Master transmitter mode
Master receiver mode
Multi-master transmitter mode
Multi-master receiver mode
Slave transmitter mode
Slave receiver mode
These modes are described in the following sections.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
637
30.7.3 Master Mode
30.7.3.1
Definition
The master is the device that starts a transfer, generates a clock and stops it.
30.7.3.2
Programming Master Mode
The following fields must be programmed before entering Master mode:
1. TWI_MMR.DADR (+ IADRSZ + IADR if a 10-bit device is addressed): The device address is used to
access slave devices in Read or Write mode.
2.
TWI_CWGR.CKDIV + CHDIV + CLDIV: Clock waveform.
3.
TWI_CR.SVDIS: Disables the Slave mode
4.
TWI_CR.MSEN: Enables the Master mode
Note:
30.7.3.3
If the TWI is already in Master mode, the device address (DADR) can be configured without disabling the Master
mode.
Master Transmitter Mode
After the master initiates a START condition when writing into the Transmit Holding register (TWI_THR), it sends a
7-bit slave address, configured in the Master Mode register (DADR in TWI_MMR), to notify the slave device. The
bit following the slave address indicates the transfer direction—0 in this case (MREAD = 0 in TWI_MMR).
The TWI transfers require the slave to acknowledge each received byte. During the acknowledge clock pulse (9th
pulse), the master releases the data line (HIGH), enabling the slave to pull it down in order to generate the
acknowledge. If the slave does not acknowledge the byte, then the Not Acknowledge flag (NACK) is set in the TWI
Status Register (TWI_SR) of the master and a STOP condition is sent. The NACK flag must be cleared by reading
the TWI Status Register (TWI_SR) before the next write into the TWI Transmit Holding Register (TWI_THR). As
with the other status bits, an interrupt can be generated if enabled in the Interrupt Enable register (TWI_IER). If the
slave acknowledges the byte, the data written in the TWI_THR is then shifted in the internal shifter and transferred.
When an acknowledge is detected, the TXRDY bit is set until a new write in the TWI_THR.
TXRDY is used as Transmit Ready for the PDC transmit channel.
When no more data is written into the TWI_THR, the master generates a STOP condition to end the transfer. A
TXCOMP bit value of one in the TWI_SR indicates that the transfer has completed. See Figure 30-4, Figure 30-5,
and Figure 30-6.
To clear the TXRDY flag, first set the bit TWI_CR.MSDIS, then set the bit TWI_CR.MSEN.
Figure 30-4.
Master Write with One Data Byte
TWD
S
DADR
W
A
DATA
A
P
TXCOMP
TXRDY
Write THR (DATA)
638
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
STOP sent automaticaly
(ACK received and TXRDY = 1)
Figure 30-5.
Master Write with Multiple Data Byte
S
TWD
DADR
W
A
DATA n
A
DATA n+5
A
DATA n+x
A
P
TXCOMP
TXRDY
Write THR (Data n)
Figure 30-6.
TWD S
Write THR (Data n+1)
Write THR (Data n+x)
Last data sent
STOP sent automaticaly
(ACK received and TXRDY = 1)
Master Write with One Byte Internal Address and Multiple Data Bytes
DADR
W
A
IADR(7:0)
A
DATA n
A
DATA n+5
A
DATA n+x
A
P
TXCOMP
TXRDY
Write THR (Data n)
30.7.3.4
Write THR (Data n+1)
Write THR (Data n+x) STOP sent automaticaly
Last data sent (ACK received and TXRDY = 1)
Master Receiver Mode
The read sequence begins by setting the START bit. After the START condition has been sent, the master sends
a 7-bit slave address to notify the slave device. The bit following the slave address indicates the transfer
direction—1 in this case (MREAD = 1 in TWI_MMR). During the acknowledge clock pulse (9th pulse), the master
releases the data line (HIGH), enabling the slave to pull it down in order to generate the acknowledge. The master
polls the data line during this clock pulse and sets the NACK bit in the TWI_SR if the slave does not acknowledge
the byte.
If an acknowledge is received, the master is then ready to receive data from the slave. After data has been
received, the master sends an acknowledge condition to notify the slave that the data has been received except
for the last data. See . When the RXRDY bit is set in the TWI_SR, a character has been received in the Receive
Holding Register (TWI_RHR). The RXRDY bit is reset when reading the TWI_RHR.
RXRDY is used as Receive Ready for the PDC receive channel.
When a single data byte read is performed, with or without internal address (IADR), the START and STOP bits
must be set at the same time. See . When a multiple data byte read is performed, with or without internal address
(IADR), the STOP bit must be set after the next-to-last data received. See . For internal address usage, see
Section 30.7.3.5.
If the Receive Holding Register (TWI_RHR) is full (RXRDY high) and the master is receiving data, the serial clock
line is tied low before receiving the last bit of the data and until the TWI_RHR is read. Once the TWI_RHR is read,
the master stops stretching the serial clock line and ends the data reception. See Figure 30-9.
Warning: When receiving multiple bytes in Master read mode, if the next-to-last access is not read (the RXRDY
flag remains high), the last access is not completed until TWI_RHR is read. The last access stops on the next-tolast bit. When the TWI_RHR is read, the STOP bit command must be sent within a period of half a bit only,
otherwise another read access might occur (spurious access).
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
639
A possible workaround is to set the STOP bit before reading the TWI_RHR on the next-to-last access (within the
interrupt handler).
Figure 30-7.
Master Read with One Data Byte
TWD
S
DADR
R
A
DATA
NA
P
TXCOMP
Write START &
STOP Bit
RXRDY
Read RHR
Figure 30-8.
TWD
Master Read with Multiple Data Bytes
S
DADR
R
A
DATA n
A
DATA (n+1)
A
DATA (n+m)-1
A
DATA (n+m)
NA
P
TXCOMP
Write START Bit
RXRDY
Read RHR
DATA n
Read RHR
DATA (n+1)
Read RHR
DATA (n+m)-1
Read RHR
DATA (n+m)
Write STOP Bit
after next-to-last data read
Figure 30-9.
Master Read Wait State with Multiple Data Bytes
STOP command performed
(by writing in the TWI_CR)
Clock Wait State
TWD
S
DADR
W
A
DATA n
A
DATA n+1
A
DATA n+2
A
P
TWCK
TXCOMP
RXRDY
Read RHR (Data n)
30.7.3.5
Read RHR (Data n+1)
Read RHR (Data n+2)
Internal Address
The TWI can perform transfers with 7-bit slave address devices and 10-bit slave address devices.
7-bit Slave Addressing
640
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
When addressing 7-bit slave devices, the internal address bytes are used to perform random address (read or
write) accesses to reach one or more data bytes, e.g. within a memory page location in a serial memory. When
performing read operations with an internal address, the TWI performs a write operation to set the internal address
into the slave device, and then switch to Master receiver mode. Note that the second START condition (after
sending the IADR) is sometimes called “repeated start” (Sr) in I2C fully-compatible devices. See Figure 30-11. See
Figure 30-10 and Figure 30-12 for master write operation with internal address.
The three internal address bytes are configurable through the Master Mode register (TWI_MMR).
If the slave device supports only a 7-bit address, i.e., no internal address, IADRSZ must be set to 0.
Table 30-6 shows the abbreviations used in Figure 30-10 and Figure 30-11.
Table 30-6.
Abbreviations
Abbreviation
Definition
S
Start
Sr
Repeated Start
P
Stop
W
Write
R
Read
A
Acknowledge
NA
Not Acknowledge
DADR
Device Address
IADR
Internal Address
Figure 30-10. Master Write with One, Two or Three Bytes Internal Address and One Data Byte
Three bytes internal address
TWD
S
DADR
W
A
IADR(23:16)
A
IADR(15:8)
A
IADR(7:0)
A
W
A
IADR(15:8)
A
IADR(7:0)
A
DATA
A
W
A
IADR(7:0)
A
DATA
A
DATA
A
P
Two bytes internal address
TWD
S
DADR
P
One byte internal address
TWD
S
DADR
P
Figure 30-11. Master Read with One, Two or Three Bytes Internal Address and One Data Byte
Three bytes internal address
TWD
S
DADR
W
A
IADR(23:16)
A
IADR(15:8)
A
IADR(7:0)
A
Sr
DADR
R
A
DATA
NA
P
Two bytes internal address
TWD
S
DADR
W
A
IADR(15:8)
A
IADR(7:0)
A
Sr
W
A
IADR(7:0)
A
Sr
R
A
DADR
R
A
DATA
NA
P
One byte internal address
TWD
S
DADR
DADR
DATA
NA
P
10-bit Slave Addressing
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
641
For a slave address higher than seven bits, the user must configure the address size (IADRSZ) and set the other
slave address bits in the Internal Address register (TWI_IADR). The two remaining internal address bytes,
IADR[15:8] and IADR[23:16] can be used the same way as in 7-bit slave addressing.
Example: Address a 10-bit device (10-bit device address is b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b10)
1. Program IADRSZ = 1,
2.
Program DADR with 1 1 1 1 0 b1 b2 (b1 is the MSB of the 10-bit address, b2, etc.)
3.
Program TWI_IADR with b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 b10 (b10 is the LSB of the 10-bit address)
Figure 30-12 below shows a byte write to a memory device. This demonstrates the use of internal addresses to
access the device.
Figure 30-12.
Internal Address Usage
S
T
A
R
T
Device
Address
W
R
I
T
E
FIRST
WORD ADDRESS
SECOND
WORD ADDRESS
S
T
O
P
DATA
0
M
S
B
30.7.3.6
LR A
S / C
BW K
M
S
B
A
C
K
LA
SC
BK
A
C
K
Using the Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC)
The use of the PDC significantly reduces the CPU load.
To ensure correct implementation, proceed as follows.
Data Transmit with the PDC
1. Initialize the transmit PDC (memory pointers, transfer size - 1).
2.
Configure the master (DADR, CKDIV, MREAD = 0, etc.)
3.
Start the transfer by setting the PDC TXTEN bit.
4.
Wait for the PDC ENDTX Flag either by using the polling method or ENDTX interrupt.
5.
Disable the PDC by setting the PDC TXTDIS bit.
6.
Wait for the TXRDY flag in TWI_SR.
7.
Set the STOP bit in TWI_CR.
8.
Write the last character in TWI_THR.
9.
(Only if peripheral clock must be disabled) Wait for the TXCOMP flag to be raised in TWI_SR.
Data Receive with the PDC
The PDC transfer size must be defined with the buffer size minus 2. The two remaining characters must be
managed without PDC to ensure that the exact number of bytes are received regardless of system bus latency
conditions encountered during the end of buffer transfer period.
In Slave mode, the number of characters to receive must be known in order to configure the PDC.
1. Initialize the receive PDC (memory pointers, transfer size - 2).
642
2.
Configure the master (DADR, CKDIV, MREAD = 1, etc.)
3.
Set the PDC RXTEN bit.
4.
(Master Only) Write the START bit in the TWI_CR to start the transfer.
5.
Wait for the PDC ENDRX Flag either by using polling method or ENDRX interrupt.
6.
Disable the PDC by setting the PDC RXTDIS bit.
7.
Wait for the RXRDY flag in TWI_SR.
8.
Set the STOP bit in TWI_CR.
9.
Read the penultimate character in TWI_RHR.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
10. Wait for the RXRDY flag in TWI_SR.
11. Read the last character in TWI_RHR.
12. (Only if peripheral clock must be disabled) Wait for the TXCOMP flag to be raised in TWI_SR.
30.7.3.7
Read/Write Flowcharts
The flowcharts in the following figures provide examples of read and write operations. A polling or interrupt method
can be used to check the status bits. The interrupt method requires that the Interrupt Enable Register (TWI_IER)
be configured first.
Figure 30-13. TWI Write Operation with Single Data Byte without Internal Address
BEGIN
Set TWI clock
(CLDIV, CHDIV, CKDIV) in TWI_CWGR
(Needed only once)
Set the Control register:
- Master enable
TWI_CR = MSEN + SVDIS
Set the Master Mode register:
- Device slave address (DADR)
- Transfer direction bit
Write ==> bit MREAD = 0
Load Transmit register
TWI_THR = Data to send
Read Status register
No
TXRDY = 1?
Yes
Read Status register
No
TXCOMP = 1?
Yes
Transfer finished
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
643
Figure 30-14. TWI Write Operation with Single Data Byte and Internal Address
BEGIN
Set TWI clock
(CLDIV, CHDIV, CKDIV) in TWI_CWGR
(Needed only once)
Set the Control register:
- Master enable
TWI_CR = MSEN + SVDIS
Set the Master Mode register:
- Device slave address (DADR)
- Internal address size (IADRSZ)
- Transfer direction bit
Write ==> bit MREAD = 0
Set the internal address
TWI_IADR = address
Load transmit register
TWI_THR = Data to send
Read Status register
No
TXRDY = 1?
Yes
Read Status register
TXCOMP = 1?
No
Yes
Transfer finished
644
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 30-15. TWI Write Operation with Multiple Data Bytes with or without Internal Address
BEGIN
Set TWI clock
(CLDIV, CHDIV, CKDIV) in TWI_CWGR
(Needed only once)
Set the Control register:
- Master enable
TWI_CR = MSEN + SVDIS
Set the Master Mode register:
- Device slave address
- Internal address size (if IADR used)
- Transfer direction bit
Write ==> bit MREAD = 0
No
Internal address size = 0?
Set the internal address
TWI_IADR = address
Yes
Load Transmit register
TWI_THR = Data to send
Read Status register
TWI_THR = data to send
No
TXRDY = 1?
Yes
Data to send?
Yes
No
Read Status register
No
TXCOMP = 1?
Yes
END
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
645
Figure 30-16. TWI Read Operation with Single Data Byte without Internal Address
BEGIN
Set TWI clock
(CLDIV, CHDIV, CKDIV) in TWI_CWGR
(Needed only once)
Set the Control register:
- Master enable
TWI_CR = MSEN + SVDIS
Set the Master Mode register:
- Device slave address
- Transfer direction bit
Read ==> bit MREAD = 1
Start the transfer
TWI_CR = START | STOP
Read status register
RXRDY = 1?
No
Yes
Read Receive Holding Register
Read Status register
No
TXCOMP = 1?
Yes
END
646
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 30-17. TWI Read Operation with Single Data Byte and Internal Address
BEGIN
Set TWI clock
(CLDIV, CHDIV, CKDIV) in TWI_CWGR
(Needed only once)
Set the Control register:
- Master enable
TWI_CR = MSEN + SVDIS
Set the Master Mode register:
- Device slave address
- Internal address size (IADRSZ)
- Transfer direction bit
Read ==> bit MREAD = 1
Set the internal address
TWI_IADR = address
Start the transfer
TWI_CR = START | STOP
Read Status register
No
RXRDY = 1?
Yes
Read Receive Holding register
Read Status register
No
TXCOMP = 1?
Yes
END
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
647
Figure 30-18. TWI Read Operation with Multiple Data Bytes with or without Internal Address
BEGIN
Set TWI clock
(CLDIV, CHDIV, CKDIV) in TWI_CWGR
(Needed only once)
Set the Control register:
- Master enable
TWI_CR = MSEN + SVDIS
Set the Master Mode register:
- Device slave address
- Internal address size (if IADR used)
- Transfer direction bit
Read ==> bit MREAD = 1
No
Internal address size = 0?
Set the internal address
TWI_IADR = address
Yes
Start the transfer
TWI_CR = START
Read Status register
RXRDY = 1?
No
Yes
Read Receive Holding register (TWI_RHR)
No
Last data to read
but one?
Yes
Stop the transfer
TWI_CR = STOP
Read Status register
No
RXRDY = 1?
Yes
Read Receive Holding register (TWI_RHR)
Read status register
TXCOMP = 1?
Yes
END
648
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
No
30.7.4 Multi-master Mode
30.7.4.1
Definition
In Multi-master mode, more than one master may handle the bus at the same time without data corruption by using
arbitration.
Arbitration starts as soon as two or more masters place information on the bus at the same time, and stops
(arbitration is lost) for the master that intends to send a logical one while the other master sends a logical zero.
As soon as a master lose arbitration, it stops sending data and listens to the bus in order to detect a stop. When
the stop is detected, the master may put its data on the bus by performing arbitration.
Arbitration is illustrated in Figure 30-20.
30.7.4.2
Two Multi-master Modes
Two Multi-master modes may be distinguished:
1. TWI is considered as a master only and will never be addressed.
2.
Note:
TWI may be either a master or a slave and may be addressed.
Arbitration is supported in both Multi-master modes.
TWI as Master Only
In this mode, TWI is considered as a Master only (MSEN is always one) and must be driven like a Master with the
ARBLST (Arbitration Lost) flag in addition.
If arbitration is lost (ARBLST = 1), the user must reinitiate the data transfer.
If the user starts a transfer (ex.: DADR + START + W + Write in THR) and if the bus is busy, the TWI automatically
waits for a STOP condition on the bus to initiate the transfer (see Figure 30-19).
Note:
The state of the bus (busy or free) is not shown in the user interface.
TWI as Master or Slave
The automatic reversal from Master to Slave is not supported in case of a lost arbitration.
Then, in the case where TWI may be either a Master or a Slave, the user must manage the pseudo Multi-master
mode described in the steps below.
1. Program TWI in Slave mode (SADR + MSDIS + SVEN) and perform a slave access (if TWI is addressed).
2.
If the TWI has to be set in Master mode, wait until the TXCOMP flag is at 1.
3.
Program the Master mode (DADR + SVDIS + MSEN) and start the transfer (ex: START + Write in THR).
4.
As soon as the Master mode is enabled, the TWI scans the bus in order to detect if it is busy or free. When
the bus is considered free, TWI initiates the transfer.
5.
As soon as the transfer is initiated and until a STOP condition is sent, the arbitration becomes relevant and
the user must monitor the ARBLST flag.
6.
If the arbitration is lost (ARBLST is set to 1), the user must program the TWI in Slave mode in case the
Master that won the arbitration is required to access the TWI.
7.
If the TWI has to be set in Slave mode, wait until TXCOMP flag is at 1 and then program the Slave mode.
Note:
If the arbitration is lost and the TWI is addressed, the TWI will not acknowledge even if it is programmed in Slave mode
as soon as ARBLST is set to 1. Then the Master must repeat SADR.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
649
Figure 30-19. Programmer Sends Data While the Bus is Busy
TWCK
START sent by the TWI
STOP sent by the master
DATA sent by a master
TWD
DATA sent by the TWI
Bus is busy
Bus is free
Transfer is kept
TWI DATA transfer
A transfer is programmed
(DADR + W + START + Write THR)
Bus is considered as free
Transfer is initiated
Figure 30-20. Arbitration Cases
TWCK
TWD
TWCK
Data from a Master
S
1
0 0 1 1
Data from TWI
S
1
0
TWD
S
1
0 0
1
P
Arbitration is lost
TWI stops sending data
Data from the master
1 1
P
Arbitration is lost
S
1
0
1
S
1
0
0 1
1
S
1
0
0 1
1
The master stops sending data
Data from the TWI
ARBLST
Bus is busy
Transfer is kept
TWI DATA transfer
A transfer is programmed
(DADR + W + START + Write THR)
Bus is free
Transfer is stopped
Transfer is programmed again
(DADR + W + START + Write THR)
Bus is considered as free
Transfer is initiated
The flowchart shown in Figure 30-21 gives an example of read and write operations in Multi-master mode.
650
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 30-21. Multi-master Flowchart
START
Program the SLAVE mode:
SADR + MSDIS + SVEN
Read Status Register
SVACC = 1 ?
Yes
GACC = 1 ?
No
No
SVREAD = 1 ?
No
No
EOSACC = 1 ?
TXRDY= 1 ?
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Write in TWI_THR
TXCOMP = 1 ?
RXRDY= 1 ?
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Read TWI_RHR
Need to perform
a master access ?
GENERAL CALL TREATMENT
Yes
Decoding of the
programming sequence
Prog seq
OK ?
No
Change SADR
Program the Master mode
DADR + SVDIS + MSEN + CLK + R / W
Read Status Register
Yes
No
ARBLST = 1 ?
Yes
Yes
No
MREAD = 1 ?
RXRDY= 0 ?
TXRDY= 0 ?
No
Read TWI_RHR
Yes
Yes
No
Data to read?
Data to send ?
No
Yes
Write in TWI_THR
No
Stop transfer
Read Status Register
Yes
TXCOMP = 0 ?
No
30.7.5 Slave Mode
30.7.5.1
Definition
Slave mode is defined as a mode where the device receives the clock and the address from another device called
the master.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
651
In this mode, the device never initiates and never completes the transmission (START, REPEATED START and
STOP conditions are always provided by the master).
30.7.5.2
Programming Slave Mode
The following fields must be programmed before entering Slave mode:
1. TWI_SMR.SADR: The slave device address is used in order to be accessed by master devices in Read or
Write mode.
2.
TWI_CR.MSDIS: Disables the Master mode.
3.
TWI_CR.SVEN: Enables the Slave mode.
As the device receives the clock, values written in TWI_CWGR are ignored.
30.7.5.3
Receiving Data
After a START or REPEATED START condition is detected and if the address sent by the Master matches with the
Slave address programmed in the SADR (Slave Address) field, SVACC (Slave Access) flag is set and SVREAD
(Slave Read) indicates the direction of the transfer.
SVACC remains high until a STOP condition or a repeated START is detected. When such a condition is detected,
the EOSACC (End Of Slave Access) flag is set.
Read Sequence
In the case of a read sequence (SVREAD is high), TWI transfers data written in TWI_THR (TWI Transmit Holding
Register) until a STOP condition or a REPEATED_START and an address different from SADR is detected. Note
that at the end of the read sequence TXCOMP (Transmission Complete) flag is set and SVACC reset.
As soon as data is written in TWI_THR, the TXRDY (Transmit Holding Register Ready) flag is reset, and it is set
when the internal shifter is empty and the sent data acknowledged or not. If the data is not acknowledged, the
NACK flag is set.
Note that a STOP or a REPEATED START always follows a NACK.
To clear the TXRDY flag, first set the bit TWI_CR.SVDIS, then set the bit TWI_CR.SVEN.
See Figure 30-22.
Write Sequence
In the case of a write sequence (SVREAD is low), the RXRDY (Receive Holding Register Ready) flag is set as
soon as a character has been received in the TWI_RHR (TWI Receive Holding Register). RXRDY is reset when
reading the TWI_RHR.
TWI continues receiving data until a STOP condition or a REPEATED_START + an address different from SADR
is detected. Note that at the end of the write sequence TXCOMP flag is set and SVACC reset.
See Figure 30-23.
Clock Synchronization Sequence
If TWI_RHR is not read in time, the TWI performs a clock synchronization.
Clock synchronization information is given by the bit SCLWS (Clock Wait State).
See Figure 30-26.
Clock Stretching Sequence
If TWI_THR is not written in time, the TWI performs a clock stretching.
Clock stretching information is given by the bit SCLWS (Clock Wait State).
See Figure 30-25.
652
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
General Call
In the case where a GENERAL CALL is performed, the GACC (General Call Access) flag is set.
After GACC is set, the user must interpret the meaning of the GENERAL CALL and decode the new address
programming sequence.
See Figure 30-24.
30.7.5.4
Data Transfer
Read Operation
The Read mode is defined as a data requirement from the master.
After a START or a REPEATED START condition is detected, the decoding of the address starts. If the slave
address (SADR) is decoded, SVACC is set and SVREAD indicates the direction of the transfer.
Until a STOP or REPEATED START condition is detected, TWI continues sending data loaded in the TWI_THR.
If a STOP condition or a REPEATED START + an address different from SADR is detected, SVACC is reset.
Figure 30-22 describes the write operation.
Figure 30-22. Read Access Ordered by a Master
SADR matches,
TWI answers with an ACK
SADR does not match,
TWI answers with a NACK
TWD
S
ADR
R
NA
DATA
NA
P/S/Sr
SADR R
A
DATA
A
ACK/NACK from the Master
A
DATA
NA
S/Sr
TXRDY
NACK
Read RHR
Write THR
SVACC
SVREAD
SVREAD has to be taken into account only while SVACC is active
EOSACC
Notes:
1. When SVACC is low, the state of SVREAD becomes irrelevant.
2. TXRDY is reset when data has been transmitted from TWI_THR to the internal shifter and set when this data has been
acknowledged or non acknowledged.
Write Operation
The Write mode is defined as a data transmission from the master.
After a START or a REPEATED START, the decoding of the address starts. If the slave address is decoded,
SVACC is set and SVREAD indicates the direction of the transfer (SVREAD is low in this case).
Until a STOP or REPEATED START condition is detected, TWI stores the received data in the TWI_RHR.
If a STOP condition or a REPEATED START + an address different from SADR is detected, SVACC is reset.
Figure 30-23 describes the write operation.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
653
Figure 30-23. Write Access Ordered by a Master
SADR does not match,
TWI answers with a NACK
TWD
S
ADR
W
NA
DATA
NA
SADR matches,
TWI answers with an ACK
P/S/Sr
SADR W
A
DATA
Read RHR
A
A
DATA NA
S/Sr
RXRDY
SVACC
SVREAD has to be taken into account only while SVACC is active
SVREAD
EOSACC
Notes:
1. When SVACC is low, the state of SVREAD becomes irrelevant.
2. RXRDY is set when data has been transmitted from the internal shifter to the TWI_RHR and reset when this data is read.
General Call
The general call is performed in order to change the address of the slave.
If a GENERAL CALL is detected, GACC is set.
After the detection of GENERAL CALL, it is up to the programmer to decode the commands which come
afterwards.
In case of a WRITE command, the programmer has to decode the programming sequence and program a new
SADR if the programming sequence matches.
Figure 30-24 describes the GENERAL CALL access.
Figure 30-24. Master Performs a General Call
0000000 + W
TXD
S
GENERAL CALL
RESET command = 00000110X
WRITE command = 00000100X
A
Reset or write DADD
A
DATA1
A
DATA2
A
New SADR
A
P
New SADR
Programming sequence
GACC
Reset after read
SVACC
Note:
654
This method allows the user to create a personal programming sequence by choosing the programming bytes and the
number of them. The programming sequence has to be provided to the master.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Clock Synchronization/Stretching
In both Read and Write modes, it may occur that TWI_THR/TWI_RHR buffer is not filled /emptied before
transmission/reception of a new character. In this case, to avoid sending/receiving undesired data, a clock
stretching/synchronization mechanism is implemented.
Clock Stretching in Read Mode
The clock is tied low during the acknowledge phase if the internal shifter is empty and if a STOP or
REPEATED START condition was not detected. It is tied low until the internal shifter is loaded.
Figure 30-25 describes clock stretching in Read mode.
Figure 30-25. Clock Stretching in Read Mode
TWI_THR
S
SADR
R
DATA1
1
DATA0
A
DATA0
A
DATA1
DATA2
A
XXXXXXX
DATA2
NA
S
2
TWCK
Write THR
CLOCK is tied low by the TWI
as long as THR is empty
SCLWS
TXRDY
SVACC
SVREAD
As soon as a START is detected
TXCOMP
Ack or Nack from the master
TWI_THR is transmitted to the shift register
Notes:
1
The data is memorized in TWI_THR until a new value is written
2
The clock is stretched after the ACK, the state of TWD is undefined during clock stretching
1. TXRDY is reset when data has been written in the TWI_THR to the internal shifter and set when this data has been
acknowledged or non acknowledged.
2. At the end of the read sequence, TXCOMP is set after a STOP or after a REPEATED_START + an address different from
SADR.
3. SCLWS is automatically set when the clock stretching mechanism is started.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
655
Clock Synchronization in Write Mode
The clock is tied low outside of the acknowledge phase if the internal shifter and the TWI_RHR is full. If a
STOP or REPEATED_START condition was not detected, it is tied low until TWI_RHR is read.
Figure 30-26 describes the clock synchronization in Write mode.
Figure 30-26. Clock Synchronization in Write Mode
TWCK
CLOCK is tied low by the TWI as long as RHR is full
TWD
S
SADR
W
A
DATA0
A
TWI_RHR
DATA1
A
DATA0 is not read in the RHR
DATA2
DATA1
NA
S
ADR
DATA2
SCLWS
TWCK is stretched on the last bit of DATA1
RXRDY
Rd DATA0
Rd DATA1
Rd DATA2
SVACC
SVREAD
TXCOMP
Notes:
656
As soon as a START is detected
1. At the end of the read sequence, TXCOMP is set after a STOP or after a REPEATED_START + an address different from
SADR.
2. SCLWS is automatically set when the clock synchronization mechanism is started and automatically reset when the
mechanism is finished.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Reversal After a Repeated Start
Reversal of Read to Write
The master initiates the communication by a read command and finishes it by a write command.
Figure 30-27 describes the repeated start + reversal from Read to Write mode.
Figure 30-27. Repeated Start + Reversal from Read to Write Mode
TWI_THR
TWD
DATA0
S
SADR
R
A
DATA0
DATA1
A
DATA1
NA
Sr
SADR
W
A
DATA2
TWI_RHR
A
DATA3
DATA2
A
P
DATA3
SVACC
SVREAD
TXRDY
RXRDY
EOSACC
Cleared after read
As soon as a START is detected
TXCOMP
Note:
1. TXCOMP is only set at the end of the transmission because after the repeated start, SADR is detected again.
Reversal of Write to Read
The master initiates the communication by a write command and finishes it by a read command.
Figure 30-28 describes the repeated start + reversal from Write to Read mode.
Figure 30-28. Repeated Start + Reversal from Write to Read Mode
DATA2
TWI_THR
TWD
S
SADR
W
A
DATA0
TWI_RHR
A
DATA1
DATA0
A
Sr
SADR
R
A
DATA3
DATA2
A
DATA3
NA
P
DATA1
SVACC
SVREAD
TXRDY
RXRDY
EOSACC
TXCOMP
Notes:
30.7.5.5
Read TWI_RHR
Cleared after read
As soon as a START is detected
1. In this case, if TWI_THR has not been written at the end of the read command, the clock is automatically stretched before
the ACK.
2. TXCOMP is only set at the end of the transmission because after the repeated start, SADR is detected again.
Using the Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC) in Slave Mode
The use of the PDC significantly reduces the CPU load.
Data Transmit with the PDC in Slave Mode
The following procedure shows an example of data transmission with PDC.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
657
1. Initialize the transmit PDC (memory pointers, transfer size).
2.
Start the transfer by setting the PDC TXTEN bit.
3.
Wait for the PDC ENDTX flag by using either the polling method or the ENDTX interrupt.
4.
Disable the PDC by setting the PDC TXTDIS bit.
5.
(Only if peripheral clock must be disabled) Wait for the TXCOMP flag to be raised in TWI_SR.
Data Receive with the PDC in Slave Mode
The following procedure shows an example of data transmission with PDC where the number of characters to be
received is known.
1. Initialize the receive PDC (memory pointers, transfer size).
30.7.5.6
2.
Set the PDC RXTEN bit.
3.
Wait for the PDC ENDRX flag by using either the polling method or the ENDRX interrupt.
4.
Disable the PDC by setting the PDC RXTDIS bit.
5.
(Only if peripheral clock must be disabled) Wait for the TXCOMP flag to be raised in TWI_SR.
Read Write Flowcharts
The flowchart shown in Figure 30-29 gives an example of read and write operations in Slave mode. A polling or
interrupt method can be used to check the status bits. The interrupt method requires that the Interrupt Enable
Register (TWI_IER) be configured first.
658
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 30-29. Read Write Flowchart in Slave Mode
Set the SLAVE mode:
SADR + MSDIS + SVEN
Read Status Register
SVACC = 1 ?
GACC = 1 ?
No
No
EOSACC = 1 ?
No
SVREAD = 1 ?
TXRDY= 1 ?
No
No
Write in TWI_THR
No
TXCOMP = 1 ?
RXRDY= 1 ?
No
END
Read TWI_RHR
GENERAL CALL TREATMENT
Decoding of the
programming sequence
Prog seq
OK ?
No
Change SADR
30.7.6 Register Write Protection
To prevent any single software error from corrupting TWI behavior, certain registers in the address space can be
write-protected by setting the WPEN bit in the TWI Write Protection Mode Register (TWI_WPMR).
If a write access to a write-protected register is detected, the WPVS flag in the TWI Write Protection Status
Register (TWI_WPSR) is set and the WPVSRC field shows the register in which the write access has been
attempted.
The WPVS bit is automatically cleared after reading the TWI_WPSR.
The following registers can be write-protected:
TWI Slave Mode Register
TWI Clock Waveform Generator Register
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
659
30.8
Two-wire Interface (TWI) User Interface
Table 30-7.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x00
Control Register
TWI_CR
Write-only
–
0x04
Master Mode Register
TWI_MMR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x08
Slave Mode Register
TWI_SMR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x0C
Internal Address Register
TWI_IADR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x10
Clock Waveform Generator Register
TWI_CWGR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x14–0x1C
Reserved
–
–
–
0x20
Status Register
TWI_SR
Read-only
0x0000F009
0x24
Interrupt Enable Register
TWI_IER
Write-only
–
0x28
Interrupt Disable Register
TWI_IDR
Write-only
–
0x2C
Interrupt Mask Register
TWI_IMR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x30
Receive Holding Register
TWI_RHR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x34
Transmit Holding Register
TWI_THR
Write-only
–
0x38–0xE0
Reserved
–
–
–
0xE4
Write Protection Mode Register
TWI_WPMR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE8
Write Protection Status Register
TWI_WPSR
Read-only
0x00000000
0xEC–0xFC
Reserved
–
–
–
0x100–0x128
Reserved for PDC registers
–
–
–
Note: All unlisted offset values are considered as “reserved”.
660
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
30.8.1 TWI Control Register
Name:
TWI_CR
Address:
0x4001C000 (1), 0x40040000 (2)
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
SWRST
6
–
5
SVDIS
4
SVEN
3
MSDIS
2
MSEN
1
STOP
0
START
• START: Send a START Condition
0: No effect.
1: A frame beginning with a START bit is transmitted according to the features defined in the TWI Master Mode Register
(TWI_MMR).
This action is necessary for the TWI to read data from a slave. When configured in Master mode with a write operation, a
frame is sent as soon as the user writes a character in the Transmit Holding Register (TWI_THR).
• STOP: Send a STOP Condition
0: No effect.
1: STOP condition is sent just after completing the current byte transmission in Master read mode.
– In single data byte master read, the START and STOP must both be set.
– In multiple data bytes master read, the STOP must be set after the last data received but one.
– In Master read mode, if a NACK bit is received, the STOP is automatically performed.
– In multiple data write operation, when both THR and internal shifter are empty, a STOP condition is sent
automatically.
• MSEN: TWI Master Mode Enabled
0: No effect.
1: Enables the Master mode (MSDIS must be written to 0).
Note: Switching from Slave to Master mode is only permitted when TXCOMP = 1.
• MSDIS: TWI Master Mode Disabled
0: No effect.
1: The Master mode is disabled, all pending data is transmitted. The shifter and holding characters (if it contains data) are
transmitted in case of write operation. In read operation, the character being transferred must be completely received
before disabling.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
661
• SVEN: TWI Slave Mode Enabled
0: No effect.
1: Enables the Slave mode (SVDIS must be written to 0)
Note: Switching from master to Slave mode is only permitted when TXCOMP = 1.
• SVDIS: TWI Slave Mode Disabled
0: No effect.
1: The Slave mode is disabled. The shifter and holding characters (if it contains data) are transmitted in case of read operation. In write operation, the character being transferred must be completely received before disabling.
• SWRST: Software Reset
0: No effect.
1: Equivalent to a system reset.
662
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
30.8.2 TWI Master Mode Register
Name:
TWI_MMR
Address:
0x4001C004 (1), 0x40040004 (2)
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
21
20
19
DADR
18
17
16
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
MREAD
11
–
10
–
9
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
8
IADRSZ
0
–
• IADRSZ: Internal Device Address Size
Value
Name
Description
0
NONE
No internal device address
1
1_BYTE
One-byte internal device address
2
2_BYTE
Two-byte internal device address
3
3_BYTE
Three-byte internal device address
• MREAD: Master Read Direction
0: Master write direction.
1: Master read direction.
• DADR: Device Address
The device address is used to access slave devices in Read or Write mode. These bits are only used in Master mode.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
663
30.8.3 TWI Slave Mode Register
Name:
TWI_SMR
Address:
0x4001C008 (1), 0x40040008 (2)
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
21
20
19
SADR
18
17
16
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
8
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the TWI Write Protection Mode Register.
• SADR: Slave Address
The slave device address is used in Slave mode in order to be accessed by master devices in Read or Write mode.
SADR must be programmed before enabling the Slave mode or after a general call. Writes at other times have no effect.
664
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
30.8.4 TWI Internal Address Register
Name:
TWI_IADR
Address:
0x4001C00C (1), 0x4004000C (2)
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
IADR
15
14
13
12
IADR
7
6
5
4
IADR
• IADR: Internal Address
0, 1, 2 or 3 bytes depending on IADRSZ.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
665
30.8.5 TWI Clock Waveform Generator Register
Name:
TWI_CWGR
Address:
0x4001C010 (1), 0x40040010 (2)
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
27
26
HOLD
25
24
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
17
CKDIV
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
CHDIV
7
6
5
4
CLDIV
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the TWI Write Protection Mode Register.
TWI_CWGR is only used in Master mode.
• CLDIV: Clock Low Divider
The TWCK low period is defined as follows: tlow = ((CLDIV × 2CKDIV) + 4 × tperipheral clock
• CHDIV: Clock High Divider
The TWCK high period is defined as follows: thigh = ((CHDIV × 2CKDIV) + 4 × tperipheral clock
• CKDIV: Clock Divider
The CKDIV field is used to increase both TWCK high and low periods.
• HOLD: TWD Hold Time versus TWCK falling
TWD is kept unchanged after TWCK falling edge for a period of (HOLD + 3) × tperipheral clock.
666
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
30.8.6 TWI Status Register
Name:
TWI_SR
Address:
0x4001C020 (1), 0x40040020 (2)
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
TXBUFE
14
RXBUFF
13
ENDTX
12
ENDRX
11
EOSACC
10
SCLWS
9
ARBLST
8
NACK
7
–
6
OVRE
5
GACC
4
SVACC
3
SVREAD
2
TXRDY
1
RXRDY
0
TXCOMP
• TXCOMP: Transmission Completed (cleared by writing TWI_THR)
TXCOMP used in Master mode:
0: During the length of the current frame.
1: When both holding register and internal shifter are empty and STOP condition has been sent.
TXCOMP behavior in Master mode can be seen in Figure 30-8.
TXCOMP used in Slave mode:
0: As soon as a START is detected.
1: After a STOP or a REPEATED START + an address different from SADR is detected.
TXCOMP behavior in Slave mode can be seen in Figure 30-25, Figure 30-26, Figure 30-27 and Figure 30-28.
• RXRDY: Receive Holding Register Ready (cleared by reading TWI_RHR)
0: No character has been received since the last TWI_RHR read operation.
1: A byte has been received in the TWI_RHR since the last read.
RXRDY behavior in Master mode can be seen in Figure 30-8.
RXRDY behavior in Slave mode can be seen in Figure 30-23, Figure 30-26, Figure 30-27 and Figure 30-28.
• TXRDY: Transmit Holding Register Ready (cleared by writing TWI_THR)
TXRDY used in Master mode:
0: The transmit holding register has not been transferred into internal shifter. Set to 0 when writing into TWI_THR.
1: As soon as a data byte is transferred from TWI_THR to internal shifter or if a NACK error is detected, TXRDY is set at
the same time as TXCOMP and NACK. TXRDY is also set when MSEN is set (enable TWI).
TXRDY behavior in Master mode can be seen in Figure 30.7.3.3.
TXRDY used in Slave mode:
0: As soon as data is written in the TWI_THR, until this data has been transmitted and acknowledged (ACK or NACK).
1: It indicates that the TWI_THR is empty and that data has been transmitted and acknowledged.
If TXRDY is high and if a NACK has been detected, the transmission will be stopped. Thus when TRDY = NACK = 1, the
programmer must not fill TWI_THR to avoid losing it.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
667
TXRDY behavior in Slave mode can be seen in Figure 30-22, Figure 30-25, Figure 30-27 and Figure 30-28.
• SVREAD: Slave Read
This bit is only used in Slave mode. When SVACC is low (no Slave access has been detected) SVREAD is irrelevant.
0: Indicates that a write access is performed by a Master.
1: Indicates that a read access is performed by a Master.
SVREAD behavior can be seen in Figure 30-22, Figure 30-23, Figure 30-27 and Figure 30-28.
• SVACC: Slave Access
This bit is only used in Slave mode.
0: TWI is not addressed. SVACC is automatically cleared after a NACK or a STOP condition is detected.
1: Indicates that the address decoding sequence has matched (A Master has sent SADR). SVACC remains high until a
NACK or a STOP condition is detected.
SVACC behavior can be seen in Figure 30-22, Figure 30-23, Figure 30-27 and Figure 30-28.
• GACC: General Call Access (cleared on read)
This bit is only used in Slave mode.
0: No General Call has been detected.
1: A General Call has been detected. After the detection of General Call, if need be, the programmer may acknowledge
this access and decode the following bytes and respond according to the value of the bytes.
GACC behavior can be seen in Figure 30-24.
• OVRE: Overrun Error (cleared on read)
This bit is only used in Master mode.
0: TWI_RHR has not been loaded while RXRDY was set
1: TWI_RHR has been loaded while RXRDY was set. Reset by read in TWI_SR when TXCOMP is set.
• NACK: Not Acknowledged (cleared on read)
NACK used in Master mode:
0: Each data byte has been correctly received by the far-end side TWI slave component.
1: A data byte or an address byte has not been acknowledged by the slave component. Set at the same time as TXCOMP.
NACK used in Slave Read mode:
0: Each data byte has been correctly received by the Master.
1: In Read mode, a data byte has not been acknowledged by the Master. When NACK is set, the programmer must not fill
TWI_THR even if TXRDY is set, because that means that the Master will stop the data transfer or reinitiate it.
Note that in Slave write mode all data are acknowledged by the TWI.
• ARBLST: Arbitration Lost (cleared on read)
This bit is only used in Master mode.
0: Arbitration won.
1: Arbitration lost. Another master of the TWI bus has won the multi-master arbitration. TXCOMP is set at the same time.
668
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
• SCLWS: Clock Wait State
This bit is only used in Slave mode.
0: The clock is not stretched.
1: The clock is stretched. TWI_THR / TWI_RHR buffer is not filled / emptied before transmission / reception of a new
character.
SCLWS behavior can be seen in Figure 30-25 and Figure 30-26.
• EOSACC: End Of Slave Access (cleared on read)
This bit is only used in Slave mode.
0: A slave access is being performed.
1: The Slave access is finished. End Of Slave Access is automatically set as soon as SVACC is reset.
EOSACC behavior can be seen in Figure 30-27 and Figure 30-28.
• ENDRX: End of RX buffer (cleared by writing TWI_RCR or TWI_RNCR)
0: The Receive Counter Register has not reached 0 since the last write in TWI_RCR or TWI_RNCR.
1: The Receive Counter Register has reached 0 since the last write in TWI_RCR or TWI_RNCR.
• ENDTX: End of TX buffer (cleared by writing TWI_TCR or TWI_TNCR)
0: The Transmit Counter Register has not reached 0 since the last write in TWI_TCR or TWI_TNCR.
1: The Transmit Counter Register has reached 0 since the last write in TWI_TCR or TWI_TNCR.
• RXBUFF: RX Buffer Full (cleared by writing TWI_RCR or TWI_RNCR)
0: TWI_RCR or TWI_RNCR have a value other than 0.
1: Both TWI_RCR and TWI_RNCR have a value of 0.
• TXBUFE: TX Buffer Empty (cleared by writing TWI_TCR or TWI_TNCR)
0: TWI_TCR or TWI_TNCR have a value other than 0.
1: Both TWI_TCR and TWI_TNCR have a value of 0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
669
30.8.7 TWI Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
TWI_IER
Address:
0x4001C024 (1), 0x40040024 (2)
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
TXBUFE
14
RXBUFF
13
ENDTX
12
ENDRX
11
EOSACC
10
SCL_WS
9
ARBLST
8
NACK
7
–
6
OVRE
5
GACC
4
SVACC
3
–
2
TXRDY
1
RXRDY
0
TXCOMP
The following configuration values are valid for all listed bit names of this register:
0: No effect.
1: Enables the corresponding interrupt.
• TXCOMP: Transmission Completed Interrupt Enable
• RXRDY: Receive Holding Register Ready Interrupt Enable
• TXRDY: Transmit Holding Register Ready Interrupt Enable
• SVACC: Slave Access Interrupt Enable
• GACC: General Call Access Interrupt Enable
• OVRE: Overrun Error Interrupt Enable
• NACK: Not Acknowledge Interrupt Enable
• ARBLST: Arbitration Lost Interrupt Enable
• SCL_WS: Clock Wait State Interrupt Enable
• EOSACC: End Of Slave Access Interrupt Enable
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Enable
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Buffer Interrupt Enable
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Enable
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Enable
670
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
30.8.8 TWI Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
TWI_IDR
Address:
0x4001C028 (1), 0x40040028 (2)
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
TXBUFE
14
RXBUFF
13
ENDTX
12
ENDRX
11
EOSACC
10
SCL_WS
9
ARBLST
8
NACK
7
–
6
OVRE
5
GACC
4
SVACC
3
–
2
TXRDY
1
RXRDY
0
TXCOMP
The following configuration values are valid for all listed bit names of this register:
0: No effect.
1: Disables the corresponding interrupt.
• TXCOMP: Transmission Completed Interrupt Disable
• RXRDY: Receive Holding Register Ready Interrupt Disable
• TXRDY: Transmit Holding Register Ready Interrupt Disable
• SVACC: Slave Access Interrupt Disable
• GACC: General Call Access Interrupt Disable
• OVRE: Overrun Error Interrupt Disable
• NACK: Not Acknowledge Interrupt Disable
• ARBLST: Arbitration Lost Interrupt Disable
• SCL_WS: Clock Wait State Interrupt Disable
• EOSACC: End Of Slave Access Interrupt Disable
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Disable
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Buffer Interrupt Disable
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Disable
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Disable
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
671
30.8.9 TWI Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
TWI_IMR
Address:
0x4001C02C (1), 0x4004002C (2)
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
TXBUFE
14
RXBUFF
13
ENDTX
12
ENDRX
11
EOSACC
10
SCL_WS
9
ARBLST
8
NACK
7
–
6
OVRE
5
GACC
4
SVACC
3
–
2
TXRDY
1
RXRDY
0
TXCOMP
The following configuration values are valid for all listed bit names of this register:
0: The corresponding interrupt is disabled.
1: The corresponding interrupt is enabled.
• TXCOMP: Transmission Completed Interrupt Mask
• RXRDY: Receive Holding Register Ready Interrupt Mask
• TXRDY: Transmit Holding Register Ready Interrupt Mask
• SVACC: Slave Access Interrupt Mask
• GACC: General Call Access Interrupt Mask
• OVRE: Overrun Error Interrupt Mask
• NACK: Not Acknowledge Interrupt Mask
• ARBLST: Arbitration Lost Interrupt Mask
• SCL_WS: Clock Wait State Interrupt Mask
• EOSACC: End Of Slave Access Interrupt Mask
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Mask
• ENDTX: End of Transmit Buffer Interrupt Mask
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Mask
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Mask
672
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
30.8.10 TWI Receive Holding Register
Name:
TWI_RHR
Address:
0x4001C030 (1), 0x40040030 (2)
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RXDATA
• RXDATA: Master or Slave Receive Holding Data
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
673
30.8.11 TWI Transmit Holding Register
Name:
TWI_THR
Address:
0x4001C034 (1), 0x40040034 (2)
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
TXDATA
• TXDATA: Master or Slave Transmit Holding Data
674
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
30.8.12 TWI Write Protection Mode Register
Name:
TWI_WPMR
Address:
0x4001C0E4 (1), 0x400400E4 (2)
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
WPEN
WPKEY
23
22
21
20
WPKEY
15
14
13
12
WPKEY
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
• WPEN: Write Protection Enable
0: Disables the write protection if WPKEY corresponds to 0x545749 (“TWI” in ASCII).
1: Enables the write protection if WPKEY corresponds to 0x545749 (“TWI” in ASCII).
See Section 30.7.6 “Register Write Protection” for the list of registers that can be write-protected.
• WPKEY: Write Protection Key
Value
0x545749
Name
PASSWD
Description
Writing any other value in this field aborts the write operation of the WPEN bit.
Always reads as 0
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
675
30.8.13 TWI Write Protection Status Register
Name:
TWI_WPSR
Address:
0x4001C0E8 (1), 0x400400E8 (2)
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
WPVS
WPVSRC
23
22
21
20
WPVSRC
15
14
13
12
WPVSRC
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
• WPVS: Write Protection Violation Status
0: No write protection violation has occurred since the last read of the TWI_WPSR.
1: A write protection violation has occurred since the last read of the TWI_WPSR. If this violation is an unauthorized
attempt to write a protected register, the violation is reported into field WPVSRC.
• WPVSRC: Write Protection Violation Source
When WPVS = 1, WPVSRC shows the register address offset at which a write access has been attempted.
676
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
31.
Inter-IC Sound Controller (I2SC)
31.1
Description
The Inter-IC Sound Controller (I2SC) provides a 5-wire, bidirectional, synchronous, digital audio link to external
audio devices: I2SDI, I2SDO, I2SWS, I2SCK, and I2SMCK pins.
The I2SC is compliant with the Inter-IC Sound (I2S) bus specification.
The I2SC consists of a receiver, a transmitter and a common clock generator that can be enabled separately to
provide Master, Slave or Controller modes with receiver and/or transmitter active.
Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC) channels, separate for the receiver and for the transmitter, allow a continuous
high bit rate data transfer without processor intervention to the following:
Audio CODECs in Master, Slave, or Controller mode
Stereo DAC or ADC through a dedicated I2S serial interface
The I2SC can use either a single PDC channel for both audio channels or one PDC channel per audio channel.
The 8- and 16-bit compact stereo format reduces the required PDC bandwidth by transferring the left and right
samples within the same data word.
In Master mode, the I2SC can produce a 16 fs to 1024 fs master clock that provides an over-sampling clock to an
external audio codec or digital signal processor (DSP).
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
677
31.2
Embedded Characteristics
Compliant with Inter-IC Sound (I2S) Bus Specification
Master, Slave, and Controller Modes
̶
Slave: Data Received/Transmitted
̶
Master: Data Received/Transmitted And Clocks Generated
̶
Controller: Clocks Generated
Individual Enable and Disable of Receiver, Transmitter and Clocks
Configurable Clock Generator Common to Receiver and Transmitter
̶
̶
Suitable for a Wide Range of Sample Frequencies (fs), Including 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz,
96 kHz, and 192 kHz
678
16 fs to 1024 fs Master Clock Generated for External Oversampling Data Converters
Support for Multiple Data Formats
̶
32-, 24-, 20-, 18-, 16-, and 8-bit Mono or Stereo Format
̶
16- and 8-bit Compact Stereo Format, with Left and Right Samples Packed in the Same Word to
Reduce Data Transfers
PDC Interfaces the Receiver and Transmitter to Reduce Processor Overhead
̶
One PDC Channel for Both Audio Channels, or
̶
One PDC Channel Per Audio Channel
Smart Holding Registers Management to Avoid Audio Channels Mix After Overrun or Underrun
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
31.3
Block Diagram
Figure 31-1.
I2SC Block Diagram
I2SC
Power
Manager
PIO
Peripheral
Clock
I2SMCK
Bus
Interface
I2SCK
Clocks
I2SWS
Peripheral
Bus Bridge
Peripheral
DMA
Controller
Interrupt
Controller
31.4
I2SDI
Transmitter
I2SDO
I/O Lines Description
Table 31-1.
Pin Name
31.5
Receiver
Events
I/O Lines Description
Pin Description
Type
I2SMCK
Master Clock
Output
I2SCK
Serial Clock
Input/Output
2
I2SWS
I S Word Select
Input/Output
I2SDI
Serial Data Input
Input
I2SDO
Serial Data Output
Output
Product Dependencies
To use the I2SC, other parts of the system must be configured correctly, as described below.
31.5.1 I/O Lines
The I2SC pins may be multiplexed with I/O Controller lines. The user must first program the PIO Controller to
assign the required I2SC pins to their peripheral function. If the I2SC I/O lines are not used by the application, they
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
679
can be used for other purposes by the PIO Controller. The user must enable the I2SC inputs and outputs that are
used.
Table 31-2.
I/O Lines
Instance
Signal
I/O Line
Peripheral
I2SC0
I2SC0_CK
PA0
A
I2SC0
I2SC0_DI0
PA2
B
I2SC0
I2SC0_DO0
PA3
B
I2SC0
I2SC0_DO0
PA17
A
I2SC0
I2SC0_MCK
PA4
B
I2SC0
I2SC0_MCK
PA18
A
I2SC0
I2SC0_WS
PA1
A
I2SC1
I2SC1_CK
PA19
B
I2SC1
I2SC1_DI0
PA22
B
I2SC1
I2SC1_DO0
PA23
A
I2SC1
I2SC1_MCK
PA24
A
I2SC1
I2SC1_WS
PA20
B
31.5.2 Power Management
If the CPU enters a Sleep mode that disables clocks used by the I2SC, the I2SC stops functioning and resumes
operation after the system wakes up from Sleep mode.
31.5.3 Clocks
The clock for the I2SC bus interface is generated by the Power Management Controller (PMC). I2SC must be
disabled before disabling the clock to avoid freezing the I2SC in an undefined state.
31.5.4 Peripheral DMA Controller
The I2SC interfaces to the Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC). Using the I2SC DMA functionality requires the PDC
to be programmed first.
31.5.5 Interrupt Sources
The I2SC interrupt line is connected to the Interrupt Controller. Using the I2SC interrupt requires the Interrupt
Table 31-3.
Peripheral IDs
Instance
ID
I2SC0
16
I2SC1
17
Controller to be programmed first.
680
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
31.6
Functional Description
31.6.1 Initialization
The I2SC features a receiver, a transmitter and a clock generator for Master and Controller modes. Receiver and
transmitter share the same serial clock and word select.
Before enabling the I2SC, the selected configuration must be written to the I2SC Mode Register (I2SC_MR). If the
I2SC_MR.IMCKMODE bit is set, the I2SC_MR.IMCKFS field must be configured as described in Section 31.6.5
”Serial Clock and Word Select Generation”.
Once the I2SC_MR has been written, the I2SC clock generator, receiver, and transmitter can be enabled by
writing a one to the CKEN, RXEN, and TXEN bits in the Control Register (I2SC_CR). The clock generator can be
enabled alone in Controller mode to output clocks to the I2SMCK, I2SCK, and I2SWS pins. The clock generator
must also be enabled if the receiver or the transmitter is enabled.
The clock generator, receiver, and transmitter can be disabled independently by writing a one to I2SC_CR.CXDIS,
I2SC_CR.RXDIS and/or I2SC_CR.TXDIS, respectively. Once requested to stop, they stop only when the
transmission of the pending frame transmission is completed.
31.6.2 Basic Operation
The receiver can be operated by reading the Receiver Holding Register (I2SC_RHR), whenever the Receive
Ready (RXRDY) bit in the Status Register (I2SC_SR) is set. Successive values read from RHR correspond to the
samples from the left and right audio channels for the successive frames.
The transmitter can be operated by writing to the Transmitter Holding Register (I2SC_THR), whenever the
Transmit Ready (TXRDY) bit in the I2SC_SR is set. Successive values written to THR correspond to the samples
from the left and right audio channels for the successive frames.
The RXRDY and TXRDY bits can be polled by reading the I2SC_SR.
The I2SC processor load can be reduced by enabling interrupt-driven operation. The RXRDY and/or TXRDY
interrupt requests can be enabled by writing a one to the corresponding bit in the Interrupt Enable Register
(I2SC_IER). The interrupt service routine associated to the I2SC interrupt request is executed whenever the
Receive Ready or the Transmit Ready status bit is set.
31.6.3 Master, Controller and Slave Modes
In Master and Controller modes, the I2SC provides the master clock, the serial clock and the word select. I2SMCK,
I2SCK, and I2SWS pins are outputs.
In Controller mode, the I2SC receiver and transmitter are disabled. Only the clocks are enabled and used by an
external receiver and/or transmitter.
In Slave mode, the I2SC receives the serial clock and the word select from an external master. I2SCK and I2SWS
pins are inputs.
The mode is selected by writing the MODE field in the I2SC_MR. Since the MODE field changes the direction of
the I2SWS and I2SSCK pins, the I2SC_MR must only be written when the I2SC is stopped in order to avoid
unwanted glitches on the I2SWS and I2SCK pins.
31.6.4 I2S Reception and Transmission Sequence
As specified in the I2S protocol, data bits are left-justified in the word select time slot, with the MSB transmitted
first, starting one clock period after the transition on the word select line.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
681
Figure 31-2.
I2S Reception and Transmission Sequence
Serial clock I2SCK
Word Select I2SWS
Data I2SDI/I2SDO
MSB
LSB
MSB
Left Channel
Right Channel
Data bits are sent on the falling edge of the serial clock and sampled on the rising edge of the serial clock. the word
select line indicates the channel in transmission, a low level for the left channel and a high level for the right
channel.
The length of transmitted words can be chosen among 8, 16, 18, 20, 24, and 32 bits by writing the
I2SC_MR.DATALENGTH field.
If the time slot allows for more data bits than written in the I2SC_MR.DATALENGTH field, zeroes are appended to
the transmitted data word or extra received bits are discarded.
31.6.5 Serial Clock and Word Select Generation
The generation of clocks in the I2SC is described in Figure 31-3 ”I2SC Clock Generation”.
In Slave mode, the serial clock and word select clock are driven by an external master. I2SCK and I2SWS pins are
inputs.
In Master mode, the user can configure the master clock, serial clock, and word select clock through the
I2SC_MR. I2SMCK, I2SCK, and I2SWS pins are outputs and MCK is used to derive the I2SC clocks.
Audio codecs connected to the I2SC pins may require a master clock (I2SMCK) signal with a frequency multiple of
the audio sample frequency (f s ), such as 256f s . When the I2SC is in Master mode, writing a one to
I2SC_MR.IMCKMODE outputs MCK as master clock to the I2SMCK pin, and divides MCK to create the internal bit
clock, output on the I2SCK pin. The clock division factor is defined by writing to I2SC_MR.IMCKFS and
I2SC_MR.DATALENGTH, as described in the I2SC_MR.IMCKFS field description.
The master clock (I2SMCK) frequency is [16 × (IMCKFS + 1)] / (IMCKDIV + 1) times the sample frequency (fs), i.e.,
I2SWS frequency.
Example: if the sampling rate is 44.1 kHz with an I2S master clock (I2SMCK) ratio of 256, the core frequency must
be an integer multiple of 11.2896 MHz. Assuming an integer multiple of 4, the IMCKDIV field must be configured to
4; the field IMCKFS must then be set to 63.
The serial clock (I2SCK) frequency is 2 × Slot Length times the sample frequency (fs), where Slot Length is defined
in Table 31-4.
Table 31-4.
Slot Length
I2SC_MR.DATALENGTH
Word Length
Slot Length
0
32 bits
32
1
24 bits
2
20 bits
3
18 bits
4
16 bits
5
16 bits compact stereo
32 if I2SC_MR.IWS = 0
24 if I2SC_MR.IWS = 1
16
682
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Table 31-4.
Slot Length (Continued)
I2SC_MR.DATALENGTH
Word Length
6
8 bits
7
8 bits compact stereo
Slot Length
8
Warning: I2SC_MR.IMCKMODE must only be written to one if the master clock frequency is strictly higher than
the serial clock.
If a master clock output is not required, the MCK clock is used as I2SCK by clearing I2SC_MR.IMCKMODE.
Alternatively, if the frequency of the MCK clock used is a multiple of the required I2SCK frequency, the I2SMCK to
I2SCK divider can be used with the ratio defined by writing the I2SC_MR.IMCKFS field.
The I2SWS pin is used as word select as described in Section 31.6.4 ”I2S Reception and Transmission
Sequence”.
Figure 31-3.
I2SC Clock Generation
I2SC_CR.CKEN/CKDIS
I2SC_MR.IMCKMODE
I2SC_MR.IMCKDIV
Peripheral
Clock
Clock
Divider
Clock
Enable
Clock
Divider
I2SC_MR.IMCKMODE
0
1
I2SMCK
I2SC_MR.IMCKFS
I2SC_MR.DATALENGTH
I2SCK
master
0
I2SCK_in
slave
1
Clock
Enable
I2SC_CR.CKEN/CKDIS
I2SC_MR.MODE
I2SCK_in
internal
bit clock
Clock
Divider
I2SC_MR.DATALENGTH
I2SWS
0
I2SWS_in
1
I2SWS_in
internal
word clock
slave
31.6.6 Mono
When the Transmit Mono bit (TXMONO) in I2SC_MR is set, data written to the left channel is duplicated to the
right output channel.
When the Receive Mono bit (RXMONO) in I2SC_MR is set, data received from the left channel is duplicated to the
right channel.
31.6.7 Holding Registers
The I2SC user interface includes a Receive Holding Register (I2SC_RHR) and a Transmit Holding Register
(I2SC_THR). These registers are used to access audio samples for both audio channels.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
683
When a new data word is available in I2SC_RHR, the Receive Ready bit (RXRDY) in I2SC_SR is set. Reading
I2SC_RHR clears this bit.
A receive overrun condition occurs if a new data word becomes available before the previous data word has been
read from I2SC_RHR. In this case, the Receive Overrun bit in I2SC_SR and bit i of the RXORCH field in I2SC_SR
are set, where i is the current receive channel number.
When I2SC_THR is empty, the Transmit Ready bit (TXRDY) in I2SC_SR is set. Writing to I2SC_THR clears this
bit.
A transmit underrun condition occurs if a new data word needs to be transmitted before it has been written to
I2SC_THR. In this case, the Transmit Underrun (TXUR) bit and bit i of the TXORCH field in I2SC_SR are set,
where i is the current transmit channel number. If the TXSAME bit in I2SC_MR is zero, then a zero data word is
transmitted in case of underrun. If I2SC_MR.TXSAME is one, then the previous data word for the current transmit
channel number is transmitted.
Data words are right-justified in I2SC_RHR and I2SC_THR. For the 16-bit compact stereo data format, the left
sample uses bits 15:0 and the right sample uses bits 31:16 of the same data word. For the 8-bit compact stereo
data format, the left sample uses bits 7:0 and the right sample uses bits 15:8 of the same data word.
31.6.8 Peripheral DMA Controller Operation
All receiver audio channels can be assigned to a single PDC channel or individual audio channels can be assigned
to one PDC channel per audio channel. The same channel assignment choice applies to the transmitter audio
channels.
Channel assignment is selected by writing to the I2SC_MR.RXDMA and I2SC_MR.TXDMA bits. If a single PDC
channel is selected, all data samples use I2SC receiver or transmitter PDC channel 0.
The PDC reads from the I2SC_RHR and writes to the I2SC_THR for both audio channels successively.
The PDC transfers may use 32-bit word, 16-bit halfword, or 8-bit byte depending on the value of the
I2SC_MR.DATALENGTH field.
31.6.9 Loop-back Mode
For debug purposes, the I2SC can be configured to loop back the transmitter to the Receiver. Writing a one to the
I2SC_MR.LOOP bit internally connects I2SDO to I2SDI, so that the transmitted data is also received. Writing a
zero to I2SC_MR.LOOP restores the normal behavior with independent Receiver and Transmitter. As for other
changes to the Receiver or Transmitter configuration, the I2SC Receiver and Transmitter must be disabled before
writing to I2SC_MR to update I2SC_MR.LOOP.
31.6.10 Interrupts
An I2SC interrupt request can be triggered whenever one or several of the following bits are set in I2SC_SR:
Receive Ready (RXRDY), Receive Overrun (RXOR), Transmit Ready (TXRDY) or Transmit Underrun (TXUR).
The interrupt request is generated if the corresponding bit in the Interrupt Mask Register (I2SC_IMR) is set. Bits in
I2SC_IMR are set by writing a one to the corresponding bit in I2SC_IER and cleared by writing a one to the
corresponding bit in the Interrupt Disable Register (I2SC_IDR). The interrupt request remains active until the
corresponding bit in I2SC_SR is cleared by writing a one to the corresponding bit in the Status Clear Register
(I2SC_SCR).
For debug purposes, interrupt requests can be simulated by writing a one to the corresponding bit in the Status Set
Register (I2SC_SSR).
684
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 31-4.
Interrupt Block Diagram
Set
I2SC_IER
Clear
I2SC_IMR
I2SC_IDR
Transmitter
TXRDY
TXUR
Interrupt
Logic
I2SC interrupt line
Receiver
RXRDY
RXOR
31.7
I2SC Application Examples
The I2SC supports several serial communication modes used in audio or high-speed serial links. Examples of
standard applications are shown in the following figures. All serial link applications supported by the I2SC are not
listed here.
Figure 31-5.
Slave Transmitter I2SC Application Example
I2SC
Serial Clock
I2SCK
Stereo Audio
DAC
Word Select
I2SWS
Serial Data Out
I2SDO
I2SDI
Serial Clock
Word Select
Serial Data Out
MSB
LSB
MSB
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
685
Figure 31-6.
Dual Microphone Application Block Diagram
I2S Microphone
for Left Channel
I2SC
I2SMCK
Serial Clock
I2SCK
Word Select
I2SWS
SCK
WS
L/R
Tied to 1
I2SDO
Serial Data In
I2SDI
SD
I2S Microphone
for Right Channel
SCK
WS
L/R
Tied to 0
SD
Serial Clock
Left Channel
Word Select
Right Channel
Dend
Dstart
Serial Data In
Figure 31-7.
Codec Application Block Diagram
I2SC
Master Clock
I2SMCK
Serial Clock
I2SCK
Word Select
I2SWS
Serial Data Out
I2SDO
Serial Data In
I2SDI
MCLK
I2S
Audio
Codec
BCLK
LRCLK/WCLK
DAC_SDATA/DIN
ADC_SDATA/DOUT
Serial Clock
Word Select
Left Time Slot
Dstart
Serial Data Out
Serial Data In
686
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Right Time Slot
Dend
31.8
Inter-IC Sound Controller (I2SC) User Interface
Table 31-5.
Register Mapping
Offset
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x00
Control Register
I2SC_CR
Write-only
–
0x04
Mode Register
I2SC_MR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x08
Status Register
I2SC_SR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x0C
Status Clear Register
I2SC_SCR
Write-only
–
0x10
Status Set Register
I2SC_SSR
Write-only
–
0x14
Interrupt Enable Register
I2SC_IER
Write-only
–
0x18
Interrupt Disable Register
I2SC_IDR
Write-only
–
0x1C
Interrupt Mask Register
I2SC_IMR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x20
Receiver Holding Register
I2SC_RHR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x24
Transmitter Holding Register
I2SC_THR
Write-only
–
0x28–0xFC
Reserved
–
–
–
0x100–0x124
Reserved for PDC registers for left side
–
–
–
0x128–0x1FC
Reserved
–
–
–
0x200–0x224
Reserved for PDC registers for right side
–
–
–
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
687
31.8.1 Inter-IC Sound Controller Control Register
Name:
I2SC_CR
Address:
0x40000000 (0), 0x40004000 (1)
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
SWRST
6
–
5
TXDIS
4
TXEN
3
CKDIS
2
CKEN
1
RXDIS
0
RXEN
• RXEN: Receiver Enable
0: Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
1: Writing a one to this bit enables the I2SC receiver, if RXDIS is not one. Bit I2SC_SR.RXEN is set when the receiver is
activated.
• RXDIS: Receiver Disable
0: Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
1: Writing a one to this bit disables the I2SC receiver. Bit I2SC_SR.RXEN is cleared when the receiver is stopped.
• CKEN: Clocks Enable
0: Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
1: Writing a one to this bit enables the I2SC clocks generation, if CKDIS is not one.
• CKDIS: Clocks Disable
0: Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
1: Writing a zone to this bit disables the I2SC clock generation.
• TXEN: Transmitter Enable
0: Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
1: Writing a one to this bit enables the I2SC transmitter, if TXDIS is not one. Bit I2SC_SR.TXEN is set when the Transmitter is started.
• TXDIS: Transmitter Disable
0: Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
1: Writing a one to this bit disables the I2SC transmitter. Bit I2SC_SR.TXEN is cleared when the Transmitter is stopped.
• SWRST: Software Reset
0: Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
1: Writing a one to this bit resets all the registers in the I2SC. The I2SC is disabled after the reset.
688
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
31.8.2 Inter-IC Sound Controller Mode Register
Name:
I2SC_MR
Address:
0x40000004 (0), 0x40004004 (1)
Access:
Read/Write
31
IWS
30
IMCKMODE
29
23
–
22
–
21
15
–
14
TXSAME
13
TXDMA
12
TXMONO
6
5
–
4
7
FORMAT
28
27
26
25
24
18
17
16
11
–
10
RXLOOP
9
RXDMA
8
RXMONO
3
DATALENGTH
2
1
–
0
MODE
IMCKFS
20
19
IMCKDIV
The I2SC_MR must only be written when the I2SC is stopped in order to avoid unexpected behavior on the I2SWS, I2SCK
and I2SDO outputs. The proper sequence is to write to I2SC_MR, then write to I2SC_CR to enable the I2SC or to disable
the I2SC before writing a new value to I2SC_MR.
• MODE: Inter-IC Sound Controller Mode
Value
Name
Description
0
SLAVE
I2SCK and i2SWS pin inputs used as bit clock and word select/frame synchronization.
1
MASTER
Bit clock and word select/frame synchronization generated by I2SC from MCK and output to I2SCK
and I2SWS pins. MCK is output as master clock on I2SMCK if I2SC_MR.IMCKMODE is set.
• DATALENGTH: Data Word Length
Value
Name
Description
0
32_BITS
Data length is set to 32 bits
1
24_BITS
Data length is set to 24 bits
2
20_BITS
Data length is set to 20 bits
3
18_BITS
Data length is set to 18 bits
4
16_BITS
Data length is set to 16 bits
5
16_BITS_COMPAC
T
Data length is set to 16-bit compact stereo. Left sample in bits 15:0 and right sample in bits 31:16 of
same word.
6
8_BITS
Data length is set to 8 bits
7
8_BITS_COMPACT
Data length is set to 8-bit compact stereo. Left sample in bits 7:0 and right sample in bits 15:8 of the
same word.
• FORMAT: Data Format
Value
Name
Description
0
I2S
I2S format, stereo with I2SWS low for left channel, and MSB of sample starting one I2SCK period
after I2SWS edge
1
LJ
Left-justified format, stereo with I2SWS high for left channel, and MSB of sample starting on I2SWS
edge
2
–
Reserved
3
–
Reserved
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
689
• RXDMA: Single or Multiple PDC Channels for Receiver
0: Receiver uses one PDC channel for both audio channels.
1: Receiver uses one PDC channel per audio channel.
• RXMONO: Receive Mono
0: Stereo
1: Mono, with left audio samples duplicated to right audio channel by the I2SC.
• RXLOOP: Loop-back Test Mode
0: Normal mode
1: I2SDO output of I2SC is internally connected to I2SDI input.
• TXMONO: Transmit Mono
0: Stereo
1: Mono, with left audio samples duplicated to right audio channel by the I2SC.
• TXDMA: Single or Multiple PDC Channels for Transmitter
0: Transmitter uses one PDC channel for both audio channels.
1: Transmitter uses one PDC channel per audio channel.
• TXSAME: Transmit Data when Underrun
0: Zero sample transmitted when underrun.
1: Previous sample transmitted when underrun
• IMCKDIV: Peripheral Clock to I2SC Master Clock Ratio
I2SMCK Master clock output frequency is Peripheral Clock divided by (IMCKDIV + 1). Please refer to the IMCKFS field
description.
Note: This field is write-only. Always read as 0.
• IMCKFS: Master Clock to fs Ratio
Master clock frequency is [16 × (IMCKFS + 1)] / (IMCKDIV + 1) times the sample rate, i.e., I2SWS frequency.
Value
Name
Description
0
M2SF16
Sample frequency ratio set to 16
1
M2SF32
Sample frequency ratio set to 32
2
M2SF48
Sample frequency ratio set to 48
3
M2SF64
Sample frequency ratio set to 64
5
M2SF96
Sample frequency ratio set to 96
7
M2SF128
Sample frequency ratio set to 128
11
M2SF192
Sample frequency ratio set to 192
15
M2SF256
Sample frequency ratio set to 256
23
M2SF384
Sample frequency ratio set to 384
31
M2SF512
Sample frequency ratio set to 512
47
M2SF768
Sample frequency ratio set to 768
63
M2SF1024
Sample frequency ratio set to 1024
690
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
• IMCKMODE: Master Clock Mode
0: No master clock generated (Peripheral Clock drives I2SCK output).
1: Master clock generated (internally generated clock is used as I2SMCK output).
Warning: If I2SMCK frequency is the same as I2SCK, IMCKMODE must be cleared. Refer to Section 31.6.5 ”Serial Clock
and Word Select Generation” and Table 31-4 “Slot Length”.
• IWS: I2SWS Slot Width
0: I2SWS slot is 32 bits wide for DATALENGTH = 18/20/24 bits.
1: I2SWS slot is 24 bits wide for DATALENGTH = 18/20/24 bits.
Refer to Table 31-4 “Slot Length”.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
691
31.8.3 Inter-IC Sound Controller Status Register
Name:
I2SC_SR
Address:
0x40000008 (0), 0x40004008 (1)
Access:
Read-only
31
TXBUFE
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
20
19
RXBUFF
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
7
ENDTX
6
TXUR
5
TXRDY
4
TXEN
3
ENDRX
2
RXOR
1
RXRDY
TXURCH
8
RXORCH
0
RXEN
• RXEN: Receiver Enabled
0: This bit is cleared when the receiver is disabled, following a RXDIS or SWRST request in I2SC_CR.
1: This bit is set when the receiver is enabled, following a RXEN request in I2SC_CR.
• RXRDY: Receive Ready
0: This bit is cleared when I2SC_RHR is read.
1: This bit is set when received data is present in I2SC_RHR.
• RXOR: Receive Overrun
0: This bit is cleared when the corresponding bit in I2SC_SCR is written to one.
1: This bit is set when an overrun error occurs on I2SC_RHR or when the corresponding bit in I2SC_SSR is written to one.
• ENDRX: End of Receiver Transfer
0: This bit is set when PDC has completed the receive transfer.
1: This bit is cleared when a new receive transfer is programmed into the PDC.
• TXEN: Transmitter Enabled
0: This bit is cleared when the transmitter is disabled, following a I2SC_CR.TXDIS or I2SC_CR.SWRST request.
1: This bit is set when the transmitter is enabled, following a I2SC_CR.TXEN request.
• TXRDY: Transmit Ready
0: This bit is cleared when data is written to I2SC_THR.
1: This bit is set when I2SC_THR is empty and can be written with new data to be transmitted.
• TXUR: Transmit Underrun
0: This bit is cleared when the corresponding bit in I2SC_SCR is written to one.
1: This bit is set when an underrun error occurs on I2SC_THR or when the corresponding bit in I2SC_SSR is written to
one.
• ENDTX: End of Transmitter Transfer
0: This bit is set when the PDC has completed the transmit transfer.
692
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
1: This bit is cleared when a new transmit transfer is programmed into the PDC.
• RXORCH: Receive Overrun Channel
This field is cleared when I2SC_SCR.RXOR is written to one.
Bit i of this field is set when a receive overrun error occurred in channel i (i = 0 for first channel of the frame).
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full
0: This bit is set when received data is present in I2SC_RHR.
1: This bit is cleared when I2SC_RHR is read and no more received data is present.
• TXURCH: Transmit Underrun Channel
0: This field is cleared when I2SC_SCR.TXUR is written to one.
1: Bit i of this field is set when a transmit underrun error occurred in channel i (i = 0 for first channel of the frame).
• TXBUFE: Transmit Buffer Empty
0: This bit is set when I2SC_THR is empty and can be written with new data to be transmitted.
1: This bit is cleared when data is written to I2SC_THR and is being transmitted.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
693
31.8.4 Inter-IC Sound Controller Status Clear Register
Name:
I2SC_SCR
Address:
0x4000000C (0), 0x4000400C (1)
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
23
–
22
–
21
15
–
14
–
7
–
6
TXUR
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
20
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
RXOR
1
–
TXURCH
8
RXORCH
0
–
• RXOR: Receive Overrun Status Clear
Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
Writing a one to this bit clears the status bit.
• TXUR: Transmit Underrun Status Clear
Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
Writing a one to this bit clears the status bit.
• RXORCH: Receive Overrun Per Channel Status Clear
Writing a zero has no effect.
Writing a one to any bit in this field clears the corresponding bit in the I2SC_SR and the corresponding interrupt request.
• TXURCH: Transmit Underrun Per Channel Status Clear
Writing a zero has no effect.
Writing a one to any bit in this field clears the corresponding bit in the I2SC_SR and the corresponding interrupt request.
694
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
31.8.5 Inter-IC Sound Controller Status Set Register
Name:
I2SC_SSR
Address:
0x40000010 (0), 0x40004010 (1)
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
23
–
22
–
21
15
–
14
–
7
–
6
TXUR
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
20
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
RXOR
1
–
TXURCH
8
RXORCH
0
–
• RXOR: Receive Overrun Status Set
Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
Writing a one to this bit sets the status bit.
• TXUR: Transmit Underrun Status Set
Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
Writing a one to this bit sets the status bit.
• RXORCH: Receive Overrun Per Channel Status Set
Writing a zero has no effect.
Writing a one to any bit in this field sets the corresponding bit in I2SC_SR and the corresponding interrupt request.
• TXURCH: Transmit Underrun Per Channel Status Set
Writing a zero has no effect.
Writing a one to any bit in this field sets the corresponding bit in I2SC_SR and the corresponding interrupt request.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
695
31.8.6 Inter-IC Sound Controller Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
I2SC_IER
Address:
0x40000014 (0), 0x40004014 (1)
Access:
Write-only
31
TXEMPTY
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
RXFULL
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
ENDTX
6
TXUR
5
TXRDY
4
–
3
ENDRX
2
RXOR
1
RXRDY
0
–
• RXRDY: Receiver Ready Interrupt Enable
0: Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
1: Writing a one to this bit sets the corresponding bit in I2SC_IMR.
• RXOR: Receiver Overrun Interrupt Enable
0: Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
1: Writing a one to this bit sets the corresponding bit in I2SC_IMR.
• ENDRX: End of Reception Interrupt Enable
0: Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
1: Writing a one to this bit sets the corresponding bit in the I2SC_IMR.
• TXRDY: Transmit Ready Interrupt Enable
0: Writing a zero to this bit as no effect.
1: Writing a one to this bit sets the corresponding bit in I2SC_IMR.
• TXUR: Transmit Underflow Interrupt Enable
0: Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
1: Writing a one to this bit sets the corresponding bit in I2SC_IMR.
• ENDTX: End of Transmission Interrupt Enable
0: Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
1: Writing a one to this bit sets the corresponding bit in I2SC_IMR.
• RXFULL: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Enable
0: Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
1: Writing a one to this bit sets the corresponding bit in I2SC_IMR.
• TXEMPTY: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Enable
0: Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
1: Writing a one to this bit sets the corresponding bit in I2SC_IMR.
696
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
31.8.7 Inter-IC Sound Controller Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
I2SC_IDR
Address:
0x40000018 (0), 0x40004018 (1)
Access:
Write-only
31
TXEMPTY
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
RXFULL
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
ENDTX
6
TXUR
5
TXRDY
4
–
3
ENDRX
2
RXOR
1
RXRDY
0
–
• RXRDY: Receiver Ready Interrupt Disable
0: Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
1: Writing a one to this bit clears the corresponding bit in I2SC_IMR.
• RXOR: Receiver Overrun Interrupt Disable
0: Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
1: Writing a one to this bit clears the corresponding bit in I2SC_IMR.
• ENDRX: End of Reception Interrupt Disable
0: Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
1: Writing a one to this bit clears the corresponding bit in I2SC_IMR.
• TXRDY: Transmit Ready Interrupt Disable
0: Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
1: Writing a one to this bit clears the corresponding bit in I2SC_IMR.
• TXUR: Transmit Underflow Interrupt Disable
0: Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
1: Writing a one to this bit clears the corresponding bit in I2SC_IMR.
• ENDTX: End of Transmission Interrupt Disable
0: Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
1: Writing a one to this bit clears the corresponding bit in I2SC_IMR.
• RXFULL: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Disable
0: Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
1: Writing a one to this bit clears the corresponding bit in I2SC_IMR.
• TXEMPTY: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Disable
0: Writing a zero to this bit has no effect.
1: Writing a one to this bit clears the corresponding bit in I2SC_IMR.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
697
31.8.8 Inter-IC Sound Controller Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
I2SC_IMR
Address:
0x4000001C (0), 0x4000401C (1)
Access:
Write-only
31
TXEMPTY
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
RXFULL
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
ENDTX
6
TXUR
5
TXRDY
4
–
3
ENDRX
2
RXOR
1
RXRDY
0
–
• RXRDY: Receiver Ready Interrupt Disable
0: The corresponding interrupt is disabled. This bit is cleared when the corresponding bit in I2SC_IDR is written to one.
1: The corresponding interrupt is enabled. This bit is set when the corresponding bit in I2SC_IER is written to one.
• RXOR: Receiver Overrun Interrupt Disable
0: The corresponding interrupt is disabled. This bit is cleared when the corresponding bit in I2SC_IDR is written to one.
1: The corresponding interrupt is enabled. This bit is set when the corresponding bit in I2SC_IER is written to one.
• ENDRX: End of Reception Interrupt Disable
0: The corresponding interrupt is disabled. This bit is cleared when the corresponding bit in I2SC_IDR is written to one.
1: The corresponding interrupt is enabled. This bit is set when the corresponding bit in I2SC_IER is written to one.
• TXRDY: Transmit Ready Interrupt Disable
0: The corresponding interrupt is disabled. This bit is cleared when the corresponding bit in I2SC_IDR is written to one.
1: The corresponding interrupt is enabled. This bit is set when the corresponding bit in I2SC_IER is written to one.
• TXUR: Transmit Underflow Interrupt Disable
0: The corresponding interrupt is disabled. This bit is cleared when the corresponding bit in I2SC_IDR is written to one.
1: The corresponding interrupt is enabled. This bit is set when the corresponding bit in I2SC_IER is written to one.
• ENDTX: End of Transmission Interrupt Disable
0: The corresponding interrupt is disabled. This bit is cleared when the corresponding bit in I2SC_IDR is written to one.
1: The corresponding interrupt is enabled. This bit is set when the corresponding bit in I2SC_IER is written to one.
• RXFULL: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Disable
0: The corresponding interrupt is disabled. This bit is cleared when the corresponding bit in I2SC_IDR is written to one.
1: The corresponding interrupt is enabled. This bit is set when the corresponding bit in I2SC_IER is written to one.
• TXEMPTY: Transmit Buffer Empty Interrupt Disable
0: The corresponding interrupt is disabled. This bit is cleared when the corresponding bit in I2SC_IDR is written to one.
1: The corresponding interrupt is enabled. This bit is set when the corresponding bit in I2SC_IER is written to one.
698
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
31.8.9 Inter-IC Sound Controller Receiver Holding Register
Name:
I2SC_RHR
Address:
0x40000020 (0), 0x40004020 (1)
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
RHR
23
22
21
20
RHR
15
14
13
12
RHR
7
6
5
4
RHR
• RHR: Receiver Holding Register
This field is set by hardware to the last received data word. If I2SC_MR.DATALENGTH specifies fewer than 32 bits, data is
right justified in the RHR field.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
699
31.8.10 Inter-IC Sound Controller Transmitter Holding Register
Name:
I2SC_THR
Address:
0x40000024 (0), 0x40004024 (1)
Access:
Write-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
THR
23
22
21
20
THR
15
14
13
12
THR
7
6
5
4
THR
• THR: Transmitter Holding Register
Next data word to be transmitted after the current word if TXRDY is not set. If I2SC_MR.DATALENGTH specifies fewer
than 32 bits, data is right-justified in the THR field.
700
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
32.
Pulse Density Modulation Interface Controller (PDMIC)
32.1
Description
The Pulse Density Modulation Interface Controller (PDMIC) is a PDM interface controller and decoder that
supports both mono/stereo PDM format. It integrates a clock generator driving the PDM microphones and embeds
filters which decimate the incoming bitstream to obtain most common audio rates.
32.2
32.3
Embedded Characteristics
Multiplexed PDM Input Support
16-bit Resolution
PDC Support
Up to 4 Conversions Stored in the Converted Data Register (PDMIC_CDR)
Register Write Protection
Block Diagram
Figure 32-1.
PDMIC Block Diagram
PMC
Peripheral Clock
PDM Interface Controller
PDMIC Interrupt
Control
Logic
Interrupt
Controller
System Bus
PDC
Peripheral Bridge
Digital
Filter
User
Interface
APB
PDMIC_DAT
PDMIC_CLK
PDM
Data
Sampling
Data, to second PDM Interface Controller
Clock, from second PDM Interface Controller
Configuration, from second PDM Interface Controller
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
701
32.4
Signal Description
Table 32-1.
702
PDMIC Pin Description
Pin Name
Description
Type
PDMIC_CLK
Pulse Density Modulation Bitstream Sampling Clock
Output
PDMIC_DAT
Pulse Density Modulation Multiplexed Data
Input
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
32.5
Product Dependencies
32.5.1 I/O Lines
The pins used for interfacing the PDMIC are multiplexed with PIO lines. The programmer must first program the
PIO controllers to assign the peripheral functions to PDMIC pins.
Table 32-2.
I/O Lines
Instance
Signal
I/O Line
Peripheral
PDMIC0
PDMIC0_CLK
PA10
B
PDMIC0
PDMIC0_DAT
PA9
B
32.5.2 Power Management
The PDMIC is not continuously clocked. The user must first enable the PDMIC peripheral clock in the Power
Management Controller (PMC) before using the controller.
32.5.3 Interrupt Sources
The PDMIC interrupt line is connected on one of the internal sources of the Interrupt Controller. Using the PDMIC
Table 32-3.
Peripheral IDs
Instance
ID
PDMIC0
13
PDMIC1
18
interrupt requires the Interrupt Controller to be programmed first.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
703
32.6
Functional Description
32.6.1 PDM Interface
32.6.1.1
Description
The PDM clock (PDMIC_CLK) is used to sample the PDM bitstream.
The PDMIC_CLK frequency range is between peripheral clock/2 and peripheral clock/256.
The field PRESCAL in the Mode Register (PDMIC_MR) must be programmed in order to provide a PDMIC_CLK
frequency compliant with the microphone parameters.
32.6.1.2
Start-up Sequence
To start processing the bitstream coming from the PDM interface, follow the steps below:
1. Clear all bits in the Control Register (PDMIC_CR) or compute a soft reset using the SWRST bit of
PDMIC_CR.
2.
Configure the PRESCAL field in PDMIC_MR according to the microphone specifications.
3.
Enable the PDM mode and start the conversions using the ENPDM bit in PDMIC_CR.
32.6.1.3
Restrictions
The external PDM data sampling module is shared with two PDMIC modules. When two PDM microphones are
connected on the PDMIC_DAT line, both PDMICs must be enabled and the steps below must be followed:
1. Clear all bits in PDMIC_CR or compute a soft reset using the SWRST bit of PDMIC_CR in both PDMIC
modules.
2.
Configure the PMC to provide the same clock to both PDMIC modules (clock frequencies should be the
same).
3.
Configure the PRESCAL field in PDMIC_MR according to the microphone specifications (the PRESCAL
value should be the same in both PDMIC).
4.
Enable the PDM mode and start the conversions using the ENPDM bit in PDMIC_CR in the PDMIC0.
5.
Enable the PDM mode and start the conversions using the ENPDM bit in PDMIC_CR in the PDMIC1.
To stop the conversions, follow the steps below:
1. Disable the PDM mode or compute a software reset in the PDMIC1.
2.
Disable the PDM mode or compute a software reset in the PDMIC0.
The bitstream sampled on the rising edge of the PDMIC_CLK is routed to the PDMIC0 and the bitstream sampled
on the falling edge of the PDMIC_CLK is routed to the PDMIC1.
32.6.2 Digital Signal Processing (Digital Filter)
32.6.2.1
Description
The PDMIC includes a DSP section containing a decimation filter, a droop compensation filter, a sixth-order low
pass filter, a first-order high pass filter and an offset and gain compensation stage. A block diagram of the DSP
section is represented in Figure 32-2 “DSP Block Diagram”.
Data processed by the filtering section are two’s complement signals defined on 24 bits.
The filtering of the decimation stage is performed by a fourth-order sinc-based filter whose zeros are placed in
order to minimize aliasing effects of the decimation. The decimation ratio of this filter is either 32 or 64. The droop
induced by this filter can be compensated by the droop compensation stage.
The sixth-order low pass filter is used to decimate the sinc filter output by a ratio of 2.
An optional first-order high pass filter is implemented in order to eliminate the DC component of the incoming
signal.
704
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
The overall decimation ratio of this DSP section is either 64 or 128. This fits an audio sampling rate of 48 kHz with
a PDM microphone sampling frequency of either 3.072 or 6.144 MHz. The frequency response of the filters
optimizes the gain flatness between 0 and 20 kHz (when the droop compensation filter is implemented and the
high pass filter is bypassed) and highly reduces the aliasing effects of the decimation.
Figure 32-2.
DSP Block Diagram
hpf_byp
sincc_byp
PDC
16 or 32
bits
data0
3
24
24
32
+
2
Droop Compensation
High Pass Filter
Low Pass Filter
signed
right shift
0
1
0
1
16 LSBs
...
0 1
1
data
Decimation
offset * 28
32.6.2.2
32
1
signed
right shift
32/64
SINC Filter
Decimation
...
0
{
1
scale
gain
shift
Decimation Filter
The sigma-delta architecture of the PDM microphone implies a filtering and a decimation of the bitstream at the
output of the microphone bitstream. The decimation filter decimates the bitstream by either 32 or 64. To perform
this operation, a fourth-order sinc filter with an Over-Sampling Ratio (OSR) of 32 or 64 is implemented with the
following transfer function:
OSR – 1
1
–i
H ( z ) = -------------4- z
OSR
i=0
4
The DC gain of this filter is unity and does not depend on its OSR. However, as it generates a fourth-order zero at
Fs/OSR frequency multiples (Fs being the sampling frequency of the microphone), the frequency response of the
decimation filter depends on the OSR parameter. See Section 32.6.2.3 “Droop Compensation” for frequency plots.
Its non-flat frequency response can be compensated over the 0 to 20 kHz band by using the droop compensation
filter when the decimated frequency is set to 48 kHz. See Section 32.6.2.3 “Droop Compensation”.
If the decimated sampling rate is modified, the frequency response of this filter is scaled proportionally to the new
frequency.
In Figure 32-3 and Figure 32-4, Fs is the sampling rate of the PDM microphone.
Figure 32-3.
Spectral mask of an OSR = 32, Fs = 6.144 MHz, Fourth-Order Sinc Filter: Overall Response (continuous line) and
0 to 20 kHz Bandwidth Response (dashed line)
frequency (kHz), base band, output sampling rate = 48 kHz
0
2.5
5
7.5
10
12.5
15
17.5
20
0
-24
-0.14
-48
-0.28
-72
-0.42
-96
-0.56
-120
0
Fs/16
2*Fs/16
3*Fs/16 4*Fs/16 5*Fs/16
frequency (Hz), overall mask
6*Fs/16
7*Fs/16
gain (dB), base band
gain (dB), overall mask
0
-0.7
8*Fs/16
The zeros of this filter are located at multiples of Fs/32
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
705
Figure 32-4.
Spectral Mask of an OSR = 64, Fs = 3.072 MHz, Fourth-order Sinc Filter: Overall Response (continuous line) and
0 to 20 kHz Bandwidth Response (dashed line)
frequency (kHz), base band, output sampling rate = 48 kHz
2.5
5
7.5
10
12.5
15
17.5
20
0
-24
-0.6
-48
-1.2
-72
-1.8
-96
-2.4
-120
0
Fs/16
2*Fs/16
3*Fs/16 4*Fs/16 5*Fs/16
frequency (Hz), overall mask
6*Fs/16
7*Fs/16
gain (dB), base band
gain (dB), overall mask
0
0
-3
8*Fs/16
The zeros of this filter are located at multiples of Fs/64.
32.6.2.3
Droop Compensation
The droop effect introduced by the sinc filter can be compensated in the 0 to 20 kHz by the droop compensation
filter (see Figure 32-5). This is a second-order IIR filter which is applied on the signal output by the sinc. The
default coefficients of the droop compensation filter are computed to optimize the droop of the sinc filter with the
decimated frequency equal to 48 kHz.
This filter compensates the droop of the sinc filter regardless of the OSR value.
If the decimated sampling rate is modified, the frequency response of this filter is scaled proportionally to the new
frequency.
This filter can be bypassed by setting the SINBYP bit in the PDMIC DSP Configuration Register 0
(PDMIC_DSPR0).
Figure 32-5.
Droop Compensation Filter Overall Frequency Response
droop compensation overall response
2
sinc filter response
sinc filter+droop compensation response
0
gain (dB)
-2
-4
-6
-8
-10
706
0
1
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
2
3
4
5
6
frequency (Hz)
7
8
9
10
4
x 10
Figure 32-6.
Droop Compensation Filter 0 to 20 kHz Band Flatness
-4
2
droop compensation flatness in 0-20kHz band
x 10
gain (dB)
1
0
-1
-2
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
frequency (Hz)
1.4
1.6
1.8
2
4
x 10
Low Pass Filter
The PDMIC includes a sixth-order IIR filter that performs a low pass transfer function and decimates by 2 the
output of the sinc filter. The coefficients are computed for a decimated sampling rate of 48 kHz and optimize the 0
to 20 kHz band flatness while rejecting the aliasing of the PDM microphone by at least 60 dB in the 28 to 48 kHz
band.
If the decimated sampling rate is modified, the frequency response of this filter is scaled proportionally to the new
frequency.
Figure 32-7 and Figure 32-8 are drawn for an output sampling frequency of 48 kHz.
Figure 32-7.
Low Pass Filter Spectral Mask
Low pass filter spectral mask
0
-20
-40
gain (dB)
32.6.2.4
0
-60
-80
-100
-120
0
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
frequency (Hz)
3.5
4
4.5
5
4
x 10
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
707
Figure 32-8.
Low Pass Filter Ripple in the 0 to 20 kHz Band
Low pass filter 0-20kHz ripple
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
gain (dB)
0.01
0
-0.01
-0.02
-0.03
-0.04
-0.05
32.6.2.5
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
frequency (Hz)
1.4
1.6
1.8
2
4
x 10
High Pass Filter
The PDMIC includes an optional first-order IIR filter performing a high pass transfer function after the low pass
filter and before the decimation. The coefficients are computed for a decimated sampling rate of 48 kHz to obtain a
-3dB cutoff frequency at 15 Hz.
If the decimated sampling rate is modified, the frequency response of this filter is scaled proportionally to the new
frequency.
This filter can be bypassed by setting the HPFBYP bit in PDMIC_DSPR0 (see “PDMIC DSP Configuration
Register 0” on page 719).
Figure 32-9 is drawn for an output sampling frequency of 48 kHz.
Figure 32-9.
High Pass Filter Spectral Mask in the 0 to 100 Hz Band
High pass filter spectral mask
0
-5
gain (dB)
-10
-15
-20
-25
-30
32.6.2.6
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
frequency (Hz)
70
80
90
100
Gain and Offset Compensation
An offset, a gain, a scaling factor and a shift can be applied to a converted PDM microphone value using the
following operation:
8
( data 0 + offset × 2 ) × dgain
data = -----------------------------------------------------------------------scale + shift + 8
2
where:
708
data0 is a signed integer defined on 24 bits. It is the output of the filtering channel.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
offset is a signed integer defined on 16 bits (see PDMIC DSP Configuration Register 1). It is multiplied by 28
to have the same weight as data0.
dgain is an unsigned integer defined on 15 bits (see PDMIC DSP Configuration Register 1). Only the 32
MSBs of the multiplication operation are used for scaling and shifting operations.
scale is an unsigned integer defined on 4 bits (see PDMIC DSP Configuration Register 0). It shifts the
multiplication operation result by scale bits to the right. Maximum allowed value is 15.
shift is an unsigned integer defined on 4 bits (see PDMIC DSP Configuration Register 0). It shifts the
multiplication operation result by shift bits to the right. Maximum allowed value is 15.
If the data transfer is configured in 32-bit mode (see PDMIC DSP Configuration Register 0), the 2shift division is not
performed and the 32-bit result of the remaining operation is sent.
If the data transfer is configured in 16-bit mode, the 2shift division is performed. The result is then saturated to be
within ±(215-1) and the 16 LSBs of this saturation operation are sent to the controller as the result of the PDM
microphone conversion.
Default parameters are defined to output a 16-bit result whatever the data transfer configuration may be.
32.6.3 Conversion Results
When a conversion is completed, the resulting 16-bit digital value is stored in the PDMIC Converted Data Register
(PDMIC_CDR).
The DRDY bit in the Interrupt Status Register (PDMIC_ISR) is set. In the case of a connected PDC channel,
DRDY rising triggers a data transfer request. In any case, DRDY can trigger an interrupt.
Reading PDMIC_CDR clears the DRDY flag.
Figure 32-10. DRDY Flag Behavior
Write the PDMIC_CR
with ENPDM = 1
Read the PDMIC_CDR
Read the PDMIC_CDR
DRDY
(PDMIC_SR)
If PDMIC_CDR is not read before further incoming data is converted, the Overrun Error (OVRE) flag is set in
PDMIC_ISR. Likewise, new data converted when DRDY is high sets the OVRE bit (Overrun Error) in PDMIC_ISR.
In case of overrun, the newly converted data is lost.
The OVRE flag is automatically cleared when PDMIC_ISR is read.
32.6.4 Buffer Structure
The PDC read channel is triggered each time new data is stored in PDMIC_CDR. The same structure of data is
repeatedly stored in PDMIC_CDR each time a trigger event occurs. Depending on the user mode of operation as
defined in PDMIC_MR, the structure differs. Each data transfer to PDC buffer, carried on a half-word (16-bit),
consists of the last converted data, right-aligned.
32.6.5 Register Write Protection
To prevent any single software error from corrupting PDMIC behavior, certain registers in the address space can
be write-protected by setting the WPEN bit in the PDMIC Write Protection Mode Register (PDMIC_WPMR).
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
709
If a write access to a write-protected register is detected, the WPVS flag in the PDMIC Write Protection Status
Register (PDMIC_WPSR) is set and the field WPVSRC indicates the register in which the write access has been
attempted.
The WPVS bit is automatically cleared after reading the PDMIC_WPSR.
The following registers can be write-protected:
710
PDMIC Mode Register
PDMIC DSP Configuration Register 0
PDMIC DSP Configuration Register 1
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
32.7
Pulse Density Modulation Interface Controller (PDMIC) User Interface
Table 32-4.
Register Mapping
Offset(1)
Register
Name
Access
Reset
0x00
Control Register
PDMIC_CR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x04
Mode Register
PDMIC_MR
Read/Write
0x00F00000
Reserved
–
–
–
0x14
Converted Data Register
PDMIC_CDR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x18
Interrupt Enable Register
PDMIC_IER
Write-only
–
0x1C
Interrupt Disable Register
PDMIC_IDR
Write-only
–
0x20
Interrupt Mask Register
PDMIC_IMR
Read-only
0x00000000
0x24
Interrupt Status Register
PDMIC_ISR
Read-only
0x00000000
Reserved
–
–
–
0x58
DSP Configuration Register 0
PDMIC_DSPR0
Read/Write
0x00000000
0x5C
DSP Configuration Register 1
PDMIC_DSPR1
Read/Write
0x00000001
Reserved
–
–
–
0xE4
Write Protection Mode Register
PDMIC_WPMR
Read/Write
0x00000000
0xE8
Write Protection Status Register
PDMIC_WPSR
Read-only
0x00000000
Reserved
–
–
–
Reserved for PDC Registers
–
–
–
0x08–0x10
0x28–0x54
0x60–0xE0
0xEC–0xFC
0x100–0x124
Notes:
1. If an offset is not listed in the table it must be considered as “reserved”.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
711
32.7.1 PDMIC Control Register
Name:
PDMIC_CR
Address:
0x4002C000 (0), 0x40030000 (1)
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
ENPDM
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
SWRST
• SWRST: Software Reset
0: No effect.
1: Resets the PDMIC, simulating a hardware reset.
Warning: The read value of this bit is always 0.
• ENPDM: Enable PDM
0: Disables the PDM and stops the conversions.
1: Enables the PDM and starts the conversions.
712
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
32.7.2 PDMIC Mode Register
Name:
PDMIC_MR
Address:
0x4002C004 (0), 0x40030004 (1)
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
13
12
11
PRESCAL
10
9
8
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PDMIC Write Protection Mode Register.
• PRESCAL: Prescaler Rate Selection
PRESCAL determines the frequency of the PDM bitstream sampling clock (PDMIC_CLK):
f peripheral clock
PRESCAL = -------------------------------------- – 1
2 × f PDMIC_CLK
where fperipheral clock is the system clock frequency in Hz.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
713
32.7.3 PDMIC Converted Data Register
Name:
PDMIC_CDR
Address:
0x4002C014 (0), 0x40030014 (1)
Access:
Read-only
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
DATA
23
22
21
20
DATA
15
14
13
12
DATA
7
6
5
4
DATA
• DATA: Data Converted
The analog-to-digital conversion data is placed into this register at the end of a conversion and remains until it is read.
714
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
32.7.4 PDMIC Interrupt Enable Register
Name:
PDMIC_IER
Address:
0x4002C018 (0), 0x40030018 (1)
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
RXBUFF
27
ENDRX
26
–
25
OVRE
24
DRDY
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
The following configuration values are valid for all listed bit names of this register:
0: No effect.
1: Enables the corresponding interrupt.
• DRDY: Data Ready Interrupt Enable
• OVRE: Overrun Error Interrupt Enable
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Enable
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Enable
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
715
32.7.5 PDMIC Interrupt Disable Register
Name:
PDMIC_IDR
Address:
0x4002C01C (0), 0x4003001C (1)
Access:
Write-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
RXBUFF
27
ENDRX
26
–
25
OVRE
24
DRDY
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
The following configuration values are valid for all listed bit names of this register:
0: No effect.
1: Disables the corresponding interrupt.
• DRDY: Data Ready Interrupt Disable
• OVRE: General Overrun Error Interrupt Disable
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Disable
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Disable
716
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
32.7.6 PDMIC Interrupt Mask Register
Name:
PDMIC_IMR
Address:
0x4002C020 (0), 0x40030020 (1)
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
RXBUFF
27
ENDRX
26
–
25
OVRE
24
DRDY
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
The following configuration values are valid for all listed bit names of this register:
0: The corresponding interrupt is disabled.
1: The corresponding interrupt is enabled.
• DRDY: Data Ready Interrupt Mask
• OVRE: General Overrun Error Interrupt Mask
• ENDRX: End of Receive Buffer Interrupt Mask
• RXBUFF: Receive Buffer Full Interrupt Mask
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
717
32.7.7 PDMIC Interrupt Status Register
Name:
PDMIC_ISR
Address:
0x4002C024 (0), 0x40030024 (1)
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
RXBUFF
27
ENDRX
26
–
25
OVRE
24
DRDY
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
FIFOCNT
15
–
14
–
13
–
12
–
11
–
10
–
9
–
8
–
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
–
• FIFOCNT: FIFO Count
Number of conversions available in the FIFO (not a source of interrupt).
• DRDY: Data Ready (cleared by reading PDMIC_CDR)
0: No data has been converted since the last read of PDMIC_CDR.
1: At least one data has been converted and is available in PDMIC_CDR.
• OVRE: Overrun Error (cleared on read)
0: No overrun error has occurred since the last read of PDMIC_ISR.
1: At least one overrun error has occurred since the last read of PDMIC_ISR.
• ENDRX: End of RX Buffer (cleared by writing PDMIC_RCR or PDMIC_RNCR)
0: The Receive Counter register has not reached 0 since the last write in PDMIC_RCR or PDMIC_RNCR.
1: The Receive Counter register has reached 0 since the last write in PDMIC_RCR or PDMIC_RNCR.
Note: PDMIC_RCR and PDMIC_RNCR are located in the Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC).
• RXBUFF: RX Buffer Full (cleared by writing PDMIC_RCR or PDMIC_RNCR)
0: PDMIC_RCR or PDMIC_RNCR has a value other than 0.
1: Both PDMIC_RCR and PDMIC_RNCR have a value of 0.
Note: PDMIC_RCR and PDMIC_RNCR are located in the Peripheral DMA Controller (PDC).
718
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
32.7.8 PDMIC DSP Configuration Register 0
Name:
PDMIC_DSPR0
Address:
0x4002C058 (0), 0x40030058 (1)
Access:
Read/Write
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
23
–
22
–
21
–
20
–
19
–
18
–
17
–
16
–
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
1
HPFBYP
0
–
SHIFT
7
–
6
SCALE
5
OSR
4
3
SIZE
2
SINBYP
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PDMIC Write Protection Mode Register.
• HPFBYP: High-Pass Filter Bypass
0: High-pass filter enabled.
1: Bypasses the high-pass filter.
• SINBYP: SINCC Filter Bypass
0: Droop compensation filter enabled.
1: Bypasses the droop compensation filter.
• SIZE: Data Size
0: Converted data size is 16 bits.
1: Converted data size is 32 bits.
• OSR: Oversampling Ratio
Value
Name
Description
0
128
Oversampling ratio is 128
1
64
Oversampling ratio is 64
Note: Values not listed are reserved.
• SCALE: Data Scale
Shifts the multiplication operation result by SCALE bits to the right.
• SHIFT: Data Shift
Shifts the scaled result by SHIFT bits to the right.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
719
32.7.9 PDMIC DSP Configuration Register 1
Name:
PDMIC_DSPR1
Address:
0x4002C05C (0), 0x4003005C (1)
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
DGAIN
10
9
8
3
2
1
0
OFFSET
23
22
21
20
OFFSET
15
–
14
13
12
7
6
5
4
DGAIN
This register can only be written if the WPEN bit is cleared in the PDMIC Write Protection Mode Register.
• DGAIN: Gain Correction
Gain correction to apply to the final result.
• OFFSET: Offset Correction
Offset correction to apply to the final result.
DGAIN and OFFSET values can be determined using the formula in Section 32.6.2.6 “Gain and Offset Compensation”.
720
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
32.7.10 PDMIC Write Protection Mode Register
Name:
PDMIC_WPMR
Address:
0x4002C0E4 (0), 0x400300E4 (1)
Access:
Read/Write
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
WPEN
WPKEY
23
22
21
20
WPKEY
15
14
13
12
WPKEY
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
• WPEN: Write Protection Enable
0: Disables the write protection if WPKEY corresponds to 0x414443 (“ADC” in ASCII).
1: Enables the write protection if WPKEY corresponds to 0x414443 (“ADC” in ASCII).
See Section 32.6.5 “Register Write Protection” for the list of registers that can be write-protected.
• WPKEY: Write Protection Key
Value
Name
0x414443
PASSWD
Description
Writing any other value in this field aborts the write operation of the WPEN bit.
Always reads as 0.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
721
32.7.11 PDMIC Write Protection Status Register
Name:
PDMIC_WPSR
Address:
0x4002C0E8 (0), 0x400300E8 (1)
Access:
Read-only
31
–
30
–
29
–
28
–
23
22
21
20
27
–
26
–
25
–
24
–
19
18
17
16
11
10
9
8
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
WPVS
WPVSRC
15
14
13
12
WPVSRC
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
• WPVS: Write Protection Violation Status
0: No write protection violation has occurred since the last read of the PDMIC_WPSR.
1: A write protection violation has occurred since the last read of the PDMIC_WPSR. If this violation is an unauthorized
attempt to write a protected register, the associated violation is reported into field WPVSRC.
• WPVSRC: Write Protection Violation Source
When WPVS = 1, WPVSRC indicates the register address offset at which a write access has been attempted.
722
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
33.
Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (USART)
33.1
Description
The Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transceiver (USART) provides one full duplex universal
synchronous asynchronous serial link. Data frame format is widely programmable (data length, parity, number of
stop bits) to support a maximum of standards. The receiver implements parity error, framing error and overrun
error detection. The receiver time-out enables handling variable-length frames and the transmitter timeguard
facilitates communications with slow remote devices. Multidrop communications are also supported through
address bit handling in reception and transmission.
The USART features three test modes: Remote loopback, Local loopback and Automatic echo.
The USART supports specific operating modes providing interfaces on RS485, and SPI buses and infrared
transceivers. The hardware handshaking feature enables an out-of-band flow control by automatic management of
the pins RTS and CTS.
The USART supports the connection to the Peripheral DMA Controller, which enables data transfers to the
transmitter and from the receiver. The PDC provides chained buffer management without any intervention of the
processor.
33.2
Embedded Characteristics
Programmable Baud Rate Generator
5- to 9-bit Full-duplex Synchronous or Asynchronous Serial Communications
̶
1, 1.5 or 2 Stop Bits in Asynchronous Mode or 1 or 2 Stop Bits in Synchronous Mode
̶
Parity Generation and Error Detection
̶
Framing Error Detection, Overrun Error Detection
̶
Digital Filter on Receive Line
̶
MSB- or LSB-first
̶
Optional Break Generation and Detection
̶
By 8 or by 16 Oversampling Receiver Frequency
̶
Optional Hardware Handshaking RTS-CTS
̶
Receiver Time-out and Transmitter Timeguard
̶
Optional Multidrop Mode with Address Generation and Detection
RS485 with Driver Control Signal
SPI Mode
̶
Master or Slave
̶
Serial Clock Programmable Phase and Polarity
̶
SPI Serial Clock (SCK) Frequency up to fperipheral clock/6
Test Modes
Supports Connection of:
̶
̶
Remote Loopback, Local Loopback, Automatic Echo
Two Peripheral DMA Controller Channels (PDC)
Offers Buffer Transfer without Processor Intervention
Register Write Protection
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
723
33.3
Block Diagram
Figure 33-1.
Figure 33-2.
USART Block Diagram
Interrupt
Controller
USART Interrupt
PIO
Controller
USART
RXD
Receiver
Channel
RTS
(Peripheral)
DMA Controller
TXD
Channel
Transmitter
CTS
Bus clock
SCK
Baud Rate
Generator
Bridge
APB
User
Interface
Peripheral clock
PMC
33.4
Peripheral clock/DIV
I/O Lines Description
Table 33-1.
I/O Line Description
Name
Description
Type
Active Level
SCK
Serial Clock
I/O
—
I/O
—
Input
—
Input
Low
Output
Low
Transmit Serial Data
TXD
or Master Out Slave In (MOSI) in SPI master mode
or Master In Slave Out (MISO) in SPI slave mode
Receive Serial Data
RXD
or Master In Slave Out (MISO) in SPI master mode
or Master Out Slave In (MOSI) in SPI slave mode
CTS
RTS
724
Clear to Send
or Slave Select (NSS) in SPI slave mode
Request to Send
or Slave Select (NSS) in SPI master mode
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
33.5
Product Dependencies
33.5.1 I/O Lines
The pins used for interfacing the USART may be multiplexed with the PIO lines. The programmer must first
program the PIO controller to assign the desired USART pins to their peripheral function. If I/O lines of the USART
are not used by the application, they can be used for other purposes by the PIO Controller.
Table 33-2.
I/O Lines
Instance
Signal
I/O Line
Peripheral
USART
CTS
PA16
A
USART
RTS
PA15
A
USART
RXD
PA5
A
USART
SCK
PA15
B
USART
TXD
PA6
A
33.5.2 Power Management
The USART is not continuously clocked. The programmer must first enable the USART clock in the Power
Management Controller (PMC) before using the USART. However, if the application does not require USART
operations, the USART clock can be stopped when not needed and be restarted later. In this case, the USART will
resume its operations where it left off.
33.5.3 Interrupt Sources
The USART interrupt line is connected on one of the internal sources of the Interrupt Controller. Using the USART
Table 33-3.
Peripheral IDs
Instance
ID
USART
14
interrupt requires the Interrupt Controller to be programmed first.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
725
33.6
Functional Description
33.6.1 Baud Rate Generator
The baud rate generator provides the bit period clock, also named the baud rate clock, to both the receiver and the
transmitter.
The baud rate generator clock source is selected by configuring the USCLKS field in the USART Mode Register
(US_MR) to one of the following:
The peripheral clock
A division of the peripheral clock, where the divider is product-dependent, but generally set to 8
The external clock, available on the SCK pin
The baud rate generator is based upon a 16-bit divider, which is programmed with the CD field of the Baud Rate
Generator register (US_BRGR). If a 0 is written to CD, the baud rate generator does not generate any clock. If a 1
is written to CD, the divider is bypassed and becomes inactive.
If the external SCK clock is selected, the duration of the low and high levels of the signal provided on the SCK pin
must be longer than a peripheral clock period. The frequency of the signal provided on SCK must be at least 3
times lower than the frequency provided on the peripheral clock in USART mode (field USART_MODE differs from
0xE or 0xF), or 6 times lower in SPI mode (field USART_MODE equals 0xE or 0xF).
Figure 33-3.
Baud Rate Generator
USCLKS
Peripheral clock
Peripheral clock/DIV
Reserved
SCK
(CLKO = 0)
CD
SCK
(CLKO = 1)
CD
0
1
2
Selected
Clock
16-bit Counter
FIDI
>1
3
1
Selected Clock
0
0
0
SYNC
OVER
Sampling
Divider
0
Baud Rate
Clock
1
1
SYNC
USCLKS = 3
33.6.1.1
Sampling
Clock
Baud Rate in Asynchronous Mode
If the USART is programmed to operate in Asynchronous mode, the selected clock is first divided by CD, which is
field programmed in the US_BRGR. The resulting clock is provided to the receiver as a sampling clock and then
divided by 16 or 8, depending on how the OVER bit in the US_MR is programmed.
If OVER is set, the receiver sampling is eight times higher than the baud rate clock. If OVER is cleared, the
sampling is performed at 16 times the baud rate clock.
The baud rate is calculated as per the following formula:
Selected Clock
Baud Rate = ----------------------------------------------( 8 ( 2 – OVER )CD )
This gives a maximum baud rate of peripheral clock divided by 8, assuming that the peripheral clock is the highest
possible clock and that the OVER bit is set.
726
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Baud Rate Calculation Example
Table 33-4 shows calculations of CD to obtain a baud rate at 38,400 bit/s for different source clock frequencies.
This table also shows the actual resulting baud rate and the error.
Table 33-4.
Baud Rate Example (OVER = 0)
Source Clock
(MHz)
Expected Baud Rate
(bit/s)
Calculation Result
CD
Actual Baud Rate
(bit/s)
Error
3,686,400
38,400
6.00
6
38,400.00
0.00%
4,915,200
38,400
8.00
8
38,400.00
0.00%
5,000,000
38,400
8.14
8
39,062.50
1.70%
7,372,800
38,400
12.00
12
38,400.00
0.00%
8,000,000
38,400
13.02
13
38,461.54
0.16%
12,000,000
38,400
19.53
20
37,500.00
2.40%
12,288,000
38,400
20.00
20
38,400.00
0.00%
14,318,180
38,400
23.30
23
38,908.10
1.31%
14,745,600
38,400
24.00
24
38,400.00
0.00%
18,432,000
38,400
30.00
30
38,400.00
0.00%
24,000,000
38,400
39.06
39
38,461.54
0.16%
24,576,000
38,400
40.00
40
38,400.00
0.00%
25,000,000
38,400
40.69
40
38,109.76
0.76%
32,000,000
38,400
52.08
52
38,461.54
0.16%
32,768,000
38,400
53.33
53
38,641.51
0.63%
33,000,000
38,400
53.71
54
38,194.44
0.54%
40,000,000
38,400
65.10
65
38,461.54
0.16%
50,000,000
38,400
81.38
81
38,580.25
0.47%
In this example, the baud rate is calculated with the following formula:
Baud Rate = Selected Clock ⁄ CD × 16
The baud rate error is calculated with the following formula. It is not recommended to work with an error higher
than 5%.
Expected Baud Rate
Error = 1 – -------------------------------------------------
Actual Baud Rate
33.6.1.2
Fractional Baud Rate in Asynchronous Mode
The baud rate generator is subject to the following limitation: the output frequency changes only by integer
multiples of the reference frequency. An approach to this problem is to integrate a fractional N clock generator that
has a high resolution. The generator architecture is modified to obtain baud rate changes by a fraction of the
reference source clock. This fractional part is programmed with the FP field in the US_BRGR. If FP is not 0, the
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
727
fractional part is activated. The resolution is one eighth of the clock divider. This feature is only available when
using USART normal mode. The fractional baud rate is calculated using the following formula:
Selected Clock
Baud Rate = ------------------------------------------------------------------ 8 ( 2 – OVER ) CD + FP
-------
8
The modified architecture is presented in the following Figure 33-4.
Figure 33-4.
Fractional Baud Rate Generator
FP
USCLKS
CD
Modulus
Control
FP
MCK
MCK/DIV
Reserved
1
2
Selected
Clock
16-bit Counter
3
SCK
(CLKO = 0)
SCK
(CLKO = 1)
CD
0
Glitch-free
Logic
FIDI
>1
1
0
SYNC
OVER
Selected Clock
0
0
Sampling
Divider
0
Baud Rate
Clock
1
1
SYNC
USCLKS = 3
33.6.1.3
Sampling
Clock
Baud Rate in Synchronous Mode or SPI Mode
If the USART is programmed to operate in Synchronous mode, the selected clock is simply divided by the field CD
in the US_BRGR.
Selected Clock
Baud Rate = -----------------------------------CD
In Synchronous mode, if the external clock is selected (USCLKS = 3), the clock is provided directly by the signal on
the USART SCK pin. No division is active. The value written in US_BRGR has no effect. The external clock
frequency must be at least 3 times lower than the system clock. In Synchronous mode master (USCLKS = 0 or 1,
CLKO set to 1), the receive part limits the SCK maximum frequency toSelected Clock/3 in USART mode, or
Selected Clock/6 in SPI mode.
When either the external clock SCK or the internal clock divided (peripheral clock/DIV) is selected, the value
programmed in CD must be even if the user has to ensure a 50:50 mark/space ratio on the SCK pin. When the
peripheral clock is selected, the baud rate generator ensures a 50:50 duty cycle on the SCK pin, even if the value
programmed in CD is odd.
33.6.2 Receiver and Transmitter Control
After reset, the receiver is disabled. The user must enable the receiver by setting the RXEN bit in the Control
register (US_CR). However, the receiver registers can be programmed before the receiver clock is enabled.
After reset, the transmitter is disabled. The user must enable it by setting the TXEN bit in the US_CR. However,
the transmitter registers can be programmed before being enabled.
The receiver and the transmitter can be enabled together or independently.
728
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
At any time, the software can perform a reset on the receiver or the transmitter of the USART by setting the
corresponding bit, RSTRX and RSTTX respectively, in the US_CR. The software resets clear the status flag and
reset internal state machines but the user interface configuration registers hold the value configured prior to
software reset. Regardless of what the receiver or the transmitter is performing, the communication is immediately
stopped.
The user can also independently disable the receiver or the transmitter by setting RXDIS and TXDIS respectively
in the US_CR. If the receiver is disabled during a character reception, the USART waits until the end of reception
of the current character, then the reception is stopped. If the transmitter is disabled while it is operating, the
USART waits the end of transmission of both the current character and character being stored in the Transmit
Holding register (US_THR). If a timeguard is programmed, it is handled normally.
33.6.3 Synchronous and Asynchronous Modes
33.6.3.1
Transmitter Operations
The transmitter performs the same in both Synchronous and Asynchronous operating modes (SYNC = 0 or SYNC
= 1). One start bit, up to 9 data bits, one optional parity bit and up to two stop bits are successively shifted out on
the TXD pin at each falling edge of the programmed serial clock.
The number of data bits is selected by the CHRL field and the MODE 9 bit in US_MR. Nine bits are selected by
setting the MODE 9 bit regardless of the CHRL field. The parity bit is set according to the PAR field in US_MR. The
even, odd, space, marked or none parity bit can be configured. The MSBF field in the US_MR configures which
data bit is sent first. If written to 1, the most significant bit is sent first. If written to 0, the less significant bit is sent
first. The number of stop bits is selected by the NBSTOP field in the US_MR. The 1.5 stop bit is supported in
Asynchronous mode only.
Figure 33-5.
Character Transmit
Example: 8-bit, Parity Enabled One Stop
Baud Rate
Clock
TXD
Start
Bit
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity
Bit
Stop
Bit
The characters are sent by writing in the Transmit Holding register (US_THR). The transmitter reports two status
bits in the Channel Status register (US_CSR): TXRDY (Transmitter Ready), which indicates that US_THR is empty
and TXEMPTY, which indicates that all the characters written in US_THR have been processed. When the current
character processing is completed, the last character written in US_THR is transferred into the Shift register of the
transmitter and US_THR becomes empty, thus TXRDY rises.
Both TXRDY and TXEMPTY bits are low when the transmitter is disabled. Writing a character in US_THR while
TXRDY is low has no effect and the written character is lost.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
729
Figure 33-6.
Transmitter Status
Baud Rate
Clock
TXD
Start
D0
Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop Start
D0
Bit Bit Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop
Bit Bit
Write
US_THR
TXRDY
TXEMPTY
33.6.3.2
Asynchronous Receiver
If the USART is programmed in Asynchronous operating mode (SYNC = 0), the receiver oversamples the RXD
input line. The oversampling is either 16 or 8 times the baud rate clock, depending on the OVER bit in the US_MR.
The receiver samples the RXD line. If the line is sampled during one half of a bit time to 0, a start bit is detected
and data, parity and stop bits are successively sampled on the bit rate clock.
If the oversampling is 16 (OVER = 0), a start is detected at the eighth sample to 0. Data bits, parity bit and stop bit
are assumed to have a duration corresponding to 16 oversampling clock cycles. If the oversampling is 8 (OVER =
1), a start bit is detected at the fourth sample to 0. Data bits, parity bit and stop bit are assumed to have a duration
corresponding to 8 oversampling clock cycles.
The number of data bits, first bit sent and Parity mode are selected by the same fields and bits as the transmitter,
i.e., respectively CHRL, MODE9, MSBF and PAR. For the synchronization mechanism only, the number of stop
bits has no effect on the receiver as it considers only one stop bit, regardless of the field NBSTOP, so that
resynchronization between the receiver and the transmitter can occur. Moreover, as soon as the stop bit is
sampled, the receiver starts looking for a new start bit so that resynchronization can also be accomplished when
the transmitter is operating with one stop bit.
Figure 33-7 and Figure 33-8 illustrate start detection and character reception when USART operates in
Asynchronous mode.
Figure 33-7.
Asynchronous Start Detection
Baud Rate
Clock
Sampling
Clock (x16)
RXD
Sampling
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
Start
Detection
RXD
Sampling
1
730
2
3
4
5
6
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
7
0 1
Start
Rejection
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
D0
Sampling
Figure 33-8.
Asynchronous Character Reception
Example: 8-bit, Parity Enabled
Baud Rate
Clock
RXD
Start
Detection
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
samples samples samples samples samples samples samples samples samples samples
D0
33.6.3.3
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity
Bit
Stop
Bit
Synchronous Receiver
In Synchronous mode (SYNC = 1), the receiver samples the RXD signal on each rising edge of the baud rate
clock. If a low level is detected, it is considered as a start. All data bits, the parity bit and the stop bits are sampled
and the receiver waits for the next start bit. Synchronous mode operations provide a high-speed transfer capability.
Configuration fields and bits are the same as in Asynchronous mode.
Figure 33-9 illustrates a character reception in Synchronous mode.
Figure 33-9.
Synchronous Mode Character Reception
Example: 8-bit, Parity Enabled 1 Stop
Baud Rate
Clock
RXD
Sampling
Start
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Stop Bit
Parity Bit
33.6.3.4
Receiver Operations
When a character reception is completed, it is transferred to the Receive Holding register (US_RHR) and the
RXRDY bit in US_CSR rises. If a character is completed while the RXRDY is set, the OVRE (Overrun Error) bit is
set. The last character is transferred into US_RHR and overwrites the previous one. The OVRE bit is cleared by
writing a 1 to the RSTSTA (Reset Status) bit in the US_CR.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
731
Figure 33-10. Receiver Status
Baud Rate
Clock
RXD
Start
D0
Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop Start
D0
Bit Bit Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop
Bit Bit
RSTSTA = 1
Write
US_CR
Read
US_RHR
RXRDY
OVRE
33.6.3.5
Parity
The USART supports five Parity modes that are selected by writing to the PAR field in the US_MR. The PAR field
also enables the Multidrop mode, see Section 33.6.3.6 ”Multidrop Mode”. Even and odd parity bit generation and
error detection are supported.
If even parity is selected, the parity generator of the transmitter drives the parity bit to 0 if a number of 1s in the
character data bit is even, and to 1 if the number of 1s is odd. Accordingly, the receiver parity checker counts the
number of received 1s and reports a parity error if the sampled parity bit does not correspond. If odd parity is
selected, the parity generator of the transmitter drives the parity bit to 1 if a number of 1s in the character data bit
is even, and to 0 if the number of 1s is odd. Accordingly, the receiver parity checker counts the number of received
1s and reports a parity error if the sampled parity bit does not correspond. If the mark parity is used, the parity
generator of the transmitter drives the parity bit to 1 for all characters. The receiver parity checker reports an error
if the parity bit is sampled to 0. If the space parity is used, the parity generator of the transmitter drives the parity bit
to 0 for all characters. The receiver parity checker reports an error if the parity bit is sampled to 1. If parity is
disabled, the transmitter does not generate any parity bit and the receiver does not report any parity error.
Table 33-5 shows an example of the parity bit for the character 0x41 (character ASCII “A”) depending on the
configuration of the USART. Because there are two bits set to 1 in the character value, the parity bit is set to 1
when the parity is odd, or configured to 0 when the parity is even.
Table 33-5.
Parity Bit Examples
Character
Hexadecimal
Binary
Parity Bit
Parity Mode
A
0x41
0100 0001
1
Odd
A
0x41
0100 0001
0
Even
A
0x41
0100 0001
1
Mark
A
0x41
0100 0001
0
Space
A
0x41
0100 0001
None
None
When the receiver detects a parity error, it sets the PARE (Parity Error) bit in the US_CSR. The PARE bit can be
cleared by writing a 1 to the RSTSTA bit the US_CR. Figure 33-11 illustrates the parity bit status setting and
clearing.
732
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 33-11. Parity Error
Baud Rate
Clock
RXD
Start
D0
Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Bad Stop
Parity Bit
Bit
RSTSTA = 1
Write
US_CR
PARE
Parity Error
Detect
Time
Flags
Report
Time
RXRDY
33.6.3.6
Multidrop Mode
If the value 0x6 or 0x07 is written to the PAR field in the US_MR, the USART runs in Multidrop mode. This mode
differentiates the data characters and the address characters. Data is transmitted with the parity bit at 0 and
addresses are transmitted with the parity bit at 1.
If the USART is configured in Multidrop mode, the receiver sets the PARE parity error bit when the parity bit is high
and the transmitter is able to send a character with the parity bit high when a 1 is written to the SENTA bit in the
US_CR.
To handle parity error, the PARE bit is cleared when a 1 is written to the RSTSTA bit in the US_CR.
The transmitter sends an address byte (parity bit set) when SENDA is written to in the US_CR. In this case, the
next byte written to the US_THR is transmitted as an address. Any character written in the US_THR without having
written the command SENDA is transmitted normally with the parity at 0.
33.6.3.7
Transmitter Timeguard
The timeguard feature enables the USART interface with slow remote devices.
The timeguard function enables the transmitter to insert an idle state on the TXD line between two characters. This
idle state actually acts as a long stop bit.
The duration of the idle state is programmed in the TG field of the Transmitter Timeguard register (US_TTGR).
When this field is written to zero no timeguard is generated. Otherwise, the transmitter holds a high level on TXD
after each transmitted byte during the number of bit periods programmed in TG in addition to the number of stop
bits.
As illustrated in Figure 33-12, the behavior of TXRDY and TXEMPTY status bits is modified by the programming of
a timeguard. TXRDY rises only when the start bit of the next character is sent, and thus remains to 0 during the
timeguard transmission if a character has been written in US_THR. TXEMPTY remains low until the timeguard
transmission is completed as the timeguard is part of the current character being transmitted.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
733
Figure 33-12. Timeguard Operations
TG = 4
TG = 4
Baud Rate
Clock
TXD
Start
D0
Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop
Bit Bit
Start
D0
Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop
Bit Bit
Write
US_THR
TXRDY
TXEMPTY
Table 33-6 indicates the maximum length of a timeguard period that the transmitter can handle in relation to the
function of the baud rate.
Table 33-6.
33.6.3.8
Maximum Timeguard Length Depending on Baud Rate
Baud Rate (bit/s)
Bit Time (µs)
Timeguard (ms)
1,200
833
212.50
9,600
104
26.56
14,400
69.4
17.71
19,200
52.1
13.28
28,800
34.7
8.85
38,400
26
6.63
56,000
17.9
4.55
57,600
17.4
4.43
115,200
8.7
2.21
Receiver Time-out
The Receiver Time-out provides support in handling variable-length frames. This feature detects an idle condition
on the RXD line. When a time-out is detected, the bit TIMEOUT in the US_CSR rises and can generate an
interrupt, thus indicating to the driver an end of frame.
The time-out delay period (during which the receiver waits for a new character) is programmed in the TO field of
the Receiver Time-out register (US_RTOR). If the TO field is written to 0, the Receiver Time-out is disabled and no
time-out is detected. The TIMEOUT bit in the US_CSR remains at 0. Otherwise, the receiver loads a 16-bit counter
with the value programmed in TO. This counter is decremented at each bit period and reloaded each time a new
character is received. If the counter reaches 0, the TIMEOUT bit in US_CSR rises. Then, the user can either:
734
Stop the counter clock until a new character is received. This is performed by writing a 1 to the STTTO (Start
Time-out) bit in the US_CR. In this case, the idle state on RXD before a new character is received will not
provide a time-out. This prevents having to handle an interrupt before a character is received and allows
waiting for the next idle state on RXD after a frame is received.
Obtain an interrupt while no character is received. This is performed by writing a 1 to the RETTO (Reload
and Start Time-out) bit in the US_CR. If RETTO is performed, the counter starts counting down immediately
from the value TO. This enables generation of a periodic interrupt so that a user time-out can be handled, for
example when no key is pressed on a keyboard.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
If STTTO is performed, the counter clock is stopped until a first character is received. The idle state on RXD before
the start of the frame does not provide a time-out. This prevents having to obtain a periodic interrupt and enables a
wait of the end of frame when the idle state on RXD is detected.
If RETTO is performed, the counter starts counting down immediately from the value TO. This enables generation
of a periodic interrupt so that a user time-out can be handled, for example when no key is pressed on a keyboard.
Figure 33-13 shows the block diagram of the Receiver Time-out feature.
Figure 33-13. Receiver Time-out Block Diagram
TO
Baud Rate
Clock
1
D
Clock
Q
16-bit Time-out
Counter
16-bit
Value
=
STTTO
Character
Received
RETTO
Load
Clear
TIMEOUT
0
Table 33-7 gives the maximum time-out period for some standard baud rates.
Table 33-7.
33.6.3.9
Maximum Time-out Period
Baud Rate (bit/s)
Bit Time (µs)
Time-out (ms)
600
1,667
109,225
1,200
833
54,613
2,400
417
27,306
4,800
208
13,653
9,600
104
6,827
14,400
69
4,551
19,200
52
3,413
28,800
35
2,276
38,400
26
1,704
56,000
18
1,170
57,600
17
1,138
200,000
5
328
Framing Error
The receiver is capable of detecting framing errors. A framing error happens when the stop bit of a received
character is detected at level 0. This can occur if the receiver and the transmitter are fully desynchronized.
A framing error is reported on the FRAME bit of US_CSR. The FRAME bit is asserted in the middle of the stop bit
as soon as the framing error is detected. It is cleared by writing a 1 to the RSTSTA bit in the US_CR.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
735
Figure 33-14. Framing Error Status
Baud Rate
Clock
RXD
Start
D0
Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop
Bit Bit
RSTSTA = 1
Write
US_CR
FRAME
RXRDY
33.6.3.10
Transmit Break
The user can request the transmitter to generate a break condition on the TXD line. A break condition drives the
TXD line low during at least one complete character. It appears the same as a 0x00 character sent with the parity
and the stop bits at 0. However, the transmitter holds the TXD line at least during one character until the user
requests the break condition to be removed.
A break is transmitted by writing a 1 to the STTBRK bit in the US_CR. This can be performed at any time, either
while the transmitter is empty (no character in either the Shift register or in US_THR) or when a character is being
transmitted. If a break is requested while a character is being shifted out, the character is first completed before the
TXD line is held low.
Once STTBRK command is requested further STTBRK commands are ignored until the end of the break is
completed.
The break condition is removed by writing a 1 to the STPBRK bit in the US_CR. If the STPBRK is requested before
the end of the minimum break duration (one character, including start, data, parity and stop bits), the transmitter
ensures that the break condition completes.
The transmitter considers the break as though it is a character, i.e., the STTBRK and STPBRK commands are
processed only if the TXRDY bit in US_CSR is to 1 and the start of the break condition clears the TXRDY and
TXEMPTY bits as if a character is processed.
Writing US_CR with both STTBRK and STPBRK bits to 1 can lead to an unpredictable result. All STPBRK
commands requested without a previous STTBRK command are ignored. A byte written into the Transmit Holding
register while a break is pending, but not started, is ignored.
After the break condition, the transmitter returns the TXD line to 1 for a minimum of 12 bit times. Thus, the
transmitter ensures that the remote receiver detects correctly the end of break and the start of the next character.
If the timeguard is programmed with a value higher than 12, the TXD line is held high for the timeguard period.
After holding the TXD line for this period, the transmitter resumes normal operations.
Figure 33-15 illustrates the effect of both the Start Break (STTBRK) and Stop Break (STPBRK) commands on the
TXD line.
736
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
Figure 33-15. Break Transmission
Baud Rate
Clock
TXD
Start
D0
Bit
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Parity Stop
Bit Bit
STTBRK = 1
Break Transmission
End of Break
STPBRK = 1
Write
US_CR
TXRDY
TXEMPTY
33.6.3.11
Receive Break
The receiver detects a break condition when all data, parity and stop bits are low. This corresponds to detecting a
framing error with data to 0x00, but FRAME remains low.
When the low stop bit is detected, the receiver asserts the RXBRK bit in US_CSR. This bit may be cleared by
writing a 1 to the RSTSTA bit in the US_CR.
An end of receive break is detected by a high level for at least 2/16 of a bit period in Asynchronous operating mode
or one sample at high level in Synchronous operating mode. The end of break detection also asserts the RXBRK
bit.
33.6.3.12
Hardware Handshaking
The USART features a hardware handshaking out-of-band flow control. The RTS and CTS pins are used to
connect with the remote device, as shown in Figure 33-16.
Figure 33-16. Connection with a Remote Device for Hardware Handshaking
USART
Remote
Device
TXD
RXD
RXD
TXD
CTS
RTS
RTS
CTS
Setting the USART to operate with hardware handshaking is performed by writing the USART_MODE field in
US_MR to the value 0x2.
The USART behavior when hardware handshaking is enabled is the same as the behavior in standard
Synchronous or Asynchronous mode, except that the receiver drives the RTS pin as described below and the level
on the CTS pin modifies the behavior of the transmitter as described below. Using this mode requires using the
PDC channel for reception. The transmitter can handle hardware handshaking in any case.
Figure 33-17 shows how the receiver operates if hardware handshaking is enabled. The RTS pin is driven high if
the receiver is disabled or if the status RXBUFF (Receive Buffer Full) coming from the PDC channel is high.
Normally, the remote device does not start transmitting while its CTS pin (driven by RTS) is high. As soon as the
receiver is enabled, the RTS falls, indicating to the remote device that it can start transmitting. Defining a new
buffer in the PDC clears the status bit RXBUFF and, as a result, asserts the pin RTS low.
SAM G53G / SAM G53N [DATASHEET]
Atmel-11240F-ATARM-SAM-G53G-SAM-G53N-Datasheet_24-Jul-15
737
Figure 33-17. Receiver Behavior when Operating with Hardware Handshaking
RXD
RXEN = 1
RXDIS = 1
Write
US_CR
RTS
RXBUFF
Figure 33-18 shows how the transmitter operates if hardware handshaking is enabled. The CTS pin disables the
transmitter. If a character is being processed, the transmitter is disabled only after the completion of the current
character and transmission of the next character happens as soon as the pin CTS falls.
Figure 33-18. Transmitter Behavior when Operating with Hardware Handshaking
CTS
TXD
33.6.4 ISO7816 Mode
The USART features an ISO7816-compatible operating mode.